MXM700 - 550n MS PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM700/S2E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
MX-M550N/M550U
MX-M620N/M620U
MODEL MX-M700N/M700U
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . A -1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . B -1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [C] DSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C -1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D -1
* For unpacking and installation, refer to [E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION. . E -1
the installation manual (00ZAR700//I1E).
[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . F -1
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 [G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . G -1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 [H] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . H -1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 [ i] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i -1
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1 [J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . J -1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 [K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . K -1
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 [L] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . L -1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1 [M] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 [N] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . N -1

[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . O -1
[P] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P -1
[Q] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q -1
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION . . . . . R -1
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . S -1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A- 1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [B] OPERATION PANEL
3. Installing site recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . B- 1
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 2
1. Different points of MX-M550/620/700 series from 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B- 2
AR-M550/620/700 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 [C] DSPF SECTION
2. Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . C- 1
3. Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 5
4. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 6
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C- 19
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 1 [D] SCANNER SECTION
2. Functional specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . D- 1
3. Environmental conditions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 11 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 4
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D- 11
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 2 [E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . E - 1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 2
* For unpacking and installation, refer to the installation man- 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 2
ual (00ZAR700//I1E). 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 8
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE [F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . 5- 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . F - 1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 5
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 8
2. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 17
3. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 [G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
4. Datails of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 2 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . G- 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G- 5
[7] SIMULATION 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G- 5
1. Adjustment value/Simulation and storage data. . . 7- 1 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G- 14
2. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 2
[H] DUPLEX SECTION
3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . H- 1
4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H- 2
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H- 4
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H- 12
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4 [ i ] LSU SECTION
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . i - 1
[9] MAINTENANCE 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 2
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i - 2
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4 [J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 13 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . J - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 3
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 4
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 1
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 9
2. Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 2
3. Necessary items for Flash ROM version-up . . . . . 10- 2 [K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
4. Flash ROM version-up method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 2 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . K - 1
5. Turning OFF the power during the version-up 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 2
procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 5 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 3
6. Version-up procedure flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 5 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 4
[L] DEVELOPING SECTION
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . L - 1
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 2
2. Power line chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 5
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 2
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 8
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 5
4. Signal name list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 18
[M] TRANSFER SECTION
[12] OTHERS 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . M- 1
1. System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 2
2. Web setting service mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 8 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 3
3. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 10 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M- 5
CONTENTS
[N] FUSING SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . N- 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N- 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N- 3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N- 12
[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . O- 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O- 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O- 2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O- 7
[P] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P- 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 14
[Q] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q- 1
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R- 1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R- 6
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S- 1
MX-M700N
NOTE FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
following points.
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
• Gas tube
• Lightning conductor
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious • A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
danger to life or a serious injury could result. grounding object by the authorities.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or • Grounding wire for telephone line
a damage to properties could result. 5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
1. Precautions for servicing
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, 6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
except when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
may drop inside the machine.
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
do not perform servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
It may cause an electric shock.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 3. Installing site recommendations
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. Do not install the machine at the following sites.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or perature and humidity.
an injury. Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink ing paper jam or copy dirt.
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with described later.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,
toner may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag. 2) Places of too much vibrations
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions. It may cause a breakdown.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
MX-M700N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

3) Poorly ventilated areas 7) Place too close to a wall
An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it. All machines require clean intake and exhaust of air. If the
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so intake and exhaust of air are not proper, failure of the machine
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of will occur.
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
6-1/8"
(15cm)
23-5/8"
(60cm)
8) Unstable or uneven surfaces

4) Place of direct sunlight. Placement of the machine will affect performance.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may An unstable machine may fall over and cause an injury.
undergo qualitative change. Use the proper optional desk unit. When using the optional
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt. desk, be sure to lock the adjusters and casters.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6) Place of too much dust

When dust enters the machine, it may affect the operation of
the machine.
MX-M700N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

MX-M700N
(2) Strengthened Frame Structure

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Highly Rigid Frame
Improved stability with less machine distortion, and both rigidity and
1. Different points of MX-M550/620/700
lightweight been achieved.
series from AR-M550/620/700 series
(3) Energy Saving with Unique External Heat Roller
• Adopted new operation panel with 8.9 inch LCD Fusing System
• Added web roller and motor for web roller in Fusing section Newly Developed External Heating System
• Added firmware version-up using USB device by Sim 49-1 1) High reliability with stabilized fusing ability
• Eliminated parallel port 2) Shortened warm up time before start copying
3) Achievement of energy efficiency that clears 2006 Rationaliza-
2. Main Features tion in Energy Use Law
External Heat Roller Fusing System
A. Single Pass Duplex Scanner
• Max. 76 cpm for duplex scanning
• Best-in-class 150-sheet feeder
Thin Steel Fusing
B. Security Solution Roller
Data encryption + data clear with random number
• Network security Low Heat Capacity
Rubber Roller
C. New Toner
• Higher density/Finer particles High Efficiency Heater External Heating
Roller
D. Inner Output
• Separate copy output pages from printer output pages B. Network tandem
E. Enhance the solutions such as document With Network tandem function, users can output one job on two
filing and other features. network connected engines. Productivity of large-volume copying/
printing can be dramatically improved by high-speed output of up to
F. Design for High Reliability 110cpm (55cpm model), 124cpm (62cpm model) and 140cpm
• Robust frame designed by highly accurate CAE analysis (70cpm model).
G. Improved Performance Scan original from

document glass or DSPF
• Network Tandem Copy/Print Copy
• High-speed Processor
• New high-speed ASIC
H. Fax feature
For replacement of mid/low speed devices (up to area)
I. Large Capacity Finisher

Finisher capacity: 4,000-sheet
3. Features
A. High reliability
Send print
(1) Improved Image Quality/Paper Transport data from PC
Full-Grip Path Design
Stable paper feeding realized by rollers that firmly grip paper
Small-Diameter Belt Transfer System Print
With reduced effect to paper types, drum paper release is stabilized
and transfer efficiency is improved
Easier Paper Jam Fixation with Open Paper Path
Jammed paper on vertical paper path can be easily removed by
opening the left side cover, which shortens time to fix paper jam
* Users can use the function simply by connecting the engines to

network. This means no Tandem Kit (Connection cable) neces-
sary.
MX-M700N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

C. 2-Way Security Solution
ONLY-ONE
Way-in : Network Security

Allow access of authorized network address only
Print data and prevent unauthorized access from outside.
(Filtering of network address)
Copy data Print data
Scan data Fax data
Way-out : HDD Data Clear + Encryption

Data clear by plural writing random number.
Cannot be analyzed even when peeped by encryption.
(1) Data Security coexisting with Document Filing
Data Security
Document Filing/Quick File Document Filing/Quick File

Original data Original data
Print data HDD memory Print data HDD memory
Install DSK Fax data Encrypt before storing
Fax data
Store
Store
Raw/compressed data Encrypted data
Recall (Job settings) PIN printing

Password input Recall (Job settings)
PIN printing
Password input
Security is assured by encrypting the data to be stored!

D. Document Filing
Document filing is a function that enables users to share and reuse
data stored in the engine's HDD by digitalizing various information
sent/scanned from printer, fax, PC or MFP that are connected by
network.
G3 Fax <Document Filing initial screen>

Internet-Fax
Copy
Scan PC
Send E-mail
Print
FAX
Print data
Send
<List of data stored in Main folder>

PC i-FAX G3 Fax
HDD Send E-mail
MX-M550N/U Internet Fax

MX-M620N/U
MX-M620N/U
MX-M700N/U Telephone line
Network/LAN
PC Fax
PC i-Fax
Fax data
i-Fax data
PC-Fax is like printing

Word data etc. onto fax
paper.

4. CONFIGURATION
A. Main unit and option lineup
(1) Option lineup
Saddle stitch finisher

Punch unit 55 / 62 / 70 ppm A4 LCC
Inserter
A3 LCC
Finisher
Facsimile
expansion kit FAX momory (8MB)
Network Network SHARPDESK

expansion scanner 1 (5, 10, 50, 100)
kit expansion kit license kit
Application Application
communication integration
Barcode font kit module module kit
55 / 62 / 70 ppm
External
Printer function Internet FAX
account
Standard expansion kit
PS3 expansion kit module
256MB expansion
memory board
Data security kit

(2) Option combinations
STD: Standard provision OPT: Installable u : Not installable
Option Machine model

Copier model Network printer Product
Section Remarks
Item MX-M550U/ MX-M550N/ key
M620U/M700U M620N/M700N
Paper feed system Large capacity tray (AR-LC6) OPT OPT (A4 / 8.5 u 11)
Large capacity tray (AR-LC7) OPT OPT (A3 / 11 u 17)
Paper exit system Finisher (AR-F15) OPT OPT
Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) OPT OPT
Inserter (AR-CF2) OPT OPT
Punch module (AR-PN4A) OPT OPT (2 holes)
Punch module (AR-PN4B) OPT OPT (3 holes)
Punch module (AR-PN4C) OPT OPT (4 holes)
Punch module (AR-PN4D) OPT OPT (4 holes, wide)
Electrical system Printer expansion kit STD STD
(Printer controller) Network expantion kit (MX-NBX1) OPT STD Yes
Expansion memory (AR-SM5) OPT OPT (256MB)
PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) OPT OPT Yes
Barcode font kit (AR-PF1) OPT OPT
Software Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1) OPT OPT Yes
Sharpdesk 1 license kit (MX-USX1) OPT OPT
Sharpdesk 5 license kit (MX-USX5) OPT OPT
Sharpdesk 10 license kit (MX-US10) OPT OPT
Sharpdesk 50 license kit (MX-UX50) OPT OPT
Sharpdesk 100 license kit (MX-USA0) OPT OPT
FAX system Internet FAX expansion kit (MX-FWX1) OPT OPT Yes
Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX8) OPT OPT
FAX expansion memory (8MB) (AR-MM9) OPT OPT
Other options Application integration module kit (MX-AMX1) OPT OPT Yes
Application communication module (MX-AMX2) OPT OPT Yes
External account module (MX-AMX3) OPT OPT Yes
B. Block diagram
Telephone Line DSPF Unit (CIS) Operating Section
Image Scanner (reading) Section (CCD)

Fax unit (Option)
MFP Control PWB Scanner Control PWB

Engine Control Section
(PCU PWB)
USB Network
Port Port
Scanner(writing)
(LSU) Section
Toner Bottle
HDD
Drum Section
Fusing Section Toner Hopper
Transfer Section Developer Section
Paper Exit and switch ADU Section Manual Paper

back Section Feed Tray
Paper Transport Section
Finisher Punch Unit Inserter Paper Feed Tray 1 Paper Feed Tray 2
(Option) (Option) (Option)
Large Capacity
Paper Feed Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit
DC Power Unit (Option)
AC Power Unit Paper Feed Tray 4

MX-M700N
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Basic specifications
A. Base engine (8) Image defect
(1) Type a. Void area/Image loss
Type Console Void area/Image Lead edge: 40mm or less

Copy mode Monochrome digital loss Rear edge: 4.0mm or less
(Electronic photo graphic) FR total : 8.0mm or less
(2) Engine speed (ppm) (9) Power source
Paper size 55ppm 62ppm 70ppm 100V series 200V series

A4, 8.5 ✕ 11 55ppm 62ppm 70ppm Voltage 100 to 127V 200 to 240V
A4R, 8.5 ✕ 11R 40ppm 45ppm 48ppm Current 55 ppm 16A 8A
A5R/5.5 ✕ 8.5R 62 ppm 16A 8A
40ppm 45ppm 48ppm 70 ppm 16A 8A
5.5 ✕ 8.5-R
B5 55ppm 62ppm 70ppm Frequency 50/60Hz
B5R, 7.25 ✕ 10.5-R 40ppm 45ppm 48ppm Power source code Dedicated outlet
B4/8.5 ✕ 14 35ppm 39ppm 45ppm Power switch 2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover;
A3/11 ✕ 17 30ppm 34ppm 39ppm Seconday switch: on side of the main unit)
Extra 30ppm 34ppm 39ppm (10) Power consumption
Postcard Since the next paper is fed after completion
of paper exit outside the machine, it 100V series 200V series
depends on the machine composition. Low power consumption 55 ppm : max. 261.75W
(3) Engine composition mode 62 ppm : max. 288.7W
70 ppm : max. 319.5W
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: I80mm) Maximum rated power
1.80KW (*) 1.84KW (*)
consumption
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Reset time from low power
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush 30 sec.
mode
development
Power consumption in the
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method 95W or less
off mode
Transfer system Static electricity transfer
Shift time to off mode 90 min.
(Transfer belt method)
Cleaning system Counter blade * : With full options
Fusing system Heat roller (11) Dimensions
Fused cleaning system WEB cleaning method
Toner supply method Toner supply by the front cover open Outer dimensions 728 ✕ 679 ✕ 1050mm
Waste toner disposal Toner cartridge collection (Height: Floor to Glass surface)
(No toner recycling system) 728 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
(4) Engine resolution (Height: Floor to SPF top)
Footprint 728 (W) ✕ 679 (D) mm
Resolution (Writing) Copy : 600 ✕ 600dpi (12) Weight
Printer:
PCL: 600 ✕ 600dpi, 300 ✕ 300dpi Main unit Approx. 185kg / 408lbs
PS : 600 ✕ 600dpi
Smoothing Copy: None
(13) Dimensions occupied by Machine
Printer:
Model of 55/62 sheets: Main unit 1264 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
Equivalent to1200dpi ✕ 600dpi (PCL/PS) Main unit + A4-LCC installed 1340 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
Model of 70 sheets : None Main unit + finisher/
1797 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
Gradation [Writing] 2 gradations Saddle finisher installed
Main unit + A4-LCC + finisher/
(5) Warmup 1873 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
Saddle finisher installed
Main unit + Inserter + Finisher/
After turned on 120 seconds or less 2079 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
Saddle finisher
Pre-heat YES
Main unit + A4-LCC + Inserter +
2155 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
(6) Jam recovery time Finisher/Saddle finisher installed
Main unit + A3-LCC installed 1660 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
Jam recovery time Approx. 30 sec. (After leaving the machine Main unit + A3-LCC + finisher/
2193 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
with the side cover open for 60sec, in the Saddle finisher installed
standard condition and the polygon stop Main unit + A3-LCC + inserter +
conditions.) 2475 ✕ 679 ✕ 1192mm
finisher/ Saddle finisher installed
(7) Printable area
A3 289 ✕ 412mm 11 ✕ 17 271 ✕ 424mm

B4 242 ✕ 356mm 8.5 ✕ 14 208 ✕ 348mm
A4 202 ✕ 289mm 8.5 ✕ 13 208 ✕ 322mm
B5 174 ✕ 249mm 8.5 ✕ 11 208 ✕ 271mm
A5 140 ✕ 202mm 5.5 ✕ 8.5 132 ✕ 208mm
7.25 ✕ 10.5 183 ✕ 259mm 8K 262 ✕ 382mm
Postcard 92 ✕ 140mm 16K 187 ✕ 262mm
MX-M700N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
B. Paper feed, paper transport, and paper exit section
(1) [Paper feed section]
Type 4-stage paper feed tray

(Parallel LCC + 2 tray + Multi manual paper feed)
Paper feed method Paper is fed from the above by the front loading system.
Dehumidification heater Service parts
(2) Paper feed tray of the main unit

a. Tray1 (Left tray in the parallel LCC)
Allowable Paper Tray lift time

Paper Paper size Paper
Paper size change paper type and capacity
Paper size type setting when Paper type remaining
method weight for (Standard Up Down
setting shipping detection
paper feed paper)
AB (Europe, SCA): Size setting by user YES Inch: 8.5 ✕ 11 Plain paper: 800 Normal paper, Enable Within Free
A4, 8.5 ✕ 11 AB: A4 60 to 105g/m2 sheets printed paper, (Paper 12sec fall
AB (Other): (16 to 28lbs) (80g/m2) recycled empty and (*)
A4, 8.5 ✕ 11 paper, 3 steps)
Inch: 8.5 ✕ 11, A4 letterhead,
(Supported by the punched
guide change and paper, color
the software setting) paper
* Time required from tray insertion to empty detection when paper is empty.
b. Tray2 (Right tray in the parallel LCC)
Allowable Paper Tray lift time

Paper Paper size Paper
Paper size change paper type and capacity
Paper size type setting when Paper type remaining
method weight for (Standard Up Down
setting shipping detection
paper feed paper)
AB (Europe, SCA): A4: User can change YES Inch: 8.5 ✕ 11 Plain paper: 1200 Normal paper, Enable Within Free
A4, 8.5 ✕ 11 8.5 ✕ 11: AB: A4 60 to 105g/m2 sheets printed paper, (Paper 12sec fall
AB (Other): User can change (16K is not (16 to 28lbs) (80g/m2) recycled empty and (*)
A4, B5, 8.5 ✕ 11 B5: supported) paper, 3 steps)
Inch: 8.5 ✕ 11, A4 Size setting by letterhead,
(Supported by the serviceman (B5 available punched
guide change and through bolt fixing and paper, color
the software setting) setting by serviceman) paper
* : Time required from tray insertion to empty detection when paper is empty.
c. Tray3 (multi-purpose tray)
Paper size Paper Paper size Allowable paper type Paper capacity Paper
Paper size change type setting when and weight for paper Normal Paper type remaining
OHP
method setting shipping feed paper detection
Auto AB: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, Guide YES Shipped with Plain paper: 500 sheets 40 Normal paper, Enable
B5R, A5R, 8.5 ✕ 13 adjustment the paper 60 to 105g/m2 (80g/m2) sheets printed paper, (Paper
Auto inch: 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, by user guide width at (16 to 28lbs) recycled paper, empty and
8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, Max. Thick paper: letterhead, 3 steps)
7.25 ✕ 10.5R, 5.5 ✕ 8.5R 106 to 128g/m2 punched paper,
Manual: 8K, 16K, 16KR (29 to 34lbs) color paper,
Special size 176g/m2 (65lbs) label paper,
:[Vertical] Cover thick paper, OHP,
139 to 297mm (5.5 to 11-5/8) 205g/m2 tab paper
[Horizontal] (110lbs) Index(*)
139 to 431mm (5.5 to 17)
(Tab paper is of A4; limited to
tab width 12mm to 20mm/8.5 ✕
11; tab width 6.1mm to 17mm.)
* 105g/m2 or above, A4/8.5 ✕ 11 or less. For 128g/m2 or above, horizontal feed only.
d. Tray 4 (500 sheets paper feed tray)
Paper size Paper Paper size Paper capacity Paper

Allowable paper type and
Paper size change type setting when (Standard Paper type empty
weight for paper feed
method setting shipping paper) detection
Auto AB: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, Guide YES Shipped with Plain paper: 500 sheets Normal paper, Enable
B5R, 8.5 ✕ 13 adjustment the paper 60 to 105g/m2 (16 to 28lbs) (80g/m2) recycled paper, (Paper
Auto inch: 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, by user guide width at Thick paper: printed paper, empty and
8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, Max. 106 to 128g/m2 (29 to 34lbs) letterhead, 3 steps)
7.25 ✕ 10.5R 176g/m2 (65lbs) Cover punched paper,
Manual: 8K, 16K, 16KR 205g/m2 (110lbs)Index color paper,
Custom size: None (*1),(*2) thick paper
* 1: 105g/m2 or above, A4/8.5 ✕ 11 or less. For 128g/m2 or above, horizontal feed only.
* 2: For multi copy and back surface copy, single feed only.
(3) Bypass tray
Paper size Paper Paper

Allowable paper type and weight Paper capacity
Paper size change type Paper type empty
for paper feed (Standard paper)
method setting detection
Auto AB: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, Guide YES Thin paper: Plain paper: Normal paper, YES
B5R, A5R, 8.5 ✕ 13, Postcard adjustment by 52 to 59g/m2 (14 to 15lbs) 100 sheets recycled paper,
Auto inch: 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, user (single feed only) (standard paper: printed paper,
8.5 ✕ 13, 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, Plain paper: 80g/m2) punched paper,
7.25 ✕ 10.5R, 5.5 ✕ 8.5R 60 to 105g/m2 (16 to 28lbs) Postcard: 20 sheets color paper,
Manual: 8K, 16K, 16KR Thick paper: OHP: 20 sheets letterhead, thin
Custom size: 106 to 128g/m2 (29 to 34lbs) paper, label paper,
[Vertical] 176g/m2 (65 - lbs) Cover thick paper, OHP,
100 to 297mm (3.9 to 11-5/8) 205g/m2 (110lbs) Index (*) tab paper (tab width
[Horizontal] 20mm or less),
139 to 432mm (5.5 to 17) Postcard
* 105g/m2 or above, A4/8.5 ✕ 11 or less. For 128g/m2 or above, horizontal feed only.
(4) Duplex (5) Paper exit size / type
System Non stack system Paper exit position/ Main unit top surface face-down paper exit
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, system
16KR, 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, 8.5 ✕ 13.4, 8.5 ✕ 13, Paper exit capacity 250 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, 8.5 ✕ 5.5R, 7.25 ✕ 10.5R Paper exit paper size/kind All kinds of paper which can be fed
Type and weight of Plain paper: 60 to 105g/m2 (16 to 28lbs) Remaining paper None
paper which can be Thick paper: 106 to 128g/m2 (29 to 34lbs) detection
passed 176g/m2 (65 - lbs) Cover Paper exit paper full Provided
205g/m2 (110lbs) Index detection
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
letterhead, punched paper, color paper, thick
paper
C. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation
copy mode
Platen Magnification ratio 25 to 99 Normal ratio 101 to 171 172 to 400
Scan resolution (dpi) 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ (600 ✕ 2)
DSPF Magnification ratio 25 to 99 Normal ratio 101 to 117 118 to 200
Scan When in single copy 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 600
resolution 600x 600x
SPF duplex (front) CCD 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600
(dpi) (600 ✕ 2) (600 ✕ 2)
SPF duplex (back) CIS 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600
When in the Fax send mode and the scanner FAX broadcast mode
Select mode Standard Fine text Super fine test Ultra fine text 600dpi send (*)
Input and send Input resolution: OC 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600
resolution (dpi) Input resolution: DSPF simplex 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367
Input resolution: DSPF duplex (front) CCD 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600
Input resolution: DSPF duplex (back) CIS 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300
Transmission FAX 203.2 ✕ 97.8 203.2 ✕ 195.6 203.2 ✕ 391 406.4 ✕ 391 —
resolution Internet FAX 200 ✕ 100 200 ✕ 200 200 ✕ 400 400 ✕ 400 600 ✕ 600
Scanner mode
Select mode 200 ✕ 200 300 ✕ 300 400 ✕ 400 600 ✕ 600
Input and send Input resolution: OC 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600
resolution (dpi) Input resolution: DSPF simplex 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367 600 ✕ 367
Input resolution: DSPF duplex (front) CCD 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600 600 ✕ 600
Input resolution: DSPF duplex (back) CIS 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300 600 ✕ 300
Transmission resolution 200 ✕ 200 300 ✕ 300 400 ✕ 400 600 ✕ 600
Exposure lamp None-electrode xenon lamp (Front), LED (Back)
Scanning 256 gradations (8bit)
Printing 2 gradations (1bit)
* Except for FAX sending
(2) Document table 2. Functional specifications
Scanning area 297 ✕ 431.8mm A. Copy functions
Original Left bottom reference
(1) Copy speed (Continuous copy speed) (cpm)
standard
position a. Tray 1 to 4, LCC (Reduction/Normal/Enlargement)
Detection Provided
detection size Automatic detection Copy mode Paper size 55ppm 62ppm 70ppm
(Supported by changeover of the software destination of Original table A4, 8.5 ✕ 11 55 62 70
one kind of the detection unit.) mode A4R, 8.5 ✕ 11R 40 45 48
Inch series-1 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, A5R/5.5 ✕ 8.5R,
40 45 48
5.5 ✕ 8.5 5.5 ✕ 8.5-R
Inch series-2 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 13, 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, B5 55 62 70
5.5 ✕ 8.5 B5R, 7.25 ✕ 10.5-R 40 45 48
AB series-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5 B4/8.5 ✕ 14 35 39 45
AB series-2 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 216 ✕ 330 A3/11 ✕ 17 30 34 39
AB series-3 B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR Extra 30 34 39
Manual setting fixed size input: Postcard Since the next paper is fed after
Min. : 64 ✕ 64 to Max.297 ✕ 432mm completion of paper exit outside
Manual Provided the machine, it depends on the
detection size machine composition.
setting
(2) First copy time
Dehumidificati Service parts
on heater
Original Cover
(Scanner 55ppm 62ppm 70ppm
/DSPF
section)
Original Cover 4.0 seconds or less 3.5 seconds or less
(3) Automatic document feeder DSPF 6.2 seconds or less 5.7 seconds or less
Type DSPF: Duplex surface scan and feed unit * Measurement conditions: Feeding A4/8.5 ✕11 paper from the
Scan speed When in single copy When in duplex copy main unit tray. Polygon in rotation.
Copy 65 sheets/min 76 pages/min (3) Job speed
(600 ✕ 300 dpi, 1bit) (600 ✕ 300dpi, 1bit)
Fax 46 sheets/min 48 sheets/min a. BLI standards
(Normal text, 1bit) (Normal text, 1bit)
55ppm 62ppm 70ppm
Scanner 59 sheets/min 67 sheets/min
(200 ✕ 200dpi, 1bit) (200 ✕ 200dpi, 1bit) S to S 50.1cpm (91%) 56.4cpm (91%) 63.0cpm (90%)
Internet 46 sheets/min 48 sheets/min S to D 49.0cpm (89%) 53.3cpm (86%) 58.8cpm (84%)
FAX (200 ✕ 100dpi, 1bit) (200 ✕ 100dpi, 1bit) D to D 51.7cpm (94%) 57.0cpm (92%) 63.0cpm (90%)
Original standard Center reference * S to S: A4/8 ✕ 11 documents 10 sheets, copy 5 sets
position
* S to D: A4/8 ✕ 11 documents 10 sheets, copy 5 sets
Document size Automatic detection
Inch series-1: * D to D: A4/8 ✕ 11 documents 10 sheets (20 pages), copy 5 sets
11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, 8.5 ✕ 5.5, (4) Continuous copy
A4
Inch series-2 : Multi max. quantity 999 sheets
11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 13, 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, 8.5 ✕ 5.5,
A4 (5) Resolution
AB series-1/-2:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 13 Scan resolution 600 ✕ 600dpi
AB series-3 : Writing resolution 600 ✕ 600dpi
8K, A4, A4R, B4, 16K, 16KR, A5, 8.5 ✕ 13
(6) Copy document
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper)
enabled
Document size Max. A3
Manual setting Min. 64 ✕ 64 to Max.297 ✕ 432mm
Document type Sheet/Book original
(Scan position: Center reference)
Document weight 50 to 128g/m2 (7) Copy magnification ratio
14 to 34lbs, 65 lbs Cover (Equivalent of 176g/m2),
110 lbs Index (Equivalent of 205g/m2) Copy magnification AB series: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
Max. loading Max. 150 sheets (80g/m2) or Max. 19.5mm ratio 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
capacity of Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
documents 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
Zoom 25 to 400% (25 to 200% for DSPF)
Preset magnification 4
D. Fuser section ratio
(1) Type (8) Density, copy image quality processing
System Heat roller pressure system Exposure mode Binary: Text (auto/manual), Text/Photo, photo,
auto
Number of manual 9 steps
steps
Toner save mode Provided
(9) Paper size B. Image send function
Paper Standard size (1) Mode
Standard size
type Min. Max.
Scanner Scan to E-mail
AB A6 (A6R) A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
A3 Scan to Desktop
series Postcard 8K, 16K, 16KR, Postcard
(Scan data send without depending on the IP address under
Inch 11 ✕ 17, 8.5 ✕ 14, 8.5 ✕ 13, the DHPC environment)
series 8.5 ✕ 5.5 11 ✕ 17 8.5 ✕ 11, 8.5 ✕ 11R, Scan to FTP
7.25 ✕ 10.5R, 5.5 ✕ 8.5R Scan to Folder (SMB)
(10) Copy functions Scan to e-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Function Automatic paper selection Yes Scan to FTP with Meta
(Special Automatic magnification Scan to SMB with Meta
function) Yes Fax Fax
ratio selection
Vertical/horizontal Fax to E-mail (inbound Routing)
independent Yes Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
magnification ratio Internet Internet Fax (Supported full mode)
Paper type select Yes Fax Internet Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Internet Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail
Auto tray switching Yes
(Document Admin) (*)
Rotation copy Yes
Electronic sort Yes * Conforming to PC-FAX/PC-internet fax
Rotation sort Yes (Europe, SCA, Dealer area) (2) Image send function (Push from the main unit)
Job reservation Yes (99 items)
Program call/register Yes (10 items) a. Support system
Document filing Yes
Item Scanner Internet Fax
Preheat function Yes
Corresponding SMTP POP server
(Conditions set up
server/protocol FTP(TCP/IP) SMTP server
by system setting)
SMB ESMTP server
Auto power shut off Yes
function (Conditions set up SMTP, POP3 and FTP support SSL. (Web support)
by system setting)
b. Support image
User management (Dept.
Yes (500 users)
management) Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
Process control Yes File format TIFF, PDF TIFF-FX (TIFF-F) —
Indefinite document size Compression • Non- MH, MMR MH, MR,
Yes
input system compression MMR, JBIG
Indefinite paper size input Yes (Tray 3/manual paper feed) • G3
Mixed document feeder Yes (MIX only) (1-dimensional)
Binding margin Yes (Left/Right) = MH (Modified
Border erase/Center Yes Huffman)
erase (Border/Center/Border+Center) • G4
2 in 1 Yes = MMR
Tandem copy Yes (Modified MR)
(Network interface is required) c. Image process
Cover/Insert paper/Tab
Yes
insert paper Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
OHP insert paper Yes half tone
Equivalent of 256 steps
Tab copy Yes reproduction
2in1/4in1 Yes (Centering provided) Density
Auto + 5 steps
Card shot Yes (Centering provided) adjustment
Center binding Yes (Centering provided) Image quality
Half tone ON/OFF
Book copy Yes selection
Duplex copy system Resolution 200 ✕ 200dpi Standard Standard
Yes (depends on (200 ✕ 100dpi) (203.2
switch
file format/ (middle tone not ✕ 97.8dpi)
Large volume document Yes (Max. 10000 sheets)
transmission allowed) (middle tone
mode Magnification ratio/ Density/
method) not allowed)
Paper can be changed for every
bundle. Fine Fine
(200 ✕ 200dpi) (203.2
Black-white reversion Yes (except UK)
✕ 195.6dpi)
Mirror image Yes
300 ✕ 300 dpi Super fine Super fine
Date print Yes
(200 ✕ 400dpi) (203.2
Stamp Yes ✕ 391dpi)
Page print Yes 400 ✕ 400 dpi Ultra fine Ultra fine
Character print Yes (400 ✕ 400dpi) (406.4
✕ 391dpi)
600 ✕ 600 dpi 600 ✕ 600dpi —
d. Address specification • When broadcasting of the internet FAX and the scanner, the res-
olution is that of the internet FAX.
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax
• The compression type when broadcasting depends on the con-
Address Specified by one-touch, group, or direct address input.
forming of the system setting.
specification Input from the soft keyboard (Scanner/Internet FAX)
Input the 10-key (Fax) f. Send function
Selection from LDAP server
Resend
Memory transmission —
Quick
When the upper
Setting of No
limit value is set, Yes
default address
memory send is
Number of One- Max. total 999 items (of which 200 items can be performed.
touch address assigned to FTP, desktop and/or SMB)
Onhook — Yes
key registration
Quick online send — Yes
Inbound Routing 50 items
Direct transmission — Only in
List
Onhook
Inbound routing 1000 items
Automatic reduction Yes
addresses
send (A3oB4,
Sender Number/ 500 items —
A3oA4,
Address
B4oA4
Registration
Rotation send Yes (Manual) Yes (Auto)
(Inbound
Routing) Zoom send Yes (Zooming of standard size to standard size
only. (There are combinations that cannot be
Number of Number of Group (1 key) address registration : Max.
rotated.))
Group (1 key) 500 items
address Recall Error — Yes
registtation mode Busy — — Yes
Program 8 items The conditions of recall number and time can be
Direct address Input from the soft keyboard Entry by 10- set with the system setting.
input key, # key, * Book document send Yes
key Long document send Yes (Max.800mm)
Chain dial Yes (pause File division send Yes —
—
key) Send size limit Yes —
Resend Call up nearest address which are specified as a single Stamp function Yes
destination No. of registration
Max. 999 items
Shortcut for Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of items of senders
address addresses. Address Confirmation Yes
selection (quick Function (Prevention — (Soft
key) of mis-send) switch)
CC/BCC
Yes — g. Receive function
sending
Item name Selective/direct entry from the list — Item Internet Fax Fax
File name Selective/direct entry from the list — Automatic reception Yes
Return mail (1 default (1 default Manual reception Yes
address address fixed as address fixed
— Memory reception Yes
sender name) as sender
Fixed size reduction
name) Yes
reception
Sender name Yes (Selective
Specified size zoom
from the list/direct —
reception
entry from the list/ No
selection from Rotation reception Yes
LDAP server) Division reception Yes (Conditions are set by the system.)
Transmission Duplex reception Yes (Conditions are set by the system.)
message — 2 in 1 reception —
(message body) Domain/Address
Mail footer specification receive Yes (50 items) —
— enable
preset
Domain/Address
e. Multiple address specification
specification receive Yes (50 items) —
disable
Certain rejection — Yes
Address Specification by one-touch/group/direct address input.
number setting (50 items)
specification *
External telephone —
No. of Group, interface broadcasting total max: 5,000 items Yes
connection remote
registration
items of direct Answering telephone No
—
address input * connection (PAT countermeasure)
Broadcast send Yes Transfer function when
Yes
(Broadcast output is disable
send is disabled Yes Automatic boot mode Yes
for FTP/
Desktop/SMB)
Sequential send
— Yes
request
* Direct address input: 10-key other than one-touch, and soft key-
board input
• When broadcasting including FAX, the resolution is that of FAX.
h. Report/list function C. Printer function
Item Scanner Internet Fax Fax (1) Platform
Communication
Yes • IBM PC/AT compatible machine
record table
Communication • Macintosh
NO Yes
result table (2) Support OS
Address/
Telephone Yes Custom
Custom
number table OS PCL5e/6 PPD GPD
PS
Group table Yes SPDL2
Sender table Yes (Sender Yes (Described on the system Windows 98 Yes Yes Yes No
registration table) setting list.) Me Yes Yes Yes No
Program table Yes NT 4.0 SP5 or later Yes Yes Yes No
Memory box Yes (FAX 2000 Yes Yes Yes No
—
table mode only) XP Yes Yes Yes No
Memory Server2003 Yes Yes Yes No
contents clear — Server2003 x64 No No No Yes
notification (May be outputted in case of an error.)
XP x64 No No No Yes
table
Mac 9.0 to 9.2.2 No No Yes No
Receivable/
X 10.1.5 No No Yes No
rejection — Yes
number list X 10.2.8 No No Yes No
Receivable/ X 10.3.9 No No Yes No
Rejection Yes — X 10.4 - X 10.4.7 No No Yes No
address list (3) Command system
Transfer-to-
Yes
email table list Command system
Transfer-to- PCL5e, PCL6 compatible Standard
administrator Yes PS3 compatible Option (PS expansion kit)
list
Web setting list Yes (4) Built-in fonts
i. Other functions Bitmap fonts 1 kind of font
PCL5 Latin font 80 PCL Latin fonts (SPDL)
Standard built-in fonts
Time
Yes PCL Kanji font Option (2 ACT Fonts)
specification
PS Latin font 136 Type 1 Latin fonts
Poling receive — Yes
Auxiliary to the PS expansion kit
Bulletin board
— Yes Bar code font Option
send
Cover function — NO • The printing system is provided with one bitmap font compatible
Sender print — Yes with HP and 80 European outline fonts for PCL.
Page division Yes • In addition to this, when the PS expansion kit is installed, it is pro-
Page NO vided with 136 European outline fonts for PS and 5 Japanese
connection outline fonts.
Confidential Yes
data (Remote — (F code
(5) Support print channel
machine) system)
Support print channel NetWare environment PSERVER/RPRINT
Relay Yes
LPR
broadcast — (F code
IPP
indication system)
PAP : EtherTalk (AppleTalk)
Send message NO
FTP
Edge erase Yes FTP Pull Print
Center erase Yes NetBEUI
2 in 1 Yes Raw Port (Port 9100)
Card shot Yes USB 2.0
Send to PC — PC-iFAX PC-FAX HTTP (WEB Submit Print)
Linearrized Corresponds by POP3 (E-mail To Print)
— — USB USB 1.1:
PDF Net Scan Tool
Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XP only
j. Record size
USB 2.0:
Windows 2000/XP only
Item Internet Fax Fax
For NetWare environment Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to
Max. record 293mm
PSERVER/RPRINT be used in netware environment
width
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print
Record size A3 to A5/11 x 17 to 5.5 x 8.5
channel
k. F code communication IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
PAP: EtherTalk Print channel used in the Macintosh
Item Fax (AppleTalk) environment
Sub address Yes (Max. 20 digits) FTP Function to print receive data by use of the
Pass code Yes (Max. 20 digits) builtin FTP server.
NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
Port9100 Supports 9100 TCP port (Raw Port).
WEB Submit Print This channel is used to set and print directly
the files on the network by Web Page.
E-mail To Print This channel is used to print only an (6) Command compatibility
attached file directly when an E-mail with an
attached file is received. PCL5e compatible PCL5e is aimed to provide compatibility with HP
LaserJet 4050.
• IPP, and HTTP supports SSL.
PCL6 compatible PCL6 is aimed to provide compatibility with HP
LaserJet 4050.
PostScript PostScript is aimed to provide compatibility with
compatible Adobe PostScript.
(7) Environment setting
Setting item Outline

Default setting Basic setting of printing such as the number of
copies and printing direction.
PCL setting PCL symbol setting and font setting
PS setting Setting of print enable/disable in a PS error
(8) Print function
Functions Content PCL6/5e PS (OPTION)

Multiple Pamphlet Two or more center bindings are collected into one. Yes Yes
Barcode font Compatible with JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation. Yes
No
True type font for barcode usable in PCL5e. (5e only)
Network tandem print Two main units are connected in network and printing can be made by the linkage of the two main
Yes Yes
unit.
Windows Cluster Print Even if one Windows server is down, the mirror server will execute the interrupted print job Yes
Yes
instead of the down server. (Windows only)
PDF/TIFF direct print PDF/TIFF files can be printed without the printer drivers.
(1) Print of an attached file of an e-mail Yes
Yes
(2) Print from the FTP server (PDF is No)
(3) Print from the setting file on the Web page
E-Mail To Print When an e-mail with an attached file is received, only the attached file is printed directly. Yes Yes
PULL print from front panel The FTP server is checked from the front panel and only the specified file is pull-printed (direct
Yes Yes
print).
USB PULL print The FTP server is checked from the front panel and only the specified file is pull-printed (direct
No No
print).
SMB PULL print The file folder on the network is checked from the front panel, and the specified file is pull-printed. No No
FTP PUSH print Data are transferred from the client PC to the MFP server, and direct print is executed. Yes Yes
Print by setting the file on A file on the network is set on the Web page, and direct print is executed.
the Web Page. Yes Yes
[Web Submit Print]
ROPM One RIP process allows to print two or more copies. Yes Yes
Conforming to multi access RIP process can be executed during printing. Printing can be executed during scanning. Yes Yes
Setting of the paper For letterhead and punching sheet which has attribute of front and back, duplex print can be made
direction for duplex print of in the proper front and back and proper page sequence.
Yes Yes
letterhead paper and
punched paper
Manual specification type/ When the set value of the manual tray type on the main unit differs from that on the driver side, the
Size detection enable set value of the printer driver has priority over the set value on the main unit and printing is made. Yes Yes
setting
Management of setting Under the meta-frame environment (under the auto print create environment), the print setting of
Yes
environment under the each client is saved. (In order to avoid the trouble of having to set at every login.) Yes
(Windows only)
terminal server control
Driver delivery function The administrator can distribute the driver to each client by PAU4. Yes
Yes
(Windows only)
Form overlay The form is downloaded to the main unit in advance, and only the data are sent to the main unit, Yes
Yes
where data are loaded into the form to be printed. (5e only)
Conforming to Planet Press Supports the Objectif Lune PlanetPress (which performs mapping between the downloaded form Yes
No
and the variable data in the printer). (Windows only)
Management of blind Web In order to block access to the address of a blind Web Page.
Yes Yes
Page by the password
Bonjour for The technology developed by Apple for detecting and connecting peripheral devices on the
Macintosh environment network automatically
Without setting by the user, the computer, the peripheral devices, and the software can be No Yes
dynamically connected in network.
(OS X 10.3 and later)
Document control print The pattern is printed on paper.
No No
(When the data security kit is installed)
Missing-prevention The paper edge is marked in order to judge paper missing.
No No
marking
Layout print The layout supported for various print purposes can be made. No No
No-line binding To prevent against bulge at the end when binding pages, center binding is executed for small lot of
No No
pages.
Chapter division A white sheet is automatically inserted so that the head page of each chapter comes on the odd
No No
(or even) page.
(9) Windows driver function d. Image quality
a. Frequently used functions Function PCL5e PCL6 PS PPD (*)
Resolution 600/300dpi 600dpi
Functions PCL5e PCL6 PS PPD (*)
Halftone (55ppm/ Screen Frequency 8.0 to
Number of 1 to 999
62ppm) 360.0 in 0.1 steps
copies
— Yes/No Screen angle 0.0 to 360.0 in
Print Vertical/Horizontal
(70ppm) 0.1 steps
direction
—
Duplex print Simplex print, duplex print Simplex print,
Graphic mode Raster Raster
(Left/Upper/Right binding) duplex print (Long —
selection HP-GL2 vector
side/Short side
Smoothing 55/62ppm: Yes
binding)
70ppm : No
Center Invoice on Letter, Letter on Ledger, Windows2000, XP:
Toner save Yes/No
binding A5 on A4, A4 on A3, B5 on B4, Yes
Letter on Letter, Ledger on Ledger, Other OS: No Ultra fine photo 55/62ppm: Yes
A4 on A4, A3 on A3, B4 on B4 70ppm : No
Binding Left/Upper/Right Long side/Short Black-white
— Yes/No
direction side reversion
N-up 2/4/6/8/9/16 WindowsNT 4.0: — Mirror image Horizontal
— Horizontal
Windows2000, XP: /Vertical
2/4/6/9/16 Other Zoom — 25 to 400%
OS: 2/4 Fit page Yes/No —
N-up [2-Up]: * For printing, the PS driver bundled in Windows is required.
direction Left to Right / Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]: e. Font
Right, and Down /
Down, and Right Function PCL5e PCL6 PS PPD (*)
Left, and Down / Usable built-in 80 fonts 136 fonts (For Windows
Down, and Left fonts Category 3 and 4 Category NT4.0)
N-up frame Yes In font chapter 1In font Traditional 35
line Yes/No (Always prints chapter Latin fonts
border line) 5 Japan- Category 1 In
ese fonts font chapter
* For printing, the PS driver bundled in Windows is required. Category (For Other OS)
b. Paper feed system 2 In font 136 Latin fonts
chapter Category 1 In
Functions PCL5e PCL6 PS PPD (*) font chapter 5
Paper size A3/B4/A4/B5/A5/Postcard/Ledger/Legal/Foolscap/Letter/ Japanese fonts
Executive/Invoice/8K/16K Category 2 In
font chapter
Paper type Normal paper, letterhead, printed paper, punched paper,
recycled paper, color paper, label sheet, thick paper, OHP, Download system Bitmap, TrueType, Bitmap, Type 1, TrueType
tab paper which can be Graphics
selected
User 7 types
definition f. Other functions
type
Paper feed Auto paper feed, Tray 1/2/3/4/5, manual feed Function PCL5e PCL6 PS PPD (*)
system Units composition
Yes
Cover paper/ Yes/No Setting of Duplex/Simplex/ setting
Back cover No print — Watermark Yes
page Yes (Limitations on
Cover paper Yes functions)
Insert paper Yes — Overlay Yes —
OHP insert No/Yes (White paper) Print hold Yes —
—
paper Yes (Printed paper) Job retention Yes —
* For printing, the PS driver bundled in Windows is required. Sample print Yes —
Print department
c. Paper exit method Yes —
management
User setting Yes —
Functions PCL5e PCL6 PS PPD (*)
Option auto setting Yes —
Paper exit • Center tray
Job complete
destination • Finisher o Tray 1 Yes —
notification
setting • Finisher oTray 2
Tandem print Yes
• Saddle stitch finisher oTray 1
• Saddle stitch finisher oTray 2 Carbon print Yes —
• Saddle stitch finisher o Saddle stitch tray Enlargement
—
Staple Finisher continuous copy
• No staple Vertical/horizontal
• 1 position independent — Yes —
• 2 positions magnification ratio
Saddle stitch finisher Cover insertion
Yes —
• No staple +center binding
• 1 position Document filing Yes —
• 2 positions * For printing, the PS driver bundled in Windows is required.
Offset Yes (every time)
* For printing, the PS driver bundled in Windows is required.
(10) Windows PPD, Macintosh PPD driver funciton Function Macintosh
a. Frequently used functions Download system Yes (Mac OS9.x.x - LaserWriter)
which can be
Functions Macintosh PPD selected
Number of copies 1 to 999 f. Other functions
Print direction Vertical/Horizontal
Duplex print Simplex print, duplex print (Left/Upper binding) Function Macintosh
Center binding Yes Units composition Yes
setting
Binding direction Long side/Short side
Watermark Yes
N-up 2/4/6/8/16
Overlay No
N-up direction Z / Reverse Z/N / Reverse N
Print hold Yes
N-up frame line None / Single Hairline / Single Thinline / Double
Hairline / Double Thinline Job retention Yes (PIN code input enable)
Sample print Yes
b. Paper feed system
Print department
Yes
management
Functions Macintosh PPD
User setting —
Paper size A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Postcard, Ledger, Legal,
Option auto setting Yes
Foolscap, Letter, Executive, Invoice, 8K, 16K
Job complete —
Paper type Normal paper, letterhead, printed paper, punched
notification
paper, recycled paper, color paper, label sheet, thick
paper, OHP, tab paper Tandem print Yes
User definition type 7 types Carbon print Yes
Paper feed system Auto paper feed, Tray 1/2/3/4/5, manual feed Enlargement
—
continuous copy
Cover paper/Back
Yes/No Vertical/horizontal
cover page
independent —
Cover paper Yes
magnification ratio
Insert paper NO
Cover insertion
OHP insert paper No/Yes (White paper), Yes (Printed paper) —
+center binding
c. Paper exit method Document filing —
Function Macintosh
(11) Print performance
Paper exit Top tray
Word: Excel: PowerPoint:
destination setting Finisher
PDL script.doc (eng.) xl8garly.xls Pw4051.ppt
Tray1 Model
type A total of A total of A total of
Tray2
9 pages 20 pages 6 pages
Saddle stitch finisher
55ppm PCL6 16.2 sec 33.7 sec 10.5 sec
Tray1
PCL5e 15.4 sec 32.4 sec 13.0 sec
Tray2
Saddle stitch tray PS 15.8 sec 50.0 sec 13.9 sec
Staple Finisher ppd 14.1 sec 37.1 sec 11.6 sec
• No staple 62ppm PCL6 13.8 sec 31.4 sec 12.8 sec
• 1 position PCL5e 15.4 sec 31.5 sec 12.7 sec
• 2 positions PS 15.6 sec 49.9 sec 13.9 sec
Saddle stitch finisher ppd 13.4 sec 41.3 sec 12.2 sec
• No staple 70ppm PCL6 14.6 sec 31.1 sec 11.9 sec
• 1 position PCL5e 15.4 sec 30.5 sec 13.3 sec
• 2 positions PS 14.6 sec 49.2 sec 13.4 sec
• Saddle stitch
ppd 14.3 sec 37.0 sec 11.0 sec
Offset Yes (every time)
* Measurement conditions
d. Image quality
(Windows) (Macintosh)
Function Macintosh PC: Pentium III 1GHz 128MB PC: PowerPC G3 700MHz 256MB
Resolution 600dpi OS: Windows XP Professional
Halftone (55ppm/62ppm) Yes/No Driver setting: Default
(70ppm) — Software: Microsoft Office XP
Graphic mode
—
selection
Smoothing (55ppm/62ppm) : Yes/No D. Document filing function
(70ppm) : —
(1) Basic function
Toner save Yes/No
Ultra fine photo — Document filing capacity 16GB
Black-white Fixed folder Standard folder/ Max. 20000 pages
Yes/No
reversion User folder or 3000 files
Mirror image Horizontal/Vertical Max. 10000 pages
Zoom 25 to 400% Temporary folder
or 1000 files
Fit page No Number of pages for one file Conforms to the large volume document
mode. (Within the HD capacity)
Number of folders which can Max. 500 folders
e. Font be formed in the user folder
Number of users which can be Max. 500 users
Function Macintosh
registered
Usable built-in Traditional 35 PS Latin fonts
fonts Category 1 In font chapter
5 fonts Category 2 In font chapter
2 : '07 Nov 15
(2) Data operation by each function 3. Environmental conditions

Each folder in the A. Environmental conditions for use of the main
standard folder/ Temporary folder
Temperature: 10°C to 35°C
user folder
Job Storage Storage Storage Storage Humidity: 20 to 85% RH
of of of of Air pressure: 590 to 1013hPa (height: 0 to 2000m)
sharing Confiden- sharing Confiden-
tial tial
(Humidity)
Copy Yes Yes Yes No
Printer Yes Yes Yes No 85%
Direct print (FTP pull) No No Yes No
60%
Direct print (FTP push) No No Yes No
Direct print (e-mail) Yes No Yes No
Direct print (Web) No No Yes No
Scan send Yes No Yes No
Scan to HDD Yes Yes No No 20%
FAX receive No No No No
FAX send Yes No Yes No
Internet FAX receive No No No No
Internet FAX send Yes No Yes No 10͠ 30͠ 35͠ (Temperature)
PC-Fax/PC-INternet Fax
Yes Yes Yes No
transmisson B. Environmental conditions for transit of the
Data input Yes Yes Yes No main unit
–20°C to 45°C (No condensation)
E. Safety and environmental standards
Humidity (RH)
(1) Safety standards
85%
2 Standard
60%
Europe
Item North China /
(Western/ Australia
America Taiwan
North)
Safety UL60950-1, EN60950-1, IEC60950-1,
standards CSA C22.2 IEC60950-1, IEC60825-1
No.60950-1 IEC60825-1 (Laser)
20%
-03, (Laser)
21CFR
(Laser)
Environ- FCC Part 15 EN55022 AS/NZS GB9254
mental Class B, Class B, CISPR22 Class B,
standards ICES-003 CISPR22 Class B GB17625.1, C. Operating environmental conditions (Supply) 2
(EMC) Class B Class B, (EN 55022 GB/T17618,
EN61000-3-2, Class B) CNS13438 Humidity (RH)
EN61000-3-3, Class B
EN55024 85%
Line FCC Part 68, TS103021 or AS/ACIF GB/T3382.1, 60%
standards ICCS-03 TBR21, S0002, GB/T3382.2,
(When EG201120, AS/NZS YD/T514,
the FAX EG201121 60950 YD/T589,
expansion YD/T703,
board is YD/T965, 20%
installed.) YD/T993,
PSTN01
(2) Environmental standards

D. Ambient conditions for transporting
2 Standard
International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA) –20qC to 45qC (No condensation)
Environmental Choice Program (ECP) E. Environmental conditions for storing
Nordic swan
WEEE (The machine shipped for Europe only)
unopened consumable parts
European ROHS regulations –10qC to 40qC (No condensation)
F. Standard storage period of unopened

consumable parts
Taiwan battery 1) Photoconductor drum
36 months from the production month
2) Toner/Developer
(3) Noise
24 months from the production month
Operating 7.3B or less
Standby (Standby mode) 5.5B or less
MX-M700N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Supply system table

A. U.S.A, Canada, South and Central America
No. Part name Content Life Model name Packing Remark
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x 10 830k (83k x 10) AR-621MTA 1 * Life setting by A4 6%
(Toner; Net weight 1815g) With IC chip document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 10 62/70ppm: 1500k AR-620MD 1 Two bags needed.
(Developer; Net weight 725g) (150k x 2bags x 5)
55ppm: 1250k
(125k x 2bags x 5)
3 Drum OPC drum x1 62/70ppm: 300k AR-620DR 10
55ppm: 250k
B. Europe affiliates (Including East Europe, Russia)/Australia/New Zealand/UK

1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x 10 830k (83k x 10) AR-621LT 1 * Life setting by A4 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 10 62/70ppm: 1500k AR-620LD 1 Two bags needed.
55ppm: 1250k
(125k x 2bags x 5)
3 Drum OPC drum x1 62/70ppm: 300k AR-620DM 10
55ppm: 250k
C. Asia affiliates
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x 10 830k (83k x 10) AR-621CT 1 * Life setting by A4 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 10 62/70ppm: 1500k AR-620CD 1 Two bags needed.
55ppm: 1250k
(125k x 2bags x 5)
55ppm: 250k
D. Hong Kong
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x 10 830k (83k x 10) AR-621CT-C 1 * Life setting by A4 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 10 62/70ppm: 1500k AR-620CD-C 1 Two bags needed.
55ppm: 1250k
(125k x 2bags x 5)
3 Drum OPC drum x1 62/70ppm: 300k AR-620DR-C 10
55ppm: 250k
E. China
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 83k (83k x 1) AR-622ST-C 10 * Life setting by A4 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 62/70ppm: 150k AR-620SD-C 10 Two bags needed.
(Developer; Net weight 725g)
3 Drum OPC drum x1 62/70ppm: 300k AR-620DR-C 1
MX-M700N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

F. Middle East/Philippine
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x 10 830k (83k x 10) AR-621ET 1 * Life setting by A4 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 10 62/70ppm: 1500k AR-620CD 1 Two bags needed.
55ppm: 1250k
(125k x 2bags x 5)
55ppm: 250k
G. Taiwan
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x 10 830k (83k x 10) AR-621ET 1 * Life setting by A4 6%
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x 10 62/70ppm: 1500k AR-620LD 1 Two bags needed.
55ppm: 1250k
(125k x 2bags x 5)
3 Drum OPC drum x1 62/70ppm: 300k AR-620DM 10
55ppm: 250k
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A, Canada
1 Maintenance kit 1 Side seal F x1 300K AR-620KA 10
Side seal R x1
MC cleaning unit x1
Cleaner blade x1
Drum separation pawl x4
Screen grid x1
Toner reception seal x1
Charging plate x1
Paper dust removal unit x1
DV seal x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
2 Maintenance kit 2 Transfer cleaning roller x1 300K AR-620KB 10
Transfer belt x1
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
3 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 300K AR-620UH 10
Fusing separation pawl (Upper) x6
4 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 300K AR-620LH 10
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x4
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade x 10 300K (x 10) AR-620CB 1 AR-620CB =
(AR-620BL) x 10
6 Cleaning kit Lower CL roller DG2 x 10 300K (x 10) MX-705CR 1 MX-705CR =
CL roller SP x 20 (MX-705RC) x 10
CL roller bearing x 40
Auxiliary CL roller SP x 20
CL auxiliary roller DG x 10
Heat CL sheet base N AS x 10
Web roller DG2 x 10
Pressure roller DG2 x 10
Web bearing x 20
Pressure bearing x 20
Pressure SP x 20
7 Fusing unit Fusing UN (Heater lamp 120V) x1 — MX-705FU1 1
8 Heat roller kit Heat roller x1 300K AR-620HR 10
Heat roller bearing x2
9 DSPF roller kit DSPF paper feed roller x1 100K AR-620DF 10
DSPF pickup roller x1
DSPF separation roller x1
10 Paper feed roller kit Main unit paper feed roller x1 100K AR-620RT 10
Main unit paper feed pickup roller x1
Main unit paper feed separation roller x1
11 Staple cartridge Finisher staple x3 5,000 times x 3 SF-SC11 20 Cartridge for AR-F15
(Common with the cartridge
for AR-F11/F12)
12 Staple cartridge Saddle finisher staple x3 2,000 times x 3 AR-SC3 40 Cartridge for AR-F16
for AR-F12)

B. Europe affiliates (Including East Europe, Russia) Australia/New Zealand/UK
Side seal R x1
MC cleaning unit x1
Cleaner blade x1
Screen grid x1
Charging plate x1
DV seal x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
Transfer belt x1
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
3 Maintenance kit 3 Upper heat roller x1 300K MX-705KC 5
Crimping roller EX x1
Upper separation pawl N x6
Lower separation pawl x4
Heat roller x1
Lower CL roller DG2 x1
CL roller SP x2
CL roller bearing x4
Auxiliary CL roller SP x2
CL auxiliary roller DG x1
Heat CL sheet base N AS x1
Web roller DG2 x1
Pressure roller DG2 x1
Web bearing x2
Pressure bearing x2
Pressure SP x2
4 Fusing unit Fusing UN (Heater lamp 230V) x1 — MX-705FU 1
for AR-F11/F12)
for AR-F12)

C. Middle East/Asia/South and Central America
Side seal R x1
MC cleaning unit x1
Cleaner blade x1
Screen grid x1
Charging plate x1
DV seal x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
Transfer belt x1
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
Heat roller x1
CL roller SP x2
Web roller DG2 x1
Web bearing x2
Pressure bearing x2
Pressure SP x2
for AR-F11/F12)
for AR-F12)

D. Hong Kong
Side seal R x1
MC cleaning unit x1
Cleaner blade x1
Screen grid x1
Charging plate x1
DV seal x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
Transfer belt x1
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
Heat roller x1
CL roller SP x2
Web roller DG2 x1
Web bearing x2
Pressure bearing x2
Pressure SP x2
for AR-F11/F12)
for AR-F12)

E. Taiwan
Side seal R x1
MC cleaning unit x1
Cleaner blade x1
Screen grid x1
Charging plate x1
DV seal x1
DV side seal F x1
DV side seal R x1
Toner filter x1
Transfer belt x1
Transfer roller x1
Transfer gear x1
Heat roller x1
CL roller SP x2
Web roller DG2 x1
Web bearing x2
Pressure bearing x2
Pressure SP x2
4 Fusing unit Fusing UN (Heater lamp 100V) x1 — MX-705FU2 1
for AR-F11/F12)
for AR-F12)

MX-M700N
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10
14 13 12 11
Finisher
Parts
No. NOTE
Name Funciton/Operation
1 Saddle stitch finisher *1 / The finisher and the saddle stitch finisher include the offset function, which offsets each
Finisher*1 set of copies from the preceding set for easy separation. Each set of sorted copies can
also be stapled.
The saddle stitch finisher can automatically staple at the center line of a set of copies
and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
A punch unit can be installed to add punch holes to copioes, and an inserter can be
installed to insert blank pages at specified pages.
2 Punch module*1 Adds punch holes to printed pages.
3 Inserter*1 The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output
as covers or inserts without printing. Printed output can also be fed one set at a time
from the inserter for stapling or punching without performing stapling or staple sorting
finishing.
4 Automatic document This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet originals. Both sides of two-sided
feeder originals can be scanned at once.
5 Front cover Open to replace toner cartridge.
6 Operation panel Performs various setting, display, and simulation operations.
7 Center tray Finished sheets are deposited here
8 Bypass tray Special papers (including transparency film) and copy paper can be fed from the bypass
tray.
9 Power switch Turns the power on and off.
If the power does not come on when the power switch is turned on, check the main
power switch to see if it is turned on.
10 Paper feed tray 5 The large capacity tray can hold up to 3,500 sheets of commonly used (8-1/2” ✕ 11”,
(Large capasity tray)*1 B5, A4) any standard paper (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)).
11 Paper feed tray 5 The large capacity tray can hold up to 3000 sheets of 20 lbs. (80 g/m2) paper.
(Large capasity tray)*1
12 Paper feed trays 1, 2 The trays hold paper.
Approximately 800 sheets of standard 8-1/2” ✕ 11” or A4 size paper (20 lbs. (80 g/m2))
can be loaded in tray 1, and approximately 1200 sheets of standard 8-1/2” ✕ 11”, A4 or
B5 size paper (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)) can be loaded in tray 2.
13 Paper feed tray 3 Tray 3 holds. Approximately 500 sheets of standard (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)) paper can be
loaded in this tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can also be loaded.
14 Paper feed tray 4 Tray 4 holds. Approximately 500 sheets of standard (20 lbs. (80 g/m2)) paper can be
loaded in this tray.
*1: 1, 2, 3, 10 and 11 are peripheral devices. For information on these devices, see the explanations of the devices in the manual.
MX-M700N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 1

B. Internal operation parts
1 2 3 4 5
10
9 8
Parts
No. NOTE
1 Duplex unit Open the cover to remove a misfeed from the fusing/duplex unit.
2 Fusing unit Toner images are fused here. The fusing unit is hot. Take care in
removing misfed paper.
3 Cover of the duplex unit Open when a misfeed has occurred in the duplex unit.
4 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge must be replaced by the indication on the operation panel.
5 Main power switch Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or network scanner option is installed.
6 Right side cover Open when a misfeed has occurred in bypass tray or large capacity tray.
7 Upper cover of large Open when a misfeed has occurred in large capacity tray.
capacity tray
8 Left side cover release Push this knob up to open the left side cover.
9 Left cover of paper Open this cover to remove paper misfed in the tray 3 and tray 4.
drawer
10 OPC drum Images are formed on the photoconductive drum. Do not touch or damage the
photoconductive drum.

C. Operation, display parts
1 2 3
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS LOGOUT
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Parts
No. NOTE
1 Touch panel The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel. The
document filing, copy, network scanner*1, and fax*2, Internet fax*3 functions are used
by switching to the screen for the desired function. See the following page.
2 Mode select keys and Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel.
indicators [DOCUMENT FILING] key
Press to select the document filing mode.
[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator
Press to change the display to network scanner mode*1, fax mode*2 or Internet fax
mode*3.
[COPY] key
Press to select the copy mode.
3 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator
Print data can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
Lights up or blinks when print data is being received. Also lights up or blinks when
printing is being performed.
4 [JOB STATUS] key Press to display the current job status.
5 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key This is used to store, edit, and delete user names and folder names for the document
filing function, and to configure the administrator settings and printer configuration
settings.
6 Numeric keys Use to enter number values for various settings.
7 [*] key ([LOGOUT] key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode, network scanner mode*1, fax
mode*2, and Internet fax mode*3.
8 [#/P] key This is used as a program key when using the copy function, and to dial when using
the fax function*2.
9 [C] key (Clear key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode, network scanner mode*1, fax
10 [START] key Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a document in network scanner
mode*1, or scan a document for transmission in fax mode*2 or Internet fax mode*3.
11 [CA] key (Clear all key) This key is used in copy mode, document filing mode, network scanner mode*1, fax
Use the key to cancel settings and perform an operation from the initial machine state.
*1: When the network scanner option is installed.
*2: When the fax option is installed.
*3: When the Internet fax option is installed.

D. Job status screen (common to print, copy, fax, network scan and internet fax)
This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
This screen can be used to display the “JOB QUEUE” (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the “COMPLETE” job list (showing finished
jobs). This screen is used to check jobs, move a job to the top of the JOB QUEUE, or delete a job.
1 *1 2 "COMPLETE"
"JOB QUEUE" screen job screen
JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS STATUS JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE
COPY 020 / 001 COPYING 1/1 COMPLETE COMPLETE
COPY 020 / 000 PAPER EMPTY

DETAIL DETAIL
Suzuki 020 / 000 WAITING
PRIORITY
066211221 002 / 000 WAITING STOP/DELETE CALL
PRINT JOB SCAN FAX JOB INTERNET-FAX INTERNET-FAX
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
(Displayed in the touch panel)

No. NOTE
Name Function/Operation
1 Job list The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves operation keys. To cancel printing or to *1: “PAPER EMPTY” in the job
give a job the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key to select the job and status display
execute the desired operation using the keys described in 8 and 9. When a job status display indicates
This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to be run. The icons to the left of the jobs “PAPER EMPTY”, the specified
in the queue show the job mode. The document filing reprint job icon is highlighted. paper size for the job is not loaded
Note that the icon does not become highlighted during retransmission of a fax/image in any of the trays.
transmission job. In this case, the job will be
suspended until the required paper
is loaded. Other stored jobs will be
printed (if possible) until the
Print mode Copy mode required paper is loaded.
SCAN mode (Other jobs will not be printed if the
paper runs out during printing.) If
Scan to e-mail job Scan to FTP job
you need to change the paper size
Scan to Desktop job because the specified paper size is
not available, touch the current job
Scan to Network folder job key to select it and then touch the
[DETAIL] key described in 10.
Fax mode
Fax send job Fax reception job
PC-FAX send job
Internet Fax mode
i-Fax send job i-Fax reception job
PC-Internet Fax send job
2 Mode select key This switches the job list display between “JOB QUEUE” and “COMPLETE”.
“JOB QUEUE”: Shows stored jobs and the job in progress.
“COMPLETE”: Shows finished jobs.
Files saved using the “FILE” and “QUICK FILE” functions and finished broadcast
transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen.
The “FILE” or “QUICK FILE” job keys in the finished job screen can be touched, followed
by the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or transmit it. A finished broadcast
transmission job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to check the result of
the transmission.
3 [PRINT JOB] key This displays the print job list of print mode (copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax
reception, and self printing).
4 [SCAN] key This displays the transmission status and finished jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail,
Scan to FTP, and Scan to Desktop) when the network scanner option is installed.
5 [FAX JOB] key This displays the transmission/reception status and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and
PC-Fax) when the fax option is installed.

(Displayed in the touch panel)
No. NOTE
Name Function/Operation
6 Display switching keys Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.
7 [INTERNET-FAX] key This displays the transmission/reception status and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and
PC Internet fax mode when the network scanner option is installed.
8 [STOP/DELETE] key Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the selected reserved job. Note that
printing of received faxes and received Internet faxes cannot be canceled or deleted.
9 [PRIORITY] key A stored job in the “JOB QUEUE” job list can be printed ahead of all other stored jobs by
selecting the job and then touching this key.
10 [DETAIL] key This shows detailed information on the selected job. Files saved using the “FILE” and
“QUICK FILE” functions and finished broadcast transmission jobs appear as keys in the
finished job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen or the [Filing] key can be
touched, followed by the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or transmit it. A
finished broadcast transmission job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to
check the result of the transmission.
11 [CALL] key When this key is touched after selecting a job in the COMPLETE job status screen (a job
stored using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the document filing function), the “JOB
SETTINGS” menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint the finished job.

E. Sensor/detector
SPED1 STUD
SPLS2
SPLS1 SPPD1
SPWS
STLD
SPPD3
SPPD2
SPPD4 SPED2
SPOD
POD2 POD3
AINPD POD1
APPD1
MPED
MPLD2
MPFD1 MPLD1
PPD MPFPWS
MPFD2 MTOP1
APPD2 MPRD1 MTOP2
MPRD2
PFD2 LPPD
T2LUD
T1LUD
T1PPD T2PED
T1PED
M1PFD M1LUD
M1PED
M2PFD M2LUD
M2PED
Signal Connector level

Code Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
name “L” “H”
AINPD AINPD Duplex (ADU) paper entry Duplex (ADU) paper entry detection, Transmission Paper – Paper transport
detector detection of paper exit to finisher type pass system sensor
APPD1 APPD1 Duplex (ADU) paper pass Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass Transmission Paper – Paper transport
detector 1 detection type pass system sensor
APPD2 APPD2 Duplex (ADU) paper pass Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass Transmission Paper – Paper transport
LPPD LPPD LCC paper pass detector Detection of paper entry from LCC Transmission Paper – Paper transport
type pass system sensor
M1LUD M1LUD Paper tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission – Upper limit Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type detection system sensor

M1PED M1PED Paper empty detector Paper empty detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type empty present system sensor
M1PFD M1PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 3 paper pass Transmission Paper – Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 3) detection type pass system sensor
M2LUD M2LUD Paper tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission – Upper limit Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) type detection system sensor
M2PED M2PED Paper tray upper limit detector Paper empty detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
M2PFD M2PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 4 paper pass Transmission Paper – Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 4) detection type pass system sensor
MPED MPED Manual feed paper empty Manual paper feed tray paper empty Transmission Paper Paper Manual paper
detector detection type present empty feed unit
MPFD1 MPFD1 Manual feed paper pass Manual tray paper pass detection Transmission Paper – Paper transport
detector 1 type pass system sensor
MPFD2 MPFD2 Manual feed paper pass Manual tray and LCC paper pass Transmission Paper – Paper transport
MPFPWS MPFPWS Manual feed paper width Manual feed paper width detection Volume – – Analog detector
detector resistor
MPLD1 MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper length Transmission – Paper Manual paper
detector 1 detection (Paper feed side) type present feed unit
MPLD2 MPLD2 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper length Transmission – Paper Manual paper
detector 2 detection (Outside) type present feed unit
MPRD1 MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/ Transmission Paper – Paper transport
detector 1 LCC paper pass detection type pass system sensor
MPRD2 MPRD2 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/ Transmission Paper – Paper transport
detector 2 LCC paper pass detection type pass system sensor
MTOP1 MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out Contact type Storage – Manual paper
detector 1 position detection (Storing position) feed unit
MTOP2 MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out Contact type Pull-out – Manual paper
detector 2 position detection (Pull-out position) feed unit
PFD2 PFD2 Paper pass detector 2 Paper pass detection (Left door unit) Transmission Paper – Paper transport
from duplex (ADU)/ type pass system sensor
No.1, 3, 4 paper feed
POD1 POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Paper exit detection from fusing Transmission Paper – Paper transport
POD2 POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Paper pass detection from paper exit Transmission Paper – Paper transport
POD3 POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Paper exit detection to upper section Transmission – Paper pass Paper transport
paper exit tray (Full detection) type (Full system sensor
detection)
PPD PPD Resist roller front paper pass Paper pass detection in front of resist Reflection Paper – Paper transport
detector roller type pass system sensor
SPED1 SPED1 DSPF document empty DSPF document empty detection Transmission Paper Sensor
detector type present
SPED2 SPED2 DSPF document detector DSPF document detection Transmission Paper Sensor
type present
SPLS1 SPLS1 DSPF document length DSPF document length detection Transmission Paper Sensor
detector 1 (Short) type present
SPLS2 SPLS2 DSPF document length DSPF document length detection Transmission Paper Sensor
detector 2 (Long) type present
SPOD SPOD DSPF paper exit detector DSPF paper exit detection Transmission Paper exit Sensor
type
SPPD1 SPPD1 DSPF document paper pass DSPF document paper pass Transmission Paper Sensor
detector 1 detection 1 type present
SPWS SPWS DSPF document size (Width) DSPF document size (Width) Volume – – Other detector
detection analog data detector detection resistor
STLD STLD DSPF document tray lower DSPF document tray lower limit Transmission Lower limit Sensor
limit detector detection type
STUD STUD DSPF document tray upper DSPF document tray upper limit Transmission Upper limit Sensor
limit detector detection type
T1LUD T1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Transmission Upper limit – Paper feed tray
detector (Paper feed tray 1) type system sensor
(Paper feed tray 1)
T1PED T1PED Paper empty detector Paper presence detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
T1PPD T1PPD Paper pass detector Paper pass detection from paper feed Transmission Paper – Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 1) tray 1 type pass system sensor

T2LUD T2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Transmission Upper limit – Paper feed tray
detector (Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2) type system sensor
T2PED T2PED Paper empty detector Paper presence detection Transmission Paper Paper Paper feed tray
SCOV
SOCD
MHPS LEDX
OCSW
PDSELX
TH-EX
WEBEND
RTH1
RTH2
TH-CL
RTH3
PCS HUS-TC TH-RA
DSW-ADU
DSW-L DSW-F
DMS
TLS DSW-R
TFSD
TNCA
TCS
HUS-DV
THPS2 TH-DV
T2SPD
T1SPD
DSW-DSK
TANSET
M1SS1
M1SS2
M1PWS M1SPD M1SS3

M1SS4
M2SS1
M2SS2
M2SPD
M2SS3
M2SS4

CISTH CISTH CIS temperature sensor CIS temperature detection Thermistor – – Not used.
DMS DMS OPC drum marking sensor OPC drum mark detection Reflection – – Analog detector
type

DSW- DSW- Duplex (ADU) cover open/ Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Transmission Duplex Duplex Door switch
ADU ADU close detector detection type (ADU) (ADU) door
door open open close
DSW-DSK DSW-DSK Left door open/close Left door open/close detection Transmission Desk left Desk left Door switch
detector (Desk section) (Desk section) type door open door close
DSW-F DSW-F Front door open/close Front door open/close detection Micro switch Front door Front door Door switch
detector or left door or left door
open close
DSW-L DSW-L Left door open/close Left door open/close detection Micro switch Left door, Left door, Door switch
detector front door front door
open, close
manual manual
paper feed paper feed
unit pullout unit close
DSW-R DSW-R Manual feed open/close Manual feed open/close detection Micro switch Left door Manual unit Door switch
detector (NC) open or insertion
manual
unit pulled
out
HUS-DV HUS-DV Developing humidity Developing section peripheral Humidity – – Analog detector
sensor humidity detection sensor
HUS-TC HUS-TC Process humidity sensor Process section peripheral humidity Humidity – – Analog detector
detection sensor (Not used)
LEDX LEDX Document size sensor Document size detection LED LED – – Other detector
(Light emitting) (LED)
M1PWS M1PWS Paper feed tray paper Multi paper feed tray paper width Slide resistor – – Analog detector
width detector detection (Paper feed tray 3)
(Paper feed tray 3)
M1SPD M1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
detector (Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type paper remaining quantity
quantity sensor
66% or less
M1SS1 M1SS1 Paper size detector Paper size detection by combination Contact Multi paper feed
(Paper feed tray 3) of ON/OFF of MISS 1 – 4 switch tray vertical size
detection (Refer to
the separate table
in the “[11] SIGNAL
NAME LIST” (*1).)
M1SS2 M1SS2 Paper size detector Paper size detection by combination Multi paper feed
(Paper feed tray 3) of ON/OFF of MISS 1 – 4 tray vertical size
detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)
detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)
detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)
M2SPD M2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
quantity sensor
66% or less
detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)
detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)

detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)
detection (Refer to
the separate table
NAME LIST” (*1).)
MHPS MHPS Scanner home position Scanner home position detection Transmission Home Sensor
sensor detector type position
OCSW OCSW DSPF open/close detector Trigger for document size detection. Transmission Close Sensor
type
PCS PCS Image density sensor Detection of density of toner patch on Reflection – – Analog detector
the OPC drum type
PDSELX PDSELX Document size sensor Document size detection Photo – – Other detector
(Light reception) (PT) transistor
RTH1 RTH1 Heat roller temperature Heat roller temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog detector
sensor (Center section) (Center section)
RTH2 RTH2 Heat roller temperature Heat roller temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog detector
sensor (Edge section) (Edge section)
RTH3 RTH3 Sub heat roller Sub heat roller temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog detector
temperature sensor
SCOV SCOV DSPF cover switch DSPF cover open/close detection Transmission Close Sensor
type
SOCD SOCD DSPF open/close detector DSPF open/close detector Transmission Close Sensor
type
T1SPD T1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
quantity sensor
50% or less
T2SPD T2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission – Remaining Paper feed tray
quantity sensor
33% or less
TANSET TANSET Paper feed tray 1/2 Paper feed tray 1, 2 (Tandem tray) Transmission Pull-out Insertion Paper feed tray
detection signal insertion detection type system sensor
TCS TCS Toner density sensor Toner density detection Magnetic – – Analog detector
sensor
TFSD TFSD Toner remaining quantity Toner hopper toner remaining Magnetic Remaining Remaining Other sensor,
sensor quantity detection sensor quantity quantity switch
great small
TH-CL TH-CL OPC drum temperature OPC drum peripheral temperature Thermistor – – Analog detector
sensor detection
TH-DV TH-DV Developing humidity Developing section humidity detection Thermistor/ – – Analog detector
sensor humidity
TH-EX TH-EX Paper exit unit Paper exit unit peripheral temperature Thermistor – – Analog detector
temperature sensor detection
(Cooling fan operation monitor)
TH-RA TH-RA Room temperature sensor Room temperature detection Thermistor – – Analog
detector(Not used)
THPS2 THPS2 Transfer belt contact/ Transfer belt separation home Transmission – Contact Other sensor,
separation home position position detection 2 type switch
sensor 2
TLS TLS Waste toner pipe lock Waste toner pipe lock detection Lead type – Lock (Tilt) Other sensor,
detector switch
TNCA TNCA Waste toner full detection Waste toner full detection Magnetic Not used.
signal sensor
WEBEND WEBEND WEB end sensor Detects the WEB paper end Transmission – End
(replacement) type detection

F. Switch
DSW-L
MPSW
DSW-F
MSW
DSW-R
WH-SW
Signal
Code Name Type Function/Operation NOTE
name
MPSW MPSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF all the power sources.
MSW MSW Power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source. (Turns ON/ Shut-off solenoid
OFF the engine power source except for the sub DC built-in
power source.)
DSW-F DSW-F Front door open/close Micro switch Front door open/close detection, Main charger power
detector source, Developing bias power line open/close
DSW-L DSW-L Left door open/close Micro switch Left door open/close detection, Main charger power
switch source, Developing bias power line open/close
DSW-R DSW-R Manual paper feed unit Micro switch Manual paper feed unit open/close detection, Main
open/close switch charger power source, Developing bias power line open/
close
WH-SW WH-SW Dry heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the power line of the dry heater.

G. Clutch/solenoid
SPFC
STRRC SRRC
STRRBC SRRBC
STRC
STRBC DGS
PSPS
DSKLS
MFPUS RRC
MPFGS PSBC
T1PFC
DSKPFC2
MPFC T1PUS
HPFC M1PUS
T2PFC
M1PFC
T2PUS
DSKPFC1
M2PFC
M2PUS
Signal
name
DGS DGS Paper exit gate solenoid Paper exit gate drive Electromagnetic
solenoid
DSKLS DSKLS Paper guide lock solenoid Lock the horizontal transport paper guide Electromagnetic
solenoid
DSKPFC1 DSKPFC1 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport Paper feed tray 3/4 section paper transport roller ON/ Electromagnetic
clutch 1 OFF control clutch
DSKPFC2 DSKPFC2 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport Paper feed tray 3/4 section paper transport roller ON/ Electromagnetic
HPFC HPFC Horizontal paper transport clutch Manual paper feed, paper feed tray 2 section, LCC paper Electromagnetic
transport roller ON/OFF control clutch
M1PFC M1PFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray 3 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
(Paper feed tray 3) clutch
M1PUS M1PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper Electromagnetic
(Paper feed tray 3) solenoid
M2PUS M2PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper Electromagnetic
MFPUS MFPUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper Electromagnetic
(Manual paper feed) solenoid
MPFC MPFC Paper feed clutch Manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF Electromagnetic
(Manual paper feed) control clutch
MPFGS MPFGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Manual feed gate solenoid open/close control. Electromagnetic
solenoid
PSBC PSBC Resist roller brake clutch Resist roller braking Electromagnetic
clutch
PSPS PSPS Separation solenoid OPC drum separation pawl drive Electromagnetic
solenoid
RRC RRC Resist roller clutch Resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
SPFC SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch DSPF paper feed section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
SRRC SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch DSPF resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
SRRBC SRRBC DSPF resist roller brake clutch DSPF resist roller braking Electromagnetic
clutch

Signal
name
STMPS STMPS Stamp solenoid control signal Stamp drive Electromagnetic
solenoid
STRBC STRBC DSPF paper transport roller 2 brake DSPF transport roller 2 braking Electromagnetic
clutch clutch
STRC STRC DSPF paper transport roller 2 clutch DSPF transport roller 2 ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
STRRBC STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller breake DSPF transport roller 3 braking Electromagnetic
clutch clutch
STRRC STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch DSPF transport roller 3 ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
T1PFC T1PFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray 1 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
T1PUS T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
T2PFC T2PFC Paper feed clutch Paper feed tray 2 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
H. Drive motor
SPSM
SLUM
POM1
SPFM
POM2
ADM1
DVM
MIM FUM
WEBM
PGM DM
TM1 ADM2
TM2 MM
TURM
T1LUM
TRM
M1LUM
VPM
M2LUM
T2LUM
Signal
name
ADM1 ADM1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller 2 and the paper transport High speed
roller 19.
ADM2 ADM2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the paper exit rollers 20 and 21. Selection of
Normal speed/
High speed
DM DM OPC drum motor DC brush-less Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section.
motor
DVM DVM Developing system DC brush-less Drives the developing section.
motor
FUM FUM Fusing motor DC brush-less Drives the fusing section.
motor
M1LUM M1LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of
(Paper feed tray 3) Rotation mode/
Brake mode
M2LUM M2LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of
Brake mode

Signal
name
MIM MIM Scanner (reading) motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) section.
MM MM Main motor DC brush-less Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the manual
motor paper feed section.
PGM PGM LSU motor DC brush-less Drives the scanner (writing) (LSU) unit mirror.
motor
POM1 POM1 Paper exit motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller 16. Selection of
Normal speed/
High speed
POM2 POM2 Paper exit motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller 1. Selection of
Normal speed/
High speed
SLUM /SLUM DSPF paper tray lift motor Stepping motor Lifts up and down the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPFM SPFM1 DSPF paper feed motor, paper Stepping motor Drives the paper feed roller and the transport roller.
transport motor
SPSM SPFM2 DSPF paper exit motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller. (DSPF)
T1LUM T1LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of
Brake mode
T2LUM T2LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. Selection of
Brake mode
TM1 TM1 Toner motor 1 Synchronous Transports toner in the toner hopper to the developing
motor unit./ Transports waste toner to the waste toner section.
TM2 TM2 Toner motor 2 Synchronous Transports toner in the toner bottle to the toner hopper.
motor
TRM TRM Resist roller front drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller 15. Normal speed
mode/ Resist
roller front
paper transport
timing control
(Warp amount
control)
TURM TURM Transfer separation motor DC brush motor Drives and separates the transfer belt. When executing
the process
correction and
detecting a jam,
the transfer belt
is separated
from the OPC
drum.
VPM VPM Vertical paper transport motor Stepping motor Drives the paper transport rollers 4 and 13. Normal speed
mode
WEBM WEBM WEB motor Synchronous Drives the WEB roller
motor

I. Lamp
LEDCL CL1
CCFT
DL
Signal
name
CCFT CCFT LCD backlight Cold Cathode Backlight for LCD
Fluorescent Tube
DL DL Discharge lamp Lamp Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
CL1 CL1 Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the
document image.
LEDCL LEDCL CIS lamp (LED) LED Radiates lights onto a document for the CIS to scan the
document image.

J. Fan motor
CFM-U1
CFM-U3
SPFFAN
VFM-EX1 CFM-U4
VFM-EX2 CFM-U2
VFM-EX3 VFM-BKU
VFM-BKR
CFM-R1
VFM-BKL
CFM-R2
CFM-HDD
CFM-R3
CFM-DV
CFM-ICU
CFM-DC1
CFM-DC2
Signal
name
CFM-DC1 CFM-DC1 Power cooling fan motor DC brush-less Cools the DC power unit.
motor
CFM-DC2 CFM-DC2 Power cooling fan motor DC brush-less Cools the DC power unit.
motor
CFM-DV CFM-DV Developing section cooling fan motor DC brush-less Cools the developing section. PWM
motor control
CFM-HDD CFM-HDD HDD cooling fan motor DC brush-less Cools the HDD. PWM
motor control
CFM-ICU CFM-ICU Controller cooling fan motor DC brush-less Cools the controller. PWM
motor control
CFM-R1 CFM-R1 Process cooling fan motor 1 (LSU/process section) DC brush-less Cools the LSU/ process section. PWM
motor control
motor control
motor control
CFM-U1 CFM-U1 Fusing section cooling fan motor 1 DC brush-less Exhaust heat from the fusing section. PWM
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Top surface) motor control
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Paper exit rear side) motor control
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Top surface) motor control
CFM-U4 CFM-U4 Fusing section cooling fan motor 4 DC brush-less Cools paper which is discharged to the PWM
(Paper exit/duplex (ADU) section) (Paper cooling fan motor) motor inner tray. control
SPFFAN SPFFAN DSPF fan motor DC brush-less Exhausts heat generated by the motor PWM
motor clutch in the DSPF. control
VFM-EX1 VFM-EX1 Process exhaust fan motor 1 (Front side) DC brush-less Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM
motor section. control
VFM-EX2 VFM-EX2 Process exhaust fan motor 2 (Center) DC brush-less Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM
VFM-EX3 VFM-EX3 Process exhaust fan motor 3 (Rear side) DC brush-less Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM
VFM-BKL VFM-BKL Process exhaust fan motor 4 DC brush-less Exhaust ozone and heat from the process PWM
VFM-BKR VFM-BKR Process exhaust fan motor DC brush-less Exhaust heat from the fusing section. PWM
motor control
VFM-BKU VFM-BKU Paper cooling fan motor DC brush-less Exhaust heat from paper in the inner tray. PWM
motor control

K. PWB (Main unit section)
6
14
7
3
26 20
17 13
25 24
2 15
32
5 22
18 16
23
10
9 11
29
27
28 12
8 31
4
19 30
21
No Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 AC power PWB Controls the AC power.
2 CCD PWB Scans document images to converts analog signal to digital signal.
3 CIS control PWB/CIS unit Scans document images (back surface) and controls the CIS unit.
4 DC main power PWB Generates the DC power.
5 DC sub power PWB Generates the DC power in the power save mode.
6 LVDS PWB Generates the LCD display signal.
7 LCD INV PWB Generates a high voltage for backlight.
8 MFP FLASH ROM PWB Stores the MFP control program.
9 MFP controller PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the machine.
10 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFP control PWB and the PCU PWB.
11 PCU FLASH ROM PWB Stores the PCU control program.
12 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
13 DSPF PWB Drives the DSPF section loads./ Interfaces the sensor and detector signals.
14 DSPF paper width detection PWB Detects the DSPF paper tray paper width.
15 Image density sensor PWB Detects the toner patch density in the image density correction.
16 OPC drum mark sensnor PWB Detects the OPC drum mark.
17 Document size detection light reception PWB Generates the document size detection signal.
18 Document size detection light emitting PWB Generates lights to detect the document size.
19 High voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC) Generates the main charger voltage, the developing bias voltage, the transfer
voltage and the transfer belt cleaning voltage.
20 Transfer bias high voltage PWB (TD CL) Provides the bias voltage for the transfer cleaning roller and the print mode.
21 Dehumidifier heater relay PWB Controls ON/OFF of the dehumidifier heater.
22 Discharge lamp PWB Generates light for discharging.
23 Scanner Flash PWB Stores the scanner control program.
24 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
25 Scanner relay PWB Interfaces the scanner control PWB, the CCD PWB, the operation control
PWB and the LVDS/INV PWB.
26 Operation control PWB Controls the display operation panel.
27 Soft NIC PWB Controls the network.
28 Manual feed paper width detection PWB Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
29 Driver PWB Drives the motors.
30 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size.
(Paper feed tray 3, 4)
31 Detector PWB (Paper feed tray 1, 2) Detects the paper empty and upper limit tray.
32 Photoconductor temperature sensor PWB Temperature detection around the photoconductor

L. FAX section
4,5
No Name Function/Operation MODEL NOTE

1 MDMC PWB Controls the Modem and the TEL/LIU PWB. Modem control Fax unit
2 FAX IF PWB • Interfaces the MDMC PWB and the main unit controller PWB.
• Installs the FAX image memory. (Expansion memory can be installed.)
3 TEL/LIU PWB • Controls the line. (Call-out, polarity reversion detection,
CI detection, line monitor, etc.)
• Connection of an externally connected telephone line.
4 FAX AC power 100 Generates the FAX DC power of 100V.
5 FAX AC power 200 Generates the FAX DC power of 200V.
M. Fuse/thermostat
24
15 23
22
14
13
8
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
10 17, 20
16, 19
18, 21
11
9,12
No. Code Name Type Specifications Function/Operation Section NOTE

1 F201 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A PCU PWB protection (24V1) DC main 100V series/
power PWB 200V series
2 F202 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Driver PWB protection (24V2) DC main 100V series/
3 F203 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Scanner control PWB protection (24V3) DC main 100V series/
4 F204 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A LCC control PWB protection (24V4) DC main 100V series/
5 F205 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Finisher protection (24V5) DC main 100V series/
6 F206 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Inserter protection (24V6) DC main 100V series/
7 F207 Fuse Not used. DC main 100V series/
8 F208 Fuse Time lag 250V 6.3A Motor protection (38V) DC main 100V series/

No. Code Name Type Specifications Function/Operation Section NOTE
9 F1 Fuse Time lag 250V 15A DC power source overcurrent protection DC main 100V series
(Main source) power PWB
10 F2 Fuse Time lag 250V 3.15A Varistor overcurrent protection DC main 100V series/
11 F3 Fuse Time lag 250V 5A MFP controller PWB power source protection DC main 100V series/
(12V1, 5V1) power PWB 200V series
12 F1 Fuse Time lag 250V 8A DC power source overcurrent protection DC main 200V series
(Main source) power PWB
13 F101 Fuse Time lag 250V 2A DC power source overcurrent protection DC sub power 100V series/
(Main source) PWB 200V series
14 F102 Fuse Time lag 250V 2A DC power source overcurrent protection DC sub power 100V series/
(Main source) PWB 200V series
15 F1 Fuse Immediate 250V 200mA LCD inverter circuit overcurrent protection LVDS/ LCD INV PWB Common
decision type INV
16 F1 Fuse Time lag 250V 20A AC power source overcurrent protection AC power 100V system
(Main source) PWB EX100
17 F3 Fuse Time lag 250V 2.0A Thermal heater overcurrent protection AC power 100V system
PWB EX100
18 F5 Fuse Time lag 250V 2.5A MSW detection circuit overcurrent protection AC power 100V system
PWB EX100
19 F1, F2 Fuse Time lag 250V 10A AC power source overcurrent protection AC power 200V system
(Main source) PWBEX200
20 F3, F4 Fuse Time lag 250V 2.0A Thermal heater overcurrent protection AC power 200V system
PWBEX200
21 F5 Fuse Time lag 250V 2.5A MSW detection circuit overcurrent protection AC power 200V system
PWBEX200
22 HLTS1 Thermostat 120VAC 15A Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
240VAC 10A
23 HLTS2 Thermostat 120VAC 15A Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
240VAC 10A
24 HLTS3 Thermostat 120VAC 15A Sub heat roller overheat protection Fusing unit
240VAC 10A
N. Adjustment volume
RV102
RV201
RV202
Name Function/Operation NOTE

RV102 DC sub power unit +12V power output voltage adjustment VR
RV201 DC main power unit +38V power output voltage adjustment VR
RV202 DC main power unit +24V power output voltage adjustment VR

O. Gate
2
1
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Switchback gate Selects the paper route when discharging paper to the inner tray and when Switched not by the solenoid drive but
switching back to the exit or finisher. by the automatic procedure.
2 Paper exit gate Selects the paper route to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to Driven by the solenoid (DGS).
discharge paper.
3 Manual feed gate Specifies the lead edge position of paper when setting paper. (Prevention
against double feed and multifeed of paper into the paper feed roller)
P. Heater
WH1 SCN
HL3
HL2
HL1
WH1 DESK
WH2 DESK

HL1 Heater lamp 1 Halogen lamp Heats the center of the upper fusing roller.
HL2 Heater lamp 2 Halogen lamp Heats the both ends of the upper fusing roller.
HL3 Sub heater lamp Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (pressing roller).
WH1 DESK Dry heater Nichrome wire (18W) Dehumidifies paper on the paper feed tray 1 and 2. Service parts
WH2 DESK Dry heater Nichrome wire (10W) Dehumidifies paper on the paper feed tray 3 and 4.
WH1 SCN Scanner dry heater Nichrome wire (7W) Dehumidifies the scanner section.

Q. Lock position
2 3

1 Scanner lock screw Locks the scanner. (Protects the scanner unit from breakage during transit.) Be sure to lock during transit.
2 Paper tray 1 lock block Locks the paper lift plate
6 Fusing pressure release screw Applies and releases pressure in the fusing unit. Release the pressure when
storing the machine longer than
30 days.
7 OPC drum separation pawl lock block Protects the OPC drum from contact with the separation pawl.

R. Roller
47 46 58 57 44 45 56 55 76 75 74 73 72 71 65 66 64 70 69 68 67
83
84
85
63 86
77 82 78 79 1
61
62 2
48
49 3
59
60 81
17 80
16
50
51
43
42
41
53 18
52
54 19
40 20
39 21
38 9
4
6 7
37 8
22
23
24
25
12
10
11
36 5 34 35 33 31 32 29 30 28 26 27 14 13 15

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
(Manual paper feed tray)
2 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
3 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper transport section.
(No. 1 paper feed tray)
(No. 1 paper feed roller)

14 Separation roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
16 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the paper transport timing and
adjusts the relative relationship between the image and paper.
17 Resist roller (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the resist roller to transport the paper.
18 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the large capacity tray (LCC) to the transport roller 2.
19 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies pressure to paper and the resist roller to transport the paper.
20 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the manual paper feed and the transport roller 1 to
the transport roller 3.
21 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the
transport roller to paper.
22 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the paper teed tray 2 and the transport roller 2 to the
transport roller 3.
24 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 15.
26 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport rollers 6 and 7.
28 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
31 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport rollers 9 and 10.
34 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport rollers 7 and 8 to the transport roller 11.
39 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed trays 1, 3, and 4 to transport roller 15.
42 Transport roller 15 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport resist roller.
44 Transport roller 16 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller 1.
48 Transport roller 19 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport from the paper exit roller 2 to the transport roller 20.
55 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. / Switches back paper.
56 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide a transport power of the
paper exit roller to paper.
57 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
58 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the
59 Transfer drive roller (Drive) Drives the transfer belt.
60 Transfer roller (Idle) Helps to stretch the transfer belt.
61 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
62 Sub heat roller Heats the fusing roller (pressing).

63 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
64 Paper feed roller (DSPF) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
65 Separation roller (DSPF) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
66 Paper pickup roller (DSPF) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
67 Transport roller 1 (Drive) (DSPF) Transports paper (which is transported by the first resist roller) to the second resist roller.
68 Transport roller 1 (Drive) (DSPF) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the
69 First resist roller (Drive) (DSPF) Controls the paper transport timing. / Adjusts paper to be horizontal.
70 First resist roller (Idle) (DSPF) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide a transport power of the resist
roller to paper.
71 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (DSPF) Transports paper transported from the paper exit roller 1 to the transport roller 3.
72 Transport roller 2 (Idle) (DSPF) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the
73 Second resist roller (Drive) (DSPF) Controls the paper transport timing. / Adjusts paper to be horizontal.
74 Second resist roller (Idle) (DSPF) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide a transport power of the resist
roller to paper.
75 Paper exit roller (Drive) (DSPF) Discharges paper.
76 Paper exit roller (Idle) (DSPF) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide a transport power of the
77 Transfer cleaning roller Cleans the transfer belt.
78 Transfer tension roller Applies a proper tension to the transfer belt.
79 Transfer roller Applies a proper voltage to the transfer belt.
80 Transfer roller 1A (Drive) Transports paper (which is fed from the manual paper feed tray) to the transport roller.
81 Transfer roller 1A (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the
82 Cleaning brush roller Removes paper dust from the photoconductor drum.
83 Paper exit roller 3 (Drive) Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. /Switches back paper.
84 Paper exit roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide a transport power of the
85 Pressure connect roller Applies a pressure to WEB paper to connect with the heat roller.
86 WEB roller Clean the heat roller.
S. Filter

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Filters dispersed toner in the process section.

MX-M700N
[6] ADJUSTMENTS 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
2. Outline
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with a specific JOB number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the sequence
of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest JOB number must be
observed.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would not complete normally or trouble may occur.
3. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjusting high voltage values ADJ 1A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
ADJ 1B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
ADJ 1C Adjust the transfer current, voltage 8-6, 8-17, 8-18
ADJ 2 Adjusting the developing unit ADJ 2A Adjust the developing doctor gap
ADJ 2B Adjust the developing roller main pole
ADJ 3 Adjusting image distortions ADJ 3A Adjust print image distortions (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-1
ADJ 3B Adjust the scanner (reading) unit parallelism
ADJ 3C Adjust scanned image distortions in the sub-scanning direction
ADJ 3D Adjust scanned image distortions in the main scanning direction – 1
ADJ 3E Adjust scanned image distortions in the main scanning direction – 2
ADJ 4 Adjusting DSPF parallelism ADJ 4A Adjust DSPF levelness
ADJ 4B Adjust DSPF skews 64-1
ADJ 5 Adjusting the image focus ADJ 5A Adjust the image focus in original table mode and DSPF front-face mode (CCD) 48-1
ADJ 5B Adjust the image focus in DSPF back-face mode (CIS)
ADJ 6 Adjusting the image magnification ADJ 6A Adjust the image magnification in the main scanning direction in original table 48-1
mode (CCD)
ADJ 6B Adjust the image magnification in the sub-scanning direction in original table 48-1
mode (CCD)
ADJ 6C Adjust the image magnification in the main scanning direction in DSPF 48-1
front-face mode (CCD)
ADJ 6D Adjust the image magnification in the main scanning direction in DSPF 48-1
back-face mode (CIS)
ADJ 6E Adjust the image magnification in the sub-scanning direction in DSPF mode 48-1, 48-5
ADJ7 Adjusting the image off-center ADJ 7A Adjust the print image off-center (print engine section) 50-5 (50-10)
ADJ 7B Adjust the scanned image off-center in original table mode (scan section) 50-12
ADJ 7C Adjust the scanned image off-center in DSPF front-face mode (scan section) 50-12
ADJ 7D Adjust the scanned image off-center in DSPF back-face mode (scan section) 50-12
ADJ8 Adjusting the image position, ADJ 8A Adjust copied image loss/void area in original table mode 50-1
image loss, and void area ADJ 8B Adjust the original scan start position 53-8
(adjust the scanner read position in DSPF-mode front face scan)
ADJ 8C Adjust the copied image loss/void area in DSPF mode 50-6
ADJ 8D Adjust the image loss in scanner mode 50-27
ADJ 8E Adjust the image loss for images sent in fax mode 50-27
ADJ9 Adjusting the copied image quality ADJ 9A Adjust the binary mode copy density for all modes at once 46-2
ADJ 9B Adjust the copy density in text binary mode 46-9, 10, 11
ADJ 9C Adjust the copy density in text/photo binary mode
ADJ 9D Adjust the copy density in photo binary mode
ADJ 9E Adjust the copied image gamma in copy mode 46-18
ADJ 9F Adjust the copied image sharpness 46-31
ADJ10 Adjusting the print quality in fax ADJ10A Adjust the fax mode print density for all modes at once 46-12
mode ADJ10B Adjust the fax mode print density in standard mode 46-13, 46-14,
ADJ10C Adjust the fax mode print density in small-character mode 46-15, 46-16,
ADJ10D Adjust the fax mode print density in fine mode 46-45
ADJ10E Adjust the fax mode print density in super fine mode
ADJ10F Adjust the fax mode print density in 600dpi mode
ADJ11 Adjusting the image quality in scan ADJ11A Adjust the scan mode image density for all modes at once 46-21
mode ADJ11B Scan mode image density adjustment/individual setup (standard mode) 46-21, 46-22,
ADJ11C Scan mode image density adjustment/individual setup 46-23, 46-24,
(small-character mode) 46-25
ADJ11D Scan mode image density adjustment/individual setup (fine mode)
ADJ11E Scan mode image density adjustment/individual setup (super fine mode)
ADJ11F Adjust the image gamma in scanner mode 46-27
ADJ12 Common image quality ADJ12A Correct the image density in original table mode/DSPF mode (Copy mode) 46-20
adjustments for all of copy, scan, ADJ12B Set up the auto mode operation for copy, scan, and fax 46-19
and fax modes
MX-M700N ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 1
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ13 Adjusting the fusing paper guide position
ADJ14 Adjusting the paper size detection ADJ14A Adjust the paper width sensor for the manual paper feed tray 40-2
ADJ14B Adjust the paper width sensor for paper feed tray 3 40-12
ADJ14C Adjust the paper width sensor for the DSPF paper feed tray 53-6
ADJ15 Adjusting the original size ADJ15A Adjust the detection point of the original size sensor 41-1
detection (in original table mode) (in original table mode)
ADJ15B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ16 Adjusting the touch panel coordinates 65-1
ADJ17 Adjusting the supply voltage
4. Datails of adjustment
ADJ 1 Adjusting high voltage values

NOTE: Adjusting the output voltage requires the ability to measure
internal impedance of 1000 :. In addition, use high voltage
probe together. (FLUKE87FLUKE80K-40 is recom-
mended.)
1-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage

This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The high voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC) has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
(Main charger grid voltage adjustment)
Simulation High voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC)

Item/operation mode
Setting range Default Connector Pin # Actual voltage
Copy Auto mode 8-2 AUTO 200 – 1000 580 CN2 3 -590r2v
Text mode CHARACTER 200 – 1000 580 CN2 3 -590r2v
Text/photo mode MIX 200 – 1000 580 CN2 3 -590r2v
Photo mode PHOTO 200 – 1000 580 CN2 3 -590r2v
Printer All modes PRINTER 200 – 1000 580 CN2 3 -590r2v
FAX All modes FAX 200 – 1000 580 CN2 3 -590r2v
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
2) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CN2 pin (3) of the
high voltage PWB and the chassis GND. SIMULATION 8-2
MAIN GRID SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1.AUTO (200-1000)
580
CN2
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

Or after 30sec output.
3
SIMULATION 8-2
MAIN GRID SETTING. EXECUTING···.
1.AUTO
580
4) Select the number that corresponds to the adjustment item
using the numeric keypad.
3) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-2. 5) Press the Start key.
6) Press the start key to have the voltage output for 30 seconds.
The operation can be stopped with the SYSTEM SETTINGS
SIMULATION 8-2
MAIN GRID SETTING. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START. key.
1.AUTO 580 2.CHARACTER 580 If the output voltage is not within the requirement, do the fol-
3.MIX 580 4.PHOTO 580 1 lowing steps.
5.PRINTER 580 6.FAX 580
7) Enter the adjustment value using the numeric keypad.
8) Press the Start key.
(The adjustment value is put into memory, and the correspond-
ing voltage is output for 30 seconds.)
Repeat steps 7 to 8 until the output requirement is satisfied.
1-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
* The high voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC) has been replaced.
(Main charger grid voltage adjustment)
Simulation High voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC)

Item/operation mode
Setting range Default Connector Pin # Actual voltage
Copy Auto mode 8-1 AUTO 0 – 750 495 CN2 7 –500r5v
Text mode CHARACTER 0 – 750 495 CN2 7 –500r5v
Text/photo mode MIX 0 – 750 495 CN2 7 –500r5v
Photo mode PHOTO 0 – 750 495 CN2 7 –500r5v
Printer All modes PRINTER 0 – 750 495 CN2 7 –500r5v
FAX All modes FAX 0 – 750 495 CN2 7 –500r5v
Cleaning mode PLUS 0 – 250 150 CN2 7 +500r5v
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
high voltage PWB and the chassis GND. SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
1:AUTO (0-750)
495
CN2

3
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. EXECUTING···.
1:AUTO
495
3) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1. 5) Press the Start key.
6) Press the start key to have the voltage output for 30 seconds.
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START. key.
1.AUTO 495 2.CHARACTER 495 If the output voltage is not within the requirement, do the fol-
3.MIX 495 4.PHOTO 495 1 lowing steps.
5.PRINTER 495 6.FAX 495 7.PLUS 150
8) Press the Start key. (The adjustment value is put into memory,
and the corresponding voltage is output for 30 seconds.)
Repeat steps 7 to 8 until the output requirement is satisfied.
1-C Adjust the transfer current, voltage

(Transfer voltage adjustment)
Item/ Simulation Adjustment
Actual voltage
operation Setting Default voltage Connector Pin #
/actual current
mode range (monitor voltage)
Front print 8-6 FRONT 0 – 800 350 – – – 35r1.0PA (1.0 – 1.5Kv) High voltage
400 * 40r1.0PA (2.0 – 2.5Kv) * power PWB
Back print BACK 0 – 800 350 – – – 35r1.0PA (1.0 – 1.5Kv) (MC/DV/TC)
400 * 40r1.0PA (2.0 – 2.5Kv) *
Transfer belt 8-17 SHV FRONT 0 – 600 450 – – – AC4.5Kv (p-p)
(cleaning) SHV BACK 0 – 600 450 – – – AC4.5Kv (p-p)
THV- 0 – 75 10 DC – 100r10v CN2 1 DC –100r10v/AC4.5Kv (p-p)
Transfer 8-18 CRHV PLUS 0 – 250 200 +2.0r10.1v – Check +2000r100v High voltage
roller pin power PWB
(cleaning) (TC cleaning)
Transfer CRHV MINUS 0 – 250 200 –2.0r10.1v – Check –2000r100v
roller (print) pin
* MX-M700 only
Transfer voltage adjustment (print operation mode) 3) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-17.
* The high voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC) has been replaced. SIMULATION 8-17
* U2 trouble has occurred. TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1.SHV FRONT 450
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. 2.SHV BACK 450 1
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 3.THV- 10
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-6.

SIMULATION 8-6
THV+ SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
1.FRONT 400
2.BACK 400 1 SIMULATION 8-17
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
55ppm/62ppm = 350 1.FRONT (0-600)
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 450
SIMULATION 8-6 Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

THV+ SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. Or after 30sec output.
1.FRONT(0-800)
400
SIMULATION 8-17
55ppm/62ppm = 350 TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. EXECUTING···.
1.FRONT(0-600)
Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 450
(SHV FRONT / SHV BACK) using the numeric keypad.
SIMULATION 8-6 5) Press the Start key.
THV+ SETTING. EXECUTING···.
1.FRONT 6) Set each adjustment item to the default value (enter the adjust-
400 ment value and then press the Start key).
* The adjustment items (SHV FRONT / SHV BACK)
55ppm/62ppm = 350 correspond to the AC component of the 'transfer belt clean-
2) Select the number that corresponds to the adjustment item ing mode voltage' applied to the transfer roller, but this volt-
(FRONT/BACK) using the numeric keypad. age component cannot be determined. If the voltage seems
3) Press the Start key. to be abnormal after setting the default adjustment value,
therefore, the high voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC) should be
4) Enter the adjustment value (default) using the numeric keypad.
replaced.
7) Select the number that corresponds to cleaning operation
(The adjustment value is put into memory, and the correspond- mode (THV-) using the numeric keypad.
ing current is output for 30 seconds.)
* The adjustment items (THV-) corresponds to the DC compo-
The operation can be stopped with the SYSTEM SETTINGS key. nent of the 'transfer belt cleaning mode voltage' applied to
NOTE: It is not possible to determine the adjusted transfer voltage the transfer roller.
(print operation mode) (FRONT/BACK). If the voltage 8) Press the Start key.
seems to be abnormal after setting the default value, there- 9) Press the Start key to have the voltage output for 30 seconds.
fore, the high voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC) should be
If the output voltage is not within the requirement, do the fol-
replaced.
lowing steps.
Transfer voltage adjustment (transfer belt cleaning mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: key.
* The high voltage power PWB (MC/DV/TC) has been replaced. 10) Enter the adjustment value using the numeric keypad.
* U2 trouble has occurred. 11) Press the Start key.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. (The adjustment value is put into memory, and the correspond-
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. ing voltage is output for 30 seconds.)
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine. Repeat steps 10 to 11 until the output requirement is satisfied.
high voltage PWB and the chassis GND.
(1)
CN2
Transfer voltage adjustment (transfer roller cleaning/transfer 4) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-18.
roller print modes)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: SIMULATION 8-18
* The high voltage power PWB (TC cleaning) has been replaced. TRANSFER CLEANING ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS
* U2 trouble has occurred. START.

1.CRHV PLUS 200 1
2.CRHV MINUS 200
1) Connect the transfer section to the main body side using the
transfer extension harness (DHAi-3629FCZZ).
SIMULATION 8-18
TRANSFER CLEANING ROLLER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND
PRESS START.
1.CRHV PLUS (0-250)
200

SIMULATION 8-18
2) Remove the front frame cover of the duplex section, and TRANSFER CLEANING ROLLER SETTING. EXECUTING···.
1.CRHV PLUS(0-250)
remove the rear frame cover of the transfer section. 200
(CRHV PLUS / CRHV MINUS) using the numeric keypad.
7) Press the Start key to have the voltage output for 30 seconds.
key.
If the output voltage is not within the requirement, do the fol-
lowing steps.
(The adjustment value is put into memory, and the correspond-
3) Apply a digital multi-meter to the check pin of the high voltage ing voltage is output for 30 seconds.)
PWB (TC cleaning) and the chassis GND. Repeat steps 8 to 9 until the output requirement is satisfied.
ADJ 2 Adjusting the developing unit

2-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* The print density is low.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing unit of the machine.
2) Remove the developing unit cover and blade cover.
3) Loosen the DV doctor fixing screws. 7) On both sides of the DV doctor and at its center, make sure
that the DV doctor gap is 0.525r0.03.
4) Manually turn the DV roller to align the marking on the DV

roller surface with the DV doctor position.
* When inserting a clearance gauge, take care not to damage the

DV doctor or MG roller.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 until the DV doctor gap meets the requirement.
2-B Adjust the developing roller main pole

* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* The print density is low.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Remove the developing unit cover and blade cover, and then
5) Insert a 0.525mm clearance gauge in between the DV roller
place the developing unit on a level surface.
and DV doctor so that the gauge is positioned at a distance of
40 mm to 70 mm from the DV doctor end face. 3) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
4) With the string in hand, bring the needle closer to the DV roller
while keeping the needle parallel with the roller. (Do not use a
OO
clip, which does not accurately indicate the position.)
OO
OO
OO
6) Tighten the DV doctor fixing screws while pressing the DV

doctor in the arrow direction. 5) Keeping the needle 2 to 3 mm off the DV roller surface, mark
the DV roller surface at an extension of the needle tip. (Do not
(This should be done for both front and rear frames.)
let the needle tip contact the DV roller.)
6) Measure the distance between the marking on the DV roller 2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 64-1.
and leading edge of the DV doctor, and make sure that it is
19r0.5mm. SIMULATION 64-1
SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT :1 1. PRINT START
2. PRINT PATTERN:87 3. DENSITY :1 1
4. MULTI : 1 5. MODE :1
6. LEVEL : 1 7. DUPLEX :1
Select 1, and Select other than 1, Press [START] key, or press

press [START] and press [START] [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
key. key.
(2) SIMULATION 64-1

SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
(PRINT PATTERN)
19 0.5 mm
INPUT 1-98.
71
(3) SIMULATION 64-1
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps. SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
(DENSITY)
7) Remove the front cover. 1-255 100
(4) SIMULATION 64-1
(MULTI COUNT)
1-999 1
(5) SIMULATION 64-1
(MODE)
1.STANDARD 2.SMOOTHING 3.TONER SAVE 4.HALF TONE
5.SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE 6.SMOOTHING+ HALF TONE
7.TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE
8) Loosen the fixing screws of the developing roller main pole 8.SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE 1
adjusting plate, and make adjustments by moving the adjust-
ing plate in the arrow direction.
(6) SIMULATION 64-1
(LEVEL)
1-5 3
(0) SIMULATION 64-1
(FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 5.BPT
6.LCC
1
(7) SIMULATION 64-1
(DUPLEX)
1.NO 2.YES 1
Repeat steps 3 to 6 until the developing roller main pole meets the
positional requirement. SIMULATION 64-1
SELFT PRINT MODE.. EXECUTING···
0. TRAY SELECT :1
2. PRINT PATTERN:87 3. DENSITY :1
ADJ 3 Adjusting image distortions 4. MULTI : 1 5. MODE :1 0
6. LEVEL : 1 7. DUPLEX :1
3-A Adjust print image distortions (LSU

parallelism adjustment) 3) Select PRINT PATTERN using the numeric keypad.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 4) Select print pattern 71 (grid pattern).
* The LSU has been replaced or removed. 5) Press the Start key.
* Print images are distorted. 6) Select PRINT START using the numeric keypad.
This adjustment should be followed by: 7) Press the Start key.
ADJ 7 / ADJ 7A: Adjust the print image off-center (print engine sec-
tion)
1) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to Tray 1.
8) Check the printed grid pattern for distortions. 11) Loosen the LSU fixing screws, and change the LSU fixing
[Check Method 1] angle.
Compare the front frame side and rear frame side of the * If the vertical line image is inclined to the left with respect to the
printed paper in terms of the distance between the outer end of front frame side, move the LSU fixing plate in arrow direction (a).
the grid pattern image and the edge of the paper. * If the vertical line image is inclined to the right with respect to the
No adjustment is needed if the difference between these front frame side, move the LSU fixing plate in arrow direction (b).
dimensions is within 0.5 mm.
R a
Ra-Fb<r0.5mm
F b
[Check Method 2]
Check the printed grid pattern for distortions.
If the right-angle level of the traverse print line is 0.5mm or less
with respect to the longitudinal print line of paper, no adjust-
b
ment is needed.
a
Repeat steps 5 to 11 until an acceptable result is obtained.
3-B Adjust the scanner (reading) unit

parallelism
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* Scanned images are distorted.
1) Loosen the fixing screws for Scanner Unit A and scanner drive
wire to release the scanner unit from the drive wire.
Carry out the following work if the situation is unsatisfactory.

9) Draw out the manual paper feed tray, and remove the front
frame side, side cover, fan cover cabinet, and fan unit.
10) Remove the fan unit.
2) Manually turn the scanner drive pulley, and move Scanner Unit 8) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
B until contact with the two stoppers on the CCD mounting scanner unit drive pulley so that Scanner Unit B makes contact
plate. with both of the two stoppers on the CCD mounting plate at the
If Scanner Unit B makes contact with the two stoppers on the same time. (Change the positional relationship between the
CCD mounting plate simultaneously, the parallelism of Scan- scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
ner Unit B is proper. 9) With Scanner Unit B in contact with both of the two stoppers
on the CCD mounting plate at the same time, align the end
face of Scanner Unit A with the right-hand side end face of the
frame, and fix Scanner Unit A with the screws. (Make position-
ing by using the ruler to right side of the scanner frame (F/R)
and fix to the wire.)
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Loosen the pulley angle fixing screw on either the front or rear
frame side of Scanner Unit B.
4) Adjust the pulley angle position on Scanner Unit B so that the

scanner unit makes contact with both of the two stoppers on
the CCD mounting plate at the same time.
5) Fix the pulley angle on Scanner Unit B.
If the above steps fail to provide an acceptable result, then do

the following steps.
6) Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley that is
not in contact.
7) Manually turning the scanner unit drive pulley, move Scanner
Unit B until it comes into contact with the two stoppers on the
CCD mounting plate.
Scanner Unit B
Winding pulley
4) Loosen either of two fixing screws of the scanner unit drive pul-
3-C Adjust scanned image distortions in the ley. (Either one on the front or the rear side will do.)
sub-scanning direction
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
L 5) With the scanner unit drive shaft kept stationary, manually turn
the scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of Scan-
2) Set the test chart made in step 1 on the document table (about ner Units A and B. (Change the positional relationship between
30mm in front of the document standard setting position), and the scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper with the DSPF unit open. 6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
If the above steps fail to eliminate distortions in the sub scanning
51 2
A5 B5
A4
A5
81 2
B5
11
A4
13 14
B4 A3
17
direction, do the steps described in "ADJ 3E: Adjust scanned image
distortions in the main scanning direction –2".
30mm
3-D Adjust scanned image distortions in the

51 2
A5
main scanning direction – 1
B5
The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
81 2
A5
A4
B5
B4 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
11
A4
A3
3) Check for distortions in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
L L
La Lb
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart made in step 1 on the document table, and
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
If there is some distortion in the sub scanning direction, do the

following steps.
3) Check for distortions in the main scanning direction.
3-E Adjust scanned image distortions in the
If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles,
there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are main scanning direction – 2
needed. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
L L
If there is some distortion in the main scanning direction, do

4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
and right-hand side images distortions. L = 10mm
L
Lc Lc
2) Set the test chart made in step 1 on the document table, and
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
Copy A Copy B
51 2 81 2 11 13 14 17
A4
A5 B5 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3
30mm
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on 51 2
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left. A5
Lc = Ld B5
A5
A4
81 2
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right. B5

B4
(The distortions are balanced.) 11
A4
A3
If the above requirement is satisfied, then do the steps

described in "ADJ 3E: Adjust scanned image distortions in the
main scanning direction – 2".
If the above requirement is not met, then do the following 3) Check for distortions in the main scanning direction.
steps.
If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles,
5) Change the height balance of the front frame side scanner rail. there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are
needed.
If there is some distortion in the main scanning direction, do

the following steps. These steps assume that there is no or lit-
* If the paper leading edge is more distorted than the paper tle difference in distortion between the paper's leading and
trailing edge, then raise the scanner rail right side. trailing edges.
* If the leading edge is less distorted than the paper trailing If there is some difference in distortion between the paper's
edge, then lower the scanner rail right side. leading and trailing edges, these steps should be preceded by
6) Set the test chart made in step 1 on the document table, and the adjustment steps described in "ADJ 3D: Adjust scanned
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. image distortions in the main scanning direction - 1", intended
to provide almost the same level of distortion on the leading
7) Check the image distortion balance in the main scanning direc-
and trailing edges.
tion.
Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the difference in size of image distortion
(distortion balance) in the image scanning direction is equal.
4) Remove the document table glass, and make adjustments by 3) Gently pulling out each check sheet for DSPF levelness
turning the main scanning direction image distortion adjusting adjustment, make sure that no gap is felt between the CIS
screw. guide boss and the glass for DSPF mode for each of the front
and rear frame sides.
* If the rear frame side image is shifted toward the paper's leading
edge, then turn the adjusting screw clockwise.
* If the front frame side image is shifted toward the paper's leading
edge, then turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
It changes approx. 0.5mm by 90 degrees rotation.
If the above requirement is not met, do step 4.
4) Turn the height adjusting screw on the left side of the DSPF
rear frame to adjust the fore/aft levelness between the DSPF
frames.
ADJ 4 Adjusting DSPF parallelism
4-A Adjusting the DSPF parallelism
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced.
1) Create two check sheets for DSPF levelness adjustment by
cutting copy paper as illustrated below:
L
R
OO
If the front frame side is higher (i.e. there is a gap in B) : turn the
height adjusting screw L on the left side of the DSPF rear frame in
the clockwise direction.
A4 size
If the rear frame side is higher (i.e. there is a gap in A) : turn the
height adjusting screw L on the left side of the DSPF rear frame in
2) Insert each of the two check sheets in between the CIS guide the counterclockwise direction.
boss and the glass for DSPF mode on each of the front and Repeat steps 2 to 4 until an acceptable result is obtained.
rear frame sides, and then close the DSPF unit.
NOTE: If the above procedure will not allow an adjustment, turn
the adjustment screw R on the rear frame of the DSPF to
perform an adjustment.
[Check Method 2]
4-B Adjust DSPF skews Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 0.5mm.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-1.
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to A
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A
If the above requirement is met for the copied image of the
paper's front side but not for the paper's back side, skip to step
4.
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3.
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.
B
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in duplex mode, and then check the image for skews
(Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the adjustment
chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1mm
A B
4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1mm
C D
c d
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right
side of the DSPF rear frame.
ADJ 5 Adjusting the image focus
Remove the hexagon cap nut of the DSPF skew adjusting
screw on the right side of the DSPF hinge and loosen the fixing The result of this adjustment will affect all image scan modes (copy,
nut, then adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw scan, and fax).
(hexagon screw).
5-A Adjust the image focus in original table
mode and DSPF front-face mode (CCD)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* Copied/scanned/faxed images are not correctly focused.
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
3.CCD(MAIN) 50 4.CCD(SUB) 50 5.SPF(SUB) 50
6.CIS(MAIN) 50 7.SPF(MAIN) 50 2
Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew adjusting
screw (hexagon screw). (When the main scanning direction SIMULATION 48-1
print line is shifted to the left) MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START.
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw
(hexagon screw). (When the main scanning direction print line
4.CCD(SUB) 50
is shifted to the right)
Select 1, and Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
Repeat steps 2 to 5 until an acceptable result is obtained. press [START] key. or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 48-1
[If the copied image of the paper's back side is skewed MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
beyond the acceptable level, do the following steps.]
6) Remove the DSPF front cover.
7) Change the front frame side CIS fixing position (angle) to Press [START] key, or press
Select 0, and press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
adjust the skew of the copied image of the paper's back side.
This adjustment should be done by loosening the CIS fixing
SIMULATION 48-1
screw on the DSPF front side and then moving the fixing plate MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START.
in the left or right direction. (FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
5.BPT 6.LCC 1
(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE)
Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press

[START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT.
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%) 100
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default).
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
51 2 81 2 11 13 14 17
A4
A5 B5 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3
If c < d, then shift the CIS fixing plate to the right. (When the
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100110120130140
main scanning direction print line is shifted to the left)

If c > d, then shift the CIS fixing plate to the left. (When the 51 2
main scanning direction print line is shifted to the right) A5
B5
Repeat steps 2 to 7 until an acceptable result is obtained. A5

A4
81 2
B5
B4
11
A4
A3
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. 9) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub-scanning
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale direction) to change its mounted position.
length in terms of length.
100mm scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
B
0.8mm
Copy image A
(1mm (1%) shorter 10 20 90 100 110
than the original) If the copied image is not satisfactorily focused and larger than
the original, slide the unit in direction B.
If the copied image is not satisfactorily focused and smaller
than the original, slide the unit in direction A.
If the copied image of the scale is of almost the same length as
* After adjusting the CCD unit position, fix the CCD unit so
the actual scale but is not satisfactorily focused, do the follow-
that it is in parallel with the marker line added in step 7,
ing steps.
referring to the graduations on the front and rear frames
6) Remove the table glass and dark box cover. sides of the CCD unit base.
7) To prevent the CCD unit optical axis from being deviated, mark Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the copied image of the scale is of almost
the CCD unit base as illustrated below. the same size as the actual scale and the image is satisfactorily
focused.
5-B Adjust the image focus in DSPF back-face

mode (CIS)
* The CIS unit has been removed.
* The CIS unit has been replaced.
* Copied/scanned/faxed images are not correctly focused.
* The DSPF unit has been removed.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Remove the rear frame and front frame cabinet of the DSPF
unit.
4) Adjust the focus by turning the CIS focus adjusting screws on
8) Loosen two fixing screws of the CCD unit. the front and rear frame sides, respectively.
* The screws cross-marked in the illustration must not be

loosened.
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.
2) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
3) Measure the lengths of the copied image of the scale and the
actual scale.
100mm scale
(Original)
10 20 90 100 110
0.8mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%) shorter
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is than the original)
10 20 90 100 110
obtained.
ADJ 6 Adjusting the image 4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following
formula:
magnification Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension/original
dimension x 100
6-A Adjust the image magnification in the main Example: Compare the copy and original dimensions by align-
scanning direction in original table mode ing the scale's 10 mm position with the copied image's 10 mm
(CCD) position.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine. If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100r0.8%),
* The CCD unit has been replaced. no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following steps.
* Images are not correctly magnified in the main scanning direc- 5) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 48-1.
tion.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. SIMULATION 48-1
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
1) Place a scale on the original table in parallel with the main Select other than 0 - 2,
scanning direction, as illustrated below. and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 48-1
51 2 81 2 11 13 14 17
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
A4
A5 B5 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3
START.
4.CCD(SUB) 50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100110120130140

press [START] key. or terminate copying.
51 2
A5
B5 SIMULATION 48-1
A5
A4 MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
81 2
B5
B4
11
A4
A3
Press [START] key, or press

SIMULATION 48-1
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT 6.LCC 1

SIMULATION 48-1
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%) 100
6) Select the number that corresponds to the adjustment item 4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following
CCD (MAIN) using the numeric keypad. formula:
This adjustment items is intended to adjust the image magnifi- Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension/original
cation in the main scanning direction in original table mode dimension x 100
(CCD). Example: Compare the copy and original dimensions by align-
7) Press the Start key. ing the scale's 10 mm position with the copied image's 10 mm
8) Adjust the image magnification factor by entering an appropri- position.
ate value through the numeric keypad. Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
9) Press the P or Start key. If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100r0.8%),
Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as applying the no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following steps.
adjustment value. 5) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 48-1.
Repeat steps 2 to 9 until the image magnification factor is satisfac-
tory.
SIMULATION 48-1
6-B Adjust the image magnification in the sub- 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
scanning direction in original table mode 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
(CCD) 6.CIS(MAIN) 50 7.SPF(MAIN) 50 2
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine. Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* Images are not correctly magnified in the sub-scanning direction.
SIMULATION 48-1
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. START.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
4.CCD(SUB) 50
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred. press [START] key. or terminate copying.
1) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
SIMULATION 48-1
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100110120130140

SIMULATION 48-1
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT 6.LCC 1

SIMULATION 48-1
2) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT.
3) Measure the lengths of the copied image of the scale and the (MAGNIFICATION)
actual scale. INPUT 25-400(%) 100
CCD (SUB) using the numeric keypad. This adjustment item is
intended to adjust the image magnification in the sub scanning
direction in original table mode (CCD).
100mm scale
10 20 90 100 110 7) Press the Start key.
(Original)
8) Adjust the image magnification factor by entering an appropri-
ate value through the numeric keypad.
9) Press the P or Start key.
0.8mm Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as applying the
adjustment value.
Repeat steps 2 to 9 until the image magnification factor is satisfac-
Copy image tory.
(1mm (1%) shorter 10 20 90 100 110
than the original)
6-C Adjust the image magnification in the main
scanning direction in DSPF front-face mode SIMULATION 48-1
(CCD)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine. 3.CCD(MAIN) 50 4.CCD(SUB) 50 5.SPF(SUB) 50

* Images are not correctly magnified in the main scanning direc- Select other than 0 - 2,
tion. and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. SIMULATION 48-1
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. START.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. 4.CCD(SUB) 50
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated Select 1, and Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
below.
SIMULATION 48-1
A4 size
SIMULATION 48-1
(FEED TRAY)
10mm 10mm 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
5.BPT 6.LCC 1

SIMULATION 48-1
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%) 100
2) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
3) Measure the lengths of the copied image and the original 6) Using the mumeric keypad, select the number that corre-
image. sponds to the mode for which to make adjustments.
Select the adjustment item that is intended to adjust the image
magnification in the main scanning direction in DSPF front-
original 7)
face mode (CCD). (SPF (MAIN))
Press the Start key.
copy 9) Press the P or Start key.
10 50 100 150 200 250
Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as applying the
adjustment value.
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.
10 50 100 150 200 250
4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following

formula:
Image magnification factor (%) = Copy dimension/original
dimension x 100
Image magnification factor (%) = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100r0.8%),
no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following steps.
6-D Adjust the image magnification in the main
scanning direction in DSPF back-face mode SIMULATION 48-1
(CIS) 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. 3.CCD(MAIN) 50 4.CCD(SUB) 50 5.SPF(SUB) 50
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.

* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* Images are not correctly magnified in the main scanning direc- SIMULATION 48-1
tion.
START.
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such a duplex original as 4.CCD(SUB) 50
illustrated below.
A4 size SIMULATION 48-1


(both sides) Select 0, and press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
10mm 10mm
SIMULATION 48-1
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT 6.LCC 1

2) Make a normal duplex copy on A4 paper. SIMULATION 48-1

3) Measure the lengths of the copied image (on the back side) MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT.
and the original image. (MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%) 100
original 6) Select the number that corresponds to the adjustment item

CIS (MAIN) using the numeric keypad.
This adjustment item is intended to adjust the image magnifi-
copy cation in the main scanning direction in DSPF back-face mode
(CIS). (CIS (MAIN))
10 50 100 150 200 250
10 50 100 150 200 250
9) Press the P or Start key. Pressing the Start key starts copy
operation as well as applying the adjustment value.
4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
formula: obtained.
dimension x 100
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100r0.8%),
no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following steps.
6-E Adjust the image magnification in the sub-
scanning direction in DSPF mode SIMULATION 48-1
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
* Images are not correctly magnified in the sub-scanning direction. 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. Select other than 0 - 2,
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

SIMULATION 48-1
1) On the DSPF original tray, place such an original as illustrated
below. START.
4.CCD(SUB) 50
10mm
A4 size SIMULATION 48-1


10mm
SIMULATION 48-1
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT 6.LCC 1

2) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. SIMULATION 48-1

3) Measure the lengths of the copied image and the original
(MAGNIFICATION)
image. INPUT 25-400(%) 100
SPF (SUB) using the numeric keypad.
10
This adjustment items is intended to adjust the image magnifi-

50
cation in the sub-scanning direction in DSPF mode.

(SPF (SUB))
100
10
original 8) Adjust the image magnification factor by entering an appropri-

150
50

200
100

Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as apply-
copy
150
ing the adjustment value. Repeat the above adjustments until

an acceptable result is obtained.
200
* After adjusting the image magnification in the sub-scanning

4) Determine the image magnification factor using the following direction through Simulation 48-1, do the following steps if
formula: making a copy at a different magnification factor fails to pro-
duce a correctly scaled copy.
dimension x 100 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 48-5.
If the image magnification factor is within the spec (100r0.8%), SIMULATION 48-5
no adjustment is required; otherwise, do the following steps. MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-4, AND PRESS START.
0.MIR(220) 50 1.MIR(110) 50
2.SPF(360) 50
4.SPF(110) 50
3.SPF(220) 50
0
Select 0 - 5, and Press [START] key, or press

press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Setting
Item Default
SIMULATION 48-5 range
SCAN MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND 0 TRAY Paper feed tray 1–6 –
PRESS START. SELECT selection
0.MIR(220)
50 1 PRINT
START
Print start (Default) – –
(Lead edge adjustment value)

2) Using the numeric keypad, select the number that corresponds 2 RRCB Resist roller clutch 0 – 99 50
to the mode for which to make adjustments. ON timing
3) Press the Start key. adjustment value
SIDE2-ADJ Offset (adjustment) 1 – 99
4) Enter the copy adjustment value using the numeric keypad. of the RRCB setting
Make adjustments by changing the adjustment value for high during rear print.
revolution mode if the copy magnification is not correct for (Resist adjustment value)
microcopies; or the adjustment value for low revolution mode if 3 TRAY1 Tray 1 adjustment 0 – 99 50
the copy magnification is not correct for blowbacks. 4 TRAY2 Tray 2 adjustment
5) Press the Start key. This applies the adjustment value. 5 TRAY3 Tray 3 adjustment
6 TRAY4 Tray 4 adjustment
7 BPT Manual feed tray
adjustment
ADJ 7 Adjusting the image off-center 8 LCC Side LCC
adjustment
7-A Adjust the print image off-center 9 ADU Adjustment when
paper is fed again
(print engine section)
from ADU
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Off-center set value) Self print
* The paper feed section has been disassembled. 10 TRAY 1 Tray 1 adjustment – –
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. 11 TRAY 2 Tray 2 adjustment – –
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. 12 TRAY 3 Tray 3 adjustment – –
13 TRAY 4 Tray 4 adjustment – –
14 BPT Manual feed tray – –
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. adjustment
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. 15 LCC Side LCC – –
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. adjustment
16 ADU Adjustment when – –
* The LSU has been replaced. paper is fed again
* U2 trouble has occurred. from ADU
(Print image off-center adjustment) (Void set value)
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-5. 7 LEAD_EDG Lead edge void set 0 – 99 35
E(DENA) value
8 TRAIL_ED Rear edge void
SIMULATION 50-5
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-20, AND PRESS START. GE(DENB) adjustment value
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START 9 FRONT/ Front/Rear void
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
LEAD EDGE: 2.RRCB 50 20.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
2 REAR adjustment value
RESIST: 3.T1 50 4.T2 50 5.T3 50 6.T4 50 2) Enter the number that corresponds to the paper feed tray that
7.BPT 50 8.LCC 50 9.ADU 50 needs adjustments. (Choose from numbers 10 to 16.)
OFF CENTER: 10.T1 50 11.T2 50 12.T3 50 13.T4 50
14.BPT 50 15.LCC 50 16.ADU 50 3) Press the Start key.
(VOID SETTING) 17.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 50
18.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 30 19.FRONT/REAR 30 A self-print pattern image is printed.
Select other than 0 - 1, and
Check the off-center of the printed self-print pattern image.
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. If so, no adjustment is required.
SIMULATION 50-5 Measure the void area dimensions in the front and rear frame
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS directions, and make sure that the difference between the two
START. dimensions is within 0r1.5 mm.
2.RRCB 50
Select 1, and Press [START] key.
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
key, or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 50-5
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING.

SIMULATION 50-5
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 1
5.BPT 6.LCC
SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS
START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
1.COPY START 2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
3.PLATEN 50 4.SPF SIDE1 50 5.SPF SIDE2 50

press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
3.PLATEN 50
press [START] Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
key.1 or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
Press [START] key,

Select 0, and press [START] key.
or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 50-12
START.
(FEED TRAY)
1
5.BPT 6.LCC

If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
5) Using the numeric keypad, change the adjustment value in
steps of 0.1 mm. A larger setting shifts the printed image
toward the front side. SIMULATION 50-12
ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT.
6) Press the P or Start key. Pressing the Start key starts print
operation as well as applying the adjustment value. Check the
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)
100
off-center of the printed self-print pattern image.
Repeat steps 5 to 6 until an acceptable result is obtained. Increasing the adjustment value by 0.1 mm/step causes posi-
tion of the printed image toward the front side.
7-B Adjust the scanned image off-center in Setting

Item Default
range
original table mode (scan section) 0 TRAY Paper feed tray selection 1–5 –
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: SELECT
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. 1 COPY Copy START (Default) – –
START
2 MAGNIFICA Print magnification ratio 25 – 100
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. TION 400%
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. (Off-center adjustment value)
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. 3 PLATEN OC mode adjustment 0 – 99 50
4 SPF SIDE1 SPF front surface
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
adjustment
* U2 trouble has occurred. 5 SPF SIDE2 SPF back surface
(Adjustment mode selection) adjustment
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-12. 2) Using the numeric keypad, select the adjustment item
PLATEN, which is intended to adjust the off-center in original
table mode.
(Scan off-center adjustment)
1) Place an original on the original table. SIMULATION 50-12
2) Press the Start key. START.
Check the off-center of the printed image. 0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
1.COPY START 2
If the off-center is 0r4.0 mm, no adjustment is required.
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
original copy
a Select other than 0 - 2, and
SIMULATION 50-12
PRESS START.
b 3.PLATEN 50
Press [START] key.
Select 1, and
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
SIMULATION 50-12
steps of 0.1 mm to adjust the scan image off-center. A larger
setting shifts the printed image toward the front side.
Press [START] key,
Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as apply- Select 0, and press [START] key. or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
ing the adjustment value.
SIMULATION 50-12
5) Check the off-center of the printed image.
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is START.
obtained. (FEED TRAY)
1
5.BPT 6.LCC
7-C Adjust the scanned image off-center in
DSPF front-face mode (scan section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 50-12
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT.
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. (MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)
100
* U2 trouble has occurred. Increasing the adjustment value by 0.1 mm/step causes posi-
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. tion of the printed image toward the front side.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. Setting
Item Default
(Adjustment mode selection) range
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-12. 0 TRAY Paper feed tray selection 1–5 –
SELECT
1 COPY Copy START (Default) – –
START
2 MAGNIFI Print magnification ratio 25 – 100
CATION 400%
(Off-center adjustment value)
3 PLATEN OC mode adjustment 0 – 99 50
4 SPF SIDE1 SPF front surface adjustment
5 SPF SIDE2 SPF back surface adjustment
2) Using the numeric keypad, select the adjustment item DSPF
SIDE1, which is intended to adjust the off-center in DSPF
front-face mode.
(Scan off-center adjustment) (Adjustment mode selection)
1) Place an original on the DSPF original tray. 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-12.
2) Press the Start key. Check the off-center of the printed image.
If the off-center is 0r2.5 mm, no adjustment is required. SIMULATION 50-12
START.
original copy 0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
1.COPY START 2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
a

b
SIMULATION 50-12
PRESS START.
3.PLATEN 50
SIMULATION 50-12
Press [START] key,

Select 0, and press [START] key. or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 50-12
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. START.
steps of 0.1 mm to adjust the scan image off-center. A larger
(FEED TRAY)
1
setting shifts the printed image toward the rear side. 5.BPT 6.LCC
operation as well as applying the adjustment value.
Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or
[START] key. press [SYSTEM
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is SETTINGS] key.
obtained.
SIMULATION 50-12
7-D Adjust the scanned image off-center in ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT.
DSPF back-face mode (scan section) (MAGNIFICATION)
100
INPUT 25-400(%)
Increasing the adjustment value by 0.1 mm/step causes posi-
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. tion of the printed image toward the front side.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. Setting
Item Default
range
0 TRAY Paper feed tray selection 1–5 –
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. SELECT
* U2 trouble has occurred. 1 COPY Copy START (Default) – –
START
2 MAGNIFI Print magnification ratio 25 – 100
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. CATION 400%
3 PLATEN OC mode adjustment 0 – 99 50
4 SPF SIDE1 SPF front surface adjustment
5 SPF SIDE2 SPF back surface adjustment
2) Using the numeric keypad, select the adjustment item DSPF
SIDE2, which is intended to adjust the off-center in DSPF
back-face mode.
(Scan off-center adjustment)
1) Place an original on the DSPF original tray.
Papar lead edge Papar tail edge
Since the front side and back side images are copied onto sep-
arate sheets, check the off-center of the back side image.
No Image
If the off-center is 0r2.7 mm, no adjustment is required.
Void (RV)
original copy
LIL = 1.5 mm
a 10 20 LV = 3.5 mm
TV = 3.5 mm No Image
FV+RV= 7.0 mm
Void (TV)
Image loss (LIL)
b No Image
Void (LV) No Image
Void (FV)
SIMULATION 50-1
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
2.MAGNIFICATION 100 2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.RRCA 50 4.RRCB 50 10.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. 8.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 30 9.FRONT/REAR 30
steps of 0.1 mm to adjust the scan image off-center. A larger press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
setting shifts the printed image toward the rear side.
SIMULATION 50-1
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as apply- START.
ing the adjustment value. 3.RRCA 50
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is Press [SYSTEM SETTING] key,
press [START] key.
or terminate copying.
obtained.
SIMULATION 50-1
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING.
ADJ 8 Adjusting the image position, Press [START] key,

image loss, and void area or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 50-1
8-A Adjust copied image loss/void area in LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
(FEED TRAY)
original table mode
5.BPT 6.LCC
1
* The paper feed section has been disassembled.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. SIMULATION 50-1
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT.
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-400(%)
100
* The LSU has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred. Setting
Item Content Default
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection 1–6 –
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) – –
2 MAGNIFICATI Print magnification ratio 25 – –
ON 400%
3 RRCA Document scan start position 0 – 99 50
adjustment value
4 RRCB Resist roller clutch ON timing
adjustment value
Setting (Trailing edge void area adjustment)
range 1) Make a copy at 100% magnification by entering "100" into the
SIDE2-ADJ Offset (adjustment) of the 1 – 99 50 (MAGNIFICATION) field and then pressing the Start key, and
RRCB setting during rear print. check the trailing edge void area.
(Image loss set value)
(Standard setting) Trailing edge void area: 3.5 mm
5 LEAD LEAD Lead edge image loss 0 – 99 15
set value Papar tail edge
6 SIDE Side image loss set 20
(Void set value)
7 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void set value 0 – 99 35
(DENA)
8 TRAIL_EDGE Rear edge void adjustment
(DENB) value
9 FRONT/REAR Front/Rear void adjustment
value Void (TV)
TV = 3.5 mm
(Leading edge image loss/void area adjustment)
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss and
leading edge void as follows:
(Standard setting)
Leading edge image loss: 1.5 mm (LEAD:15)
No Image
Leading edge void: 3.5mm (DENA:35)
If the trailing edge void area is not at an acceptable level, do
* Set the adjustment value for (LEAD) to 15 by entering "15"
into the (LEAD) adjustment value field and then pressing the
P key. 2) Repeat the process of changing the (TRAIL EDGE) adjust-
ment value and then pressing the Start key until attaining an
* Set the adjustment value for (DENA) to 35 by entering "35"
acceptable level.
into the (DENA) adjustment value field and then pressing the
P key. Repeat the above adjustments until acceptable results are
obtained.
2) Make a copy at 100% magnification by entering "100" into the
(MAGNIFICATION) field and then pressing the Start key, and
check the leading edge void area and image loss. (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
1) Set the (SIDE) adjustment value to 20 by entering "20" into the
(SIDE) adjustment value field and then pressing the P key.
Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image posi-
tion in the front/rear frame direction.
(Front/rear frame direction void area)
1) Make a copy at 100% magnification by entering "100" into the
Papar lead edge (MAGNIFICATION) field and then pressing the Start key, and
Image area
10 20 check the front/rear frame direction void area.
(Standard settings)
Front frame side void area = 3.5 mm, rear frame side void area
= 3.5 mm, sum of front/rear frame direction void area = 7.0
mm.
Image loss (LIL)
LIL = 1.5 mm
Void (LV) LV = 3.5 mm
No Image
If the leading edge image loss and void area are not at accept- No Image
able levels, do the following steps.
Void (RV)
* If the leading edge void area is not 3.5 mm:
Repeat the process of changing the (RRCB) adjustment
value and then pressing the Start key until attaining an
acceptable level.
FV+RV= 7.0 mm
(The change according to the one step of the adjustment No Image
value is 0.1mm.)
Void (FV)
* If the leading edge image loss is not 1.5mm:
Repeat the process of changing the (RRCA) adjustment
value, in steps of 0.1 mm, and then pressing the Start key
until attaining an acceptable level.
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of If the front/rear frame direction void area is not at an accept-
0.2mm.) able level, do the following steps.
Repeat the above adjustments until acceptable results are 2) Repeat the process of changing the (FRONT/REAR) adjust-
obtained. ment value and then pressing the Start key until attaining an
acceptable level.
Repeat the above adjustments until acceptable results are
obtained.
NOTE: If the front and rear frame side void areas are not equal,
adjust the image off-center position using Simulation 50-5.
8-B Adjust the original scan start position 8-C Adjust the copied image loss/void area in
(adjust the scanner read position in DSPF- DSPF mode
mode front face scan) This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: * The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced. * The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. * The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. * The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. * The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. * The DSPF unit has been replaced.
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. Papar lead edge Papar tail edge
This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in
DSPF mode front face scan.
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position No Image
from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the Void (RV)
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated
by DSPF (front-face) mode scan.
1) Make a copy in DSPF (front-face) mode, and make sure that LIL = 1.5 mm
the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image is 10 20 LV = 3.5 mm
free from shadows. TV = 3.5 mm No Image
FV+RV= 7.0 mm
Void (TV)
Image loss (LIL)
No Image
Papar lead edge Void (LV) No Image
Void (FV)
Image area
Shadow image of DSPF SIMULATION 50-6

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS
START.
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image

2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2
contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)3.SIDE1 50 4.SIDE2 50
steps.
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING)
2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 53-8. SIDE1: 5.LEAD_EDGE 15 6.FRONT/REAR 20 7.TRAIL_EDGE 0
SIDE2: 8.LEAD_EDGE 15 9.FRONT/REAR 20 10.TRAIL_EDGE 0
SIMULATION 53-8 Select other than 0 - 2, and

SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTING] key.
SIMULATION 50-6
2.MANUAL 25
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START.
3.SIDE1 50
Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press Select 1, and Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
[START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. press [START] key. key, or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). NOW COPYING.
SIMULATION 53-8
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-70, AND
PRESS START. Press [START] key or press
2.MANUAL
25 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 50-6
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS
3) Enter the adjustment value and press the Start key. START.
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is (FEED TRAY)
1
obtained.
5.BPT 6.LCC

3) Repeat the process of changing the (SIDE1 & SIDE2) adjust-
SIMULATION 50-6 ment values and then pressing the Start key until attaining an
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). acceptable level.
(MAGNIFICATION)
INPUT 25-200(%)
100 SIDE1: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
leading edge of the original in DSPF front side mode.
SIDE2: Adjustment value for the position at which to read the
Setting
Item Default leading edge of the original in DSPF back side mode.
range
0 TRAY Paper feed tray selection 1–6 —
(The change according to the one step of the adjustment value
SELECT is 0.1mm.)
1 COPY Copy START (Default) — — (The timing in which to start reading the image should be
START determined based on the timing in which detector SPPD4
2 MAGNIFI Print magnification ratio 25 – — detects the leading edge of the original.)
CATION 200%
(Trailing edge image loss adjustment)
3 SIDE1 Front surface document 0 – 99 50
scan start position 1) Select duplex mode from paper selection mode as described
adjustment value in Simulation 50-6, enter "100" into the (MAGNIFICATION)
4 SIDE2 Back surface document field, and then press the Start key to make a duplex copy at
scan start position 100% magnification in DSPF mode, and make sure that the
adjustment value trailing edge image loss is 1.5 mm for both front and back
(Image loss set value: SIDE 1) sides.
5 LEAD Front surface lead edge 0 – 99 15
_EDGE image loss set value Papar trail edge
6 FRONT Front surface side edge 20
_REAR image loss set value
7 TRAIL Front surface rear edge 0 – 20 0
_EDGE image loss set value
(Image loss set value: SIDE 2)
TIL = 1.5 mm
8 LEAD Back surface lead edge 0 – 99 15 TV = 3.5 mm
_EDGE image loss set value Image area
9 FRONT Back surface side edge 20
/REAR image loss set value
Image loss (TIL)
10 TRAIL Back surface rear edge 0 – 20 0
_EDGE image loss set value Void (TV)
(Leading edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss for the No Image
front and back sides as follows:
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
(Standard setting)
2) Repeat the process of changing the (TRAIL EDGE) adjust-
5 LEAD_EDGE: 15
ment value and then pressing the Start key until attaining an
8 LEAD_EDGE: 15 acceptable level.
* Set the adjustment value for "5 LEAD_EDGE" and "8 Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
LEAD_EDGE" to 15 by entering "15" into the (LEAD EDGE) obtained.
adjustment value field and then pressing the P key.
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
2) In DSPF mode, make a duplex copy at 100% magnification,
Set the (FRONT/REAR) adjustment value to 20 by entering "20"
and make sure that the leading edge image loss is 1.5 mm for
into the (FRONT/REAR) adjustment value field and then pressing.
both the front and back sides. (Select duplex mode from the
paper selection mode as described in Simulation 50-6). (Enter Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
"100" into the (MAGNIFICATION) field, and then press the in the front/rear frame direction.
start key).
8-D Adjust the image loss in scanner mode
Papar lead edge 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-27.
SIMULATION 50-27
TIL = 1.5 mm ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). SELECT 1-18, AND
TV = 3.5 mm PRESS START.
[FAX] 1
1.OC(LEAD_EDGE) 0 2.OC(FRONT/REAR) 0 3.OC(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
Image area
4.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 5.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 6.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
7.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 8.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 9.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
Image loss (TIL) [SCN]
Void (TV) 13.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 14.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 15.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
16.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 17.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 18.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
No Image
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
Setting
Item Default
SIMULATION 50-27 range
ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). INPUT 0-10, AND FAX send
PRESS START. 1 OC (LEAD_EDGE) OC lead edge 0 – 10 3
1.OC(LEAD_EDGE)
0 2 OC (FRONT/REAR) OC side (Unit 1mm) (3mm)
3 OC (TRAIL_EDGE) OC rear edge
4 SPF (LEAD_EDGE) SPF lead edge
Setting 5 SPF (FRONT/REAR) SPF side
Item Default
range 6 SPF (TRAIL_EDGE) SPF rear edge
FAX send 7 CIS (LEAD_EDGE) CIS lead edge
1 OC (LEAD_EDGE) OC lead edge 0 – 10 3 8 CIS (FRONT/REAR) CIS side
2 OC (FRONT/REAR) OC side (Unit 1mm) (3mm) 9 CIS (TRAIL_EDGE) CIS rear edge
3 OC (TRAIL_EDGE) OC rear edge Scanner mode
4 SPF (LEAD_EDGE) SPF lead edge 10 OC (LEAD_EDGE) OC lead edge 0 – 10 0
5 SPF (FRONT/REAR) SPF side 11 OC (FRONT/REAR) OC side (Unit 1mm) (0mm)
6 SPF (TRAIL_EDGE) SPF rear edge 12 OC (TRAIL_EDGE) OC rear edge
7 CIS (LEAD_EDGE) CIS lead edge 13 SPF (LEAD_EDGE) SPF lead edge
8 CIS (FRONT/REAR) CIS side 14 SPF (FRONT/REAR) SPF side
9 CIS (TRAIL_EDGE) CIS rear edge 15 SPF (TRAIL_EDGE) SPF rear edge
Scanner mode 16 CIS (LEAD_EDGE) CIS lead edge
10 OC (LEAD_EDGE) OC lead edge 0 – 10 0 17 CIS (FRONT/REAR) CIS side
11 OC (FRONT/REAR) OC side (Unit 1mm) (0mm) 18 CIS (TRAIL_EDGE) CIS rear edge
12 OC (TRAIL_EDGE) OC rear edge
2) Enter the number that corresponds to the fax adjustment item
13 SPF (LEAD_EDGE) SPF lead edge
14 SPF (FRONT/REAR) SPF side
15 SPF (TRAIL_EDGE) SPF rear edge
16 CIS (LEAD_EDGE) CIS lead edge 4) Enter the adjustment value using the numeric keypad.
17 CIS (FRONT/REAR) CIS side 5) Press the Start key.
18 CIS (TRAIL_EDGE) CIS rear edge (The adjustment value should be changed in steps of 1.0mm.)
2) Using the numeric keypad, enter the number that corresponds Scanned images must be visually checked for image loss.
to the scanner mode adjustment item.
NOTE: Make adjustments in the same manner as in ADJ 8A and
3) Press the Start key. ADJ 8C.
5) Press the Start key (The adjustment value should be changed
in steps of 1.0mm.) ADJ 9 Adjusting the copied image
Scanned images must be visually checked for image loss.
quality
NOTE: Make adjustments in the same manner as in ADJ 8A and
ADJ 8C.
8-E Adjust the image loss for images sent in fax * U2 trouble has occurred.
mode * The MFP control PWB has been replaced.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-27. * The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
SIMULATION 50-27
ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). SELECT 1-18, AND * One or more parts of the scanner (reading) section have been
PRESS START. replaced.
[FAX] 1 * One or more consumables (OPC drum, developer, transfer belt)
have been replaced.
4.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 5.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 6.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0
7.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 8.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 9.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 (Copy mode image quality adjustment items)
[SCN]
10.OC(LEAD_EDGE) 0 11.OC(FRONT/REAR) 0 12.OC(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 Simulation for adjustment
13.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 14.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 15.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 Image mode All-mode Individualmode
16.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 17.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 18.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 adjustment adjustment
Auto mode Binary mode 46–2
Text mode Binary mode 46–9
Text/photo mode Binary mode 46–10
Photo mode Binary mode 46–11
SIMULATION 50-27 Simulation for

ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). INPUT 0-10, AND Adjustment Item List
adjustment
PRESS START. Copied image gamma adjustment 46–18
1.OC(LEAD_EDGE)
0 (copier mode)
Adjust the copied image sharpness 46–31
(Copied image reference density) 2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 46-2.
Original SIMULATION 46-2

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
1 2 3 4 5
R
6
GRAY CHART
7 8 9 10 W
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. AE 3.0 50 4. CH 3.0 50
1
5. MIX 3.0 50 6. PHOTO 3.0 50
Select other then 0 - 2, and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]

[START] key. key.
Lot No. 01A
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START.
3. AE 3.0
Copy 50
Select 1,
GRAY CHART Press [START] key.
R
and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W [START] key. key, or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 46-2
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING.
Lot No. 01A
If the copied test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) image includes a back- Select 0, and press [START] key. Press [START] key, or press
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
ground copy of patch 3 rather than patch 2, adjust all-copy mode to
the image density level specified above.
SIMULATION 46-2
(Copied image gamma, copied image sharpness) EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
Normally, default settings should be applied to 'copied image (FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4
gamma' and 'copied image sharpness', but images should be
5. BPT 6. LCC 1
adjusted according to user requests, if any.
9-A Adjust the binary mode copy density for all Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press
modes at once [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
1) Set the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table so

that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces of SIMULATION 46-2
A3 (11" x 17") paper. EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. AE 3.0
5. MIX 3.0
4. CH 3.0
6. PHOTO 3.0
1
Setting
Item Default
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
1 COPY START Copy START (Default)
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection
3 AE 3.0 AE mode 0 – 99 50
4 CH 3.0 Text mode 3.0
00
5 MIX 3.0 Text/Photo mode 3.0
6 PHOTO 3.0 Photo mode 3.0
3) Using the numeric keypad, select the number that corresponds
to the copy mode for which to make adjustments. (Choose
from numbers 3 to 6.)
5) Press the Start key (A copy is created.)
Check the density of the copied image.
If the copied image density is not at an acceptable level, do the
following steps.
6) Adjust the copy density by entering an appropriate value
through the numeric keypad.
A larger value provides higher density.
7) Press the P or Start key. This applies the adjustment value.
ing the adjustment value.
8) Check the copied image density.
Repeat steps 6 to 8 until an acceptable copied image density is
obtained.
NOTE: Adjusting the copied image density through this simulation (SIM 46-9) (Text mode)
changes the copied image density settings for all copy
modes to the copied image density level applied by carry- Setting
Item Default
ing out this simulation. Also, the copied image density gra- range
dient is automatically adjusted to the specified level. 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
The copied image density settings for individual copy
modes adjusted through Simulations 46-9, -10, and -11 are
3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 – 99 50
changed to the copied image density level applied by this
4 1.5 Exposure level 1.5
simulation.
9-B Adjust the copy density in text binary mode 7 3.0 Exposure level 3.0
9-C Adjust the copy density in text/photo binary 9 4.0 Exposure level 4.0
mode 10 4.5 Exposure level 4.5
9-D Adjust the copy density in photo binary (SIM 46-10) (Text/photo mode)
mode Setting
Item Default
This adjustment is intended to customize the copied image density range
settings. The copy density setting for each copy density adjustment 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
level (1 to 5) in manual copy mode can be adjusted to a custom 1 COPY START Copy START (Default)
density level. 2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection
1) Set the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table. 3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 – 99 50
2) Go through the simulation modes that correspond to the copy
modes for which to adjust the copy density (i.e., the modes
specified in Simulations 46-9, -10, or -11).
SIMULATION 46-9 9 4.0 Exposure level 4.0
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START 10 4.5 Exposure level 4.5
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1
6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
(SIM 46-11) (Photo mode)
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
Setting
Item Default
range
Select other than 0 - 2, and Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
press [START] key. 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection
key.
SIMULATION 46-9
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
START. 3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 – 99 50
3. 1.0 50 4 1.5 Exposure level 1.5
Select 1, Press [START] key. 6 2.5 Exposure level 2.5
[START] key. key, or terminate copying.
SIMULATION 46-9 9 4.0 Exposure level 4.0
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING.
Select 0, and Press [START] key,
or press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
to the copy density adjustment level. (Choose from numbers 3
press [START] key.
to 11.)
SIMULATION 46-9 4) Press the Start key.
5) Press the Start key. (A copy is created.)
(FEED TRAY)
1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 If the copied image density is not at an acceptable level, do the
5. BPT 6. LCC 1 following steps.
Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press through the numeric keypad.
SIMULATION 46-9 This applies the adjustment value.
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT)
3. 1.0 4. 1.5 5. 2.0 ing the adjustment value.
6. 2.5 7. 3.0 8. 3.5
9. 4.0 10. 4.5 11. 5.0 1 8) Check the copied image density.
Repeat steps 5 to 8 until an acceptable copied image density is
obtained.
9-E Adjust the copied image gamma in copy (print) operation as well as applying the adjustment value.
mode 7) Check the copied image gamma (copy density levels for low
1) Set the original on the original table. and high density areas) (contrast).
2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 46-18. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until an acceptable copied image is obtained.
SIMULATION 46-18
9-F Adjust the copied image sharpness
GAMMA SETUP(COPIER). SELECT 1-14, AND PRESS START. 1) Set the original on the original table.
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START 2.EXP LEVEL 1
3.OC_AE 64 4.OC_CHARA 5.OC_MIX 64
6.OC_PHOTO 64 7.SPF_AE 64 8.SPF_CHARA 64
9.SPF_MIX 64 10.SPF_PHOTO 64 11.CIS_AE 64
SIMULATION 46-31
12.CIS_CHARA 64 13.CIS_MIX 64 14.CIS_PHOTO 64
SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. SELECT 1-12, AND PRESS START.
1.OC_AE 3 2.OC_CHARA 3 3.OC_MIX 3
Select other than 0 - 2, and 4.OC_PHOTO 3 5.SPF_AE 3 6.SPF_CHARA 3
press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 7.SPF_MIX 3 8.SPF_PHOTO 3 9.SPF2_AE 3
10.SPF2_CHARA 3 11.SPF2_MIX 3 12.SPF2_PHOTO 3
SIMULATION 46-18 13.CIS_AE 3 14.CIS_CHARA 3 15.CIS_MIX 3
GAMMA SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-127, AND PRESS START. 16.CIS_PHOTO 3
3.OC_AE
64
Select 1, Press [START] key.
SIMULATION 46-31
SIMULATION 46-18
SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-3, AND PRESS
GAMMA SETUP. NOW PRINTING.
START.
1.OC_AE 䋳
Select 0, and press [START] key. Setting Default
Item
range
SIMULATION 46-18 1 OC_AE AE mode (OC) 1–5 3
GAMMA SETUP. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
2 OC_CHARA Text mode (OC)
(FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 3 OC_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC)
4 OC_PHOTO Photo mode (OC)
5.BPT 6.LCC
1 5 SPF1_AE AE mode (SPF1)
6 SPF1_CHARA Text mode (SPF1)
7 SPF1_MIX Text/Photo mode
(SPF1)
8 SPF1_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF1)
9 SPF2_AE AE mode (SPF2)
SIMULATION 46-18 10 SPF2_CHARA Text mode (SPF2)
GAMMA SETUP. SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS START. 11 SPF2_MIX Text/Photo mode
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT) (SPF2)
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0
6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1 12 SPF2_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF2)
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H) 13 CIS_AE AE mode (CIS)
12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H) 14 CIS_CHARA Text mode (CIS)
15 CIS_MIX Text/Photo mode (CIS)
16 CIS_PHOTO Photo mode (CIS)
Setting Default
Item
range
to the copy mode for which to make adjustments.
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) (Choose from numbers 1 to 16.)
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection 4) Press the Start key.
3 OC_AE AE mode (OC) 0 – 127 96 5) Adjust the sharpness by entering an appropriate value through
4 OC_CHARA Text mode (OC) 64 the numeric keypad.
5 OC_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC)
A larger value provides higher sharpness.
7 SPF_AE AE mode (SPF) 96
8 SPF_CHARA Text mode (SPF) 64 Pressing the Start key starts copy (print) operation as well as
9 SPF_MIX Text/Photo mode (SPF) applying the adjustment value.
10 SPF_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF) 7) Check the copied image sharpness.
11 CIS_AE AE mode (CIS) 96 Repeat steps 5 to 7 until an acceptable copied image is obtained.
12 CIS_CHARA Text mode (CIS) 64
14 CIS_PHOTO Photo mode (CIS)
to the copy mode for which to make adjustments.
(Choose from numbers 3 to 14.)
5) Enter the gamma adjustment value using the numeric keypad.
A larger value provides larger gamma gradient and higher
image contrast.
10-A Adjust the fax mode print density for all
ADJ 10 Adjusting the print quality in modes at once
fax mode 1) Set the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table so
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces of
A3 (11" x 17") paper.
* One or more parts of the scanner (reading) section have been
replaced.
(Fax mode image density adjustment items)
Simulation for 00
adjustment
Image mode All-mode Individual
adjustment mode
adjustment
Adjust the fax Auto Binary mode 46-12 46-13
mode print density mode 2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 46-12.
in standard mode Manual Binary mode
Adjust the fax Auto Binary mode 46-14
mode print density mode SIMULATION 46-12
Half tone
in small-character EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS
mode
START.
mode Manual Binary mode
Half tone
2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
1
mode
Adjust the fax Auto Binary mode 46-15 Select other than 0 - 1, and
mode print density mode Half tone press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
in fine mode mode
Manual Binary mode SIMULATION 46-12
Half tone EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
mode PRESS START.
Adjust the fax Auto Binary mode 46-16
2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
mode print density mode Half tone
in super fine mode mode Select 1, Press [START] key.
and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key,
Manual Binary mode or terminate copying.
[START] key.
Half tone
mode SIMULATION 46-12
Adjust the fax Auto Binary mode 46-45 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). NOW PRINTING.
mode print density mode Half tone
in 600dpi mode mode
Manual Binary mode Select 0, and press Press [START] key, or press
Half tone [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
mode
(Fax mode density)
SIMULATION 46-12
The print density settings should be normally left at defaults but EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET).SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS
should be adjusted according to user requests, if any. START.
(FEED TRAY)
1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 䋱
5.BPT 6.LCC
Setting Default
Item
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray
selection
2 FAX EXP. LEVEL FAX mode print density 0 – 99 50
3) Select the adjustment item (FAX EXP. LEVEL) using the
numeric keypad.
Check the print density.
If the print density is not at an acceptable level, do the follow-
ing steps.
6) Enter the print adjustment value using the numeric keypad.
7) Press the P or Start key. 2) Go through the simulation modes that correspond to the Fax
This applies the adjustment value. modes for which to adjust the print density (i.e., the modes
specified in Simulations 46-13, -14, -15, -16, or -45).
Pressing the Start key starts print operation as well as applying
the adjustment value.
8) Check the print density. SIMULATION 46-13
Repeat steps 5 to 8 until an acceptable print density is obtained. EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS
START.
Adjusting the Fax print density through this simulation changes the
print density settings for all Fax modes to the density level applied
2.EXP LEVEL 1
1
by carrying out this simulation. 3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
The Fax mode print density settings for individual Fax modes 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
adjusted through Simulations 46-13, -14, -15, -16 and -45 are
changed to the print density level applied by this simulation. Select other than 0 - 2,
and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
key.
10-B Adjust the fax mode print density in
standard mode SIMULATION 46-13
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
10-C Adjust the fax mode print density in small- 4.1.0 50
character mode
10-D Adjust the fax mode print density in fine [START] key. key, or terminate copying.
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). NOW PRINTING.
㩷
10-E Adjust the fax mode print density in super

fine mode
10-F Adjust the fax mode print density in 600dpi
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS
This adjustment is intended to the print mode for each Fax mode START.
individually. In manual mode, the print density setting for each print (FEED TRAY)
density adjustment level (1 to 5) can be adjusted to a custom den- 1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4
5.BPT 6.LCC
1
sity level.
(ABOVE +20:DSPF MODE)
that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces of
A3 (11" x 17") paper. Select 2, and press Press [START] key, or press
SIMULATION 46-13
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 3-8, AND PRESS START.
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT)
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0
6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1
Setting
Item Default
range
00
1 PRINT START Print start (Default)
3 AUTO Auto 0 – 99 50
4 1.0 Exposure level 1
[Binary mode]
SIMULATION 46-14 (Copied image reference density)
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS START.
Original
2.EXP LEVEL 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
1
6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50 R GRAY CHART
9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50

and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
Lot No. 01A
key.
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS Copy
START.
4.1.0 50
R GRAY CHART
Select 1, Press [START] key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). NOW PRINTING. Lot No. 01A

If the copied test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) image includes a
Select 0, and press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. background copy of patch 6 rather than patch 5, adjust all-
copy mode to the image density level specified above.
SIMULATION 46-13 [Half-tone mode]
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
(Copied image reference density)
(FEED TRAY)
5.BPT 6.LCC 1 Original
R GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 3-14, AND PRESS START.
(EXP.LEVEL SELECT) Lot No. 01A
3.AUTO 4.1.0 5.2.0

6.3.0 7.4.0 8.5.0 1
9.AUTO(H) 10.1.0(H) 11.2.0(H) Copy
12.3.0(H) 13.4.0(H) 14.5.0(H)
R GRAY CHART
Setting
Item Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
range
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection Lot No. 01A
3 AUTO Auto 0 – 99 50
4 1.0 Exposure level 1 The copied test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) image includes a
5 2.0 Exposure level 2 background copy of patch 2 rather than patch 1.
6 3.0 Exposure level 3 If the print density is not at an acceptable level, do the follow-
7 4.0 Exposure level 4 ing steps.
9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
through the numeric keypad.
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone)
12 3.0 (H) Exposure level 3 (Half-tone) 7) Press the P or Start key.
13 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 (Half-tone) This applies the adjustment value.
14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5 (Half-tone) Pressing the Start key starts copy operation as well as apply-
3) Using the numeric keypad, select the number that corresponds ing the adjustment value.
to the adjustment item. Choose from numbers 3 to 8 (14). 8) Check the printed image density.
* Auto mode Repeat steps 6 to 8 until an acceptable image density is
* Manual mode (print density adjustment level) obtained.
For manual mode, select the number that corresponds to the
print density level (1 to 5). (Choose from numbers (4 to 8) (10-
14)).
ADJ 11 Adjusting the image quality in SIMULATION 46-21
scan mode EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), PRESS START.
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50
0
* The MFP control PWB has been replaced. Press [START] key. Press [START] key, or press
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. SIMULATION 46-21
* One or more parts of the scanner (reading) section have been EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99,
AND PRESS START.
replaced.
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50
(Scan mode image quality adjustment items)
Simulation for Setting

Item Default
adjustment range
Image mode All-mode Individual 0 SCANNER EXP. Scan mode image 0 – 99 50
adjustment mode LEVEL density adjustment
adjustment 3) Select the adjustment item SCANNER EXP. LEVEL using the
Scan mode image Auto Binary mode 46-21 46-22 numeric keypad.
density mode
adjustment/ 4) Press the Start key.
Manual Binary mode
individual setup 5) Enter the image density adjustment value.
(standard mode) 6) Press the P or Start key.
Scan mode image Auto Binary mode 46-23
density mode Half tone NOTE: Adjusting the scanned image density through this simula-
adjustment/ mode tion changes the image density settings for all scan modes
individual setup Manual Binary mode to the image density level applied by carrying out this simu-
(small-character Half tone lation.
mode) mode The scan-mode image density settings for individual scan modes
Scan mode image Auto Binary mode 46-24 adjusted through Simulations 46-22, -23, -24, -25, and -45 are
density mode Half tone changed to the image density level applied by this simulation.
adjustment/ mode
Scanned images must be visually checked to ensure the post-
individual setup Manual Binary mode
(fine mode) adjustment image density.
Half tone
mode
Scan mode image Auto Binary mode 46-25 11-B Scan mode image density adjustment/
density mode Half tone individual setup (standard mode)
adjustment/ mode
individual setup Manual Binary mode
(super fine mode)
11-C Scan mode image density adjustment/
Half tone
mode
individual setup (small-character mode)
(Scan mode image quality)
11-D Scan mode image density adjustment/
The image density settings should be normally left at defaults but
should be adjusted according to user requests, if any. individual setup (fine mode)
11-A Adjust the scan mode image density for all 11-E Scan mode image density adjustment/
modes at once individual setup (super fine mode)
1) Set the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table so This adjustment is intended to the image mode for each scan mode
that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces of individually. In manual mode, the image density setting for each
A3 (11" x 17") paper. scanned image density adjustment level (1 to 5) can be adjusted to
a custom density level.
that it aligns with the front frame. Then put four or five pieces of
A3 (11" x 17") paper.
00
00
2) Go through the simulation modes that correspond to the scan
modes for which to adjust the scanned image density (i.e., the 11-F Adjust the image gamma in scanner mode
modes specified in Simulations 46-22, -23, -24, or -25). 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 46-27.
SIMULATION 46-21 SIMULATION 46-27

EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), PRESS START. GAMMA SETUP(SCNNER), SELECT 1-9, AND PRESS START.
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50 1.OC_Fine.HT 64 2.OC_SFine.HT 64 3.OC_UFine.HT 64
0 4.SPF_Fine.HT 64 5.SPF_SFine.HT 64 6.SPF_UFine.HT 64
7.CIS_Fine.HT 64 8.CIS_SFine.HT 64 9.CIS_UFine.HT 64
Press [START] key. Press [START] key, or press

Item
1 OC_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone) (OC)
2 OC_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone) (OC)
SIMULATION 46-21 3 OC_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone) (OC)
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99,
4 SPF_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone) (SPF)
AND PRESS START.
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50 5
6
SPF_SFine.HT
SPF_UFine.HT
Super fine (Half-tone) (SPF)
Ultra fine (Half-tone) (SPF)
7 CIS_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone) (CIS)
Setting 8 CIS_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone) (CIS)
Item Default
range 9 CIS_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone) (CIS)
0 SCANNER EXP. Scan mode image 0 – 99 50
LEVEL density adjustment
to the scan mode for which to make adjustments.
SIMULATION 46-22 4) Adjust the gamma by entering an appropriate value through
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS
the numeric keypad.
START.
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50 A larger value provides larger gamma gradient and higher
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50 1 image contrast.
This applies the adjustment value.
Select 0 - 5, and press Press [START] key, or press Scanned images must be visually checked to ensure the post-
[START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. adjustment image gamma.
SIMULATION 46-22 ADJ 12 Common image quality

EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL), INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND
PRESS START.
adjustments for all of copy,
0.AUTO 50 scan, and fax modes
(Common image quality adjustment items for all of copy, scan,
Setting and fax modes)
Item Default
range
0 AUTO Auto 0 – 99 50 Adjustment Item List Simulation for adjustment
1 1.0 Exposure level 1 Correct the image density in original 46-20
table mode/SPF mode (Copy mode)
Set up the auto mode operation for 46-19
copy, scan, and fax
12-A Original table mode/SPF mode image
3) Enter the number that corresponds to the following adjustment
item using the numeric keypad. (Choose from numbers 0 to 5.)
density correction (copy mode)
Used to adjust the copy density correction in the DSPF copy mode
* Auto mode
for the document table copy mode. The adjustment is made so that
* Manual mode (print density adjustment level) the copy density becomes the same as that of the document table
For manual mode, select the number that corresponds to the copy mode.
image density adjustment level (1 to 5). (Choose from num- This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
bers 1 to 5.)
5) Enter the image density adjustment value.
Scanned images must be visually checked to ensure the post-
adjustment image density.
* One or more parts of the scanner (reading) section have been
replaced.
* The CIS unit has been removed.
* The CIS unit has been replaced.
* The DSPF unit has been removed.
12-B Set up the auto mode operation for copy,
SIMULATION 46-20 scan, and fax
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. PRINT START This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. SPF(FRONT) 128
4. SPF(REAR) 128
1
5. DSPF 128
Select other than 0 - 2, and press
[START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
SIMULATION 46-20
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 46-19.
START.
1.SPF(FRONT)
128 SIMULATION 46-19
EXP.MODE SETUP. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
and press Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] 1.AE MODE 1
[START] key. 㩷
key, or terminate copying. 2.AE STOP MODE(COPIER) 1
3.AE STOP MODE(SCANNER)0
SIMULATION 46-20 4.AE STOP MODE(FAX) 0
OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING.
Select 0, and Press [START] key, or

press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Select 1, and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
key.
SIMULATION 46-20
SIMULATION 46-19
(FEED TRAY)
EXP.MODE SETUP. INPUT VALUE 1-2, AND PRESS START.
2.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 1.AE MODE
5.BPT 6.LCC 1 1
Select 2, and Press [START] key, or
press [START] key. press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Select 2, 3, or 4 and Press [START] key, or press
press [START] key. [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 46-20
(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) SIMULATION 46-19
3.1.0 4.1.5 5.2.0
6.2.5
9.4.0
7.3.0
10.4.5
8.3.5
11.5.0
1 EXP.MODE SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-1, AND PRESS START.
2.AE STOP MODE(COPIER)
0
Setting
range Set
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray selection – – Mode Item Default
value
1: TRAY1 AE mode 1 Image quality priority mode 2
2: TRAY2 (Normal mode)
3: TRAY3 * Gamma is sharp to
4: TRAY4 provide high contrast
5: Manual feed images.
6: Side LCC
2 Toner consumption priority
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) – – mode
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level selection – – * Gamma is mild to provide
3:Exposure level1.0 low contrast images.
4:Exposure level1.5 AE fixed mode 0 AE fixed OFF 1 (COPIER)
5:Exposure level2.0 0 (SCANNER/
1 AE fixed ON
6:Exposure level2.5 FAX)
7:Exposure level3.0
8:Exposure level3.5 2) Select "1 AE MODE" using the numeric keypad.
9:Exposure level4.0 3) Press the Start key.
10:Exposure level4.5
11:Exposure level5.0
to the operation spec.
3 SPF (FRONT) SPF (front) 0 – 255 128
(front frame side) 5) Press the Start key. Pressing the Start key applies the setting.
4 SPF (REAR) SPF (front)
(rear frame side) (Auto copy mode operation setting)
(rear frame side)
5 DSPF DSPF (Back surface)
to the mode for which to make adjustments. (Choose from
2) Using the mumeric keypad, select the number that corre- numbers 2 to 4.)
sponds to the mode for which to make adjustments.
DSPF front frame side (front face copy), DSPF rear frame side
(front face copy), DSPF (back side copy) (Choose from num-
to the operation mode.
bers 3 to 5.)
AE fix OFF: Density (exposure) is automatically controlled on a real
4) Enter the density correction value using the numeric keypad.
time basis. (The density level is dynamically changed according to
5) Press the P or Start key. the original's pattern.)
6) Make two copies (one in original table mode and the other in AE fix ON: The density of the leading edge of the original is
DSPF mode) and compare the copies in terms of density. detected and used to determine the overall density (exposure)
Repeat steps 4 to 6 until both copies provide the same density. level. (The overall density level is fixed.)
ADJ 13 Adjusting the fusing paper ADJ 14 Adjusting the paper size
guide position detection
* Paper is jammed in or around the fusing section. 14-A Adjust the paper width sensor for the
* Imperfect images, deformed images, or wrinkles are produced in manual paper feed tray
the paper lead edge section or the rear edge section. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
Adjust the fusing paper guide position by loosening the fusing * The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
paper guide fixing screws and the sliding the fusing paper guide in * The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
the arrow direction. * U2 trouble has occurred.
SIMULATION 40-2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION
2. POSITION 1
3. POSITION 2 1
4. MIN. POSITION

Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 40-2
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MAX. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
Select 2, and
SIMULATION 40-2
POSITION 1 ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
Select 3, and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 40-2
POSITION 2 ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
When shipping, it is fixed to the position which is one scale

(0.5mm) over the center. Select 4 and press Press [START] key, or press
SIMULATION 40-2
MIN. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width

position.
3) Select MAX. POSITION using the numeric keypad.
14-B Adjust the paper width sensor for paper
feed tray 3
* The paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
SIMULATION 40-12
TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION
2. MIN. POSITION
1
The maximum width detection level is recognized. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
5) Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
SIMULATION 40-12
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT.
7) Select POSITION 1 using the numeric keypad. MAX. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
9) Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key. Press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
11) Select POSITION 2 using the numeric keypad.
SIMULATION 40-12
12) Press the Start key. TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT.
The A5R width detection level is recognized. MIN. POSITION ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR")

14) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- 2) Open the paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
tion.
11
81 2
71 2
51 2
A4
A3
B4
B5
A4
B5
A5
15) Select MIN. POSITION using the numeric keypad.

16) Press the Start key. 3) Select MAX. POSITION using the numeric keypad.
The minimum width detection level is recognized. 4) Press the Start key.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the The maximum width detection level is recognized.
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations 5) Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears. 6) Open the paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
7) Select MIN. POSITION using the numeric keypad. 2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
8) Press the Start key. tion.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
14-C Adjust the paper width sensor for the DSPF

paper feed tray
* The paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced. 3) Select MAX. POSITION using the numeric keypad.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. 4) Press the Start key.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 53-6. The maximum width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 7) Select POSITION 1 using the numeric keypad.
1.MAX.POSITION 8) Press the Start key.
2.POSITION 1
3.POSITION 2 1 The A4R width detection level is recognized.
4.MIN.POSITION 9) Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
10) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
Select 1, and press [START] key. 11) Select POSITION 2 using the numeric keypad.
12) Press the Start key. The A4R width detection level is recog-
SIMULATION 53-6
nized.
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 13) Press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
MAX.POSITION ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
14) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
Select 2, and
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
Select 3, and press [START] key. Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
15) Select MIN. POSITION using the numeric keypad.

16) Press the Start key. The maximum width detection level is rec-
Select 4 and press Press [START] key, or press ognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
SIMULATION 53-6 has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
DSPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
MIN.POSITION ... COMPLETE (or “ERROR”)
ADJ 15 Adjusting the original size 15-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
detection (in original table 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 41-2.
mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: SIMULATION 41-2
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.)
15- 1. NO ORIGINAL
2. A3 ORIGINAL
1
* The original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* The original size sensor section has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. SIMULATION 41-2
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
15-A Adjust the detection point of the original NO ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
A3 ORIGINAL ··· INCOMPLETE
size sensor (in original table mode)
Select 2 and press Press [START] key, or press
[START] key. (Error) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
SIMULATION 41-1
PD SENSOR CHECK..
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 SIMULATION 41-2
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT.
NO ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE
A3 ORIGINAL ··· COMPLETE (or "ERROR at PD1 PD2...")
2) Gradually turn over the original detection arm unit in the arrow
direction, and loosen the original cover switch actuator adjust- 2) Open the original cover. With nothing placed on the original
ing screw so that the OCSW indicator changes from inverse table, select NO ORIGINAL using the numeric keypad.
video to normal video when the arm unit top reaches a height 3) Press the Start key.
of 32r0.5mm from the table glass. Then move the actuator to This sets the sensor level with no original detected.
adjust its position. (If the original cover switch turns on in
4) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the original table, and select A3
improper timing, the original detection mechanism mail fail to
ORIGINAL using the numeric keypad.
operate correctly.)
5) Press the Start key. This sets the sensor level with an original
detected.
When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has
failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
Original detection arm unit ADJ 16 Adjusting the touch panel

coordinates
* The operation panel has been replaced.
32+
-5mm * The EEPROM on the MFP control PWB has been replaced.
Table glass SIMULATION 65-1
Original cover switch actuator
2) Press the four cross mark points.

Pressing the cross mark points correctly results in gray dis-
play. When the touch panel adjustment is complete with the
four points pressed, the sub-number entry screen for simula-
tion reappears.
If any error is detected, the touch panel returns to adjustment
mode.
NOTE: Never use something with a sharp tip (such as a needle or
pin) to press the touch panel.
(12 V supply voltage adjustment)
ADJ 17 Adjusting the supply voltage 5) Apply a digital multi-meter to the DC sub PWB 12 V line (CN4,
1 pin) and GND (CN4, 6 pin).
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 6) Turn RV102 on the DC sub power supply PWB so that the volt-
* One or more parts of the DC main power supply unit have been age is 12 V.
replaced.
* One or more parts of the DC sub power supply unit have been GND +12V
(CN4, 6pin) (CN4, 1pin) RV102
replaced.
1) Apply a digital multi-meter to the DC main PWB 24 V line
(CN3, 1 pin) and GND (CN3, 4 pin).
2) Turn RV202 on the DC main power supply PWB so that the
voltage is 24 V.
GND +24V
RV202 (CN3, 4pin) (CN3, 1pin)

3) Apply a digital multi-meter to the DC main PWB 38 V line
(CN8, 1 pin) and GND (CN8, 4 pin).
4) Turn RV201 on the DC main power supply PWB so that the
voltage is 38 V.
RV201 GND +38V

(CN8, 4pin) (CN8, 1pin)
MX-M700N
[7] SIMULATION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Counters Adjustment value Others
ADU paper feed Toner concentration White paper exit
counter temperature correction (high count setting
1. Adjustment value/Simulation and temperature side) judgment
voltage
storage data Staple counter Toner concentration Trouble memory
A. Simulation adjustment value/ Set value data temperature correction (high mode setting
temperature side) correction
Each controller is provided with an EEPROM. The adjustment/set value
values are collected to the MFP controller. If they are changed, they Punch counter Toner concentration Fusing operation
are sent back and saved. temperature correction (low mode (Prevention
temperature side) release against curl)
time
LCD MFP CONTROLLER Main unit right-side Toner concentration CE mark
paper exit counter temperature correction (high conforming
When the value is changed, temperature side) toner operation mode
it is sent and saved. concentration delay time
Side LCC paper Multi-purpose width Maintenance cycle
feed counter adjustment value
Inserter counter Manual width adjustment Print stop setting
Saved adjustment value - value when developer
send (When the power is
turned on, etc.) life over
Saddle staple Heater lamp temperature Saddle alignment
ENGINE SCANNER counter (Center, normal control) operation priority
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER mode
Fuser Web Send Lead edge adjustment
counter
B. Each storage data Led edge void set value
(1) (Data saved by the PCU PWB) Rear edge void set value
Side edge setting
Counters Adjustment value Others Print off-center adjustment
Drum rotation time Developing bias voltage Serial number value
counter value Resist amount adjustment
(Accumulated time) value
Developer unit Cleaning mode Trouble history Laser power adjustment
rotation time counter Developing bias voltage value
value PPD1 sensor adjustment
Toner supply time Main high voltage Tray 1 size Process correction inhibit
(Block IC CHIP) adjustment allow set value
Drum rotating time Transfer charger voltage Tray 2 size Developing bias rising
(Block IC CHIP) value correction wait time
Total counter Transfer belt cleaning Manual destination Developing bias rising
voltage value information correction adjustment value
Maintenance Toner concentration Built-in finisher jogger
counter reference value position adjustment
Developing counter Density correction start set Tray 3 destination Saddle adjustment value
time (Developer unit) information
(2) (Data saved by the scanner control PWB)
Drum counter Density correction rotation Tray 4 destination
time (Developer tank) information
Counters Adjustment value Others
Toner cartridge Density correction amount Tray 1 paper
Scan counter Document lead edge Exposure mode set
counter (Developer tank) remaining quantity
adjustment value value
data
SPF paper pass Document off-center Scanner serial
Valid paper counter Correction execution Tray 2 paper
counter adjustment value number
direction, upper/lower limit remaining quantity
SPF stamp counter Document image loss
(Developer tank) data
amount adjustment value
Tray 1 paper feed Toner concentration Tray 3 paper
Document image loss
counter temperature correction (low remaining quantity
temperature side) correction data amount adjustment value
amount SPF resist amount
adjustment value
Tray 2 paper feed Toner concentration Tray 4 paper
counter temperature correction (low remaining quantity Exposure motor speed
temperature side) set data adjustment value
temperature Platen document detection
Tray 3 paper feed Toner concentration Final toner adjustment value
counter temperature correction (low concentration SPF size width detection
temperature side) release sensor output adjustment value
temperature value Touch panel adjustment
Tray 4 paper feed Toner concentration Toner cartridge IC value
counter temperature correction (high CHIP destination Exposure level adjustment
temperature) correction value
amount gamma change value
Manual paper feed Toner concentration Counter mode OC/SPF exposure
counter temperature correction (high setting correction value
temperature side) judgment Shading adjustment value
temperature (CCD/CIS)
CCD shading start position
adjustment value
MX-M700N SIMULATION 7 – 1
(3) (Data saved by the MFP control PWB) 2. General
Counters Adjustment value Others The simulation has the following functions to grasp the machine
Copy counter FAX SOFT SW., etc. Trouble history operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an ear-
Printer counter JAM history lier stage, and make various setups and adjustments speedily for
FAX receive counter Destination setting improving the serviceability of the machine.
FAX send counter Language setting 1) Various adjustments
All valid paper Toner save mode 2) Setting of the specifications and functions
counter setting
3) Canceling troubles
Trouble counter 13" setting
4) Operation check
JAM counter Auditor setting
Counter mode 5) Counters check, setting, clear
setting 6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
Trouble memory check, clear
mode setting
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
Center binding
transfer
mode AMS setting
PC/MODEM The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the
communication operation panel of the machine.
trouble detection
YES/NO setting
A. Basic operation
Tag number set (1) Starting the simulation
value
* Entering the simulation mode
Printers set values
Network set value 1) Copy mode key ON → Program key ON → Asterisk (*) key ON
→ CLEAR key ON → Asterisk (*) key ON → Ready for input of
(4) (Detailed list) a main code of simulation
Refer to the "3. List of simulation codes". 2) Entering a main code with the 10-key -> [START] key. ON
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key -> [START] key. ON
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press [START] key. or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press CA key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

• Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when
the machine is in the simulation mode.
When executing the operation of mentioning above, a malfunc-
tion may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power
source.
• Before entering the simulation mode, check to insure that neither
print data nor FAX data are receiving.
Select copy mode
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
Standby for entry of SIM YES In the power OFF/ON type
Is there a sub code ? <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
sub code You have to exit
Press the SYSTEM message is
simulation mode displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key
Enter SIM sub code with SYSTEM
this mode for self YES SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and

;'5 Press the EXECUTE button
adjustment values. and OK button.
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Data save destination/Target
Operation content
code code MFP Scanner Engine
1 1 Mirror scan operation {
2 Optical system sensor check {
2 1 SPF operation aging {
2 SPF sensor check {
3 SPF individual load check {
3 2 Finisher sensor check {
3 Finisher individual load check {
10 Finisher setting {
30 Inserter sensor check {
31 Inserter load operation {
32 Inserter tray value setting {
4 2 LCC sensor check {
3 LCC individual load check {
5 1 LCD/LED test {
2 Heater lamp test {
3 Copy lamp test {
4 Discharge lamp test {
6 1 Transport system load operation (Clutch/Solenoid) {
2 Fan motor test {
3 Transfer separation motor operation {
7 1 Operation registration (jam detection:No, developing tank detection:No, aging and maintenance warm- {
up:No, intermittent operation:Yes, shading:No etc.)
6 Intermittent aging cycle setting {
8 Warm-up time display (No aging) {
8 1 DV bias setting {
2 Main charger grid voltage setting {
6 Transfer voltage setting {
17 Transfer roller setting {
18 Transfer cleaning roller setting {
19 Fusing bias setting (Not used) {
9 1 ADU output test {
2 ADU sensor check {
10 1 Toner motor activation {
2 Toner rest sensor check {
13 U1 trouble cancellation {
14 Trouble cancellation {
15 LCC trouble cancellation { {
16 U2 trouble cancellation { { {
17 PF trouble cancellation {
21 1 Maintenance cycle set up {
22 1 Counter data display { { {
2 JAM/Trouble counter data display {
3 Paper jam history {
4 Trouble history {
5 ROM version data display { { {
6 Data print mode {
7 Key operator code display {
8 ORG/Staple counter data display { {
9 Paper feed counter data display {
10 System information {
11 FAX counter data display {
12 SPF JAM history {
13 Process data display {
19 Network scanner counter display { (FAX)
30 OSA vendor ID display (Application Communication) {
31 OSA vendor ID display (External account) {
23 2 JAM/trouble data print mode {
80 Data print mode {
Operation content
24 1 JAM/Trouble counter data clear {
2 Paper feed counter clear {
3 ORG/Staple counter clear { {
4 Maintenance counter data clear {
5 Developer counter data clear {
6 Copy counter data clear {
7 Drum/Toner counter data clear {
9 Printer/Other counter data clear {
10 FAX counter data clear {
11 Various rotation time timer clear {
15 Network scanner counter data clear { (FAX)
25 1 Toner concentration sensor monitor {
2 Auto developer adjustment {
26 2 Size setting {
3 Auditor setting {
5 Counter mode setting {
6 Destination setting {
10 Network scanner trial mode setting {
18 Toner save mode setting {
30 CE mark conformity control inhibit/allow setting {
35 Trouble memory mode setting {
38 Print stop setting when life over {
41 Center binding mode AMS setting {
50 Black-White reverse function valid/invalid setting {
52 White paper exit count-up setting { {
68 CA key cancel function valid/invalid {
27 1 PC/MODEM communication trouble (U7-00) detection YES/NO setting {
5 Tag number setting {
30 1 Main unit sensor check {
2 Tray sensor check {
40 1 Manual paper feed size width detection check {
2 Manual paper feed size width detection level adjustment {
7 Manual paper feed size width detection adjustment value input {
11 MPT size width detection check {
12 MPT size width detection level adjustment {
41 1 Document size detection photo sensor check {
2 Document size detection photo sensor detection level {
3 Document size detection photo sensor light receiving/detection level check {
43 1 Fusing temperature control temperature setting (Normal/Energy-save mode) {
3 Fusing roller RPM setting. {
44 1 Process correction inhibit/allow setting {
2 DM/ID sensor gain adjustment {
4 Standard patch density setting {
5 Patch making reference condition setting {
9 Process control data display {
12 Process control patch data display {
14 Temperature/humidity sensor output monitor {
16 Toner concentration reference value check {
46 2 Copy exposure level adjustment (binary) { {
9 Copy exposure level adjustment/individual setting (Text binary) { {
10 Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Text/Photo binary) { {
11 Copy exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Photo binary) { {
12 FAX exposure level adjustment (1 mode auto adjustment) { {
13 FAX exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Normal text) { {
14 FAX exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Fine) { {
15 FAX exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Super Fine) { {
16 FAX exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Ultra Fine) { {
17 Shading reference value change (Gain adjustment) {
18 gamma change (Copier mode) {
19 Exposure mode setting {
20 OC/SPF exposure correction {
21 Scanner exposure level adjustment (1 mode auto adjustment) {
22 Scanner exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Normal text) {
23 Scanner exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Fine) {
24 Scanner exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Super Fine) {
25 Scanner exposure level adjustment, individual setting (Ultra Fine) {
27 gamma change (Scanner mode) {
31 Copy sharpness setting {
39 FAX sharpness setting {
45 FAX exposure level adjustment, individual setting (600dpi) { {
Operation content
48 1 Magnification ratio adjustment (by Input/Output) { {
5 Motor speed adjustment {
49 1 Firmware update { { {
50 1 Copy lead edge adjustment (Document table) { { {
2 Lead edge adjustment (Document table simple type) { { {
5 Print lead edge adjustment { {
6 Copy lead edge adjustment (SPF) { { {
7 Copy lead edge adjustment (SPF simple type) { { {
10 Print off-center adjustment { {
12 Document off-center adjustment { {
27 Document image loss setting (FAX send/scanner mode) {
51 2 Resist amount adjustment { {
53 6 SPF size width detection level adjustment {
7 SPF size width detection adjustment value input {
8 SPF scan position adjustment {
55 1 Engine soft SW change and check {
2 Scanner soft SW change and check {
3 Controller soft SW change and check {
56 1 Data transfer {
60 1 ICU image DRAM read/write check {
61 1 LSU operation check {
2 Laser power setting (Copier) {
3 Laser power setting (FAX) {
4 Laser power setting (Printer) {
62 1 Hard disk format {
2 Hard disk read/write check {
3 Hard disk read/write check (All areas) {
6 HDD self diag {
7 Self diag error log print {
8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area) {
9 HDD format (system area) {
10 Job complete list delete {
11 Document filing data delete {
63 1 Shading check {
2 Shading execution {
7 White plate scan start position adjustment {
64 1 Self print {
65 1 Touch panel adjustment {
2 Touch panel check {
Operation content
66 1 FAX-related soft SW setting check/change {
2 FAX-related soft SW clear (Excluding FAX adjustment values) {
3 FAX-related memory check {
4 Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.) {
5 Signal send mode (Signal send level: Soft SW setting) {
6 Confidential pass code print {
7 Image memory content output {
8 Voice message reproduction (Signal send level: Max.) {
9 Voice message reproduction (Signal send level: Soft SW setting) {
10 Image memory clear {
11 300bps signal send (Signal send level: Max.) {
12 300bps signal send (Signal send level: Soft SW setting) {
13 Dial number registration {
14 Dial test (10PPS make time setting & delivery test) {
15 Dial test (20PPS make time setting & send test) {
16 Dial test (DTMF signal adjustment & send test) {
17 DTMF signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.) {
18 DTMF signal send mode (Signal send level: Soft SW setting) {
19 Address book backup (WR TO FLASH) {
20 Address book backup (RD FROM FLASH) {
21 FAX information print {
23 FAX program download {
24 FAST memory data clear {
25 MODEM dial-in FAX number registration {
26 MODEM dial-in telephone number registration {
27 Voice warp transfer destination registration {
29 Address book clear {
30 TEL/LIU status change check {
31 TEL/LIU setting {
32 Receive data check {
33 Signal detection check {
34 Communication time measurement display {
35 MODEM program rewrite {
36 MFP controller I/F check {
39 FAX destination registration {
42 Reload of the PIC program {
43 Setting of the PIC adjustment value {
60 (Secret) ACR data registration {
67 16 Network card check {
4. Details of simulation The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
1 HIGH SPEED (220mm/sec) High speed

1 2 LOW SPEED (110mm/sec) Low speed
3 TOP SPEED (360mm/sec) Top speed
1-1
Purpose Operation test/Check SIMULATION 2-1
SPF AGING TEST. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan- 1. HIGH SPEED
ner (read) unit and its control circuit. 2. LOW SPEED
Section Optical (Image scanning)
3. TOP SPEED 2㩷
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode with 10-key. 2-2
2) Press [START] key. Purpose Operation test/Check
The scanner performs scanning at the speed corresponding to Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
the operation mode. sors and detectors in the automatic docu-
ment feeder unit and the related circuits.
1 HIGH SPEED High speed (220mm/s)
2 LOW SPEED Low speed (110mm/s) Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
SIMULATION 1-1
SCANNER CHECK. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
1. HIGH SPEED
2. LOW SPEED 1 SSET SPF sensor
SOCD Open/close sensor
SCOV Paper feed cover sensor
1-2 SPED2 Document set sensor (Lower)
Purpose Operation test/Check SPED1 Document set sensor (Upper)
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2
detector in the scanning (read) section and SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3
the related circuit. SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4
Section Optical (Image scanning) SPOD Document exit sensor
Operation/Procedure SWDn Document width sensor (n → 1 (inside) to 6 (outside))
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. SPLSn Document length sensor (n → 1 (inside) to 2 (outside))
CISSET CIS installation detection
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
STSET Stamp unit installation sensor
• The scanner (read) unit is in the home position.: "MHPS" section STUD Tray upper limit sensor
is highlighted. STLD Tray lower limit sensor
• The scanner (read) unit is not in the home position.: "MHPS" is SWD_LEN SPF guide plate position (unit: 0.1mm)
normally displayed. SWD_AD SPF document width detection volume output AD
value
MHPS Optical system home position
SIMULATION 2-2
SPF SENSOR CHECK.
SIMULATION 1-2
SSET SOCD SCOV SPED2
SCANNER SENSOR CHECK.. SPED1 SPPD1 SPPD2 SPPD3
MHPS SPPD4 SPOD SWD6 SWD5
SWD4 SWD3 SWD2 SWD1
SPLS2 SPLS1 CISSET STSET
STUD STLD
SWD_LEN: 2100 SWD_AD: 600
2 2-3
Purpose Operation test/Check
2-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feeder unit and
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto- the control circuits.
matic document feeder unit and the control
Section DSPF
circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section DSPF
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation
Operation/Procedure check with 10-key.
1) Select the operation mode with 10-key. 2) Press the [START] key.
2) Press [START] key. The load selected in procedure 1 is operated.
The SPF repeat paper feed, transport, and paper exit at the speed The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
corresponding to the operation mode. key.
PI11S Saddle paper exit detection When the saddle unit is
1 MOTOR (T) Motor top speed installed
2 MOTOR (H) Motor high speed PI12 Tray 2 paper detection
3 MOTOR (L) Motor low speed PI12S Semi-circular roller phase detection When the saddle unit is
4 STRBC Document transport brake clutch installed
5 STRC Document feed transport clutch PI13S Guide HP detection When the saddle unit is
6 SPFC Document feed clutch installed
7 SRRC Document resist clutch PI14 Buffer path detection
8 SRRBC Document resist brake clutch PI14S Paper holding plate lead edge When the saddle unit is
9 STRRC Document feed resist clutch position detection installed
10 STRRBC Document feed resist brake clutch PI15 Finisher joint detection
11 STMPS Stamp solenoid PI15S Paper holding plate lead edge When the saddle unit is
12 SLUM Lift up motor position detection installed
13 SPFFAN SPF fan motor PI16 Door open detection
PI17 Buffer path entry port paper
detection
SIMULATION 2-3 PI17S Vertical path paper detection When the saddle unit is
SPF LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-13, AND PRESS START. installed
1.MOTOR(T) 2.MOTOR(H) 3.MOTOR(L)
4.STRBC 5.STRC 6.SPFC 7.SRRC 2 PI18
PI18S
Oscillating guide open detection
Saddle No. 1 paper detection When the saddle unit is
8.SRRBC 9.STRRC 10.STRRBC 11.STMPS
installed
12.SLUM 13.SPFFAN
PI19 Tray lift motor clock detection 2
PI19S Saddle No. 2 paper detection When the saddle unit is
installed
PI20 Oscillation guide clock detection
3 PI20S Saddle No. 3 paper detection When the saddle unit is
installed
PI21 Staple lead edge detection
3-2
PI21S Paper folding HP detection When the saddle unit is
Purpose Operation test/Check installed
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and PI22 Staple drive HP detection
detector in the finisher and the related cir- PI23 Tray 2 lift motor clock detection 1
cuit. PI24 Tray 2 lift motor clock detection 2
PI25 Tray 2 HP detection
Section Finisher
MS1 Front door / Upper door open
Operation/Procedure detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- MS1S Saddle entry port door detection When the saddle unit is
played. installed
MS2 Oscillation guide close detection
MS2P Punch front door open detection When the punch unit is
PI1 Entry port paper detection installed
PI1P Punch side resist HP detection When the punch unit is MS2S Front door open detection When the saddle unit is
installed installed
PI1S Paper holding plate motor clock When the saddle unit is MS3 Safety area detection
detection installed MS3S Paper exit door open detection When the saddle unit is
PI2P Punch motor clock detection When the punch unit is installed
installed MS4 Shutter close detection
PI2S Front door open detection When the saddle unit is MS4S Saddle staple presence detection 2 When the saddle unit is
installed installed
PI3 Paper exit detection MS5S Stitch operation HP detection 2 When the saddle unit is
PI3P Punch HP detection When the punch unit is installed
installed MS6S Saddle staple presence detection 1 When the saddle unit is
PI3S Paper exit cover open detection When the saddle unit is installed
installed MS7 Cartridge detection
PI4S Paper folding motor clock detection When the saddle unit is MS7S Stitch operation HP detection 1 When the saddle unit is
installed installed
PI5 Shutter open detection MS8 Staple empty detection
PI5S Alignment plate HP detection When the saddle unit is MS9 Tray approaching detection
installed
PI6 Alignment guide HP detection SIMULATION 3-2
PI6S Saddle tray paper detection When the saddle unit is FINISHER SENSOR CHECK.
installed PI10 PI20 PI19 PI9 PI22 PI1 PI14 PI3
PI7 Staple shift HP detection PI17 PI12 PI11 MS8 PI21 MS7 PI18 PI5
PI7S Paper positioning plate HP When the saddle unit is PI8 PI6 PI7 MS2 MS4 MS1 MS3 PI16
detection installed PI15 MS9 PI24 PI23 PI25
PI8 Tray 1 HP detection (PI2P) (MS2P) (PI1P) (PI3P)
PI8S Paper positioning plate HP When the saddle unit is <PI11S><PI15S><PI5S> <PI14S><PI1S> <PI4S> <PI13S>
detection installed <PI12S><PI17S><PI7S> <PI18S><PI6S> <PI8S><MS7S>
PI9 Tray 1 lift motor clock detection 1 <MS5S><PI20S><PI19S><PI21S><MS3S><PI9S> <PI2S>
<PI3S> <MS2S><MS1S><MS6S><MS4S>
PI9S Entry port cover open detection When the saddle unit is
installed
( ) : Added when the punch unit is installed.
PI10 Paper exit motor clock detection
PI11 Tray 1 paper detection < > : Added when the saddle unit is installed.
3-3 Item Setting range
3 Staple binding position 68 - 132, 1STEP: 0.152 mm
Purpose Operation test/Check adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in 4 Punch center 37 - 63, 1STEP: 0.15mm
the finisher and the control circuit. adjustment
5 Punch hole position 35 - 57, 1STEP: 0.26mm
Section Finisher
adjustment (Paper feed
Operation/Procedure direction)
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation 6 Stack tray standby 5 - 35, 1STEP: 1mm
check with 10-key. position adjustment
(Small size)
2) Press the [START] key.
7 Stack tray standby 5 - 35, 1STEP: 1mm
The load selected in procedure 1 is operated. position adjustment
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. (Large size)
1 SL7 Belt wait solenoid

2 SL6 Wait solenoid SIMULATION 3-10
FINISHER SETTING.㵘SELECT㵘1-7䋬AND PRESS START.
3 SL5 Paddle solenoid 1. SADDLE POSITION
4 SL3 Buffer exit port solenoid 2. ALIGNMENT㵘POSITION
3. STAPLE㵘POSITION
5 SL2 Buffer entry port solenoid 4. PUNCH㵘CENTER
6 SL1 Flapper solenoid 5. PUNCH㵘HOLE
6. TRAY WAITING POSITION(S-SIZE)
1
7 M10 Tray 2 lift motor
7. TRAY WAITING POSITION(L-SIZE)
8 M9 Entry port transport motor
9 M8 No. 2 transport motor
10 M7 Oscillation motor
11 M6 Staple motor
3-30
12 M5 Tray 1 lift motor Purpose Operation test/Check
13 M4 Stapler shift motor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
14 M3 Alignment motor sors and detectors in the inserter and the
15 M2 Paper exit motor related circuit.
16 M1 No. 1 transport motor
Section Inserter
(When the punch unit is installed)
Operation/Procedure
17 M2P Punch side resist motor The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
18 M1P Punch motor played.
(When the saddle unit is installed. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
19 SL4S Transport plate contact solenoid TH_SEN Sub tray pull-out detection
20 SL2S No. 2 paper deflection plate solenoid TS_SEN Sub tray storage detection
21 SL1S No. 1 paper deflection plate solenoid T_SEN Inserter tray paper size detection
22 M8S Paper holding motor EMP_SEN Inserter tray empty detection
23 M7S Stitch motor: Front REG_SEN Inserter resist sensor
24 M6S Stitch motor: Rear TIM_SEN Inserter timing sensor detection
25 M5S Saddle alignment motor JCK_SEN Inserter cover open/close sensor
26 M4S Paper positioning motor H_SEN Inserter reverse sensor
27 M3S Guide motor HI_SEN Inserter paper exit sensor
28 M2S Paper folding motor HYK_SEN Inserter reverse unit open/close sensor
29 M1S Saddle transport motor S_SW Inserter set SW
KC_SEN Base cover open/close sensor
P_ST_SW Inserter start SW
SIMULATION 3-3
P_MO_SW Inserter staple mode select SW
FINISHER LOAD TEST.㵘SELECT㵘1-㵘䋬AND PRESS START.
P_PN_SW Inserter punch select SW
2㩷
SIMULATION 3-30
INSERTER SENSOR CHECK.
TH_SEN TS_SEN T_SEN EMP_SEN
3-10 REG_SEN TIM_SEN JCK_SEN H_SEN
Purpose Adjustment HI_SEN HYK_SEN S_SW KC_SEN
P_ST_SW P_MO_SW P_PN_SW
Function (Purpose) Finisher (AR-F16) adjustment
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
with 10-key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
4) Press [START] key. (The entered value is stored.)
Item Setting range

1 Saddle stitch/folding 192 - 208, 1STEP: 0.25 mm
position adjustment
2 Alignment position 2 - 18, 1STEP: 0.35 mm
adjustment
<LCC>
3-31
LTD Transport sensor
LUD Tray upper limit sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads LLD Tray lower limit sensor
in the inserter and the related circuits. LPED Tray paper presence/empty sensor
Section Inserter LTOD Main unit connection detection sensor
Operation/Procedure LCD Tray insertion detection
LOSW Upper open/close detection SW
LRE Lift motor encoder sensor
check with 10-key.
+24VM 24V power monitor
2) Press the [START] key. LLSW Upper limit SW
The load selected in procedure 1 is operated.
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
SIMULATION 4-2
key. LCC SENSOR CHECK.
LTD LUD LLD LPED
1 K_MOT Reverse motor LTOD LCD LOSW LRE
2 Y_MOT Horizontal transport motor +24VM LLSW
3 H_MOT Inserter reverse
4 F_SOL Inserter flapper solenoid
5 R_CL Inserter resist clutch 4-3
6 P_LED Inserter operation panel upper LED Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
SIMULATION 3-31 in the paper feed section (large capacity
INSERTER LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
1. K_MOT 2. Y_MOT 3. H_MOT tray) and the related circuit.
4. F_SOL 5. R_CL 6. P_LED 2 Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
3-32
check with 10-key.
Purpose Setting (Adjustment) 2) Press the [START] key.
Function (Purpose) Inserter paper width detection level setting. The load selected in procedure 1 is operated.
Section Inserter The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Operation/Procedure <Side LCC>
1) Select the number corresponding to the adjustment item with
10-key. 1 LTM LCC transport motor
2 LLM LCC lift motor
3 LPFCL Paper feed clutch
3) Enter the setting (adjustment) value with 10-key.
4 LPSL LCC paper feed solenoid
4) Press the [START] key. 5 LTCL LCC transport clutch
6 LTLSL Tray lock solenoid D
1 MAX. POSITION Max. position
2 POSITION 1 Adjustment point 1
3 POSITION 2 Adjustment point 2 SIMULATION 4-3
4 MIN. POSITION Min. width LCC LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
1.LTM 2.LLM
SIMULATION 3-32
3.LPFCL
5.LTCL
4.LPSL
6.LTLSL
2
INSERTER TRAY VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS
START.
1. MAX. POSITION : 72
2. POSITION 1 : 380
3. POSITION 2 : 710 1 5
4. MIN. POSITION : 804
5-1
4 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
4-2 cuit.
Purpose Operation test/Check Section Operation (Display/Operation key)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Operation/Procedure
sors and detectors in the paper feed sec- The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX →
tion (large capacity tray) and the related MIN → the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
circuit.
Section Paper feed 㩷SIMULATION 5-1
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
5-2
6
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
6-1
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing/Paper exit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the paper
Operation/Procedure
transport system loads (clutch, solenoid)
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation and the control circuit.
check with 10-key.
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/
2) Press [START] key.
Transport)
The load selected in procedure 1 performs ON/OFF operation.
Operation/Procedure
Press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key to stop the operation of the
load.
check with 10-key.
The ON/OFF operation of the selected heater lamp is repeated
every 500ms five times.
1 HL1 (LOWER) Heater lamp 1 (Lower) The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS]
2 HL2 (UPPER) Heater lamp 2 (Upper) key.
3 HL3 (LEFT) Heater lamp 3 (Left)
1 MSWPR MSW reset signal
2 HLPR Heater power relay signal
SIMULATION 5-2
3 DCPR DC power relay signal
HEATER LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-3 ,AND PRESS START.
1.HL1(LOWER) 4 MM Main motor
2.HL2(UPPER) 2 5 DM Drum motor
3.HL3(LEFT) 6 DVM Developing motor
7 TURM Transfer separation motor
8 TRM PS front motor
5-3 9 POM1 Paper exit motor 1
10 POM2_FW Paper exit motor 2 forward rotation
11 POM2_RV Paper exit motor 2 reverse rotation
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 12 VPM Paper transport motor
lamp and the control circuit. 13 RRC Resist roller clutch signal
Section Optical (Image scanning) 14 PSBC Brake clutch signal
Operation/Procedure 15 PSPS Separation pawl
16 T1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
17 T2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
check with 10-key.
18 HPFC Horizontal transport clutch
19 T1PUS Tray 1 pickup solenoid
The load selected in procedure 1 turns ON for 10sec. 20 T2PUS Tray 2 pickup solenoid
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] 21 HPLS Relay path clock solenoid
key. 22 T1LUM Tray 1 lift-up motor
23 T2LUM Tray 2 lift-up motor
NOTE: CIS: only when the DSPF is installed.
24 DSKPFC1 Desk paper transport clutch upstream side
25 DSKPFC2 Desk paper transport clutch downstream side
SIMULATION 5-3 26 M1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
COPY LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 27 M2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
1.COPY LAMP
2.CIS 1 28
29
M1PUS
M2PUS
Tray 3 pickup solenoid
Tray 4 pickup solenoid
30 M1LUM Tray 3 lift-up motor
31 M2LUM Tray 4 lift-up motor
5-4 32 TRC_LCC Desk clutch sync signal
Purpose Operation test/Check 33 FUM Fusing motor
34 MPFPUS Manual pickup solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- 35 MPFC Manual paper feed clutch signal
charge lamp and the related circuit. 36 MPFGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Section Process 37 WEBM Fusing web feed motor
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 6-1
check with 10-key. FEED OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1- 37, AND PRESS START.
2) Press [START] key. 1.MSWPR 2.HLPR 3.DCPR 4.MM 5.DM
The load selected in procedure 1 turns ON for 30sec. 6.DVM 7.TURM 8.TRM 9.POM1

10.POM2_FW 11.POM2_RV 12.VPM 2
13.RRC 14.PSBC 15.PSPS 16.T1PFC
key. 17.T2PFC 18.HPFC 19.T1PUS 20.T2PUS
21.HPLS 22.T1LUM 23.T2LUM 24.DSKPFC1
25.DSKPFC2 26.M1PFC 27.M2PFC 28.M1PUS
SIMULATION 5-4
29.M2PUS 30.M1LUM 31.M2LUM 32.TRC_LCC
DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK. SELECT 1, AND PRESS START.
33.FUM 34.MPFPUS 35.MPFC 36.MPFGS
1.DL
1 37.WEBM
6-2
7
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
7-1
motor and its control circuit.
Purpose Setting
Section Others
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
Operation/Procedure
aging.
check with 10-key. Section —
2) Press the [START] key. Operation/Procedure
The load selected in procedure 1 operates. 1) Select the number corresponding to the operating condition of
aging with 10-key.
key. The combined mode of 0 - 6 mode and 10, 20, or 30 mode can
be set.
1 VFM-EX Exhaust fan motor (VFM-EX1, 2, 3, VFM-BKL, In that case, the number corresponding to one of 0 - 6 mode
VFM-BKU) and the number corresponding to one of 10, 20, and 30 mode
2 CFM-UP Heat exhaust fan motor (Paper exit upper) are added and the sum number is entered.
(CFM-U1, 2, 3, VFM-BKR)
3 CFM-R Cooling fan motor (Right side) (CFM-R1, 2, 3)
4 CFM-DC Cooling fan motor (Power source) (CFM-DC1, 2)
The condition selected in procedure 1) is set.
5 CFM-DV Cooling fan motor (Developing) (CFM-DV) The setting of this simulation is kept valid until the power is turned
6 CFM-ICU /HDD Cooling fan motor (Controller/HDD) (CFM-ICU/ off.
HDD)
7 ALL All fans control* 0 NO MISS FEED DETECTION No jam detection
8 CFM-AD Cooling fan motor (paper exit center) (CFM-U4) 1 AGING Aging mode
2 AGING/NO MISS FEED No jam detection, aging mode
* All fans: All the fans controlled by the engine. DETECTION.
(Exhaust fan motor, heat exhaust fan motor (paper exit upper), 3 AGING/NO MISS FEED No jam detection/ no warmup/ no
cooling fan motor (right side) cooling fan motor (power source), DETECTION/NO WARM UP/ fusing temperature control, aging
cooling fan motor (developing), cooling fan motor (paper exit NO TEMPERATURE mode
center)) CONTROL.
4 NO WARM UP. No warm-up
SIMULATION 6-2 5 AGING/INTERVAL. Intermittent aging mode
FAN MOTOR CHECK. SELECT 1-8, CAND PRESS START. 6 AGING/INTERVAL/NO MISS No jam detection intermittent
1. VFM-EX 2. CFM-UP FEED DETECTION. aging mode
3. CFM-R
5. CFM-DV
4. CFM-DC
6. CFM-ICU /HDD
2 +10 NO PROCESS UNIT Above +10: No process unit
CHECK. (including the developing unit)
7. ALL 8. CFM-AD
detection
+20 NO SHADING. Above +20: No shading
+30 NO PROCESS UNIT Above +30: No process unit
6-3 CHECK/NO SHADING. detection /no shading
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the transfer SIMULATION 7-1
unit and the related circuit. AGING TEST SETTING. SELECT 0-36, AND PRESS START.
0.NO MISS FEED DETECTION
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1.AGING 2
2.AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION.
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation 3.AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION/
NO WARM UP/NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL.
check with 10-key.
4.NO WARM UP.
2) Press the [START] key. 5.AGING/INTERVAL.
The load selected in procedure 1 operates. 6.AGING/INTERVAL/NO MISS FEED DETECTION.
+10:NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK.
The transfer belt performs contact/separation with the OPC +20:NO SHADING.
drum. +30:NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK/NO SHADING.
key. Press [START] key to start registration and operation.
NOTE: Before disassembling the transfer unit, use this simulation The operation mode is kept until the power is turned off or setting is
to separate the transfer unit from the OPC drum. made again.
1 TURM (RELEASE) Transfer unit separation state

2 TURM (JOINT) Transfer unit contact state
SIMULATION 6-3
TURM CHECK. SELECT 1-2 CAND PRESS START.
1. TURM(RELEASE)
2. TURM(JOINT) 2
7-6 Setting
Item Default
range
Purpose Setting 1 AUTO Auto mode 0 - 750 495
Function (Purpose) Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. 2 CHARACTER Text mode
3 MIX Text/Photo mode
Section —
4 PHOTO Photo mode
Operation/Procedure
5 PRINTER Printer mode
1) Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key. 6 FAX FAX mode
2) Press [START] key. 7 PLUS Reverse developing 0 - 250 150
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. bias voltage
* Set range of interval time: 1 - 999 (sec)

SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS SETTING. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START.
1.AUTO 495 2.CHARACTER 495
SIMULATION 7-6
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE SETUP. INPUT TIME AND PRESS START. 3.MIX 495 4.PHOTO 495 1
(1-999, UNIT: sec) 5.PRINTER 495 6.FAX 495 7.PLUS 150
10
8-2
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/Check
7-8 Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
Purpose Setting the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the warm-up time display YES/
NO. Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Section —
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the warm-up time display with 10-key.
YES/NO.
2) Press [START] key, and the number selected in procedure 1)
is set.
* The setting of this simulation is kept valid until the power is
turned off. (The set value is stored, and the output corresponding to the
set value is outputted for 30sec.)
* The warm-up time is displayed by sec.
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
(The main charger grid output voltage adjustment and output check
SIMULATION 7-8
can be made in each print mode.)
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY.
ARE YOU SURE?
Setting
1. YES Item Default
2. NO 1 range
1 AUTO Auto mode 200 - 1000 580
2 CHARACTER Text mode
3 MIX Text/Photo mode
4 PHOTO Photo mode
8 5 PRINTER Printer mode
6 FAX FAX mode
8-1
SIMULATION 8-2
MAIN GRID SETTING. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of 1.AUTO 580 2.CHARACTER 580
the developing voltage of each color and 3.MIX 580 4.PHOTO 580 1
the control circuit. 5.PRINTER 580 6.FAX 580
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-

8-6
Operation/Procedure
with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
2) Press the [START] key. the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
(Transfer mode)
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer
(The set value is stored, and the output corresponding to the
Operation/Procedure
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
with 10-key.
(The developing bias output voltage adjustment and output check
can be made in each print mode.)
(The set value is stored, and the voltage corresponding to the
1 : '07 Feb 15
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
(The transfer output voltage adjustment and output check can be (The output voltage of the transfer CL roller cleaning/transfer CL
made in each print mode.) roller print mode can be adjusted and checked.)
Default Item Set range Default

Setting
1 Item 55/62 70 Transfer CL roller (Print) CRHV PLUS 0 - 250 200
range
(ppm) (ppm) Transfer CL roller CRHV MINUS 0 - 250 200
1 FRONT Front surface print 0 - 800 300 400 (Cleaning)
mode
2 BACK Back surface print
TRANSFER CLEANING ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS
START.
SIMULATION 8-6 1.CRHV PLUS 200 1
THV+ SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 2.CRHV MINUS 200
1.FRONT 400
2.BACK 400 1
8-19
8-17
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the fusing bias
voltage and the control circuit. (Not used)
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
Section Fusing
the transfer voltage and the related circuit.
(Transfer belt cleaning mode) Operation/Procedure
with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
(The voltage is outputted for 30sec.)
with 10-key. The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
2) Press the [START] key. The output voltage can be adjusted with the adjustment volumes
VR101/VR102 on the high voltage PWB (fusing bias).
4) Press the [START] key. Item Adjustment VR
The set value is stored, and the voltage corresponding to the Fusing bias (-) FBIAS VR 101
set value is outputted for 30sec. Fusing bias (+) VR 102
key.
SIMULATION 8-19
The transfer output voltage adjustment and output check can FUSING BIAS CHECK. SELECT 1, AND PRESS START.
be made in the transfer belt cleaning mode. 1.FBIAS
1
Setting
Item Default
range
1 SHV FRONT Front side 0 - 600 450
2 SHV BACK Back side 0 - 600 450
3 THV- Out put 0 - 75 10
9
SIMULATION 8-17
TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
9-1
1.SHV FRONT 450 Purpose Operation test/Check
2.SHV BACK 450 1 Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
3.THV- 10
the load (clutch/solenoid) in the duplex sec-
tion and the control circuit.
8-18 Section Duplex

Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the voltage of the
check with 10-key.
transfer CL roller cleaning/transfer CL roller
print mode and the control circuit. 2) Press [START] key.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Operation/Procedure 1 ADUM1 ADU motor 1: Upstream
1) Select the number that corresponds to the adjustment item 2 ADUM2 ADU motor 2: Downstream
with 10-key. 3 DGS ADU gate solenoid
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. SIMULATION 9-1
4) Press the [START] key. ADU OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
1. ADUM1
(The set value is stored, and the voltage corresponding to the
2. ADUM2 1
3. DGS
9-2
10-2
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
sors and detectors in the duplex section
remaining quantity sensor and the related
and its control circuit.
circuit.
Section Duplex
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The toner motor rotates 2 turns, and the toner presence/empty
in the toner hopper is displayed.
DSW_ADU ADU cabinet open/close detection
AINPD ADU paper entry detection Toner empty: Normal display
APPD1 ADU transport detection 1 Toner remained: Highlighted display
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2
SIMULATION 10-2
TONER REST SENSOR CHECK. PRESS START.
SIMULATION 9-2
TFSD
ADU SENSOR CHECK.
DSW_ADU AINPD APPD1 APPD2
13
10
13-0
10-1 Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Purpose Operation test/Check Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner (Only when FAX is installed.)
motor and the related circuit. Section FAX
Section Process (Developing) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
1) Select the number corresponding to the target of operation 2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
check with 10-key.
2) Press the [START] key. 1 YES After canceling U1 trouble, the machine returns to the
main code entry standby mode.
The load selected in procedure 1) is operated for 10sec.
2 NO Without canceling U1 trouble, the machine returns to
The operation can be stopped with the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. the main code entry standby mode.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation with toner in the toner bottle
and the intermediate toner tank. Excessive toner may enter
SIMULATION 13
the developing section, causing overtoner. Check that U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
there is no toner in the toner bottle and the intermediate ARE YOU SURE?
toner tank or disassemble the toner motor before executing 1. YES 1
this simulation. 2. NO
TM1 Toner motor 1

TM2 Toner motor 2
14
SIMULATION 10-1
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START
1. TM1 14-0
2. TM2 1 Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/
LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Section Trouble
Operation/Procedure
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
1 YES After canceling the trouble other than U1, U2, PF, and
LCC, the machine returns to the main code entry
standby mode.
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns to
the main code entry standby mode.
SIMULATION 14
TROUBLE CANCELLATION. (OTHERS)
17
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES 1 17-0
2. NO
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the PF troubles (when the
copy inhibit command from the host com-
puter is received).
15 Section Communication unit
(RIC/MODEM etc.)
15-0 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) 1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag ”U6-09, F3-12, 2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
22” (large capacity paper feed tray, paper
feed trays 1, 2) troubles. 1 YES After canceling the PF trouble, the machine returns to
Section LCC
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns to
Operation/Procedure the main code entry standby mode.
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key.
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.)
SIMULATION 17
1 YES After canceling the LCC trouble, the machine returns PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
to the main code entry standby mode. ARE YOU SURE?
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns to 1. YES 1
the main code entry standby mode. 2. NO
SIMULATION 15
LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES 1 21
2. NO
21-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
16 Section Specifications - Counter
Operation/Procedure
16-0 1) Enter the number corresponding to the maintenance timing
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) display.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag U2 troubles. 2) Press [START] key. The condition entered in procedure 1) is
set.
Section MFP control PWB, PCU PWB, scanner
control PWB Setting
Maintenance timing display
Operation/Procedure range
1) Select 1 (YES) with 10-key. 0 Default (Differs depending on the model.) 0 - 999
2) Press [START] key. (The trouble display is canceled.) 1 - 300 Maintenance display at 1K - 300K
999 No maintenance display
1 YES After canceling the U2 trouble, the machine returns to
2 NO Without canceling the trouble, the machine returns to SIMULATION 21-1
the main code entry standby mode. MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP. INPUT VALUE 0-999, AND PRESS
START.
0: DEFAULT
SIMULATION 16
1-300: MAINTENANCE CYCLE (1K-300K)
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION.
ARE YOU SURE?
999: FREE 0
1. YES 1
2. NO
22-3
22 Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
22-1 Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ misfeed count of each position. (If the mis-
Check (Display/Print) feed count is considerably great, it may be
judged as necessary to repair.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode. (Used to Section Sections other than DSPF section
check the maintenance timing.) Operation/Procedure
Section — The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed.
Operation/Procedure The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
Various print counter values are displayed. The max. 100 items of misfeed history can be recorded. The data
may be used to identify trouble position.
TOTAL Total counter (Jam cause code)
DRUM Drum counter
TONER Toner counter Code Description
DEVE Developer counter NO_JAM_CAUSE No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
TOTAL OUTPUT Total output page number TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed jam (PFD2 not-reached)
COPIES Copy effective paper counter PFD2_NM1 PFD2 not-reached jam (Tray 3 feed paper)
PRINTER Printer counter PFD2_NM2 PFD2 not-reached jam (Tray 4 feed paper)
FAX FAX print counter PFD2_NAD PFD2 not-reached jam (ADU re-feed paper)
I-FAX output iFAX print counter PFD2_ST1 PFD2 remaining jam (Tray 1 feed paper)
DOC FILING OUTPUT Document filing print counter PFD2_SM1 PFD2 remaining jam (Tray 3 feed paper)
RIGHT SIDE OUTPUT Right paper exit counter PFD2_SM2 PFD2 remaining jam (Tray 4 feed paper)
OTHERS Other print counter (List print , etc.) PFD2_SAD PFD2 remaining jam (ADU re-feed paper)
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning feed counter
PPD_NMF PPD1 not-reached jam (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
SIMULATION 22-1 PPD_NT1 PPD1 not-reached jam (Tray 1 feed paper)
COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. PPD_NT2 PPD1 not-reached jam (Tray 2 feed paper)
TOTAL: ******** DRUM: ******** TONER: ******** PPD_NM1 PPD1 not-reached jam (Tray 3 feed paper)
DEVE: ******** MAINTENANCE: ******** PPD_NM2 PPD1 not-reached jam (Tray 4 feed paper)
TOTAL OUTPUT: ******** COPIES: ********
PPD_NLC PPD1 not-reached jam (LCC paper feed paper)
PRINTER: ******** FAX OUTPUT: ********
PPD_NAD PPD1 not-reached jam (ADU re-feed paper)
I-FAX OUTPUT:******** DOC FILING OUTPUT:********
RIGHT SIDE:******** OTHERS: ********
FUSER WEB SEND:******** PPD_SMF PPD1 remaining jam (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD_ST1 PPD1 remaining jam (Tray 1 feed paper)
PPD_ST2 PPD1 remaining jam (Tray 2 feed paper)
22-2 PPD_SM1 PPD1 remaining jam (Tray 3 feed paper)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ PPD_SM2 PPD1 remaining jam (Tray 4 feed paper)
Check (Display/Print) PPD_SLC PPD1 remaining jam (LCC paper feed paper)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed PPD_SAD PPD1 remaining jam (ADU re-feed paper)
and troubles. (When the number of misfeed
is considerably great, it is judged as neces- PPD_PRI PPD1 jam (Image ready request is not sent from
ICU.)
sary for repair. The misfeed rate is obtained
by dividing this count value with the total
PSD_N PSD not-reached jam (currently not detected)
counter value.)
PSD_S PSD remaining jam (currently not detected)
Section Trouble POD1_N POD1 not-reached jam
Operation/Procedure POD1_S POD2 remaining jam
The paper jam/trouble counter value is displayed. POD1_LDV POD1 jam (LCV is turned OFF.)
POD2_N POD2 not-reached jam
PAPER JAM Number of paper jams POD2_SR POD2 remaining jam (When paper is discharged
SPF JAM Number of SPF jams on the right side of the machine.)
TROUBLE Number of troubles POD2_SL POD2 remaining jam (When paper is discharged
on the left side of the machine.)
SIMULATION 22-2 AINPD_N ADU paper entry sensor not-reached jam

JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. AINPD_S ADU paper entry sensor remaining jam
PAPER JAM: ******** SPF JAM: ******** APPD1_N ADU transport sensor 1 not-reached jam
TROUBLE: ******** APPD1_S ADU transport sensor 1 remaining jam
APPD2_N ADU transport sensor 2 not-reached jam
APPD2_S ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam
DESK1 Tray 3 paper feed jam (M1PFD not-reached)

M1PFD_N2 M1PFD not-reached jam (Tray 4 feed paper)
M1PFD_S1 M1PFD remaining jam (Tray 3 feed paper)
M1PFD_S2 M1PFD remaining jam (Tray 4 feed paper)
DESK2 Tray 4 paper feed jam (M2PFD not-reached)
Code Description
M2PFD_S M2PFD remaining jam
SIMULATION 22-3
PAPER JAM HISTORY.
MPRD2_N2 MPRD2 not-reached jam (Tray 2 feed paper) *******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
MPRD2_NM MPRD2 not reached jam *******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
(Manual paper feed tray feed paper) *******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
MPRD2_NL MPRD2 not-reached jam
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
(LCC paper feed paper)
···············
MPRD2_S2 MPRD2 remaining jam (Tray 2 feed paper)
MPRD2_SM MPRD2 remaining jam (10 lines, 80 digits = 800 characters)
(Manual paper feed tray feed paper)
MPRD2_SL MPRD2 remaining jam (LCC paper feed paper)
22-4
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed jam (MPRD1 not-reached)
MPRD1_NM MPRD1 not-reached jam Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
(Manual paper feed tray feed paper) Check (Display/Print)
MPRD1_NL MPRD1 not-reached jam Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
(LCC paper feed paper) tory.
MPRD1_S2 MPRD1 remaining jam (Tray 2 feed paper)
MPRD1_SM MPRD1 remaining jam
Section —
(Manual paper feed tray feed paper) Operation/Procedure
MPRD1_SL MPRD1 remaining jam (LCC paper feed paper) The trouble history is displayed.
MPFD2_NM MPFD2 not-reached jam The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 100 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted
MPFD2_NL MPFD2 not-reached jam
sequentially.) The trouble position can be identified by the data.
MPFD2_SM MPFD2 remaining jam
SIMULATION 22-4
MPFD2_SL MPFD2 remaining jam
TROUBLE HISTORY.
(LCC paper feed paper) **-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
BPT MPFD2 remaining jam **-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
(Manual paper feed tray feed paper) **-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
MPFD1_S MPFD1 remaining jam **-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**,**-**
LPPD_N LPPD not-reached jam
···············
LPPD_S LPPD remaining jam
LPPD_LCC LPPD jam (No reply in a certain time after (10 lines, 80 digits = 800 characters)
preliminary paper feed from LCC and issuing the
paper feed command.)
22-5
LCC LCC paper feed jam (LTD not-reached jam ) Purpose Others
LTD_S LTD remaining jam Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
unit (section).
FES_N FINISHER entry port sensor not-reached jam
FES_S FINISHER entry port sensor remaining jam
Section —
FFPS_N FINISHER Saddle not-reached jam Operation/Procedure
FFPS_S FINISHER Saddle remaining jam The ROM version of each section can be checked. When there is
FEXIT_S FINISHER bundle exit remaining jam any problem in the software, use this simulation to check the ROM
FSTPL FINISHER Staple jam version of each section and revise the version if necessary.
FPNCH FINISHER punch JAM
FDOP FINISHER door open JAM S/N Engine section serial number
FIN_TIME FINISHER Abnormal paper interval jam MFP MFP controller
(LANGUAGE) (Language version)
REG_SEN_N INSERTER Resist sensor not-reached jam BOOT MFP controller BOOT ROM
(When inserter paper feed) FAX FAX controller
REG_SEN_S INSERTER Resist sensor remaining jam PCU PCU controller
(When inserter paper feed) SCANNER Scanner controller
TIM_SEN_N INSERTER Timing sensor not-reached jam FINISHER Finisher controller
(When inserter paper feed) SADDLE UNIT Saddle unit
TIM_SEN_S INSERTER Timing sensor remaining jam LCC Side LCC
(When inserter paper feed) INSERTER Inserter
HI_SEN_NI INSERTER Paper exit sensor not-reached jam
(When inserter paper feed)
HI_SEN_NP INSERTER Paper exit sensor not-reached jam SIMULATION 22-5
(Main unit paper feed) ROM VERSION DATA DISPLAY.
HI_SEN_S INSERTER Paper exit sensor remaining jam S/N: 0000000000
H_SEN_NF INSERTER Reverse sensor not-reached jam MFP: 1.00 (LANGUAGE: 1.00)
(When entering into the reverse path.) PCU: 1.00 BOOT: 1.00
H_SEN_NB INSERTER Reverse sensor not-reached jam SCANNER: 1.00 FAX: 1.00
(When discharging to the reverse path.) FINISHER: 1.00
H_SEN_SF INSERTER Reverse sensor remaining jam SADDLE UNIT: 1.00 LCC: 1.00
(When entering into the reverse path.) INSERTER: 1.00
H_SEN_SB INSERTER Reverse sensor remaining jam
(When discharging to the reverse path.)
22-6
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ SIMULATION 22-8
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
SPF: ********
Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of the setting and SCAN: ********
adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft STAPLER: ******** PUNCH: ********
switch, counters). STAMP: ******** SADDLE STAPLER: ********
INSERTER: ******** INSERTER OFF LINE: ********
Section —
Operation/Procedure
When installing or servicing this machine, execute this simulation to 22-9
print and save various setting and adjustment data for next servic- Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
ing. (For example, memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) Check (Display/Print)
1) Enter 1 with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
2) Press the [START] key. quantity) of each paper feed section.
The various setting and adjustment data are printed out. (The print Section Paper feed, ADU
paper cannot be selected optionally.)
Operation/Procedure
0 TRAY SELECT TRAY SELECT auto only The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed.
(Selection is not allowed.)
1 PRINT START PRINT START TRAY1 Tray 1 use quantity
TRAY2 Tray 2 use quantity
TRAY3 Tray 3 use quantity
SIMULATION 22-6 TRAY4 Tray 4 use quantity
DATA PRINT MODE. SELECT SETTING, AND PRESS START.
BPT Manual feed tray use quantity
0. TRAY SELECT :AUTO ONLY
1. PRINT START 1 ADU
LCC
Duplex paper feed quantity
Side LCC use quantity
SIMULATION 22-9
PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
22-7 TRAY1: ******** TRAY2:********
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ TRAY3: ******** TRAY4:********
BPT: ******** ADU: ********
LCC: ********
Function (Purpose) Used to display the key operator code.
(This simulation is used when the customer
forgets the key operator code.) 22-10
Section — Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Operation/Procedure Check (Display/Print)
The key operator code is displayed. Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
SIMULATION 22-7
Section —
KEY OPERATOR CODE DISPLAY. Operation/Procedure
CODE: ***** The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of the
installed devices and options are displayed.)
MACHINE (Model code)

FINISHER NONE/ (Model code)
22-8
LCC NONE/ (Model code)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ INSERTER NONE/ (Model code)
Check (Display/Print) PUNCH NONE/ (Model code)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use of the fin- SYSTEM MEMORY Memory capacity (MB)
isher, the SPF, and the scan (reading) unit. HDD Hard disk capacity (MB)
NIC NONE/ (Network Expansion kit)
Section Scanner (Image scanning) - Finisher
NSCN NONE/ (Network scanner)
Operation/Procedure
PS3 NONE/ (PS3 expansion kit)
The values of the finisher counter, the scanner (read), counter, and FAX NONE/ (Model code)
the SPF related counters are displayed. FAX MEMORY FAX expansion memory capacity (MB)
STAMP Finish stamp NONE/ (Model code)
SPF Document feed quantity
PCU TYPE PCU PWB type (JPN: Japan, EX: EX Japan)
SCAN Number of times of scan
I-FAX None/ (Internet FAX expansion kit)
STAPLER Number of times of staple
PUNCH Number of times of punch
STAMP Number of times of SPF finish stamp
SADDLE STAPLER Number of times of saddle staple
INSERTER Number of times of inserter
INSERTER OFF LINE Number of inserter off-line times
(Model code list)
22-11
Item Display Content Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output
MACHINE (Model code) Network optional model /Check (Display/Print)
(55 ppm)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
(Model code) Network optional model
receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is
(62 ppm)
installed)
(Model code) Network optional model
(70 ppm) Section FAX
(Model code) Network print standard Operation/Procedure
equipment model (55 ppm)
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
(Model code) Network print standard
are displayed.
(Model code) Network print standard
FAX SEND Number of FAX send
FAX RECEIVE Number of FAX receive
INSERTER ----- Inserter not installed
FAX OUTPUT Number of FAX print
(Model code) Inserter installed
SEND IMAGES Page number of send
FINISHER ----- After-process unit not
SEND TIME Send time
installed
RECEIVE TIME Receive time
(Model code) Finisher installed
(Model code) Saddle finisher installed
PUNCH ----- Punch unit not installed SIMULATION 22-11
(Model code) Punch unit installed (2-hole) FAX COUNTER DATA DISPLAY.
(Model code) Punch unit installed FAX SEND: ******** FAX RECEIVE : ********
(2-hole/3-hole auto select) FAX OUTPUT:********
(Model code) Punch unit installed (4-hole) SEND IMAGES: ******** SEND TIME: ********:**:**
(Model code) Punch unit installed RECEIVE TIME: ********:**:**
(4-hole, wide)
LCC ----- Side LCC not installed
(Model code) Side LCC installed
(Model code) Side LCC installed 22-12
(large size support) Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output
MEMORY 0MB Expansion memory not /Check (Display/Print)
installed
Function (Purpose) Used to check the SPF misfeed positions
***MB Expansion memory ***MB
and the number of misfeed at each posi-
HD 0MB Hard disk not installed
tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
****MB Hard disk installed
siderably great, it can be judged as
NIC ----- Network Expansion kit not
necessary for repair.)
installed
(Model code) Network Expansion kit Section DSPF
installed Operation/Procedure
PS3 expansion ----- PS expansion kit not
The history of paper jam and misfeed is displayed.
kit installed
(Model code) PS expansion kit installed The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
FAX ----- FAX expansion kit not The max. 20 items are recorded. (The oldest one is sequentially
installed deleted.) This data can be used to identify the trouble position.
(Model code) FAX expansion kit installed (Jam cause code)
NETWORK ----- Network scanner expansion
SCANNER kit not installed Code Description
(Model code) Network scanner expansion NO_JAM_CAUSE No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
kit installed SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached jam
EXPANSION ----- FAX expansion memory not SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining jam
MEMORY installed SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached jam
(Model code) FAX expansion memory SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining jam
installed SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached jam
FINISH STAMP ----- Finish stamp unit not SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining jam
installed SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached jam
(Model code) Finish stamp unit installed SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining jam
Data security kit ----- Data security kit not installed SPOD_N SPOD not-reached jam
(Model code) Data security kit installed SPOD_S SPOD remaining jam
I-FAX ----- Internet FAX expansion kit SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
not installed
(Model code) Internet FAX expansion kit
installed SIMULATION 22-12
SPF JAM HISTORY.
*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
SIMULATION 22-10 *******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******,*******
SYSTEM INFORMATION.
MACHINE:*******
FINISHER: ******* PUNCH: ******
LCC: ******* INSERTER: ********
SYSTEM MEMORY: **MB HDD: ***MB (10 lines, 80 digits = 800 characters)
NIC: ******* NSCN: ****** PS3: ******
FAX: ******* FAX MEMORY: **MB
STAMP: *******
PCU TYPE: ******* I-FAX *******
22-13 22-30
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ Purpose Setting value display/Check
Check (Display/Print) Function (Purpose) OSA vendor ID display (Application Com-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the munication Module)
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner Section —
bottle).
Operation/Procedure
Section —
When the product key for OSA (Application Communication Mod-
Operation/Procedure ule) is effective, vendor ID is displayed. (MAX.: 8 code)
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section (OPC * APPLICATION NAME: Application name (Max.36 characters)
drum, DV unit (developer), toner motor (toner bottle)) are dis- * VENDOR ID: Vendor ID (10 digits)
played.
DRUM OPC drum Count value (counts) SIMULATION 22-30

Rotating time (sec) OSA VENDOR DISPLAY(APPLICATION COMMUNICATION)
TONER Toner motor Count value (counts) APPLICATION NAME VENDOR ID
******************* **********
Rotating time (sec)
******************* **********
DEVE DV unit Count value (counts) ******************* **********
Rotating time (sec) ******************* **********
******************* **********
******************* **********
******************* **********
SIMULATION 22-13
******************* **********
PROCESS DATA DISPLAY.
DRUM: ********(counts) **********(sec.)
TONER: ********(counts) **********(sec.)
DEVE: *********(counts) **********(sec.) 22-31
Purpose Setting value display/Check
Function (Purpose) OSA vendor ID display (External account
module)
22-19 Section —
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ Operation/Procedure
Check (Display/Print) When the product key for OSA (external account kit) is effective,
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters vendor ID is displayed. (MAX.: 1 code)
related to the scan mode and the internet * APPLICATION NAME: Application name (Max.36 characters)
FAX mode.
* VENDOR ID: Vendor ID (10 digits)
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 22-31
The values of the counters related to the scan mode and the inter- OSA VENDOR DISPLAY(EXTERNAL ACCOUNT)
net FAX mode are displayed. APPLICATION NAME VENDOR ID
******************* **********
NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL Document scan quantity
COUNTER (OC, SPF total quantity)
MAIL COUNTER Number of mail send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB COUNTER Number of SMB send
INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL Document scan quantity
COUNTER (OC, SPF total quantity)
INTERNET-FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX print quantity 23
SCAN TO HDD Scan to HDD record quantity
INTERNET-FAX SEND IMAGES Number of internet FAX sending 23-2
page
SCAN SEND IMAGES Number of scan sending page Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble history of paper
SIMULATION 22-19
jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
NETWORK SCANNER AND INTERNET-FAX COUNTER DISPLAY.
and troubles is considerably great, it may
NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER: ********* be judged as necessary to repair.)
MAIL COUNTER: ******** Section —
FTP COUNTER: ********
INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL COUNTER: ******** Operation/Procedure
INTERNET-FAX SEND: ******** 1) Select "1. PRINT START.
INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE: ********
INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT: ********
SMB COUNTER: ******** The trouble history of paper jam and misfeed is printed.
SCAN TO HDD : ******** This data can be cleared by SIM 24-1.
INTERNET-FAX SEND IMAGES: ********
SCAN SEND IMAGES: ********
SIMULATION 23-2
JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE㧚SELECT SETTING,˴AND
24
PRESS START.
0. TRAY SELECT 㧦AUTO ONLY˴
24-1
1. PRINT START 1 Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the misfeed counter, the mis-
23-80 feed history, the trouble counter, and the
trouble history. (The counters are cleared
after completion of maintenance.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Section —
sors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
Section Paper feed, paper transport
Operation/Procedure
The confirmation to clear is opened.
1) Select "2. PRINT PATTERN." with 10-key.
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key.
YES: Clear
3) Select "1" (Paper transport time data) with 10-key.
NO: Not clear
The list of the ON time of the sensors and the detectors of the
paper transport section is printed. 1 PAPER JAM Number of paper jams
When a paper jam or misfeed is generated, the ON time of each 2 SPF JAM Number of SPF jams
sensor and detector is checked to check if the operation of the sen- 3 TROUBLE Number of troubles
sor and the detector, paper feed, and transport are normal or not.
0 TRAY SELECT Auto only (No selection allowed) SIMULATION 24-1

AUTO ONLY JAM/ TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-3, AND
1 PRINT START Print execution. PRESS START.
Print of the set data is executed. 1. PAPER JAM
2 PRINT PATTERN Print pattern

2. SPF JAM 1
3. TROUBLE
1. Paper transport time data
SIMULATION 23-80
DATA PRINT MODE. SELECT SETTING, AND PRESS START. 24-2
0. TRAY SELECT :AUTO ONLY
1. PRINT START Purpose Data clear
2. PRINT PATTERN:1 1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
<Print item list> Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
Reference Previous
Transport route section 1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
value (ms) value (ms)
TRAY1 → PFD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 2) Press the [START] key.
PFD2 On → PPD On [–––– ms] –––– ms, The confirmation to clear is opened.
RRC On → POD1 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
POD1 On → POD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
YES: Clear
POD2 On → TOP TRAY [–––– ms] –––– ms,
Switch Back → AINPD On [–––– ms] –––– ms, NO: Not clear
AINPD On → FINISHER [–––– ms] –––– ms, 4) Press the [START] key.
AINPD On → APPD1 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
APPD1 On → APPD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 1 TRAY1 Tray 1 use quantity
Restart → APPD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 2 TRAY2 Tray 2 use quantity
Restart (ADU) → PFD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 3 TRAY3 Tray 3 use quantity
Pass → APPD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 4 TRAY4 Tray 4 use quantity
TRAY3 → M1PFD On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 5 BPT Manual feed tray use quantity
M1PFD On → PFD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 6 ADU Duplex paper feed quantity
Restart (TRAY) → PFD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 7 LCC Side LCC use quantity
TRAY4 → M2PFD On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
M2PFD On → M1PFD On [–––– ms] –––– ms, SIMULATION 24-2
TRAY2 → MPRD1 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-7, AND PRESS
MPRD1 On → MPRD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, START.
Restart → MPRD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 1. TRAY1 2. TRAY2
MPRD2 On → PPD On [–––– ms] –––– ms, 3. TRAY3
5. BPT
4. TRAY4
6. ADU
1
BYPASS → MPFD1 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
7. LCC
MPFD1 On → MPFD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
MPFD2 On → MPRD1 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
SIDE LCC → LPPD On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
LPPD On → MPFD2 On [–––– ms] –––– ms,
24-5
24-3
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use of the fin- Function (Purpose) Used to reset the developer counter.
(The developer counter of the DV unit
isher, SPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
which is installed is reset.)
Section —
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
1 SPF SPF paper pass quantity 4) Press the [START] key.
2 SCAN Number of times of document scan
1 DV CARTRIDGE Developer cartridge counter
3 STAPLER Number of times of staple
4 PUNCH Number of times of punch
5 STAMP Number of times of SPF finish stamp SIMULATION 24-5
6 SADDLE Number of times of saddle staple DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
STAPLER 1. DV CARTRIDGE
7 INSERTER Number of times of inserter
8 INSERTER OFF Number of inserter off-line times 1
LINE
SIMULATION 24-3
24-6
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-8, AND PRESS Purpose Data clear
START.
1. SPF Function (Purpose) Used to reset the copy counter.
2. SCAN
3. STAPLER
1 Section —
4. PUNCH
5. STAMP
Operation/Procedure
6. SADDLE STAPLER 1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
7. INSERTER
8. INSERTER OFF LINE 2) Press the [START] key.
24-4 YES: Clear
Purpose Data clear NO: Not clear
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the maintenance counter. 4) Press the [START] key.
Section — 1 COPY Copy effective paper counter

Operation/Procedure
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. SIMULATION 24-6
2) Press the [START] key. COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START.
1. COPY
3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key. 1
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
4) Press the [START] key. 24-7
Purpose Data clear
1 MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (Per-
2 FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning feed counter
form this simulation when the OPC drum is
replaced.)
SIMULATION 24-4 Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
START.
1. MAINTENANCE Operation/Procedure
2. FUSER WEB SEND 1 1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key.
YES: Clear
NO: Not clear
After replacing the OPC drum, be sure to clear the OPC drum
24-11
counter.
Purpose Data clear
1 DRUM OPC drum counter
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the OPC drum rotation time,
and the DV unit rotation time counter. The
SIMULATION 24-7 developer counter in the DV unit installed is
DRUM COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1, AND PRESS reset.
START.
1. DRUM Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
1 ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
24-9 The confirmation to clear is opened.
Purpose Data clear 3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter YES: Clear
and the self print mode print counter. NO: Not clear
Section Printer 4) Press the [START] key.
Operation/Procedure
1 DRUM ROTATION OPC drum rotation time
2 DV ROTATION DV unit rotation time
SIMULATION 24-11
TIMER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START.
YES: Clear 1. DRUM ROTATION
NO: Not clear 2. DV ROTATION 1
1 PRINTER Printer counter (Print mode)

2 OTHERS Other effective paper counter (Self print mode) 24-15
Purpose Data clear
SIMULATION 24-9 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
PRINTER/OTHERS COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-2, AND scan mode and the internet FAX mode.
PRESS START. Section —
1. PRINTER
2. OTHERS 1 Operation/Procedure
24-10 The confirmation to clear is opened.
Purpose Data clear 3) Select Yes/NO of counter clear with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when YES: Clear
FAX is installed) NO: Not clear
Section FAX 4) Press the [START] key.
Operation/Procedure
1 NETWORK SCANNER Document scan quantity counter in
1) Select the counter to be cleared with 10-key. ORIGINAL COUNTER the network scanner mode
2) Press the [START] key. 2 MAIL COUNTER Number of mail send
The confirmation to clear is opened. 3 FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
4 INTERNET-FAX Internet FAX document scan quantity
ORIGINAL COUNTER (Total quantity of OC and SPF)
YES: Clear 5 INTERNET-FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
NO: Not clear 6 INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive
4) Press the [START] key. 7 INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT Internet FAX print quantity
8 SMB COUNTER Number of SMB sending
1 FAX SEND Number of FAX send 9 SCAN TO HDD Scan to HDD record quantity
2 FAX RECEIVE Number of FAX receive 10 INTERNET-FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page
3 FAX OUTPUT Number of FAX print IMAGES
4 SEND IMAGES Number of sending sheets 11 SCAN SEND IMAGES Number of scan sending page
5 SEND TIME Send time 12 DOC FILING OUTPUT Document filing print counter
6 RECEIVE TIME Receive time
SIMULATION 24-10
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT1-6, AND PRESS START.
1. FAX SEND
2. FAX RECEIVED
3. FAX OUTPUT
4. SEND IMAGES
1
5. SEND TIME
6. RECEIVE TIME
SIMULATION 24-15
SIMULATION 25-2
NETWORK SCANNER AND INTERNET-FAX COUNTER CLEAR.
AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.
SELECT1-12, AND PRESS START.
HUMIDITY AREA : 70.0 - 72.5
1. NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER
2. MAIL COUNTER 1 DEVE REFERENCE : 114
3. FTP COUNTER
4. INTERNET-FAX ORIGINAL COUNTER: ********
5. INTERNET-FAX SEND: ********
6. INTERNET-FAX RECEIVE: ********
7. INTERNET-FAX OUTPUT: ********
8. SMB COUNTER
9. SCAN TO HDD: ********
26
10. INTERNET-FAX SEND IMAGES: ********
11. SCAN SEND IMAGES: ******** 26-2
12. DOC FILING OUTPUT: ********
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
capacity tray (LCC) and the paper feed tray
25 2. (When the paper size is changed, this
simulation must be executed to change the
paper size in software.)
25-1
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
1) Select the number corresponding to the paper feed unit for set-
oping section (toner concentration, humid-
ity and toner concentration sensor, humidity ting the paper size with 10-key.
sensor). 2) Press the [START] key.
Section Process (Developing section) 3) Select the number corresponding to the paper size.
Operation/Procedure 4) Press the [START] key.
1) Press the [START] key. 1 TRAY 2 TRAY 2 size (0 = 8.5 x 11, 1 = A4, 2 = B5)
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate, and the 2 LCC Side LCC size (0 = 8.5 x 11, 1 = A4, 2 = B5)
toner concentration detection level and the humidity sensor A3 Side LCC size (0 = 8.5 x 11, 1 = A4, 2 = B5,
detection level are displayed. 3 = 11 x 17, 4 = 8.5 x 14, 5 = 8.5 x 11R, 6 = A3, 7
= B4, 8 = A4R)
SIMULATION 25-1
TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR. PRESS START. SIMULATION 26-2
HUMIDITY AREA : 70.0 - 72.5 SIZE SETUP. SELECT NUMBER, AND PRESS START.
DEVE REFERENCE : 128 1. TRAY2 1
2. LCC 1
1
25-2
26-3
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
concentration when replacing developer.
Setting must be made according to the
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- auditor use conditions.
Section Auditor
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the auditor mode with 10-
The developing motor rotates for 3 min and the toner concen- key.
tration sensor makes sampling of toner concentration to dis-
play the detection level.
After the developing motor stops, the average value of toner 1 P10 Built-in auditor mode
concentration sampling is set as the reference toner concen- 2 VENDOR Coin vendor mode
tration level. 3 OTHERS Others
* CAUTION: 4 VENDOR-EX Coin vendor mode (No temporary charge)
When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the ref- 5 VENDOR-EX + Coin vendor mode (No temporary charge) +
erence toner concentration level is not set. Document filing enable
6 VENDOR-EX Coin vendor mode (No temporary charge) +
Also when error code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the
(MULTI JOB) (JOB queueing)
reference toner concentration level is not set normally.
7 VENDOR-EX + Coin vendor mode (No temporary charge) +
(Default: 114) (MULTI JOB) Document filing enable + (JOB queueing)
2) The humidity near the developing tank at the developing (Default: 1)
adjustment is registered.
AUDITOR SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. DESTINATION SETUP. SELECT 1-10, AND PRESS START.
1. P10 1.USA 2.CANADA 3.INCH
2. VENDOR
3. OTHERS 1 4.JAPAN 5.AB_B
6.EUROPE 7.UK 8.AUSTRALIA
1
4. VENDOR-EX 9.AB_A 10.CHINA
5. VENDOR-EX +
6. VENDOR-EX (MULTI JOB)
7. VENDOR-EX +(MULTI JOB)
26-10
Purpose Setting
26-5 Function (Purpose) Used to set the network scanner trial mode.
Purpose Setting Section —
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total Operation/Procedure
counter and the maintenance counter. 1) Select START/END of the network scanner trial mode with 10-
Section — key.
1) Select the number corresponding to the counter to be set with Max. 500 images can be scanned.
10-key.
2) Press the [START] key. 0 END Trial mode cancel
1 START Trial mode start
3) Select the count mode with 10-key.
(Default: 0)
Set the count-up (1 or 2) for A3/11x17 paper.
(Select the target counter.) SIMULATION 26-10
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
1 TOTAL COUNTER Total counter START.
2 MAINTENANCE
(DRUM) COUNTER
Maintenance counter/ OPC drum counter 0.END
1.START
1
3 DV COUNTER Developer counter
(Count-up)
1 1 COUNT UP 1 count-up 26-18

2 2 COUNT UP 2 count-up Default Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of toner save opera-
SIMULATION 26-5 tion. (This function is valid only in Japan
A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS
and UK versions. (Depends on the destina-
START.
tion setting of SIM26-6.) For the other desti-
1. TOTAL COUNTER 1
2. MAINTENANCE(DRUM) COUNTER 1
1 nations, the same setting can be made by
3. DV COUNTER 1 the user program P22.)
Section —
Operation/Procedure
26-6
1) Select YES/NO of the toner save mode with 10-key.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. 0 YES set.
Section — 1 NO not set.
Operation/Procedure (Default: 1)
1) Select the number corresponding to the destination with 10-
key.
SIMULATION 26-18
2) Press the [START] key. TONER SAVE MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
After completion of setting, the machine is automatically reset. 0. YES
1 USA United States of America

1. NO
1
2 CANADA Canada
3 INCH Inch series EX
4 JAPAN Japan
5 AB_B AB series B5
6 EUROPE Europe
7 UK UK
8 AUSTRALIA Australia
9 AB_A AB series A5
10 CHINA China
Since this simulation cannot change the Fax destination, use SIM
66-2 to change the FAX destination.
1 : '07 Feb 15
26-30 26-38
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode conforming Function (Purpose) Used to set CONTINUE/STOP of printing
to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). when maintenance timing is over and the
(Conforming to soft start when driving the count value reaches 110% of replacement
fusing heater lamp.) timing (life).
Section — Section Others
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number that corresponds to the operation mode 1) Select the number that corresponds to the operation mode
with 10-key. with 10-key.
2) Press the [START] key. 2) Press the [START] key.
0 NO CE mark control NO (Normal operation) 0 PRINT Print continue

1 YES CE mark control YES (Heater lamp soft start CONTINUE
operation) 1 PRINT STOP Print stop
1 (Default: 1 for Europe, Australia, China, 0 for the others) (Default: 0)
SIMULATION 26-38
SIMULATION 26-30 LIFE OVER SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
CE MARK CONTROL SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START. 0. PRINT CONTINUE
0. NO 1. PRINT STOP
1
1. YES
1
26-41
Purpose Setting
26-35 Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the automatic mag-
Purpose Setting nification ratio selection (AMS) in the pam-
phlet mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether the same continuous
troubles are displayed as one trouble or the Section —
series of troubles with SIM 22-4 when the Operation/Procedure
same troubles occur continuously. 1) Enter the number corresponding to whether AMS operation is
Section — automatically performed or nor in the center binding mode with
the 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number that corresponds to the operation mode
with 10-key.
0 NO AMS/APS selection allowed.
2) Press the [START] key. (enable AMS manually)
1 YES AMS is forcibly operated.
0 ONCE When two or more troubles of a same kind occur
continuously, the troubles are displayed as one (Default: 0)
1
trouble in the trouble history of SIM22-4.
1 ANY When two or more troubles of a same kind occur SIMULATION 26-41
continuously, the troubles are displayed in the PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
trouble history of SIM22-4 directly. START.
(Default: 0)
0. NO
1. YES
1
SIMULATION 26-35
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS 26-50
START. Purpose Setting
0. ONCE
1. ANY
1 Function (Purpose) Black-White reverse YES/NO setting
Section —
Operation/Procedure
1) Select ENABLE/DISABLE of the B/W reverse mode with 10-
key.
0 DISABLE B/W reverse mode DISABLE

1 ENABLE B/W reverse mode ENABLE
(Default: 1)
* No B/W reverse function for UK.
SIMULATION 26-50
B/W REVERSE MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
START.
0. DISABLE
1. ENABLE
1
26-52
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-print paper (inser-
27-1
tion paper, cover paper) (blank image print
paper) is counted up or not. Purpose Setting
Section Paper transport Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications for opera-
(Paper exit/Switchback/Transport) tions in case of communication trouble
between the host computer and MODEM
Operation/Procedure
(machine side). (When communication
1) Select YES/NO of the non-print paper count-up with 10-key. trouble occurs between the host computer
2) Press the [START] key. and MODEM, the self diag display (U7-00)
Non-print paper means an insert paper (without copying) in the is printed and setting for inhibition of print or
OHP insertion mode, a cover (without copying) in the cover inser- not is made.)
tion mode, back surface, and white paper in the duplex exit mode Section Communication unit
(CA, etc.). (RIC/MODEM etc.)
0 NO (NO COUNT UP) No count up
Operation/Procedure
1 YES (COUNT UP) Count up 1) Select the number corresponding to the operation mode with
10-key.
(Default: 0 for Japan and Australia, 1 for the other)
The target counters are as follows:
• Copies counter 0 YES Though a communication trouble occurs
• Printer counter between the host computer and the MODEM
(machine side), there is no effect on the
• Department management counter
machine operations.
• Total counter 1 NO When a communication trouble occurs between
• Valid paper counter the host computer and the MODEM (machine
side), the self diag display (U7-00) is displayed
and printing is inhibited.
SIMULATION 26-52 (Default: 0)
BLANK PAPER COUNT UP SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
START.
0. NO (NO COUNT UP)
1. YES (COUNT UP)
1 SIMULATION 27-1
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
0. YES
1. NO
1
26-68
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the CA 27-5
key cancel function of print stop. Purpose Setting
Section — Function (Purpose) Used to enter the machine tag No. (This
Operation/Procedure function allows to check the tag No. of the
machine with the host computer.)
1) Select ENABLE/DISABLE of the CA key cancel function of
print stop with 10-key. Section Communication unit (RIC/MODEM etc.)
1) Enter the tag number with 10-key.
0 DISABLE Disable
1 ENABLE Enable
(PRINT STOP)
(Default: 1) SIMULATION 27-5
TAG # SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START.
PRESENT: 00010000
SIMULATION 26-68 NEW: 00009999
CA KEY CANCEL MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS
START.
0. DISABLE
1. ENABLE (PRINT STOP)
0
M1PED Tray 3 paper empty M1SS1 Tray 3 rear edge
30 M1SS2
detection
Tray 3 rear edge M1SS3
switch 1
Tray 3 rear edge
switch 2 switch 3
30-1 M1SS4 Tray 3 rear edge M1SPD Tray 3 paper
switch 4 remaining quantity
detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensors and Tray 3 size: (The tray 3 detection size is displayed.)
detectors in other than the paper feed sec- M2PFD Tray 4 transport M2LUD Tray 4 upper limit
tion and the operations of the related cir- detection detection
cuits. M2PED Tray 4 paper empty M2SS1 Tray 4 rear edge
Section — detection switch 1
M2SS2 Tray 4 rear edge M2SS3 Tray 4 rear edge
Operation/Procedure
switch 2 switch 3
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. M2SS4 Tray 4 rear edge M2SPD Tray 4 paper
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. switch 4 remaining quantity
detection
PFD2 ADU paper feed detection 2 Tray 4 size: (The tray 4 detection size is displayed.)
PPD Resist roller front paper detection
PSD Drum rear paper detection
SIMULATION 30-2
POD1 After-fusing transport detection 1 TRAY SENSOR CHECK..
POD2 After-fusing transport detection 2 TANSET TLUD1 TSPD1 TPED1 TLUD2 TSPD2 TPED2
POD3 Paper full detection MPLD1 MPLD2 MTOP1 MTOP2 MPED MPFD1 MPFD2
DSW_R Manual feed door open detection MPRD1 MPRD2
(Bypass Tray size: A3)
DSW_L Cabinet open detection
M1PFD M1LUD M1PED M1SS1 M1SS2 M1SS3 M1SS4
DSW_F Front cabinet open detection M1SPD
DSW_DSK Desk door open detection (Tray3 size: A3)
TFSD Toner remaining quantity detection (Motor rotation M2PFD M2LUD M2PED M2SS1 M2SS2 M2SS3 M2SS4
number count) M2SPD
THPS2 Transfer belt separation home sensor 2 (Tray4 size: A3)
LPPD LCC paper transport detection
T1PPD Tandem tray 1 paper transport sensor
WEB_END Fusing web end detection
40
SIMULATION 30-1
SENSOR CHECK.. 40-1
PFD2 PPD PSD POD1
POD2 POD3 DSW_R DSW_L Purpose Operation test/Check
DSW_F DSW_DSK TFSD THPS2 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the manual
LPPD T1PPD WEB_END
feed tray paper size detector and the
related circuit. (The operation of the manual
feed tray paper size detector can be moni-
30-2
tored with the LCD display.)
Section Paper feed
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensors and Operation/Procedure
detectors in the paper feed section and the
related circuits.
Section Paper feed
The paper width size detection level is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. MPLD1 Manual tray length detection 1
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. MPLD2 Manual tray length detection 2
MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out detection 1
TANSET Tray 1 and 2 insertion TLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out detection 2
detection sensor BYPASS_WIDTH anual feed guide plate position
TSPD1 Tray 1 remaining TPED1 Tray 1 paper sensor BYPASS_AD Manual feed width detection volume output AD value
quantity sensor Bypass Tray width (Manual tray detection size is displayed.) A4/A3, 11 x,
TLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit TSPD2 Tray 2 remaining size B5/B4, 8.5 x , A4R, B5R, A5R, 5.5x, 7.25x, EXTRA
sensor quantity sensor
TPED2 Tray 2 paper sensor MPLD1 Manual tray length
detection 1 SIMULATION 40-1
BYPASS TRAY SENSOR CHECK..
MPLD2 Manual tray length MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out
detection 2 detection 1 MPLD1 MPLD2 MTOP1 MTOP2
MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out MPED Manual feed paper BYPASS_WIDTH: 2100 BYPASS_AD: 600
detection 2 empty detection 2 (Bypass Tray width size: A4/A3)
MPFD1 Detection 1 of paper MPFD2 Detection 2 of
pass from manual paper pass from
paper feed manual paper feed
MPRD1 Manual relay paper MPRD2 Manual relay paper
detection 1 detection 2
Bypass Tray size: (The manual feed tray detection size is displayed.)
M1PFD Tray 3 transport M1LUD Tray 3 upper limit
detection detection
40-11
40-2
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray Function (Purpose) Used to check the multi-purpose tray width
detection adjustment value.
paper width detector detection level.
Section Paper feed Section Paper feed
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
tion. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. The paper width
detection level is also displayed.
2) Select MAX. POSITION with 10-key.
3) Press the [START] key. M1SS1 Tray 3 size detection 1
The max. width detection level is recognized. M1SS2 Tray 3 size detection 2
4) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. M1SS3 Tray 3 size detection 3
M1SS4 Tray 3 size detection 4
TRAY3_WIDTH Tray 3 guide plate position
6) Select POSITION 1 with 10-key.
TRAY3_AD Tray 3 width detection volume output AD value
7) Press the [START] key. Tray3 width size (Tray 3 width direction detection size is
The A4R width detection level is recognized. displayed.) A4/A3, 11X, B5/B4, 8.5X, A4R, B5R,
A5R, 5.5X, 7.25X, EXTRA
8) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
9) Set the manual paper feed guide to A5R size width.
SIMULATION 40-11
TRAY3 SENSOR CHECK..
The A5R width detection level is recognized. M1SS1 M1SS2 M1SS3 M1SS4
TRAY3_WIDTH: 2100 TRAY3_AD: 600
12) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. (Tray3 width size: A4/A3)
13) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
14) Select MIN. POSITION with 10-key.
40-12
The minimum width detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
When each of the above operations has been completed, the Function (Purpose) Used to check the multi-purpose tray width
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has detection adjustment value.
failed, the "ERROR" message appears. Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 40-2 1) Open the paper feed tray 3 paper feed guide to the max. width
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. position.
1. MAX. POSITION
2. POSITION 1
2) Select MAX. POSITION with 10-key.
3. POSITION 2 1 3) Press the [START] key.
4. MIN. POSITION The max. width detection level is recognized.
4) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
40-7 5) Open the paper feed tray 3 paper feed guide to the min. width
position.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
6) Select MIN. POSITION with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to enter the manual paper feed tray
paper width adjustment value.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
Section Paper feed
If the above procedures are not completed normally, "ERROR" is
Operation/Procedure displayed. If completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
1) Select the number corresponding to the set item with 10-key.
SIMULATION 40-12
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
TRAY3 ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START.
4) Press the [START] key. 1. MAX. POSITION
2. MIN. POSITION
1 MAX. POSITION Max. position 1
4 MIN. POSITION Min. position
SIMULATION 40-7
BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1. MAX. POSITION : 72
2. POSITION 1 : 380
3. POSITION 2 : 710
4. MIN. POSITION : 804 1
1 : '07 Feb 15
41-3
41
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the docu-
41-1
ment size sensor and the related circuit.
Purpose Operation test/Check (The document size sensor output level can
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the docu- be monitored with the LCD display.)
ment size sensor and the related circuit. Section Others
(The operation of the document size sensor
Operation/Procedure
can be monitored with the LCD display.)
The detection output level (A/D value) of the document sensors
Section Others (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Operation/Procedure * The value in [ ] on the side of each sensor name indicates the
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed. threshold value.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. The light receiving value (A/D value) and the threshold value (A/D
value) of PD1 - PD7 are in the range of 1 - 255. The default of
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display threshold value is 128.
Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection sensor No document: Normal OCSW Original cover status Open: Normal display
status display Close: Highlighted
Document present: PD1 - 7 PD sensor detection level The value in [ ] indicates the
Highlighted adjustment threshold value (SIM41-2 adjustment
value).
SIMULATION 41-1
PD SENSOR CHECK.. SIMULATION 41-3
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY.
OCSW
PD1[128]: 200 PD2[128]: 200
PD3[128]: 50 PD4[128]: 52
PD5[128]: 51 PD6[128]: 50
PD7[128]: 52
41-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
sensing level.
43
Section Others
43-1
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
1) Open the original cover. With nothing placed on the original
table, select NO ORIGINAL with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
operation mode.
Section Fusing
The sensor level is set without document on the document
table. Operation/Procedure
3) Place an A3 (11x17) document on the document table, and 1) Select the number corresponding to the setting mode with 10-
select A3 ORIGINAL with 10-key. key.
The sensor level is set when detection the document. 3) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
If the above procedures are not completed normally, "ERROR" 4) Press the [START] key.
is displayed. If completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
100V 200V
1 INSIDE NORMAL Fusing roller inside/ 200 205
1
SIMULATION 41-2 normal mode

PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START. 2 OUTSIDE Fusing roller outside/
(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.) NORMAL normal mode
1. NO ORIGINAL
2. A3 ORIGINAL
1 3 INSIDE
PREHEAT
Fusing roller inside/
preheat mode
170 170
4 OUTSIDE Fusing roller outside/

PREHEAT preheat mode
5 LEFT NORMAL Sub-heat roller/normal 200 205
mode
6 LEFT PREHEAT Sub-heat roller/ 170 170
preheat mode
SIMULATION 43-1
FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START.
1. INSIDE NORMAL 185 5. LEFT NORMAL 185
2. OUTSIDE NORMAL 185 6. LEFT PREHEAT 140
3. INSIDE PREHEAT 140
4. OUTSIDE PREHEAT 140
1
1 : '07 Feb 15
43-3 Item Default

BIT6 Toner concentration Toner concentration 1
Purpose Setting (Adjustment) correction C correction in low
Function (Purpose) Fusing motor RPM setting. density image
continuous print
Section Setting
BIT7 OPC drum for 1
Operation/Procedure environment
1) Select the number corresponding to the adjustment item with correction
10-key. NOTE: Set to 222.
2) Press the [START] key. When bit=1, correction is made.
3) Enter the setting (adjustment) value with 10-key.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Env
Unless special measures are required, do not change the setting
values below. Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1
Tcon_C Tcon_B Tcon_A Humidity Pcon_lm Drum
Default
1 Item Setting range 55/62 70
(ppm) (ppm) SIMULATION 44-1
1 NORMAL 0 - 99 34 34 PROCESS CORRECTION VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-999
2 SLOWDOWN 0 - 99 46 44 AND PRESS START.
BIT1: DRUM
BIT2: PROCON_LM BIT3: HUMIDITY
BIT4: TONERCON_A BIT5: TONERCON_B
223
SIMULATION 43-3
BIT6: TONERCON_C BIT7: ENVIRONMENT
FUSER MOTOR SPEED SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS
START.
1. NORMAL 36 NOTE: BIT0 is not displayed, but set to the developing bias correc-
2. SLOWDOWN 50
1 tion function. This setting is forcibly made enable, and can-
not be disabled.
44-2
44 Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the gain adjustment
(image density sensor LED current adjust-
44-1
ment) of the image density sensor and the
Purpose Setting gain adjustment (OPC drum marking sen-
Function (Purpose) Used to set enable/disable of correction sor LED current adjustment) of the OPC
operations in the image forming (process) drum marking sensor.
section. Section Image process (Photoconductor)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- Operation/Procedure
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) Press [START] key, and the adjustment is automatically performed.
Operation/Procedure When the adjustment is completed, the adjustment result is dis-
1) Each bit (7 kinds) is assigned to each correction item to set played.
ENABLE/DISABLE of the operation. If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Each bit is assigned with 0 or 1 value. Enter the total values of When an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
items which are desired to be valid with the 10-key.
2) Press the [START] key. DMLED Drum marking sensor gain adjustment value
PCLED Image density sensor gain adjustment value
Item Default DRUM Kind of the drum 0 = Other/1 = SHARP drum
BIT1 OPC drum membrane Laser power/main 1
decrease (sensitivity/ charger grid voltage
potential) correction SIMULATION 44-2
BIT2 The range of the toner Developing bias/main 1 PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.
patch making voltage grid voltage (adjusted DMLED: 0
in the developing bias by SIM 8-1 and 8-2) +- PCLED: 0
voltage/main charger 100v DRUM : 0
grid voltage correction
is specified. (Voltage
limit)
BIT3 For humidity Toner concentration 1
correction correction
BIT4 Toner concentration When the developing 1
correction A bias/main charger grid
voltage correction is
changed more than
the specified level, the
toner concentration
control level is
corrected.
BIT5 Toner concentration Correction for the 0
correction B developer life
1 : '07 Feb 15
Item NOTE
44-4 DEVE MIXING Developing roller rotation Reset by SIM 24-11.
Purpose Setting TIME time (sec)
DRUM OPC drum identification 1: 55/62 (ppm)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target density level in the
code 0: 70 (ppm)
image density correction.
GR BS Actual main charger grid
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- voltage (including
ing) correction) / Main charger
Operation/Procedure grid voltage adjusted with
SIM 8-2
1) Enter the target density level in the image density correction DV BS Actual developing bias
with 10-key. voltage (including
2) Press the [START] key. correction) / Developing
bias voltage adjusted with
(Default: 32)
SIM 8-1
LD ADJ Actual laser power beam
SIMULATION 44-4 (Including correction)
PROCON INITIAL DENSITY SETUP. PRESS START. AUTO Auto copy mode
1.PROCON INI DENSITY 32 CHARA Text copy mode
1 CHARA P Text/Photo copy mode
PHOTO Photo copy mode
PRT Printer mode
DESTINATION Toner destination code
44-5 1 stored in the main unit
Purpose Setting DESTINATION Toner destination code
2 stored in the toner bottle
Function (Purpose) Used to set the reference developing bias CRUM chip
voltage, the reference main charger grid
voltage, and the laser power in the image
SIMULATION 44-9
density correction.
PROCESS CONTROL DATA DISPLAY.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- DRUM ROTATION TIME: 01234567(sec)
ing) DEVE MIXING TIME: 01234567(sec)
DRUM: 0
Operation/Procedure GR_BS DV_BS LD_ADJ
1) Select the number corresponding to the setting mode with 10- AUTO 000/000 000/000 000/000
CHARA 000/000 000/000 000/000
key. CHARA_P 000/000 000/000 000/000
2) Press the [START] key. PHOTO 000/000 000/000 000/000
PRT 000/000 000/000 000/000
3) Enter the setting (adjustment) value with 10-key. DESTINATION1: 0 DESTINATION2: 0
Item 44-12
1
1 GRID BIAS Main charger voltage for developing bias voltage Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
VOL correction
Check (Display)
2 DEVE BIAS Reference developing bias voltage or developing
VOL bias voltage correction Function (Purpose) Used to display sampling toner image patch
3 LASER Reference laser power for developing bias voltage density data in image density correction.
POWER correction (Used to check that the correction is per-
formed normally or not.)
SIMULATION 44-5 Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
PROCESS CONTROL TEST. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. ing)
1.GRID BIAS VOL ***
Operation/Procedure
2.DEVE BIAS VOL
3.LASER POWER
280
*** 1
DMLED OPC drum marking sensor LED current adjustment
value
PC LED Image density sensor gain adjustment value
44-9
END DV BS Developing bias voltage when making PT2/BS2 of ID (1)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ ID (n) Indicates the toner patch making procedures.
Check (Display) PT1/BS1 Toner patch density detection level/OPC drum surface
Function (Purpose) Used to check the data related to the image detection level when the developing bias is DV - 50V.
forming section correction (process correc- PT2/BS2 Toner patch density detection level/OPC drum surface
tion) result (corrected main charger grid detection level when the developing bias is DV.
voltage, the developing bias voltage, and PT3/BS3 Toner patch density detection level/OPC drum surface
the laser power voltage in each print detection level when the developing bias is DV + 50V.
mode). (This simulation allows to check
that correction is performed normally or
not.)
Operation/Procedure
Item NOTE
DRUM OPC drum rotation time Reset by SIM 24-11.
ROTATION (sec)
TIME
DM DATA, PATCH/BASE DATA DISPLAY. TONER CONTROL STANDARD LEVEL DISPLAY.
DMLED: 000 PC LED: 000 END DV_BS: 000 HUMIDITY AREA: 7
PT1/BS1 PT2/BS2 PT3/BS3 INT HUMIDITY AREA: 7
ID(1): 000/000 000/000 000/000 TARGET LEVEL = DEV REF + HUM(TARGET) + A + B
ID(2): 000/000 000/000 000/000 114 = 114 + 0( 0) + 0 + 0
ID(3): 000/000 000/000 000/000
ID(4): 000/000 000/000 000/000
ID(5): 000/000 000/000 000/000
ID(6): 000/000 000/000 000/000
ID(7):
ID(8):
000/000
000/000
000/000
000/000
000/000
000/000 46
46-2
44-14 Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in all the
Check (Display) copy modes (Auto, Text, Text/Photo, and
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output level of the tem- Photo mode).
perature sensor and the humidity sensor. Section —
Section Image process Operation/Procedure
(Photoconductor/Developing) 1) Select the number corresponding to the copy mode to be
Operation/Procedure adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 6.)
The output levels of the temperature sensor and the humidity sen- 2) Press the [START] key.
sor in the developing unit are displayed. 3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
TH-DV (Not used) Developing section temperature 0 - 255 Setting
sensor Item Default
range
TH-RA (Not used) Room temperature sensor 0 - 255
TH-CL Process section temperature 0 - 255 selection
sensor
1 COPY START Copy START
TH-EX Paper discharging section 0 - 255 (Default)
temperature sensor
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level
HUS-DV Developing section humidity 0 - 255 selection
sensor 3 AE 3.0 AE mode 0 - 99 50
HUS-TC (Not used) Process section humidity sensor 0 - 255
4 CH 3.0 Text mode 3.0
5 MIX 3.0 Text/Photo mode
3.0
SIMULATION 44-14 6 PHOTO 3.0 Photo mode 3.0
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR.
TH-DV: 255 4) Press the [P] or [START] key.
TH-RA: 255 The adjustment value is set.
TH-CL: 255
TH-EX: 255 When [START] key is pressed, copy is performed and the
HUS-DV: 255 adjustment value is set simultaneously.
HUS-TC: 255
Check the density of the printed copy image.
Normal display NOW COPYING.

44-16 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ Jam JAM
Check (Display) Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner concentration con- NOTE: When the copy image density is adjusted with this simula-
trol data. tion, the copy image densities of all the copy modes are
changed to the copy image density level set with this simu-
Section Process (Developing)
lation. That is, the copy image density of each copy mode
Operation/Procedure set with SIM 46-9, 10, 11 is changed to the copy image
density level adjusted with this simulation.
HUMIDITY Humidity area
AREA To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures.
INT HUMIDITY Humidity area when setting the toner concentration 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
AREA control level (SIM 25-2) 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
TARGET LEVEL Current toner concentration control level tray selection mode.)
DEV REF Toner concentration when setting the toner
concentration control level (SIM 25-2)
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
HUMIDITY Toner concentration correction value for humidity
used with 10-key.
(TARGET) 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
A Toner concentration correction value for change in
developing bias voltage 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
B Toner concentration value for developer life 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
5 BPT Manual paper feed
6 LCC Side LCC
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When used with 10-key.
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
copying is performed.
To select exposure mode, perform the following procedures. 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the exposure
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
mode.)
3) Enter the number corresponding to the exposure level to be 6 LCC Side LCC
used with 10-key, and press [START] key.
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
3 AE 3.0 AE mode in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
4 CH 3.0 Text mode 3.0 [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
5 MIX 3.0 Text/Photo mode 3.0 copying is performed.
6 PHOTO 3.0 Photo mode 3.0
SIMULATION 46-9
SIMULATION 46-2 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. COPY START
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START.
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1
6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. AE 3.0 50 4. CH 3.0 50
1 9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
5. MIX 3.0 50 6. PHOTO 3.0 50
46-10
Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density for each
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density for each density level (display value) in the copy
density level (display value) in the copy mode (binary - Text/Photo mode). An
mode (binary - Text mode). An optional optional print density can be set for each
print density can be set for each density density level (display value).
level (display value). Section —
Section — Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the number corresponding to the copy density adjust-
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy density adjustment level with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 11.)
ment level with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 11.) 2) Press the [START] key.
2) Press the [START] key. 3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
Setting
Item Default
range
Setting
Item Default 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray
range
selection
selection 1 COPY START Copy START (Default)
1 COPY START Copy START 2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level
(Default) selection
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level 3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 - 99 50
selection 4 1.5 Exposure level 1.5
3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 - 99 50 5 2.0 Exposure level 2.0
4 1.5 Exposure level 1.5 6 2.5 Exposure level 2.5
10 4.5 Exposure level 4.5 4) Press the [P] or [START] key.
11 5.0 Exposure level 5.0 The adjustment value is set.
4) Press the [P] or [START] key. When [START] key is pressed, copy is performed and the
The adjustment value is set. adjustment value is set simultaneously.
When [START] key is pressed, copy is performed and the Check the density of the printed copy image.
adjustment value is set simultaneously.
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
Normal display NOW COPYING. Jam JAM
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
Jam JAM To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures.
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures. 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. tray selection mode.)
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
tray selection mode.) used with 10-key.
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 5 BPT Manual paper feed
5 BPT Manual paper feed 6 LCC Side LCC
6 LCC Side LCC NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and copying is performed.
SIMULATION 46-11
SIMULATION 46-10 EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOTO2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 0-11, AND PRESS START.
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1
2. EXP LEVEL 1
3. 1.0 50 4. 1.5 50 5. 2.0 50
1 6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
6. 2.5 50 7. 3.0 50 8. 3.5 50
9. 4.0 50 10. 4.5 50 11. 5.0 50
46-12
Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density in the FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density for each mode (all modes).
density level (display value) in the copy Section —
mode (binary - Photo mode). An optional Operation/Procedure
print density can be set for each density
1) Select the adjustment item (FAX EXP. LEVEL) with 10-key.
level (display value).
Section —
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy density adjust- Setting Default
Item
ment level with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 11.) range
2) Press the [START] key. 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray
selection
3) Enter the copy density level with 10-key.
2 FAX EXP. LEVEL FAX mode print 0 - 99 50
Setting
Item Default density
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 4) Press the [P] or [START] key.
selection The adjustment value is set.
When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the
selection
3 1.0 Exposure level 1.0 0 - 99 50 Check the density of printed image.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
9 4.0 Exposure level 4.0 NOTE: When the FAX print image density is adjusted with this sim-
10 4.5 Exposure level 4.5 ulation, the print image densities of all the FAX modes are
11 5.0 Exposure level 5.0 changed to the image density level set with this simulation.
4) Press the [P] or [START] key. That is, the print image density of each FAX mode set with
SIM 46-13, 14, 15 and 16 is changed to the print image
The adjustment value is set.
density level adjusted with this simulation.
When [START] key is pressed, copy is performed and the
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures.
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
Normal display NOW COPYING. tray selection mode.)
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
Jam JAM used with 10-key.
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
tray selection mode.)
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be 5 BPT Manual paper feed
used with 10-key. 6 LCC Side LCC
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
copying is performed. copying is performed.
SIMULATION 46-13
SIMULATION 46-12 EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(AUTO SET). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS START.
START. 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
1
2.FAX EXP.LEVEL 50
1 2.EXP LEVEL 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
46-13
Purpose Adjustment 46-14
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density in the FAX Purpose Adjustment
mode (each Normal text mode). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density in the FAX
(Only when FAX is installed.) mode (each super fine mode). (Only when
Section — FAX is installed.)
Operation/Procedure Section —
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following adjust Operation/Procedure
ment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.) 1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
* Manual mode (Print density adjustment level) adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.)
* Auto mode * Normal mode (Print density adjustment level)
2) Press the [START] key. * Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) (Half-tone
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key. mode)
* Auto mode
Setting
Item Default * Auto mode (Half-tone mode)
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 2) Enter the print density level with 10-key.
selection
Setting
1 PRINT START Print start (Default) Item Default
range
selection
selection
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
selection
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
4) Press the [P] or [START] key. 6 3.0 Exposure level 3
The adjustment value is set. 7 4.0 Exposure level 4
When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the 8 5.0 Exposure level 5
adjustment value is set simultaneously. 9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1
Check the density of printed image.
(Half-tone)
Normal display NOW PRINTING.
(Half-tone)
Jam JAM
(Half-tone)
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures. (Half-tone)
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. 14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5
(Half-tone)
tray selection mode.) 3) Press the [P] or [START] key.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be The adjustment value is set.
used with 10-key. When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) adjustment value is set simultaneously.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 Normal display NOW PRINTING.
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 Jam JAM
5 BPT Manual paper feed Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
6 LCC Side LCC To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures.
When the total of the above set value (1 - 6) and 20 is entered, the 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
mode is changed to the duplex mode.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the
used with 10-key. adjustment value is set simultaneously.
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) Check the density of print image.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 Normal display NOW PRINTING.

2 TRAY2 TRAY2 ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 Jam JAM
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
5 BPT Manual paper feed To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures.
6 LCC Side LCC
NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
[START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
used with 10-key.
SIMULATION 46-14
EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS START. 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
2.EXP LEVEL 1
3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
1 3
4
TRAY3
TRAY4
TRAY3
TRAY4
6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50 5 BPT Manual paper feed
9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50 6 LCC Side LCC
12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50
46-15 copying is performed.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density in the FAX SIMULATION 46-15
mode (each super fine mode). (Only when EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS
FAX is installed.) START.
Section —
2.EXP LEVEL 1 1
Operation/Procedure 3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.) 9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50
12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50
* Normal mode (Print density adjustment level)
* Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) (Half-tone
mode)
* Auto mode
* Auto mode (Half-tone mode)
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key.
Setting
Item Default
range
selection
selection
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
4) Press the [P] or [START] key.
The adjustment value is set.
46-16 in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
Purpose Adjustment [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print density in the FAX
mode (each ultra fine mode). (Only when
FAX is installed.) SIMULATION 46-16
Section — EXP.LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE).SELECT 0-14,AND PRESS
START.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following 2.EXP LEVEL 1 1
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.) 3.AUTO 50 4.1.0 50 5.2.0 50
* Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) 6.3.0 50 7.4.0 50 8.5.0 50
9.AUTO(H) 50 10.1.0(H) 50 11.2.0(H) 50
* Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) (Half-tone 12.3.0(H) 50 13.4.0(H) 50 14.5.0(H) 50
mode)
* Auto mode
* Auto mode (Half-tone mode) 46-17
2) Press the [START] key. Purpose Setting
3) Enter the print density level with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the gain in shading correction.
Setting Section Optical (Image scanning) - CCD, CIS
Item Default
range Operation/Procedure
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1) Select the number corresponding to the adjustment item with
selection
10-key.
selection 3) Enter the shading gain change value with 10-key.
3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50 4) Press the [START] key.
4 1.0 Exposure level 1 There is normally no need to change the shading gain with this sim-
5 2.0 Exposure level 2 ulation.
Only when the scanned image density is unsatisfactory though
shading is performed, the above procedure is performed.
9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone) Setting
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 Item Default
range
(Half-tone) 1 CCD FRONT ODD 0 - 255 112
11 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 2 CCD FRONT EVEN
(Half-tone)
3 CCD REAR ODD
4 CCD REAR EVEN
(Half-tone)
5 CIS 128
(Half-tone)
14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5 SIMULATION 46-17
(Half-tone) CCD/CIS SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP. SELECT 1-5, AND
4) Press the [P] or [START] key. PRESS START.
1. CCD FRONT ODD 128 2. CCD FRONT EVEN 128
The adjustment value is set. 3. CCD REAR ODD 128 4. CCD REAR EVEN 128
When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the 5. CIS 128

Jam JAM
used with 10-key.
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
6 LCC Side LCC
(Gamma adjustment)
46-18 After completion of the above procedures, perform the following
Purpose Adjustment procedures.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma (density gradi- 1) Enter the gamma level with 10-key.
ent) in the copy mode. 2) Press the [P] or [START] key.
Section — When [START] key is pressed, printing is performed and the
Operation/Procedure adjustment value is set simultaneously.
(Copy mode selection) Check the gamma density (copy density in the low density
area and the high density area) of printed copy image.
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy mode to be
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.) The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the gamma
value is, resulting in a higher contrast.
(Copy condition setting in this simulation)
(Print mode selection in the FAX mode)
3) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 14.)
* Normal mode (Print density adjustment level)
used with 10-key.
* Normal mode (Print density adjustment level) (Half-tone
mode)
* Auto mode 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
* Auto mode (Half-tone mode) 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
Setting 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
Item Default
range 5 BPT Manual paper feed
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 6 LCC Side LCC
selection
3 OC_AE AE mode (OC) 0 - 127 96
4 OC_CHARA Text mode (OC) 64
5 OC_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC)
SIMULATION 46-18
GAMMA SETUP(COPIER). SELECT 1-14, AND PRESS START.
7 SPF_AE AE mode (SPF) 96 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START 2.EXP LEVEL 1
8 SPF_CHARA Text mode (SPF) 64 3.OC_AE 64 4.OC_CHARA 5.OC_MIX 64
9 SPF_MIX Text/Photo mode (SPF) 6.OC_PHOTO 64 7.SPF_AE 64 8.SPF_CHARA 64
10 SPF_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF) 9.SPF_MIX 64 10.SPF_PHOTO 64 11.CIS_AE 64
11 CIS_AE AE mode (CIS) 96 12.CIS_CHARA 64 13.CIS_MIX 64 14.CIS_PHOTO 64
12 CIS_CHARA Text mode (CIS) 64
14 CIS_PHOTO Photo mode (CIS) 46-19
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the auto mode operation speci-
[AE mode] fications in each mode (copy, scan, FAX).
Item Section —
3 AUTO Auto Operation/Procedure
4 1 Exposure level 1 (Toner save operation YES/NO setting in the auto mode)
5 2 Exposure level 2
1) Select "1. AE MODE" with 10-key.
8 5 Exposure level 5 3) Select the number that corresponds to the operation specifica-
9 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone) tions with 10-key.
10 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1 (Half-tone) 4) Press the [START] key.
11 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 (Half-tone) When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set.
(Auto copy mode operation setting)
1) Select the number corresponding to the mode with 10-key.
(Select one of 2 - 4.)
Normal display NOW PRINTING. 3) Select the number that corresponds to the operation mode
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. with 10-key.
Jam JAM
Setting
1 AE MODE AE mode range
2 AE STOP MODE AE fixed mode (Copier) 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray — —
(COPIER) selection
1: TRAY1
3 AE STOP MODE AE fixed mode (Scanner)
2: TRAY2
(SCANNER)
3: TRAY3
4 AE STOP MODE (FAX) AE fixed mode (FAX)
4: TRAY4
5: Manual feed
Mode Set value Item Default 6: Side LCC
AE mode 1 Image quality priority mode 2 1 PRINT START Print start (Default) — —
(Normal mode) * Gamma is
2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level — —
sharp to provide high contrast
selection
images.
3: Exposure level 1.0
2 Toner consumption priority 4: Exposure level 1.5
mode * Gamma is mild to 5: Exposure level 2.0
provide low contrast images. 6: Exposure level 2.5
AE fixed 0 AE fixed OFF 1 7: Exposure level 3.0
mode 1 AE fixed ON (COPIER) 8: Exposure level 3.5
0 9: Exposure level 4.0
(SCANNER 10: Exposure level 4.5
/FAX) 11: Exposure level 5.0
3 SPF (FRONT) SPF (front) 0 - 255 128
AE fixed OFF: The automatic density (exposure) control is performed
(front frame side)
in real time. (The density level is changed in real time
4 SPF (REAR) SPF (front)
according to the document pattern.)
(rear frame side)
AE fixed ON: The density at the lead edge of the document is
5 DSPF DSPF
scanned, and the overall density (exposure) level is
(Back surface)
determined according to the scanned density level.
(Overall density level fixed) • Set value - 128 is added to the shading adjustment value (SIM
46-17).
SIMULATION 46-19
EXP.MODE SETUP. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. SIMULATION 46-20
1.AE MODE 1 OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
2.AE STOP MODE(COPIER) 1 0. TRAY SELECT 1 1. PRINT START
3.AE STOP MODE(SCANNER)0 2. EXP LEVEL 1
4.AE STOP MODE(FAX) 0 3. SPF(FRONT) 128
4. SPF(REAR) 128
1
5. DSPF 128
46-20
Purpose Adjustment 46-21
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density correction Purpose Adjustment
in the SPF copy mode for the document Function (Purpose) Used to set the auto mode operation speci-
table copy mode. The adjustment is made fications in each mode (copy, scan, FAX).
so that the copy density becomes the same
Section —
as that of the document table copy mode.
Operation/Procedure
Section SPF
1) Select the adjustment item SCANNER EXP. LEVEL with 10-
Operation/Procedure key.
(Adjustment mode selection) 2) Press the [START] key.
1) Select the number that corresponds to the mode for which to 3) Enter the image density adjustment value.
make adjustments with 10-key.
SPF front frame side (Front surface copy), SPF rear frame
side (Front surface copy), SPF (Back surface copy) (Select NOTE: When this simulation is performed to adjust the scan image
one of 3 - 5.) densities, all the image densities in all the scan modes are
changed to the image density level set with this simulation.
That is, the image densities set with SIM 46-22, 23, 24, 25,
(Copy density level adjustment) and 45 are changed to the image density level set with this
1) Enter the density correction value with 10-key. simulation.
Setting
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) Item Default
range
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures. 0 SCANNER EXP. Image density level 0 - 99 50
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. LEVEL
used with 10-key.
NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed.
Setting
Item Default
range
SIMULATION 46-21 0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), PRESS START. 1 1.0 Exposure level 1
0.SCANNER EXP.LEVEL 50 2 2.0 Exposure level 2
0 3 3.0 Exposure level 3
46-22
Purpose Adjustment (Half-tone)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner exposure level 8 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2
(Half-tone)
in the normal text mode.
Section — (Half-tone)
Operation/Procedure 10 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following (Half-tone)
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 5.) 11 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5
(Half-tone)
* Normal mode (Image density adjustment level)
* Auto mode
SIMULATION 46-23
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key. EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(FINE). SELECT 0-11,AND PRESS
4) Press [START] key or press [P] key. START.
The adjustment value is set. 0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50
2.2.0 50
5.5.0 50
1
6.AUTO(H) 50 7.1.0(H) 50 8.2.0(H) 50
Setting
Item Default 9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50
range
0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
46-24
4 4.0 Exposure level 4 Purpose Adjustment
5 5.0 Exposure level 5 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner exposure level
NOTE: Only the set value is changed and no printing is performed. (in the super fine text mode).
Section —
SIMULATION 46-22 Operation/Procedure
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS
START. 1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50 adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 11.)
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50 1 * Normal mode (Image density adjustment level)
* Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone
mode)
46-23 * Auto mode
Purpose Adjustment * Auto mode (Half-tone mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner exposure level
in the fine text mode. 3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key.
Section — 4) Press [START] key or press [P] key.
Operation/Procedure The adjustment value is set.
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following Setting
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 11.) Item Default
range
* Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) 0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
* Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone 1 1.0 Exposure level 1
mode) 2 2.0 Exposure level 2
* Auto mode
* Auto mode (Half-tone mode) 5 5.0 Exposure level 5
2) Press the [START] key. 6 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone)
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key. 7 1.0 (H) Exposure level 1
4) Press [START] key or press [P] key. (Half-tone)
The adjustment value is set. (Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
SIMULATION 46-24 46-27
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(SUPER FINE). SELECT 0-11,AND Purpose Adjustment
PRESS START.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma (density gradi-
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50
ent) of the network scanner mode.
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50 1
6.AUTO(H) 50 7.1.0(H) 50 8.2.0(H) 50 Section —
9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50
Operation/Procedure
(Scanner mode selection)
1) Select the number corresponding to the scanner mode to be
46-25 adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 9.)
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press the [START] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scanner exposure level (Gamma adjustment)
in the ultra fine text mode. After completion of the above procedures, perform the following
Section — procedures.
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the gamma level with 10-key.
1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following 2) Press the [START] key.
adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 11.) The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the gamma value
* Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) is, resulting in a higher contrast.
* Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone Setting

mode) Item Default
range
* Auto mode 1 OC_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone) 0 - 127 64
* Auto mode (Half-tone mode) (OC)
2 OC_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone)
2) Press the [START] key. (OC)
3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key. 3 OC_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone)
4) Press [START] key or press [P] key. (OC)
The adjustment value is set. 4 SPF_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone)
(SPF)
Setting 5 SPF_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone)
Item Default (SPF)
range
0 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50 6 SPF_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone)
(SPF)
7 CIS_Fine.HT Fine text (Half-tone)
(CIS)
8 CIS_SFine.HT Super fine (Half-tone)
(CIS)
9 CIS_UFine.HT Ultra fine (Half-tone)
6 AUTO (H) Auto (Half-tone) (CIS)
(Half-tone)
8 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2 SIMULATION 46-27
(Half-tone)
GAMMA SETUP(SCNNER), SELECT 1-9, AND PRESS START.
9 3.0 (H) Exposure level 3 1.OC_Fine.HT 64 2.OC_SFine.HT 64 3.OC_UFine.HT 64
(Half-tone) 4.SPF_Fine.HT 64 5.SPF_SFine.HT 64 6.SPF_UFine.HT 64
10 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4 7.CIS_Fine.HT 64 8.CIS_SFine.HT 64 9.CIS_UFine.HT 64
(Half-tone)
(Half-tone)
46-31
SIMULATION 46-25
Purpose Adjustment
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 0-11,AND Function (Purpose) Used to adjust sharpness of the copy
PRESS START. mode.
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50
Section —
6.AUTO(H) 50 7.1.0(H) 50 8.2.0(H) 50 Operation/Procedure
9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50 (Copy mode selection)
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy mode to be
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 16.)
(Sharpness adjustment)
After completion of the above procedures, perform the following
procedures.
1) Enter the sharpness level with 10-key.
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the sharpness is.
1 : '07 Feb 15
Setting 46-45
1 Item Default
range
1 OC_AE AE mode (OC) 1-5 2 Purpose Adjustment
2 OC_CHARA Text mode (OC) 3 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image density in the FAX
3 OC_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC) mode (600dpi).
4 OC_PHOTO Photo mode (OC) Section —
5 SPF1_AE AE mode (SPF1) 2
Operation/Procedure
6 SPF1_CHARA Text mode (SPF1) 3
7 SPF1_MIX Text/Photo mode 1) Select the number corresponding to one of the following
(SPF1) adjustment items with 10-key. (Select one of 0 - 14.)
8 SPF1_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF1) * Normal mode (Image density adjustment level)
9 SPF2_AE AE mode (SPF2) 2 * Normal mode (Image density adjustment level) (Half-tone
10 SPF2_CHARA Text mode (SPF2) 3 mode)
11 SPF2_MIX Text/Photo mode
* Auto mode
(SPF2)
12 SPF2_PHOTO Photo mode (SPF2) * Auto mode (Half-tone mode)
13 CIS_AE AE mode (OC) 4 2) Press the [START] key.
14 CIS_CHARA Text mode (OC) 3 3) Enter the image density adjustment value with 10-key.
15 CIS_MIX Text/Photo mode (OC)
16 CIS_PHOTO Photo mode (OC) Setting
Item Default
range
* SPF1: DSPF front surface (CCD) / SPF2: DSPF back surface
(CCD)
selection
SIMULATION 46-31 2 EXP LEVEL Exposure level
SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START. selection
1.OC_AE 3 2.OC_CHARA 3 3.OC_MIX 3 3 AUTO Auto 0 - 99 50
4.OC_PHOTO 3 5.SPF1_AE 3 6.SPF1_CHARA 3 4 1.0 Exposure level 1
7.SPF1_MIX 3 8.SPF1_PHOTO 3 9.SPF2_AE 3 5 2.0 Exposure level 2
10.SPF2_CHARA 3 11.SPF2_MIX 3 12.SPF2_PHOTO 3
13.CIS_AE 3 14.CIS_CHARA 3 15.CIS_MIX 3
16.CIS_PHOTO 3
46-39
(Half-tone)
Purpose Adjustment 11 2.0 (H) Exposure level 2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust sharpness of the FAX mode. (Half-tone)
Section —
(Half-tone)
Operation/Procedure 13 4.0 (H) Exposure level 4
1) Enter the sharpness level with 10-key. (Half-tone)
2) Press the [START] key. 14 5.0 (H) Exposure level 5
(Half-tone)
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the sharpness is.
Setting The adjustment value is set.
1 Item
range
1 Level 1 (Half-tone/ Sharpness:Light) 1-3
2 Level 2 (Sharpness:Medium light)
3 Level 3 (Normal/ Sharpness:Medium) 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
SIMULATION 46-39 used with 10-key.
FAX SHARPNESS LEVEL SETUP. SELECT 1-36, AND PRESS
START. 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
1:OC_NORMAL 3 2:OC_FINE 3 3:OC_FINE(H) 1
4:OC_SFINE 3 5:OC_SFINE(H) 1 6:OC_UFINE 3 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
7:OC_UFINE(H) 1 8:OC_600 3 9:OC_600(H) 1 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
10:SPF1_NORMAL 3 11:SPF1_FINE 3 12:SPF1_FINE(H) 1
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
13:SPF1_SFINE 3 14:SPF1_SFINE(H) 1 15:SPF1_UFINE 3
16:SPF1_UFINE(H) 1 17:SPF1_600 3 18:SPF1_600(H) 1 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
19:SPF2_NORMAL 3 20:SPF2_FINE 3 21:SPF2_FINE(H) 1 5 BPT Manual paper feed
22:SPF2_SFINE 3 23:SPF2_SFINE(H) 1 24:SPF2_UFINE 3 6 LCC Side LCC
25:SPF2_UFINE(H) 1 26:SPF2_600 3 27:SPF2_600(H) 1
28:CIS_NORMAL 3 29:CIS_FINE 3 30:CIS_FINE(H) 1
31:CIS_SFINE 3 32:CIS_SFINE(H) 1 33:CIS_UFINE 3
SIMULATION 46-45
34:CIS_UFINE(H) 1 35:CIS_600 3 36:CIS_600(H) 1
EXP.LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(600dpi). SELECT 0-5,AND PRESS
START.
0.AUTO 50 1.1.0 50 2.2.0 50
3.3.0 50 4.4.0 50 5.5.0 50
6.AUTO(H) 50 7.1.0(H) 50 8.2.0(H) 50
9.3.0(H) 50 10.4.0(H) 50 11.5.0(H) 50
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
48 2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
48-1
Purpose Adjustment 6 LCC Side LCC
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio When the total of the above set value (1 - 6) and 10 is entered, the
(in the main scanning and the sub scanning mode is changed to the duplex mode.
directions).
* The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following
Section Optical (Image scanning) 1) Enter 2 with 10-key.
(Adjustment mode selection) 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy mode to be 4) Press the [START] key.
2) Press the [START] key. Setting range 25 - 400 (%)
Setting
Item Default in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 0 - 99 50
selection copying is performed.
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification SIMULATION 48-1
ratio MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
3 CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START
magnification ratio 2.MAGNIFICATION 100
adjustment (CCD) 3.CCD(MAIN) 50 4.CCD(SUB) 50 5.SPF(SUB) 50
4 CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 6.CIS(MAIN) 50 7.SPF(MAIN) 50 2
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
5 SPF (SUB) SPF front surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
48-5
6 CIS (MAIN) SPF back surface Purpose Adjustment
magnification ratio Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio
adjustment
in the sub scanning direction.
(CIS main scan)
7 SPF (MAIN) SPF front surface Section Optical (Image scanning)
magnification ratio Operation/Procedure
adjustment
When the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjust-
(Main scan)
ment with SIM 48-1 cannot provide a satisfactory result if a different
(Copy magnification ratio adjustment) magnification ration is set and a copy is made, perform this simula-
1) Select the number corresponding to the copy magnification tion.
ratio adjustment mode to be adjusted with 10-key. (Select one When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction
of 3 - 7.) copy, change the adjustment value of the high speed mode. When
2) Press the [START] key. there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio adjustment value with 10- copy, change the adjustment value of the low speed mode.
key. 1) Select the number that corresponds to the mode for which to
4) Press the [P] or [START] key. make adjustments with 10-key.
When [START] key is pressed, copy is performed and the 2) Press the [START] key.
adjustment value is set simultaneously. 3) Enter the copy adjustment value with 10-key.
The copy magnification ratio in the sub scan direction can be The scanner/SPF motor rotation sped adjustment value is
adjusted by changing the scan speed (motor RPM). entered.
Normal display NOW COPYING. Setting

ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. range
Jam JAM 0 MIR (220) Scanner motor 0 - 99 50
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. (220mm/sec)
1 MIR (110) Scanner motor
The greater the value is, the greater the correction is. One step cor-
(110mm/sec)
responds to 0.1% adjustment.
2 SPF (360) SPF motor
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) (360mm/sec)
* To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- 3 SPF (220) SPF motor
dures. (220mm/sec)
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. 4 SPF (110) SPF motor
(110mm/sec)
used with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 6.)
4) The input value is saved by pressing the [START] key * Set LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the adjustment value of LEAD,
and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
SIMULATION 48-5 * Set DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the adjustment value of
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-4, AND PRESS START. DENA, and press [P] key.) (0.1mm/step)
0.MIR(220) 50 1.MIR(110) 50 2) Make a copy at the normal ratio (100%) and check the lead
2.SPF(360) 50
4.SPF(110) 50
3.SPF(220) 50
0 edge void area and the image loss. (Enter 100 as the set value
of the copy magnification ratio (MAGNIFICATION), and press
[START] key.)
3) If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
* If the leading edge void area is not 3.5 mm:
49 Change the adjustment value of RRCB and perform the
adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCB and
49-1 press [START] key.) (1msec/step)
Purpose Setting/update * If the lead edge image loss is not 1.5mm:
Function (Purpose) Firmware updating Change the adjustment value of RRCA and perform the
Section — adjustment. (Change the adjustment value of RRCA and
press [START] key.)
Operation/Procedure
(The adjustment value should be changed in steps of
1) Before proceeding to the sim.49-1 screen, insert the USB
0.2mm.)
memory to the main unit.
(Trailing edge void area adjustment)
* File and folder of the USB memory are displayed. (When the
foldername is longer than 34 characters, it is not completely Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the
displayed.) adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
* If the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A USB MEM- (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
ORY DEVICE CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE, PLEASE Set the (SIDE) adjustment value to 20 by entering "20" into the
USE FAT (12/16) FORMAT" is displayed. (SIDE) adjustment value field and then pressing the [P] key.
* Non compliant to FAT32. If it's inserted, "CAN NOT SUP- Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
PORT FAT32. PLEASE USE FAT (12/16) FORMAT" is dis- in the front/rear frame direction.
played. (Front/rear frame direction void area)
2) Enter the file/folder number of firmware that tries to be updated Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust-
with 10-key, and press [START] key. ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.)
3) If selecting the file, "FIRMWARE UPDATE.. ARE YOU SURE Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is
?" is displayed. ([1]: execute, [2]: get back) 7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and
* If the operation is normally completed, "COMPLEATE" is press [START] key.)
displayed. When the error occurs, "ERROR" is displayed. Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm
If, as shown above, the front and the rear void areas are not even,
SIMULATION 49-1 use SIM 50-5 to adjust the image off-center position.
FIRMWARE UPDATE. Setting

SELECT FIRMUP FILE, AND PRESS START.
1. FILE1.sfu
0 Item
range
Default
2. FILE2.sfu 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-6 -

3. FILE3.sfu selection
. 1 COPY START Copy START (Default) - -
. 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - -
19. >>NEXT Page ratio 400%
3 RRCA Document scan start 0 - 99 50
position adjustment
value
50 4 RRCB Resist roller clutch ON
timing adjustment
50-1 value
10 SIDE2 ADJ. Correction value for 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment RRCB in the back
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and surface print mode
the void area (image loss) adjustment on (Image loss set value)
print paper in the copy mode. (The similar 5 LEAD LEAD Lead edge 0 - 99 15
adjustment can be performed with SIM 50- image loss set value
5 and 50-2 (Simplified method).) (Docu- 6 SIDE Side image loss set 20
ment table mode) (Void set value)
7 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void set 0 - 99 35
Section —
(DENA) value
Operation/Procedure 8 TRAIL_EDGE Rear edge void
(Leading edge image loss/void area adjustment) (DENB) adjustment value
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss and 9 FRONT/REAR Front/Rear void
leading edge void as follows: adjustment value
(Standard set value) NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEDA: 15)/Paper lead edge
void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35)
5) Make a copy at 400%, and calculate the values of L1 and L2.
(Enter 100 as the set value (MAGNIFICATION) of the copy
magnification ratio, and press [START] key.) (Place a scale on
Jam JAM
the document table and make a copy.)
L1 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) scale position of 10mm x 10
* To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- L2 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
dures. paper lead edge x 10
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. 6) Enter the above values as the set values of L1 and L2.
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed (Enter the adjustment values of L1 and L2, and press [P] key.)
If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the above proce-
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray of the dures again from the beginning, or use SIM 50-1 to adjust.
target paper with 10-key.
NOTE: If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
dures, through the adjustment values are changed individ-
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 ually, the normal adjustment cannot be made.
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 Perform procedures 3) to 6) continuously.
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 (Trailing edge void area adjustment)
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the
5 BPT Manual paper feed adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
6 LCC Side LCC
* The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following
Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust-
1) Enter 2 with 10-key. ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.)
2) Press the [START] key. When this adjustment value is changed, the image position is
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key. shifted in the front/rear frame direction.
Setting range 25 - 400 (%)
Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is
4) Press the [START] key. 7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and
press [START] key.)
SIMULATION 50-1 Front frame void area = 3.5mm / Rear frame void area = 3.5mm
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. If, as shown above, the front and the rear void areas are not even,
2.MAGNIFICATION 100 2 use SIM 50-5 to adjust the image off-center position.
(ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.RRCA 50 4.RRCB 50 10.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
Setting
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20 Item Default
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-6 -
8.TRAIL_EDGE(DENB) 30 9.FRONT/REAR 30
selection
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) - -
2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - 400
50-2 ratio 400%
Purpose Adjustment (Actual measurement value)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document scan position, 3 L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
image lead edge to
the image print position, and the void area
the scale of 10mm.
(image loss). (Simple adjustment) (This
(Platen 400%, 0.1mm
adjustment is the simple method of SIM 50- increment)
1.) (Document table mode) 4 L2 Distance from the
Section — paper lead edge to the
image lead edge
Operation/Procedure
(0.1mm increment)
(Leading edge image loss/void area adjustment) (Image loss set value)
1) Set the RRCB value of SIM 50-1 to 80 - 99. 5 LEAD Lead edge image loss 0 - 99 15
2) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss adjust- set value
ment value (LEAD EDGE) and leading edge void adjustment 6 SIDE Side image loss set 20
value (DENA) as follows: value
(Void set value)
(Standard set value)
7 LEAD_EDGE Lead edge void set 0 - 99 35
Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEDA: 15)/Paper lead edge (DENA) value
void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35) 8 TRAIL_EDGE Rear edge void
* Set the adjustment value of LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the (DENB) adjustment value
adjustment value of LEAD and press [P] key.) 9 FRONT/REAR Front/Rear void
adjustment value
* Set the adjustment value of DENA to 35. (Enter 35 as the
adjustment value of DENA and press [P] key.) NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
3) Set the adjustment value of L1 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
value of L1, and press [P] key.) [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
4) Set the adjustment value of L2 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment
value of L2, and press [P] key.) Normal display NOW COPYING.
Jam JAM
1 : '07 Feb 15
(Copy condition setting in this simulation) 3) If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures. * If the leading edge void area is not 3.5 mm:
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. Repeat the process of changing the (RRCB) adjustment
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed value and then pressing the [START] key. until attaining an
tray selection mode.) acceptable level.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray of the (Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.1mm/step)
target paper with 10-key. (Trailing edge void area adjustment)
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) Adjust so that the rear edge void area is 3.5mm. (Change the
adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
Adjust so that the total of the front/rear direction void areas is
3 TRAY3 TRAY3
7.0mm. (Change the adjustment values of FRONT/REAR, and
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
press [START] key.)
6 LCC Side LCC Front frame void area = 3.5mm Rear frame void area = 3.5mm
The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following (Paper resist adjustment)
1) Enter 2 with 10-key. 1) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 9.) (Table 1)
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
Setting range 25 - 400 (%) 4) Press [P] key or [START] key. When [START] key is pressed,
4) Press the [START] key. the adjustment value is set and printing is performed. (Table 2)
If the relative positions of paper and print images vary or a
paper jam occurs, change the adjustment value.
SIMULATION 50-2 (Print condition setting in this simulation)
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS
START. * To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
0. TRAY SELECT 1 1.COPY START
2. MAGNIFICATION 400
2 dures.
(ADJUSTMENT) 3.LT 320 4.L2 105 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
(IMAEG LOSS SETTING) 5.LEAD 15 6.SIDE 20 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
(VOID SETTING) 7.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 50 tray selection mode.)
used with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 6.) (Table 3)
50-5 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
Purpose Adjustment When the total of the above set value (1 - 6) and 10 is entered, the
mode is changed to the duplex mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print image position and
the void area (image loss) on print paper. NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
(Adjustment as the print engine) (This in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
adjustment is reflected on all the FAX/ [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
printer/copy modes.) copying is performed.
Section — (Table 1)
Operation/Procedure Default
(Print image off-center adjustment) Setting 1
Item 55/62 70
range
1) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be (ppm) (ppm)
adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 10 - 16.) (Table 1) 0 TRAY Paper feed tray - - -
SELECT selection (1 - 6)
1 PRINT Print start (Default) - - -
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. START
4) Press [P] key or [START] key. (Lead edge adjustment value)
When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and 2 RRCB Resist roller clutch 0 - 99 50 50
printing is performed. (Table2) ON timing
adjustment value
Check the off-center of the self-print patter of print-out.
SIDE2- Offset (adjustment) 1 - 99 50 50
(Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.1mm/step) ADJ of the RRCB setting
The greater the adjustment value is, the more the print image is during rear print.
shifted to the front. (Resist adjustment value)
(Lead edge void area adjustment) 3 TRAY1 Tray 1 adjustment 0 - 99 40 48
4 TRAY2 Tray 2 adjustment 39 46
1) Set the lead edge void adjustment value (DENA) as specified
5 TRAY3 Tray 3 adjustment 40 47
below.
6 TRAY4 Tray 4 adjustment
(Standard set value) 7 BPT Manual feed tray 39 46
Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35) adjustment
* Set the adjustment value for (DENA) to 35 by entering "35" 8 LCC Side LCC adjustment
into the (DENA) adjustment value field and then pressing the 9 ADU Adjustment when
[P] key. paper is fed again
from ADU
2) Check the lead edge void area on the self print pattern. (Off-center set value)
(Enter 1 and press [START] key.) 10 TRAY 1 Tray 1 adjustment - 50 50
11 TRAY 2 Tray 2 adjustment -
12 TRAY 3 Tray 3 adjustment -
1 : '07 Feb 15
Default 3) Change the adjustment values of SIDE1 and SIDE2, and per-
1 Setting form the adjustment. (Change the adjustment values of SIDE1
Item 55/62 70
range
(ppm) (ppm) and SIDE2, and press [START] key.)
13 TRAY 4 Tray 4 adjustment - 50 50 SIDE1: SPF front surface document lead edge scan position
14 BPT Manual feed tray - adjustment value
adjustment
SIDE2: SPF back surface document lead edge scan position
15 LCC Side LCC adjustment -
adjustment value
16 ADU Adjustment when -
paper is fed again (Shift for the adjustment value change: 0.1mm/step)
from ADU (The image scan start timing is determined with the detection
(Void set value) timing of the document lead edge by the detector SPPD4.)
17 LEAD_E Lead edge void set 0 - 99 35 35 Repeat procedures 2) and 3) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
DGE value
(Trailing edge image loss adjustment)
(DENA)
18 TRAIL_ Rear edge void 1) Use the SPF at 100% to make a duplex copy, and check that
EDGE adjustment value the rear edge image loss is 1.5mm on the front and the back
(DENB) surfaces. (Select the duplex mode in the paper selection mode
19 FRONT/ Front/Rear void of SIM 50-6.) (Enter 100 as the copy magnification ratio set
REAR adjustment value value (MAGNIFICATION), and press [START] key.)
(Table 2) If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps.
2) Repeat the process of changing the (TRAIL EDGE) adjust-
ment value and then pressing the [START] key. until attaining
an acceptable level.
Jam JAM
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.
(Table 3)
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 Set the adjustment value of the front surface and the back surface
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 (FRONT/REAR) to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjustment value of
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 FRONT/REAR, and press [P] key.)
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
5 BPT Manual paper feed in the front/rear frame direction.
6 LCC Side LCC
SIMULATION 50-5 [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START copying is performed. (Table2)
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)
LEAD EDGE: 2.RRCB 50 20.SIDE2 ADJ. 50
2 (Copy condition setting in this simulation)
RESIST: 3.T1 50 4.T2 50 5.T3 50 6.T4 50 * To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
7.BPT 50 8.LCC 50 9.ADU 50 dures.
OFF CENTER: 10.T1 50 11.T2 50 12.T3 50 13.T4 50 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
14.BPT 50 15.LCC 50 16.ADU 50
(VOID SETTING) 17.LEAD_EDGE(DENA) 50 tray selection mode.)
used with 10-key. (Table 3)
50-6
* The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following proce-
Purpose Adjustment
dures.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and 1) Enter 2 with 10-key.
void area (image loss) on print paper in the
copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be
performed with SIM 50-7 (simple method).) 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
(SPF mode)
Section —
Operation/Procedure
(Table 1)
(Lead edge image loss adjustment) (Table 1)
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss for the Setting
Item Default
front and back sides as follows: range
(Standard set value)
selection
Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEAD: 15)/Paper lead edge 1 COPY START Copy START (Default) - -
void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35) 2 MAGNIFICATION Print magnification 25 - -
* Set the adjustment value of LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the ratio 200%
adjustment value of LEAD EDGE, and press [P] key.) (Lead edge adjustment value)
2) Make a duplex copy at 100% with the SPF, and check that the 3 SIDE1 Front surface 0 - 99 50
lead edge (image loss) is 1.5mm either on the front surface document scan start
and the back surface. (Select the duplex mode in the paper position adjustment
value
selection mode of SIM 50-6.) (Table 3) (Enter 100 as the copy
4 SIDE2 Back surface
magnification ratio set value (MAGNIFICATION), and press
document scan start
[START] key.) position adjustment
If an acceptable result is not obtained, do the following steps. value
Setting 3) Set the adjustment value of L5 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment
Item Default value of L5, and press [P] key.)
range
(Image loss set value: SIDE 1) 4) Make a copy at 200% with the SPF, and calculate the values of
5 LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 15 L4 and L5. (Enter 200 as the set value of the copy magnifica-
edge image loss set tion ratio set value (MAGNIFICATION) and press [START]
value key.)
6 FRONT_REAR Front surface side 20
L4 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
edge image loss set
value scale of 10mm x 10
7 TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 20 0 L5 = Distance (mm) from the image lead edge position to the
edge image loss set paper lead edge x 10
value 5) Enter the above values as the set values of L4 and L5. (Enter
(Image loss set value: SIDE 2) the adjustment values of L4 and L5, and press [P] key.)
8 LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 15
(Enter the adjustment values of L4 and L5, and press [P] key.)
edge image loss set
value (The image scan start timing is determined with the detection
9 FRONT/REAR Back surface side 20 timing of the document lead edge by the detector SPPD4.)
edge image loss set If the adjustment result is not satisfactory, perform the above proce-
value dures again or adjust with SIM 50-1.
10 TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 20 0
edge image loss set NOTE: If the adjustment result of the above procedures is not sat-
value isfactory, though the adjustment value is changed individu-
(Table 2) ally, the adjustment cannot be completed normally.
Repeat procedures 2) - 5) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Normal display NOW COPYING. (Trailing edge image loss adjustment)
Adjust so that the rear edge image loss is 3.5mm. (Change the
Jam JAM
adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE, and press [START] key.)
(Table 3)
Set the adjustment value of SIDE to 20. (Enter 20 as the adjust-
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 ment value of SIDE, and press [P] key.)
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 Note that changing this adjustment value shifts the image position
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 in the front/rear frame direction.
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
6 LCC Side LCC
When the total of the above set value and 10 is entered, the mode copying is performed.) (Table2)
is changed to the duplex mode (DD), and a duplex copy is made. (Copy condition setting in this simulation)
* To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
SIMULATION 50-6 dures.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS 1) Enter 0 with 10-key.
START. 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2 tray selection mode.)
(ADJUSTMENT DATA)3.SIDE1 50 4.SIDE2 50
used with 10-key. (Table 3)
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING)
SIDE1: 5.LEAD_EDGE 15 6.FRONT/REAR 20 7.TRAIL_EDGE 0
SIDE2: 8.LEAD_EDGE 15 9.FRONT/REAR 20 10.TRAIL_EDGE 0 * The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following
50-7 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
void area (image loss) on print paper in the 4) Press the [START] key.
copy mode. (The similar adjustment can be (Table 1)
performed with SIM 50-6.) (SPF mode)
Setting
Section — Item Default
range
Operation/Procedure 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray - -
(Lead edge image loss adjustment) (Table 1) selection (1 - 6)
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) - -
1) Set the adjustment values for leading edge image loss adjust-
ment value (LEAD EDGE) for the front and back sides as fol-
ratio 200%
lows:
(Actual measurement value)
(Standard set value) 3 L4 Distance from the front 0 - 999 -
Lead edge image loss: 1.5mm (LEAD: 1.5) surface image lead
Paper lead edge void: 3.5mm (DENA: 35) edge to the scale of
10mm (SPF: 200%)
* Set the adjustment value of LEAD to 15. (Enter 15 as the 4 L5 Distance from the
adjustment value of LEAD EDGE, and press [P] key.) back surface image
2) Set the adjustment value of L4 to 0. (Enter 0 as the adjustment lead edge to the scale
value of L4, and press [P] key.) of 10mm (SPF: 200%)
(Image loss set value: SIDE 1)
Setting Setting
Item Default Item Default
range range
5 LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 15 3 TRAY1 Tray 1 adjustment 0 - 99 50
edge image loss set 4 TRAY2 Tray 2 adjustment
value 5 TRAY3 Tray 3 adjustment
6 FRONT_REAR Front surface side 20 6 TRAY4 Tray 4 adjustment
edge image loss set 7 BPT Manual feed tray
value adjustment
7 TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 20 0 8 LCC Side LCC adjustment
edge image loss set
9 ADU Adjustment when
value
paper is fed again
(Image loss set value: SIDE 2) from ADU
8 LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 15
edge image loss set
value 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
9 FRONT/REAR Back surface side 20 4) Press [P] key or [START] key. When [START] key is pressed,
edge image loss set the adjustment value set and copying is performed.
value
10 TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 20 0 Normal display NOW COPYING.
edge image loss set ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
value Jam JAM
(Table 2) Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
(Image off-center adjustment)
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. 1) Enter 1 with 10-key.
Jam JAM 2) Press the [START] key.
Paper empty PAPER EMPTY. The adjustment pattern is printed.
(Table 3) 3) Check the off-center of the printed image.
(UNIT: 0.1mm/step When the adjustment value is increased,
1 TRAY1 TRAY1
the print image is shifted to the front direction.)
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 NOTE: This adjustment can be performed with SIM 50-5.
4 TRAY4 TRAY4 (Copy condition setting in this simulation)
5 BPT Manual paper feed To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following procedures.
6 LCC Side LCC
When the total of the above set value and 10 is entered, the mode 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
is changed to the duplex mode (DD), and a duplex copy is made.
SIMULATION 50-7 used with 10-key. (Select one of 1 - 6)
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC.). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS 4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.)
START.
0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 200
1.COPY START 2 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
(ADJUSTMENT DATA) 3.L4 160 4.L5 160 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
(IMAGE LOSS SETTING) 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
SIDE1: 5.LEAD_EDGE 15 6.FRONT/REAR 20 7.TRAIL_EDGE 0 5 BPT Manual paper feed
SIDE2: 8.LEAD_EDGE 15 9.FRONT/REAR 20 10.TRAIL_EDGE 0 6 LCC Side LCC
When the total of the above set value (1 - 6) and 10 is entered, the
mode is changed to the duplex print mode.
50-10 The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following
Purpose Adjustment 1) Enter 2 with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print image off-center 2) Press the [START] key.
position. (Adjusted separately for each 3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
paper feed section.)
Section — Setting range 25 - 400 (%)

(Print image off-center adjustment) NOTE: When [P] key is pressed after entering an adjustment value
NOTE: This simulation cannot provide an accurate adjustment.
Do not use.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the number of the paper
feed tray to be adjusted with 10-key. (Select one of 3 - 9.)
SIMULATION 50-10
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS
Setting
Item Default START.
range
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
2
selection
1 COPY START Copy START (Default) - - (ADJUSTMENT DATA)
3.TRAY1 50 4.TRAY2 50 5.TRAY3 50
6.TRAY4 50 7.BPT 50 8.LCC 50 9. ADU 50
ratio 400%
50-12
Purpose Adjustment
3) Enter the copy magnification ratio with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image off-center
position. (Adjusted separately for each Setting range 25 - 400 (%)
scan mode.) 4) Press the [START] key.
Section —
Operation/Procedure in this simulation, the adjustment value is set. When
(Select the scan mode to be adjusted.) [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
1) Enter the number corresponding to the scan mode to be copying is performed.
Setting SIMULATION 50-12

Item Default ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS
range
0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray 1-6 - START.
selection 0.TRAY SELECT 1
2.MAGNIFICATION 100
1.COPY START 2
1 COPY START Copy START - -
(Default) (ADJUSTMENT DATA)
2 MAGNIFICATIO Print magnification 25 - 400% 100 3.PLATEN 50 4.SPF SIDE1 50 5.SPF SIDE2 50
N ratio
(Resist adjustment value)
3 PLATEN OC mode adjustment 0 - 99 50
4 SPF SIDE1 SPF front surface
50-27
adjustment
5 SPF SIDE2 SPF back surface Purpose Adjustment
adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss of the scan
2) Press the [START] key. image in the FAX/scan mode.
(Scan off-center position adjustment) Section —
1) Enter the scan image off-center position adjustment value with Operation/Procedure
10-key. (Select the scan mode to be adjusted.)
2) Press [P] key or [START] key. 1) Enter the number corresponding to the adjustment item with
When [START] key is pressed, copy is performed and the 10-key.
adjustment value is set simultaneously. 2) Press the [START] key.
ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN. 4) Press the [START] key.
Jam JAM (Shift for the adjustment value change: 1.0mm/step)
Setting
Check the off-center of the printed image. Item Default
range
Repeat the above adjustments until acceptable results are FAX send
obtained. 1 OC OC lead edge 0 - 10 3
(UNIT: 0.1mm/step When the adjustment value is increased, the (LEAD_EDGE) (Unit (3mm)
print image is shifted to the front direction.) 2 OC (FRONT/ OC side 1mm)
REAR)
3 OC OC rear edge
* To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce- (TRAIL_EDGE)
dures. 4 SPF SPF lead edge
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. (LEAD_EDGE)
2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed 5 SPF (FRONT/ SPF side
tray selection mode.) REAR)
6 SPF SPF rear edge
(TRAIL_EDGE)
used with 10-key.
7 CIS CIS lead edge
4) Press [START] key. (The paper feed tray is selected.) (LEAD_EDGE)
8 CIS (FRONT/ CIS side
1 TRAY1 TRAY1 REAR)
2 TRAY2 TRAY2 9 CIS CIS rear edge
3 TRAY3 TRAY3 (TRAIL_EDGE)
4 TRAY4 TRAY4
6 LCC Side LCC
When the total of the above set value (1 - 6) and 10 is entered,
the mode is changed to the duplex print mode.
* The copy magnification ratio can be set with the following pro-
cesures.
1 : '07 Feb 15
Default
Setting Setting 1
Item Default Item 55/62 70
range range
(ppm) (ppm)
Scanner mode 2 TRAY1 Tray 1 resist 0 - 99 40 48
10 OC OC lead edge 0 - 10 0 adjustment value
(LEAD_EDGE) (Unit (0mm) 3 TRAY2 Tray 2 resist 39 46
11 OC (FRONT/ OC side 1mm) adjustment value
REAR) 4 TRAY3 Tray 3 resist 40 47
12 OC OC rear edge adjustment value
(TRAIL_EDGE) 5 TRAY4 Tray 4 resist
13 SPF SPF lead edge adjustment value
(LEAD_EDGE) 6 BPT Manual feed tray 39 46
14 SPF (FRONT/ SPF side resist adjustment
REAR) value
15 SPF SPF rear edge 7 LCC Side LCC resist
(TRAIL_EDGE) adjustment value
16 CIS CIS lead edge 8 ADU ADU resist
(LEAD_EDGE) adjustment value
17 CIS (FRONT/ CIS side 9 SPF SPF resist 50 50
REAR) (TOP) adjustment value
18 CIS CIS rear edge (Top speed)
(TRAIL_EDGE) 10 SPF SPF resist
(HIGH) adjustment value
(High speed)
SIMULATION 50-27
ORIGINAL IMAGE LOSS SETTING(FAX/SCN). SELECT 1-18, AND 11 SPF SPF resist
PRESS START. (LOW) adjustment value
[FAX] 1 (Low speed)
1.OC(LEAD_EDGE) 0 2.OC(FRONT/REAR) 0 3.OC(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 12 SPF SPF paper feed
4.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 5.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 6.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 FEED resist adjustment
7.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 8.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 9.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 (TOP) value (Top speed)
[SCN] 13 SPF SPF paper feed
10.OC(LEAD_EDGE) 0 11.OC(FRONT/REAR) 0 12.OC(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 FEED resist adjustment
13.SPF(LEAD_EDGE) 0 14.SPF(FRONT/REAR) 0 15.SPF(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 (HIGH) value (High speed)
16.CIS(LEAD_EDGE) 0 17.CIS(FRONT/REAR) 0 18.CIS(TRAIL_EDGE) 0 14 SPF SPF paper feed
FEED resist adjustment
(LOW) (Low speed)
51 (Resist adjustment)
1) Enter the resist adjustment value with 10-key.
51-2 2) Press the [START] key.
Purpose Adjustment When [START] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set and
paper feed and copying are performed.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure of
paper on the resist roller of each section Normal display NOW PRINTING.
(each paper feed, duplex feed and SPF ERROR display Door open DOOR OPEN.
paper feed of the copier). (This adjustment Jam JAM
is required when the print image position Paper empty PAPER EMPTY.
variations are considerably great or when
paper jams occur frequently.)
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/
Transport)
Operation/Procedure
(Select the scan mode to be adjusted.)
used with 10-key.
Changing the resist amount value by 1shifts the position by
1ms. 1 TRAY1 TRAY1
2 TRAY2 TRAY2
Default
1 Setting 3 TRAY3 TRAY3
Item 55/62 70
range 4 TRAY4 TRAY4
(ppm) (ppm)
0 TRAY Paper feed tray - - -
6 LCC LCC
SELECT selection (1 - 6)
1 PRINT Print start (Default) - - - When the total of the above set value (1 - 6) and 10 is entered,
START the mode is changed to the duplex print mode.
53-7
SIMULATION 51-2
RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-14, AND PRESS START. Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
0.TRAY SELECT 1 1.PRINT START Check (Display/Print)
2.TRAY1 50 3.TRAY2 50 4.TRAY3 50 Function (Purpose) Used to enter the SPF width detection
5.TRAY4 50 6.BPT 50
8.ADU
7.LCC 50
50 9.SPF(TOP) 50 10.SPF(HIGH) 50
1 adjustment value.
11.SPF(LOW) 50 12.SPF FEED(TOP) 50 Section DSPF
13.SPF FEED(HIGH) 50 14.SPF FEED(LOW) 50 Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the set item with 10-key.
Setting
Item Default
range
53 1 MAX. Max. position 0 - 1023 66
POSITION
53-6 2 POSITION 1 Adjustment point 1 456
3 POSITION 2 Adjustment point 2 713
Purpose Adjustment 4 MIN. POSITION Min. width 791
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF width detection 2) Press the [START] key.
level.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section —
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. SIMULATION 53-7
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS
2) Select MAX. POSITION with 10-key. START.
3) Press the [START] key. 1.MAX.POSITION: 66
2.POSITION 1 : 456
The max. width detection level is recognized.
3.POSITION 2 : 713 1
4) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 4.MIN.POSITION: 791
5) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
8) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document scan start
9) Set the manual paper feed guide to A5R size width. position. (Used to adjust the scanner scan
10) Select POSITION 2 with 10-key. position in the SPF mode front scan.)
11) Press the [START] key. Section —

The A5R width detection level is recognized. Operation/Procedure
12) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. 1) Enter 2 with 10-key.
13) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the minimum width position. 2) Press the [START] key.
14) Select MIN. POSITION with 10-key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10key. (1 count: 0.1mm)
The minimum width detection level is recognized. Setting
Item Default
If the above procedures are not completed normally, "ERROR" is range
displayed. If completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. 2 MANUAL Manual adjustment 1 - 70 32
(Direct entry of a
number)
SIMULATION 53-6
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
1.MAX.POSITION SIMULATION 53-8
2.POSITION 1 SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START.
3.POSITION 2 1
4.MIN.POSITION 2.MANUAL 25
55 56
55-1 56-1
Purpose Setting Purpose Data transfer
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine Function (Purpose) Used to transfer the MFP controller data.
control operations. (PCU PWB) (Used to repair the PWB.)
Section — Section MFP controller
This simulation is used to change and check the engine soft SW. 1) Select the number corresponding to the data transfer mode
Set this setting to the default. with 10-key.
There is no need to change this setting in the market.
1 ALL (EEPROM, All the contents of memory are transferred
SRAM, FlashROM) → to HDD. (Similar to execution of items 3
SIMULATION 55-1 HDD and 5.)
ENGINNE SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START. 2 HDD → ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the
(EEPROM, SRAM, memories. (Similar to execution of items 4
FlashROM) and 6.)
1 3 EEPROM → HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
4 HDD → EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
5 SRAM (+ FAX Memory, Transfer from SRAM to HDD. When,
+ Option Memory) → however, the FAX memory or an option
55-2 HDD memory (for FAX memory) * is installed,
Purpose Setting the contents of the Fax memory are also
transferred to HDD.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
6 HDD → SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM. When,
ner control operations. (Scanner control
(+ FAX Memory, however, the FAX memory or an option
PWB) + Option Memory) memory (for FAX memory) * is installed,
Section — the contents HDD are transferred to the
FAX memory as well as the SRAM.
Operation/Procedure
7 FontROM → HDD Transfer from the font ROM to HDD
This simulation is used to change and check the scanner soft SW.
Set this setting to the default. * When Flash ROM or OP_Flash ROM is not installed, trans-
fer is not made.
There is no need to change this setting in the market.
3) The confirmation menu is opened to confirm YES/NO of data
SIMULATION 55-2
transfer. Select one.
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START.
1 YES Data transfer is executed.
1 2 NO Data transfer is not executed.
After completion of transfer, the transfer result is displayed. If there
55-3 is no error, the machine is automatically reset after completion of
data transfer.
Purpose Setting
If there is an error, ‘NG’ is displayed. (The machine is not reset.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
When restoring from HDD, fit the configurations of the Flash ROM
ler operations. (MFP control PWB)
and the optional Flash ROM at back-up.
Section —
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 56-1
This simulation is used to change and check the controller soft SW. DATA COPY. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START.
Set this setting to the default. 1.ALL(EEPROM,SRAM,FlashROM) → HDD
There is no need to change this setting in the market. 2.HDD → ALL(EEPROM,SRAM,FlashROM)
3.EEPROM → HDD
1
4.HDD → EEPROM
SIMULATION 55-3 5.SRAM(+FAX Memory,+Option Memory) → HDD
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 1-16, AND PRESS START. 6.HDD → SRAM(+FAX Memory,+Option Memory)
7.FontROM → HDD
1 : '07 Feb 15
Default
60 Item
Setting
range
55/62 70 1
(ppm) (ppm)
1 AE Auto exposure mode 32 - 82 44 38
60-1
2 CHARA. Text mode 50 43
Purpose Operation test/Check 3 MIX Text/Photo mode
Function (Purpose) Used to check the MFP control (DRAM) 4 PHOTO Photo mode
operations (read/write). 2) Press the [START] key.
Section ICU 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the memory to be checked NOTE: Be sure to set the default value. If not, a trouble may occur
with 10-key. in the LSU.
1 MFP DRAM ERDH image memory
2 ASIC DRAM ASIC image memory SIMULATION 61-2
LASER POWER SETTING(COPY). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START.
2) Press the [START] key. 1. AE 44 2. CHARA. 50
The memory read/write operation check is started. 3. MIX 50 4. PHOTO 50
1
After starting the operation, "NOW CHECKING" is displayed during
checking. When read/write is normally completed, "OK" is dis-
played. If an error occurs, "NG" is displayed. 61-3
Purpose Adjustment
SIMULATION 60-1 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the laser power (absolute
DRAM TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. value) in the FAX mode. (Only when FAX is
1. ICU DRAM installed.)
2. ASIC DRAM 1
Section Scanner (write) unit (LSU)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the adjustment mode with
10-key.
61 2) Press the [START] key.

61-1 Setting range 32 - 82

Purpose Operation test/Check Default 50 (55/62 ppm), 38 (70 ppm)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 4) Press the [START] key.
(write) unit (LSU). NOTE: Be sure to set the default value. If not, a trouble may occur
Section Scanner (write) unit (LSU) in the LSU.
Operation/Procedure
Used to check if the LSU delivers output of the sync signal SIMULATION 61-3
(HSYNC/) or not. LASER POWER SETTING(FAX). PRESS START.
1. FAX 5㩷㩷㩷㩷
"NOW CHECKING" is displayed during checking. When the test is
normally completed, "OK" is displayed. If an error occurs, "NG" is
䋴
1
displayed.
61-4
SIMULATION 61-1
LSU TEST. PRESS START. Purpose Adjustment
1. LSU Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the laser power (absolute
1 value) in the printer mode.
Section Scanner (write) unit (LSU)
Operation/Procedure
61-2
10-key.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press the [START] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the laser power (absolute 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
value) in the copy mode.
Section Scanner (write) unit (LSU) Setting range 32 - 82
Default 44 (55/62 ppm), 38 (70 ppm)
Operation/Procedure
10-key. NOTE: Be sure to set the default value. If not, a trouble may occur
in the LSU.
SIMULATION 61-4
LASER POWER SETTING(PRINTER). PRESS START.
㩷㩷㩷 5
1. PRINTER 㩷
1
62 SIMULATION 62-3
HDD R/W TEST(ALL).
62-1 ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
Purpose Data clear 2. NO 1
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk.
Section MFP controller (HDD)
Operation/Procedure 62-6
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk format. Purpose Operation test/Check
1 YES Execution
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the hard
2 NO Cancel
disk. (The self diag operation of the SMART
function is executed.)
During formatting, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When formatting is
completed normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the number corresponding to the self diag check mode.
SIMULATION 62-1 1 SHORT SELF-TEST Partial test

HDD FORMAT. 2 EXTENDED SELF- All areas test
ARE YOU SURE? TEST
1. YES
2. NO 1 2) Press the [START] key.
During the self diag operation, "EXECUTING" is displayed. If the
self diag is completed normally, "0" is displayed. If not, any value
but 0 is displayed.
62-2
SIMULATION 62-6
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the hard SMART OFFLINE TEST.
disk (read/write). (Only in the model with a 1. SHORT SELF-TEST
disk installed) (Partial check) 2. EXTENDED SELF-TEST
1
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk read/write check.
62-7
1 YES Execution Purpose Operation test/Check
2 NO Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the hard
2) Press the [START] key. disk. (The result of the self diag operation
During testing, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When test is completed of the SMART function is printed out.)
normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed. Section MFP controller (HDD)
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION 62-2 1) Enter 1 with 10-key.
HDD R/W TEST.
ARE YOU SURE? 0 TRAY SELECT TRAY SELECT auto only (Selection is not
1. YES allowed.)
2. NO 1 1 PRINT START PRINT START
The result of the hard disk operation check (the self diag operation
62-3 of the SMART function) is printed out.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the hard SIMULATION 62-7
disk (read/write). (All areas check) SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT. SELECT SETTING, AND PRESS
START.
Operation/Procedure
㩷㩷㩷
0. TRAY SELECT
䋴
1. PRINT START
:AUTO 㩷ONLY
1
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk read/write check.
1 YES Execution
2 NO Cancel
During testing, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When test is completed
normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed.
62-11
62-8
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk (the system Function (Purpose) Used to delete document filing data.
(The management area (standard folder,
area excluded).
user folder) is cleared.)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk (the system area excluded) for-
1) Select YES/NO of deleting the document filing data.
mat.
1 YES Execution
1 YES Execution
2 NO Cancel
2 NO Cancel
completed normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed. completed normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed.
NOTE: When executed, this function internally executes the same
function as SIM66-10;deleting reservation data, bulletin
SIMULATION 62-8
board data, and confidential data.
HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA).
ARE YOU SURE?
1.YES SIMULATION 62-11
2.NO 1 DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO 1
62-9
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk (system area)
63
Operation/Procedure
63-1
1) Select YES/NO of hard disk (the system area) format.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
1 YES Execution Check (Display/Print)
2 NO Cancel Function (Purpose) Used to check the result of shading correc-
2) Press the [START] key. tion. (The shading correction data are dis-
played.)
Section Optical (Image scanning)
62-10 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data clear
CCD data
Function (Purpose) Used to delete a job complete list (also to FRONT ODD GAIN Front odd-number pixel gain adjustment value
delete job log data) FRONT EVEN GAIN Front even-number pixel gain adjustment value
Section MFP controller (HDD) FRONT OFFSET Front black difference
Operation/Procedure REAR ODD GAIN Rear odd-number pixel gain adjustment value
REAR EVEN GAIN Rear even-number pixel gain adjustment value
1) Select YES/NO of deleting the job complete list.
REAR OFFSET Rear black difference
1 YES Execution MIN All pixels min. value
2 NO Cancel MAX All pixels max. value
AVE All pixels average value
CIS data (Only when DSPF installed.)
During formatting, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When formatting is GAIN Gain adjustment value
completed normally, "OK" is displayed. If not, "NG" is displayed. MAX Pixel max.
NOTE: When executed, this function also deletes the complete MIN Pixel min.
queues of E-MAIL, FAX and IFAX, reservation data associ- AVE Pixel average
ated with the image send function, bulletin board data, and OFFSET Black difference
confidential data. DEV Standard deviation
SIMULATION 63-1
SIMULATION 62-10 SHADING DATA DISPLAY.
JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR. (WITH JOB LOG DATA) (CCD)
ARE YOU SURE? FRONT ODD GAIN: 128 FRONT EVEN GAIN: 255
1.YES FRONT OFFSET: 2
2.NO 1 REAR ODD GAIN: 128 REAR EVEN GAIN: 255
REAR OFFSET: 2
MIN.: 255 MAX.: 0 AVE.: 255
(CIS)
GAIN: 128 OFFSET: 0 MAX.: 255
MIN.: 255 AVE.: 255 DEV.: 0
63-2
(Print condition setting in this simulation)
Purpose Adjustment
* To select paper (paper feed tray), perform the following proce-
Function (Purpose) Used to execute shading. dures.
Section Optical (Image scanning) 1) Select TRAY SELECT with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [START] key. (The mode is changed to the paper feed
1) Enter the number corresponding to the shading mode to be tray selection mode.)
executed. 3) Enter the number corresponding to the paper feed tray to be
used with 10-key.
1 OC SHADING OC analog level correction and shading
correction (Document table mode)
2 DSPF DSPF analog level correction and shading * To adjust the print density, perform the following procedures.
SHADING correction (SPF mode) 1) Select DENSITY with 10-key.
2) Press the [START] key. 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
During execution, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When execution is 3) Press the [START] key.
completed normally, "COMPLETED" is displayed. * To set the print quantity, perform the following procedures.
1) Select MULTI with 10-key.
SIMULATION 63-2
SHADING EXECUTION. SELECT1-2, AND PRESS START. 2) Enter the print quantity with 10-key.
1. OC SHADING 3) Press the [START] key.
2. DSPF SHADING
1 * To set the print quality mode, perform the following procedures.
1) Select MODE with 10-key.
2) Enter the number corresponding to the print quality mode with
63-7 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
* To set the print level, perform the following procedures.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the white plate scan start
position for shading. (Document table 1) Select LEVEL with 10-key.
mode) 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Section Scanner (Exposure) 3) Press the [START] key.
Operation/Procedure NOTE: In some print patterns, changing the level may not change
1) Enter 1 with 10-key. the picture quality.
2) Press the [START] key. * To set duplex/simplex print, perform the following procedures.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (1count = 0.5mm) 1) Select DUPLEX with 10-key.
4) Press the [START] key. 2) Enter the number corresponding to the operation mode with
10-key.
When a shading error occurs, this adjustment value is
changed. 3) Press [START] key.
(Table 1)
Setting
Item Default
range 0 TRAY SELECT Paper feed tray
1 CCD CCD scan 1 - 16 6 1. TRAY1 1: Tray 1
2. TRAY2 2: Tray 2
SIMULATION 63-7 3. TRAY3 3: Tray 3
SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. 4. TRAY4 4: Tray 4
1. CCD 㩷 0㩷㩷㩷 5. BPT 5: Manual feed
6. LCC 6: LCC
䋴
1 1 PRINT START Print execution (Printing of the
set data is executed.)
2 PRINT PATTERN Print pattern (Note 1)
3 DENSITY Graphic density (Valid only when
64 No. 79, 80 or 84 is selected.)
4 MULTI Number of print
5 MODE Print mode
64-1
1. STANDARD 1. Standard
Purpose Operation test/Check 2. SMOOTHING 2. Smoothing ON
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the printer 3. TONER SAVE 3. Toner save ON
4. HALF TONE 4. Half tone ON
section (self-print operation), (The print pat-
5. SMOOTHING + TONER 5. Smoothing + toner save
tern, the paper feed mode, the print mode,
SAVE 6. Smoothing + half tone
the print quantity, and the density can be 6. SMOOTHING + HALF TONE 7. Toner save + half tone
optionally set.) 7. TONER SAVE + HALF 8. Smoothing + toner save + half
Section — TONE tone
8. SMOOTHING + TONER
Operation/Procedure
SAVE+ HALF TONE
(Various print patterns output) (Table 1) 6 LEVEL Parameter of print image
1) Select PRINT PATTERN with 10-key. process: (1 -5)
2) Enter the number corresponding to the print pattern to be 7 DUPLEX Duplex
1. NO 1 : Simplex
printed with 10-key.
2. YES 2 : Duplex
4) Select PRINT START with 10-key.
(Note 1) Print pattern ENGINE CONTROLLER
NO PATTERN NOTE
PATTERN PATTERN
ENGINE CONTROLLER 57 Yes All surface 1 by 4
NO PATTERN NOTE
PATTERN PATTERN (Horizontal)
1 Yes For off-center 58 Yes All surface 1 by 5
adjustment (Vertical)
2 Yes Main scanning 59 Yes All surface 1 by 5
direction 1 by 5 (Horizontal)
direction 1mm-pitch (Vertical)
direction 3 by 3 (Horizontal)
5 Yes Sub scanning direction 62 Yes All surface 2 by 3
1 by 1 (Vertical)
6 Yes Sub scanning direction 63 Yes All surface 2 by 3
1 by 5 (Horizontal)
7 Yes Sub scanning direction 64 Yes All background
2 by 4
65 Yes Special pattern
8 Yes Sub scanning direction (Vertical)
3 by 3
66 Yes *1 For every other 1 block
9 Yes Right oblique 1 by 2 width 128 pixels/ 32
10 Yes Right oblique 1 by 5 gradations
11 Yes Right oblique 2 by 4 67 Yes *1 For every other 1 block
13 Yes Left oblique 1 by 2 gradations
14 Yes Left oblique 1 by 5 68 Yes *1 For every other 1 block
15 Yes Left oblique 2 by 4 width 128 pixels/ 8
16 Yes Left oblique 3 by 3 gradations
17 Yes Dot 1 by 1 69 Yes 1-dot pattern
18 Yes Dot 3 by 3 70 Yes Print adjustment
19 Yes Dot pattern with scale
(Vertical)
20 Yes Solid black
71 Yes Grid pattern
21 Yes Main scanning
direction 1 by 1 72 Yes Slant line 45 degrees
22 Yes Main scanning 73 Yes Slant line 26.6 degrees
direction 5 by 1 74 Yes Slant line 63.4 degrees
23 Yes Main scanning 75 Yes ID/BG pattern
direction 4 by 2 76 Yes Dot pattern 12.5%
24 Yes Main scanning 77 Yes Dot pattern 28%
direction 3 by 3 78 Yes Dot pattern 50%
25 Yes Sub scanning direction 79 Yes *1 All surface effort
1 by 1 diffusion background
26 Yes Sub scanning direction 80 Yes All surface dither
5 by 1 process background
27 Yes Sub scanning direction 81 Yes For every other 1 block
4 by 2 width 128 pixels/ 32
28 Yes Sub scanning direction gradations
3 by 3 82 Yes For every other 1 block
30 Yes Right oblique 5 by 1 gradations
31 Yes Right oblique 4 by 2 83 Yes For every other 1 block
gradations
33 Yes Left oblique 2 by 1
84 Yes Memory check pattern
85 Yes Cleaning check pattern
86 Yes Offset check pattern
87 Yes Test B image (For
37 Yes Dot 1 by 1
aging)
38 Yes Dot 3 by 3
88 Yes 6% printer chart
39 Yes Dot
89 Yes 5% printer chart
40 Yes Solid white
90 Toner quantity
50 Yes All surface 1 by 1
measuring chart
(Vertical)
91 Radiation chart
98 Various data printing
(Horizontal)
52 Yes All surface 1 by 2 Yes * 1 : Error diffusion process
(Vertical)
53 Yes All surface 1 by 2 SIMULATION 64-1
(Horizontal) SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START.
54 Yes All surface 1 by 3 0. TRAY SELECT :1 1. PRINT START
(Vertical) 2. PRINT PATTERN:87 3. DENSITY :1 1
55 Yes All surface 1 by 3 4. MULTI : 1 5. MODE :1
(Horizontal) 6. LEVEL : 1 7. DUPLEX :1
(Vertical)
2) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
65 (Example) When the bit of 5 is to be changed, enter 5.
The set value of 1/0 is alternatively changed every time when
65-1 the target key is pressed.
Purpose Adjustment 3) After completion of setting of all the bits, press [START] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
play section) detection position. SIMULATION 66-1
Section Operation (Display/Operation key) FAX SOFT SW. SETTING. SELECT 2-120, AND PRESS START.
Operation/Procedure
Touch the four cross marks (+) sequentially. The coordinates of 䋱
pressed positions are set.
When the coordinates setting is completed normally, the display
turns gray. When all the four points are set, the display returns to
the normal state. 66-2
Purpose Data clear
SIMULATION 65-1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX soft switch function
data and to set to the default. (Excluding
the adjustment values.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the destination code with 10-key.
[Destination code]
Japan 0 000 0000 Norway 10000010

65-2
U.S.A. 1 011 0101 Denmark 00110001
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ Australia 0 000 1001 Netherlands 01111011
Check (Display/Print) U.K. 1 011 0100 Italy 01011001
Function (Purpose) Used to check the result of the touch panel France 0 011 1101 Switzerland 10100110
(LCD display) detection position adjust- Germany 0 000 0100 Austria 00001010
ment. Sweden 1 010 0101 Indonesia 01010100
Newzealand 0 111 1110 Thailand 1001001
Section Operation (Display/Operation key)
China 0 010 0110 Malaysia 01101100
Operation/Procedure Singapore 1 001 1100 India 01010011
When the touch panel is touched, the X and Y coordinate values of TW 1 111 1110 Philippines 10001001
the touched point and the coordinate values of the specified point Other1 1 111 1101 Hongkong 01010000
are displayed. The coordinate values set with SIM 65-1 are used as Other2 1 111 1100 Russia 10111000
the reference. Ohter3 1 111 1011 S. Africa 10011111
Finland 0 011 1100
SIMULATION 65-2 400 500 600 The codes other than the above are recognized as Japan.
40
100 200 300
100
3) The confirmation menu of YES/NO of clear is displayed. Select
one.
140
䌘䋺 600
1 YES FAX soft SW is cleared.
180
䌙䋺 200
2 NO Not cleared.
The soft switch (except for the adjustment values) is cleared
according to the destination selected in procedure 1.
66 After the data clear, the machine is automatically reset.
NOTE: When the FAX BOX is not installed, initialization including
66-1
the adjustment value is performed. (The adjustment value
Purpose Setting is stored in the FAX BOX.)
Function (Purpose) Used to change and check the FAX soft
switch functions. (Used to change and
SIMULATION 66-2
check the functions provided for the FAX FAX SOFT SW. CLEAR(WITHOUT ADJUSTMENT VALUE).
soft switches.) INPUT COUNTRY CODE, AND PRESS START.
Section FAX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Operation/Procedure
Setting of soft switches other than SW1 can be changed and
㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇㪇
checked.
1) Enter the soft switch number to be checked or changed with
10-key.
The current set state is displayed.
66-3 1 NOSIGNAL No signal 17 12.0 V33 12.0 V33
2 33.6 V34 26.4 V34 18 14.4 V17 14.4 V17
Purpose Operation test/Check 3 31.2 V34 31.2 V34 19 12.0 V17 12.0 V17
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the FAX 4 28.8 V34 28.8 V34 20 9.6 V17 9.6 V17
PWB memory (read/write). (This adjust- 5 26.4 V34 26.4 V34 21 7.2 V17 7.2 V17
ment is required when the PWB is replaced 6 24.0 V34 24.0 V34 22 9.6 V29 9.6 V29
with a new one.) 7 21.6 V34 21.6 V34 23 7.2 V29 7.2 V29
Section FAX 8 19.2 V34 19.2 V34 24 4.8 V27t 4.8 V27t
9 16.8 V34 16.8 V34 25 2.4 V27t 2.4 V27t
Operation/Procedure
10 14.4 V34 14.4 V34 26 0.3 FLG 0.3 FLG
1) Enter the number corresponding to the memory to be checked 11 12.0 V34 12.0 V34 27 CED 2100 CED 2100
with 10-key. 12 9.6 V34 9.6 V34 28 CNG 1100 CNG 1100
2) Press the [START] key. 13 7.2 V34 7.2 V34 29 0.3 V21 0.3 V21
In the case of All, all memories are checked only once. 14 4.8 V34 4.8 V34 30 ANSam ANSam
15 2.4 V34 2.4 V34 31 RINGER RINGER
Check connection wire list 16 14.4 V33 14.4 V33 32 No RBT No RBT
NO CHECK Not checked yet.
When [SYSTEM SETTING] key is pressed during execution, exe-
CHECKING Checking
cution is stopped.
OK Check complete OK
When a number is entered and [START] key is pressed during exe-
NG Check complete NG
cution, the kind of signal can be changed.
The error address or the data line is displayed individually.
Target memory of check SIMULATION 66-4

MFP SRAM SRAM SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS
MFP FLASH FLASH ROM START.
MFP OP.FLASH 1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 1
MODEM EEPROM 2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34
MODEM SRAM (G/A) 9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34
MODEM SRAM 13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33
MODEM SDRAM 17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t
When “repeat” is selected, the operation is repeated until the result
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100
is “NG” or “[SYSTEM SETTING]” is pressed. 29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31.RINGER 32.No RBT
SIMULATION 66-3
FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK INPUT 1-13, AND PRESS START. 66-5
1. All Memory Device Check (once)
2. MFP SRAM(once) 3. MFP SRAM(repeat)
4. MFP FLASH+ OP.FLASH(once) Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation of data
5. MFP FLASH+ OP>FLASH(repeat) signals in each data output mode of FAX.
6. MODEM EEPROM(once) 7. MODEM EEPROM(repeat) (Used to check the operation of MODEM.)
8. MODEM SRAM(G/A)(once) 9. MODEM SRAM(G/A)(repeat)
An output is sent at the send level set by
10. MODEM SRAM(once) 11. MODEM SRAM(repeat)
the soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed)
12. MODEM SDRAM(once) 13. MODEM SDRAM(repeat)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-4 1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation of data
The output is delivered at the send level set with the soft switch.
signals in each data output mode of FAX.
(Used to check the operation of MODEM. ) 1 NOSIGNAL No signal 17 12.0 V33 12.0 V33
Send level: Max. (Only when FAX is 2 33.6 V34 26.4 V34 18 14.4 V17 14.4 V17
installed) 3 31.2 V34 31.2 V34 19 12.0 V17 12.0 V17
Section FAX 4 28.8 V34 28.8 V34 20 9.6 V17 9.6 V17
Operation/Procedure 5 26.4 V34 26.4 V34 21 7.2 V17 7.2 V17
6 24.0 V34 24.0 V34 22 9.6 V29 9.6 V29
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
7 21.6 V34 21.6 V34 23 7.2 V29 7.2 V29
key.
8 19.2 V34 19.2 V34 24 4.8 V27t 4.8 V27t
9 16.8 V34 16.8 V34 25 2.4 V27t 2.4 V27t
The output is delivered at the max. send level. 10 14.4 V34 14.4 V34 26 0.3 FLG 0.3 FLG
11 12.0 V34 12.0 V34 27 CED 2100 CED 2100
12 9.6 V34 9.6 V34 28 CNG 1100 CNG 1100
13 7.2 V34 7.2 V34 29 0.3 V21 0.3 V21
14 4.8 V34 4.8 V34 30 ANSam ANSam
15 2.4 V34 2.4 V34 31 RINGER RINGER
16 14.4 V33 14.4 V33 32 No RBT No RBT
When [SYSTEM SETTING] key is pressed during execution, exe-
cution is stopped.
When a number is entered and [START] key is pressed during exe-
cution, the kind of signal can be changed.
SIMULATION 66-5 1 NONE Mute 11 MESSAGE9 Message 9
SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS 2 PAUSE Pause sound 12 MESSAGE10 Message 10
START. 3 MESSAGE1 Message 1 13 MESSAGE11 Message 11
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 1 4

5
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
Message 2
Message 3
14
15
MESSAGE12
MESSAGE13
Message 12
Message 13
2.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 11.12.0 V34 12.9.6 V34 6 MESSAGE4 Message 4 16 MESSAGE14 Message 14
13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33 7 MESSAGE5 Message 5 17 MESSAGE15 Message 15
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17 8 MESSAGE6 Message 6 18 ALARM Alarm
21.7.2 V17 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t 9 MESSAGE7 Message 7 19 RINGER Call ring
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 27.CED 2100 28.CNG 1100 10 MESSAGE8 Message 8 20 EXT.TEL. External
29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31.RINGER 32.No RBT RINGER TEL ring
When the number is entered during execution, the kind of signal
can be changed.
66-6 When [START] key is pressed, the voice message is sent. When
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, it is stopped.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential pass code.
(Used when the confidential pass code is SIMULATION 66-8
forgotten.) (Only when FAX is installed) MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
Section FAX START.
1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1
Operation/Procedure 4.MESSAGE2 5.MESSAGE3 6.MESSAGE4
1) Enter 1 with 10-key and press [START] key. 7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
2
1 PRINT START Print start 13.MESSAGE11 14.MESSAGE12 15.MESSAGE13
16.MESSAGE14 17.MESSAGE15 18.ALARM
The paper is automatically selected with the size saved in the
19.RINGER 20.EXT.TEL.RINGER
image memory.
SIMULATION 66-6 66-9

PASS CODE PRINT OUT.ȁPRESS START.
1.PRINT START Purpose Operation test/Check
ı Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation of vari-
ous sound signals of FAX. (Used to check
the operation of the sound output IC.) An
66-7 output is sent at the send level set by the
soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed)
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print)
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to print the image memory data
(memory send/receive). (Only when FAX is Operation/Procedure
installed) 1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
Section FAX key.
All image data stored in the image memory are printed. The output is delivered at the send level set with the soft switch.
* The confidential receive data are also printed. 1 NONE Mute 11 MESSAGE9 Message 9
2 PAUSE Pause sound 12 MESSAGE10 Message 10
1 PRINT START Print start
3 MESSAGE1 Message 1 13 MESSAGE11 Message 11
The paper is automatically selected with the size saved in the 4 MESSAGE2 Message 2 14 MESSAGE12 Message 12
image memory. 5 MESSAGE3 Message 3 15 MESSAGE13 Message 13
6 MESSAGE4 Message 4 16 MESSAGE14 Message 14
SIMULATION 66-7 7 MESSAGE5 Message 5 17 MESSAGE15 Message 15
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT. PRESS START. 8 MESSAGE6 Message 6 18 ALARM Alarm
1.PRINT START 9 MESSAGE7 Message 7 19 RINGER Call ring
ı 10 MESSAGE8 Message 8 20 EXT.TEL. External
RINGER TEL ring
66-8 can be changed.
Purpose Operation test/Check When [START] key is pressed, the voice message is sent. When
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation of vari- [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, it is stopped.
ous sound signals of FAX. (Used to check
the operation of the sound output IC.) Send
SIMULATION 66-9
level: Max. (Only when FAX is installed)
MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS
Section FAX START.
Operation/Procedure 1.NONE 2.PAUSE 3.MESSAGE1
4.MESSAGE2 5.MESSAGE3 6.MESSAGE4
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10-
key.
7.MESSAGE5
10.MESSAGE8
8.MESSAGE6
11.MESSAGE9
9.MESSAGE7
12.MESSAGE10
2
2) Press the [START] key. 13.MESSAGE11 14.MESSAGE12 15.MESSAGE13
16.MESSAGE14 17.MESSAGE15 18.ALARM
The output is delivered at the max. level. 19.RINGER 20.EXT.TEL.RINGER
66-10 1 NO SIGNAL No signal 4 00000 00000
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print) 2 11111 11111 5 010101 010101
3 11110 11110 6 00001 00001
Function (Purpose) Used to clear all data of the image memory
(memory send/receive). The confidential When the number is entered during execution, the kind of signal
data are also cleared at the same time. can be changed.
(Only when FAX is installed) When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
Section FAX operation is stopped.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of image memory clear with 10-key.
SIMULATION 66-12
1 YES Image memory clear is executed. 300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS
2 NO Not cleared. START.
2) Press the [START] key. 1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 1

The SRAM image data management table and image data in the 5. 010101 6. 00001
Flash ROM area and HD (except for filing images) are cleared.
66-13
SIMULATION 66-10
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR Purpose Setting
ARE YOU SURE? Function (Purpose) Used to enter (set) the number of FAX dial
1. YES signal output test. (The dial number set by
2. NO 1 this simulation is outputted when the dial
signal output test is made by SIM 66-14 -
66-11 16. ) (Only when FAX is installed)
Purpose Operation test/Check Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation of FAX
G3 mode 300bps. (Used to check the oper- 1) Enter the dial number with 10-key.
ation of MODEM.) Send level: Max. (Only Use 10-key, [*] key, and [#] key to enter the number. The upper
when FAX is installed) limit is 20 digits.
Section FAX When [CLEAR] key is pressed, the mode returns to the initial
Operation/Procedure state.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10- 2) Press the [START] key.
key.
2) Press the [START] key. SIMULATION 66-13
The output is delivered at the max. send level. DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9], *:[*], #:[#]
INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START.
1 NO SIGNAL No signal 4 00000 00000 0123456789*#01234567
2 11111 11111 5 010101 010101
3 11110 11110 6 00001 00001
can be changed. 66-14
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the Purpose Setting/Operation test/Check
operation is stopped.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse
dial mode (10pps) and to test the dial signal
SIMULATION 66-11 output. (The dial number signal set by SIM
300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 66-13 is outputted.) Used to check troubles
START. in dialing and to check the operation. (Only
1. NO SIGNAL 2. 11111 3. 11110 4. 00000 when FAX is installed)
5. 010101 6. 00001 1 Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-12
Purpose Operation test/Check The dial signal is outputted.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output operation of FAX (Dial pulse make time setting)
G3 mode 300bps. (Used to check the oper-
ation of MODEM.) An output is send at the
send level set by the soft switch. (Only 2) Press the [START] key.
when FAX is installed) 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section FAX 4) Press the [START] key.
Operation/Procedure 0 EXECUTE Execution
1) Enter the number corresponding to the output mode with 10- 1 MAKE TIME Dial pulse make time setting (0 - 15)
key.
The dial signal is sent with the set value + 29ms.
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
The output is delivered at the send level set with the soft switch. operation is stopped.
1 : '07 Feb 15
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the

SIMULATION 66-14
DIAL TEST(10PPS). SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
0. EXECUTE
SIMULATION 66-16
1. MAKE TIME 7 ; [+29 ms] 1 DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS START.
0. EXECUTE
1. HIGH 7 (dB) 2. HIGH-LOW 7 1
66-15
Purpose Setting/Operation test/Check
66-17
Function (Purpose) Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse
dial mode (20pps) and to test the dial signal Purpose Setting
output. (The dial number signal set by SIM Function (Purpose) Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) out-
66-13 is outputted.) Used to check troubles put in the FAX tone dial mode. Send level:
in dialing and to check the operation. (Only Max. Used to check the operation. (Only
when FAX is installed) when FAX is installed)
Section FAX Section FAX
1) Enter 0 with 10-key. 1) Enter the DTMF signal (1 - 9, 0, *, #) to be sent with 10-key.
The dial signal is outputted. The output is delivered at the max. send level.
(Dial pulse make time setting) When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
1) Enter 1 with 10-key. operation is stopped.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. SIMULATION 66-17
DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) INPUT 0-9, *, #, AND
PRESS START.
0 EXECUTE Execution 1
1 MAKE TIME Dial pulse make time setting (0 - 15)
The dial signal is sent with the set value + 9ms.
When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the 66-18
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) out-
SIMULATION 66-15 put in the FAX tone dial mode. An output is
DIAL TEST(20PPS). SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS START. sent at the send level set by the soft switch.
0. EXECUTE Used to check the operation. (Only when
1. MAKE TIME 7 ; [+9 ms] 1 FAX is installed)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-16 1) Enter the DTMF signal (1 - 9, 0, *, #) to be sent with 10-key.
Purpose Setting/Operation test/Check 2) Press the [START] key.
The signal is sent in the send level set with the soft SW.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the dial signal (DTMF) out-
put in the FAX tone dial mode. (The dial When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
number signal set by SIM 66-13 is output- operation is stopped.
ted.) The send level can be set to an
optional level. Used to check troubles in SIMULATION 66-18
dialing and to check the operation. (Only DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) INPUT 0-9, *, #, AND PRESS
when FAX is installed) START.
Section FAX 1
Operation/Procedure
The dial signal is outputted. Purpose Data transfer
(Dial pulse make time setting) Function (Purpose) Used to back-up the HDD data into the
1) Enter 1 or 2 with 10-key. Flash memory (optional FAX expansion
2) Press the [START] key. memory). (Only when FAX is installed)
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section FAX
1) Select YES/NO of data transfer (backup).
Setting
1 Item
range 1 YES Backup is executed.
0 EXECUTE Execution 2 NO Backup is not executed.
1 HIGH High group level 0 - 15dB
2 HIGH LOW High group - Low group 0 - 15
This function is valid only when the FAX expansion memory is
SIMULATION 66-21
installed. FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
Backup contents 1. REGISTERED 2. MANAGEMENT
3. FILE MANAGEMENT 4. SYSTEM ERROR
• One-touch dial • Item name 5. PROTOCOL
• FTP expansion • File name ı
• Group expansion • FAX receive select table
• Program • IFAX receive YES/NO
• Use index • Polling allow number
• Standard sender • Memory box 66-22
• IFAX sender registration • Sender name
Purpose Setting
• FAX sender registration
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the handset volume. (Only
The other contents are not backed up.
when the FAX is installed.) (Not used)
Section FAX
SIMULATION 66-19 Operation/Procedure
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM)
1) Enter the number corresponding to the volume with 10-key.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO
1
1 MIN Small
2 MIDDLE Medium
3 MAX Large
66-20
Selection of 1, 2, and 3 can be made during execution.
Purpose Data transfer
Function (Purpose) Used to read the back-up data by SIM 66-
19 to the SRAM/HDD. (Only when FAX is SIMULATION 66-22
installed) HANDSET VOLUME SETTING SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START.
Section FAX 1. MIN

Operation/Procedure 2. MIDDLE
3. MAX
2
1) Select YES/NO of data transfer.
1 YES Read/write is executed.

2 NO Read/write is not executed. 66-23
2) Press the [START] key. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to download the FAX program. (Only
when FAX is installed) Not used in the mar-
SIMULATION 66-20 ket. (For development)
ADDRESS DATA BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM)
ARE YOU SURE? Section FAX
1. YES
2. NO
1 Operation/Procedure
1) Turn OFF the power.
2) Remove the protect pin.
3) Turn ON the power.
66-21
4) Enter the SIM 66-23 mode.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print) 5) Press the [START] key.
During execution, "EXECUTING" is displayed. When execu-
Function (Purpose) Used to print information related to FAX
tion is completed normally, "COMPLETED" is displayed.
(various registrations, communication man-
agement, file management, system error If an error occurs, "FAIL" is displayed.
protocol). (Only when FAX is installed) 6) Turn OFF the power, and attach the protect pin.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure SIMULATION 66-23
FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD.
1) Enter the number corresponding to the information (item) to be
EJECT PROTECT PIN, AND PRESS START.
printed with 10-key.
1 REGISTERED Various registration information

2 MANAGEMENT Communication management information
3 FILE MANAGEMENT File management information
4 SYSTEM ERROR System error information
5 PROTOCOL Protocol information
66-24 66-27
Purpose Clear Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST memory data. Function (Purpose) Used to register the transfer number for
Section FAX voice warp. (Only when FAX is installed)
Not used in the market. (For development)
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
1) Select YES/NO of data clear.
Operation/Procedure
1 YES FAST memory data is cleared 1) Enter the voice warp transfer number (1 - 9, 0, *, #) with 10-
2 NO Not cleared. key.
2) Press [START] key. 2) Press [START] key.

FAST MEMORY DATA CLEAR. V-WP TRANSMIT NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9],*:[*],#:[#]
ARE YOU SURE? INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START.
1. YES 0123456789*#01234567
2. NO
66-25 66-28
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register the FAX number for Function (Purpose) Used to record voice messages. (Only
Modem dial-in. (Only when FAX is installed) when FAX is installed.)
Not used in the market. (For development)
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the registration number
1) Enter the Modem dial-in FAX number (1 - 9, 0, *, #) with 10- with 10-key.
key.
2) Use the handset to record a voice message. (Max. 6sec)
3) Onhook the handset. (End)
There are following five kinds of recording.
SIMULATION 66-25
M-D-IN FAX NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9],*:[*],#:[#] 1 MESSAGE1 Recording No. 1
INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START. 2 MESSAGE2 Recording No. 2
0123456789*#01234567 3 MESSAGE3 Recording No. 3
4 MESSAGE4 Recording No. 4
5 MESSAGE5 Recording No. 5
When [SYSTEM SETTING] key is pressed, recording is inter-
rupted.
66-26
Purpose Setting
SIMULATION 66-28
Function (Purpose) Used to register external telephone num- VOICE RECORD. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START.
bers for Modem dial-in. (Only when FAX is 1.MESSAGE1 2.MESSAGE2 3.MESSAGE3
installed) Not used in the market. (For
development)
4.MESSAGE4 5.MESSAGE5
1
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the Modem dial-in FAX number (1 - 9, 0, *, #) with 10- 66-29
key. Purpose Clear
2) Press [START] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear data related to an address
book (one-touch registration, program reg-
istration/expansion, relay memory box reg-
SIMULATION 66-26 istration, each table content).
M-D-IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING. 0-9:[0-9],*:[*],#:[#]
INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START. Section FAX, Network scanner
0123456789*#01234567 Operation/Procedure
1) Select YES/NO of data clear.
1 YES Address book data is cleared.

2 NO Not cleared.
SIMULATION 66-29
ADDRESS DATA CLEAR.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO 1
66-30
66-33
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the change in the TEL/LIU Function (Purpose) Used to check the signal (BUSY TONE/
status.
CNG/CED/FNET/DTMF) detection.
Section FAX Section FAX
The TEL/LIU state is displayed. The detected signal is highlighted.
When the state is changed, it is highlighted.
HS1 Polarity reverse signal SIMULATION 66-33

HS2 Polarity reverse signal SIGNAL DETECT CHECK.
RHS Handset hook SW BUSY TONE CNG CED FNET DTMF
EXHS External telephone hook SW
SIMULATION 66-30
66-34
TEL/LIU SENSOR CHECK. Purpose Operation test/Check
HS1 HS2 RHS EXHS
Function (Purpose) Used to measure the communication time
of test image data.
1
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Communication test is performed to measure the time (ms).
66-31
Send is made under the following conditions.
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the relay operation. Communication Memory send
means
Section FAX
Image quality Normal text
Operation/Procedure
Density Light
1) Enter the number corresponding to the check item with 10-key. ECM ON
2) Press [START] key. Sender record OFF

TEL/LIU SETTING. COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY.
INPUT 0-1, AND PRESS START.
MOVEMENT LEFT:[*] RIGHT:[#] * * * * * ms
1. MPXA 2. CION 3. MR 4. EC
5. S. 6. CML 7. DP 8.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10001100 66-35
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Modem program reloading (Only when FAX
66-32 is installed) Not used in the market. (For
Purpose Operation test/Check development)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the receive data (fixed data) Section FAX
from the line. Operation/Procedure
Section FAX 1) Select YES/NO of Modem program reload.
Operation/Procedure
1 YES Modem block reload is executed.
When check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of an 2 NO Not cleared.
error, "NG" is displayed.
(Display message)
When reload is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of
CHECKING Checking an error, "CHECK SUM" is displayed.
OK Checking completed (OK) The result of Modem reload is displayed.
NG Checking completed (NG)
COMPLETE Reload completed
81 Check sum error
SIMULATION 66-32 82 Write error
RECEIVED DATA CHECK. 83 Delete error
CHECKING···.(OK or NG) 84 Verify error
NG Due to loader NG
SIMULATION 66-35
MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD.
ARE YOU SURE?
1. YES
2. NO 1
66-36
66-42
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check interface between MFPC Function (Purpose) Reloads the PIC program installed to FAX
controller and MDMC. (Check of the data
BOX.
line or the command line)
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the check mode with 10- NOTE: Before processing, permit writing to the FAX PROGRAMA.
(Cancel the write protection)
key.
1) Press [1] key to carry out the writing. Press [2] key to cancel.
1 MFPC ← MDMC Date line once only 2) If the operation is normally completed, "OK" is displayed.
2 MFPC → MDMC Date line once only When the error occurs, "NG" is displayed.
3 MFPC ← MDMC Data line repeat
(Cause of the ERROR)
4 MFPC → MDMC Data line repeat
* State is write-protection.
5 MFPC ← MDMC Command line once only
6 MFPC → MDMC Command line once only * PIC is not mounted.
7 MFPC ← MDMC Command line repeat * Access trouble to PIC
8 MFPC → MDMC Command line repeat
SIMULATION 66-42
When check is completed normally, "OK" is displayed. Incase of an
PIC PROGRAM RELOAD
error, "NG" is displayed. ARE YOU SURE?
When check is "repeat," the operation is continued until the result is 1.YES
2.NO
1
NG or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.
SIMULATION 66-36
66-43
MFPC-MDMC I/F CHECK. INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1. MFPC<-MDMC(DATA once)
2. MFPC->MDMC(DATA once) 1 Function (Purpose) Setting of the PIC adjustment value
3. MFPC<-MDMC(DATA repeat) Section FAX
4. MFPC->MDMC(DATA repeat) Operation/Procedure
5. MFPC<-MDMC(CMD once)
6. MFPC->MDMC(CMD once) NOTE: Before processing, permit writing to the FAX PROGRAMA.
7. MDPC<-MDMC(CMD repeat) (Cancel the write protection)
8. MFPC->MDMC(CMD repeat) 1) Present setting is highlight-displayed on the side of item.
2) Use the numeric keys to enter the adjustment value. Press the
[P] key to memorizes the input value.
66-39 3) Press [1] to writing the adjustment value collectively to PIC that
Purpose Setting installed to the FAX BOX.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the destination specifications. * If the operation is normally completed, "WRITING OK" is dis-
Section FAX played. When the error occurs, "NG" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the destination. SIMULATION 66-43
2) Press [START] key. PIC ADJUSTMENT VALUE WRITING.
ENABLE WRITE PIN (for FAX PROGRAM ROM)
SELECT 0-12 AND PRESS START.
0. WRITING for PIC 1. ci_level_judge 22
1
SIMULATION 66-39
2. ci_cycle_min 10 3. ci_cycle_max 107 4. ci_range 5
FAX DESTINATION SETUP. 5. ci_count 3 6. cidetect 8 7. fnet_level_judge 1
SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START 8. fnet_range 3 9.fnet_time_out 100 10. fnet_count 3
11. poff_time 3 12. mswon_level_judge 3
0. NO DESTINATION 1
1. JAPAN
2. U.S.A./CANADA
3. EUROPE
4. AUSTRALIA
5. CHINA
6. ASIA&OTHERS
66-60
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the ACR data.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the number corresponding to the set item with 10-key.
The item list menu can be switched by pressing [P] key.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
This simulation can be executed when soft SW 24-4 and 24-5 are
set to 1.
Display/Not display is switched by soft SW 24-4 and 24-5.
The digit limitation and characters allowed to be inputted depend
on the input item.
SIMULATION 66-60
ACR SETTING. SELECT NUMBER, AND PRESS START.
SWITCHING OF MENU:[#] 1
1.Local Carrier Number 2.Long-distance Carrier Number
3.Overseas Carrier Number 4.Bypass Number
5.User Area Code 6.Machine Code
7.Version 8.Through Number1
9.Through Number2 10.Through Number3
67
67-16
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the network
card.
Section MFP controller
Operation/Procedure
During check, "CHECKING" is displayed. When check is com-
pleted normally, "OK" is displayed. In case of an error, "NG" is dis-
played.
(Display message)
CHECKING Checking
OK Check end (Normal)
NG Check end (Error)
SIMULATION 67-16
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK.
NIC: CHECKING
MX-M700N
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 5GTXKEG/CPWCN

1. Self diag
Monitors the machine
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- conditions.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, Detects/analyzes
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the the content.
machine to minimize the damage.
A. Function and purpose Warning

1) Securing safety. Trouble/Warning
(The machine is stopped on detection of a trouble.)
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. Trouble
(The machine is stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be The machine is stopped.
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows The content is displayed.
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out.
(This avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a
consumable part.)
Warning A consumable NO
B. Self diag message kinds Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime.
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Trouble YES
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by
the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life Troubleshoot the cause. Replace or supply
expiration, etc.) the consumable part.
Service man Warning of troubles which can be recovered
only by a serviceman.
Repair
(Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Other —
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
Cancel the self-
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
diagnostic message with
consumable part, etc.)
the diagnostics
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
(test commands).
stopped.
Other —
C. Self diag operation Reset
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow

The machine always monitors its own state. Standby state
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
dis-plays the trouble message.
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
nearly expired or is expired.
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD.
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
MX-M700N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operation enable mode
Judgment Copy read Notification
kind of trouble Trouble code FAX Email FAX List
block (including Print to
send receive print print
interrupt) FASThost
(DSPF breakdown) Scanner U5 U1 U1 U1 { { { {
Scanner section breakdowns Scanner L1, L3, U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
(Mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
FAX board breakdown MFP control/ F6, F7 { ✕ { ✕ { { ✕
FAX
FAX power OFF MFP control { ✕ { ✕ { { ✕
Network error MFP control CE { { ✕ { { { ✕
Staple breakdown MFP control F1 (10) U2 { { U2 U2 U2 {
Paper feed tray breakdown PCU F3, U6 (LCC) U3 { { U3 U3 U3 {
(Process control breakdown) PCU F2 (31, 32, 37) U4 { { U4 U4 U4 {
PCU section breakdowns PCU C1, C2, C3, H2, H3, H4, H5, L4 ✕ { { ✕ ✕ ✕ {
(Motor, fusing section, etc.) (excluding L4-30), L8, U2
(90, 91), F2, F4
After-process breakdown PCU F1 U5 { { U5 U5 U5 {
Inserter trouble (excluding PCU F1 (61, 62) U7 { { U7 U7 U7 {
communication trouble)
Laser breakdown PCU E7 (02 only), L6 ✕ { { ✕ ✕ ✕ {
HDD breakdown MFP control E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
CCD breakdowns Scanner E7 (10, 11, 12, 14) U6 U6 U6 { { { {
(Shading, etc.)
CIS breakdowns Scanner E6 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ { { { {
(Shading, etc.)
Scanner communication MFP control E7 (80) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
trouble
PCU communication trouble MFP control E7 (90) { ✕ ✕ { { { {
FAX backup battery voltage MFP control U1 (01, 02) { ✕ ✕ { { { {
fall
HDD registration data sum MFP control U2 (50) { { { { { { {
error
Thermistor trouble (trouble PCU F2 (39, 46, 47, 48) { { { { { { {
history)
(The machine cannot be operated.)
Memory MFP control U2 (00, 11, 12, 22, 23) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {

External communication MFP control U7, PF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
disable (RICA)
Image memory trouble, MFP control E7 (01, 06) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
decode error
Incompatibility check error MFP control/ E7 (50, 55, 56, 57, 60, 65, 66, 67) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ {
PCU
Controller fan motor trouble MFP control L4-30 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
* For FAX communication, refer to the sheet of "(3) Call request and Callin."
* The machine may be operated under some conditions.
U1: When detected except when in a job, the machine can be operated in the OC mode.
U2: Can be operated except in the staple mode.
U3: When detected except in a job, the machine can be operated except with the breakdown tray.
U4: Can be operated with some restriction on the image quality depending on the destination. (Low density print)
* Refer to the process control trouble operation table below.
U5: When detected except in a job, can be operated except in the trouble paper exit section.
U6: When detected except in a job, can be operated in the single surface scan mode.
U7: Can be operated except in the inserter tray, if the error is detected in the standby mode.
* Process control trouble operation table

Troubl
Operation
e Error content
/SEC
code
F2-31 Process control sensor gain adjustment failure Machine stop
F2-32 Mark detection failure Low density
copy
F2-37 Mark sensor gain Machine stop
adjustment failure

• Trouble mode process
The machine can be operated under some conditions.
Operations except for the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the modes which cannot be operated, only setting is enabled and a mes-
sage is given to show the operations are disabled.
(NOT READY in this case)
(Display)
When a trouble occurs, a dialog is shown. In the mode where the operation is enabled, the OK button is added to the message. In the mode
where the operation is disabled, the OK button is not shown and the display is kept until the trouble is canceled.
• Writing to the trouble memory

In case of a same trouble in this machine, selection is made with the simulation to write into the trouble memory or not. If this simulation is
set, any trouble is written into the trouble memory unconditionally.
(SIM. 26-35)
0: A same trouble as the previous one is not written. (Default)
1: Any trouble is written into the trouble memory unconditionally.
(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.

• When the power is turned ON, if H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, PF, L4-31, F3-12/22, or U6 (LCC-related sub code 09 only) is saved, a trouble code is
immediately displayed. E7 (50, 55, 56, 57, 60, 65, 66, 67) trouble is not saved.
MFP controle
Each block
vent manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6 PF trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing check is made in each block.
and data are sent to the MFP control. Communication of trouble status
H3, H4, H5, L4-31, F3-12/22: Saved in the PCU. [Trouble data ID] [Trouble code]
U1: Saved in the MFP control .
U2: Saved in each block.
PF: Saved in the MFP control .
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.
L4-31: Saved in the PCU.
F3-12, 22: Saved in the PCU.
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 sim task
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel

(To the corresponding block) Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5, L4-31 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory is
SIM 15: LCC (U6), Tray 1, 2 (F3-12, 22)
initialized.)
F3-12/22 trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel status is
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel communicated.

2. Trouble code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
C1 00 MC trouble PCU z
CE 00 Another communication error occurs. Network
01 The network card is not installed or broken. Network
02 The specified mail server or the FTP server is not found. Network
03 The specified server suspends response during transmission of Network
images.
04 The entered account name of the FTP server or the password for Network
authentication is invalid.
05 The entered directory of the FTP server is invalid. Network
06 The specified mail server (POP3) is not found. Network
07 The entered account name of the POP3 server or the password for Network
authentication is invalid.
08 The specified mail server (POP3) suspends response. Network
E6 11 CIS shading trouble (White correction) Scanner z
14 CIS communication trouble Scanner z
E7 01 System data trouble MFP control — — — — —
02 Laser trouble PCU z
03 HDD trouble MFP control z
06 Decode error trouble MFP control z
10 CCD shading trouble (Black correction) Scanner z
11 CCD shading trouble (White correction all pixel adjustment) Scanner z
12 CCD shading trouble (White correction center adjustment) Scanner z
14 CCD communication trouble Scanner z
50 LSU connection trouble PCU z
55 Incompatibility check (Engine (PCU) detection) PCU z
60 Controller connection trouble MFP control z
65 Incompatibility check (MFP controller detection) MFP control z
66 Incompatibility check (MFP controller detection) MFP control z
E7 67 Incompatibility check (MFP controller detection) MFP control z
80 Communication trouble between the MFP control and the scanner MFP control z
(MFP control detection)
90 MFP control-PCU communication trouble (MFP control detection) MFP control z
EE EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (Overtoner error) PCU z
EU Auto developer adjustment trouble (Undertoner error) PCU z
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble PCU z
02 Finisher transport motor abnormality PCU z
03 Finisher oscillation motor trouble PCU z
08 Finisher staple shift motor trouble PCU z
09 Finisher load capacity sensor trouble PCU z
10 Finisher/staple motor trouble PCU z
11 Finisher/pusher motor trouble PCU z
15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble PCU z
19 Finisher/alignment motor trouble PCU z
31 Finisher saddle folding sensor trouble PCU z
32 Finisher-saddle communication trouble PCU z
33 Finisher/punch shift motor trouble PCU z
34 Finisher/punch motor trouble PCU z
37 Finisher/ backup RAM trouble PCU z
38 Finisher/punch backup ROM trouble PCU z
41 Finisher/saddle positioning plate motor trouble PCU z
42 Finisher/saddle guide motor trouble PCU z
43 Finisher/saddle alignment motor trouble PCU z
44 Finisher/saddle bottom staple motor trouble PCU z
45 Finisher/saddle front staple motor trouble PCU z
46 Finisher/saddle push motor trouble PCU z
51 Finisher/saddle sensor connector connection trouble PCU z
52 Finisher/micro switch trouble PCU z
60 Finisher-inserter communication trouble PCU z
61 Inserter/EEPROM trouble PCU z
62 Inserter/reverse sensor trouble PCU z
F2 00 Toner control sensor open PCU z
02 Toner supply abnormality PCU z
04 Improper cartridge (Life cycle error, etc.) PCU z
05 CRUM error PCU z
06 CRUM ID error PCU z

Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
F2 31 Process control trouble PCU z
(Photoconductor surface reflection rate abnormality)
32 Process control trouble (Drum marking scan trouble) PCU z
37 Drum marking sensor gain adjustment error PCU z
39 Process thermistor breakdown PCU z
46 Developing thermistor breakdown PCU z
47 Room temperature thermistor breakdown PCU z
48 Developing humidity sensor break down PCU z
F3 12 Machine tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU z
22 Machine tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU z
F4 38 38V voltage trouble PCU z
F6 00 MFP control-FAX communication trouble (MFP control detection) MFP control z
01 FAX expansion Flash memory trouble (MFP control detection) MFP control z
04 FAX modem operation abnormality FAX z
20 FAX write protect cancel FAX z
21 Abnormal combination of the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch FAX z
97 FAX-BOX incompatibility trouble FAX z
98 Combination error of the FAX-BOX destination information and the FAX z
machine destination information
F7 01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error FAX z
F9 02 PRT centro port check error MFP control z
H2 00 Thermistor open/Fusing unit not installed (HL1) PCU z
01 Thermistor open/Fusing unit not installed (HL2) PCU z
02 Thermistor open/Fusing unit not installed (HL3) PCU z
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (HL1) PCU z
H3 01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (HL2) PCU z
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (HL3) PCU z
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (HL1) PCU z
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (HL2) PCU z
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (HL3) PCU z
H5 01 5-time continuous POD notreached JAM detection PCU z
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble Scanner z
L3 00 Scanner return trouble Scanner z
L4 01 Main motor lock detection PCU z
02 Drum motor lock detection PCU z
03 Fusing motor lock detection PCU z
04 Developing motor lock detection PCU z
06 Transfer belt separation motor trouble detection PCU z
30 Controller fan motor lock detection MFP control z
31 Paper discharging fan trouble MFP control z
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection PCU z
L8 01 No full wave signal PCU z
PF 00 RIC copy inhibit command receive MFP control z
U1 01 FAX battery abnormality MFP control z
02 RTC read error (combined use as FAX, on MFP control PWB) MFP control z
U2 00 EEPROM read/write error (MFP control) MFP control z
11 Counter check sum error (MFP control) MFP control z
12 Adjustment value check sum error (MFP control) MFP control z
22 SRAM memory check sum error (MFP control) MFP control z
23 SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP control z
50 HDD section individual data check sum error (MFP control) MFP control z
80 EEPROM read/write error (Scanner) Scanner z
81 Memory check sum error (Scanner) Scanner z
90 EEPROM read/write error (PCU) PCU z
91 Memory check sum error (PCU) PCU z
U5 30 DSPF tray lift-up trouble Scanner z
31 DSPF tray lift-down trouble Scanner z
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU z
20 LCC communication trouble PCU z
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU z
22 LCC 24V power abnormality addition PCU z
U7 00 RIC communication trouble MFP control z
-- - Auditor NOT READY MFP control

3. Details of trouble code
CE-03 The specified server suspends
C1-00 MC trouble response during transmission of
images.
Details Three successive MHV-T signals are detected
during operation of MHV. Details The specified server suspends response during
Main charger output abnormality (Output open) transmission of images.
A trouble signal is outputted from the high voltage Section
transformer. Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable
Section Engine Check and Check that the network cable is properly
Case 1 Cause The main charger is not installed properly. remedy connected.
The main charger is not assembled properly. Case 2 Cause An error occurs in the SMTP server/ FTP server/
Check and Use SIM 8-2 to check the main charger output. NTS.
remedy Main charger disconnection check Check and Check the SMTP server/ FTP server/ NTS for any
Case 2 Cause The high voltage transformer connector is remedy trouble.
disconnected.
The high voltage harness is disconnected or
broken. CE-04 The entered account name of the FTP
Check and Connection check
remedy
server or the password for authentica-
Case 3 Cause High voltage unit trouble tion is invalid.
Check and Replace the high voltage unit.
remedy Details The entered account name of the FTP server or
the password for authentication is invalid.
Section
CE-00 Another communication error occurs. Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable
Check and Check that the network cable is properly
Details Communication error remedy connected.
Section Case 2 Cause Improper registration of the account name or
Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable improper password registered in the FTP server
Check and Check the connection of the network cable. as the destination
remedy Check and Check the account name or the password
remedy registered in the FTP server as the destination.
CE-01 The network card is not installed or

CE-05 The entered directory of the FTP
broken.
server is invalid.
Details Network card connection trouble
Section Details The entered directory of the FTP server is invalid.
Case 1 Cause The network card is not installed on the controller. Section
Check and Check that the network card is installed on the Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable
remedy controller. Check and Check that the network cable is properly
Case 2 Cause Network card control PWB trouble remedy connected.
Check and 1) Output the NIC Config. Page to check the Case 2 Cause Check for existence of the directory name in the
remedy NIC version. FTP server registered as the destination.
2) Replace the NIC. Check and Check for existence of the directory name in the
remedy FTP server registered as the destination.
CE-02 The specified mail server or the FTP

CE-06 The specified mail server (POP3) is
server is not found.
not found.
Details The specified mail server or the FTP server is not
found. Details The specified mail server (POP3) is not found.
Section POP3 server access error
Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable Section
Check and Check that the network cable is properly Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable
remedy connected. Check and Check connection of the network cable.
Case 2 Cause Network setup trouble remedy
Check and 1) Check that the connected network supports Case 2 Cause Network setup trouble
remedy TCP/IP protocol. Check and 1) Check that the connected network supports
2) Check from the Web Page to confirm that remedy TCP/IP protocol.
the Primary/Secondary E-mail server 2) Check on the Web page that the POP3
address or the FTP server/ Desktop PC server address is correctly set.
address as the destination is properly set. 3) When the above address is described with
3) When the above address is described with the Hostname, check that the DNS server is
the Hostname, check that the DNS server is properly set or not.
properly set or not. Case 3 Cause An error occurs in the POP3 server.
Case 3 Cause An error occurs in the SMTP server/ FTP server/ Check and Check for any error in the POP3 server.
NTS. remedy
Check and Check the SMTP server/ FTP server/ NTS for any
remedy trouble.

CE-07 The entered account name of the E7-01 System data trouble
POP3 server or the password for
authentication is invalid. Details While reading/writing the HDD system area data,
the HDD returns an error response or no response
Details POP3 server authentication check error at all for longer than 30 seconds.
Section Section Controller
Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable Case 1 Cause No HDD is installed on the MFP control PWB.
Check and Check connection of the network cable. Check and Check installation status of the HDD on the MFP
remedy remedy control PWB.
Case 2 Cause Improper account name or password registered in Case 2 Cause HDD does not properly function.
the POP3 server Check and • CHECK connection between the HDD and MFP
Check and Check that the account name or the password remedy control.
remedy registered for the POP3 server is correct. • Perform an HDD read/write test using
SIM 62-2/3.
• Replace HDD.
CE-08 The specified mail server (POP3) Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB abnormality
Check and Replace the MFP control PWB.
suspends response. remedy
Details POP3 server time-out error

Section E7-02 Laser trouble
Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the network cable
Check and Check connection of the network cable. Details The BD signal from the LSU is kept OFF or ON.
remedy When the polygon motor rotation is started and
Case 2 Cause An error occurs in the POP3 server. three successive BDT signals of I/O ASIC are
Check and Check for any error in the POP3 server. detected after forced lighting of laser.
remedy Section Engine
Case 1 Cause The connector to the LSU or the harness in the
LSU is disconnected or broken.
E6-11 CIS shading trouble (White correction) Check and Check for disconnection of the connector to the
remedy LSU.
Details When the power is turned on or when the proper Case 2 Cause The polygon motor does not rotate properly.
gain setup value is not obtained with SIM 63-2 CIS Check and Check that the polygon motor rotated properly or
shading (Retry number: 256 times): remedy not.
CIS white reference plate scan level is abnormal Case 3 Cause The position of the laser home position sensor in
when the lamp is lighted. the LSU is shifted.
Section Scanner Check and Use SIM 61-1 to check the LSU operation.
Case 1 Cause Defective installation of the harness to the CIS unit remedy
CIS unit abnormality Case 4 Cause A proper voltage is not supplied to the power line
Check and CIS unit harness check of the laser.
remedy Check and Replace the LSU unit.
Case 2 Cause Reference white plate dirt remedy
Check and Clean the reference white plate. Case 5 Cause Defective lighting of the laser emitting diode
remedy Check and Check lighting of the laser emitting diode.
Case 3 Cause CIS lighting trouble remedy
Check and Use SIM 5-3 to check the light quantity of CIS. Case 6 Cause PCU PWB abnormality
remedy Check and Replace the MFP control PWB.
Case 4 Cause Scanner PWB abnormality remedy
Check and Scanner PWB check Case 7 Cause MFP control ASIC PWB abnormality
remedy Check and Replace the MFP control PWB.
remedy
E6-14 CIS communication trouble

E7-03 HDD trouble
Details When an error occurs in an access check to the
CIS-ASIC on turning on the power or closing the Details Data abnormality in the HDD file management
DSFP cover. (Retry number: 5 times) area (cluster chain corrupted)
Communication trouble between the scanner The HDD sends an error response or does not
PWB and the CIS-ASIC. (Clock synchronization) respond for 30 sec.
Section Scanner Section Controller
Case 1 Cause Defective installation of the harness to the CIS Case 1 Cause The HDD is not installed properly to the MFP
unit control PWB.
Check and Check the harness connected to the CIS unit. Check and Check installation of the HDD to the MFP control
remedy remedy PWB.
Case 2 Cause CIS unit abnormality Case 2 Cause The HDD of the MFP control PWB does not
Check and CIS unit check operate properly.
remedy Check and Check connection of the harness to the HDD of
Case 3 Cause Scanner PWB abnormality remedy the MFP control PWB. Use SIM 62-2, -3 to check
Check and Scanner PWB check read/write of the HDD.
remedy Replace the HDD.
Case 3 Cause MFP control ASIC PWB abnormality
remedy

E7-06 Decode error trouble E7-12 CCD shading trouble
(White correction center adjustment)
Details A decode error occurs in making an image.
Section Controller Details The CCD white reference plate scan level
Case 1 Cause Garbled data in input from PCI to PM DM trouble abnormality when lighting the copy lamp
Data are garbled in image compression/transfer. When the proper gain setup value is not obtained
Check and Check installation of the PWB. (PCI bus) at turning on the power or CCD shading with SIM
remedy If the job at occurrence is FAX, check installation 63-2. (Retry number 256 times)
of the FAX PWB. Section Scanner
For the other cases, check the MFP control PWB. Case 1 Cause Mirror, lens, reference white plate dirt
Case 2 Cause MFP control ASIC PWB abnormality Check and Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
Check and Replace the HDD. remedy plate
remedy Case 2 Cause Copy lamp lighting abnormality
Check and Check the light quantity and lighting of the copy
remedy lamp. (SIM 5-3)
E7-10 CCD shading trouble Case 3 Cause Defective installation of the flat cable to the CCD
(Black correction) unit.
Improper installation of the CCD unit 3
CCD unit abnormality.
Details CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy
Check and CCD unit check
lamp is turned off.
remedy
When the proper offset setup value is not obtained
Case 4 Cause Scanner PWB abnormality
at turning on the power or CCD shading with SIM
63-2. Check and Scanner PWB check
remedy
Section Controller
Case 1 Cause Defective installation of the flat cable to the CCD
unit
Check and Check installation of the flat cable to the CCD unit.
E7-14 CCD communication trouble
remedy
Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality Details Communication trouble between the scanner
Check and CCD unit check PWB and the CCD-ASIC. (Clock synchronization)
remedy When an error occurs in the access check to the
Case 3 Cause Scanner PWB abnormality CCD-ASIC executed at turning on the power.
Check and Scanner PWB check (Retry number 5 times)
remedy Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Defective installation of the harness connected to
the CCD unit
E7-11 CCD shading trouble Check and Check the harness connected to the CCD unit.
remedy
(White correction all pixel adjustment) Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality
Details The CCD white reference plate scan level remedy
abnormality when lighting the copy lamp Case 3 Cause Scanner PWB abnormality
When the proper gain setup value is not obtained Check and Scanner PWB check
at turning on the power or CCD shading with SIM remedy
63-2. (Retry number 256 times)
Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Mirror, lens, reference white plate dirt E7-50 LSU connection trouble
Check and Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
remedy plate.
Details The LSU connected does not conform to the
Case 2 Cause Copy lamp lighting abnormality
machine specifications.
Check and Check the light quantity and lighting of the copy
When the combination of the pattern of an input
remedy lamp. (SIM 5-3)
port on the PCU and the pattern of a port
Case 3 Cause Defective installation of the flat cable to the CCD connected to the LSU is not proper.
unit
Section Engine
Improper installation of the CCD unit CCD unit
Case 1 Cause LSU connection trouble
abnormality
Check and Check connection between the PCU and the LSU
remedy and the harness.
remedy
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB trouble LSU trouble
Case 4 Cause Scanner PWB abnormality
Check and Check the LSU. Check the PCU.
Check and Scanner PWB check
remedy
remedy
E7-55 Incompatibility check (55ppm)

(Engine (PCU) detection)
Details An error is detected in the internal incompatibility

check in the engine (PCU).
Section Engine (PCU)
Case 1 Cause PCU PWB trouble or a improper PCU PWB has
been installed.
Check and Check the PCU PWB.
remedy

E7-56 Incompatibility check (62ppm) E7-80 Communication trouble between the
(Engine (PCU) detection) MFP control and the scanner
check in the engine (PCU).
Details Communication establishment error/ framing/
Section Engine (PCU) parity/ protocol error.
Case 1 Cause PCU PWB trouble or a improper PCU PWB has Follows the communication protocol
been installed. specifications.
Check and Check the PCU PWB. Communication error, timing abnormality of the
remedy communication data and the communication
signal line.
Section Controller
E7-57 Incompatibility check (70ppm) Case 1 Cause Defective connection of the slave unit PWB
(Engine (PCU) detection) connector.
Defective harness between the slave unit PWB
and the MFP control PWB.
Details Incompatibility check trouble Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin
An error is detected in the internal incompatibility breakage.
check in the engine (PCU). Check and Check connection of the connector between the
Section Engine (PCU) remedy slave unit PWB and the MFP control PWB and the
Case 1 Cause PCU PWB trouble or a improper PCU PWB has harness.
been installed. Check grounding of the machine.
remedy
E7-90 MFP control-PCU communication
trouble (MFP control detection)
E7-60 Controller connection trouble
Details Communication establishment error/ framing/
Details Incompatibility trouble between the controller and parity/ protocol error
the engine Follows the communication protocol
Section Controller specifications.
Case 1 Cause Improper combination of the controller PWB and Communication error, timing abnormality of the
the engine communication data and the communication
Check and Check the MFP controller PWB. signal line
remedy Section Controller
Case 1 Cause Defective connection of the slave unit PWB
connector.
E7-65 Incompatibility check (55ppm) Defective harness between the slave unit PWB
(MFP controller detection) and the MFP control PWB.
Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin
breakage.
Details An error is detected in the internal incompatibility Check and Check connection of the connector between the
check in the MFP control PWB. remedy slave unit PWB and the MFP control PWB and the
Section MFP control PWB harness.
Case 1 Cause MFP control PWB trouble Check grounding of the machine.
Check and Check the MFP control PWB
remedy
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble
(Overtoner error)
(MFP controller detection) Details Described on the toner density control design
sppecifications and the change request.
Details An error is detected in the internal incompatibility When the average of 10 output values of the toner
check in the MFP control PWB. sensor (sampling data) after completion (3 min) of
Section MFP control PWB the auto development adjustment is smaller than
Case 1 Cause MFP control PWB trouble 1.5V.
Check and Check the MFP control PWB Section Engine
remedy Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Charging voltage and developing voltage trouble.
Toner density trouble Developing unit trouble PCU
PWB trouble.
Check and Use SIM 25-2 to perform the automatic developing
(MFP controller detection) remedy adjustment.

check in the MFP control PWB.
Section MFP control PWB
Case 1 Cause MFP control PWB trouble
Check and Check the MFP control PWB
remedy

EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble F1-03 Finisher oscillation motor trouble
(Undertoner error)
Details When opening the oscillation unit, the opening
process is not completed in 1sec.
Details Described on the toner density control design
When closing the oscillation unit, the closing
specifications and the change request.
operation is not completed in 3sec.
When the average of 10 output values of the toner
When the tray lift unit is operating in the dangerous
sensor (sampling data) after completion (3 min) of
area, "Not closed state" of the oscillation unit close
the auto development adjustment is smaller than
sensor is detected.
3.5V.
When controlling the oscillation unit speed, the
Section Engine
encoder input cannot be detected within a specified
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble time.
Charging voltage and developing voltage trouble
Section Finisher
Toner density trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor lock
Developing unit trouble PCU PWB trouble
Motor RPM abnormality
Check and Use SIM 25-2 to perform the automatic developing
Overcurrent to the motor
remedy adjustment.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the motor operation.
remedy
F1-00 Finisher communication trouble
Details An error in the communication line test after F1-08 Finisher staple shift motor trouble
turning on the power or canceling the simulation.
Communication error with the finisher.
Details When the stapler shift motor does not move from
Follows the communication protocol specifications.
the hope position in 4sec when operating the
Communication error, timing abnormality of the
stapler shift motor.
communication data and the communication signal
When the stapler shift motor does not return to the
line
home position in 4sec when operating the stapler
Section Engine
shift motor.
Case 1 Cause Improper connection or disconnection of the
Section Finisher
connector or harness between the machine and
the finisher.
Check and Check the connector and the harness in the
remedy communication line.
Finisher control PWB trouble operation.
Case 2 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the staple shift motor
Control PWB (PCU) trouble.
remedy
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB or the PCU
remedy PWB.
Case 3 Cause Malfunction caused by noises
F1-09 Finisher load capacity sensor trouble
Check and Canceled by turning ON/ OFF the power.
remedy
Details When the received data on performing the sensor
test at turning on the power are outside the
F1-02 Finisher transport motor abnormality specified range.
When the detected data on calculation of the
correction value are outside the specified
Details When opening the shutter unit, the opening range.
process is not completed in 1sec. Section Finisher
When closing the shutter unit, the closing process
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage
is not completed in 1sec.
Harness disconnection
When the tray lift unit is operating in the dangerous
Console finisher control PWB trouble
area, "Not closed state" of the shutter close sensor
Check and Use SIM 3-2 to check the sensor operation.
is detected.
remedy
Section Finisher
F1-10 Finisher/staple motor trouble
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the transport motor Details When the staple unit does not shift from HP within
remedy operation. 0.5sec in staple process.
When a stapler jam is detected and the staple
motor is reversed, the staple motor does not return
to HP in 0.5sec.
Section Finisher
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the staple shift motor
remedy operation.

F1-11 Finisher/pusher motor trouble F1-32 Finisher-saddle communication
trouble
Details When learning the paper exit roller speed, the
process is not completed in 10sec.
Details Communication error between the finisher and the
When controlling the paper exit roller speed, an
saddle
encoder input is not detected in a specified time.
When the motor rotation speed (linear velocity) at
Section Finisher every 200msec falls below the specified level.
Case 1 Cause Motor lock When moving to the home position, the home
Motor RPM abnormality position sensor does not turn on within the
Overcurrent to the motor specified time.
Finisher control PWB trouble When shifting from the home position to the lead
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the pusher motor operation edge, the home position sensor does not turn off
remedy and the paddle solenoid operation, or use SIM 3-2 within the specified time.
to check the oomerang rotations sensor. Section Finisher
connector and the harness between the finisher
F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble and the saddle unit.
Details When operating the tray lift unit, the process is not remedy communication line.
completed in 12sec. Case 2 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
When the tray lift unit is lifting, the tray lift unit upper Control PWB (PCU) trouble
limit sensor ON is detected. Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
When operating the tray lift unit, en encoder input is remedy
not detected in 0.2sec. Case 3 Cause Malfunction caused by noises
Section Finisher Check and Canceled by turning ON/ OFF the power.
Case 1 Cause Motor lock remedy
Finisher control PWB trouble F1-33 Finisher/punch shift motor trouble
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the elevator motor operation.
remedy
Details When operating the punch shift motor, it does not
move from the home position in 4sec.
When operating the punch shift motor, it does not
F1-19 Finisher/alignment motor trouble return to the home position in 4sec.
Section Finisher
Details When operating the alignment motor, it does not Case 1 Cause Motor lock
move from the home position in 2sec. Motor RPM abnormality
When operating the alignment motor, it does not Overcurrent to the motor
return to the home position in 2sec. Finisher control PWB trouble
Section Finisher Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the motor operation.
Case 1 Cause Motor lock remedy
Finisher control PWB trouble F1-34 Finisher/punch motor trouble
Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the motor operation.
remedy
Details When learning the punch unit, it does not complete
normally and does not return to the home position.
When executing punching, it does not shift from the
F1-31 Finisher saddle folding sensor trouble home position in 0.2sec, or it overruns to go into
non-HP state.
Details When the motor rotation speed (linear velocity) at When operating the punch unit, the encoder input
every 200msec falls below the specified level. cannot be detected within 0.1sec.
When moving to the home position, the home Section Finisher
position sensor does not turn on within the Case 1 Cause Motor lock
specified time. Motor RPM abnormality
When shifting from the home position to the lead Overcurrent to the motor
edge, the home position sensor does not turn off Finisher control PWB trouble
within the specified time. Check and Use SIM 3-3 to check the motor operation.
Section Finisher remedy
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage
Harness disconnection
Console finisher control PWB trouble F1-37 Finisher/ backup RAM trouble
Check and Use SIM 3-2 to check the sensor operation.
remedy
Details When backup RAM data check sum is NG when
turning on the power.
Section Finisher
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Malfunction caused by noises
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy

F1-38 Finisher/punch backup ROM trouble F1-45 Finisher/saddle front staple motor
trouble
Details Punch unit backup RAM data are garbled.
Section Finisher Details The home position sensor does not turn off within
Case 1 Cause Punch control PWB trouble the specified time after normal starting of the
Malfunction caused by noises motor.
Check and Replace the punch control PWB. The home positions sensor does not turn on within
remedy the specified time after reverse starting of the
motor in recovery.
Section Finisher
F1-41 Finisher/saddle positioning plate Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
motor trouble Malfunction caused by noises
remedy
Details The positioning motor HP sensor does not turn on
within 1.33sec after starting the motor.
The positioning motor HP sensor does not turn off
within 1sec after starting the motor.
F1-46 Finisher/saddle push motor trouble
Section Finisher
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble Details When moving to the home position, the home
Malfunction caused by noises position sensor does not turn on within the
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. specified time.
remedy The push lead edge sensor does not turn on within
the specified time after shifting from the home
position.
When shifting from the home position to the lead
F1-42 Finisher/saddle guide motor trouble edge, the home position sensor does not turn off
within the specified time.
Details The lead edge sensor does not turn off within the
It does not return to the home position within the specified time when shifting from the lead edge
specified time from starting the guide motor. position to the home position.
The HP sensor does not turn off within the The motor RPM at every 50msec falls below the
specified time when shifting from the home specified level.
position to the specified position. The lead edge sensor does not turn on within the
Section Finisher specified time when shifting from the home
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble position to the lead edge position.
Malfunction caused by noises Section Finisher
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
remedy Malfunction caused by noises
Cause Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy
F1-43 Finisher/saddle alignment motor

trouble F1-51 Finisher/saddle sensor connector
connection trouble
Details When shifting to the home position, the home
position sensor does not turn on. Details The connector connection detection input of the
The HP sensor does not turn off within the guide HP sensor is off.
specified time when shifting from the home The connector connection detection input of the
position to the specified position. push lead edge sensor is off.
Section Finisher Section Finisher
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Malfunction caused by noises Malfunction caused by noises
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy remedy
F1-44 Finisher/saddle bottom staple motor F1-52 Finisher/micro switch trouble

trouble
Details With all cover PI (photo sensor) ON, the transport
cover MS is off fort 1sec continuously from starting
Details The home position sensor does not turn off within
copying.
the specified time after normal starting of the
With all cover PI (photo sensor) ON, the front
motor.
The home positions sensor does not turn on within
copying.
the specified time after reverse starting of the
With all cover PI (photo sensor) ON, the paper exit
motor in recovery.
Section Finisher copying.
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble Section Finisher
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. Malfunction caused by noises
remedy
remedy

F1-60 Finisher-inserter communication F2-02 Toner supply abnormality
trouble
Details Toner remains in the toner bottle when undertoner
is detected by the toner concentration sensor in
Details Finisher/inserter communication trouble
the developing unit.
Section Inserter
Section Engine
Case 1 Cause Toner concentration sensor trouble.
connector and the harness between the finisher
Toner remaining quantity sensor trouble.
and the inserter unit
Connector harness trouble for the above sensors.
Check and Check connector of hopper unit toner motor (TM1)
remedy communication line.
remedy Check connector of toner bottle toner motor (TM2)
Case 2 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector harnesses to
the main PWB.
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. Check broken harness for above connections.
remedy Check output of the toner concentration sensor
Case 3 Cause Malfunction caused by noises (SIM25-1).
Check and Canceled by turning ON/ OFF the power. Check output of the toner remaining quantity
remedy sensor (SIM10-2).
F1-61 Inserter/EEPROM trouble F2-04 Improper cartridge

(Life cycle error, etc.)
Details Data read failure on turning on the power
Section Inserter
Details An improper toner bottle is inserted.
CRUM (IC chip trouble)
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
Section Engine
Control circuit runaway due to noises
Case 1 Cause IC chip trouble Improper cartridge
Check and Check that the EEPROM is properly installed.
Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
remedy Replace the inserter PWB.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Inserter PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and Replace the inserter PWB.
remedy
F2-05 CRUM error
F1-62 Inserter/reverse sensor trouble Details Communication with the IC chip cannot be made.
Data write failure to the CRUM or data read failure
from the CRUM occurs 3 times continuously
Details Auto adjustment failure on turning on the power except for toner cartridge installation detection.
Section Inserter Section Engine
Case 1 Cause Harness disconnection. Case 1 Cause IC chip trouble
Inserter PWB trouble. Improper cartridge
Check and Use SIM 3-2 to check the sensor operation. Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
remedy remedy
F2-00 Toner control sensor open F2-06 CRUM ID error

Details When the toner sensor output value is detected as Details IC chip trouble
smaller than 0.5V or greater than 4.5V for 3 times
Section Engine
continuously at every 500ms after completion of
Case 1 Cause Improper cartridge
the auto development adjustment.
Check and Insert a proper cartridge.
Section Engine
remedy
Case 1 Cause Connector harness trouble
Connector not connected.
Check and Check connection of the toner control sensor.
remedy Check connection of the connector harness to the
F2-31 Process control trouble
main PWB. (Photoconductor surface reflection
Check for disconnection of the harness. rate abnormality)
Details Before starting process control, the drum surface

is read by the image density sensor to make the
sensor gain adjustment so that the output is fixed
to a certain level.
Though the sensor gain is changed, the output is
not fixed to a certain level.
Section Engine
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble
Check and Use SIM 44-02 to perform the process control
remedy sensor gain adjustment.

F2-32 Process control trouble F2-46 Developing thermistor breakdown
(Drum marking scan trouble)
Details When the input value of the process thermistor is
detected as 244 or greater or 20 or smaller for 3
Details The drum marking size, density, or the number of
times continuously
units is improper.
Section Engine
Section Engine
Case 1 Cause Developing thermistor harness connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Drum marking sensor trouble
Check and Check connection of the connector and the
Check and Use SIM 44-02 to perform the process control
remedy harness of the developing thermistor.
remedy sensor gain adjustment.
Case 2 Cause Developing thermistor harness trouble
Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the
PCU PWB and the drum marking sensor Check and Check the developing thermistor
remedy
Check and If "Error" is displayed, it may be considered as a
remedy breakdown. Check the sensor and the harness. Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Case 3 Cause The drum marking sensor is dirty. Check and Check the PCU PWB.
OPC drum cleaning trouble remedy
Check and If the adjustment is completed, check the drum
remedy surface conditions.
F2-47 Room temperature thermistor
breakdown
F2-37 Drum marking sensor gain adjustment
error Details When the input value of the process thermistor is
detected as 235 or greater or 22 or smaller for 3
times continuously.
Details Before starting process control, the drum marking
area surface is read by the sensor to make the Section Engine
sensor gain adjustment so that the output is fixed Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the room temperature
to a certain level. Though the sensor gain is thermistor harness.
changed, the output is not fixed to a certain level. Check and Check connection of the connector and the
Section Engine remedy harness of the process thermistor.
Case 1 Cause Drum marking sensor trouble Case 2 Cause Room temperature thermistor trouble
Check and Use SIM 44-02 to perform the process control Check and Check the room temperature thermistor.
remedy sensor gain adjustment. remedy
Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB and the drum marking sensor Check and Check the PCU PWB.
Check and If "Error" is displayed, it may be considered as a remedy
remedy breakdown.
Check the sensor and the harness.
Case 3 Cause The drum marking sensor is dirty. F2-48 Developing humidity sensor break
OPC drum cleaning trouble down
Check and If the adjustment is completed, check the drum
remedy surface conditions.
Details When the output value of the development
humidity sensor is detected as 38 or smaller or
255 or greater.
F2-39 Process thermistor breakdown The output value is the average value of 5
sampling data in the interval of 100ms.
Details When the input value of the process thermistor is Section Engine
detected as 235 or greater or 22 or smaller for 3 Case 1 Cause Developing humidity sensor harness connection
times continuously. trouble
Section Engine Check and Check connection of the connector and the
Case 1 Cause Improper connection of the process thermistor remedy harness of the developing humidity sensor.
harness. Case 2 Cause Developing humidity sensor trouble
Check and Check connection of the connector and the Check and Check the developing humidity sensor
remedy harness of the process thermistor. remedy
Case 2 Cause Process thermistor trouble Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Check and Check the process thermistor. Check and Check the PCU PWB.
remedy remedy
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
remedy

F3-12 Machine tray 1 lift-up trouble F3-42 Machine tray 4 lift-up trouble
Details PED does not turn on within the specified time. Details MCPED does not turn on within the specified time.
LUD does not turn on within the specified time. MCLUD does not turn on within the specified time.
The trouble occurs 3 times continuously that the The trouble occurs 3 times continuously that the
upper limit sensor does not turn on by lift-up upper limit sensor does not turn on by lift-up
operation for 21sec when inserting a tray or for operation for 10sec when inserting a tray or for
2sec when printing. 2sec when printing.
For the first and the second times, guide the user For the first and the second times, guide the user
to pull out the tray in case of a tray size error. to pull out the tray in case of a tray size error.
Section Engine Section Engine
Case 1 Cause PED, LUD trouble No. 1 tray lift-up motor trouble Case 1 Cause MCPED, MCLUD trouble No. 4 tray lift-up motor
Improper connection of the harness of the PCU trouble.
PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper feed unit Improper connection of the harness of the PCU
Check and Check the harness and connector of PED and PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper feed unit.
remedy LUD Check and Check the harness and the connector of MCPED
Lift-up trouble unit check. remedy and MCLUD.
Use SIM 15 to cancel the trouble. Lift-up trouble unit check.
F3-22 Machine tray 2 lift-up trouble F4-38 38V voltage trouble
Details MCPED does not turn on within the specified time. Details 38V voltage falls or rises.
MCLUD does not turn on within the specified time. When the 38V MON signal is not turned on in
The trouble occurs 3 times continuously that the 50ms after turning on the INTRP.
upper limit sensor does not turn on by lift-up Section Engine
operation for 21sec when inserting a tray or for Case 1 Cause Improper connection or disconnection of the
2sec when printing. connector and the harness
For the first and the second times, guide the user Check and Check the connector and the harness of the power
to pull out the tray in case of a tray size error. remedy line.
Section Engine Case 2 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause MCPED, MCLUD trouble No. 2 tray lift-up motor Power unit trouble
trouble Check and Check 38V power source in the power unit and the
Improper connection of the harness of the PCU remedy PCU PWB.
PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper feed unit
Check and Check the harness and the connector of MCPED
remedy and MCLUD. F6-00 MFP control-FAX communication
Lift-up trouble unit check. Use SIM 15 to cancel
the trouble. trouble (MFP control detection)
Details The booting sequence by the command line

F3-32 Machine tray 3 lift-up trouble (9600bps, serial) is not completed normally.
Communication establishment error/ framing/
Details MCPED does not turn on within the specified time. parity/protocol error
MCLUD does not turn on within the specified time. Section FAX
The trouble occurs 3 times continuously that the Case 1 Cause Defective connection of the slave unit PWB
upper limit sensor does not turn on by lift-up connector.
operation for 10sec when inserting a tray or for Defective harness between the slave unit PWB
2sec when printing. and the MFP control PWB.
For the first and the second times, guide the user Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin
to pull out the tray in case of a tray size error. breakage.
Section Engine Check and Check connection of the connector between the
Case 1 Cause MCPED, MCLUD trouble No. 3 tray lift-up motor remedy slave unit PWB and the MFP control PWB and the
trouble harness.
Improper connection of the harness of the PCU Case 2 Cause Slave unit ROM trouble/no ROM/ Reversed
PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper feed unit insertion of ROM/ ROM pin breakage
Check and Check the harness and the connector of MCPED Check and Check the ROM on the slave unitPWB.
remedy and MCLUD. remedy
Lift-up trouble unit check
F6-01 FAX Flash memory trouble

Details The flash memory inserted to the

FAX I/F PWB could not be cleared.
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause The flash memory could not be cleared.
Check and FAX image save flash memory check.
remedy Use SIM 66-10 to clear the expansion flash
memory.

F6-04 FAX modem operation abnormality F6-98 Combination error of the FAX-BOX
destination information and the
Details The initializing process of the modem chip in the machine destination information
FAX PWB is not completed normally.
Section FAX
Details When the destination information stored in the
Case 1 Cause SW101 in the FAX PWB tries to perform normal
FAX-BOX EEPROM is compared with that of the
operation on the boot side.
machine, and if the combination is improper, it is
Check and Set SW101 on the FAX PWB to other than the
judged as an error.
remedy boot side, and turn on the power again.
Section FAX
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB modem chip operation trouble
Case 1 Cause Because of improper combination between the
Check and Replace the FAX PWB.
destination information stored in the EEPROM on
remedy
the FAX-BOX PWB and that of the machine
(set with SIM 26-6).
Check and Check the destination of the FAX-BOX.
F6-20 FAX write protect cancel remedy Check the machine destination with SIM 26-6.
Use a proper combination of the machine and the
Details The write protect jumper of the FAX interface FAX-BOX.
PWB is released.
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause The FAX write protect pin is set to Write Enable. F7-01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
Check and Check the write protect pin in the FAX interface
remedy PWB. Details ACK from the EEPROM cannot be checked.
Case 2 Cause FAX interface PWB trouble Section FAX
FAX PWB trouble Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble FAX PWB EEPROM access
Check and Replace the FAX PWB. circuit trouble
remedy Replace the FAX interface PWB. Check and Replace the EEPROM.
remedy Re-setup the soft SW.
F6-21 Abnormal combination of the TEL/LIU

PWB and the FAX soft switch H2-00 Thermistor open/Fusing unit not
installed (HL1)
Details Combination error of TEL/LIU PWB and software
If the destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB Details Thermistor open
differs from that of the FAX soft switch, it is judged (An input voltage of 4.6V or above is detected.)
as an error. Fusing unit not installed
Or when the TEL/LIU PWB is not a new one for a
Section Engine
new MDMC PWB.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble.
Section FAX
Control PWB trouble Improper connection of the
Case 1 Cause The destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB fusing section connector.
differs. AC power trouble.
The FAX PWB information (soft switch) differs. Fusing unit not installed.
Check and Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB. Check and Check the harness and the connector between
remedy Check the FAX PWB information (soft switch). remedy the thermistor and the control PWB.
Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble Use SIM 14 to clear the self diag display.
Check and Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
remedy
Case 3 Cause The TEL/LIU PWB is not a new one. H2-01 Thermistor open/Fusing unit not
Check and Replace the TEL/LIU PWB with a new one.
remedy
installed (HL2)
Details Thermistor open

F6-97 FAX-BOX incompatibility trouble (An input voltage of 4.6V or above is detected.)
Fusing unit not installed
Section Engine
Details The FAX-BOX PWB is not one for the main unit.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble
(FAX detection)
Control PWB trouble Improper. connection of the
If the FAX-BOX modem controller PWB
fusing section connector.
information (hard detection) is not for the main
AC power trouble.
unit, it is judged as an error.
Fusing unit not installed.
Section FAX
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
Case 1 Cause Because the FAX-BOX modem controller PWB
remedy thermistor and the control PWB.
information (hard detection) is not for the main
Use SIM 14 to clear the self diag display.
unit.
Check and Check the FAX-BOX modem controller PWB.
remedy Replace it with a modem controller PWB for the
main unit.

H2-02 Thermistor open/Fusing unit not H3-02 Fusing section high temperature
installed (HL3) trouble (HL3)
Details Thermistor open Details The fusing temperature exceeds 241.5 °C.
(An input voltage of 4.6V or above is detected.) (An input voltage of 1.3V or less is detected.)
Fusing unit not installed When fusing temperature control is started and a
Section Engine temperature of 242 °C is detected 3 times
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble. continuously in sampling of 250 msec interval.
Control PWB trouble. (In the interval of 150ms)
Improper connection of the fusing section Section Engine
connector. Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble
AC power trouble. Control PWB trouble
Fusing unit not installed. Improper connection of the fusing section
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the connector
remedy thermistor and the control PWB. AC power trouble
Use SIM 14 to clear the self diag display. Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check flashing of the heater lamp.
remedy When the lamp flashes normally.
• Check the thermistor and the harness.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature • Check the thermistor input circuit on the control
PWB.
trouble (HL1) When the lamp keeps ON.
• Check the AC PWB and the lamp control circuit
Details The fusing temperature exceeds 241.5 °C. on the control PWB.
(An input voltage of 1.3V or less is detected.) Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble
When fusing temperature control is started and a
temperature of 242 °C is detected 3 times
continuously in sampling of 250 msec interval. H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
(In the interval of 150ms)
trouble (HL1)
Section Engine
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble
Control PWB trouble Details The set temperature is not reached within the
Improper connection of the fusing section specified time (normally 3 min or 5 min in the curl
connector prevention mode) after turning on the power relay.
AC power trouble When the heater lamp is not turned off in 4 min
Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check flashing of the heater lamp. after starting the warm-up operation.
remedy When the lamp flashes normally. When the set value of -40°C is detected for 5 times
• Check the thermistor and the harness. continuously in the specified interval after
• Check the thermistor input circuit on the control completion of the warm-up operation.
PWB. (In the interval of 150ms)
When the lamp keeps ON. Section Engine
• Check the AC PWB and the lamp control circuit Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble
on the control PWB. Heater lamp trouble
Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble Control PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble
AC power trouble
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature Interlock switch
Check and Use SIM 5-2 to check flashing of the heater lamp.
trouble (HL2) remedy When the lamp flashes normally.
Details The fusing temperature exceeds 241.5 °C. • Check the thermistor input circuit on the control
(An input voltage of 1.3V or less is detected.) PWB.
When fusing temperature control is started and a When the lamp does not turn on.
temperature of 242 °C is detected 3 times • Check for
continuously in sampling of 250 msec interval. disconnection of the heater lamp or the
(In the interval of 150ms) thermostat.
Section Engine • Check the interlock switch.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble. • Check the AC PWB and the lamp control circuit
Control PWB trouble. on the control PWB.
Improper connection of the fusing section Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble
connector.
AC power trouble.
• Check the thermistor input circuit on the control
PWB.
When the lamp keeps ON.
• Check the AC PWB and the lamp control circuit
on the control PWB.
Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble

H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H5-01 5-times continuous POD notreached
trouble (HL2) JAM detection
Details The set temperature is not reached within the Details When POD1 not-reached jam is detected 5-times
specified time (normally 3 min or 5 min in the curl continuously.
prevention mode) after turning on the power relay. POD1 jam counter is backed up and used in a
When the heater lamp is not turned off in 4 min print job after turning on the power.
after starting the warm-up operation. The counter is cleared when POD1 jam does not
When the set value of -40°C is detected for 5 occur in a job or when the trouble is canceled.
times continuously in the specified interval after Section Engine
completion of the warm-up operation. Case 1 Cause The fusing jam is not canceled completely.
(In the interval of 150ms) (Jam paper remains.)
Section Engine Check and Check for jam paper in the fusing section.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble remedy (Winding, etc.)
Heater lamp trouble Case 2 Cause POD1 sensor trouble, or harness connection
Control PWB trouble trouble
Thermostat trouble Check and Check the PODC1 sensor harness and installation
AC power trouble remedy of the fusing unit.
Interlock switch
Case 3 Cause Fusing unit installation trouble
Check and Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble
remedy
• Check the thermistor input circuit on the control
PWB.
When the lamp does not turn on.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
• Check for
disconnection of the heater lamp or the Details Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
thermostat. time.
• Check the interlock switch. When MHP Soft is not detected within 2 sec after
• Check the AC PWB and the lamp control circuit shifting the mirror base unit in the feeding
on the control PWB. direction.
Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Scanner unit trouble
The scanner wire is disconnected.
H4-02 Fusing section low temperature Check and Use SIM 1-1 to check scanning operation.
trouble (HL3) remedy
Details The set temperature is not reached within the

specified time (normally 3 min or 5 min in the curl
L3-00 Scanner return trouble
prevention mode) after turning on the power relay.
When the heater lamp is not turned off in 4 min Details Scanner return is not completed within the
after starting the warm-up operation. specified time.
When the set value of -40°C is detected for 5 MHPSon is not detected within 10sec after starting
times continuously in the specified interval after the mirror base unit in the return direction.
completion of the warm-up operation. Section Scanner
(In the interval of 150ms) Case 1 Cause Scanner unit trouble
Section Engine The scanner wire is disconnected.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble Check and Use SIM 1-1 to check scanning operation.
Heater lamp trouble remedy
Control PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble
AC power trouble L4-01 Main motor lock detection
Interlock switch
remedy When the lamp flashes normally. Details When it is detected for 3 times continuously in the
• Check the thermistor and the harness. interval of 500ms after ignoring the main motor
• Check the thermistor input circuit on the control drive for 600ms.
PWB. Section Engine
When the lamp does not turn on. Case 1 Cause Main motor trouble
• Check for Check and Use SIM 25-1 to check the main motor operation.
disconnection of the heater lamp or the remedy
thermostat. Case 2 Cause Improper disconnection of the harness between
• Check the interlock switch. the PCU PWB and the main motor
• Check the AC PWB and the lamp control circuit Control circuit trouble
on the control PWB.
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
Use SIM 14 to cancel the trouble
remedy PCU PWB and the main motor.

L4-02 Drum motor lock detection L4-30 Controller fan motor lock detection
Details The motor lock signal is detected for 1.5sec during Details The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
rotation of the drum motor. the controller fan motor.
When the motor lock signal is detected for 3 times The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
continuously in the interval of 500ms after 900ms the HDD fan motor.
of rotation start. Section Controller
Section Engine Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble
Case 1 Cause Drum motor trouble Check and Use SIM 6-2 to check the fan motor operation.
Check and Use SIM 25-1 to check the drum motor operation. remedy
remedy Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the
Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the controller PWB and the fan motor.
PCU PWB and the drum motor Control circuit trouble
Control circuit trouble Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
Check and Check the harness and the connector of the PCU remedy controller PWB and the fan motor.
remedy PWB, and the drum motor.
L4-31 Paper discharging fan trouble

L4-03 Fusing motor lock detection
Details When the detected value of the temperature
Details When it is detected for 3 times continuously in the sensor (TH_EX) in the paper exit reverse unit is
interval of 500ms after ignoring the fusing motor greater than the specified level for 2 times
drive start for 600ms. continuously in the interval of 30sec.
Section Engine When 100°C (value of 235) of the paper exit
Case 1 Cause Main motor trouble thermistor is detected for 3 times continuously.
Check and Use SIM 25-1 to check the fusing motor operation. (In the interval of 100ms)
remedy Section Engine
Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble
PCU PWB and the fusing motor Check and Use SIM 6-2 to check the fan motor operation.
Control circuit trouble remedy
Check and Check connection of the harness and the Case 2 Cause PCU PWB, harness connection between fan and
remedy connector between the PCU PWB and the fusing motor trouble
motor. PCU circuit trouble
Thermistor (TH_EX) trouble
Check and Check the PCU PWB, the harness between fan
L4-04 Developing motor lock detection remedy and motor, and the connector.
Details The motor lock signal is detected for 1.5sec

during rotation of the developing motor.
L6-10 Polygon motor lock detection
When the motor lock signal is detected for 3 times
continuously in the interval of 500ms after 900ms Details It is judged that the polygon motor lock signal of
of rotation start. the LSU is not outputted.
Section Engine The polygon motor lock signal is checked in an
Case 1 Cause Developing motor trouble interval of 10sec after starting the polygon motor,
Check and Use SIM 6-1 to check the developing motor and it is found that the olygon motor is not rotating
remedy operation. normally.
Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the Section Engine
PCU PWB and the developing motor. Case 1 Cause Polygon motor trouble
Control circuit trouble. Check and Use SIM 61-1 to check the polygon motor
Check and Check the harness and the connector between remedy operation.
remedy the PCU PWB and the developing motor. Case 2 Cause Disconnection or breakage of the LSU connector
or the harness in the LSU
Check and Check connection of the harness and the
L4-06 Transfer belt separation motor trouble remedy connector.
Replace the LSU.
detection
Details Transfer belt separation motor trouble detection L8-01 No full wave signal
The transfer belt home position sensor ON/OFF is
not detected within the specified time (4 sec)
during operation of the transfer belt (separation, Details The full wave signal is not detected.
contact). When the FWS signal is not varied for 120ms when
supplying the power.
Section Engine
Section Engine
Case 1 Cause Transfer belt separation motor trouble
Case 1 Cause Disconnection or breakage of the PCU
Check and Use SIM 6-1 to check the transfer belt motor
PWB connector or the harness in the power unit
remedy operation.
Check and Check connection of the harness and the
Case 2 Cause Improper connection of the harness between the
remedy connector.
PCU PWB and the transfer belt separation motor.
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB trouble
Control circuit trouble
Check and Check connection of the harness and the Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy connection of the harness between the PCU PWB remedy
and the transfer belt separation motor. Case 3 Cause 12V power source trouble
Check and Replace the power unit.
remedy Replace the controller connection mother board.

PF-00 RIC copy inhibit command receive U2-11 Counter check sum error
(MFP control)
Details The copy inhibit command is received from the RIC
(host). (By PPC communication standards.)
Details EEPROM counter area checksum error.
Section Controller (If this error occurs, the process will retrieve for
Case 1 Cause Judged by the host. effective data within 8 blocks.)
Check and Notification to the host Section Controller
remedy Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
remedy In the simulation to prevent against delete of the
U1-01 FAX battery abnormality counter data/adjustment values, write down the
counter/adjustment values.
Details FAX backup SRAM battery voltage fall. Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises
When the battery capacity is less than the Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
threshold value (fixed by the hardware), remedy
it is judged as an error. Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
(Insufficient capacity of the SRAM backup battery) Check and Replace the MFP control PWB.
Section FAX remedy
Case 1 Cause Battery life
Check and Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or
remedy above. U2-12 Adjustment value check sum error
Case 2 Cause Battery circuit trouble (MFP control)
Check and Check the battery circuit.
remedy
Details EEPROM counter area checksum error
(If this error occurs, the process will retrieve for
effective data within 8 blocks.)
U1-02 RTC read error (combined use as FAX,
Section Controller
on MFP control PWB) Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
Details The read value from the RTC on the MFP control remedy In the simulation to prevent against delete of the
PWB is abnormal such as "EE"h. counter data/adjustment values, write down the
Section Controller counter/adjustment values.
Case 1 Cause RTC circuit trouble Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises
Check and Make the time setup again with the key operation Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
remedy and check that the time advances normally. remedy
Check the RTC circuit. Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Case 2 Cause Battery voltage fall Check and Replace the MFP control PWB.
Check and Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or remedy
remedy above.
Case 3 Cause Battery circuit trouble
Check and Check the battery circuit. U2-22 SRAM memory check sum error
remedy (MFP control)
Details SRAM check sum error when turning on the power.

U2-00 EEPROM read/write error (If this error occurs, initialize the one-touch dial and
(MFP control) the FAX soft switches.)
Section Controller
Details EEPROM write error (without retry) Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble
EEPROM magic number error. Check and Initialize the communication management table
Section Controller remedy registered in the SRAM and the FAX soft switch.
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble Since the registered data are deleted, register the
data again.
remedy In the simulation to prevent against delete of the Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises
counter data/adjustment values, write down the Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
counter/adjustment values. remedy
Case 2 Cause Insertion of EEPROM which is not initialized Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Check and Replace the MFP control PWB.
remedy remedy
Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB
EEPROM access circuit trouble
remedy

U2-23 SRAM memory individual data check U2-81 Memory check sum error (Scanner)
sum error
Details When counter data sum error is detected.
Details Check sum error for every individual data in SRAM Section Scanner
of the MFPC section when turning on the power Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
(If this error occurs, initialize the data related to the Check and Check that the EEPROM is properly installed.
check sum error. (Communication management remedy In the simulation to prevent against delete of the
table, sender's information, etc.)) counter data/adjustment values, write down the
Section Controller counter/adjustment values.
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises
Check and Automatically initialize the data related to the check Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
remedy sum error by turning OFF/ON the power. remedy
Since the registered data are deleted, register the Case 3 Cause Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
data again. Check and Replace the scanner PWB.
Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises remedy
Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
remedy
Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble U2-90 EEPROM read/write error (PCU)
remedy Details EEPROM communication trouble
(NACK detection)
Retry 3 times
U2-50 HDD section individual data check Section Engine
sum error (MFP control) Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
Details Check sum error for every individual data in HDD
counter data/adjustment values, write down the
of the MFPC section when turning on the power
(If this error occurs, initialize the data related to the
check sum error. (One-touch, group, program, Case 2 Cause Insertion of EEPROM which is not initialized
etc.)) Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Section Controller remedy
Case 1 Cause HDD write/read error Case 3 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and Automatically initialize the data related to the Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy check sum error by turning OFF/ON the power. remedy
Since the registered data are deleted, register the
data again.
Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises U2-91 Memory check sum error (PCU)
remedy Details When POF data/counter data sum error is
Case 3 Cause MFP control PWB HDD access circuit trouble detected.
Check and Replace the HDD. Section Engine
remedy Replace the MFP control PWB. Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
U2-80 EEPROM read/write error (Scanner) counter data/adjustment values, write down the
Details EEPROM communication trouble (NACK Case 2 Cause Control circuit runaway due to noises
detection) Retry 3 times Check and Use SIM 16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Section Scanner remedy
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble Case 3 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and Check that the EEPROM is properly installed. Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy In the simulation to prevent against delete of the remedy
counter data/adjustment values, write down the
Case 2 Cause Insertion of EEPROM which is not initialized U5-30 DSPF tray lift-up trouble
remedy Details Lift-up trouble is detected 5 times continuously.
Case 3 Cause Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble Section Scanner
Check and Replace the scanner PWB. Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble.
remedy STUD does not turn on within the specified time.
STLD does not turn off within the specified time.
Check and Check the harness and the connector of the STUD
remedy and STLD.
Lift-up trouble unit check

U5-31 DSPF tray lift-down trouble U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality addition
Details STLD does not turn off within the specified time. Details 24V power is not supplied to the LCC.
Section Scanner (The LCC 24V power is not detected for 1 sec or
Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble. longer after 1 sec from power on)
STUD does not turn on within the specified time. Section LCC
STLD does not turn off within the specified time. Case 1 Cause Improper connection or disconnection of the
Check and Check the harness and the connector of the STUD connector and the harness.
remedy and STLD. Check and Check the connector and the harness of the power
Lift-up trouble unit check remedy line.
Case 2 Cause LCC control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble Check and Check the 24V power with the power unit and the
remedy LCC control PWB.
Details • The upper limit sensor is not turned on within
24sec from starting the liftup motor.
• The encoder input is not made within 0.2sec U7-00 RIC communication trouble
during rotation of the liftup motor. The upper
limit SW is turned on during rotation of the liftup Details Communication error with RIC
motor. When the above trouble occurs for 3 (By PPC communication standards)
times continuously. An error in the communication line test after
• For the first time and the second time, it is a tray turning on the power or canceling the simulation
size error and the user pulls the tray. Section Controller
When the trouble occurs 3 time continuously that
the upper limit sensor does not turn on.
connector and the harness.
Section LCC RIC control PWB trouble.
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble Control PWB (MFP control) trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble. Malfunction caused by noises.
Gear breakage. Check and Canceled by turning ON/OFF the power.
Lift motor trouble. remedy Check the connector and the harness in the
Check and Use SIM to check the sensor detection. communication line.
remedy Use SIM to check the lift motor operation.
Use SIM 15 to cancel the trouble.
U6-20 LCC communication trouble
Details Communication trouble with the LCC.

Follows the communication protocol
specifications.
Communication error, timing abnormality of the
communication data and the communication
signal line
Section Engine
connector and the harness.
Desk control PWB trouble
Check and Canceled by turning ON/OFF the power.
remedy Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble
Details The lock detection signal is detected continuously

for 1sec after delay of 1sec from start of the motor.
When the motor lock detection signal is continued
for 1sec after 1sec delay from starting the motor.
For the first time, it is regarded as a Jam and the
machine is stopped. When two errors are
continued, it is regarded as a trouble.
Section LCC
Desk control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM 4-3 to check the transport motor
remedy operation.

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-M700N 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Maintenance system table

✕ : Check {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift position
(Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.)
250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 Remark/Refer to the
55ppm (PM: 250K)
K K K K K K K K Parts Guide.
When
Block/Item No.
calling
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 (Only the replacement
62ppm/70ppm (PM: 300K)
K K K K K K K K parts are described.)
Unit name No. Part name

Drum peripheral 1 Drum ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
section 2 Cleaning blade ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Maximum 1 year use
(P/G No.: [43]-5)
3 Cleaning brush roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [43]-29)
4 Toner reception seal ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [43]-11)
5 Side seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [43]-33, [43]-35)
6 Drum separation pawl ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [42]-33)
7 Sawtooth { ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [39]-7)
8 Screen grid ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [39]-1)
Transfer section 1 Transfer drum gear ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [45]-25)
2 Transfer belt { ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [45]-50)
3 Transfer roller ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [45]-47)
4 Transfer roller collar ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [45]-48)
5 Shaft (Conductive grease) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ UKOG-0012QSZZ
6 Paper guide { { { { { { { { {
Developing section 1 Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Supply when installing
2 DV seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [37]-5)
3 MG holder F/R { { { { { { { { {
4 DV side seal F ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [36]-14)
5 DV side seal R ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [36]-13)
6 Toner bottle Assembly when installing/
Replacement by user when
empty
7 Toner hopper { { { { { { { { { Clean the shutter area.
Fusing unit 1 Heat roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [48]-3)
2 Pressure roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [46]-24)
3 Sub heat roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [46]-14)
4 Web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-42)
5 Pressure connect roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-44)
6 CL roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-46)
7 CL auxiliary roller bearing ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
8 Cleaning sheet desk ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [46]-23)
9 Heat roller separation pawl ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [48]-9)
10 Pressure roller separation ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-26)
pawl
11 Thermistor (upper/lower) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Paper dust removal is
required.
12 Heat roller gear (Grease) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ UKOG-0235FCZZ
13 Sub heat roller bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [46]-7)
14 CL roller bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-45)
15 Web bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-4)
16 Pressure connect bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-8)
17 Paper guides { { { { { { { { {
18 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
19 Shaft (Grease) ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0235FCZZ
20 Lower CL roller DG2 ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-47)
Filters 1 Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [75]-7)
2 Toner filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [75]-8)
Paper feed section 1 Pickup roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
2 Paper feed roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
3 Separation roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ (Note 1)
5 Shaft (Conductive grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0012QSZZ
MX-M700N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Transport section/ 1 PS follower roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
paper exit reverse 2 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
section/duplex 3 Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { {
section 4 Paper dust clean unit ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive section 1 Gear (Grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0307FCZZ
2 Gear (Grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0299FCZZ
5 Gear (Conductive grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0012QSZZ
6 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Picture relations 1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others 1 Sersors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Reflection sensor { { { { { { { {
(Document scan section)
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Scanner section 1 Mirror { { { { { { { { {
2 Lens { { { { { { { { {
3 Reflector { { { { { { { { {
4 Sersors { { { { { { { { {
5 Table glass { { { { { { { { {
6 Dust-proof glass { { { { { { { { {
7 OC { { { { { { { { {
8 White standard glass { { { { { { { { {
9 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
10 Drive belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11 Drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
12 Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DSPF Paper feed 1 Pickup roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ (Note 1)
5 Resist roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
Transport 6 Transport roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
section 7 Exposure section (CIS unit) ✕ { { { { { { { {
Paper exit 8 Paper exit roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
section
Drive 9 Gears (Grease) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ UKOG-0299FCZZ
section 10 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others 11 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Cleaning is air spraying
(Note 1) Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to each paper feed counter value.
• Paper feed tray 1 and 2: 200K or 1 year
• Manual paper feed/paper feed tray 3 and 4: 100K or 1 year
• DSPF section: 100K or 1 year
• Torque limiter: 800K (400K for manual paper feed section)
* (NOTE) Paper feed section roller life
When servicing, be sure to check the paper feed counters of
each paper tray and replace the rollers as needed.
When cleaning rollers it is advisable to use a wet cotton cloth to
clean the rollers.
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Side Paper feed 1 Paper pickup roller/ ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 2)
LCC separation Paper feed rollers
section 2 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ (Note 2)
Transport 3 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
section 4 Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { {
Drive 5 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Refer to sm for LCC
section 6 Belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others 7 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Saddle Transport 1 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
finisher section 2 Transport paper guides ✕ { { { { { { { {
Punch Drive 3 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Refer to sm for Finisher
unit section 4 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Staple 5 Knurling belt ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 3)
process 6 Paddle ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 3)
section
Others 7 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference:
Replace the unit at 500K
staple.
Stitcher unit (Stapler unit for saddle) Replacement reference:
Replace the unit at 200K
staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference:
Replace the unit at 1000K.
Staple cartridge User replacement at every
5000 pcs.
Stitcher staple cartridge User replacement at every
2000 pcs.
Inserter Paper feed 1 Paper pickup roller/ ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 4)
separation Paper feed rollers
section 2 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ (Note 4)
Transport 3 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
section 4 Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { {
Drive 5 Gears ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Refer to sm for Inserter
section 6 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others 7 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• Paper feed roller related section: 200K or 1 year
• Torque limiter: 800K
(Note 3) Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to the finisher paper exit counter value.
• Knurling belt: 1000K
• Paddle: 1000K
(Note 4) Replacement reference: For replacement, refer to the inserter paper feed port counter value.
• Paper feed roller related section: 150K or 1 year
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

section 2 Cleaning blade ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Maximum 1 year use
(P/G No.: [43]-5)
5 Side seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [43]-33, [43]-35)
6 Drum separation pawl ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [42]-33)
7 Sawtooth { ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [39]-7)
8 Screen grid ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [39]-1)
4
2
5
7 8
B. Transfer section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

6 Paper guide { { { { { { { { {
* When cleaning the transfer belt, do not use alcohol, solvent or water. Use dry cotton cloth only.
1
5
4
5
2 5
3
5
C. Developing section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

2 DV seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [37]-5)
3 MG holder F/R { { { { { { { { {
6 Toner bottle Assembly when installing/
empty
3
2 7
D. Fusing unit
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

4 Web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-42)
5 Pressure connect roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-44)
6 CL roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-46)
8 Cleaning sheet desk ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [46]-23)
pawl
required.
15 Web bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-4)
16 Pressure connect bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-8)
17 Paper guides { { { { { { { { {
18 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
* When maintenance, replace fusing web roller.
When used without replacement, the picture quality may be damaged because web roller end. [every 300K every 250K]
9 21
14
10 3
10 11
9
1
2
19 21
14
17
11
13
19
11
19
16
12
20
13 15
5
15
6
16
19
E. Scanner section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Scanner section 1 Mirror { { { { { { { { { Dry cotton cloth
2 Lens { { { { { { { { {
3 Reflector { { { { { { { { {
4 Sersors { { { { { { { { {
5 Table glass { { { { { { { { { Recommended cleaner
6 Dust-proof glass { { { { { { { { { Dry cotton cloth
7 OC { { { { { { { { {
9 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
10 Drive belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11 Drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
12 Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
7
1
1
8
10
3
1 11
12
5
9 2
4
11
12
F. DSPF section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

5 Resist roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
section
section 10 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others 11 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Clean with air
1 2 3 4
8 7 5 6 5 6
9
9
9
9 10
10
10
G. Paper feed section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Paper feed section 1 Pickup roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
• Manual paper feed/paper feed tray 3 and 4: 100K or 1 year
• Torque limiter: 800K (400K for manual paper feed section)
1 5
2 5
3
5 5
1
2
3
2
1
4 3
2
1
H. Transport section/paper exit reverse section/duplex section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Transport section/ 1 PS follower roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
paper exit reverse 2 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
section/ 3 Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { {
duplex section 4 Paper dust clean unit ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2
2
5
2 5
5
5
5
1
6 6
2
2
4
2
2 2
2 2 2 2
2 2
2
6
I. Drive section
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Drive section 1 Gear (Grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0307FCZZ
6 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3
2
3
2
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 5
2
1 1
1
2
2
J. Filters
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

1
2
3. Other related items

A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, and inserter, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5
B. Mandatory maintenance and service items

The necessary items for maintenance are shown below. (The items marked with are mandatory items.)
When repairing (replacing consumable parts)/maintenance

After When repairing
When cleaning (without
JOB When Periodic
No. Work item Simulation When replacing the replacement of
No. replacing mainte
installing the OPC scanner consumable
developer nance
drum (read) parts)/inspecting
section
1 - Toner concentration reference control 25-2
level setting
2 - The photoconductor counter is 24-7
cleared.
3 - The photoconductor rotation counter is 24-11
cleared.
4 ADJ9 Copy image quality adjustment (check) 46-2, 9 , 10,
11, 18, 31
5 ADJ10 FAX mode print image quality 46-12, 13, 14,
adjustment (check) 15, 16, 45
6 ADJ11 Scanner mode image quality 46-21, 22, 23,
adjustment (check) 24, 25, 27
• The JOB No. indicates the title number of the adjustment item described in the chapter of the adjustments.
• Refer to the details based on this number according to necessity.
C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing
Item Simulation
The paper jam/trouble data are cleared. 24 1
The use quantity counter of each paper feed section is cleared. 24 2
The numbers of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the inserter, 24 3
the stapler, and the punch are cleared.
The maintenance counter is cleared. 24 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
MX-M700N
[10] ROM VERSION-UP 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. General
A. Version-up target ROM's
The version-up target ROM's are listed in the table below. [Kind of ROM]
The version-up procedures of the firmware of this machine is per-
Section Name Type Capacity Replaceable
formed without disassembling the ROM from the machine. The new
PCU PWB PCU ROM Flash Replaceable
program files are collectively written into the ROM's. Some new 8Mbit
ROM
programs can be written into an optional ROM.
SCN PWB SCN ROM Flash Replaceable
If, however, the above procedure is failed by an accident such as 8Mbit
ROM
power interruption during the version-up procedure, use the ROM MFP CONTROL BOOT ROM Flash 128Mbit Replaceable
copy socket on the MFP control PWB ROM to make version-up of PWB ROM (64Mbit ✕ 2)
each ROM individually. MAIN ROM Flash 64Mbit Replaceable
ROM (32Mbit ✕ 2)
FAX MODEM FAX ROM Flash 8Mbit Replaceable
CONTROL PWB ROM
FINISHER Finisher EPROM Replaceable
–
CONTROL PWB Control ROM
FINISHER Finisher EPROM Replaceable
SS-CONTROL SS-Control –
PWB ROM
INSERTER Inserter EPROM Replaceable
–
CONTROL PWB Control ROM
* All the Flash ROM's can be rewritten. (LAN, USB)
[Block diagram]
䌌䌁䌎䌐䌃
USB
RS-232C
FAX BOX MFP CONTROL PWB SCN PWB

MODEM Program ROM
CONTROL PWB Service Socket
(Flash ROM)
Program ROM
(Flash ROM)
Program ROM
(Flash ROM)
Program ROM
TEL/LIU PWB (Flash ROM)
PCU PWB INSERTER FINISHER

FINISHER
Program ROM
(Flash ROM)
Program ROM CONTROL PWB
(EPROM)
Program ROM
Telephone (EPROM)
Line
FINISHER㵘SS-
LCC CONTROL PWB
Program ROM
(EPROM)
B. ROM version-up is required in the following cases:

ROM version-up is required in the following cases:
1) When improvement of performances is required.
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine.
3) When installing a new spare part PWB unit for repair with the ROM installed.
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be repaired.
MX-M700N ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 1

2. Precautions 3. Necessary items for Flash ROM
A. Relationship between each ROM and version-up
version-up • A machine with ROM to be operated
When performing ROM version-up, be sure to check the combina- • A spare PCU PWB ROM, an MFP control PWB ROM (Boot, Pro-
tion with the version of ROM installed in the other PWB's including gram), a scanner control PWB ROM (Each of which is provided
optional ones. with the program to allow operations.) (Used when writing the
Some combinations of ROM versions may not operate the machine program files into the ROM is failed.)
properly. • A PC operating with either of a USB or Ethernet port.
• USB cable or Ethernet cable. (for connection of PC and MFP
control PWB)
• File2PRN.exe file (A file transfer tool for Ethernet, and USB
protocols)
• USB memory device (Supported format in FAT (12/16) only)
• Version-up program (compression) file
(The SFU file for writing a program to each ROM of the PCU PWB,
the MFP control PWB (boot, program), and the scanner control
PWB, or the SFU file for writing all the programs collectively.)
4. Flash ROM version-up method

A. Version-up procedure 1
Media
Firmware. Adapter
Firmware. +
USB Host
USB Memory
Firmware.
Firmware.sfu
(1) Firmware update from USB memory device 3) Enter the file/folder number of firmware that tries to be updated
First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a USB with 10-key, and press [START] key.
jump drive. If selecting the file, "FIRMWARE UPDATE.. ARE YOU SURE
?" is displayed. ([1]: execute, [2]: get back)
• If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open the
folder.
SIMULATION 49-1
• Secure Jumpdrive will not work.
FIRMWARE UPDATE.. ARE YOU SURE?
• If the USB memory is not inserted, “INSERT A USB MEMORY
FILE1.sfu
DEVICE CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE, PLEASE USE FAT
1. YES
1
(12/16) FORMAT” is displayed.
2. NO
• Non compliant to FAT32. If it's inserted, "CAN NOT SUPPORT
FAT32. PLEASE USE FAT (12/16) FORMAT" is displayed.
1) Insert the USB memory device into the main unit. 4) If the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is dis-
2) Enter the 49-01 screen.Touch the key of the file to be updated. played. When the error occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
The screen transfers to the update screen. (In this screen,
[FILE 1] is selected) NOTE:
* The number of key changes depending on the number of the If the Imager locks up or loses power during the upgrade, it
file in the USB memory device inserted. corrupt the firmware. If this occurs, you can rescue the firm-
ware using the “C. Version-up procedure 3”.
SIMULATION 49-1
FIRMWARE UPDATE. SIMULATION 49-1

SELECT FIRMUP FILE, AND PRESS START.
1. FILE1.sfu
0 FIRMWARE UPDATE.. COMPLETE
FILE1.sfu
2. FILE2.sfu
3. FILE3.sfu
.
.
19. >>NEXT Page

B. Version-up procedure 2 When writing the program files collectively without disassembling
NOTE1: MFP control PWB ROM DIP switch selection and Flash the ROM's from the PWB's, and when writing the program files into
ROM slot an optional ROM:
To make version-up of the ROM, position of the DIP switch should NOTE: The PCU ROM, the FAX ROM, and the scanner control
be below. PWB ROM must be provided with the program to operate.
An empty ROM cannot be used.
Front frame side Rear frame side
1) Connect the PC and the MFP control PWB with a I/F cable.
DIP switch 2) Turn on the PC and the machine.
3) Copy the file transfer tool and ROM program file into the same
Enlarged view of DIP switch
Switch folder of the PC. (When writing with the file transfer tool
File2PRN.exe)
Diag mode Copy the collective ROM programming file and the file transfer
tool File2PRN.exe into the folder you desire on the PC.
Controller write protect
4) The following display is shown after a while from starting the
machine.
Version Check
Controller PWB
CONF: *********
Switch
Diag mode Diag mode Normal mode 5) Press MENU key several time to select an I/F to use from
(Version-up procedure 2) (Version-up procedure 1)
(Version-up procedure 3)
USB, Ethernet.
(Example)
Controller write Write protect cancel mode Write protect mode
protect
When shipping, the setting of controller write protect bit is cancel Firm Update
mode side.
From USB
NOTE 2: Operation panel
When entering the diag mode to write into ROM, some keys on the 6) Press OK key to display the following menu.
operation panel and the LED panel are used. Necessary informa-
tion including menu items and messages is displayed on the LCD
panel. Firm Update
[START] key is used as [OK] key, [DOCUMENT FILING] key and
Waiting Data
[FAX/IMAGE SEND] key as up/down select keys, [JOB STATUS]
key as [MENU] key, and [CLEAR] key as [BACK] key.
7) Transfer the program data from PC to the machine via either of
Up/Down key BACK key
USB or Ethernet.
8) When transferring with the file transfer tool File2PRN.exe
Start File2PRN.exe on the PC. Use this program to transfer the
ROM program data from the PC to the main unit.
LCD panel
(Procedure)
a) Start File2PRN.exe.
MENU key OK key
1) When performing version-up of the firmware by using the file

transfer tool (File1PRN), the printer driver of the target model
must be installed in advance. C:\desktop\test.sfu
2) When performing version-up of the firmware by using the USB
I/F, take note of the following items.
Since the port for the file transfer tool (File2PRN) differs from
the port for the print mode, if the port for the print mode has
been already made, be careful not to mistake them. If the USB
port for the print mode has been made, it is advisable to delete b) Click Reference button and select a ROM program to
it in order to avoid confusion. transfer.
(Making procedures of the port for the file transfer tool (File2PRN) Select the target machine's port form Select Printer pull
in the USB I/F mode) down list.
When performing version-up of the firmware by using the USB I/F, c) Click Send button.
perform the following procedures to make the port in advance.
d) The LED blinks and the LCD displays appropriate infor-
1) Install the printer driver of the target model. mation as operation proceeds.
In this case, set the port to other than the USB mode.
* When version-up of each ROM of the scanner control PWB
2) Set the DIP switch to the Flash ROM version-up mode, and is performed, the backlight of the display is turned off. This
turn on the power. does not mean a trouble. Wait for a while.
3) Connect the PC and the main unit with a USB cable.
4) The PC detects the new hardware by Plug & Play function.

9) When "Result: OK" is displayed after a few minutes, press Up/ 6) Press MENU key a few times to show the following display.
Down keys to check that there is no display of "Result: NG."
* When writing the program file data collectively to the
machine without the FAX unit installed, "Result : NG" is dis- CN Update
played only to the FAX. This can be neglected.
From USB
Firm Update ***

7) Press OK key to display the following menu.
Writing Data
CN Update
Waiting Data
Firm Update
Waiting Data 8) Transfer the program data from PC to the machine via either of
USB or Ethernet.
9) When transferring with the file transfer tool File2PRN.exe
Start File2PRN.exe on the PC. Use this program to transfer the
Firm Update *** ROM program data from the PC to the main unit.
(Procedure)
Result: OK
a) Start File2PRN.exe.
10) Turn off the machine.

11) Turn on the machine, and use SIM 22-5 to check that each
ROM version is properly upgraded.
C:\desktop\test.sfu
C. Version-up procedure 3
As for the position of the DIP switch, refer to the B. Version-up pro-
cedure 2.
(MFP control PWB ROM slot)
The MFP control PWB ROM is provided with three Flash ROM
slots: CN4, CN5, and CN6.
b) Click Reference button and select a ROM program to
The boot ROM is installed to CN4, and the main ROM is installed to transfer.
CN5. CN6 is an empty slot.
c) Select the target machine's port form Select Printer pull
Use this empty slot of the MFP control PWB, CN6, to copy the down list.
ROM program.
d) Click Send button.
When writing the program into each ROM of the PCU PWB, the
e) The LED blinks and the LCD displays appropriate infor-
FAX PWB, and the scanner control PWB individually by using an
mation as operation proceeds.
empty slot for ROM copy on the MFP control PWB ROM:
10) The LED stops flashing in a few minutes, and "Writing: OK" is
* The program write target ROM installed to the empty slot for
displayed.
ROM copy on the MFP control PWB ROM may be empty.
(No need to have the program data in it. The empty ROM can be
used.) CN Update
1) Install the write target ROM to the empty slot for ROM copy on
the MFP control PWB ROM. Receiving Data
2) Connect the PC and the MFP control PWB with a I/F cable.
3) Turn on the PC and the machine.
4) Copy the file transfer tool and ROM program file into the same
folder of the PC. (When writing with the file transfer tool CN Update ***
File2PRN.exe)
Writing Data
Copy the collective ROM programming file and the file transfer
tool File2PRN.exe into the folder you desire on the PC.
5) The following display is indicated after a while.
11) Press OK key, and the following display is shown.
Version Check
CN Update ***-> CN5
CONF: *********
Writing OK ?

12) "CN5" and the selection menu of slot numbers is displayed. 5. Turning OFF the power during the
Select "CN6" to which the target ROM is inserted to with Up/
Down keys, and press OK key.
version-up procedure
13) The LED flashes and the display is changed in the following If the power is turned OFF during the version-up procedure, normal
sequence. writing of data cannot be assured even though the machine can be
When "Result: OK" is displayed in a few minutes, press Up/ booted again.
Down keys to check that there is no display of "Result: NG.". In such a case, use the spare PCU PWB ROM, the MFP control
PWB ROM (BOOT, PROGRAM), and the scanner control PWB
ROM each of which includes the program to be operated, and per-
CN Update ***-> CN5 form the version-up procedure again.
Replace with the spare PCU, the controller boot, the scanner con-
Writing Data trol PWB ROM, and perform procedure "C. Version-up procedure
3" for the replaced ROM again to write data into it.
6. Version-up procedure flowchart

CN Update ***-> CN5
Result : OK Write the on-board
files collectively. (4.)
14) Turn off the machine.

15) Remove the ROM from the empty slot CN6 for ROM copy on Set again.
the MFP control PWB ROM. YES
16) Install the ROM with the revised version to the PWB. Result: OK?
17) Turn on the machine, and use SIM 22-5 to check that the ROM
NO Update completed
version is normally upgraded.
* Precautions on transferring a ROM program data with the
file transfer tool File2PRN YES
Setting mistake? (6.)
For successful transferring a ROM program data with the file
transfer tool File2PRN, the following conditions should be
NO
met:
• When transferring a ROM program data with the file trans-
fer tool File2PRN, the destination machine must be con- YES
NG is BOOT?
figured as a printer.
• The PC must have an appropriate printer driver installed
and configured with an I/F port to use. NO
D. Countermeasures against "Result: NG” YES

NG is SCAN FAX
Factors of "Result: NG" PCU,MAIN?
The following cases may be factors of "Result: NG."
NO
* The DIP switch for write protect is not set properly.
* The FAX cable is not connected. (NG for FAX)
* ROM defect (Very rare case)

NO YES
Booted normally?
Write the on-board files

Remove the BOOT Flash ROM and collectively. (4.)
replace it with a spare one. (If there is
any NG Flash ROM, replace it, too.)
YES
Result: OK?
Write with an empty

socket. (5.) Update completed
NO
YES
Result: OK?
NO Update completed
If the Flash ROM itself is

defective, replace it with a
new one and try again.
NO YES
Booted normally?

Remove the Flash ROM
collectively. (4.)
and replace it with a
spare.
YES
Result: OK?
Write with the empty socket.

Update completed
(6.) NO
YES
Result: OK?
NO Update completed


collectively. (4.)
YES
Result: OK?
Update completed NO


SCANNER ENGINE 1
PAPER FEED un 1 MANUAL PAPER FEED un TRM
OP PANEL un
MX-M700N
DSW-R VPM
M1PUS M1PED LEFT DOOR un DELIVERY un
LCD LVDS PWB OPE PWB ORSPD MPLD1
BACK LIGHT BUZZER M1LUD M1PFD POM1
CCDPWB MPLD2 ADUM2
DRIVER
TOUCH INV PWB PAPER FEED un 2 MTOP1 ADUM1 PWB POM2
PANEL CL
M2PUS M2PED MTOP2 DSW-L POD1
STMP MPFPWS APPD1 POD2
M2LUD M2PFD
(OPTION)
1. Block diagram
MPFC APPD2 POD3

DSPF un M1PFC PFD2
MFPUS FM-U1
A. Overall block diagram
FM-CTL M1LUM THPS2

CISun CIScnt SCN JNT PWB MPED FM-U3
PWB FM-HDD M1PWS MPFGS TURM
HVRPWB FM-U4
SPFM M1SS PWB MPFD1 INTPWB
COIN VENDER AI NPD TH-EX
M1SPD MPFD2
SLUM (OPTION) DSWD FM-E1
SPSM LPPD
M2PFC DGS FM-E2
SCNcnt PNC MOTHER
SPFC M2LUM
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
PWB PWB MPRD1 TBPWB FM-E3

AUDITOR M2SS PWB MPRD2
SPED1 (OPTION) FM-BL
M2SPD HPFC FBPWB
FM-U2
SCOV MFP CONTROL HPLS
PWB FM-BR
HDD T1PPD
SPPD1 FM-BU
SPF MIM LSU un
STUD PWB
MHPS BD
LD PWB
SPPD2 ORSLED FUSING un PGM
DSW-F PCU PWB
STRRC OCSW WEBM FM-R1
PNC
STRRBC WEB_END PROCESS un FM-R2
SPWS SPPD4 T1PFC
HL1 RTH1 PCS T1PUS FM-R3
STRC SPLS2 SPPD3
HL2 RTH2 DMS T1LUM INTPWB
STRBC T1SPD TM2 TH-RA

SPLS1 SPED2 DL
MX-M700N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 1

HL3 RTH3 HV
PSPS T1S PWB
SRRC STLD
SOCD INTPWB TLS
DM
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
TH-CL T2PFC
SRRBC MSW SUB P/S PWB HUS-TC
SPOD SPFFAN PS un DVM
T2PUS
MRSW PSBC T2LUM TANSET FUM
DC/PS1 PPD DSWDSK MM
AC PWB T2SPD
Standard : JPN DEVELOPER un DSKPFC1
OPTION : EX100/EX200 T2S PWB FM-DV
WH-SW FM-DC1 TCS DSKPFC2 RRC
WH-SCN1
HUS-DV
Standard : JPN FM-DC2
OPTION : EX100/EX200 HOPPER un (OPTION)
TFSD LCC
WH PWB
(OPTION)
FAX PWB TM1 WH-LCC
WH-DSK1 INSRTR FIN
CRUM
FAX DC/PS WH-DSK2
(OPTI ON)
AC IN
B. MFP controller
CPU
RM7065C-
600MHz
MEMD[ 31:0] Flash

SysCMD[8:0]
SysAD[63:0]
SysAD[31:0] DIMM
Gate
Mask
(16MB x1
DIMM
8MB x2)
(32MB)
䍃BOOT
PS Kanji
SysAD[54:34] 䍃MAIN
䍃OPTION
Address Buffer
CPU I/F LA[22:2]
FAX I/F
Buffer
MAA[12:0]
SDRAM SDRAM
Memory I/F MD[63:0] ON BOARD DIMM(168pin) RTC
(128MB) 128/256MB
LDATA[15:0]
IOA[17:0]
Address
Local I/F
Buffer
RIC I/F
Driver
I/O G/A 232C
EEPROM SRAM
(64Kbit) (4Mbit)
CPLD (ASIC1)
SYSTEM
Controller
TD62503F
Gate
Data
Dracula㸉
TD62503F
IOD[15:0] D/A
Converter
Scanner I/F
LCD
Controller
PCI Bus
PCI I/F
SDRAM
(32MB)
Engine I/F
ICU ASIC
USB IDE USB
Soft-NIC
HOST Controller Controller
(EPM3064A)
PM1075
Controller
CPLD
USB IDE USB I/F

HOST I/F I/F PM2060i (For 55/62ppm)
PM-22A PM-22B

PROFF_CNT, PRON_FAX
+12VS power
CONTROL- VIDEO signal FW-SUB
FLASH ROM write control (FWP) HSYNC, PAGE SUBDCPS
LER
PCU +5VS power +24V (Interlock line) 4

+12V2 Analog BUCKUP BUP_PR (relay)
UART
OP-AMP power +12VS power CIRCUIT
(Vref ) AC PWB
INT_PR (relay)
PCU_RESET
+24V1
POF
DC power +12V2 Oscillator
C. PCU Circuit BLOCK
1 (LSU, MOTOR, PWM)

+5V2 +38V monitor
+3.3V1 COMPARATOR
FWS OSC
FW
COMPARATOR 4 REGURAT- +5VLD
+24V
DCPS (Interlock line) ORIC
DCCNT (Power relay control) PGM clock, control signal
LSU
/PCU_RESET
Power switch monitor
ȪMSW-MON) BD, control signal, VIDEO signal
/PCU_RESET
XTAL EEPROM
+12VS
power monitor
Sensor input
Analog input
UART(TXD, RXD)
(PPD, ADU, DV signal)
Fusing thermistor DATA, Sensor input
ANALOG +5VSpower Door open detection (Interlock switch)
Temperature/humidity sensor CLOCK
Paper width detection SWITCH UART (DTR, DSR)
AV voltage monitor +24V 4 DOOR
IC RESET Fusing control signal (Interlock line)
Process/developing tank signal +24V1 SWITCH
I/O 2
CPU Thermistor open detection
ASIC1
System CLOCK 3
OP-AMP Clutch, solenoid, relay,
FLASH Brushless motor,
UART (TXD, RXD) ROM PWM output (FAN)
(LCC, FINISHER, High voltage trouble detection
INSERTER) High voltage control signal (Enable, PWM output)
HV un
ADDRESS (A0 to A20) +24V 4
(Interlock line)
Analog output OP-AMP
DRIVE Brush motor
DATA (D0 to D15) Synchronous motor
CLOCK
CIRCUIT
RESET
S-RAM Sensor input
PMC I/O Sensor input

GATE-ARRAY CLOCK Clutch, solenoid, relay,
ANALOG-OUT ASIC2 Brushless motor, LED,
DACs CLOCK PWM output, synchronous motor
DATA,CLOCK
UART (DTR, DSR)
Stepping motor control signal (LCC, FINISHER,
Detect control
Mode select signal INSERTER)
CLOCK RES
+24V(Interlock line) Ӵ Fusing heater control (LCC, FINISHER,
Thermistor open detection FWS INSERTER)
Fusing Ӳ 3 FPGA 1
Fusing heater High temperature
control signal
Option detection
protection 2
relay control COMPARATOR Fusing control signal
COMPARATOR
Analog input (Fusing thermistor)
DRIVER
PWB
SUBDCPS
CONTROLLER
INV PWB
CCFT LCD
SCNcnt LCDDATAȪLVDSȫ
D. Scan Circuit BLOCK
CCFT LVDSPWB
IMAGEDATACCDȪLVDSȫ
UART FRDY
WAKEUP
UART
POF_SCN
RES_MFP
CCD
/RES_SCN
2 SLEEP
RES
_CCD1
FLASH ROM write voltage
(VCCW)
XTAL EEPROM XTAL /F
UART
IMAGE DATA CIS(LVDS) 4Kbit
RES_SC/Nin
/RES_SCNin
LED lighting circuit SEG
UART MFPOPE
DATA,
CIScnt CLOCK
/ORSLED
RES_CCD2
I/O
CPU
G/A
RES_CPU
/CL, FAN
FLASH KEYIN
Analog input Sensor input
ROM 1
Document detection light reception FLASH ROM write control (FWP)
Touch panel X
Touch panel Y
SPF document width detection ADDRESS (A0 to A20)
LCD backlight TH
DATA (D0 to D15) SPED2, OCSW
Clutch, solenoid
Mirror motor

Clutch, solenoid KEYIN
DRIVE control signal EEPROM
Mirror motor 3 1
CIRCUIT S-RAM 64Kbit 3
Buffer
WAKEUP
2
+12V2 Analog power

STAMP
OP-AMP (Vref)
Clutch, solenoid
Stepping motor control signal

Sensor input
SPF STMP
PWB
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AC PWB SUB HLV

POWER Switching POWER FW_sub
(POWER
+12VS
SECTION)
NF
D A1 F101 F102 D
VR1 T2AH250V NR101 T2AH250V to PCU

L1 N1 +24V
F5
2. Power line chart
MAIN POWER SW MSWL F3

DCPS
MSWN Voltage
F1 L1 L1 T2.5AH250V
L T5AH 250V generation
VR3 MSW detection
circuit (12V1 , 5V1)
AC IN L2
20A/250V
N1 N1 FW
A2 VR2 no-mounting generating
N N2
NR2 circuit
POWER SW F2
no-mounting RY3
F1 15A 250V T3.15AH 250V
L2 L2D +5V1
L1 RL1
N2
N1
A. AC POWER LINE DIAGRAM (100V)
no-mounting
NR1 N/F N/F Voltage
generation
N2D
(24V1 – 7 , 3.3V
+12VS(from SUB POWER) 5V2 , 12V2
C 38V1 – 3) C
F3
T2.0AH250V
DCCNT
BUP_PR
#187 #187 N2H L2H
WH-L WH-N SUB POWER

HL circuit L
#187 N2H L2H
FAX POWER +12VL #187
L no-mounting RY2 RY1
Transformer no-mounting
DCPR
WH-SW RL3
+24VPR
F1
FAX
MAIN
T4A 125V
NR1 őŐŘņœ
HLPR/
B RL1/RL2 B
+12V

TD1 TD2 TD3
WH HEATER SET: OPTION T1 T1 T1
G G G
to Controller 4 SSR1 4 SSR2 4 SSR3
T2 1 T2 1 T2 1
HLCNT1 HLCNT2 HLCNT3
WH PWB SCN unit 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
WH-N
6
WH-L 7W 6 6
RY1 WH1_SCN
+24V NC WH-N
NO
WHPR2/ ΡυͺȜ
18W DESK
FUSING UNIT
WH1_DESK
HL3 HLTS3
10W
150Ɏ AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
HL2 HLTS2
WH2_DESK
A A
170Ɏ AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
HL1
HLTS1
170Ɏ AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
10W LCC
WH_LCC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AC PWB SUB HLV

POWER Switching POWER FW_sub
(POWER +12VS
SECTION)
NF
D A1 F101 F102 D
VR1 T2AH250V NR101 T2AH250V to PCU

L1 N1 +24V
F5
MAIN POWER SW MSWL F3
DCPS
MSWN T2.5AH250V Voltage
F1 L1 L1
L T5AH 250V generation
VR3 MSW detection
AC IN L2 circuit (12V1 , 5V1)
10AH240V
F2 N1 N1 FW
N N2 VR2 no-mounting generating
A2
NR2 circuit
POWER SW F2
10AH240V
no-mounting RY1 T3.15AH 250V

F1 T8AH 250V
L2D +5V1
L1 RL1
L2
B. AC POWER LINE DIAGRAM (200V)
no-mounting
N/F N/F Voltage
RY2 NR1
generation
N1 N2D (24V1 – 7 , 3.3V
N2 5V2 , 12V2
C 38V1 – 3) C
F3 +12VS(from SUB POWER)
F4
T2.0AH250V T2.0AH250V
DCCNT
BUP_PR
#187 #187 N2H L2H
WH-L WH-N SUB POWER

HL PWB
N2H L2H
+12VL
FAX POWER RY1
Transformer
DCPR
WH-SW RL3 +24VPR
F1
FAX
MAIN
T2AH250V HLPR/
NR1 POWER
B RL1/RL2 B
+12V

TD1 TD2 TD3
WH HEATER SET: OPTION T1 T1 T1
G G G
to Controller 4 SSR1 4 SSR2 4 SSR3
T2 1 T2 1 T2 1
WH PWB SCN unit HLCNT1 HLCNT2 HLCNT3
WH-N 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
WH-L 7W 6
6 6
RY1 WH1_SCN
+24V NC WH-N
NO
WHPR2/
18W DESK
WH1_DESK FUSING UNIT

HL3 HLTS3
10W
150ûC AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
WH2_DESK HL2 HLTS2
A A
170ûC AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
HL1
HLTS1
10W LCC 170ûC AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
WH_LCC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND1
AC PWB
MM DM DVM FUM
F208 RELAY +38V
+38V
6.3A/250V GND1
INTPR
A (100V) (200V) A
+24VPR
+12VS
SUB Power SUB Power
+12VS +12VS
Supply UN Supply UN
+12VS
+24VPR RELAY RELAY
+24VPR
HL3 HL3
L
L
HL2 HL2
RELAY
HL1
HL1 FW_SUB N
FW_SUB N
C. DC POWER LINE DIAGRAM
+5VS
HLPR\ HLPR\
PCU
PWB +24V1
GND1
PM
+5V2
REGULATER GND2 LSU
B 2I O 3 +5VLD B
F201 +24V1
GND2
LD
1G
GND1
6.3A/250V +12V1 DSW-L_HV TRANS
GND2
+12V2 +24VPR +/-BS
GND2 DSW-R
+5V2 DSW-F_HV TRANS TRANS
MHV
GND2
+3.3V
GND2 TRANS
GB
FW TRANS
DSW-F THV
Transfer Bias PWB
DC +24VDSW
DSW-L
Power +24V1 +24V1 TRANS
DVBS
Supply +24V1
Driver WEBM
+24V1 Main HVU
UN Driver TM1
+24V1
Driver TM2 +5V2
+3.3V
+12V1
MFP DC-DC
GND2
+5V-HDD
HDD CNT
C GND2 C
+2.5V
DC-DC
+5VS +5VS
+12V1
+12V1
GND2

GND2 +1.3V
+5V1 MOTHER +5V1 DC-DC
GND2
GND2
F202 +24V2
+24V2 +5V1
GND1 GND2
6.3A/250V +5V2 DRIVER +5V2
GND2
POM1 POM2 ADM1 ADM2 TRM VPM GND2
PWB GND1 +3.3V
OPE
GND2
LCD BACKLIGHT
F203 +24V3 +24V3 +24V3 +24V3
GND1 SCNPWB GND1 GND1 LVDS GND1 Inverter
6.3A/250V +12V2 +12V2
GND2 GND2 SPSM
+5V2 +5V2 +5V2
+24V3
GND2 GND2
GND1 +24V3
REGULATER +3.3V +5V2 GND1
2I O3 +3.3V GND2 SPF SPFM
GND2
1G
F204 +24V4 +24V3 +24V3 SLUM
GND1 GND1 GND1 CIS
6.3A/250V +5V2
MIM +12V2
GND2
LCC Option GND2 REGULATER
+24V3 Xe +5V2 2I +2.5V
O3
GND1 Inverter Lamp GND2
1G
+3.3V
GND2
D +5V2 D
F205 6.3A/250V +24V5 +24V5 +24V5 +24V5 +24V5
GND1 GND1 GND1
2I O3 +5V 2I O3 +5V +12V2
GND2 REGULATER
F206 6.3A/250V REGULATER
1G
1G
+24V6 REGULATER +5V2 2I O3 +2.5V

GND1 GND2
1G
+5V2 +3.3V
GND2 INSERTER GND2
FIN FIN +5V2
CCD
Option Option (FIN only)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN2 CN1 CN6 CN9 CN4
52271-1379 52271-3079 30FMZ-BT 8AL068S-305C3 8AL068S-305C3
FFC-13Pin FFC-30Pin MFP_Signal
1 DISP XH 30 1 XH GND 1 1 GND
2 YD /YL 29 2 /YL 2 DATA1- 2 2 2 DATA1-
3 LP /XL 28 3 /XL 2 DATA0- 3 3 2 DATA0-
4 CP YH 27 4 YH GND 4 4 GND
CN4 CN1
5 +3.3V /CCFT 26 5 /CCFT 2 CLK+ 5 5 2 CLK+
TX25-100P-LT-H1 TX24-100R-LT-H1
6 GND 24V3 25 6 24V3 /2_DBL- 6 6 /2_DBL-
GND 1 1 GND
LCD 7 M GND 24 7 GND GND 7 7 GND
GND 2 2 GND
8 D0 TH 23 8 TH /TXDSCN 8 8 /TXD SCN
/1 DBL- 3 3 / 1 DBL-
9 D1 GND 22 9 GND DTRSCN 9 9 DTR SCN
/1 DBL+ 4 4 / 1 DBL+
10 D2 lcdD3- 21 10 lcdD3- VCCWSCN 10 10 VCCW SCN
1 CLK- 5 5 1 CLK-
11 D3 lcdD3+ 20 11 lcdD3+ WAKEUP 11 11 WAKEUP
1 CLK+ 6 6 1 CLK+
12 +24V lcdD2- 19 12 lcdD2- /RESMFP 12 12 /RESMFP
1 DATA0- 7 7 1 DATA0-
13 VEE lcdD2+ 18 13 lcdD2+ LCD-VEE 13 13 LCD-VEE
1 DATA0+ 8 8 1 DATA0+
lcdD1- 17 14 lcdD1- FRDY 14 14 FRDY
LVDS 1 DATA1- 9 9 1 DATA1-
CN4 lcdD1+ 16 15 lcdD1+ SLEEP 15 15 SLEEP
1 DATA1+ 10 10 1 DATA1+
52271-0469 lcdD0- 15 16 lcdD0- GND 16 16 GND
FFC-4Pin PWB 1 DATA2- 11 11 1 DATA2-
/YL 4 1 /YL lcdD0+ 14 17 lcdD0+ GND 17 17 GND
1 DATA2+ 12 12 1 DATA2+
XH 3 2 XH VCONT 13 18 LCD-VEE lcdD3- 18 18 lcdD3-
1 DATA3- 13 13 1 DATA3-
TOUCH YH 2 3 YH 3.3V3 12 19 3.3V3 lcdD2- 19 19 lcdD2-
1 DATA3+ 14 14 1 DATA3+
A. SCN unit section
/XL 1 4 /XL LCD_DISP 11 20 lcdDIS lcdD1- 20 20 lcdD1-

GND 15 15 GND
GND 10 21 GND lcdD 0- 21 21 lcdD0-
GND 16 16 GND
LCD_CP- 9 22 lcdCP2- lcdCP2- 22 22 lcdCP2-
/CCDFAN 17 17 /CCDFAN
LCD_CP+ 8 23 lcdCP2+ lcdCP1- 23 23 lcdCP1-
CN2 CN1 CN3 12V2 18 18 12V2
GND 7 24 GND lcdM- 24 24 lcdM-
53259-0417 S3B-PH-K-S(LF) S3B-PH-SM4-TB(LF) 24V3 19 19 24V3
LCD_LP- 6 25 lcdCP1- lcdS- 25 25 lcdS-
1 CCFT+ /CCFT 3 1 /CCFT 24V3 20 20 24V3
LCD_LP+ 5 26 lcdCP1+ GND 26 26 GND
2 NC GND 2 2 GND PDSEL1 21 21 PDSEL1
lcdM- 4 27 lcdM- 1 DATA3- 27 27 1 DATA3-
CCFT 3 NC +24V 1 3 +24V PDSEL2 22 22 PDSEL2
INV lcdM+ 3 28 lcdM+
3. Actual wiring chart
4 /CCFT /KEYIN 23 23 /KEYIN 1 DATA2- 28 28 1 DATA2-

LCD_YD- 2 29 lcdS- 1 DATA1- 29 29 1 DATA1-
SEG0 24 24 SEG0
PWB LCD_YD+ 1 30 lcdS+ 1 DATA0- 30 30 1 DATA0-
GND 25 25 GND
GND 26 26 GND GND 31 31 GND
CN2 CN1 CN5 lcdS+ 27 27 lcdS+ 1 CLK+ 32 32 1 CLK+
S6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-SM4-TB(LF)(SN) 52610-2471 FFC-24Pin T24FAZ-SMT-TF lcdS- 28 28 lcdS- /1 DBL- 33 33 /1 DBL-
BR BR
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0 GND 1 24 GND lcdM+ 29 29 lcdM+ GND 34 34 GND MOTHER
LB LB
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1 5V1 2 23 5V1 lcdM- 30 30 lcdM- GND 35 35 GND
PL PL
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2 /BZR 3 22 /BZR lcdCP1+ 31 31 lcdCP1+ 2 DATA1+ 36 36 2 DATA1+ PWB
BL BL
ORSPD 5V2 4 4 5V2 NC 4 21 NC lcdCP1- 32 32 lcdCP1- 2 DATA0+ 37 37 2 DATA0+
BR BR
PD 5 5 PD NC 5 20 NC lcdCP2+ 33 33 lcdCP2+ 2 CLK- 38 38 2 CLK-
GY GY
GND 6 6 GND GND 6 19 GND lcdCP2- 34 34 lcdCP2- GND 39 39 GND
GND 7 18 GND lcdD0+ 35 35 lcdD0+ /2 DBL+ 40 40 /2 DBL+
GND 8 17 GND lcdD0- 36 36 lcdD0- GND 41 41 GND
/F3 9 16 /F3 lcdD1+ 37 37 lcdD1+ GND 42 42 GND
/F2 10 15 /F2 lcdD1- 38 38 lcdD1- POF SCN 43 43 POF SCN
MFP /F1 11 14 /F1 lcdD2+ 39 39 lcdD2+ /RES SCN 44 44 /RES SCN
/F0 12 13 /F0 lcdD2- 40 40 lcdD2- /RXD SCN 45 45 /RXD SCN
OPE SEG2 13 12 SEG2 lcdD3+ 41 41 lcdD3+ /DSR SCN 46 46 /DSR SCN
SEG1 14 11 SEG1 lcdD3- 42 42 lcdD3- /SCNSET 47 47 /SCNSET
PWB SEG0 15 10 SEG0 GND 43 43 GND lcdDIS 48 48 lcdDIS
/KEYIN 16 9 /KEYIN GND 44 44 GND 5V1 49 49 5V1
5V2 17 8 5V2 YH 45 45 YH GND 50 50 GND
GND 18 7 GND /XL 46 46 /X L GND 51 51 GND
PD 19 6 PD /STSET 47 47 /STSET lcdD3+ 52 52 lcdD3+
5V2 20 5 5V2 /STMPS 48 48 /STMPS lcdD2+ 53 53 lcdD2+
PDSEL2 21 4 PDSEL2 GND 49 49 GND lcdD1+ 54 54 lcdD1+
PDSEL1 22 3 PDSEL1 SCN GND 50 50 GND lcdD0+ 55 55 lcdD0+
PDSEL0 23 2 PDSEL0 GND 51 51 GND lcdCP2+ 56 56 lcdCP2+
GND 24 1 GND JNT GND 52 52 GND
SCN cnt lcdCP1+ 57 57 lcdCP1+
12V2 53 53 12V2 lcdM+ 58 58 lcdM+
CN201 CN1 CN2 PWB 12V2 54 54 12V2
PWB lcdS+ 59 59 lcdS+
BM12B-SRSS-TB IL-FPR-40S-VF-E1500 FFC-40Pin IL-FPR-40S-VF-E1500 GND 55 55 GND GND 60 60 GND
1 IMG DOUT1 0 GND 1 40 GND 5V2 56 56 5V2 1 DATA3+ 61 61 1 DATA3+
2 IMG DOUT1 1 1 DATA3+ 2 39 1 DATA3+ GND 57 57 GND 1 DATA2+ 62 62 1 DATA2+
3 IMG DOUT1 2 1 DATA3- 3 38 1 DATA3- 5V2 58 58 5V2 1 DATA1+ 63 63 1 DATA1+
4 IMG DOUT1 3 1 DATA2+ 4 37 1 DATA2+ GND 59 59 GND 1 DATA0+ 64 64 1 DATA0+
5 IMG DOUT1 4 1 DATA2- 5 36 1 DATA2- 3.3V3 60 60 3.3V3 1 CLK- 65 65 1 CLK-
6 IMG DOUT1 5 1 DATA1+ 6 35 1 DATA1+ FRM CCD1 61 61 FRM CCD1 GND 66 66 GND
7 IMG DOUT1 6 1 DATA1- 7 34 1 DATA1- CLK CCD1 62 62 CLK CCD1 /1 DBL+ 67 67 /1 DBL+
8 IMG DOUT1 7 1 DATA0+ 8 33 1 DATA0+ TXD CCD1 63 63 TXD CCD1 GND 68 68 GND
9 IMG AREA1 1 DATA0- 9 32 1 DATA0- RES CCD1 64 64 RES CCD1
10 GND GND 10 31 GND RXD CCD1 65 65 RXD CCD1 Standard:JPN
11 AD CLK 1 CLK+ 11 30 1 CLK+ ADD CCD1 66 66 ADD CCD1
12 GND 1 CLK- 12 29 1 CLK- GND 67 67 GND
Option:EX100/EX200
GND 13 28 GND PAGE1 68 68 PAGE1 ELR-02VF ELP-02V
/1 DBL+ 14 27 /1 DBL+ GND 69 69 GND WH WH
2 WH-N(SCN) 2
/1 DBL- 15 26 /1 DBL- GND 70 70 GND BK WH WH-SCN1
1 WH-L(SCN) 1
GND 16 25 GND /CL1 71 71 /CL1
FRMCCD1 17 24 FRMCCD1 PDSEL0 72 72 PDSEL0
/PAGE1 18 23 /PAGE1 5V2 73 73 5V2

CLKCCD1 19 22 CLKCCD1 PD 74 74 PD
CCD ADDCCD1 20 21 ADDCCD1 SEG1 75 75 SEG1 ELP-02V
BK
TXDCCD1 21 20 TXDCCD1 SEG2 76 76 SEG2 1 WH-L(SCN)
WH
PWB RXDCCD1 22 19 RXDCCD1 GND 77 77 GND 2 WH-N(SCN)
RESCCD1 23 18 RESCCD1 /F0 78 78 /F0
GND 24 17 GND GND 79 79 GND CN8
3. 3V3 25 16 3. 3V3 /F1 80 80 /F1 B6PS-VH CN3 VHR-9N
3. 3V3 26 15 3. 3V3 GND 81 81 GND RD RD
24V3 1 5 24V3
GND 27 14 GND /F2 82 82 /F2 GY GY
GND 2 6 GND
5V2 28 13 5V2 GND 83 83 GND PL
12V2 3
5V2 29 12 5V2 /F3 84 84 /F3 GY
GND 4 CN5 VHR-4N
5V2 30 11 5V2 GND 85 85 GND BL PL DCPS
5V2 5 3 12V2
5V2 31 10 5V2 /BZR 86 86 /BZR GY GY
GND 6 4 GND
5V2 32 9 5V2 GND 87 87 GND MFP_Power PWB
EHR-3
5V2 33 8 5V2 5V1 88 88 5V1 BL CN6 VHR-10N
1 5V1 BL
5V2 34 7 5V2 lcdDIS 89 89 lcdDIS GY 3 5V2
CN3 2 GND GY
5V2 35 6 5V2 3.3V3 90 90 3.3V3 LB OCSW 4 GND
B6B-PH-K-S 3 OCSW
GND 36 5 GND GND 91 91 GND BL
5V1 1
12V2 37 4 12V2 LCD VEE 92 92 LCD VEE GY
GND 2
12V2 38 3 12V2 TH 93 93 TH LB
OCSW 3 ENGINE
GND 39 2 GND /CCFT 94 94 /CCFT RD
24V3 4
GND 40 1 GND /YL 95 95 /YL BR
/LED0 5
XH 96 96 XH LB
/LED1 6 ORSLED
CN1 24V3 97 97 24V3
B2B-PH-K-S 24V3 98 98 24V3
12V2 1 1 12V2 GND 99 99 GND
CCDFAN EHR-3
CCDFAN 2 2 CCDFAN GND 100 100 GND SRA-21T-4 BL
CN6 1 5V2
GY
CN3 B3B-PH-K-S 2 GND
SLD5R-1(FCI) LB LB MHPS
SLD5S-1(FCI) MHPS 1 3 MHPS
FFC-5Pin GY
GND 1 1 GND GND 2
BL
GND 2 2 GND 5V2 3
/CL1 3 3 /CL1
CL1 CN7
24V3 4 4 24V3 S6B-PH-K-R
24V3 5 5 24V3 RD
MIMA 1
CN7 BL
MIMB 2
179228-4 175694-4 + 179228-4(AMP) B4B-PH-K-S YL
RD /MIMA 3
1 24V3 4 1 24V3 OR
BR /MIMB 4 MIM
2 /STMPS 3 2 /STMPS BK
LB 24V3 5
STMP 3 /STSET 2 3 /STSET WH
GY 24V3 6
4 GND 1 4 GND
Option
B3P-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H BL BL
CN4 5V2 1 3 5V2
PHNR-2-H +BU2P-TR-P-H BR BR
BK BR B4B-PH-K-S SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2
1 /SPFC 2 GY GY SPPD2
BK RD GND 3 1 GND
SPFC 2 24V3 1 N.C 4 PHNR-2-H
B3P-PH-K-S +BU2P-TR-P-H PHNR-2-H
BL BR BK
5V2 3 CN6 /STRRC 1 2 /STRRC 1
BR RD BK
SCOV 2 B5B-PH-K-S 24V3 2 1 24V3 2 STRRC
SCOV GY RD
GND 1 CN5 24V3 3
PHNR-3-H
B14B-PH-K-S N.C 4
B3P-PH-K-S BR BR +BU3P-TR-P-H PHNR-3-H
BL 1 /SPFC /STRRBC 5 BK
5V2 3 RD 3 /STRRBC 1
BR 2 24V3 2 N.C 2
SPPD1 2 BR BK STRRBC
SPPD1 GY 3 SCOV 1 24V3 3
GND 1 GY
4 GND
BR SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC
B3P-PH-K-S 5 SPPD1 RD WH
BL GY CN11 6 24V3 6
5V2 3 6 GND RD BK
BR BR B12B-PH-K-S 5 24V3 5
SPED1 2 7 SPED1 BR BR BR
SPED1 GY GY SPFMB1 12 4 SPFMB1 4
GND 1 8 GND BR BR OR
BR /SPFMB1 11 3 /SPFMB1 3 SPFM(56‫)غ‬
9 STUD BR BR YL
B3P-PH-K-S GY /SPFMA1 10 2 /SPFMA1 2
BL 10 GND BR BR RD
5V2 3 BL SPFMA1 9 1 SPFMA1 1
BR 11 5V2 RD
STUD 2 BL 24V3 8
STUD GY 12 5V2 RD
GND 1 BL 24V3 7
13 5V2 RD
SMP-05V-NC SMR-05V-N BL SPF 24V3 6
YL BR 14 5V2 RD
1 OUT /SLUMB 1 24V3 5
B. DSPF unit section
BR BR PWB BR
2 OUT /SLUMA 2 SPFMA2 4 SMR-06V-B SMP-06V-BC
OR BR BR BR YL
3 OUT SLUMB 3 /SPFMA2 3 6 /SPFMB2 6
SLUM BK BR BR RD WH
4 OUT SLUMA 4 /SPFMB2 2 5 24V3 5
RD RD BR BR RD
B3P-PH-K-S 5 24V3 5 SPFMB2 1 4 SPFMB2 4
BL BR BR
5V2 3 SMR-12V-N SMP-12V-NC 3 SPFMA2 3 SPSM(42‫)غ‬
BR CN3 RD BK
SPPD4 2 BL BL 2 24V3 2
SPPD4 GY 1 5V2 1 B34B-PHDSS-B BR OR
GND 1 BR BR BR 1 /SPFMA2 1
2 SPPD4 2 1 OUT /SLUMB GY GY
GY GY BR FG FG
B3P-PH-K-S 3 GND 3 2 /STRC
BL BL BL BR CN2 CN12
5V2 3 4 5V2 4 3 OUT /SLUMA SRA-21T-3
BR BR BR BR B32B-PHDSS-B SRA-21T-3 S22B-PHDSS-B
SPPD3 2 5 SPPD3 5 4 /STRBC GY GY
SPPD3 GY GY GY BR GND 1 1 GND
GND 1 6 GND 6 5 OUT_SLUMB GY GY
BL BL BR GND 2 2 GND
7 5V1 7 6 /SRRBC OR OR
B3P-PH-K-S BR BR BR VAREF 3 3 VAREF
BL 8 SPED2 8 7 OUT_SLUMA BL
5V1 3 GY GY BR N.C 4 4 5V1
BR 9 GND 9 8 /SRRC RD RD
SPED2 2 BL BL GY 24V3 5 5 24V3
SPPD2 GY 10 5V2 10 9 GND BR BR
GND 1 BR BR GY SPPD2 6 6 SPPD2
11 STLD 11 10 GND RD RD
GY GY GY 24V3 7 7 24V3
B3P-PH-K-S 12 GND 12 11 GND BR BR
BL GY SCOV 8 8 SCOV
5V2 3 12 GND BL BL
BR GY 5V2 9 9 5V2
STLD 2 13 GND BR BR
STLD GY GY SPPD1 10 10 SPPD1
GND 1 14 GND BR BR
GY /SPFMA 11 11 /SPFMA
15 GND BR BR
GY SPED1 12 12 SPED1
16 GND BR BR
BL SPFMA 13 13 SPFMA
17 5VPOD BR BR
GY STUD 14 14 STUD
18 GND BR BR
BL /SPFMB 15 15 /SPFMB
19 5V2 BR BR
GY SPFMO1 16 16 SPFMO1
20 GND BR BR
BL SPFMB 17 17 SPFMB
21 5V2 BR BR
BL SPFMO2 18 18 SPFMO2
PHNR-3-H 22 5V2 BR BR
BL STRRC 19 19 STRRC CN13
PHNR-3-H +BU3P-TR-P-H 23 5V2 BR BR
RD RD BL STRRBC 20 20 STRRBC B2B-PH-K-S
1 24V3 3 24 5V2 5V2 BR GY
YL BR OR /SLUMA 21 21 GND CIS_TH 1
2 SPFFAN 2 25 VAREF BR GY
SPFFAN BK GY /SLUMB 22 22 GND GND 2
3 GND 1 26 N.C BR
RD SLUMA 23
27 24V3_SRRBC BR
BL SLUMB 24
PHNR-2-H 28 5V2 BR
RD SPF_SET 25
PHNR-2-H +BU2P-TR-P-H 29 24V3_FAN BR
BK BR RD SRRBC 26
1 /STRC 2 30 24V3_STRBC BR
BK RD RD SRRC 27
STRC 2 24V3 1 31 24V3_STRC BR SCNcnt
RD STRC 28
32 24V3_SRRC BR
RD STRBC 29
PHNR-3-H 33 24V3_PM BR PWB
SPFC 30
PHNR-3-H +BU3P-TR-P-H 34 N.C GY
BK BR GND 31 CN11
1 /STRBC 3 GY
GND 32 S20B-PHDSS-B
2 N.C 2 BR
STRBC BK RD 1 /SLUMA
3 24V3 1 BR
2 /SLUMB CN5
BR
3 SLUMA B13B-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H BR
4 SLUMB /PNC 1
PHNR-2-H +BU2P-TR-P-H BR
BK BR 5 SPF_SET /COPY 2
1 /SRRC 2 BR
BK RD 6 SRRBC /CA 3
SRRC 2 24V3 1 BR
7 SRRC /READY 4
BR
8 STRC /ADU 5
PHNR-3-H BR
9 STRBC 5V2 6
PHNR-3-H +BU3P-TR-P-H BR
BK BR 10 SPFC GND 7
1 /SRRBC 3 BR
11 SPFFAN 24V3 8
2 N.C 2 BR
SRRBC BK RD 12 SPPD4 N.C 9
3 24V3 1 BR
13 SPPD3 /TC 10
BR
14 SPPD2 24V3 11
BR
15 STLD /PNC-a 12
BR
16 SPWS GND 13
BR
17 SPLS2
BR
18 SPLS1
BR
19 SOCD
PHNR-3-H BR

20 SPOD
+BU3P-TR-P-H PHNR-3-H CN4
BL OR CN10
1 VAREF 3 S26B-PHDSS-B B12B-XASK-1(LF)
BR BR FFC-35Pin BR BR 24V3 1
2 SPWS 2 CN1 SD7 1 1 SD7 CN3 CN1 2_DATA1- 1 1 2_DATA1-
SPWS GY GY PHNR-9-H BR BR GND 2
3 GND 1 FF3-35-R15 GND 2 2 GND 9604S-35F B26B-PHDSS 2_DATA1+ 2 2 2_DATA1+
+BU9P-TR-P-H PHNR-9-H BR BR /CV_COPY 3
OR OR SD6 3 3 SD6 2_DATA0- 3 3 2_DATA0-
B3P-PH-K-S 1 VAREF 9 BR BR /CV_COUNT 4
BL BR BR GND 4 4 GND 2_DATA0+ 4 4 2_DATA0+
5V2 3 2 SPWS 8 BR BR /CV_START 5
BR GY GY SD5 5 5 SD5 2_CLK- 5 5 2_CLK-
SPLS2 2 3 GND 7 BR BR /CV_CA 6
SPLS2 GY BL BL GND 6 6 GND 2_CLK+ 6 6 2_CLK+
GND 1 4 5V2 6 BR BR /CV_STAPLE 7
BR BR SD4 7 7 SD4 /2_DBL- 7 7 /2_DBL-
5 SPLS2 5 BR BR /CV_DUPLEX 8
GY GY GND 8 8 GND /2_DBL+ 8 8 /2_DBL+
B3P-PH-K-S 6 GND 4 GY GY /CV_SIZE0 9
BL BL BL SD3 9 9 SD3 GND 9 9 GND
5V2 3 7 5V2 3 BR BR /CV_SIZE1 10
BR BR BR GND 10 10 GND FRM_CCD2 10 10 FRM_CCD2
SPLS1 2 8 SPLS1 2 BR BR /CV_SIZE2 11
SPLS1 GY GY GY SD2 11 11 SD2 CLK_CCD2 11 11 CLK_CCD2
GND 1 9 GND 1 BR BR /CV_SIZE3 12
GND 12 12 GND PAGE2 12 12 PAGE2
BR BR
SD1 13 13 SD1 ADD_CCD2 13 13 ADD_CCD2
BR BR
GND 14 14 GND TXD_CCD2 14 14 TXD_CCD2
BR BR
SD0 15 15 SD0 RES_CCD2 15 15 RES_CCD2
BR BR
GND 16 16 GND RXD_CCD2 16 16 RXD_CCD2
CISun OR OR
/LST 17 17 /LST 3.3V3 17 17 3.3V3
OR OR CN2
B3P-PH-K-S GND 18 18 GND CIScnt 3.3V3 18 18 3.3V3
BL RD RD B8B-PH-K-S
5V2 3 SCLK 19 19 SCLK 24V3 19 19 24V3
BR GY GY GND 1
SOCD 2 GND 20 20 GND PWB GND 20 20 GND
SOCD GY PL PL /RES-SCN 2
GND 1 LD 21 21 LD 12V2 21 21 12V2
GY GY /DSR-SCN 3
BL BL /RXD-SCN 4
B3P-PH-K-S DATA 23 23 DATA 5V2 23 23 5V2
BR GY GY /TXD-SCN 5
SPOD 3 GND 24 24 GND GND 24 24 GND
GY BL BL /DTR-SCN 6
GND 2 CLK 25 25 CLK 5V2 25 25 5V2
SPOD BL BR BR 5V2 7
5VPOD 1 GND 26 26 GND /CISSET 26 26 /CISSET N.C 8
LGATE 27 27 LGATE
GND 28 28 GND CN2 SD7 1
SCN 29 29 SCN B12B-PHDSS-B SD6 2
GND 30 30 GND SD5 3
SD4 4 BK
VDS 31 31 VDS FG
SD3 5 WireMesh
GND 32 32 GND
SD2 6 SRA-51T-3
VAS 33 33 VAS
GND 34 34 GND SD1 7
VLED 35 35 VLED SD0 8
/LST 9
SCLK 10
GND 11
GND 12
BK
FG
SRA-51T-3
Un-equipping
CN-8 CN-8 CN-6 CN-9 CN-4 CN-1
TX24-100R-LT-H1 TX25-100P-8ST-H1 B24B-PHDSS-B B24B-PHDSS-B 24FMN-BTK-A T24FAZ-SMT-TB
GND2 1 1 GND2 /PRON-FAX 1 1 /PRON-FAX /LED3 1 1 /LED3
GND2 51 51 GND2
GND2 2 2 GND2 +5VS 2 2 +5VS /LED2 2 2 /LED2
GND2 52 52 GND2
1_DATA1+ 3 3 1_DATA1+ /POF 3 3 /POF /LED1 3 3 /LED1
1_DATA0+ 53 53 1_DATA0+
2_DATA1+ 4 4 2_DATA1+ PROFF-CNT 4 4 PROFF-CNT KEY6 4 4 KEY6
2_CLK+ 54 54 2_CLK+
1_DATA1- 5 5 1_DATA1- /MSW-OFF 5 5 /MSW-OFF KEY5 5 5 KEY5
1_DATA0- 55 55 1_DATA0-
2_DATA1- 6 6 2_DATA1- FWP-PCU 6 6 FWP-PCU KEY4 6 6 KEY4
2_CLK- 56 56 2_CLK-
GND2 7 7 GND2 RES-PCU 7 7 RES-PCU KEY3 7 7 KEY3
GND2 57 57 GND2
GND2 8 8 GND2 /DCCNT 8 8 /DCCNT KEY2 8 8 KEY2
GND2 58 58 GND2
2_DATA0+ 9 9 2_DATA0+ TXD-PCU 9 9 TXD-PCU KEY1 9 9 KEY1
1_DBL+ 59 59 1_DBL+
1_CLK+ 10 10 1_CLK+ DTR-PCU 10 10 DTR-PCU /OP-SET 10 10 /OP-SET
LCDD1+ 60 60 LCDD1+
2_DATA0- 11 11 2_DATA0- GND2 11 11 GND2 GND2 11 11 GND2 PRT-OP
1_DBL- 61 61 1_DBL-
1_CLK- 12 12 1_CLK- GND2 12 12 GND2 +5V2 12 12 +5V2
LCDD1- 62 62 LCDD1-
GND2 13 13 GND2 DSR-PCU 13 13 DSR-PCU +5V2 13 13 +5V2
GND2 63 63 GND2 PWB
GND2 14 14 GND2 PAGE 14 14 PAGE D7 14 14 D7
GND2 64 64 GND2
2_DBL+ 15 15 2_DBL+ GND2 15 15 GND2 D6 15 15 D6
LCDD2+ 65 65 LCDD2+
LCDD0+ 16 16 LCDD0+ GND2 16 16 GND2 D5 16 16 D5
GND2 66 66 GND2
2_DBL- 17 17 2_DBL- RXD-PCU 17 17 RXD-PCU D4 17 17 D4
LCDD2- 67 67 LCDD2-
LCDD0- 18 18 LCDD0- HSYNC 18 18 HSYNC D3 18 18 D3
GND2 68 68 GND2
GND2 19 19 GND2 GND2 19 19 GND2 D2 19 19 D2
GND2 69 69 GND2
GND2 20 20 GND2 GND2 20 20 GND2 D1 20 20 D1
GND2 70 70 GND2
LCDD3+ 21 21 LCDD3+ VIDEOin+ 21 21 VIDEOin+ D0 21 21 D0
LCDS+ 71 71 LCDS+
GND2 22 22 GND2 GND2 22 22 GND2 /OP-CS 22 22 /OP-CS
LCDCP2+ 72 72 LCDCP2+
LCDD3- 23 23 LCDD3- VIDEOin- 23 23 VIDEOin- /OP-R/W 23 23 /OP-R/W
C. Image process section
LCDS- 73 73 LCDS-
GND2 24 24 GND2 GND2 24 24 GND2 /OP-RS 24 24 /OP-RS
LCDCP2- 74 74 LCDCP2-
GND2 25 25 GND2
GND2 75 75 GND2
CTL-MON 26 26 CTL-MON
HDD-MON 76 76 HDD-MON
LCDM+ 27 27 LCDM+ LSU UNIT
+3.3V 77 77 +3.3V
LCDCP1+ 28 28 LCDCP1+
+3.3V 78 78 +3.3V
LCDM- 29 29 LCDM-
GND2 79 79 GND2
LCDCP1- 30 30 LCDCP1-
/PRON-FAX 80 80 /PRON-FAX
GND2 31 31 GND2
/RES-MFP 81 81 /RES-MFP
/POF-SCN 32 32 /POF-SCN CN-22 CN-2 CN-1
/RXD-SCN 82 82 /RXD-SCN
/TXD-SCN 33 33 /TXD-SCN B30B-PHDSS-B SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N B30B-PHDSS-B B6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-SM3-TB
/DSR-SCN 83 83 /DSR-SCN
/DTR-SCN 34 34 /DTR-SCN GND2 1 1 GND2 1 1 GND2 /BRAKE 1 1 /BRAKE
/RES-SCN 84 84 /RES-SCN
/SCNSET 35 35 /SCNSET +5VLD 2 2 +5VLD 2 2 +5VLD /PMCLK 2 2 /PMCLK
VCCW-SCN 85 85 VCCW-SCN
FRDY 36 36 FRDY GND2 3 3 GND2 3 3 GND2 /READY 3 3 /READY
PSSW 86 86 PSSW
SLEEP 37 37 SLEEP GND2 4 4 GND2 4 4 GND2 /START 4 4 /START PGM
LCD-VEE 87 87 LCD-VEE
GND2 38 38 GND2 /READY 5 5 /READY 5 5 /READY GND2 5 5 GND2
LCDDIS 88 88 LCDDIS
GND2 39 39 GND2 /PMCLK 6 6 /PMCLK 6 6 /PMCLK +24V1 6 6 +24V1
WAKEUP 89 89 WAKEUP
VIDEOin- 40 40 VIDEOin- /START 7 7 /START 7 7 /START
+5V-HDD 90 90 +5V-HDD
RXD-PCU 41 41 RXD-PCU +24V1 8 8 +24V1 8 8 +24V1
+5V-HDD 91 91 +5V-HDD
VIDEOin+ 42 42 VIDEOin+ (NC) 9 9 (NC) 9 9 /BRAKE
+5V-HDD 92 92 +5V-HDD MOTHER
TXD-PCU 43 43 TXD-PCU +24V1 10 10 +24V1 10 10 +24V1
+5V-HDD 93 93 +5V-HDD
GND2 44 44 GND2 +5V2 11 11 +5V2 11 11 +5V2
HSYNC 94 94 HSYNC
/DCCNT 45 45 /DCCNT PWB GND2 12 12 GND2 12 12 GND2
DSR-PCU 95 95 DSR-PCU
DTR-PCU 46 46 DTR-PCU +5V2 13 13 +5V2 13 13 +5V2 LD
PAGE 96 96 PAGE
FWP-PCU 47 47 FWP-PCU GND2 14 14 GND2 14 14 GND2
/MSW-OFF 97 97 /MSW-OFF
/POF 48 48 /POF PCU PWB TEST 15 15 TEST 15 15 TEST PWB
RES-PCU 98 98 RES-PCU
CFM-PWM 49 49 CFM-PWM TEST2 16 16 TEST2 16 16 TEST2
PROFF-CNT 99 99 PROFF-CNT
(NC) +12V1 50 50 +12V1 VRB 17 17 VRB 17 17 VRB
100 100 (NC)
GND2 18 18 GND2 18 18 GND2
CN-702 CN-3 CN-7 TEST3 19 19 TEST3 CN-3
PS-20PE-D4T2-M1 PS-20PE-D4T2-M1 B4B-PH-K-S GND2 20 1 TEST3 1 20 GND2 B4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-R
GND2 1 1 GND2 +12V1 1 VIDEO 21 2 GND2 2 21 /VIDEO GND2 1 4 GND2
+5V1 11 11 +5V1
GND2 2 2 GND2 CFM-PWM 2 GND2 22 3 /VIDEO 3 22 GND2 /SYNC 2 3 /SYNC
+5V1 12 12 +5V1
GND2 3 3 GND2 GND2 3 FM-CTL /VIDEO 23 4 VIDEO 4 23 VIDEO GND2 3 2 GND2 BD
+5V1 13 13 +5V1
GND2 4 4 GND2 CTL-MON 4 GND2 24 5 GND2 5 24 GND2 +5V2 4 1 +5V2
+5V1 14 14 +5V1
GND2 5 5 GND2 LSUS/H 25 6 GND2 6 25 LSUS/H
+5V1 15 15 +5V1
GND2 6 6 GND2 GND2 26 7 LSUS/H 7 26 GND2
+5V1 16 16 +5V1
GND2 7 7 GND2 /LDON 27 8 GND2 8 27 /LDON
+5V1 17 17 +5V1
GND2 8 8 GND2 GND2 28 9 /LDON 9 28 GND2
+5V1 18 18 +5V1
GND2 9 9 GND2 /SYNC 29 10 GND2 10 29 /SYNC
+5VS 19 19 +5VS
GND2 10 10 GND2 GND2 30 11 /SYNC 11 30 GND2
MFP +5V1 20 20 +5V1
12 GND2 12
SMP-12V-NC/SMR-12V-N
CONTROL
CN-701 CN-1 CN-21
PWB PS-40PE-D4T2-M1 S4B-PH-K-S B12B-PHDSS-B
/RESET 1 +12V1 1 +24V1 1
GND2 2 CFM-PWM 2 +24V1 2
DD7 3 GND2 3 /CFM-R1 3
DD8 4 HDD-MON 4 /CFM-R2 4
DD6 5 GND2 5 SMP-11V-NC/SMR-11V-N PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DD9 6 GND2 6 1 +24V1 1 3 +24V1 1
DD5 7 +24V1 7 2 /CFM-R1 2 2 /CFM-R1 2 FM-R1

DD10 8 (NC) 8 3 GND2 3 1 GND2 3
DD4 9 /CFM-R3 9 4 +24V1 4
DD11 10 TH-RA 10 5 /CFM-R2 5 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DD3 11 GND2 11 6 GND2 6 3 +24V1 1
DD12 12 GND2 12 7 +24V1 7 2 /CFM-R2 2 FM-R2
DD2 13 8 /CFM-R3 8 1 GND2 3
DD13 14 CN-5 9 GND2 9
DD1 15 S5P-VH 10 TH-RA 10 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
DD14 16 +12V1 1 11 GND2 11 3 +24V1 1
DD0 17 +5V1 2 2 /CFM-R3 2 FM-R3
DD15 18 GND2 3 1 GND2 3
GND2 19 +5V-HDD 4 CN-3
KEY 20 GND2 5 B4P-VH S4B-PH-K-S
DMAREQ 21 +12V1 1 1 (NC)
GND2 22 +12V1 2 2 (NC)
/DIOW 23 GND2 3 3 TH-RA INTPWB
GND2 24 GND2 4 4 GND2
/DIOR 25
GND2 26
IORDY 27
CSEL 28
PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
/DMACK 29 4 +12V1 1 CN-2
GND2 30 3 CFM-PWM 2 B8P-VH
INTRQ 31 2 GND2 3 FM-HDD 7 GND2 (PAGE7/8)
/ICCS10 32 1 HDD-MON 4 8 +12V1 DC/PS
DA1 33
/PDIAG//CBLID 34
DA0 35
DA2 36 1 /RESET
ELP-09V/ELR-09V
/CS0 37 2 GND2 1 +12V1 1
/CS1 38 3 DD7 2 +5V1 2 (PAGE7/8)
3 GND2 3
㨪
㨪
/DASP 39
GND2 40 39 /DASP 4 +5V-HDD 4
40 GND2 HDD 5 GND2 5
1 +12V1 6 +24V2 6
2 GND2 7 GND1 7
3 GND2 8 +5V2 8
4 +5V-HDD 9 GND2 9
SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
1 /POM1/A 1
2 /POM1A 2 DELIVERYUNIT
3 /POM1B 3
4 /POM1/B 4 POM1
5 +24V2 5
CN-1 6 +24V2 6
B12B-PH-K-S
/POM1/A 1 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
/POM1A 2 1 /POM2/A 1
/POM1B 3 2 /POM2A 2
/POM1/B 4 3 /POM2B 3
+24V2 5 4 /POM2/B 4 POM2
+24V2 6 5 +24V2 5
/POM2/A 7 6 +24V2 6
/POM2A 8 SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N PHR-3
/POM2B 9 1 GND2 1 1 GND2
/POM2/B 10 2 POD1 2 2 POD1 POD1
+24V2 11 3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2
+24V2 12 ELP-09V/ELR-09V 4 GND2 4
5 POD2 5 PHR-3(RED)
1 +12V1 1
2 +5V1 2 6 +5V2 6 1 GND2
3 GND2 3 7 GND2 7 2 POD2 POD2
CN-3 4 +5V-HDD 4 8 POD3 8 3 +5V2
B4P-VH 5 GND2 5 9 +5V2 9
+24V2 4 6 +24V2 6
(PAGE7/8) 10 +24V1 10 SMP-03V-BC/SMR-03V-B PHR-3
GND1 3 7 GND1 7 11 /CFM-U1 11 1 GND2 1 1 GND2
+5V2 2 8 +5V2 8 12 GND2 12 2 POD3 2 2 POD3 POD3
GND2 1 9 GND2 9 13 +24V1 13 3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2
14 /CFM-U3 14
15 GND2 15 SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
16 TH-EX 16 1 +24V1 1
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 17 GND2 17 2 /CFM-U1 2 FM-U1
1 /PWM-RSV1 1 18 /PWM-RSV1 18 3 GND2 3
D. Paper transport section (1/2)
(PAGE6/8) 2 (NC) 2
1 +24V1 1
2 /CFM-U3 2 FM-U3
CN-5 GND2 1 3 GND2 3
B32B-PHDSS-B +24V1 2
POD1 3 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
/VFM-EX1 4 3 +24V1 1
+5V2 5 2 /PWM-RSV1 2 FM-U4
GND2 6 1 GND2 3
GND2 7
+24V1 8 S4B-PH-K-S
CN-4 CN-10 POD2 9 1 (NC)
B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B /VFM-EX2 10 2 (NC)
/POM1A 1 1 /POM1A +5V2 11 3 TH-EX INTPWB
/POM1XA 2 2 /POM1XA GND2 12 4 GND2
/POM1B 3 3 /POM1B GND2 13
/POM1XB 4 4 /POM1XB +24V1 14
/POM2A 5 5 /POM2A POD3 15 SMP-12V-NC/SMR-12V-N PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
/POM2XA 6 6 /POM2XA /VFM-EX3 16 1 +24V1 1 3 +24V1 1
/POM2B 7 7 /POM2B +5V2 17 2 /VFM-EX1 2 2 /VFM-EX1 2 FM-E1
/POM2XB 8 8 /POM2XB GND2 18 3 GND2 3 1 GND2 3
/ADM1A 9 9 /ADM1A +24V1 19 4 +24V1 4
DRIVER PWB /ADM1XA 10 10 /ADM1XA PCU PWB +24V1 20 5 /VFM-EX2 5 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
/ADM1B 11 11 /ADM1B /CFM-U1 21 6 GND2 6 3 +24V1 1
/ADM1XB 12 12 /ADM1XB /VFM-BKL 22 7 +24V1 7 2 /VFM-EX2 2 FM-E2
/ADM2A 13 13 /ADM2A GND2 23 8 /VFM-EX3 8 1 GND2 3
/ADM2XA 14 14 /ADM2XA GND2 24 9 GND2 9
/ADM2B 15 15 /ADM2B +24V 25 10 +24V1 10 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
/ADM2XB 16 16 /ADM2XB +24V1 26 11 /VFM-BKL 11 3 +24V1 1
/TRMA 17 17 /TRMA /CFM-U3 27 12 GND2 12 2 /VFM-EX3 2 FM-E3
/TRMXA 18 18 /TRMXA /CFM-U2 28 1 GND2 3
/TRMB 19 19 /TRMB GND2 29
/TRMXB 20 20 /TRMXB GND2 30 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
/VPMA 21 21 /VPMA TH-EX 31 3 +24V1 1
/VPMXA 22 22 /VPMXA GND2 32 2 /VFM-BKL 2 FM-BL
/VPMB 23 23 /VPMB 1 GND2 3
/VPMXB 24 24 /VPMXB
(NC) 25 25 (NC) SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
(NC) 26 26 (NC) 1 +24V1 1
2 /VFM-BKU 2 FM-BU
CN-6 3 GND2 3
B18B-PHDSS-B
GND2 1 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H

GND2 2 3 +24V1 1
+5V2 3 2 /CFM-U2 2
+5V2 4 1 GND2 3
FM-U2
/DM 5
/DVM 6
DMCLK 7 1 +38V B2PS-VH
DVMCLK 8 2 GND1
DM-T 9
CN-2 DVM-T 10 1 GND2 S5B-PH-K-S DM
B12B-PH-K-S GND2 11 2 +5V2
/TRM/A 1 +5V2 12 3 /DM
/TRMA 2 /FUM 13 4 DMCLK
/TRMB 3 FUMCLK 14 5 DM-T
/TRM/B 4 FUM-T 15 SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
+24V2 5 +24V1 16 1 +24V1 1
+24V2 6 /VFM-BKR 17 2 /VFM-BKR 2 FM-BR 1 +38V B2PS-VH
/VPM/A 7 GND2 18 3 GND2 3 2 GND1
/VPMA 8
/VPMB 9 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC 1 GND2 S5B-PH-K-S DVM
/VPM/B 10 1 /TRM/A 1 2 +5V2
+24V2 11 2 /TRMA 2 3 /DVM
+24V2 12 3 /TRMB 3 4 DVMCLK
4 /TRM/B 4 TRM 5 DVM-T
5 +24V2 5
6 +24V2 6
1 +38V B2P-VH
SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC 2 GND1
1 /VPM/A 1
2 /VPMA 2 1 GND2 B5B-PH-K-S FUM
3 /VPMB 3 2 +5V2
4 /VPM/B 4 VPM 3 /FUM
5 +24V2 5 CN-5 4 FUMCLK
6 +24V2 6 B16B-PADSS-1 5 FUM-T
+38V 10
+38V 11
(PAGE7/8) +38V 12
AC PWB GND1 14
GND1 15
GND1 16
PAPER FEED UNIT 1
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC PHR-2
1 +24V1 1 1 +24V1 1 1 T1LUM
M1PUS 2 /M1PUS 2 2 /M1PUS 2 2 GND2 T1LUM
3 GND2 3
4 M1PED 4
PHR-3 5 +5V2 5 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
GND2 1 6 GND2 6 1 +24V1 1
M1PED 2 7 M1LUD 7 2 /T1PUS 2 T1PUS
M1PED +5V2 3 8 +5V2 8
9 +5V-M1PFD 9
PHR-3(RED) 10 GND2 10 PHR-2
GND2 1 11 M1PFD 11 1 T2LUM
M1LUD 2 2 GND2 T2LUM
M1LUD
E. Paper transport section (2/2)
+5V2 3
CN-16 CN-14
PHR-3 B32B-PHDSS-B B24B-PHDSS-B SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
+5V-M1PFD 1 1 +24V1 T1LUM 1 1 +24V1 1
GND2 2 2 +24V1 T2LUM 2 2 /T2PUS 2 T2PUS
M1PFD M1PFD 3 3 /M1PUS GND2 3
4 /M2PUS GND2 4
5 GND2 +24V1 5
6 GND2 +24V1 6
7 M1PED /T1PUS 7
8 M2PED /T2PUS 8
9 +5V2 +5V2 9
10 +5V2 PCU +24V1 10
11 GND2 GND2 11
12 GND2 PWB /DSKLS 12
13 M1LUD T1LUD 13
PAPER FEED UNIT 2 14 M2LUD GND2 14
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC 15 +5V2 T1PED 15 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC S4B-PH-K-S
1 +24V1 1 1 +24V1 1 16 +5V2 T1SPD 16 1 +5V2 1 1 +5V2
M2PUS 2 /M2PUS 2 2 /M2PUS 2 17 +5V-M1PFD +5V2 17 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
3 GND2 3 18 +5V-M2PFD +5V2 18 3 T1LUD 3 3 T1LUD T1S PWB
4 M2PED 4 19 GND2 GND2 19 4 T1PED 4 4 T1PED
PHR-3 5 +5V2 5 20 GND2 GND2 20
GND2 1 6 GND2 6 21 M1PFD T2LUD 21
M2PED 2 7 M2LUD 7 22 M2PFD T2SPD 22
M2PED +5V2 3 8 +5V2 8 23 +24V1 T2PED 23
9 +5V-M2PFD 9 24 +24V1 +5V2 24
PHR-3(RED) 10 GND2 10 25 /M1PFC
GND2 1 11 M2PFD 11 26 /DSKPFC1
M2LUD 2 27 M1LUM
M2LUD +5V2 3 28 Vref
29 GND2
PHR-3 30 GND2 SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N S4B-PH-K-S
+5V-M2PFD 1 31 (NC) 1 +5V2 1 1 +5V2
GND2 2 32 M1PWS 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
M2PFD M2PFD 3 3 T2LUD 3 3 T2LUD T2S PWB
4 T2PED 4 4 T2PED

5 GND2 5
6 T1SPD 6
7 +5V2 7
8 GND2 8
9 T2SPD 9
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 10 +5V2 10 PHR-3
1 +24V1 2 1 GND2
M1PFC 2 /M1PFC 1 2 T1SPD
3 +5V2
T1SPD
PHR-2
M1LUM 1
M1LUM GND2 2
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H PHR-3
1 +24V1 2 1 GND2
DSKPFC1 2 /DSKPFC1 1 2 T2SPD
3 +5V2
T2SPD
Soldering SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
Vref 3 1 Vref 1
GND2 1 2 GND2 2
M1PWS M1PWS 2 3 M1PWS 3
1 +24V1 3 CN-5
T1PFC 2 (NC) 2 B2P3-VH-BK
3 /T1PFC 1 (PAGE7/8) WH-L 3
WH PWB WH-N 1
1 +24V1 2 SRA-21T-4
DSKPFC2 2 /DSKPFC2 1
PHR-2
M2LUM 1
M2LUM GND2 2 CN-6
B10P-VH OPTION
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H +5V2 7 ELR-12V/ELP-12V
1 +24V1 2 (PAGE7/8) CN-3 4 WH-L 4
M2PFC 2 /M2PFC 1 DC/PS B9P-VH 12 WH-N 12
+24V4 7 5 F-GND 5
OPTION GND1 8
ELP-12V/ELR-12V ELR-15V/ELP-15V
1 TXD-FIN 1 1 (NC) 1
2 RXD-FIN 2 2 (NC) 2
3 /DTR-FIN 3 3 TXD-LCC 3
4 /DSR-FIN 4 4 RXD-LCC 4
5 RES-FIN 5 5 /DTR-LCC 5
6 +24V5 6 6 /DSR-LCC 6 LCC
FIN 7 +5V2 7 7 RES-LCC 7
8 GND2 8 8 F-GND 8
9 GND1 9 9 +5V2 9
10 F-GND 10 10 GND2 10
11 +24V6 11 11 +24V4 11
12 GND1 12 12 GND1 12
13 /TRC-LCC 13
F. Transport/Option section
CN-17 CN-18 14 (+3.3V) 14

B30B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 15 (GND1) 15
OPTION 1 M2LUM GND2 1
2 +24V1 +5V-MPFD2 2
3 GND2 TXD-LCC 3
4 /T1PFC GND2 4
5 +24V1 RXD-LCC 5 SRA-21T-4
6 +24V1 MPFD2 6
7 /M2PFC /DTR-LCC 7
8 /DSKPFC2 +5V-LPPD 8
FIN 9 GND2 /DSR-LCC 9
10 GND2 GND2 10 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N PHR-3
1 M2LUM 1 11 TXD-FIN RES-LCC 11 1 +5V-MPFD2 1 1 +5V-MPFD2 1 1 +5V-MPFD2
2 GND2 2 12 +5V2 LPPD 12 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 MPFD2
3 +24V1 3 13 RXD-FIN /TRC-LCC 13 3 MPFD2 3 3 MPFD2 3 3 MPFD2
4 /M2PFC 4 14 /MM (NC) 14 4 +5V-LPPD 4 4 +5V-LPPD 4
5 GND2 5 15 /DTR-FIN 5 GND2 5 5 GND2 5 PHR-3
6 TXD-FIN 6 16 MMCLK 6 LPPD 6 6 LPPD 6 1 +5V-LPPD
ELP-12V 7 RXD-FIN 7 17 /DSR-FIN 2 GND2 LPPD
TXD-FIN 1 8 /DTR-FIN 8 18 MM-T 3 LPPD
RXD-FIN 2 9 /DSR-FIN 9 19 RES-FIN
/DTR-FIN 3 10 RES-FIN 10 20 TSW-LED
/DSR-FIN 4 SMR-10V-N/SMP-10V-NC 21 (NC)
RES-FIN 5 22 TSW
+24V5 6 23 GND2
+5V2 7 24 GND2
GND2 8 25 TANSET
GND1 9 26 GND2
F-GND 10 27 +5V2
+24V6 11 28 DSW-DSK
GND1 12 29 (NC) MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT
ELP-12V/ELR-12V 30 +5V2 PS-187
IST TXD-FIN 1 TXD-FIN 1
RXD-FIN 2 RXD-FIN 2 DSW-R
/DTR-FIN 3 /DTR-FIN 3 PCU
/DSR-FIN 4 /DSR-FIN 4
RES-FIN 5 RES-FIN 5 PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H DF3-3S-2C
+24V5 6 +24V5 6
PWB 1 GND2 9 1 GND2
+5V2 7 +5V2 7 2 MPLD1 8 2 MPLD1 MPLD1
DRAWER
GND2 8 GND2 8 3 +5V2 7 3 +5V2
GND1 9 GND1 9 QR/P4-24S-C(01)/ 4 MPLD2 6
F-GND 10 F-GND 10 SRA-21T-4 QR/P4-24P-C(01) 5 MTOP1 5 DF3-3S-2C
+24V6 11 +24V6 11 1 DSW-F(R) 1 6 MTOP2 4 1 GND2
GND1 12 GND1 12 2 GND2 2 7 GND2 3 2 MPLD2 MPLD2
3 MPLD1 3 8 MPFPWS 2 3 +5V2
4 +5V2 4 9 Vref 1
5 MPLD2 5 179228-2
6 MTOP1 6 1 MTOP1
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 7 MTOP2 7 2 GND2 MTOP1
1 +5V2 1 8 GND2 8
(PAGE7/8) 2 (NC) 2 CN-25 CN-13 9 MPFPWS 9

B6B-PH-K-S B26B-PHDSS-B 10 Vref 10 179228-2
1 +5V-T1PPD DSW-F(R) 1 11 /MPFC 11 1 MTOP2
CN-4 2 (NC) (NC) 2 12 +24V1 12 2 GND2 MTOP2
B7P-VH 3 T1PPD (NC) 3 13 +24V1 13
+24V5 1 4 (NC) GND2 4 14 /MFPUS 14
(PAGE7/8) GND1 2 5 GND2 +24V1 5 15 GND2 15 PHR-3
DC/PS +24V6 3 6 (NC) MPLD1 6 16 MPED 16 1 GND2
GND1 4 /MFPUS 7 17 +5V2 17 2 MPFPWS MPFPWS
+5V2 8 18 +24V1 18 3 Vref
GND2 9 19 /MPFGS 19
MPLD2 10 20 +5V-MPFD1 20 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
CN-5 MPED 11 21 GND2 21 3 +24V1 1
B16B-PADSS-1 MTOP1 12 22 MPFD1 22 2 (NC) 2 MPFC
(PAGE7/8) GND1 13 +5V2 13 (
23 NC ) 23 1 /MPFC 3
AC PWB +38V 9 MTOP2 14 24 DSW-R 24
+24V1 15 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
MPFPWS 16 1 +24V1 1
/MPFGS 17 2 /MFPUS 2 MFPUS
B2PS-VH Vref 18
+38V 1 +5V-MPFD1 19
GND1 2 /MPFC 20 DF3-3S-2C
MPFD1 21 1 GND2
S5B-PH-K-S +24V1 22 2 MPED MPED
MM GND2 1 GND2 23 3 +5V2
+5V2 2 GND2 24
(NC) 25 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
/MM 3
MMCLK 4 DSW-R 26 1 +24V1 1
MM-T 5 2 /MPFGS 2 MPFGS
PHR-3 PHR-3
GND2 1 1 +5V-MPFD1
TANSET TANSET 2 2 GND2
+5V2 3 3 MPFD1
MPFD1
PHR-3 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N
+5V-T1PPD 1 3 +5V-T1PPD 1 1 +5V-T1PPD 1
T1PPD GND2 2 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2
T1PPD 3 1 T1PPD 3 3 T1PPD 3
4 GND2 4
PHR-3 5 DSW-DSK 5
GND2 1 6 +5V2 6
DSWDSK DSW-DSK 2
+5V2 3
1 +24V1 1
2 /CFM-DV 2 FM-DV
3 GND2 3
2 +24V1 1
1 /RRC 2 RRC
LEFT DOOR UNIT

PS-187
DSW-L
PHR-3
DRIVER 1 +5V-APPD1
2 GND2 APPD1
PWB 3 APPD1
CN-5
B9B-PH-K-S PHR-3
/ADM1/A 1 1 +5V-APPD2
/ADM1A 2 2 GND APPD2
/ADM1B 3 3 APPD2
G. Left door transport section
/ADM1/B 4
/ADM2/A 5 SMR-12V-N/SMP-12V-NC PHR-3
/ADM2A 6 1 +5V-PFD2 1 1 +5V-PFD2
/ADM2B 7 2 PFD2 2 2 GND2 PFD2
/ADM2/B 8 3 +5V-THPS2 3 3 PFD2
+24V2 9 4 THPS2 4
5 /TCB-PWM 5 179228-3
6 /TCBIAS 6 1 THPS2
7 DSW-L 7 2 GND2 THPS2
8 DSW-L 8 3 +5V-THPS2
9 GND2 9
10 TURM 10 PHR-2
11 +24V1 11 1 TURM
12 /CFM-ADU 12 2 GND2 TBRM
Un-equipping
DRAWER PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
1 DSW-L 1 3 +24V1 1
2 /ADUM2/A 2 2 /CFM-ADU 2 FM-ADU
3 /ADUM2A 3 1 GND2 3
PCU 4 /ADUM2B 4
5 /ADUM2/B 5
PWB 6 +5V-APPD1 6 B6B-PH-K-S FPS-187
7 +5V-APPD2 7 1 DSW-L Bias
8 +5V-PFD2 8 2 DSW-L
CN-7 9 +5V-DSW 9 3 /TCBIAS
B32B-PHDSS-B 10 +5V-AINPD 10 4 /TCB-PWM TB PWB
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
+24V1 1 11 (NC) 11 5 GND2
+24V1 2 12 /ADUM1/A 12 6 F-GND
/CFM-DV 3 13 /ADUM1A 13
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
/RRC 4 14 /ADUM1B 14
GND2 5 15 /ADUM1/B 15 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
(NC) 6 16 +24V1 16 1 /ADUM2/A 1
+24V1 7 17 +24V(DSW) 17 2 /ADUM2A 2
+24V(DSW) 8 18 PFD2 18 3 /ADUM2B 3
+5V-APPD1 9 19 /CFM-ADU 19 4 /ADUM2/B 4 ADUM2

PFD2 10 20 THPS2 20 5 +24V2 5
+5V-APPD2 11 21 TURM 21 6 +24V2 6
/CFM-ADU 12 22 /TCB-PWM 22
+5V-PFD2 13 23 /TCBIAS 23
THPS2 14 24 +5V-THPS2 24
+5V-DSW 15 25 GND2 25 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
TURM 16 26 GND2 26 1 /ADUM1/A 1
+5V-AINPD 17 27 APPD1 27 2 /ADUM1A 2
/TCB-PWM 18 28 APPD2 28 3 /ADUM1B 3
(NC) 19 29 AINPD 29 4 /ADUM1/B 4 ADUM1
(NC) 20 30 DSW-ADU 30 5 +24V2 5
+5V-THPS2 21 31 /DGS 31 6 +24V2 6
/TCBIAS 22 32 +24V2 32
(NC) 23 QR/P4-32S-C(01)/QR/P4-32P-C(01)
APPD1 24
DSW-ADU 25 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 179228-3
APPD2 26 3 AINPD 1 1 AINPD
/DGS 27 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 AINPD
AINPD 28 1 +5V-AINPD 3 3 +5V-AINPD
GND2 29
GND2 30 179228-3
(NC) 31 1 DSW-ADU
DSW-L 32 2 GND2 DSW
3 +5V-DSW
2 +24V1 1
1 DGS 2 DGS
PROCESS UNIT
SMR-03V-B/SMP-03V-BC
1 +12V2 1
2 PCS 2
3 PCS-LED 3
PCS
SMR-03V-B/SMP-03V-BC
1 +12V2 1
2 DMS 2
3 DMS-LED 3
DMS
DRAWER
TSDR-20V-K/TSDP-20V-K PHR-3
1 PCS-LED 1 1 +24V-DL
TONER HOPPER 2 PCS 2 2 (NC)
PHR-4 TSDP-12V-K/TSDR-12V-K 3 +12V2 3 3 /DL
DL
+24V1 1 1 +24V1 1 4 DMS-LED 4
TFSD 2 2 TFSD 2 5 DMS 5 SMP-02V-BC/SMR-02V-B
H. Process section
TFSD (NC) 3 3 GND2 3 6 +12V2 6 1 +24V1 1

GND2 4 4 (NC) 4 CN-11 CN-8 7 +24V-DL 7 2 /PSPS 2 PSPS
5 TM1a 5 B12B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B 8 /DL 8
6 TM1b 6 1 TM1a PCS-LED 1 9 +24V1 9
7 (NC) 7 2 GND2 DMS-LED 2 10 /PTDL 10 S4B-PH-K-S
8 GND2 8 3 TM1b PCS 3 11 (NC) 11 1 (NC)
9 +5V2 9 4 +5V2 DMS 4 12 +24V1 12 2 (NC)
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 10 CRUCLK 10 5 TM2a +12V2 5 13 /PSPS 13 3 TH-CL INTPWB
1 TM1a 1 11 CRUSDA 11 6 CRUCLK +12V2 6 14 TH-CL 14 4 GND2
TM1 2 TM1b 2 12 GND2 12 7 TM2b +24V-DL 7 15 GND2 15
8 CRUSDA +24V1 8 16 (NC) 16
9 +24V1 /DL 9 17 (NC) 17
DRAWERTSR-04V-K 10 GND2 /PTDL 10 18 (NC) 18
SRA-01T-3.2
GND2 1 11 TFSD +24V1 11 19 (NC) 19
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
+5V2 2 12 TNCA TH-CL 12 20 GND2 20 SRA-01T-3.2
CRUM CRUCLK 3 /PSPS 13
CRUSDA 4 GND2 14
+5V2 15 PHNR-05-H+BU05P-TR-P-H
TLS 16 1 +5V2 5
HUS-TC 17 2 HUS-TC 4
GND2 18 3 GND2 3
GND2 19 4 TLS 2
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC /PWM-RSV1 20 5 GND2 1
1 TM2a 1 179228-2
TM2 2 TM2b 2 SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 1 TLS
1 /PWM-RSV1 1 2 GND2 TLS
2 (NC) 2 (PAGE2/8)
3 +24V1 1
2 (NC) 2 T2PFC
1 /T2PFC 3
2 +24V1 1
1 /HPFC 2 HPFC
CN-1 CN-15 CN-12 PS UNIT
B16B-PH-K-S B34B-PHDSS-B PCU PWB B30B-PHDSS-B PHNR-06-H+BU06P-TR-P-H PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
PS-187(RD) DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F +24V1 1 1 +24V1 6 2 +24V1 1
SAA-21T-4L MHV GND2 2 2 (NC) +24V1 2 2 /PSBC 5 1 /PSBC 2 PSBC
GND2 3 3 GND2 /T2PFC 3 3 +5V2 4
PS-187(YL) /GBPWM 4 4 GND2 /HPLS 4 4 PPD 3
SAA-21T-4L GB /MHVREM 5 5 /GBPWM +24V1 5 5 GND2 2 179228-3
MHV-T 6 6 /MHVREM DVCH1 6 1 +24V1 1 6 (NC) 1 1 +5V2
FPS-187(WH) /THV+PWM 7 7 MHV-T /HPFC 7 2 /PSBC 2 2 PPD
SRA-21T-3 THV HV THV+REM 8 8 /THV+PWM DVCH2 8 3 +5V2 3 3 GND2
PPD
/CHV-PWM 9 9 THV+REM +24V1 9 4 PPD 4
PS-187(GR) /CHV-REM 10 10 /CHV-PWM DVCH3 10 5 GND2 5 SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC PHR-3(RED)
Bias /CHVACPWM 11 11 /CHV-REM /PSBC 11 6 +5V-MPRD1 6 1 +5V-MPRD1 1 1 +5V-MPRD1
/CHVACREM 12 12 /CHVACPWM DVCH4 12 7 GND2 7 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
/DVPWM 13 13 /CHVACREM +5V2 13 8 MPRD1 8 3 MPRD1 3 3 MPRD1
MPRD1
/DVREM 14 14 /DVPWM +24V1 14 9 +5V-MPRD2 9 4 +5V-MPRD2 4
HVREM 15 15 /DVREM PPD 15 10 GND2 10 5 GND2 5 PHR-3
+24V1 16 16 HVREM TCS 16 11 MPRD2 11 6 MPRD2 6 1 +5V-MPRD2

17 +24V1 GND2 17 12 +24V1 12 7 +24V1 7 2 GND2
18 (NC) GND2 18 13 /HPLS 13 8 /HPLS 8 3 MPRD2
MPRD2
19 GND2 +5V-MPRD1 19 14 (NC) 14
20 GND2 TSGOUT 20 15 (NC) 15
1 +24V1 1
21 M1SS1 GND2 21 16 (NC) 16
2 /HPLS 2 HPLS
22 M2SS1 GND2 22 17 (NC) 17
23 M1SS2 MPRD1 23 18 (NC) 18
S6B-PH-K-S 24 M2SS2 +5V2 24 SMR-18V-N/SMP-18V-NC
(NC) 1 SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N 25 M1SS3 +5V-MPRD2 25
GND2 2 1 GND2 1 26 M2SS3 HUS-DV 26
M1SS1 3 2 M1SS1 2 27 M1SS4 GND2 27
M1SS PWB M1SS2 4 3 M1SS2 3 28 M2SS4 GND2 28
M1SS3 5 4 M1SS3 4 29 GND2 MPRD2 29
M1SS4 6 5 M1SS4 5 30 GND2 TH-DV 30
6 GND2 6 31 M1SPD
DEVELOPER UNIT
DRAWER
PHR-3 7 M1SPD 7 32 M2SPD
1 DVCH1 1
GND2 1 8 +5V2 8 33 +5V2
2 DVCH2 2
M1SPD 2 9 (NC) 9 34 +5V2
M1SPD 3 DVCH3 3 51021-0400
+5V2 3 10 GND2 10
4 DVCH4 4 1 TSGOUT
11 M2SS1 11
5 +24V1 5 2 +24V1
S6B-PH-K-S 12 M2SS2 12
6 TCS 6 3 TCS TCS
(NC) 1 13 M2SS3 13
7 GND2 7 4 GND2
GND2 2 14 M2SS4 14
8 TSGOUT 8
M2SS1 3 15 GND2 15
9 (NC) 9
M2SS PWB M2SS2 4 16 M2SPD 16
10 GND2 10
M2SS3 5 17 +5V2 17
(NC) 11 (NC) 11 ZHR-4
M2SS4 6 18 18
12 +5V2 12 1 +5V2
13 HUS-DV 13 2 HUS-DV
PHR-3 14 GND2 14 3 GND2 HUS-DV
GND2 1 15 TH-DV 15 4 TH-DV
M2SPD 2 16 (NC) 16
M2SPD +5V2 3 17 (NC) 17
18 (NC) 18
19 (NC) 19
20 DV-Bias 20 SRA-01T-3.2
QR/P8-20S-C(01)/QR/P8-20P-C(01)
FPS-187 SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC
OPTION 1 DSW-L(F) 1
179228-2
DSW-F 2 (NC) 2
+24V1 1
3 DSW-F 3
PNC /PNC 2
4 (NC) 4 CN-1
5 +24V1 5 B06B-PASK
6 /MSWPR 6 1 +12VS
7 +24V1 7 2 GND2
8 /PNC 8 3 AC-MON
FUSINGUNIT 4 FW-SUB
DRAWER 5 HLCNT3
19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6/19LR-RWZV-K2GG-R6 6 GND2
179228-3 PHNR-05-H+BU05P-TR-P-H RCZR-10V-PS
+5V-WEBENDD 1 5 +5V-WEBENDD 1 10 +5V-WEBENDD 1 CN-2
WEBENDD 2 4 WEBENDD 2 9 WEBENDD 2 CN-24 B28B-PHDSS-B
WEBEND GND2 3 3 GND2 3 8 GND2 3 B6B-PH-K-S 1 GND2
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 1 +5V-WEBENDD 2 +24VPR
2 WEBMA 4 7 WEBMA 4
2 WEBENDD 3 GND2
1 WEBMA 1 1 WEBMB 5 6 WEBMB 5
WEBM 3 GND2 4 GND2
2 WEBMB 2 5 (NC) 6 PCUPWB
4 WEBMA 5 HLPR12
4 (NC) 7
5 WEBMB 6 RTH1
PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H 3 (NC) 8
4 RTH1 1 2 (NC) 9 6 Reserve7 7 HLPR3
RTH1 3 GND2 2 1 (NC) 10 8 GND2
2 RTH2 3 RCZR-09V-PS 9 HLCNT1
1 GND2 4 1 RTH1 9 10 RTH2
RTH2 2 GND2 8 11 HLCNT2
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 3 RTH2 7 12 GND2
2 RTH3 1 4 GND2 6 13 +24V1
RTH3 1 GND2 2 5 RTH3 5 14 RTH3
6 GND2 4 15 /MSWPR
7 (NC) 3 16 GND2
SRA-51T-3 SRA-51T-3
HL1 8 (NC) 2 17 +24V1
9 (NC) 1 18 +24V1
CN-1 CN-4 CN-3
SRA-51T-3 SRA-51T-3 19 DSW-FD
B03P-VL B06B-PASK B9P-VH
HL2 20 /PNC
1 HL-1L +12VS 1 +24V1 1
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187 21 GND2
VLP-01V/VLR-01VF 2 HL3-L GND2 2 GND1 2 22 GND2
1 HL-2L 1 3 HL2-L AC-MON 3 +24V2 3 23 DSW-L(F)
FW-SUB 4 GND1 4
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187 24 GND2
VLP-01V/VLR-01VF CN-2 HLCNT3 5 +24V3 5
1 HL-2L 1 25 GND2
1 HL-1L 1 B03P-VL-R GND2 6 GND1 6
2 HL-1N 2 SUB 26 GND2
SLR-01VF/SLP-01V 3 HL-2N 3 1 HL1-L +24V4 7 27 GND2
GND1
I. Power source peripheral section
1 HL-3N 1 4 HL-3N 4 2 HL2-N P/S PWB 8 28 DSW-F

HL3 CN-3 FW 9
5 HL-3L 5 3 HL3-N CN-20
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187 B6B-PH-K-S B9P-VH
6 HL-1L 6
+24VPR 1 CN-5 1 +24V1
#250(GR) HLPR12 2 B4P-VH 2 +12V2
Lin GND2 3 +12V2 1 3 +5V2
HLCNT2 4 GND2 2 4 +3.3V
#250(BL) HLCNT1 5
Lout +12V2 3 5 GND1
GND2 6 GND2 4 6 GND2
L1in
#250(WH) 7 GND2
Lout #250(RD) CN-6 8 GND2
Nin B10P-VH 9 FW
#250(BL) #250(BK) VLR-02V/VLP-02V +5V2 1 ELR-09V/ELP-09V
MSW L2in #250(YL) L(HL) 1 L(HL) 1 GND2 2 1 +12V1 1
Nout 2 N(HL) 2 +5V2 3 2 +5V1 2
#110(WH) #250(YL) N1in #250(WH) GND2 4 3 GND2 3
/MSWPR MSWL N(HL) +5V2 5 4 +5V-HDD 4 PCU
GND2 6 5 GND2 5
(PAGE1/8)
#110(WH) #250(WH) +5V2 7 6 +24V2 6 PWB
+24V1 Nout GND2 8 7 GND1 7
(PAGE2/8)
+5V2 9 8 +5V2 8
#250(BL) GND2 10 9 GND2 9
#250(RD) #250(BK) VLR-02V/VLP-02V-1 DCP/S
N2in
Lout L(HL) 1 L(HL) 1 CN-7
#250(YL) 2 N(HL) 2 B2P-VH
#250(GR) #250(YL) +3. 3V 1
MSWN
Nout N(HL) GND2 2
#250(BK) VLP-03V-R/VLR-03V-RVLR-03V-R/VLP-03V-R #250(BL) CN-2

Lout 1 Lout 1 1 Lout 1 L1in B8P-VH (PAGE1/8)
2 L1in 2 2 L1in 2 LFout /DCCNT 1
#250(WH) 3 L2in 3 3 L2in 3 CN-ACin /MSW-MON 2
Lin #250(BK) B2P3-VH GND2 3 SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N
MRSW L2i n CN-3 1 L(DC) +5V1 4 1 +24V1 1
#250(BK) VLP-03V/VLR-03V VLR-03V/VLP-03V B2P3-VH 2 (NC) GND2 5 2 /CFM-DC1 2
Nout 3 Nout 3 1 Nout 1 #250(YL) L(DC) 1 3 N(DC) +12V1 6 3 GND2 3 CN-19
2 N1in 2 2 N1in 2 N1in (NC) 2 CN-1 GND2 7 CN-8 4 +24V1 4 B24B-PHDSS-B
#250(WH) 1 N2in 1 3 N2in 3 NFou N(DC) 3 B03B-XASK-1 +12V1 8 B6PS-VH 5 /CFM-DC2 5 1 +24V1
Nin 1 MSWN1 1 +24V3 6 GND2 6 2 +24V1
ELP-02V/ELR-02V ELR-02V/ELP-02V #250(WH) CN-2 2 (NC) CN-4 2 GND1 SCN 3 /CFM-DC1
1 MSWL 1 1 MSWL 1 N2in B2P3-VH-BK 3 MSWL1 B7P-VH 3 +12V2 4 /CFM-DC2
2 MSWN 2 2 MSWN 2 MSWN1 1 +24V5 1 4 GND2 PWB 5 GND2

CN-1 (NC) 2 GND1 2 5 +5V2
(PAGE7/8) 6 GND2
OPTION B2P3-VH-BL MSWL1 3 +24V6 3 6 GND2 7 +12VS
VLP-06V/VLR-06V 1 MSWL CN-8 GND1 4 8 /WHPR1
1 LFout 1 2 (NC) B6P-VH +24V7 5 ELR-15V/ELP-15V 9 BUP-PR
2 F-GND 2 3 MSWN 1 +38V1 GND1 6 9 +5V2 9 10 +24V1
3 (NC) 3 2 GND1 (NC) 7 11 +24V4 11 11 GND2
FAX 4 NFout 4 3 +38V2 12 GND1 12
(PAGE4/8) 12 GND2
5 (NC) 5 CN-5 4 GND1 13 +24V-INT
Standard:JPN 6 (NC) 6 B16B-PADSS-1 5 +38V3 ELR-12V/ELP-12V 14 +38V-MON
+38V1 1 6 GND1 6 +24V5 6 15 INTPR
OPTION:EX100/EX200 AC PWB +38V2 2 9 GND1 9 16 GND2
+38V3 3 11 +24V6 11 (PAGE4/8) 17 GND2
CN-2
(NC) 4 B2PS-VH 12 GND1 12 18 /WHPR2
ELP-02V/ELR-02V B2P3-VH-BL SRA-51T -4
2 WH-N(SCN) 2 1 WH-N(SCN) GND1 5 1 +38V SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 19 INTPR2
CN-1 GND1 6 2 GND1 MM (PAGE4/8) 1 +5V2 1 20 +24V1
WH-SCN 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 2 (NC)
B2P3-VH- R #187(WH) GND1 7 2 GND2 2 21 GND2
3 WH-L(SCN) (PAGE4/8)
WH-N 1 WH-N (NC) 8 22 (NC)
CN-3
(NC) 2 #187(BK) +38V 9 B2PS-VH 23 /MSW-MON
ELP-02V/ELR-02V B2P3-VH
WH-L 3 WH-L +38V 10 1 +38V 24 /DCCNT
2 WH-N(DSK1) 2 1 WH-N(DSK1)
+38V 11 2 GND1 DM (PAGE2/8)
WH-DSK1 1 WH-L(DSK1) 1 2 (NC) WH +38V 12
3 WH-L(DSK1)
GND1 13
CN-4 PWB GND1 14 B2PS-VH
ELP-02V/ELR-02V B2P3-VH GND1 15 1 +38V
2 WH-N(DSK2) 2 1 WH-N(DSK2) CN-6 GND1 2 GND1 DVM (PAGE2/8)
WH-DSK2 16
1 WH-L(DSK2) 1 2 (NC) B3B-PH-K-S PS-250
3 WH-L(DSK2) /WHPR2 1
CN-5 B2PS-VH
ELP-12V/ELR-12V (NC) 2 WH
-SW
B2P3-VH-BK 1 +38V
12 WH-N(LCC) 12 +24V1 3 2 GND1 FUM (PAGE2/8)
1 WH-N(LCC) #250(BK) CN-4
5 F-GND 5
2 (NC) B9B-PH-K-S
4 WH-L(LCC) 4 L
3 WH-L(LCC) +12VS 1
SRA-21T-4 BUP-PR 2
GND2 3
#250(WH) +38V-MON 4
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N
N INTPR2 5
1 +24V1 3 1 +24V1 1
GND2 6
FM-DC1 2 /CFM-DC1 2 2 /CFM-DC1 2
INTPR 7
3 GND2 1 3 GND2 3
GND2 8
PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 4 +24V1 4
+24VPR 9
1 +24V1 3 5 /CFM-DC2 5
2 /CFM-DC2 2 6 GND2 6
FM-DC2 3 GND2 1
(PAGE7/8)
CN-1 B06B-PASK CN-7 B32B-PHDSS-B CN-13 B26B-PHDSS-B CN-18 B14B-PHDSS-B
1 +12VS +24V1 2 1 +24V1 (NC) 2 1 DSW-F(R) +5V-MPFD2 2 1 GND2
RRC
2 GND2 /RRC 4 3 /CFM-DV CFM-DV GND2 4 3 (NC) MPFD2 GND2 4 3 TXD-LCC
3 AC-MON (NC) 6 5 GND2 MPLD1 6 5 +24V1 MPFD2 6 5 RXD-LCC
SUB P/S
4 FW-SUB +24V(DSW) 8 7 +24V1 +5V2 8 7 /MFPUS +5V-LPPD 8 7 /DTR-LCC LCC
5 HLCNT3 PFD2 10 9 +5V-APPD1 MPLD2 10 9 GND2 LPPD GND2 10 9 /DSR-LCC
6 GND2 /CFM-ADU 12 11 +5V-APPD2 MTOP1 12 11 MPED LPPD 12 11 RES-LCC
THPS2 14 13 +5V-PFD2 MPF MTOP2 14 13 +5V2 MPF (NC) 14 13 /TRC-LCC
TURM 16 15 +5V-DSW MPFPWS 16 15 +24V1
CN-2 B28B-PHDSS-B /TCB-PWM 18 17 +5V-AINPD Vref 18 17 /MPFGS
+24VPR 2 1 GND2 ADU GND2 20 19 (NC) ADU /MPFC 20 19 +5V-MPFD1
SUB P/S
GND2 4 3 GND2 /TCBIAS 22 21 +5V-THPS2 +24V1 22 21 MPFD1
RTH1 6 5 HLPR12 APPD1 24 23 /FBIAS GND2 24 23 GND2
GND2 SUB P/S
8 7 HLPR3 APPD2 26 25 DSW-ADU DSW-R 26 25 (NC)
RTH2 10 9 HLCNT1 AINPD 28 27 /DGS
RTH
GND2 12 11 HLCNT2 GND2 30 29 GND2
RTH3 14 13 +24V1 DSW-L 32 31 (NC)
MSW
GND2 16 15 /MSWPR
+24V1 18 17 +24V1
PNC
/PNC 20 19 DSW-FD
GND2 22 21 GND2
J. PCU connector table
GND2 24 23 DSW-L(F) DSW-F

CN-8 B20B-PHDSS-B CN-14 B24B-P HDSS- B CN-19 B24B-PHDSS-B
GND2 26 25 GND2 /DMS-LED 2 1 /PCS-LED T2LUM 2 1 T1LUM +24V1 2 1 +24V1
DSW-F DSW-F 28 27 GND2 T2LUM T1LUM
DMS DMS 4 3 PCS PCS GND2 4 3 GND2 CFM-DC2 /CFM-DC2 4 3 /CFM-DC1 CFM-DC1
+12V2 6 5 +12V2 +24V1 6 5 +24V1 GND2 6 5 GND2
T2PUS T1PUS
+24V1 8 7 +24V-DL /T2PUS 8 7 /T1PUS /WHPR1 8 7 +12VS
PTDL DL +24V1
CN-3 B4P-VH /PTDL 10 9 /DL +24V1 10 9 +5V2 10 9 BUP-PR
DSKLS
TH-CL 12 11 +24V1 / DSKLS 12 11 GND2 T1LUD WH-DV GND2 12 11 GND2
1 +12V1 TH-C L PSPS
2 +12V1 GND2 14 13 /PSPS GND2 14 13 T1LUD T1PED +38V-MON 14 13 +24V-INT
HDD AC
TLS 16 15 +5V2 T1SPD T1SPD 16 15 T1PED GND2 16 15 INTPR
3 GND2 TLS
GND2 18 17 HUS-TC HUS-TC +5V2 18 17 +5V2 /WHPR2 18 17 GND2
4 GND2
CFM-U4 /PWM-RSV1 20 19 GND2 GND2 20 19 GND2 T2LUD WH +24V1 20 19 INTPR2
T2SPD T2SPD 22 21 T2LUD T2PED (NC) 22 21 GND2
GND2 24 23 T2PED DCPS /DCCNT 24 23 /MSW-MON DCPS
CN-4 24FMN-BTK-A
1 /LED3 CN-9 B24B-PHDSS-B
2 /LED2 +5VS 2 1 /PRON-FAX
3 /LED1 PROFF-CNT 4 3 /POF
4 KEY6 FWP-PCU 6 5 /MSW-OFF CN-15 B34B-PHDSS-B CN-20 B9P-VH
5 KEY5 /DCCNT 8 7 RES-PCU (NC) 2 1 DSW-F 1 +24V1
6 KEY4 DTR-PCU 10 9 TXD-PCU GND2 4 3 GND2 2 +12V2
7 KEY3 GND2 12 11 GND2
MOTH MOTH /MHVREM 6 5 /GBPWM 3 +5V2
8 KEY2 PAGE 14 13 DSR-PCU /THV+PWM 8 7 MHV-T 4 +3.3V1
9 KEY1 GND2 16 15 GND2 HV /CHV-PWM 10 9 THV+REM HV 5 GND1 POWER
10 /OP-SET HSYNC 18 17 RXD-PCU /CHVACPWM 12 11 /CHV-REM 6 GND2
11 GND2 GND2 20 19 GND2 /DVPWM 14 13 /CHVACREM 7 GND2
12 +5V2 GND2 22 21 VIDEOin+
PRT-OP HVREM 16 15 /DVREM 8 GND2
13 +5V2 GND2 24 23 VIDEOin- (NC) 18 17 +24V1 9 FW
14 D7
GND2 20 19 GND2
15 D6
M2SS1 22 21 M1SS1
16 D5
M2SS M2SS2 24 23 M1SS2 M1SS
17 D4
CN-10 B26B-PHDSS-B M2SS3 26 25 M1SS3 CN-21 B12B -PHD SS-B
18 D3
/POM1XA 2 1 /POM1A M2SS4 28 27 M1SS4 +24V1 2 1 +24V1
19 D2 POM1 POM1
/POM1XB 4 3 /POM1B GND2 30 29 GND2 CFM-R2 /CFM-R2 4 3 /CFM-R1 CFM-R1
20 D1
/POM2XA 6 5 /POM2A M2SPD M2SPD 32 31 M1SPD M1SPD GND2 6 5 GND2
21 D0 POM2 POM2
/POM2XB 8 7 /POM2B +5V2 34 33 +5V2 (NC) 8 7 +24V1
22 /OP-CS
/ADM1XA 10 9 /ADM1A TH-RA 10 9 /CFM-R3 CFM-R3
23 /OP-R/W ADM1 ADM1 TH-RA
/ADM1XB 12 11 /ADM1B GND2 12 11 GND2
24 /OP-RS
/ADM2XA 14 13 /ADM2A
ADM2 ADM2
/ADM2XB 16 15 /ADM2B
CN-5 B32B-PHDSS-B /TRMXA 18 17 /TRMA CN-16 B32B-PHDSS-B CN-22 B30B-PHDSS-B
+24V1 2 1 GND2 TRM TRM +24V1 2 1 +24V1 +5VLD 2 1 GND2
/TRMXB 20 19 /TRMB M1PUS
M2PUS 4 3
VFM-EX1 /VFM-EX1 4 3 POD1 POD1 /VPMXA 22 21 /VPMA /M2PUS 4 3 /M1PUS GND2 GND2

GND2 6 5 +5V2 VPM VPM GND2 6 5 GND2 /PGMCLK 6 5 /READY
/VPMXB 24 23 /VPMB
+24V1 8 7 GND2 (NC) 26 25 (NC) M2PED M2PED 8 7 M1PED M1PED +24V1 8 7 /START
VFM-EX2 /VFM-EX2 10 9 POD2 POD2 +5V2 10 9 +5V2 +24V1 10 9 (NC)
GND2 12 11 +5V2 GND2 12 11 GND2 GND2 12 11 +5V2
+24V1 14 13 GND2 M2LUD M2LUD 14 13 M1LUD M1LUD GND2 14 13 +5V2
VFM-EX3 /V FM-E X3 16 15 POD3 POD3 +5V2 16 15 +5V2 LSU TEST2 16 15 TEST LSU
GND2 18 17 +5V2 +5V-M2PFD 18 17 +5V-M1PFD GND2 18 17 VRB
CN-11 B12B-PHDSS-B
+24V1 20 19 +24V1 M2PFD GND2 20 19 GND2 M1PFD GND2 20 19 TEST3
GND2 2 1 TM1a
VFM-BKL /VFM-BKL 22 21 /CFM-U1 /CFM-U1 TM1 M2PFD 22 21 M1PFD GND2 22 21 VIDEO
+5V2 4 3 TM1b
GND2 24 23 GND2 CRUM +24V1 24 23 +24 V1 GND2 24 23 /VIDEO
CRUCLK 6 5 TM2a DSKPFC1 M1PFC
+24V1 26 25 +24V1 TM2 /DSKPFC1 26 25 /M1PFC GND2 26 25 LSUS/H
CRUSDA 8 7 TM2b
CFM-U2 /CFM-U2 28 27 /CFM-U3 CFM-U 3 Vref 28 27 M1LUM GND2 28 27 /LDON
TFSD GND2 10 9 +24V1 M1LUM
GND2 30 29 GND2 TFSD M1PWS GND2 30 29 GND2 GND2 30 29 /SYNC
TNCA TNCA 12 11 TFSD
TH-EX GND2 3 2 31 TH-EX TH-EX M1PWS 32 31 (NC)
CN-1 2 B30B-PHDSS-B
CN-6 B18B-PHDSS-B +24V1 2 1 +24V1 CN-17 B30B-PHDSS-B CN-24 B6B-PH-K-S
GND2 2 1 GND2 HPLS T2PFC +24V1 2 1 M2LUM 1 +5V-WEBENDD
/HPLS 4 3 /T2PFC T1PFC M2LUM
+5V2 4 3 +5V2 /T1PFC 4 3 GND2 2 WEBENDD
DVCH1 6 5 +24V1
DVM /DVM 6 5 /DM DM HPFC +24V1 6 5 +24V1 3 GND2
DVCH2 8 7 /HPFC DSKPFC2 /M2PFC WEB
DVMCLK 8 7 DMCLK DV /DSKPFC2 8 7 /M2PFC 4 WEBMA
DVCH3 10 9 +24V1
DVM-T 10 9 DM-T PSBC GND2 10 9 GND2 5 WEBMB
DVCH4 12 11 /PSBC
+5V2 12 11 GND2 +5V2 12 11 TXD-FIN 6 Reserve7
FUM +24V1 14 13 +5V2
FUMCLK 14 13 /FUM FUM MM /MM 14 13 RXD-FIN
TCS 16 15 PPD PPD
+24V1 16 15 FUM-T TCS MMCLK 16 15 /DTR-FIN FIN
VFM-BKR GND2 18 17 GND2
GND2 18 17 /VFM-BKR /VFM-BKR MM-T 18 17 /DSR-FIN CN-25 B6B-PH-K-S
TSGOUT 20 19 +5V-MPRD1
TSW-LED 20 19 RES-FIN 1 +5V-T1PPD
DV GND2 22 21 GND2 MPRD1
TSW TSW 22 21 (NC) 2 (NC)
+5V2 24 23 MPRD1
GND2 24 23 GND2 3 T1PPD
HUS-DV 26 25 +5V-MPRD2 T1PPD
HUS-D V GND2 26 25 TANSET 4 (NC)
GND2 28 27 GND2 MPRD2 TANSET
DSW-DSK DSW-DSK 28 27 +5V2 5 GND2
TH-DV 30 29 MPRD2
+5V2 30 29 (NC) 6 (NC)
4. Signal name list
Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Signal name Name Function/Operation Remark
“L” “H” No. No. name
/MIMA Scanner motor control signal Scanner motor control (Phase /A) — — 7 3 SCN
(Phase /A)
/MIMB Scanner motor control signal Scanner motor control (Phase /B) — — 7 4 SCN
(Phase /B)
/SLUMB DDSPF paper feed tray lift-up DSPF paper feed tray lift-up motor — — 11 2 SCN
motor control signal control (Phase /B)
(Phase /B)
/SLUMA DSPF paper feed tray lift-up DSPF paper feed tray lift-up motor — — 11 1 SCN
motor control signal control (Phase /A)
(Phase /A)
/SPFMA DSPF motor control signal DSPF motor control (Phase /A) — — 12 11 SCN
(Phase /A)
/SPFMB DSPF motor control signal DSPF motor control (Phase /B) — — 12 15 SCN
(Phase /B)
/VIDEO Image data signal Image signal to LSU (PCU output) — — 22 23 PCU
38VMON 38V monitor signal Detection of 38V for interlock OFF ON 19 14 PCU
ACMON AC waveform monitor signal SUB power source AC wave high — — 1 3 PCU
value monitor (For heater lamp ON
control) (Phase control)
ADD_CCD1 CCD serial data area Identification of address data and — — 1 66 SCN
identification number (CCD) image data area in CCD serial data
ADD_CCD2 CIS serial data area Identification of address data and — — 10 13 SCN
identification number (CIS) image data area in CIS serial data
ADM1A Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 (Upstream) — — 10 9 PCU
(Upstream side) control signal control (Phase A)
(Phase A)
ADM1B Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 (Upstream) — — 10 11 PCU
(Upstream side) control signal control (Phase B)
(Phase B)
ADM1XA Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 (Upstream) — — 10 10 PCU
(Upstream side) control signal control (Phase /A)
(Phase /A)
ADM1XB Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 (Upstream) — — 10 12 PCU
(Upstream side) control signal control (Phase /B)
(Phase /B)
ADM2A Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 (Upstream) — — 10 13 PCU
(Downstream side) control control (Phase A)
signal (Phase A)
ADM2B Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 (Upstream) — — 10 15 PCU
(Downstream side) control control (Phase B)
signal (Phase B)
ADM2XA Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 (Upstream) — — 10 14 PCU
(Downstream side) control control (Phase /A)
signal (Phase /A)
ADM2XB Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 (Upstream) — — 10 16 PCU
(Downstream side) control control (Phase /B)
signal (Phase /B)
AINPD Duplex (ADU) paper entry Duplex (ADU) paper entry Paper pass — 7 28 PCU
detection signal detection, detection of paper exit to
finisher
APPD1 Duplex (ADU) paper pass Duplex (ADU) upstream paper Paper pass — 7 24 PCU
detection signal 1 pass detection
APPD2 Duplex (ADU) paper pass Duplex (ADU) midstream paper Paper pass — 7 26 PCU
detection signal 2 pass detection
AUD Auditor installation detection Auditor installation detection Counter 5 5 SCN
signal available
BUP-PRout Power save mode relay signal Selection of power save mode and Relay OFF Relay ON 19 9 PCU
normal power mode
BZR Buzzer signal Key touch sound buzzer signal Ring 1 86 SCN
CA Clear all (Auditor) signal Clear all (Auditor) Clear 5 3 SCN
CCDFAN CCD fan motor control signal CCD fan motor control ON 1 17 SCN Not used.
CCFT Backlight control signal Backlight control ON 1 94 SCN
CFM-DC1 Cooling fan motor control Power cooling fan motor control Max. force Stop 19 3 PCU
signal (Power source) of wind
CFM-DC2 Cooling fan motor control Power cooling fan motor control Max. force Stop 19 4 PCU
signal (Power source) of wind
CFM-DV Cooling fan motor control Developing cooling fan motor Max. force Stop 7 3 PCU
signal (Developing) control of wind
CFM-R1 Cooling fan motor control Cooling fan motor control Max. force Stop 21 3 PCU
signal (LSU/Process section) (LSU, process section) of wind

CFM-U1 Cooling fan motor control Cooling fan motor control Max. force Stop 5 21 PCU
(LSU, process section) of wind
CFM-U2 Cooling fan motor control Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section Max. force Stop 5 28 PCU
signal (Paper exit, duplex cooling of wind
(ADU) section)
(Paper exit section rear side)
CFM-U3 Cooling fan motor control Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section Max. force Stop 5 27 PCU
signal (Paper exit, duplex cooling of wind
(ADU) section) (Front surface)
CHVACPWM High voltage control output Separation charger AC component — — 15 12 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) PWM control
CHVACREM High voltage control output Separation charger AC component ON OFF 15 13 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) ON/OFF control
CHV-PWM High voltage control output Separation charger DC component — — 15 10 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) PWM control
CHV-REM High voltage control output Separation charger DC component ON OFF 15 11 PCU
(Separation charger) (CHV) ON/OFF control
CISSET CIS identification signal CIS unit installation detection CIS — 10 26 SCN
available
CISTH CIS temperature detection CIS temperature detection — — 13 1 SCN Not used.
signal
CL1 Scanner lamp control signal Scanner lamp control ON — 1 71 SCN
CLK_CCD1 CCD serial data clock signal CD serial data output timing control — — 1 62 SCN
(CCD) (CCD)
CLK_CCD2 CIS serial data clock signal CIS serial data output timing — — 10 11 SCN
(CIS) control (CIS)
COPY Copy status (Auditor) Copy status signal (Auditor) Copying — 5 2 SCN
CRUCLK Communication CLK CRUM communication CLK — — 11 6 PCU
CRUSDA Communication data address CRUM communication data — — 11 8 PCU
signal address signal
CV_CA Clear all signal (Coin vendor) Clear all (Coin vendor) Clear — 4 6 SCN
CV_COPY Copy enable signal Copy enable (Coin vendor) Copy 4 3 SCN
(Coin vendor) enable
CV_COUNT Count up signal (Coin vendor) Count-up (Coin vendor) Count UP 4 4 SCN
CV_DUPLEX Print count identification Print count identification signal Duplex 4 8 SCN
signal (Duplex mode) (Duplex mode) (For coin vendor) mode
(For coin vendor) (Identification of single count or
double count)
CV_SIZE0 Paper size signal 0 Paper size 0 (Coin vendor) 4 9 SCN Refer to
(Coin vendor) the
CV_SIZE1 Paper size signal 1 Paper size 1 (Coin vendor) 4 10 SCN separate
(Coin vendor) table (*2)
CV_SIZE2 Paper size signal 2 Paper size 2 (Coin vendor) 4 11 SCN
(Coin vendor)
CV_SIZE3 Paper size signal 3 Paper size 3 (Coin vendor) 4 12 SCN
(Coin vendor)
CV_STAPLE Staple mode signal Staple mode identification Staple 4 7 SCN
(Coin vendor) (Coin vendor) mode
CV_START Copy start signal Copy start status (Coin vendor) Copy start 4 5 SCN
(Coin vendor)
DCCNT DC power control signal DC power ON/OFF OFF ON 9–8 PCU
19 – 24
DGS Paper exit gate solenoid Paper exit gate control Duplex Simplex 7 27 PCU
control signal
DL Discharge lamp control signal Discharge lamp control ON OFF 8 9 PCU
DM OPC drum motor rotating OPS drum motor ON/OFF ON OFF 6 5 PCU
speed control signal
(ON/OFF)
DMCLK OPC drum motor rotating OPC drum motor RPM control — — 6 7 PCU
speed control (CLK) signal
DMS OPC drum marking sensor OPC drum mark detection — — 8 4 PCU
signal
DMS-LED OPC drum marking sensor OPC drum marking LED light — — 8 2 PCU
LED control signal quantity control
DM-T OPC drum motor lock OPC drum motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock 6 9 PCU
detection signal
DSKPFC1 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport Paper — 16 26 PCU
transport clutch control control transport
signal 1
DSKPFC2 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport Paper — 17 8 PCU
transport clutch control control transport
signal 2

DSR_FIN Serial communication control Receive control — — 17 17 PCU
signal
DSR_LCC Serial communication control Receive control — — 18 9 PCU
signal
DSR_SCN Serial I/F send enable (MFP) Receive control — — 9 46 SCN
DSW-ADU Duplex (ADU) cover open/ Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Duplex Duplex 7 25 PCU
close detection signal detection (ADU) door (ADU) door
open close
DSW-DSK Left door open/close detection Left door open/close detection Desk left Desk left 17 28 PCU
signal (Desk section) (Desk section) door open door close
DSW-F_HV DC low voltage power (+24V) High voltage power source (+24V) — High voltage 15 1 PCU
line signal for generating high available
voltage
DSW-F Front door open/close Front door open/close detection Left door Left door 2 28 PCU
detection signal open or close and
Front door Front door
open close
DSW-L Left door open/close detection Left door open/close detection Left door Left door 7 32 PCU
signal open close
DSW-R Manual feed open/close Manual feed open/close detection Left door Left door 13 26 PCU
detection signal open or close and
Front door Front door
open or closeand
manual unit manual unit
pull-out insertion
DTR_FIN Serial communication control Send control — — 17 15 PCU
signal
DTR_LCC Serial communication control Send control — — 18 7 PCU
signal
DTR_SCN Serial I/F receive enable Send control — — 9 9 SCN
signal (MFP)
DVCH1 DV unit identification signal 1 Detection of installation — — 12 6 PCU
DVM Developing motor control Developing motor ON/OFF ON OFF 6 6 PCU
signal
DVMCLK Developing motor rotating Developing motor control RPM — — 6 8 PCU
speed control (CLK) signal control
DVM-T Developing motor lock Developing motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock 6 10 PCU
detection signal
DVPWM Developing bias voltage Developing bias PWM control — — 15 14 PCU
control signal (PWM)
DVREM Developing bias control Developing bias ON/OFF ON OFF 15 15 PCU
(ON/OFF) signal
F0 Operation panel LED matrix Switching — — 1 78 SCN
signal 0
signal 1
signal 2
signal 3
FBIAS Fusing bias output control Fusing bias output ON/OFF control ON OFF 7 23 PCU
signal
FRDY FAX LED lighting signal LED lighting control in power save LED ON 9 14 SCN
mode i FAX, FAX, nighttime mode
FRM_CCD1 CCD image data effective CCD image data effective area — — 1 61 SCN
area signal (CCD) control (CCD)
FRM_CCD2 CIS image data effective area CIS image data effective area — — 10 10 SCN
signal (CIS) control (CIS)
FUM Fusing motor control signal Fusing motor ON/OFF ON OFF 6 13 PCU
FUMCLK Fusing motor rotating speed Fusing motor control CLK — — 6 14 PCU
control (CLK) signal
FUM-T Fusing motor lock detection Fusing motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock 6 15 PCU
signal
FW AC power source full wave Power monitor — — 20 9 PCU
signal
FW_SUB Sub power source full wave Sub power full wave signal — — 1 4 PCU
signal
FWP-PCU Flash write protect signal Flash write protect — — 9 6 PCU
GBPWM Making charger grid bias Main charger grid bias voltage — — 15 5 PCU
voltage (PWM) control signal (PWM) control
HLCNT1 Upper fusing roller center Upper fusing roller center heating OFF ON 2 9 PCU
heater lamp control signal control
HLCNT2 Upper fusing roller center Upper fusing roller edges heating OFF ON 2 11 PCU
heater lamp control signal control

HLCNT3 Sub heat roller heater lamp Sub heat roller heater lamp control OFF ON 1 5 PCU
control signal
HLPRout Fusing heater lamp power Fusing heater lamp power relay Relay OFF Relay ON 2 5 PCU
relay control signal control
HLPRout3 Fusing heater lamp power Fusing heater lamp power relay 3 Relay OFF Relay ON 2 7 PCU
relay 3 control signal control
HPFC Horizontal paper transport Horizontal paper transport clutch Paper — 12 7 PCU
clutch control signal control transport
HPLS Paper guide lock solenoid Paper guide lock solenoid control Lock — 12 4 PCU
control signal
HSYNC Horizontal sync signal Horizontal sync — — 9 18 PCU
HUS-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section peripheral — — 12 26 PCU
humidity detection
HUS-TC Transfer humidity sensor Transfer section peripheral — — 8 17 PCU
humidity detection
HVREMout High voltage control output High voltage ON/OFF control OFF ON 15 16 PCU
control signal (MC/DV/TC) signal (MC/DV/TC)
INTPR2out Interlock power relay "RY5" AC PWB relay "RY5" control Relay OFF Relay ON 19 19 PCU
control signal (38V line interlock relay)
INTPRout Interlock power relay "RY4" AC PWB relay "RY4" control Relay OFF Relay ON 19 15 PCU
control signal (38V line interlock relay)
LDON Laser ON/OFF control signal Laser ON/OFF control — — 22 27 PCU
LED0 Document size detection LED Document size detection LED — — 3 5 SCN
control signal 1 control
LED1 Document size detection LED Document size detection LED — — 3 6 SCN
control signal 0 control
LPPD LCC paper pass detection Detection of paper entry from LCC Paper pass — 18 12 PCU
signal
LSU_S/H Laser beam horizontal sync Laser beam horizontal position — — 22 25 PCU
signal timing control
M1LUD Paper tray upper limit Paper tray upper limit detection Upper limit — 16 13 PCU
detection signal (Paper feed tray 3)
(Paper feed tray 3)
M1LUM Lift-up motor control signal Lift-up motor control Stop Up 16 27 PCU
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3)
M1PED Paper empty detection signal Paper empty detection Paper Paper 16 7 PCU
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) empty present
M1PFC Paper feed clutch (M1) control Paper feed tray 3 paper feed Paper — 16 25 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 3) control transport
M1PFD Paper pass detection signal Paper feed tray 3 paper pass Paper pass — 16 21 PCU
(Multi paper feed tray 3) detection
M1PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup roller control Roller UP Paper feed 16 3 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3)
M1PWS Paper feed tray paper width Multi paper feed tray paper width — — 16 32 PCU
detection signal detection (Paper feed tray 3)
(Paper feed tray 3)
M1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection — Remaining 15 31 PCU
detection signal (Multi paper feed tray 3) paper
(Paper feed tray 3) quantity
66% or less
M1SS1 Paper size detection signal Paper size detection — — 15 21 PCU Refer to
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) the
M1SS2 Paper size detection signal Paper size detection — — 15 23 PCU separate
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) table (*1)
M1SS3 Paper size detection signal Paper size detection — — 15 25 PCU
M2LUD Paper tray upper limit Paper tray upper limit detection — Upper limit 16 14 PCU
detection signal (Paper feed tray 4) detection
(Paper feed tray 4)
M2LUM Lift-up motor control signal Lift-up motor control Stop Up 17 1 PCU
M2PED Paper empty detection signal Paper empty detection Paper Paper 16 8 PCU
M2PFC Paper feed clutch (M1) control Paper feed tray 4 paper feed Paper — 17 7 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 4) control transport
M2PFD Paper pass detection signal Paper feed tray 4 paper pass Paper pass — 16 22 PCU
(Multi paper feed tray 4) detection
M2PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup roller control Roller UP Paper feed 16 4 PCU

M2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection — Remaining 15 32 PCU
detection (Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) paper
signal quantity
66% or less
M2SS1 Paper size detection signal Paper size detection — — 15 22 PCU Refer to
(Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) the
M2SS2 Paper size detection signal Paper size detection — — 15 24 PCU separate
(Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) table (*1)
MFPUS Paper pickup solenoid (MFP) Paper pickup solenoid (MPF) Paper feed — 13 7 PCU
control signal control (Manual paper feed) with the
(Manual paper feed) roller down
MHPS Scanner home position Scanner home position detection — Home 6 1 SCN
sensor signal position
MHVREM Main charger control signal Main charger ON/OFF ON OFF 15 6 PCU
MHV-T Main charger trouble Main charger trouble detection Trouble, Normal 15 7 PCU
detection signal no MHV
MIMA Scanner motor control signal Scanner motor control (Phase A) — — 7 1 SCN
(Phase A)
MIMB Scanner motor control signal Scanner motor control (Phase B) — — 7 2 SCN
(Phase B)
MM Main motor control signal Main motor ON/OFF control ON OFF 17 14 PCU
MMCLK Main motor rotating speed Main motor RPM control — — 17 16 PCU
control (CLK) signal
MM-T Main motor lock detection Main motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock 17 18 PCU
signal
MPED Manual feed paper empty Manual paper feed tray paper Paper Paper empty 13 11 PCU
detection signal empty detection present
MPFC Paper feed clutch control Manual feed tray paper feed roller Paper feed — 13 20 PCU
signal (Manual feed) control
MPFD1 Manual feed paper pass Manual tray paper pass detection — Paper pass 13 21 PCU
detection signal 1
MPFD2 Manual feed paper pass Manual tray and LCC paper pass Paper pass — 18 6 PCU
detection signal 2 detection
MPFGS Manual feed gate solenoid Manual feed gate control Paper pass Stopper 13 17 PCU
control signal enable
MPFPWS Manual feed paper width Manual feed paper width detection — — 13 16 PCU
detection signal
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper — Paper 13 6 PCU
detection signal 1 length detection (Short) present
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper — Paper 13 10 PCU
detection signal 1 length detection (Long) present
MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/ Paper pass — 12 23 PCU
detection signal 1 LCC paper pass detection
MPRD2 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/ Paper pass — 12 29 PCU
detection signal 2 LCC paper pass detection
MSWMON MSW monitor signal Main switch monitor — — 19 23 PCU
MSWOFF MSW OFF signal Main switch OFF signal — — 9 5 PCU
MSWPR Main switch power relay Main switch power relay control Relay ON Relay OFF 2 15 PCU
control signal
MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out Store — 13 12 PCU
detection signal 1 position detection (Storing position)
MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out Pull out — 13 14 PCU
detection signal 2 position detection (Pull-out position)
OCSW DSPF open/close detection Document size detection trigger Close — 3 3 SCN
signal
PAGE Page signal Print timing control for controller — — 9 14 PCU
(Output for every page)
PAGE1 Image effective area signal Indicates image data area of one — — 1 68 SCN
(CCD) page. (CCD)
PAGE2 Image effective area signal Indicates image data area of one — — 10 12 SCN
(CIS) page. (CIS)
PCS Image density sensor signal Detection of density of toner patch — — 8 3 PCU
on the OPC drum
PCS-LED Image density sensor LED Image density sensor LED light — — 8 1 PCU
current control signal emitting quantity control
PCU_DSR Serial communication control Send control signal — — 9 13 PCU
signal (Serial communication)
PCU_DTR Serial communication control Receive control signal — — 9 10 PCU
signal (Serial communication)

PCU_RES PCU reset signal PCU reset by the controller Operation Reset 9 7 PCU
enable
PCU_RXD Serial communication send Send data to the controller — — 9 17 PCU
data signal
PCU_TXD Serial communication receive Receive data from the controller — — 9 9 PCU
data signal
PD Document size detection OC document size detection — — 1 74 SCN
signal analog signal
PDSEL0 Document detection select Document size detection signal — — 1 72 SCN
signal 0 select
signal 1 select
signal 2 select
PFD2 Paper pass detection signal 2 Paper pass detection Paper pass — 7 10 PCU
(Left door unit) from duplex (ADU)/
No. 1, 3, 4 paper feed tray
PGMCLK LSU motor RPM control signal LSU motor RPM control — — 22 6 PCU
(CLK)
PNC Count-up signal (Auditor) Count up (Auditor) Count UP — 5 1 SCN
PNC-a Count-up signal Count up (Personal counter) — — 2 20 PCU
(Personal counter)
POD1 Paper exit detection 1 signal Paper exit detection from fusing Paper pass — 5 3 PCU
POD2 Paper exit detection 2 signal Paper pass detection from paper Paper pass — 5 9 PCU
exit
POD3 Paper exit detection 3 signal Paper exit detection to upper — Paper pass 5 15 PCU
section paper exit tray (Full
(Full detection) detection)
POF Power OFF status signal Power OFF status Power OFF Power ON 9 3 PCU
POF_SCN Power off signal Power OFF status signal Power OFF — 9 43 SCN
(Output from PCU)
POM1A Paper exit motor 1 (Fusing Paper exit unit (Fusing side) paper — — 10 1 PCU
side) control signal (Phase A) transport
POM1B Paper exit motor 1 (Fusing Paper exit unit (Fusing side) paper — — 10 3 PCU
side) control signal (Phase B) transport
POM1XA Paper exit motor 1 (Fusing Paper exit unit (Fusing side) paper — — 10 2 PCU
side) control signal (Phase /A) transport
POM1XB Paper exit motor 1 (Fusing Paper exit unit (Fusing side) paper — — 10 4 PCU
side) control signal (Phase /B) transport
POM2A Paper exit motor 2 (Paper exit Paper exit unit (paper exit side) — — 10 5 PCU
side) control signal (Phase A) paper transport
POM2B Paper exit motor 2 (Fusing Paper exit unit (paper exit side) — — 10 7 PCU
side) control signal (Phase B) paper transport
POM2XA Paper exit motor 2 (Fusing Paper exit unit (paper exit side) — — 10 6 PCU
side) control signal (Phase /A) paper transport
POM2XB Paper exit motor 2 (Fusing Paper exit unit (Paper exit side) — — 10 8 PCU
side) control signal (Phase /B) paper transport
PPD Resist roller front paper pass Paper pass detection in front of Paper pass — 12 15 PCU
detection signal resist roller
PROFF_CNT BUP-PR control signal Main power OFF signal — End 9 4 PCU
(Main power OFF signal) (output from controller)
PRON_FAX BUP-PR control signal Main power ON signal Boot — 9 1 PCU
(Main power ON signal) (Output front FAX unit)
PSBC Resist roller brake clutch Resist roller brake clutch control — Paper 12 11 PCU
control signal transport
enable
PSPS Separation solenoid control Separation solenoid control Separation — 8 13 PCU
signal
PWM-RSV1 Cooling fan motor control Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section Max. Stop 8 20 PCU
signal (Paper exit duplex cooling blowing
(ADU) section (Top surface)) capacity
READY LSU motor lock detection LSU motor lock detection Rotation Stop/Lock 22 5 PCU
signal
READY Copy enable signal (Auditor) Copy enable (Auditor) Copy — 5 4 SCN
enable
RES_CCD1 Reset signal (CCD) Reset (CCD) — Reset 1 64 SCN
RES_CCD2 Reset signal (CIS) Reset (CIS) — Reset 10 15 SCN
RES_FIN Finisher reset signal Finisher reset Operation Reset 17 19 PCU
enable
RES_LCC LCC reset signal LCC reset Operation Reset 18 11 PCU
enable
RES_MFP Main unit reset signal (MFP) Not used. Reset — 9 12 SCN
RES_SCN Scanner reset signal Scanner reset Reset — 9 44 SCN
(output from controller)

RRC Resist roller clutch control Resist roller clutch control Paper — 7 4 PCU
signal (The relative position of print image transport
and paper is controlled.)
RTH1 Heat roller temperature Heat roller temperature detection — — 2 6 PCU
detection signal (Center section)
RTH2 Pressure roller temperature Pressure roller temperature — — 2 10 PCU
detection signal detection (Edge section)
RTH3 Sub heat roller temperature Sub heat roller temperature — — 2 14 PCU
detection signal detection
RXD_CCD1 Serial I/F data (CCD) Serial I/F data — — 1 65 SCN
(CCD-scanner control PWB)
RXD_CCD2 Serial I/F data (CIS) Serial I/F data — — 10 16 SCN
(CCD-scanner control PWB)
RXD_FIN Serial I/F data (FINISHER) Serial I/F data (Finisher-PCU PWB) — — 17 13 PCU
RXD_LCC Serial I/F data (LCC) Serial I/F data (LCC-PCU PWB) — — 18 5 PCU
RXD_SCN Serial I/F data Serial I/F data (Scanner control — — 9 45 SCN
(Scanner control PWB) PWB - Controller)
SCNSET Scanner control PWB Scanner control PWB installation Scanner — 9 47 SCN
identification signal detection available
SCOV DSPF cover switch signal DSPF cover open/close detection — Close 12 8 SCN
SEG0 Operation panel LED matrix Operation panel LED matrix — — 1 24 SCN
signal 0
signal 1
signal 2
SLEEP Energy-saving mode display LED lighting signal in energy — LED ON 9 15 SCN
signal saving mode
SLUMA DSPF tray lift-up motor control DSPF tray lift-up motor control — — 11 3 SCN
signal (Phase A) (Phase A)
SLUMB DSPF tray lift-up motor control DSPF tray lift-up motor control — — 11 4 SCN
signal (Phase B) (Phase B)
SOCD DSPF open/close detection DSPF open/close detection Close 11 19 SCN
signal
SPED1 DSPF document empty DSPF document empty detection Paper 12 12 SCN
detection signal present
SPED2 DSPF document detection DSPF document detection Paper 11 14 SCN
signal present
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch DSPF paper feed clutch control ON 11 10 SCN
control signal
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor control signal DSPF fan motor control ON 11 11 SCN
SPFMA DSPF paper feed, paper DSPF paper feed, paper transport — — 12 13 SCN
transport motor control signal motor control (Phase A)
(Phase A)
SPFMB DSPF paper feed, paper DSPF paper feed, paper transport — — 12 17 SCN
transport signal (Phase B) motor control (Phase B)
SPFMO1 DSPF paper feed, paper DSPF paper feed, paper transport Power 12 16 SCN
transport motor current control motor current control down
signal 1
SPFMO2 DSPF paper feed, paper exit DSPF paper feed, paper transport Power 12 18 SCN
motor current control signal 2 motor current control down
SPFSET DSPF identification signal DSPF installation detection DSPF 11 5 SCN
available
SPLS1 DSPF document length DSPF document length detection Paper 11 18 SCN
detection signal 1 (Short) present
SPLS2 DSPF document length DSPF document length detection Paper 11 17 SCN
detection signal 2 (Long) present
SPOD DSPF paper exit detection DSPF paper exit detection Paper exit 11 20 SCN
signal
SPPD1 DSPF document paper pass DSPF document paper pass Paper 12 10 SCN
detection 1 signal detection 1 present
SPWS DSPF document size (Width) DSPF document size (Width) — — 11 16 SCN
detection analog data signal detection
SRRBC DSPF resist roller brake DSPF resist roller brake clutch ON 11 6 SCN
clutch control signal control
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch DSPF resist roller clutch control ON 11 7 SCN
control signal
START LSU motor control signal LSU motor ON/OFF ON OFF 22 7 PCU

STLD DSPF document tray lower DSPF document tray lower limit Lower limit 11 15 SCN
limit detection signal detection
STMPS Stamp solenoid control signal Stamp solenoid control Stamp ON 1 48 SCN
STRBC DSPF paper transport clutch DSPF paper transport roller brake ON 11 9 SCN
control signal clutch control
STRC DSPF paper transport clutch DSPF paper transport clutch ON 11 8 SCN
control signal control
STRRBC DSPF paper transport resist DSPF paper transport resist brake ON 12 20 SCN
brake clutch control signal clutch control
STRRC DSPF paper transport resist DSPF paper transport resist clutch ON 12 19 SCN
clutch control signal control
STSET Stamp identification signal Stamp Yes/No detection Stamp 1 47 SCN
available
STUD DSPF document tray upper DSPF document tray upper limit Upper limit 12 14 SCN
limit detection signal detection
SYNC LSU horizontal sync detection LSU horizontal sync detection — — 22 29 PCU
signal (BD sensor signal)
T1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit Paper feed tray upper limit Upper limit — 14 13 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1)
T1LUM Paper tray lift-up motor control Paper tray lift-up control Stop Up 14 1 PCU
T1PED Paper empty detection signal Paper presence detection Paper Paper 14 15 PCU
T1PFC Paper feed clutch control Paper feed clutch control Paper — 17 4 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1) transport
T1PPD Paper pass detection signal Paper pass detection from paper Paper pass — 25 3 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1) feed tray 1
T1PUS Paper pick-up solenoid control Paper pickup solenoid control Roller UP Paper feed 14 7 PCU
T1SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection — Remaining 14 16 PCU
detection signal (Paper feed tray 1) paper
66% or less
T2LUD Paper tray upper limit Paper tray upper limit detection Upper limit — 14 21 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2)
T2LUM Paper tray lift-up motor control Paper tray lift-up motor control Stop Up 14 2 PCU
T2PED Paper empty detection signal Paper presence detection Paper Paper 14 23 PCU
T2PFC Paper clutch control signal Paper feed clutch control Paper — 12 3 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2) transport
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid control Paper pickup solenoid control The roller Paper feed 14 8 PCU
signal (Paper feed tray 2) (Paper feed tray 2) lifts up.
T2SPD Paper remaining quantity Paper remaining quantity detection — Remaining 14 22 PCU
detection signal (Paper feed tray 2) paper
66% or less
TANSET Paper feed tray 1/2 Paper feed tray 1, 2 Pull out Insert 17 25 PCU
(Tandem tray) detection signal (Tandem tray) insertion detection
TCBIAS Transfer belt cleaning output Transfer belt cleaning bias ON/ ON OFF 7 22 PCU
control signal (ON/OFF) OFF control
TCBPWM Transfer belt cleaning output Transfer belt cleaning bias output — — 7 18 PCU
control signal (PWM) voltage PWM control
TCS Toner density detection signal Toner density detection — — 12 16 PCU
TFSD Toner remaining quantity Toner hopper remaining quantity Remaining Remaining 11 11 PCU
detection signal detection quantity quantity
large small
TH LCD temperature sensor LCD temperature detection — — 1 93 SCN
signal
TH-CL OPC drum cleaner OPC drum cleaner peripheral — — 8 12 PCU
temperature sensor signal temperature detection
TH-DV Developing humidity detection Developing section humidity — — 12 30 PCU
signal detection
TH-EX Paper exit unit temperature Paper exit unit peripheral — — 5 31 PCU
sensor temperature detection
THPS1 Transfer belt contact/ Transfer belt separation home — Contact 7 6 PCU Not used.
separation home position position detection 1
sensor 1
THPS2 Transfer belt contact/ Transfer belt separation home — Contact 7 14 PCU
separation home position position detection 2
sensor 2

TH-RA Machine temperature Machine temperature detection — — 21 10 PCU
detection signal
THV+PWM Transfer charger output Transfer charger output control — — 15 8 PCU
control signal (THV) (PWM control)
THV+REM Transfer charger control Transfer charger ON/OFF control ON OFF 15 9 PCU
signal (THV)
TLS Waste toner pipe lock Waste toner pipe lock detection — Lock (Tilt) 8 16 PCU
detection signal
TM1A Toner motor 1 control signal Toner motor 1 ON/OFF control — — 11 1 PCU
TM1B Toner motor 1 control signal Toner motor 1 ON/OFF control — — 11 3 PCU
TM2A Toner motor 2 control signal Toner motor 2 ON/OFF control — — 11 5 PCU
TM2B Toner motor 2 control signal Toner motor 2 ON/OFF control — — 11 7 PCU
TNCA Waste toner full detection Waste toner full detection — — 11 12 PCU Not used.
signal
TRC_LCC LCC paper feed timing signal LCC paper feed timing control — — 18 13 PCU
(Output from PCU)
TRMA Transfer roller 15 drive motor Transport roller 15 drive motor — — 10 17 PCU
control signal (Phase A) control
TRMB Transfer roller 15 drive motor Transport roller 15 drive motor — — 10 19 PCU
control signal (Phase B) control
TRMXA Transfer roller 15 drive motor Transport roller 15 drive motor — — 10 18 PCU
control signal (Phase /A) control
TRMXB Transfer roller 15 drive motor Transport roller 15 drive motor — — 10 20 PCU
control signal (Phase /B) control
TSGOUT Toner den misty sensor gain Toner density sensor gain control — — 12 20 PCU
control signal
TURM Transfer separation motor Transfer unit separation control Stop Contact/ 7 16 PCU
control signal Release
TXD_CCD1 Serial I/F data (CCD) Serial I/F data — — 1 63 SCN
(Scanner control PWB - CCD)
TXD_CCD2 Serial I/F data (CCD) Serial I/F data — — 10 14 SCN
(Scanner control PWB - CCD)
TXD_FIN Serial I/F data (Finisher) Serial I/F data — — 17 11 PCU
(PCU PWB - Finisher)
TXD_LCC Serial I/F data (LCC) aerial I/F data — — 18 3 PCU
(Controller - Scanner control PWB)
TXD_SCN Serial I/F data Serial I/F data — — 9 8 SCN
(Scanner control PWB) (Controller - Scanner control PWB)
VCCW_SCN Scanner flash ROM Scanner flash ROM write protect Write enable 9 10 SCN
write protect signal
VFM-BKL Exhaust fan motor Exhaust fan motor control signal Max. force Stop 5 22 PCU
control signal (Rear left) (O3 exhaust process section heat of wind
exhaust)
VFM-BKR Exhaust fan motor Exhaust fan motor control signal Max. force Stop 6 17 PCU
control signal (Rear right) (Exhaust duplex (ADU) section of wind
cooling)
VFM-EX1 Exhaust fan motor Exhaust fan motor control signal Max. force Stop 5 4 PCU
control signal (O3 exhaust process section heat of wind
(LSU top plate front side) exhaust)
(LSU top plate center) exhaust)
(LSU top plate rear side) exhaust)
VIDEO Image signal Image signal to LSU — — 20 21 PCU
VIDEOin- Image signal Image signal from controller to — — 9 21 PCU
PCU PWB
VIDEOin+ Image signal Image signal from controller to — — 9 23 PCU
PCU PWB
VPMA Paper transport motor control Paper vertical transport motor — — 10 21 PCU
signal (Phase A) control (Phase A)
VPMB Paper transport motor control Paper vertical transport motor — — 10 23 PCU
signal (Phase B) control (Phase B)
VPMXA Paper transport motor control Paper vertical transport motor — — 10 22 PCU
signal (Phase /A) control (Phase /A)
VPMXB Paper transport motor control Paper vertical transport motor — — 10 24 PCU
signal (Phase /B) control (Phase /B)
VRB Laser power control signal Laser power control — — 22 17 PCU
WAKE UP Reset trigger signal from Reset trigger from energy saving Energy- 9 11 SCN
energy-saving mode mode save reset
WEB END WEB END sensor signal WEB paper end ( Replace) — END 24 2 PCU
detection detection
WEBMA WEB motor control signal Web motor ON/OFF control — — 24 4 PCU

WEBMB WEB motor control signal Web motor ON/OFF control — — 24 5 PCU
WHPR2 Dehumidifier heater power Dehumidifier heater control Relay ON Relay OFF 19 18 PCU
relay 2 control signal
XH Touch panel area Touch panel area identification — — 1 96 SCN
identification signal (Vertical direction) X axis
(Vertical direction)
XL Touch panel coordinates Touch panel coordinates — — 1 46 SCN
signal (Vertical direction) identification (Vertical direction)
X axis
YH Touch panel area Touch panel area identification — — 1 45 SCN
identification signal (Horizontal direction) Y axis
(Horizontal direction)
YL Touch panel coordinate signal Touch panel coordinates — — 1 95 SCN
(Horizontal direction) identification (Horizontal direction)
Y axis
Vertical size detection: Connector level Paper size

Multi-stage
M1SS1 M1SS2 M1SS3 M1SS4
tray 1 Inch China
AB series
Multi-stage series series
M2SS1 M2SS2 M2SS3 M2SS4
tray 2
1 L L H L B5 Extra K16
2 H L H L A4 LT A4
A5R INVR A5R
3 H L L L B5R EX-R K16R
4 H H L L A4R LTR A4R
5 L H L L Foolscap Extra Foolscap
6 L H L H B4 LGL K8
7 L L L H A3 WLT
0 H H H H Tray not installed
No. CV_SIZE3 CV_SIZE2 CV_SIZE1 CV_SIZE0 Paper size

0 0 0 0 0 none
1 0 0 0 1 A3
2 0 0 1 0 A4
3 0 0 1 1 LT
4 0 1 0 0 B4
5 0 1 0 1 LG
6 0 1 1 0 WLT
7 0 1 1 1 INV
8 1 0 0 0 B5
9 1 0 0 1 Extra
10 1 0 1 0 A5
11 1 0 1 1 F4
12 1 1 0 0 A4R
13 1 1 0 1 B5R
14 1 1 1 0 LTR
15 1 1 1 1 A5R

MX-M700N
[12] OTHERS 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. System settings
A. Count specification
(1) Paper exit system counter
Count-up number
Single-side copy Duplex copy
Counter Count-up timing Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray - ADU - Clear
Main unit paper exit ADU Paper feed tray
Small size Large size Small size Large size Small size Large size
Total counter (Note) When transfer is 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) -
completed
Maintenance counter When transfer is 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) Sim24-4
completed
Developer counter When transfer is 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) Sim24-5
completed
All valid paper counter (Note) When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) -
Copy counter (Copy valid paper) When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) Sim24-6
FAX counter When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) Sim24-10
Print counter When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) Sim24-9
Internet FAX counter When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) Sim24-15
Document filing counter When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) Sim24-15
Right side paper exit counter When center paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) -
Other counter (Self print, etc.) When paper exit 1 2 (1) - - 2 4 (2) Sim24-9
Large size: A3, 11 x 17. (Greater size than paper length 384mm)
* ( ): Count-up number when setting to the large size single count up.
(2) Document, finishing, paper feed system counter
Counter Mode Count event Count-up condition Clear

SPF counter All modes SPF paper feed number Count is made when starting SPF paper pick. Sim24-3
Finish stamp counter FAX send Internet Finish stamp use Count is made when stamp is ON. Sim24-3
FAX send number
Staple counter All modes Staple number Count is made when bundle exit process is completed. Sim24-3
(Including inserter Double count is made when stapling two positions.
stand alone In the inserter stand alone mode, count is made when
process) process is completed.
Punch counter All modes Punch number Count is made when bundle exit process is completed. Sim24-3
(Including inserter 1 count regardless of the kind of the punch unit (2-hole,
stand alone 3-hole, etc.)
process) In the inserter stand alone mode, count is made when
process is completed.
Saddle staple counter All modes Saddle staple number Count is made when bundle exit process is completed. Sim24-3
(Including inserter Only one count is added.
stand alone In the inserter stand alone mode, count is made when
process) process is completed.
Scan total counter All modes Scan number Count is made when scan is completed. Sim24-3
ADU counter All modes ADU paper feed number Count is made when paper feed from the ADU section Sim24-2
is started.
Inserter counter All modes Inserter tray paper feed Count is made when paper feed from the inserter tray is Sim24-3
(Including inserter number started.
offline process) In the inserter stand alone mode, count is made when
process is completed.
Paper feed Manual paper feed All modes Tray paper feed number Count is made when paper feed from each tray is Sim24-2
counter tray started.
Paper feed tray 1 Sim24-2
LCC Sim24-2
MX-M700N OTHERS 12 – 1
(3) Send system counter

Accumulated number of G3 FAX send Number of send Except for the serial transmit operation, one reservation is Sim24-10
FAX send counted as one communication.
For the serial transmit operation, count is made for each
communication individually.
• Recall is not included.
• Polling is counted as a number of send.
Accumulated page number G3 FAX send Total page number of In the serial transmit operation, each communication is Sim24-10
of FAX send send counted as one individually.
In bulletin board send, the page number of send is counted.
Accumulated time of FAX G3 FAX send Send time 4 (Including Sim24-10
send resending time.)
Accumulated page number Scan to E-mail send Page number of scan Even in the serial transmit operation, the page number of Sim24-15
of scanner scan SHARP DESK send one scan is counted.
FTP send (The number of receivers is not counted.)
In case of a send error (excluding document jam)
E-mail o Not counted.
SHARP DESK/FTP o Counted.
Accumulated number of Scan to E-mail send Number of mails Even in the serial transmit operation, the page number of Sim24-15
mail send reached to destination one scan is counted.
servers (The number of receivers is not counted.)
Cancel and network error are not counted.
Accumulated number of SHARP DESK send Number of send Mails transmitted by FTP send are counted in the Sim24-15
FTP send FTP send reached to accumulated number of mail send.
destination servers Even in the serial transmit operation, the page number of
one scan is counted.
(The number of receivers is not counted.)
Cancel and network error are also counted.
Accumulated number of Internet FAX send Page number of send Even in the serial transmit operation, the page number of Sim24-15
internet FAX send one scan is counted.
The final send result is counted.
A send error is counted.
Cancel and CE error are not counted.
Accumulated Internet FAX send Page number of scan Even in the serial transmit operation, the page number of Sim24-15
number of one scan is counted.
internet FAX (The number of receivers is not counted.)
receive The final send result is counted.
A communication error (except for document jam) is
counted.
Cancel and CE error are not counted.
A send (transfer, F code relay broadcast) without document
scan is not counted.
Scanner trial counter Internet FAX send Page number of scan Count is made for every scan of page. –
Scan to E-mail send Count is made even when send is not completed.
SHARP DESK send The operation is terminated when the count number
FTP send exceeds 500.
Page number of Scan to When reading SCAN HDD storage page Sim24-15
HDD TO HDD number
Accumulated number of SCAN to SMB send Number of send Even in the serial transmit operation, the page number of Sim24-15
SMB send reached to SMB one scan is counted.
Cancel and network error are also counted.
(4) Receive system counter

The accumulated page G3 FAX receive Total output page The FAX separator sheet is also counted. Sim24-10
number of FAX receive print number When polling, the number of received pages is counted.
Count by size and count in recovery are the same as the
copier specifications.
(Counted by the print system.)
Accumulated time of FAX G3 FAX receive Receive time Sim24-10
receive
Accumulated Internet FAX receive Receive number A normal mail receive is also counted. Sim24-15
number of internet Count is made regardless of normal or abnormal.
FAX receive Count is made regardless of print result.
Accumulated page Internet FAX receive Total receive output Count is made when output is made on a normal mail Sim24-15
number of internet number receive.
FAX receive print Print of mail text is not counted.
The FAX separator sheet is also counted.
Count by size and count in recovery are the same as the
copier specifications.
(Counted by the print system.)
(5) Department counter
Conforming count mode

Data location
(SIM 26-5)
Operation content MFP Scanner Count-up condition
PCU Mainten
control FAX control TOTAL DV
PWB ance
PWB PWB
Copy counter z ■
Print counter z ■
FAX send page number counter z ■ Department FAX send page number
• In the serial transmit operation, each
communication is counted as one
individually.
Network scanner counter z — — — Department network scanner scan page
number
• i FAX and network scanner
• Even in the serial transmit operation,
the page number of one scan is
counted. (The number of receivers is
not counted.)
I-FAX send page number counter z ■ Department FAX send page number
• In the serial transmit operation, each
communication is counted as one
individually.
Document filing counter z ■
(6) Printer job count-up specification
Total use page number counter Department counter

Driver
Key operation
PRINTS OTHERS specification OTHERS
number
account number
Printer job (Without account administration) { — — — —
Printer job (With account specification) * { — — { —
Printer job (Without account specification) * { — — — {
Notice in printer job (Without account administration) { — — — —
Notice in printer job (With account specification) * { — — — {
Notice in printer job (Without account specification) * { — — — {
List print — { — — —
Total use page number print — { — — —
Each department total page number print — { — — —
Engine self print — — — — —
* When there is "NO" in account administration, or when there is not "NO."
(7) Total counter specifications

The total count viewed from the user and the counter used for charging are “Total output counter (total valid paper counter).”
Total output Counter Total Counter

Display when the copy key is ON. ■ —
List print ■ —
Valid paper counter to send to serial RIC ■ —
Total counter to send to serial RIC ■ —
E-RIC mail text counter ■ —
E-RIC attached file ■ ■
(Counter for the first send) (Counter to send in the midst of packet)
SIMULATION Displayed/printed as Total output. Displayed/printed as Total
(8) Blank paper count specification
Count attribute Blank paper count setting (SIM 26-52)

Print surface 0: NO 1: YES
Mode Print mode Remark
Front Back Small Large Small Large
surface surface size size size size
Normal Without print ✕ — 0 0 0 0
(Invalid paper exit)
Without print U — 0 0 1 2 (1) *1
(Blank paper insertion)
Single face print { — 1 2 (1) *1 1 2 (1) *1 SS/DS
(Single face mode)
Single face print { ✕ 1 2 (1) *1 1 2 (1) *1 SD (Odd number of documents)
(Duplex mode)
Duplex print { { 2 4 (2) *1 2 4 (2) *1 SD (Even number of documents)/DD
Front cover Without print U — 0 0 1 2 (1) *1
With print (Single face) { — 1 2 (1) *1 1 2 (1) *1
With print (Duplex) { { 2 4 (2) *1 2 4 (2) *1
Back cover Without print ✕ U 0 0 1 2 (1) *1
With print (Single face) ✕ { 1 2 (1) *1 1 2 (1) *1
Insert paper Without print U — 0 0 1 2 (1) *1
With print (Single face) { — 1 2 (1) *1 1 2 (1) *1
OHP insert Without print — 0 0 1 2 (1) *1
paper With print (Single face) { — 1 2 (1) *1 1 2 (1) *1
With print (Duplex) — — — — — — Duplex print inhibition
* Large size: A3, 11 x 17. (Greater size than paper length 384mm)
*1: Follows SIM 26-5 (Count-up mode). (Default: Double count-up (Set value: 2))
( ): Large size single count-up setting (Count-up number when set to 1.)
{: Counts up.
✕ : Does not count up.
U : Follows SIM 26-52 setting.
0 : Does not count up. (Japan/SCA default) 1: Counts up. (Other default)
— : Out of target (No print process)
(9) Consumables counter specification
Count-up number
Simplex print Duplex print
Count-up
Counter Paper feed tray – Main Clear
timing Paper feed tray – ADU ADU – Paper feed tray
unit paper exit
Small size Large size Small size Large size Small size Large size
OPC drum counter When transfer is 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) Sim24-7
completed
OPC drum rotation counter (sec) When transfer is — — — — — — Sim24-11
completed
Developer counter When transfer is 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) Sim24-5
completed
Developing roller rotation counter When transfer is — — — — — — Sim24-11
(sec) completed
Toner counter When transfer is 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) 1 2 (1) —
completed
Toner supply counter (sec) When transfer is — — — — — — —
completed
(10) Reset and set for suplly counters
Work item Simulation Reset item Included Test Command

Setting the toner concentration control SIM 25-2 Developer counter SIM 24-5
level DV unit running time counter (sec) SIM 24-11
Reset the OPC drum counter SIM 24-7 OPC drum counter —
Reset the Developer counter SIM 24-5 Developer counter —
Reset the OPC drum running time SIM 24-11 OPC drum running time counter (sec) —
counter (sec)
Reset the DV running time counter (sec) SIM 24-11 DV unit running time counter (sec) —
B. Location and display of each counter data
Simulation Conforming count
Data location
Code mode (Sim26-5)
Data
size PCU Mainte
Main Sub control FAX control TOTAL DV
PWB nance
PWB PWB
22 01 Each counter display
(Total/ Maintenance/Developer/
SPF/ Staple/ Tray)
1 : Total counter z ■
2 : Drum cartridge counter z ■
3 : Toner cartridge counter z ■
4 : Deve cartridge counter z ■
5 : Maintenance counter z ■
6 : Total output page number z ■
counter
7 : Copy counter z ■
8 : Printer counter z ■
9 : FAX output counter z ■
10 : I-FAX output counter z ■
11 : Document filing output z ■
Counter
12 : Right side output counter z z ■ Count is made when the main unit
paper exit is started.
(When POP2 is ON)
13 : Other print counter z ■ Refer to the "Count Specifications."
02 Jam/ Trouble counter display
1 : PAPER JAM z — — — Count is made when an event
occurs. (A jam by closing the door
during paper transport is not
counted.)
2 : SPF JAM z — — — Count is made when an event
occurs. (A jam by closing the door
during paper transport is not
counted.)
3 : TROUBLE z — — — Count is made when an event
occurs. (Follows the trouble count
method of SIM 26-35.)
08 Document, staple counter display
1 : SPF document feed page z — — — One count is made every time
number when SPF document is paper feed.
2 : Scan number z — — — One count is made every time
when scan is completed.
3 : Staple number z — — — One count for every stapling
(Stapling at two positions is
counted as 2.)
4 : Punch number z — — — One count for every punching
5 : SPF finish stamp number z — — — One count for every paper pick-up
6 : Saddle staple number z One count for every paper pick-up
7 : Inserter number z One count for every paper pick-up
09 Paper feed counter display
1 : Paper feed tray 1 z — — — One count for every paper pick-up
(Tandem Left)
(Tandem Right)
5 : MFT (Manual paper feed z — — — One count for every paper pick-up
tray)
6 : ADU z — — — One count for every paper transport
start from ADU.
7 : LCC z One count for every paper pick-up
Data location
Code mode (Sim26-5)
Data
size PCU Mainte
PWB nance
PWB PWB
22 11 FAX send/receive counter display
1 : FAX send 32bit z — — — Accumulated page number of send
(Send counter) • Except for the serial transmit
operation, one reservation is
counted as one communication.
• For the serial transmit operation,
count is made for each
communication individually.
• Recall is not included.
• Saved in the FAX-SRAM.
2 : FAX receive 32bit z — — — Accumulated number
(Receive counter) • Count is made regardless of
normal or abnormal completion.
• Saved in the 32bit counter and
the FAX-SRAM.
3 : FAX output 32bit z ■ The accumulated page number of
(FAX print counter) FAX receive print
Count by size and count in recovery
are the same as the copier
specifications.
• Counted by the print system.
Refer to the “Count Specifications.”
4 : FAX send images 32bit z — — — Accumulated page number of send
(Send page number) • In the serial transmit operation,
each communication is counted
as one individually.
the FAX-SRAM.
5 : Send time 48bit — — — hhhhhhhh:mm:ss Saved in the
(Send time) FAX-SRAM.
6 : Receive time 48bit z — — — hhhhhhhh:mm:ss Saved in the
(Receive time) FAX-SRAM.
13 Process section count data display
1 : Drum counter z ■ Refer to the “Count Specifications.”
(Same as the developer counter.)
2 : Drum rotating time z — — — Count for every second of rotation
3 : Toner counter z ■ Refer to the “Count Specifications.”
4 : Toner supply time z — — — Count for every second of rotation
5 : Developer counter z ■ Refer to the “Count Specifications.”
6 : Developer rotating time z — — — Count for every second of rotation
19 Display of counters related to the
network scanner
1 : Network scanner document 32bit z — — — Accumulated page number of
scan page number counter scanner scan
• The page number of normal
completion of i FAX, E-mail, and
FTP (DESK) send.
• In sequential broadcast, count is
made when one destination send
is normally completed.
• In case of a communication
error: (Except for document jam)
For i FAX and E-mail, send is
canceled and no page is sent.
Therefore count is not made.
For FTP (DESK), though send is
canceled, data reached in the
server remains, and only the
page number of send is counted.
Data location
Code mode (Sim26-5)
Data
size PCU Mainte
PWB nance
PWB PWB
22 19 2 Mail send counter 32bit z — — — Accumulated number of mail send
• The number of send mails of
i FAX, E-mail, and FTP is
counted.
• Even in the serial system, one
scan is counted. (The number of
receivers is not counted.)
• The number of mails reached to
the server is counted.
• Since server data are deleted in
case of send cancel or a network
error, count is not made.
3 FTP send counter 32bit z — — — Accumulated number of FTP send
• The page number of FTP
(DESK) send is counted.
• Even in the serial transmit
operation, the page number of
one scan is counted.
(The number of receivers is
notcounted.)
• The number of mails reached to
the server is counted.
• In case of send cancel or a
network error, the server data
cannot be deleted. Therefore,
count is made.
4 I-FAX original 32bit z — — — Accumulated page number of
(Scan page number internet FAX scan
counter) • A communication error (except
for document jam) is counted.
• Cancel and CE error are not
counted.
• A send (Transfer, F code relay
broadcast) without document
scan is not counted.
5 I-FAX send 32bit z — — — Accumulated number of internet
(Send counter) FAX send
• A send error is counted.
• Resend is not counted.
• Cancel and CE error are not
counted.
the FAX-SRAM.
6 I-FAX receive 32bit z ■ — — Accumulated number of internet
(Receive counter) FAX send
• A normal mail receive is also
counted.
the FAX-SRAM.
7 I-FAX output 32bit z — — — Accumulated page number of
(Print page number counter) internet FAX receive print Count by
size and count in reprint after a jam
are the same as the copier
specifications.
8 SCAN TO HDD 32bit z — — — Page number of SCAN TO HDD
(Save page number save
counter) • The page number of documents
saved to HDD is counted.
2. Web setting service mode (Check or delete of downloaded font)
1) Press "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP address)/font_down.html" and
A. Outline press ENTER key.
The Web setting service mode provides the following functions: 2) Enter the user name and the password, and press OK button.
• Font / Form Download 3) Select Management menu.
• Device Cloning
These functions are used to backup the user data and the key
operatorprogram setting data, and to import backup data to
another machine.
By using these functions, two or more machines can be set in the
same conditions in a short time.
• i-Fax Setup
This function is used to backup i-Fax receive data to the FTP
server.
By using this function, receive data are backed up to the FTP
server when they cannot be printed by some reasons (paper
empty, toner empty, paper jam, etc.) and can be printed out after
recovery of the machine.
After completion of printing the backup data, they are deleted
from the FTP server.
• Password Setup
Recheck and input the password and press [Submit] button.
B. Operating procedures
Entering the Web setting mode
1) Boot the browser software.
2) Enter “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP address)/xxxx_xxxxx.html” and
press ENTER key.
3) Enter the user name and the password, and press OK button.
(NOTE):
The default user name and the default password are
as follows:
User name: service Password: shArp The list of downloaded fonts and the used percentage of the font
area in the memory device are displayed.
* The password can be optionally changed in the following
procedures: Press “Initialize” button and press Yes key, and the downloaded
fonts will be deleted.
1) Enter "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx(IP address)/password_setting.html"
and press ENTER key. (2) Device Cloning
2) Enter a new password. (Backup)
3) Enter the new password again in the check column. 1) Press “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP address)/device_cloning.html” and
4) Press SUBMIT button. press ENTER key.
C. Description
(1) Font/Form Download
(Font download)
1) Press "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP address)/font_down.html" and
press ENTER key.
3) Select an item to be backed up.

(Application / Key operator setting)
4) Press Execute key.
5) Press Save button. (File download mode)
6) Select the destination of save.
7) Press Save button.
3) Select "Download" menu.

4) Select Resourced type.
5) Select Storage Device.
6) Select Font file.
7) Press "Download" button.
(Import)
1) Press “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP address)/device_cloning.html”
and press ENTER key.
3) Select the backed up file (xxxx.bin).
4) Press Execute key.
The backed up data (setup data) are written into the machine.
(3) I-Fax Setup

1) Press "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP address)/i-FAX_ftp.html" and
press ENTER key.
3) Enter the FTP server address to which i-Fax receive data are
backed up.
4) Enter the directory.
5) Enter the user name
6) Enter the password.
7) Press SUBMIT button.
(4) Password Setup

1) Page of the password change for the serviceman.
Pas s word S etup Page - Mic ros oft Internet E xplorer
Password
Service Password
Counts regardless of normal or abnormal.

(/password setting htmll)
3. Paper JAM code
A. Paper jam judgment conditions
JAM judge time
JAM detection method
(JAMTST - JAMJD)
JAM code Content 55/62 PPM 70 PPM
JAM detection timer start trigger JAM judge dedtector
MODEL MODEL
(JAMTST) (JAMJD)
(335mm/s) (395mm/s)
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed jam T1PFC ON PFD2 ON 1608ms 1516ms
(PFD2 not-reached)
PFD2_NM1 PFD2 not-reached jam VPM ON (When the paper lead PFD2_NM1 541ms 480ms
(Tray 3 feed paper) edge comes to 40mm in front of the
transport roller 13, VPM turns ON.)
PFD2_NM2 PFD2 not-reached jam VPM ON (When the paper lead PFD2_NM2 541ms 480ms
PFD2_NAD PFD2 not-reached jam APPD2 ON PFD2_NAD 819ms 710ms
(ADU re-feed paper)
PPD_NMF PPD1 not-reached jam MPRD2 ON PPD ON 429ms 364ms
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD_NT1 PPD1 not-reached jam PFD2 ON PPD ON 352ms 298ms
(Tray 1 feed paper)
PPD_NT2 PPD1 not-reached jam MPRD2 ON PPD ON 429ms 364ms
(Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD_NM1 PPD1 not-reached jam PFD2 ON PPD ON 352ms 298ms
(Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD_NM2 PPD1 not-reached jam PFD2 ON PPD ON 352ms 298ms
(Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD_NLC PPD1 not-reached jam MPRD2 ON PPD ON 429ms 364ms
PPD_NAD PPD1 not-reached jam PFD2 ON PPD ON 352ms 298ms
(ADU re-feed paper)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached jam RRC ON POD1 ON 943ms 800ms
POD2_N POD2 not-reached jam POD1 ON POD2 ON 429ms 364ms
AINPD_N ADU paper entry sensor not- DGS ON (When the paper lead AINPD_ON (Saddle) 435ms 435ms
(Saddle) reached jam edge is transported to 30mm apart
from the switchback operation
startposition.)
AINPD_N (Other) ADU paper entry sensor not- DGS ON (When the paper lead AINPD_ON (Other) 318ms 318ms
reached jam edge is transported to 30mm apart
from the switchback operation
startposition.)
APPD1_N ADU transport sensor 1 not- AINPD ON APPD1ON 292ms 292ms
reached jam
APPD2_N ADU transport sensor 2 not- APPD1 ON + 90mm APPD2 ON 375ms 375ms
reached jam
DESK1 Tray 3 paper feed jam M1PFC ON M1PFD ON 1531ms 1450ms
(M1PFD not-reached)
DESK2 Tray 4 paper feed jam M2PFC ON M2PFD ON 1531ms 1450ms
(M2PFD not-reached)
M1PFD_N2 M1PFD not-reached jam M2PFD ON M1PFD ON 513ms 435ms
(Tray 4 feed paper)
MPRD2_N2 MPRD2 not-reached jam VPM ON (When the paper lead MPRD2 ON 467ms 417ms
MPRD2_NM MPRD2 not reached jam VPM ON (When the paper lead MPRD2 ON 467ms 417ms
(Manual paper feed tray feed edge comes to 40mm in front of the
paper) transport roller 4, VPM turns ON.)
MPRD2_NL MPRD2 not-reached jam VPM ON (When the paper lead MPRD2 ON 467ms 417ms
(LCC paper feed paper) edge comes to 40mm in front of the
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed jam T2PFC ON MPRD1 ON 1519ms 1440ms
(MPRD1 not-reached)
MPRD1_NM MPRD1 not-reached jam MPFD2 ON MPRD1 ON 564ms 478ms
(Manual paper feed tray feed
paper)
MPRD1_NL MPRD1 not-reached jam MPFD2 ON MPRD1 ON 564ms 478ms
MPFD2_NM MPFD2 not-reached jam MPFD1 ON MPFD2 ON 570ms 483ms
paper)
MPFD2_NL MPFD2 not-reached jam LPPD ON MPFD2 ON 677ms 574ms
BPT Manual tray feed jam MPFC ON MPFD1 ON 1367ms 1311ms
(MPFD1 not-reached)
LPPD_N LPPD not-reached jam LTD ON (LCC) LPPD ON 1447ms 1379ms
JAM judge time
(JAMTST - JAMJD)
MODEL MODEL
(JAMTST) (JAMJD)
(335mm/s) (395mm/s)
PFD2_ST1 PFD2 remaining jam RRC ON PFD2 OFF PFD2 OFF
(Tray 1 feed paper) (PFD2 paper rear (PFD2 paper rear
edge detection) + 65mm edge detection)
+ 65mm
PFD2_SM1 PFD2 remaining jam M1PFD OFF (When paper is PFD2 OFF 671ms 569ms
(Tray 3 feed paper) transported by 50mm from M1PFD
paper rear edge detection.)
PFD2_SM2 PFD2 remaining jam M1PFD OFF (When paper is PFD2 OFF 671ms 569ms
(Tray 4 feed paper) transported by 50mm from M1PFD
paper rear edge detection.)
PFD2_SAD PFD2 remaining jam RRC ON PFD2 OFF PFD2 OFF
(ADU re-feed paper) (PFD2 paper rear (PFD2 paper rear
+ 65mm
PPD_ST1 PPD1 remaining jam PFD2 OFF PPD OFF 352ms 298ms
(Tray 1 feed paper)
PPD_ST2 PPD1 remaining jam MPRD2 OFF PPD OFF 429ms 364ms
(Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD_SM1 PPD1 remaining jam PFD2 OFF PPD OFF 352ms 298ms
(Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD_SM2 PPD1 remaining jam PFD2 OFF PPD OFF 352ms 298ms
(Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD_SLC PPD1 remaining jam MPRD2 OFF PPD OFF 429ms 364ms
PPD_SAD PPD1 remaining jam PFD2 OFF PPD OFF 352ms 298ms
(ADU re-feed paper)
PPD_SMF PPD1 remaining jam MPRD2 OFF PPD OFF 429ms 364ms
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
POD1_S POD2 not-reached jam PPD OFF POD1 OFF 1128ms 956ms
(Right paper exit,
infinite form)
POD1_S POD2 not-reached jam PPD OFF POD1 OFF 1128ms 956ms
(Left paper exit)
POD2_SR POD2 remaining jam POD1 OFF POD2 OFF 429ms 364ms
(When paper is discharged on
the right side of the machine.)
POD2_SL POD2 remaining jam POM1 ON (Switchback start) POD2 OFF Paper length + 115mm
(When paper is discharged on
the left side of the machine.)
AINPD_S (Saddle ADU paper entry sensor POD2 OFF AINPD OFF 187ms 187ms
paper exit) remaining jam
AINPD_S (Other) ADU paper entry sensor POD2 OFF AINPD OFF 187ms 187ms
remaining jam
APPD1_S ADU transport sensor 1 AINPD OFF APPD1 OFF 292ms 292ms
remaining jam
APPD2_S ADU transport sensor 2 LD ON APPD2 OFF APPD2 OFF
remaining jam (APPD2 paper rear (APPD2 paper rear
+ 65mm
M1PFD_S1 M1PFD remaining jam M1PFD ON M1PFD OFF Paper length
(Tray 3 feed paper) + 65mm
M1PFD_S2 M1PFD remaining jam M2PFD OFF M1PFD OFF 513ms 435ms
(Tray 4 feed paper)
M2PFD_S M2PFD remaining jam M2PFD ON M2PFD OFF Paper length
+ 65mm
MPRD2_S2 MPRD2 remaining jam MPRD1 OFF MPRD2 OFF 653ms 554ms
(Tray 2 feed paper)
MPRD2_SM MPRD2 remaining jam MPRD1 OFF MPRD2 OFF 653ms 554ms
paper)
MPRD2_SL MPRD2 remaining jam MPRD1 OFF MPRD2 OFF 653ms 554ms
MPRD1_S2 MPRD1 remaining jam MPRD1 ON MPRD1 OFF Paper length
(Tray 2 feed paper) + 65mm
MPRD1_SM MPRD1 remaining jam MPFD2 OFF MPRD1 OFF 564ms 478ms
paper)
MPRD1_SL MPRD1 remaining jam MPFD2 OFF MPRD1 OFF 564ms 478ms
MPFD2_SM MPFD2 remaining jam MPFD1 OFF MPFD2 OFF 570ms 483ms
paper)
JAM judge time
(JAMTST - JAMJD)
MODEL MODEL
(JAMTST) (JAMJD)
(335mm/s) (395mm/s)
MPFD2_SL MPFD2 remaining jam LPPD OFF MPFD2 OFF 1447ms 1379ms
MPFD1_S MPFD1 remaining jam MPFD1 ON MPFD1 OFF Paper length
+ 65mm
LPPD_S LPPD remaining jam LTD OFF LPPD ON 1447ms 1379ms
(LCC paper feed complete)
PPD_PRI PPD1 jam (Image ready request Image data send ready request Image data send ready 30000ms 30000ms
is not sent from ICU.) command is sent. status is sent.
(PCU to MFP CONTROL) (MFP CONTROL to PCU)
LPPD_LCC LPPD jam (No reply in a certain Preliminary paper feed request Preliminary paper feed 70sec 70sec
time after preliminary paper feed command is sent. start status is sent.
from LCC and issuing the paper (PCU to LCC) (LCC to PCU)
feed command.)
[Sensor (cross-section)]
sensor cross section
SPED1 SPUD
SPLS2 SPPD1
SPLS1
SPWS
SPPD3
SPPD4 SPPD2
SPED2
TH_SEN SPOD
T_SEN
TS_SEN
REG_SEN
T_VR
EMP_SEN
BUFENTR
TIM_SEN POD3
PDEL POD2
BUFPASS
FSTTRAY HI_SEN POD1
PENT H_SEN AINPD
STPTY
APPD1
1STPA
2NDPA
SNDTRAY
3RDPA MPED
MPED MPLD2
MPFD1 MPLD1
PPD MPFPWS
MTOP1
APPD2 MPFD2 MTOP2
MPRD2 MPRD1
PFD2 LPPD
T2S PWB
LTD LPED
VPJM T1PPD T1S PWB
PAFLDHP
LUNGEHP
LUNGETOP
DELV
FDRLHP
GIDHP M1PFD M1LUD
M1PED
TRYPAR
PPOSPAR M2PFD M2LUD

M2PED
PAPPOS
[Clutch/Solenoid (cross-section)]
clutch/solenoid cross section
SPFC STRRBC
STRRC
STRBC
STRC
STRRBC
R_CL STRRC
EXITSL
PDLSL
EXTSL
BESCPSL FLPSL
F_SOL
ESCPSL DGS
PSPS
FLPSL1
MFPUS
RRC
MPFC
FLPSL2
LPSL
LTCL
T2PFC MPFGS
RLNIPSL T1PFC HPFC

LPFCL
T2PUS
T1PUS
DSKPFC2
M1PUS
M1PFC
DSKPFC1
M2PUS
M2PFC
[Motor (cross-section)]
motor cross section
SLUMB SPFM
SPSM
K_MOT
M1
MIM
M1P
M7
M8
POM2
M5 Y_MOT
ADM1
M2
M3 M2P
M9 POM1 WEBM
H_MOT FUM
M6 M4
DM
M10
TM1X
TM2X
DVM
MM
M6S
M7S TRM
VPM MM
ADM2
M1S LTM
M8S
M2S
MM
T2LUM T1LUM
M5S
M3S
M4S
M1LUM
M2LUM
LLM
B. Inserter (AR-CF2) paper jam judgment conditions
JAM code Name JAM judge distance
JAM detection start trigger JAM judge detector
REG_SEN_N Resist sensor not-reached JAM Separation start Resist sensor ON (Distance from pick descending start to
resist sensor ON) ✕ 5
REG_SEN_S Resist sensor remaining JAM Transport start from the Resist sensor OFF Max. document length (WLT) - (Resist
take-up position (*1) sensor OFF to take-up position) + 200mm
TIM_SEN_N Timing sensor not-reached JAM Resist sensor ON Timing sensor ON Distance from resist sensor ON to timing
sensor ON + 200mm
TIM_SEN_S Timing sensor remaining JAM Resist sensor OFF Timing sensor OFF Distance from resist sensor OFF to timing
sensor OFF + 200mm
HI_SEN_NI Paper exit sensor remaining JAM Timing sensor ON Reverse sensor ON Distance from timing sensor ON to paper
(Inserter paper feed) exit sensor ON + 200mm
HI_SEN_NP Paper exit sensor notreached JAM Main unit paper exit Reverse sensor ON Distance from main unit side to paper exit
(Main unit paper feed) command receive sensor ON + 500mm
HI_SEN_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM After passing by 20mm from Paper exit sensor OFF Max. document length (WLT) + 200mm
(Main unit paper feed) the paper exit sensor ON
Paper exit sensor remaining JAM Timing sensor OFF Paper exit sensor OFF Distance from timing sensor OFF to paper
(Inserter paper feed) exit sensor OFF + 200mm
H_SEN_NIN Reverse sensor notreached JAM Timing sensor ON Reverse sensor ON Distance from timing sensor ON to
(When entering the reverse path) reverse sensor ON + 100mm
H_SEN_NOUT Reverse sensor notreached JAM Switchback start Reverse sensor ON Distance from reverse stop position (*2) to
(When exiting from the reverse path) reverse sensor ON + 100mm
H_SEN_SIN Reverse sensor remaining JAM Timing sensor OFF Reverse sensor OFF Distance from timing sensor OFF to
(When entering the reverse path) reverse sensor OFF + 100mm
H_SEN_SOUT Reverse sensor remaining JAM After passing 20mm from the Reverse sensor OFF Max. Document length (WLT) + 100mm
(When exiting from the reverse path) reverse sensor ON
*1) The take-up position is 30mm downstream from the vertical path transport roller.
*2) The reverse stop position is 20mm downstream from the reverse sensor.
JAM judgment time

(Stacker:
LTR horizontal size
Saddle: LTR vertical size)
JAM code Content Common to 55/62,
70PPM MODELS
JAM detection timer
JAM judge detector (Main unit paper exit speed:
start trigger
Stacker: 800mm/s
Saddle: 420mm/s)
FES_N FINISHER entry port remaining JAM Main unit paper exit The paper entry sensor is not turned 500ms
command receive ON within the specified time.
FES_S FINISHER entry port remaining JAM Entry port sensor ON The paper entry sensor is not turned 540ms
OFF within the specified time.
FINISHER buffer sensor notreached Entry port sensor ON The buffer sensor is not turned 688ms
JAM ONwithin the specified time.
FINISHER buffer sensor remaining Buffer sensor ON The buffer sensor is not turned OFF 540ms
JAM within the specified time.
FINISHER paper exit sensor not- Entry port sensor ON The paper exit sensor is not turned ON Straight path transport: 453ms
reached JAM within the specified time. Buffer path transport: 815ms
FINISHER paper exit sensor Entry port sensor ON The paper exit sensor is not turned 840ms
remaining JAM OFF within the specified time.
FFPS_N FINISHER saddle transport path Entry port sensor ON The saddle transport path sensor is 914ms
sensor remaining JAM not turned ON within the specified
time.
FFPS_S FINISHER saddle transport path Saddle transport path The saddle transport path sensor is 996ms
sensor remaining JAM sensor ON not turned OFF within the specified
time.
FINISHER saddle paper exit sensor Folding edge sensor ON The saddle transport sensor is not 180mm
not-reached JAM (Completion of thrust turned ON though paper is transported (Twice as much as
operation) in the specified distance. the normal distance)
FINISHER saddle paper exit sensor Saddle paper exit sensor The saddle paper exit sensor is not 209.25mm
remaining JAM ON turned OFF though paper is (1.5 times as much as
transported in the specified distance. the normal distance)
FEXIT_S FINISHER bundle exit remaining Start of bundle exit to the The staple tray sensor is not turned 1000ms
JAM stack tray OFF within the specified time.
FSTPL FINISHER Stacker staple JAM Start of stacker stapling When the staple HP sensor does not 500ms
sense ON within the specified time
from staple HP sensor OFF in stapling
process, and when the staple HP
sensor detects ON in reverse rotation
after stopping the stapler.
JAM judgment time
(Stacker:
LTR horizontal size
Saddle: LTR vertical size)
JAM code Content Common to 55/62,
70PPM MODELS
JAM detection timer
JAM judge detector (Main unit paper exit speed:
start trigger
Stacker: 800mm/s
Saddle: 420mm/s)
FSTPL FINISHER saddle staple JAM Start of saddle stapling When the staple HP sensor does not 500ms
sense ON within the specified time
from stapler HP sensor OFF in
stapling process, and when the staple
HP sensor detects ON in reverse
rotation after stopping the stapler.
FPNCH FINISHER punch JAM Punch HP OFF after The punch HP sensor does not turn 200ms
starting punching ON within the specified time.
FDOP FINISHER door open JAM One of finisher doors Finisher door open is detected in ---
open finishing process.

[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT

Disassembly of each external outfit part refer to each section.
No. Parts
(1) Front cabinet
(2) Rear cabinet upper
(3) Rear cabinet
(4) Right side cabinet upper
(5) Right side cabinet lower
(6) Top left cabinet
(7) Left lower cabinet
(8) Right cabinet center
(9) Front cabinet upper
(10) Paper exit tray cabinet
(11) Left cabinet upper
(12) Right cabinet upper
(13) Left front cabinet
(6)
(1)
(9)
(11)
(7)
(13)
(4) (2)
(10)
(5)
(8)
(3)
(12)
MX-M700N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 1

[B] OPERATION PANEL

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
ORSLED
EHR-3
OCSW 3
GND 2
5V1 1
TOUCH
OCSW CN4
TX25-100P-LT-H1
CN1
TX24-100R-LT-H1
CN3
B6B-PH-K-S
GND 1 1 GND 5V1 1
GND 2 2 GND GND 2
/1 DBL- 3 3 / 1 DBL- OCSW 3
/1 DBL+ 4 4 / 1 DBL+ 24V3 4
1 CLK- 5 5 1 CLK- /LED0 5
LCD 1 CLK+ 6
1 DATA0- 7
6 1 CLK+
7 1 DATA0-
/LED1 6
1 DATA0+ 8 8 1 DATA0+
1 DATA1- 9 9 1 DATA1-
1 DATA1+ 10 10 1 DATA1+
1 DATA2- 11 11 1 DATA2-
1 DATA2+ 12 12 1 DATA2+
1 DATA3- 13 13 1 DATA3-
1 DATA3+ 14 14 1 DATA3+
GND 15 15 GND
GND 16 16 GND
/ORSPD /CCDFAN 17
12V2 18
17 /CCDFAN
18 12V2
24V3 19 19 24V3
24V3 20 20 24V3
PDSEL1 21 21 PDSEL1
1 /CCFT PDSEL2 22
/KEYIN 23
22 PDSEL2
23 /KEYIN
2 SEG0
GND
24
25
24 SEG0
25 GND
GND 26 26 GND
lcdS+ 27 27 lcdS+
3 lcdS-
lcdM+
lcdM-
28
29
30
28 lcdS-
29 lcdM+
30 lcdM-
lcdCP1+ 31 31 lcdCP1+
lcdCP1- 32 32 lcdCP1-
lcdCP2+ 33 33 lcdCP2+
lcdCP2- 34 34 lcdCP2-
lcdD0+ 35 35 lcdD0+
CN2 CN1 CN6 lcdD0- 36 36 lcdD0-
52271-1379 52271-3079 30FMZ-BT lcdD1+ 37 37 lcdD1+
1 DISP XH 30 1 XH lcdD1- 38 38 lcdD1-
2 YD /YL 29 2 /YL lcdD2+ 39 39 lcdD2+
3 LP /XL 28 3 /XL lcdD2- 40 40 lcdD2-
4 CP YH 27 4 YH lcdD3+ 41 41 lcdD3+
5 +3.3V /CCFT 26 5 /CCFT lcdD3- 42 42 lcdD3-
6 GND 24V3 25 6 24V3 GND 43 43 GND
7 M GND 24 7 GND GND 44 44 GND
8 D0 TH 23 8 TH YH 45 45 YH
9 D1 GND 22 9 GND /XL 46 46 /XL
10 D2 lcdD3- 21 10 lcdD3- /STSET 47 47 /STSET
11 D3 lcdD3+ 20 11 lcdD3+ /STMPS 48 48 /STMPS
12 +24V lcdD2- 19 12 lcdD2- GND 49 49 GND
13 VEE lcdD2+ 18 13 lcdD2+ SCN GND 50 50 GND
CN4
LVDS lcdD1-
lcdD1+
17
16 FFC-30Pin
14 lcdD1-
15 lcdD1+ JNT GND
GND
51
52
51 GND
52 GND
/YL 4
52271-0469
1 /YL
PWB lcdD0-
lcdD0+
15
14
16 lcdD0-
17 lcdD0+ PWB 12V2
12V2
53
54
53 12V2
54 12V2
XH 3 2 XH VCONT 13 18 LCD-VEE
YH 2 3 YH 3.3V3 12 19 3.3V3
GND
5V2
55
56
55 GND
56 5V2 SCN cnt PWB
/XL 1 4 /XL LCD_DISP 11 20 lcdDIS GND 57 57 GND
GND 10 21 GND 5V2 58 58 5V2
LCD_CP- 9 22 lcdCP2- GND 59 59 GND
CN1 LCD_CP+ 8 23 lcdCP2+ 3.3V3 60 60 3.3V3
CN2 CN3
GND 7 24 GND
53259-0417 S3B-PH-K-S(LF) S3B-PH-SM4-TB(LF) FRM CCD1 61 61 FRM CCD1
1 CCFT+ LCD_LP- 6 25 lcdCP1- CLK CCD1 62 62 CLK CCD1
/CCFT 3 1 /CCFT
LCD_LP+ 5 26 lcdCP1+ TXD CCD1 63 63 TXD CCD1
2 NC GND 2 2 GND 4
3 NC +24V 1 3 +24V lcdM- 27 lcdM- RES CCD1 64 64 RES CCD1
4 /CCFT INV lcdM+
LCD_YD- 2
3 28 lcdM+
29 lcdS-
RXD CCD1 65
ADD CCD1 66
65 RXD CCD1
66 ADD CCD1
PWB LCD_YD+ 1 30 lcdS+ GND
PAGE1 68
67 67 GND
68 PAGE1
GND 69 69 GND
GND 70 70 GND
/CL1 71 71 /CL1
PDSEL0 72 72 PDSEL0
5V2 73 73 5V2
PD 74 74 PD
CN2 CN1 CN5 SEG1 75 75 SEG1
S6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-SM4-TB(LF)(SN) 52610-2471 T24FAZ-SMT-TF SEG2 76 76 SEG2
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0 GND 1 24 GND GND 77 77 GND
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1 5V1 2 23 5V1 /F0 78 78 /F0
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2 /BZR 3 22 /BZR GND 79 79 GND
5V2 4 4 5V2 NC 4 21 NC /F1 80 80 /F1
PD 5 5 PD NC 5 20 NC GND 81 81 GND
GND 6 6 GND GND 6 19 GND /F2 82 82 /F2
GND 8 17 GND /F3 84 84 /F3
/F3 9 16 /F3 GND 85 85 GND
/F2 10 15 /F2
MFP /F1 11
FFC-24Pin
14 /F1
/BZR
GND
86
87
86 /BZR
87 GND
/F0 12 13 /F0
OPE SEG2 13 12 SEG2
5V1
lcdDIS
88
89
88 5V1
89 lcdDIS
SEG1 14 11 SEG1
PWB SEG0 15 10 SEG0
3.3V3
GND
90
91
90 3.3V3
91 GND
/KEYIN 16 9 /KEYIN LCD VEE 92 92 LCD VEE
5V2 17 8 5V2 TH 93 93 TH
GND 18 7 GND /CCFT 94 94 /CCFT
PD 19 6 PD /YL 95 95 /YL
5V2 20 5 5V2 XH 96 96 XH
PDSEL2 21 4 PDSEL2 24V3 97 97 24V3
PDSEL1 22 3 PDSEL1 24V3 98 98 24V3
PDSEL0 23 2 PDSEL0 GND 99 99 GND
Signal
name
LCD LCD unit Displays the various menu and information.
TOUCH Touch panel Executes the various adjustments and the setting
operation.
ORSLED Document size detection light Generates the document size detection signal.
emitting PWB
ORSPD Document size detection light Generates the document size detection signal.
reception PWB
OCSW OCSW SPF open/close detector Trigger for document size detection. Transmission Sensor
type
/CCFT /CCFT LCD backlight Backlight for LCD. Cold Cathode
Fluorescent Tube
No. Name Function/Operation

1 LVDS PWB Generates the LCD display signal.
2 Operation control PWB Controls the display operation panel.
3 INV PWB Generates a high voltage for backlight.
MX-M700N OPERATION PANEL B – 1

2. Operational descriptions 3) Disconnect each cables.
A. Outline
This section describes various types of settings, display and opera-
tion.
The LCD display section is controlled by the MFP CONTROL PWB.
The touch panel, operation keys and LED display are controlled by
the SCANNER CONTROL PWB.
3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Operation panel
No. Unit No. Parts
4) Remove the earth terminal.
(1) Operation panel unit a Operation control PWB
b LVDS PWB
c LCD INV-J PWB
d LCD unit
e Touch panel
(1)-e (1) (1)-a
5) Disconnect the cable while saving an operation panel unit.
(1)-b
(1)-c
(1)-d
(1) Operation panel unit

1) Remove the screws. Remove the upper right cabinet.
a. Operation control PWB

2) Remove the cover of the operation section. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
(See "(1) Operation panel unit")
2) Remove the earth terminal.
3) Remove the operation control PWB.

b. LVDS PWB 4) Remove the LCD unit.
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Disconnect each cables.
3) Remove the LVDS PWB.
e. Touch panel
c. LCD INV-J PWB 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
(See "(1) Operation panel unit") 2) Disconnect the flat cable.
2) Disconnect each cables. 3) Remove the earth wire.
3) Remove the LCD INV-J PWB. 4) Remove the LCD unit.
d. LCD unit
1) Remove the operation panel unit. 5) Remove the touch panel.
2) Disconnect each cables.
3) Remove the LCD cover.

Service Manual
MX-M700N
[C] DSPF SECTION

A. The paper feed tray section
SPLS2
SPLS1
/SLUMB
CN1 CN4
SPWS SPED2
TX24-100R-LT-H1
GND 1
TX25-100P-LT-H1
1 GND
SCN
GND 2 2 GND
/1_DBL- 3 3 /1_DBL-
STLD
SPWS SCNcnt
/1_DBL+
1_CLK-
1_CLK+
4
5
6
4 /1_DBL+
5 1_CLK-
6 1_CLK+
JNT
1_DATA0- 7 7 1_DATA0-
PWB 1_DATA0+
1_DATA1-
8
9
10
8 1_DATA0+
9 1_DATA1-
PWB
1_DATA1+ 10 1_DATA1+
1_DATA2- 11 11 1_DATA2-
1_DATA2+ 12 12 1_DATA2+
1_DATA3- 13 13 1_DATA3-
1_DATA3+ 14 14 1_DATA3+
GND 15 15 GND
GND 16 16 GND
/CCDFAN 17 17 /CCDFAN
12V2 18 18 12V2
24V3 19 19 24V3
24V3 20 20 24V3 CN5 CN101
PDSEL1 21 21 PDSEL1 T24FAZ-SMT-TF T24FAZ-SMT-TF
PDSEL2 22 22 PDSEL2
/KEYIN 23 23 /KEYIN GND 24 1 GND
SEG0 24 24 SEG0 5V1 23 2 5V1
GND 25 25 GND /BZR 22 3 /BZR
SMP-05V-NC SMR-05V-N
GND 26 26 GND N.C 21 4 N.C
1 OUT /SLUMB 1 lcdS+ 27 27 lcdS+ N.C 20 5 N.C
2 OUT /SLUMA 2 lcdS- 28 28 lcdS- GND 19 6 GND
3
4
5
OUT SLUMB
OUT SLUMA
24V3
3
4
5
DSPF PWB lcdM+
lcdM-
lcdCP1+
29
30
31
29 lcdM+
30 lcdM-
31 lcdCP1+
GND
GND
/F3
18
17
16
7
8
9
GND
GND
/F3
lcdCP1- 32 32 lcdCP1- /F2 15 10 /F2
SMR-12V-N SMP-12V-NC CN2 CN12 lcdCP2+ 33 33 lcdCP2+ /F1 14 FFC-24Pin 11 /F1
B32B-PHDSS-B S22B-PHDSS-B lcdCP2- 34 34 lcdCP2-
1 5V2 1 /F0 13 12 /F0
GND 1 1 GND lcdD0+ 35 35 lcdD0+
2 SPPD4 2 SEG2 12 13 SEG2
CN3 GND 2 2 GND lcdD0- 36 36 lcdD0-
3 GND 3 SEG1 11 14 SEG1
B34B-PHDSS-B VAREF 3 3 VAREF lcdD1+ 37 37 lcdD1+
4 5V2 4 SEG0 10 15 SEG0
1 OUT /SLUMB N.C 4 4 5V1 lcdD1- 38 38 lcdD1-
5 SPPD3 5 /KEYIN 9 16 /KEYIN
2 /STRC 24V3 5 5 24V3 lcdD2+ 39 39 lcdD2+
B3B-PH-K-S 6 GND 6 5V2 8 5V2
3 OUT /SLUMA SPPD2 6 6 SPPD2 lcdD2- 40 40 lcdD2- 17
5V1 3 7 5V1 7 GND
4 /STRBC 24V3 7 7 24V3 lcdD3+ 41 41 lcdD3+ 7 18 GND
SPED2 2 8 SPED2 8
5 OUT SLUMB SCOV 8 8 SCOV lcdD3- 42 42 lcdD3- PD 6 19 PD
GND 1 9 GND 9 43
6 /SRRBC 5V2 9 9 5V2 GND 43 GND 5V2 5 20 5V2
10 5V2 10 44
7 OUT SLUMA SPPD1 10 10 SPPD1 GND 44 GND PDSEL2 4 21 PDSEL2
11 STLD 11 45
8 /SRRC /SPFMA 11 11 /SPFMA YH 45 YH PDSEL1 3 22 PDSEL1
12 GND 12 46
B3B-PH-K-S 9 GND SPED1 12 12 SPED1 /XL 46 /XL PDSEL0 2 23 PDSEL0
5V2 3 10 GND SPFMA 13 13 SPFMA /STSET 47 47 /STSET GND 1 24 GND
STLD 2 11 GND STUD 14 14 STUD /STMPS 48 48 /STMPS
GND 1 12 GND /SPFMB 15 15 /SPFMB GND 49 49 GND
13 GND SPFMO1 16 16 SPFMO1 GND 50 50 GND
14 GND SPFMB 17 17 SPFMB GND 51 51 GND
15 GND
16 GND
17 5VPOD
SPFMO2
STRRC
STRRBC
18
19
20
18 SPFMO2
19 STRRC
20 STRRBC
GND
12V2
12V2
52
53
54
52 GND
53 12V2
54 12V2
MFP
18 GND GND 55 55 GND
19 5V2
20 GND
/SLUMA
/SLUMB
SLUMA
21
22
23
21 GND
22 GND 5V2
GND
5V2
56
57
58
56 5V2
57 GND
58 5V2
OPE
21 5V2 SLUMB 24
GND 59 59 GND
22 5V2
23 5V2
24 5V2
5V2
SPF SET
SRRBC
SRRC
25
26
27
3.3V3
FRM_CCD1
60
61
62
60 3.3V3
61 FRM_CCD1
PWB
25 VAREF CLK_CCD1 62 CLK_CCD1
STRC 28
TXD_CCD1 63 63 TXD_CCD1
26 N.C STRBC 29
RES_CCD1 64 64 RES_CCD1
27 24V3 SRRBC SPFC 30
RXD_CCD1 65 65 RXD_CCD1
28 5V2 GND 31
ADD_CCD1 66 66 ADD_CCD1
29 24V3 FAN GND 32
GND 67 67 GND
30 24V3 STRBC
PAGE1 68 68 PAGE1
31 24V3 STRC CN11
GND 69 69 GND
32 24V3 SRRC S20B-PHDSS-B
GND 70 70 GND
33 24V3 PM 1 /SLUMA
/CL1 71 71 /CL1
34 N.C 2 /SLUMB
PDSEL0 72 72 PDSEL0
3 SLUMA
5V2 73 73 5V2
4 SLUMB
PD 74 74 PD
5 SPF SET
SEG1 75 75 SEG1
6 SRRBC
SEG2 76 76 SEG2
7 SRRC
GND 77 77 GND
8 STRC
/F0 78 78 /F0
9 STRBC 79
GND 79 GND
10 SPFC 80
/F1 80 /F1
11 SPFFAN 81
PHNR-3-H PHNR-3-H GND 81 GND
12 SPPD4 82
+BU3P-TR-P-H /F2 82 /F2
13 SPPD3 83
GND 83 GND
1 VAREF 3 14 SPED2
/F3 84 84 /F3
2 SPWS 2 15 STLD GND 85 85 GND
3 GND 1 16 SPWS 86
/BZR 86 /BZR
17 SPLS2 GND 87 87 GND
PHNR-9-H PHNR-9-H 18 SPLS1 5V1 88 88 5V1
B3B-PH-K-S +BU9P-TR-P-H 19 SOCD lcdDIS 89 89 lcdDIS
5V2 3 1 VAREF 9 20 SPOD 90 90 3.3V3
3.3V3
SPLS2 2 2 SPWS 8 91 91 GND
GND
GND 1 3 GND 7 LCD_VEE 92 92 LCD_VEE
4 5V2 6 TH 93 93 TH
5 SPLS2 5 /CCFT 94 94 /CCFT
B3B-PH-K-S 6 GND 4 95
/YL 95 /YL
5V2 3 7 5V2 3 XH 96 96 XH
SPLS1 2 8 SPLS1 2 24V3 97 97 24V3
GND 1 9 GND 1 24V3 98 98 24V3
GND 99 99 GND
GND 100 100 GND
Signal
name
SPED2 SPED2 DSPF document empty detector DSPF document empty detection Transmission Sensor
type
SPLS1 SPLS1 DSPF document length detector 1 DSPF document length detection (Short) Transmission Sensor
type
SPLS2 SPLS2 DSPF document length detector 2 DSPF document length detection (Long) Transmission Sensor
type
SPWS SPWS DSPF document size (Width) DSPF document size (Width) detection Volume resistor Other detector
detection analog data detector
STLD STLD DSPF document tray lower limit DSPF document tray lower limit detection Transmission Sensor
detector type
/SLUMB /SLUMB DSPF paper tray lift motor Lifts up and down the DSPF paper feed tray. Stepping motor
MX-M700N DSPF SECTION C – 1

B. Paper feed and paper transport section
SPFM
SCOV
SPFC
SPED1
STUD
SPPD1 STRRBC
STRRC
STRBC
PHNR-2-H STRC
PHNR-2-H +BU2P-TR-P-H
1 /SPFC 2
2 24V3 1
B3B-PH-K-S
5V2 3
SCOV 2
GND 1
B3B-PH-K-S CN5
5V2 3
SPPD1
GND
2
1
B14B-PH-K-S
1 /SPFC
SPPD2
2 24V3
3 SCOV DSPF PWB
4 GND
B3B-PH-K-S 5 SPPD1
5V2 3 6 GND
SPED1 2 7 SPED1
GND 1 8 GND
9 STUD
10 GND
11 5V2
B3B-PH-K-S
12 5V2
5V2 3
13 5V2
STUD 2
14 5V2
GND 1
CN3
B34B-PHDSS-B
1 OUT /SLUMB
2 /STRC
3 OUT /SLUMA
4 /STRBC CN4
5 OUT SLUMB B4B-PH-K-S B3B-PH-K-S
6 /SRRBC 5V2 1 3 5V2
7 OUT SLUMA SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2
8 /SRRC GND 3 1 GND
9 GND N.C 4
PHNR-2-H
10 GND
PHNR-2-H +BU2P-TR-P-H 11 GND
1 /STRC 2 SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC
12 GND
2 24V3 1 13 GND CN1 6 24V3 6
14 GND B12B-PH-K-S 5 24V3 5
15 GND SPFMB1 12 4 (SPFMA1) 4
PHNR-3-H 16 GND /SPFMB1 11 3 (/SPFMA1) 3
PHNR-3-H +BU3P-TR-P-H 17 5VPOD /SPFMA1 10 2 (/SPFMB1) 2
18 GND SPFMA1 9 1 (SPFMB1) 1
1 /STRBC 3
19 5V2 24V3 8
2 N.C 2
20 GND 24V3 7
3 24V3 1
21 5V2 24V3 6
22 5V2 24V3 5
23 5V2 5V2 SPFMA2 4
24 5V2 /SPFMA2 3 PHNR-2-H PHNR-2-H
25 VAREF /SPFMB2 2 +BU2P-TR-P-H
26 N.C SPFMB2 1 2 /STRRC 1
27 24V3 SRRBC 1 24V3 2
28 5V2 CN6
29 24V3 FAN B5B-PH-K-S
30 24V3 STRBC /STRRC 1
31 24V3 STRC PHNR-3-H PHNR-3-H
24V3 2
32 24V3 SRRC 24V3 3 +BU3P-TR-P-H
33 24V3 PM N.C 4 3 /STRRBC 1
34 N.C /STRRBC 5 2 N.C 2
1 24V3 3
Signal
name
SCOV SCOV DSPF cover switch DSPF cover open/close detection Transmission Sensor
type
SPFM SPFM1 DSPF paper feed motor, paper Drives the paper feed roller and the transport roller. Stepping motor
transport motor (DSPF)
SPFC SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch DSPF paper feed section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
STRRC STRRC DSPF NO.1 resist roller clutch DSPF resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
STRRBC STRRBC DSPF No.1 resist roller brake clutch DSPF resist roller braking Electromagnetic
clutch
STRC STRC DSPF paper transport roller 2 clutch DSPF transport roller 2 ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
STRBC STRBC DSPF paper transport roller 2 brake DSPF transport roller 2 braking Electromagnetic
clutch clutch
SPED1 SPED1 DSPF document upper limit detector DSPF document upper limit Transmission Sensor
type
SPPD1 SPPD1 DSPF document paper pass DSPF document paper pass detection 1 Transmission Sensor
detector 1 type
detector 2 type
STUD STUD DSPF document tray upper limit DSPF document tray upper limit detection Transmission Sensor
detector type

C. CIS section
CIScnt CN2
PWB B12B-PHDSS-B
SD7 1
SD6 2
SD5 3
CN3 SD4 4
9604S-35F SD3 5
1 SD7 SD2 6
2 GND SD1 7
3 SD6 SD0 8
4
5
GND
SD5
/LST
SCLK
9
10
SCN cnt PWB
6 GND GND 11
7 SD4 GND 12
8 GND
9 SD3
CN1 CN10
10 GND S26B-PHDSS-B
B26B-PHDSS
11 SD2 BR BR
2_DATA1- 1 1 2_DATA1-
12 GND BR BR
2_DATA1+ 2 2 2_DATA1+
13 SD1 BR BR
2_DATA0- 3 3 2_DATA0-
14 GND BR BR
FFC-35Pin
15
16
SD0
GND
2_DATA0+
2_CLK-
4
5
BR
BR
BR
BR
4
5
2_DATA0+
2_CLK- CIS unit
2_CLK+ 6 6 2_CLK+
17 /LST BR BR
/2_DBL- 7 7 /2_DBL-
18 GND BR BR
/2_DBL+ 8 8 /2_DBL+
19 SCLK GY GY
GND 9 9 GND
20 GND BR BR
FRM_CCD2 10 10 FRM_CCD2
21 LD BR BR
CLK_CCD2 11 11 CLK_CCD2
22 GND BR BR
PAGE2 12 12 PAGE2
23 DATA BR BR
24 GND BR BR
25 CLK BR BR
26 GND BR BR
27 LGATE OR OR
3.3V3 17 17 3.3V3
28 GND OR OR
3.3V3 18 18 3.3V3
29 SCN RD RD
24V3 19 19 24V3
30 GND GY GY
GND 20 20 GND
31 VDS PL PL
12V2 21 21 12V2
32 GND GY GY
GND 22 22 GND
33 VAS BL BL
5V2 23 23 5V2
34 GND GY GY
GND 24 24 GND
35 VLED BL BL
5V2 25 25 5V2
BR BR
/CISSET 26 26 /CISSET
Signal
name
CIS CIS CIS control PWB/CIS unit Scans document images (back surface) and controls
the CIS unit.

D. Paper exit section
SPSM
SRRBC
SRRC
SPOD
SPPD4
SOCD SPPD3
CN1
B12B-PH-K-S
SPFMB1 12
/SPFMB1 11
/SPFMA1 10
DSPF PWB SPFMA1
24V3
9
8
SMR-06V-B
6 /SPFMB2
SMP-06V-BC
6
24V3 7 5 24V3 5
24V3 6 4 SPFMB2 4
24V3 5 3 SPFMA2 3
CN3 SPFMA2 4 2 24V3 2
B34B-PHDSS-B /SPFMA2 3 1 /SPFMA2 1
1 OUT /SLUMB /SPFMB2 2
2 /STRC SPFMB2 1
3 OUT /SLUMA
4 /STRBC CN2 CN12
5 OUT SLUMB B32B-PHDSS-B S22B-PHDSS-B
6 /SRRBC GND 1 1 GND
SMR-12V-N SMP-12V-NC GND 2 2 GND
B3B-PH-K-S 7 OUT SLUMA
5V2 3 1 5V2 1 8 /SRRC VAREF 3 3 VAREF
SPPD4 2 2 SPPD4 2 9 GND N.C 4 4 5V1
GND 1 3 GND 3 10 GND 24V3 5 5 24V3
4 5V2 4 11 GND SPPD2 6 6 SPPD2
5 SPPD3 5 12 GND 24V3 7 7 24V3
B3B-PH-K-S
6 GND 6 13 GND SCOV 8 8 SCOV
5V2 3
7 5V1 7 14 GND 5V2 9 9 5V2
SPPD3 2
8 SPED2 8 15 GND SPPD1 10 10 SPPD1
GND 1
9 GND 9 16 GND /SPFMA 11 11 /SPFMA
10 5V2 10 17 5VPOD SPED1 12 12 SPED1
11 STLD 11 18 GND SPFMA 13 13 SPFMA
12 GND 12 19 5V2 STUD 14 14 STUD
20 GND /SPFMB 15 15 /SPFMB
21 5V2 SPFMO1 16 16 SPFMO1
22 5V2 SPFMB 17 17 SPFMB
PHNR-2-H 23 5V2 SPFMO2 18 18 SPFMO2
5V2
24 5V2 STRRC 19 19 STRRC
PHNR-2-H +BU2P-TR-P-H
25 VAREF STRRBC 20 20 STRRBC
1 /SRRC 2 /SLUMA 21 21 GND
26 N.C
2 24V3 1 /SLUMB 22 22 GND
27 24V3 SRRBC
28 5V2 SLUMA 23
29 24V3 FAN SLUMB 24
SPF SET 25 CN11
30 24V3 STRBC S20B-PHDSS-B
PHNR-3-H 31 24V3 STRC SRRBC 26
SRRC 27 1 /SLUMA
PHNR-3-H +BU3P-TR-P-H 32 24V3 SRRC
STRC 28 2 /SLUMB
1 /SRRBC 3 33 24V3 PM 3 SLUMA
34 N.C STRBC 29
2 N.C 2 4 SLUMB
SPFC 30
3 24V3 1 5 SPF SET
GND 31
GND 32 6 SRRBC
7 SRRC
8 STRC
9 STRBC
10 SPFC
11 SPFFAN
12 SPPD4
13 SPPD3
14 SPED2
B3B-PH-K-S 15 STLD
5V2 3 16 SPWS
SOCD 2 17 SPLS2
GND 1 18 SPLS1
19 SOCD
20 SPOD
B3B-PH-K-S
SPOD
GND
3
2 SCN cnt PWB
5VPOD 1
Signal
name
SOCD SOCD DSPF open/close detector DSPF open/close detector Transmission Sensor
type
SPOD SPOD DSPF paper exit detector DSPF paper exit detection Transmission Sensor
type
detector 3 type
detector 4 type
SRRC SRRC DSPF No.2 resist roller clutch DSPF transport roller 3 ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
SRRBC SRRBC DSPF No.2 resist roller brake clutch DSPF transport roller 3 braking Electromagnetic
clutch
SPSM LSPFH2 DSPF paper exit motor DSPF paper exit motor (DSPF) Stepping motor

2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
Sheet documents are automatically fed and transported for continuous scanning.
The front and the back surfaces of duplex sheet documents can be scanned at a time.
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 10 8 7

1 Document tray Paper feed tray for documents. Max. loading capacity of documents: 150 sheets (80g/m2) or 19.5mm
or less.
2 Pickup roller Picks up a document and transports it to the document feed roller.
3 Document feed roller Feeds documents.
4 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
5 No.1 resist roller (Drive) Performs document feed resist.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports documents.
7 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports documents.
8 No.2 resist roller (Drive) Makes synchronization between the document lead edge and the scan start position.
9 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges documents.
10 CIS unit Scans the back surface of a document.
B. Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, preliminary feed is performed for the second and the following documents when two or more
documents of A4/Letter size or smaller are scanned.
For this purpose, each transport roller is provided with a clutch to perform independent control.
In addition, an electromagnetic brake is employed for each transport roller because it reduces the motor load when compared with the mechan-
ical brake.
Transport speed 360mm/s Letter (216mm) 65 sheets (Single surface)

COPY key ON
SPFFAN ON simultaneously with print start

OFF when the last paper SPOD off
Fan motor
First sheet: Paper feed start after booting the motor (Clutch ON)
SPFMCLK1, 2 Off at 24mm (67ms) from SPPD1 on (SIM adjustment)
Timer from SPF motor ON 167 ms 167 ms
(60mm) (60mm) ON again after 30ms from OFF, and OFF after 60mm (167ms)
Second and the following sheets: The 2nd sheet start simultaneously with SPPD1 off (Clutch ON)
SPFC OFF at 24mm (67ms) from SPPD1 on (SIM adjustment)
Document feed clutch 30 ms 67 ms ON simultaneously with SRRC on, and OFF after 60mm (167ms)
67 ms (24mm)
SIM adjustment SIM adjustment First sheet ON simultaneously with the second ON of SPFC (paper feed CL)
STRRC 50 ms OFF after 18mm (50ms) from SPPF1 off
Document transport resist clutch (18mm) 50 ms Second and the following sheets ON simultaneously with SRRC on
10 ms 10 ms (18mm) OFF after 18mm (50ms) from SPPD1 off
STRRBC First sheet ON simultaneously with SPPD1 on
Document transport resist brake clutch 5 ms 36 ms 5 ms Second and the following sheets OFF before10ms of STRRC on
SIM adjustment ON after 5ms of STRRC off
STRC First sheet ON simultaneously with STRRC
Document transport clutch 10 ms 5 ms 50 ms and OFF simultaneously with SPPD3 on
5 ms ON before 36ms (SIM adjustment) of SRRC on
STRBC ON after 5ms of STRC off
Document transport brake clutch 10 ms OFF before 10ms of STRC on
SPPD1
Document transport sensor 1
SPPD2
Document transport sensor 2
SPPD3
Document transport sensor 3 50 ms 50 ms
(18mm) (18mm)
SRRC ON when scan ready OK (cycle time 923ms)
Resist clutch 923 ms OFF after 18mm (50ms) of SPPD3 off
10 ms 10 ms
SRRBC ON simultaneously with SPPD3 on
Resist brake clutch OFF before 10ms of SRRC on
SPPD4
Document transport sensor 4 Default 37mm (102.8ms) Default 26mm (72.3ms)
SIM adjustment SIM adjustment (Image rear edge alignment)
Scanner scan (Image lead edge alignment)
CIS scan
SPOD
Document exit sensor

C. Document tray lift operation 3. Disassembly and assembly
When a job is started, the document tray is lifted until a document
at the top in the document tray turns on the document upper limit A. External outfit section
sensor (STUD).
No. Unit No. Parts
The pressure between the document at the top in the document
(1) DSPF unit a Cabinet
tray and the take-up roller is maintained at a constant level to
b Document mat
improve the paper feed capability.
When paper to be scanned is exhausted, the document empty sen- (1)
sor (SPED1) turns off and the document tray moves down automat-
ically until the lower limit sensor detects it.
Up and down movements of the document tray are performed by
the lift motor (normal rotation, reverse rotation) and the lift gear.
(1)-a (1)-b (1)-a
(1) DSPF unit

1) Push down the fixing plate.
STUD SPED1
STLD
D. Document feed, transport, scan, paper exit,

and operating speed
The document fed by the take-up roller is sent through the paper
feed roller and the transport roller to the resist roller section.
In the resist roller section, the document lead edge and the scan 2) Remove the rear cover.
start position are synchronized.
The document is transported to the scan section. After being
scanned, the document discharged to the document exit tray by the
paper exit roller.
The document transport speed varies depending on the scan mode
and the scan magnification ratio as shown below.
Document transport
Scanning mode Magnification ratio
speed
Single surface scan Up to 117% 360mm/sec
Single surface scan 118% or above 220mm/sec
Duplex scan Up to 100% 220mm/sec
Duplex scan 101% or above 110mm/sec 3) Remove the harness.
E. The original scan

The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) unit is the contact type image
scan sensor, and is assembled to the DSPF to scan document
images. The LED light in the CIS unit is radiated to a document,
and the reflected light is passed through the lens to the photoelec-
tric conversion elements to form images. (Pixel: 7196 pixels, reso-
lution: 600dpi) The CIS and the CCD assembled in the lens unit
allow simultaneous scan of duplex surfaces of a document.

[Note for assembly] 2) Open the DSPF, and remove the screws.
• Install the earth terminal in the direction shown in the figure
below.
45
4) Remove the fixing screw.

3) Unhook the claws on the tray side to remove the front cover.
4) Remove the rear cover.
5) Remove the DSPF.
b. Document mat
1) Open the DSPF.
a. Cabinet
1) Open the cover, and remove the screws.

2) Remove the mat. B. The paper feed tray section
No. Unit No. Parts
(1) Document tray unit a DSPF document length detector 1
b DSPF document length detector 2
c DSPF document size (Width)
detection analog data detector
(2) Others a DSPF paper tray lift motor
b DSPF paper tray lower limit detector
c DSPF document empty detector
(1) (2)-a
(1)-b
[Caution when attaching]
• Place the mat on the document base glass surface; close the (1)-a
DSPF to attach the mat; then open again and apply pressure by (1)-c
hand to attach.
(2)-c
(2)-b
(1) The document tray section

1) Remove the cabinet. (See “A-(1)-a. Cabinet”)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document tray unit.
a. DSPF document length detector 1

b. DSPF document length detector 2
c. DSPF document size (Width) detection analog data
detector
2) Remove the document tray unit.
(See “B-(1) Document tray unit”)
3) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF document (2) Others
length detector 1 (A) and the DSPF document length detector
a. DSPF paper tray lift motor
2 (B).
1) Remove the rear cover. (See “A-(1)-a. Cabinet”)
2) Remove the DSPF paper tray lift motor.
B
5) Remove the rotation tray unit.
b. DSPF paper tray detector

c. DSPF document empty detector
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF paper tray
detector (A) and the DSPF document empty detector(B).
6) Remove the DSPF document size (width) detection analog

data detector.

C. Paper feed and paper transport a. Paper feed roller
section b. Pickup roller
1) Pull up the lever and open the upper cover.
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Paper feed unit a Paper feed roller ✕{
b Pickup roller ✕{
c DSPF paper feed clutch
d DSPF document tray upper
limit detector
e DSPF document upper limit
detector
f DSPF cover switch
g DSPF document paper pass
detector 1
(2) Others a Separation roller ✕{
b DSPF paper feed/paper
transport motor
c DSPF resist roller brake
clutch
d DSPF resist roller clutch
2) Remove the roller cover.
e No.1 resist roller (Drive) ✕{
f Torque limiter ✕
g DSPF paper transport roller 2
brake clutch
h DSPF paper transport roller 2
clutch
i Transport roller 2 (Drive) ✕{
j Transport roller 1 (Drive) ✕{
k DSPF document paper pass
detector 2
(1)-b (1)-e (1)-g

(1) (1)-a (1)-d (1)-f (1)-c
3) Remove the pawl, and remove the paper feed roller (A) and
pickup roller (B).
(2)-b
(2)-c
(2)-d B A
(2)-f (2)-g
(2)-h
(2)-j
(2)-a (2)-e (2)-i (2)-k
(1) Paper feed unit

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed unit.

c. DSPF paper feed clutch (2) Others
d. DSPF document tray upper limit detector a. Separation roller
e. DSPF document upper limit detector 1) Remove the paper feed roller and the pickup roller.
(See “C-(1)-a. Paper feed roller” and “C-(1)-b. Pickup roller”)
f. DSPF cover switch
2) Remove the cover.
g. DSPF document paper pass detector 1
2) Remove the document feed tray unit.
(See “C-(1) Paper feed unit”)
3) Unhook the claw to remove the support. Remove the reverse

roller.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the DSPF the paper feed
clutch.

• Rotate the roller into the pin slot.
b. DSPF paper feed/paper transport motor
2) Remove the DSPF paper feed/paper transport motor.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF document

tray upper limit detector (A), the DSPF document upper limit
detector (B), the DSPF cover switch (C), and the DSPF docu-
ment paper pass detector 1 (D).
A B

c. DSPF resist roller brake clutch 6) Remove the bearing reception fixture, and remove the torque
d. DSPF resist roller clutch limiter.

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the clamp, the plastic
Ering, the DSPF resist roller brake clutch (A), and the DSPF
resist roller clutch (B).
B
A
7) Remove the electromagnetic clutch.

(See “C-(2)-c. DSPF resist roller brake clutch”)
8) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bearing.
e. No.1 resist roller (Drive)

f. Torque limiter
3) Remove the plastic E-ring in the arrow direction and remove
the No. 1 resist roller idle.
9) Slide the No. 1 resist roller drive in the arrow direction, and
remove the plastic E-ring.
4) Remove the separation roller. (See “C-(2)-a. Separation

roller”)
5) Remove the paper feed paper guide lower unit in the arrow
direction.
10) Remove No. 1 resist roller (Drive) in the arrow direction.

g. DSPF paper transport roller 2 brake clutch 6) Remove the belt. Remove No. 1 resist roller (Drive).
h. DSPF paper transport roller 2 clutch
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the plastic E-ring, the
DSPF paper transport roller 2 brake clutch (A), and the DSPF
paper transport roller 2 clutch (B).
i. Transport roller 2 (Drive)

j. Transport roller 1 (Drive)
2) Remove the paper feed tray unit. (See “C-(1) Paper feed unit”)
3) Remove the No. 1 resist roller idle and the paper feed paper
guide lower unit. (See “C-(2)-e. No. 1 resist roller (Drive)”)
4) Remove the resin E-ring on cover, and remove link lever. 8) Remove the electromagnetic clutch.
(See “C-(2)-g. DSPF paper transport roller 2 brake clutch” and
“C-(2)-h. DSPF paper transport roller 2 clutch”)
9) Remove the resin E-ring on shaft side.

10) Remove the lever and shaft.

11) Remove Transport roller 2 (Drive). (1) CIS control PWB/CIS unit
3) Remove the harness. Remove the PWB cover.
k. DSPF document paper pass detector 2

4) Remove each cables, and remove the PWB.
3) Remove the No. 1 resist roller idle, the paper feed paper guide
lower unit, and the No. 1 resist roller drive.
(See “C-(2)-e. No. 1 resist roller (Drive)”)
4) Remove the transport roller 1 (Drive).
(See “C-(2)-j. Transport roller 1 (Drive)”.)
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF document
paper pass detector 2.
5) Loosen the hinge screws to lower the two fittings.
D. CIS section
Mainte
No. Parts
nance
(1) CIS control PWB/CIS unit ✕{
(1)

6) Open the DSPF, attach the DSPF drop preventing stopper, • Clean the paper guide glass surface.
and remove the paper guide.
E. Paper exit section

Mainte
No. Parts
nance
(1) DSPF paper exit motor
(2) DSPF paper transport roller 3 brake clutch
(3) DSPF paper transport roller 3 clutch
(4) No.2 resist roller (Drive) ✕{
(5) Paper exit roller (Drive) ✕{
(6) DSPF document paper pass detector 3
7) Remove the earth, and remove the CIS.
(8) DSPF paper exit detector
(9) DSPF open/close detector
(9) (8) (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
[Note installing] (7)
(5)
• When assembling the flat cable, first attach the lower side then
the upper side.
(1) DSPF paper exit motor
2) Remove the tension SP and remove the DSPF paper feed/
paper transport motor.
CIS cnt PWB
CIS unit
BLUE

(2) DSPF paper transport roller 3 brake clutch 5) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the DSPF paper trans-
port roller 3 brake clutch (A), and the DSPF paper transport
(3) DSPF paper transport roller 3 clutch
roller 3 clutch (B).
2) Remove the connecters.
B
(4) No.2 resist roller (Drive)

3) Remove the connecter base. 1) Remove the cabinet. (See “A-(1)-a. Cabinet”)
3) Remove the resin E-ring, and jam disengage knob.
4) Remove the super snap band to remove the cable.

(See “E-(2) DSPF paper transport roller 3 brake clutch”)
5) Remove the rear side bearing to remove the resin E-ring
spacer.

6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the No. 2 resist roller 5) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the paper exit roller
drive in the arrow direction. (Drive) in the arrow direction.
(5) Paper exit roller (Drive)

3) Loosen the screw, and lift the belt tension roller, and fix them (7) DSPF document paper pass detector 4
with the screws. (8) DSPF paper exit detector
* When fixing, apply a tension to the spring.
(9) DSPF open/close detector
3) Disconnect the connectors, and remove the DSPF document
paper pass detector 3 (A), the DSPF document paper pass
detector 4 (B), the DSPF paper exit detector (C), and the
DSPF open/close detector (D).
A
B

D

F. Others (3) Drive unit
No. Parts
(1) DSPF fan motor
(2) DSPF PWB 3) Loosen the screw, and lift the belt tension roller, and fix them
(3) Drive unit with the screws.
* When fixing, apply a tension to the spring.
(1) (3) (2)
(1) DSPF fan motor

2) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the DSPF fan motor.
REVERSE
4) Remove the drive unit.
(2) DSPF PWB

1) Remove the rear cover.
(See “A-(1)-a. Cabinet”)
2) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the DSPF PWB.

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

5 Resist roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
section
section 10 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Others 11 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Cleaning is air spraying
1 2 3 4
8 7 5 6 5 6
9
9
9
9 10
10
10

MX-M700N

[D] SCANNER SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MHPS CIS unit

Copy lamp unit
CL
Scanner motor
CCD PWB
1
CCD lens unit
MHPS
CIS unit
Copy lamp unit

11 6
10
9 2
MIMDA
8 CL1
CCD PWB 3
7 4
6
5
4
CN4 CN1
TX25-100P-LT-H1 TX24-100R-LT-H1
GND 1 1 GND
GND 2 2 GND
/1_DBL- 3 3 /1_DBL-
/1_DBL+ 4 4 /1_DBL+
1_CLK- 5 5 1_CLK-
SCN 1_CLK+
1_DATA0-
6
7
6 1_CLK+
7 1_DATA0- CIScnt
1_DATA0+ 8 8 1_DATA0+
JNT 1_DATA1-
1_DATA1+
1_DATA2-
10
11
9 9 1_DATA1-
10 1_DATA1+
11 1_DATA2-
PWB
CN3
9604S-35F
SD7 1
1_DATA2+ 12 12 1_DATA2+ GND 2
PWB 1_DATA3-
1_DATA3+
13
14
13 1_DATA3-
14 1_DATA3+
SD6
GND
SD5
3
4
5
GND 15 15 GND
GND 16 16 GND GND 6
/CCDFAN 17 17 /CCDFAN SD4 7
12V2 18 18 12V2 GND 8
24V3 19 19 24V3 CN1 SD3 9
CN10
24V3 20 20 24V3 S26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS GND 10
PDSEL1 21 21 PDSEL1 SD2 11
2_DATA1- 1 1 2_DATA1-
PDSEL2 22 22 PDSEL2 GND 12
2_DATA1+ 2 2 2_DATA1+
/KEYIN 23 23 /KEYIN SD1 13
2_DATA0- 3 3 2_DATA0-
SEG0 24 24 SEG0 GND 14
2_DATA0+ 4 4 2_DATA0+
CN2 GND 25 25 GND SD0 15
2_CLK- 5 5 2_CLK- FFC-35Pin
IL-FPR-40S-VF-E1500 GND 26 26 GND GND 16
2_CLK+ 6 6 2_CLK+
40 GND lcdS+ 27 27 lcdS+ /LST 17
/2_DBL- 7 7 /2_DBL-
39 1_DATA3+ lcdS- 28 28 lcdS- GND 18
/2_DBL+ 8 8 /2_DBL+
38 1_DATA3- lcdM+ 29 29 lcdM+ SCLK 19
GND 9 9 GND
37 1_DATA2+ lcdM- 30 30 lcdM- GND 20
FRM_CCD2 10 10 FRM_CCD2
36 1_DATA2- lcdCP1+ 31 31 lcdCP1+ LD 21
CLK_CCD2 11 11 CLK_CCD2
35 1_DATA1+ lcdCP1- 32 32 lcdCP1- GND 22
PAGE2 12 12 PAGE2
34 1_DATA1- lcdCP2+ 33 33 lcdCP2+ DATA 23
33 1_DATA0+ lcdCP2- 34 34 lcdCP2- GND 24
32 1_DATA0- lcdD0+ 35 35 lcdD0+ CLK 25
31 GND lcdD0- 36 36 lcdD0- GND 26
30 1_CLK+ lcdD1+ 37 37 lcdD1+ LGATE 27
3.3V3 17 17 3.3V3
29 1_CLK- lcdD1- 38 38 lcdD1- GND 28
28 GND 3.3V3 18 18 3.3V3
lcdD2+ 39 39 lcdD2+ SCN 29
27 /1_DBL+ 24V3 19 19 24V3
lcdD2- 40 40 lcdD2- GND 30
26 /1_DBL- lcdD3+ 41 41 lcdD3+ GND 20 20 GND
VDS 31
25 GND lcdD3- 42 42 lcdD3- 12V2 21 21 12V2
GND 32
24 FRM_CCD1 GND 43 43 GND GND 22 22 GND
VAS 33
23 /PAGE1 GND 44 44 GND 5V2 23 23 5V2
GND 34
22 CLK_CCD1 YH 45 45 YH GND 24 24 GND
FFC-40Pin VLED 35
21 ADD_CCD1 /XL 46 46 /XL 5V2 25 25 5V2
20 TXD_CCD1 /STSET 47 47 /STSET /CISSET 26 26 /CISSET
19 RXD_CCD1 /STMPS 48 48 /STMPS
18 RES_CCD1 GND 49 49 GND
17 GND GND 50 50 GND
16 3.3V3 GND 51 51 GND
15 3.3V3 GND 52 52 GND
14 GND 12V2 53 53 12V2
13 5V2 12V2 54 54 12V2
12 5V2 GND 55 55 GND
11 5V2
10 5V2
9 5V2
5V2
GND
5V2
56
57
58
56 5V2
57 GND
58 5V2
SCN cnt
8 5V2 GND 59 59 GND
7 5V2
6 5V2
5 GND
3.3V3
FRM_CCD1
CLK_CCD1
60
61
62
60 3.3V3
61 FRM_CCD1
62 CLK_CCD1
PWB
4 12V2 TXD_CCD1 63 63 TXD_CCD1
3 12V2 RES_CCD1 64 64 RES_CCD1
2 GND RXD_CCD1 65 65 RXD_CCD1
1 GND ADD_CCD1 66 66 ADD_CCD1
GND 67 67 GND
PAGE1 68 68 PAGE1
GND 69 69 GND
GND 70 70 GND
/CL1 71 71 /CL1
PDSEL0 72 72 PDSEL0
5V2 73 73 5V2
PD 74 74 PD
SEG1 75 75 SEG1
SEG2 76 76 SEG2
GND 77 77 GND
/F0 78 78 /F0
GND 79 79 GND CN6
/F1 80 80 /F1 B3B-PH-K-S 53053-0310(MOLEX)
GND 81 81 GND MHPS 1 1 MHPS
CN3 /F2 82 82 /F2 GND 2 2 GND
SLD5R-1 (FCI) SLD5R-1 (FCI) GND 83 83 GND 5V2 3 3 5V2
GND 1 1 GND /F3 84 84 /F3
GND 2 FFC-5Pin 2 GND GND 85 85 GND
/CL1 3 3 /CL1 /BZR 86 86 /BZR
24V3 4 4 24V3 GND 87 87 GND
24V3 5 5 24V3 5V1 88 88 5V1
lcdDIS 89 89 lcdDIS CN7
3.3V3 90 90 3.3V3 S6B-PH-K-R
GND 91 91 GND MIMA 1
LCD_VEE 92 92 LCD_VEE MIMB 2
TH 93 93 TH /MIMA 3
/CCFT 94 94 /CCFT /MIMB 4
/YL 95 95 /YL 24V3 5
XH 96 96 XH 24V3 6
24V3 97 97 24V3
24V3 98 98 24V3
GND 99 99 GND
GND 100 100 GND
MX-M700N SCANNER SECTION D – 1

Signal
name
MIM MIM Scanner (reading) motor Drives the scanner (reading) section. Stepping motor
MHPS MHPS Scanner home position sensor Scanner home position detection. Transmission Sensor
detector type
CIS unit CIS unit Contact-type image scan sensor unit.
Back document image scan.
CCD PWB CCD PWB Front document image scan.
(Document table/DSPF mode)
Converts the document images (optical signals) into
electrical signals.
CL1 CL1 Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)

1 Scanner drive belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the scanner unit.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Lens Reduces the document images (optical) and radiates them onto the CCD.
4 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
5 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp lights.
6 No. 3 mirror Assures the optical path from No. 2 mirror to the CCD.
7 No. 2 mirror Assures the optical path from No. 1 mirror to No. 3 mirror.
8 White balance sheet for DSPF (CIS)/ The white reference sheet for scanning with the CIS unit.
DSPF scanning glass
9 CIS unit Contact-type image scan sensor unit.
Back document image scan.
10 CCD PWB Front document image scan. (Document table/DSPF mode)
Converts the document images (optical signals) into electrical signals.
A. Outline
There are following three methods of scanning documents in this machine.
• Place a document on the table glass. The copy lamp unit is operated to radiate copy lamp light onto the document, scanning the document
with the CCD.
• The DSPF feeds a document. The copy lamp light is radiated onto the document which is stopped at the specified position and the document
is scanned by the CCD.
• The DSPF feed a document. The LED light of the CIS unit which is attached to the DSPF is radiated to the back of the document, and the
document is scanned by the CIS.
B. Description
(1) CCD/Lens unit
This machine employs the reduction optical-type line CCD (Charge Coupled Device) of scan resolution of 600dpi and 7400 pixels.
CCD scan is performed by shifting the scan positions sequentially by the carriage unit (lamp and mirror) scan or moving the document with the
DSPF.
Lights reflected by the document are reflected by each mirror to form images on CCD elements through the reduction-type lens. The CCD con-
verts the optical energy into electrical energy (analog). (Photoelectric conversion)
(2) CIS unit
The image sensor which scans back document images is attached to the DSPF. The close-contact type image sensor (Contact Image Sensor)
with scan resolution of 600dpi and 7196 pixels is employed.
For the CIS to scan documents, the scan position is sequentially shifted by shifting the document by the DSPF, and the LED light in the unit is
radiated to the back of the document, and photo energy is converted into electric energy (analog signal).
CIS
Selfoc lens
Lens center line
LED PWB
Glass
CIS UNI
Focus point

(3) Image signal flow
The image signal converted into electric energy (analog signal) is A-D converted on the CCD PWB. Image processes such as white balance
and shading correction are performed on the scanner control PWB. The image signal is then sent through the mother board to the MFP control
PWB.
In the MFP control PWB, image process is performed according to the setting content of the operation panel. The image data are converted
into laser lighting signals (VIDEO signals), and sent through the mother PWB and the PCU to the LSU (Laser Scan Unit).
In the LSU, the VIDEO signals are converted into laser beams, which are radiated onto the drum.
CIS
Copy lamp unit
HDD
CCD UN
MOTHER PWB
PCU PWB
MFP CONTROL PWB
DRUM
LSU
(4) Carriage (lamp unit) shift (scan) speed

The carriage scan speed depends on the copy magnification ratio.
Speed up to 171% = 220mm/s
Speed of 172% - 400% = 110mm/s
(5) Timing chart
Platen timing chart
MM
Feed Return
MIMD
Home position Home position
MHPS
Scan
CCD
PSW
DSPF duplex timing chart
SPFM
1030mS
SRRC
SPPD4
94mS
SPOD
55mS
181mS
CCD
CIS

3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Scanner unit
1) Remove the DSPF unit.
A. Scanner section
(See “A-(1) DSPF unit” in the “DSPF section”)
Mainte 2) Remove the table glass. (See “a. Table glass”)
No. Unit No. Parts
nance 3) Remove the panel lock connector. (For dehumidifier heater)
(1) Scanner unit a Table glass {
b Slit glass (DSPF scan mode) {
c Mirror {
d Lens {
e Reflector {
f Scanner dry heater
g Rails ✩
h Drive belt ✕
i Drive wire ✕
j Pulley ✕
k Scanner lamp
4) Remove the flat cable, the connector, and harness from the
l Inverter PWB
cable clamp.
m CCD PWB lens unit {
n Scanner relay PWB
o Scanner motor
p Scanner FLASH PWB
q Scanner control PWB
r DSPF open/close detector
s Scanner home position
sensor detector
t Document size detection light
emitting PWB
u Document size detection light
reception PWB
(1)-c (1)-e
(1)-i (1)-d
(1)-b
(1)-g 5) Remove the right side cabinets upper and lower.
(1)-f
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-j
(1)-g (1)-j (1)-a
(1)-q 6) Remove the screw and the fixing plate.

(1)-s
(1)-p
(1)-l (1)-t
(1)-k (1)-r
(1)-o
(1)-u (1)-n (1)-m (1)

7) Remove the tray. a. Table glass
b. White standard glass
(When scanner iinternal maintenance)
1) Loosen the screws in the hinge section, and lower the two
metal fixtures.
8) Remove the left side cabinets front and rear.
2) Open the DSPF, and slide the DSPF drop-preventing stopper

pin of the Hinge L to the drop preventing position.
9) Remove the screws.
3) Remove the right glass holder.

4) Using a cloth, etc. on the right glass surface to prevent finger-
prints, remove the cover.
10) Hold the both sides of the scanner base, and slide it toward 5) Remove the white reference glass unit.
you to remove.
* When assembling or disassembling the table glass, check

that the glass does not cover the steel plate on the front
side.

c. Mirror 5) Remove the lens cover.
d. Lens
e. Reflector
1) Remove the table glass. (See “a. Table glass”)
2) Move the lamp unit.
6) Cary out cleaning of the lens and CCD.
3) Clean mirrors 2 and 3.
7) Cary out cleaning of the reflector.
4) Remove the harnesses clamp and the dark box.
f. Scanner dry heater

2) Shift the lamp unit, and remove the dark box. (See “c. Mirror”)
3) Remove the dark box and remove the harness clamp, and
remove the scanner dry heater.
* When attaching the dark box cover, check to insure that the
blade spring is in the original position.

g. Rails 3) Remove the connector in front side.
1) Remove the table glass. (See “a. Table glass”) 4) Turn up the cutout mylar and remove the screw; then shift the
2) Grease up the rails. lamp holder to the front side and take out the lamp from above
on the rear side.
5) Remove the harness connector from the hole on the front side.
h. Drive belt
i. Drive wire
j. Pulley
2) Check the drive belt, drive wire and pulley.
l. Inverter PWB
2) Remove the core guide.
3) Unhook the claw to remove the plastic members on the rear
side.
k. Scanner lamp
2) Remove the core guide to shift the optical lamp unit to the
base plate cutout section.
4) While holding to prevent from falling, remove the screw fixing

to remove the inverter PWB.
5) Disconnect the lamp connectors.
6) Release the connector lock on the inverter PWB to remove the
FC cable.

• Place each harness on the rib.

m. CCD PWB lens unit n. Scanner relay PWB
1) Remove the table glass. (See “a. Table glass”) 1) Remove the table glass. (See “a. Table glass”)
2) Remove the harnesses clamp and the dark box. 2) Remove the harness cover B.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner interface

PWB.
3) Mark the lens unit plate position by pen.
o. Scanner motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
4) Release the connector lock on the CCD PWB to remove the

FC cable.
5) Remove the screw to remove the CCD PWB lens unit.
2) Remove the spring and disconnect the connector.
6) Attach the CCD PWB lens unit to the marked position.

3) Remove the scanner motor unit. 4) Remove the scanner control PWB unit.
5) Remove the scanner control PWB.
4) Remove the scanner motor.
r. DSPF open/close detector

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See “o. Scanner motor”)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DSPF open/close
detector.
p. Scanner FLASH PWB * When disconnecting the connector, hold the housing section
and slide straightly to remove.
q. Scanner control PWB
2) Release the lock, and remove the scanner FLASH PWB.
s. Scanner home position sensor detector

2) Remove the DSPF harness holder B.
3) Remove the clamp, and disconnect the connector.

* Do not disconnect the PCN harness connector.

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner home posi- 4) Remove the document detection arm lower, and remove the
tion sensor. document detection light emitting unit.
t. Document size detection light emitting PWB

1) Remove the DSPF unit.
u. Document size detection light reception PWB
(See “A-(1) DSPF unit” in the “DSPF section”)
1) Remove the operation base plate A.
2) Disconnect the connector and the earth terminal, and remove
the upper cabinet rear.
2) Remove the document size detection light receiving PWB, and

disconnect the connector.
[Note for assembly]

• First, connect the harness to the PWB, and check that PWB
parts are properly connected. Then attach the PWB to the
3) Remove the document detection fulcrum TIG, and remove the PWB holder.
document detection arm unit.

4. Maintenance
✕: Check {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift position
(Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.)
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Scanner section 1 Mirror { { { { { { { { {
2 Lens { { { { { { { { {
3 Reflector { { { { { { { { {
4 Sersors { { { { { { { { {
5 Table glass { { { { { { { { {
6 Dust-proof glass { { { { { { { { {
7 OC { { { { { { { { {
9 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
10 Drive belt ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11 Drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
12 Pulley ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
7
1
1
8
10
3
1 11
12
5
9 2
4
11
12

MX-M700N
[E] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MM
MPFC
MFPUS
MPFD1 4
MTOP2
MPED MTOP1
DSW-R MPFPWS
MPLD2
MPLD1
MPFGS
123
PHNR-09-H+BU09P-TR-P-H DF3-3S-2C
1 GND2 9 1 GND2
DRAWER 2 MPLD1 8 2 MPLD1
PCU PWB QR/P4-24S-C(01)/QR/P4-24P-C(01)
1 DSW-F(R) 1
3
4
+5V2
MPLD2
7
6
3 +5V2
5 MTOP1 5 DF3-3S-2C
2 GND2 2
6 MTOP2 4 1 GND2
3 MPLD1 3
7 GND2 3 2 MPLD2
CN-17 4 +5V2 4
8 MPFPWS 2 3 +5V2
B30B-PHDSS-B 5 MPLD2 5
9 Vref 1
1 M2LUM 6 MTOP1 6 179228-2
2 +24V1 7 MTOP2 7
1 MTOP1
3 GND2 8 GND2 8
CN-13 2 GND2
4 /T1PFC 9 MPFPWS 9
B26B-PHDSS-B 10 Vref 10
5 +24V1 179228-2
DSW-F(R) 1 11 /MPFC 11
6 +24V1 1 MTOP2
(NC) 2 12 +24V1 12
7 /M2PFC 2 GND2
(NC) 3 13 +24V1 13
8 /DSKPFC2
GND2 4 14 /MFPUS 14
9 GND2 PHR-3
+24V1 5 15 GND2 15
10 GND2 1 GND2
MPLD1 6 16 MPED 16
11 TXD-FIN 2 MPFPWS
/MFPUS 7 17 +5V2 17
12 +5V2 3 Vref
S5B-PH-K-S +5V2 8 18 +24V1 18
13 RXD-FIN
GND2 9 19 /MPFGS 19
GND2 1 14 /MM PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
MPLD2 10 20 +5V-MPFD1 20
+5V2 2 15 /DTR-FIN 3 +24V1 1
MPED 11 21 GND2 21
/MM 3 16 MMCLK 2 (NC) 2
MTOP1 12 22 MPFD1 22
MMCLK 4 17 /DSR-FIN 1 /MPFC 3
+5V2 13 23 (NC) 23
MM-T 5 18 MM-T
MTOP2 14 24 DSW-R 24
19 RES-FIN SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
+24V1 15
20 TSW-LED 1 +24V1 1
MPFPWS 16
21 (NC) 2 /MFPUS 2
/MPFGS 17
22 TSW
Vref 18
23 GND2 DF3-3S-2C
+5V-MPFD1 19
24 GND2 1 GND2
/MPFC 20
25 TANSET 2 MPED
MPFD1 21
26 GND2 3 +5V2
+24V1 22
27 +5V2
GND2 23
28 DSW-DSK SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
GND2 24
29 (NC) 1 +24V1 1
(NC) 25
30 +5V2 2 /MPFGS 2
DSW-R 26
PHR-3
1 +5V-MPFD1
2 GND2
3 MPFD1
MX-M700N MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION E – 1

Signal
name
MPED MPED Manual feed paper empty Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection Transmission Manual paper
detector type feed unit
MPFD1 MPFD1 Manual feed paper pass Manual tray paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
detector 1 type system sensor
MPFPWS MPFPWS Manual feed paper width Manual feed paper width detection Volume resistor Analog detector
detector
MPLD1 MPLD1 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper length detection Transmission Manual paper
detector 1 (Paper feed side) type feed unit
MPLD2 MPLD2 Manual feed paper length Manual paper feed tray paper length detection (Outside) Transmission Manual paper
detector 2 type feed unit
MTOP1 MTOP1 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detection Contact type Manual paper
detector 1 (Storing position) feed unit
MTOP2 MTOP2 Manual tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detection Contact type Manual paper
detector 2 (Pull-out position) feed unit
DSW-R DSW-R Manual feed unit open/close Manual paper feed unit open/close detection, Main charger Micro switch
Switch power source, Developing bias power line open/close.
MPFC MPFC Paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/ Electromagnetic
(Manual paper feed) OFF. clutch
MFPUS MFPUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
(Manual paper feed) solenoid
MPFGS MPFGS Manual paper feed gate Manual feed gate solenoid open/close control. Electromagnetic
solenoid solenoid

1 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
2 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is applied to the paper separation roller to prevent against double feed.
A. Outline
The paper feed tray 1 holds 900 sheets, the paper feed tray 2 holds 1,300 sheets, the multi-purpose paper feed tray 3 holds 500 sheets, the
paper feed tray 4 holds 500 sheets, and the manual paper feed tray holds 100 sheets. Those paper feed units are standard provisions.

Mainte (1) (1)-f (1)-j (1)-i
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1)-n (1)-o
A Multi manual a Manual paper feed unit open/ (1)-h (1)-b
paper feed tray close switch
unit b Manual feed empty detector
c Pickup roller ✕{
d Paper feed roller ✕{
e Separation roller ✕{
f Torque limiter ✕
g Manual feed gate solenoid
h Manual feed paper pass
detector 1
i Paper feed clutch
j Paper pickup solenoid
k Manual paper width size
detection PWB (1)-a (1)-g (1)-d (1)-k (1)- l (1)- m
l Manual feed paper length (1)-e (1)-c
detector 1
m Manual feed paper length
detector 2
n Manual tray pull-out position
detector 1
o Manual tray pull-out position
detector 2

A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit 4) Remove the manual paper feed unit open/close switch.
1) Pull out the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit from the left and
right accuride.
(2) Manual feed empty detector
(See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit")
2) Remove the manual feed upper cover.
(See "A-(1) Manual paper feed unit open/close switch")
3) Remove the pickup cover.
(1) Manual paper feed unit open/close switch

2) Remove the manual feed upper cover.
4) Remove the actuator unit.
3) Remove the manual feed front cover.
5) Remove the manual feed empty detector.

(3) Pickup roller (6) Torque limiter
(4) Paper feed roller 1) Pull out the multi paper feed tray unit.
(5) Separation roller 2) Remove the bottom cover.
2) Remove the actuator unit.
(See "A-(2) Manual empty detector")
3) Unhook the claw to remove the pickup roller.
3) Remove the separation roller.
4) Unhook the claw to remove the paper feed roller.
4) Remove the separation roller shaft, and remove the torque lim-
iter.
5) Remove the separation roller cover.
6) Remove the separation roller.

(7) Manual feed gate solenoid (9) Paper feed clutch
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit. 1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
(See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit") (See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit")
2) Remove the bottom cover. (See "A-(4) Torque limiter") 2) Remove the upper cover. (See "A-(1) Pickup roller")
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed 3) Remove the front cover.
gate solenoid unit.
4) Remove the interface pass earth plate, the E-ring, and the
4) Remove the manual gate solenoid.
bearing, and remove the manual paper feed mounting plate.
* When assembling, tighten the screw so that the lever tip is at

13 r 0.5mm from the frame edge with the solenoid plunger
pulled.
5) Remove the connector and E-ring, and remove the paper feed
clutch.
13 5mm
(8) Manual feed paper pass detector 1

1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the bottom cover. (See "A-(4) Torque limiter")
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
paper pass detector 1.
* When assembling, fit the rotation stopper of the paper feed

clutch with the clutch fixing screw.

(10) Paper pickup solenoid (11) Manual paper width size detection PWB
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit. 1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
(See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit") (See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit")
2) Remove the manual paper feed upper cover and the pickup 2) Remove the multi tray 250 lower.
upper cover. (See"A-(1) Pickup roller")
3) Remove the front cover, and remove the manual paper feed
mounting plate. (See "A-(7) Paper feed clutch")
4) Remove the spring.
3) Remove the width detection mounting plate.

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid unit.
4) Remove the pawl and the connector, and remove the manual
paper feed VR PWB.
6) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
[Note installing]
Check that there is a clearance when the solenoid plunger is
pulled.
4.2mm

(12) Manual feed paper length detector 1 B. Others
(13) Manual feed paper length detector 2 1) Slide the harness holder in the direction of Y and install it. The
band must be in the range of A. Pull section B in the arrow
(14) Manual tray pull-out position detector 1 direction to give a slack to the harness.
(15) Manual tray pull-out position detector 2
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed tray unit.
(See "A. Multi manual paper feed tray unit") B
2) Remove the multi tray 250 lower.
(See "A-(11) Manual paper width detection PWB") X
Band
3) Remove the manual tray lower.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual feed paper
length detector 1 (A) and manual feed paper length detector 2
(B).
B A
Y
2) Fold the harness with your fingers and check that the harness
keeps the folded shape along the holder when it is released.
Rib C must be separated from the harness.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

tray pull-out position detector 1(A) and the manual paper feed C
tray pull-out position detector 2 (B).

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Multi manual paper 1 Pickup roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
feed 2 Paper feed roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
• Manual paper feed: 100K or 1 year
1 5
2 5
3
5 5

MX-M700N
[F] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Paper feed tray 1, 2 section
PHR-2
1 T1LUM
2 GND2
PCU PWB SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
1 +24V1 1
CN-14 2 /T1PUS 2
B24B-PHDSS-B
T1LUM 1 PHR-2
T2LUM 2 1 T2LUM
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
+24V1 6 1 +24V1 1
/T1PUS 7 2 /T2PUS 2
/T2PUS 8
+5V2 9
+24V1 10
GND2 11
/DSKLS 12
T1LUD
GND2
13
14
MM
T1PED 15 SMR-04V-N/SMP-04V-NC S4B-PH-K-S
T1SPD 16 1 +5V2 1 1 +5V2
+5V2 17 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
+5V2 18 3 T1LUD 3 3 T1LUD
GND2 19 4 T1PED 4 4 T1PED
GND2 20
T2LUD 21
T2SPD 22 SMP-10V-NC/SMR-10V-N S4B-PH-K-S
T2PED 23 1 +5V2 1 1 +5V2
+5V2 24 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
3 T2LUD 3 3 T2LUD
4 T2PED 4 4 T2PED
5 GND2 5
CN-17
B30B-PHDSS-B
6 T1SPD
7 +5V2
6
7 PHR-3
T1PUS
M2LUM 1
8 GND2 8 1 GND2
+24V1 2
9 T2SPD 9 2 T1SPD
GND2 3 10 +5V2 10 3 +5V2
/T1PFC
+24V1
4
5 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
T1PFC
+24V1 6 PHR-3
3 +24V1 1
1 GND2
/M2PFC
/DSKPFC2 8
7 2 (NC)
1 /T1PFC
2
3
2 T2SPD T1S PWB
9 3 +5V2
GND2
GND2 10
TXD-FIN 11
+5V2 12
RXD-FIN 13 S5B-PH-K-S
/MM 14 1 GND2
/DTR-FIN 15
MMCLK 16
2
3
+5V2
/MM
T1LUM T2PFC
/DSR-FIN 17 4 MMCLK
MM-T
RES-FIN 19
18 5 MM-T
8
TSW-LED 20
(NC) 21
TSW 22 PHR-3
GND2 23 1 GND2 TANSET
GND2 24 2 TANSET
TANSET 25 3 +5V2 T1SPD
GND2
+5V2
26
27 5 8
DSW-DSK 28
(NC)
+5V2
29
30
7 T2LUM
6 T2S PWB
CN-12
B30B-PHDSS-B
T2SPD
+24V1 1
+24V1 2 T2PUS
/T2PFC 3
/HPLS 4
1
+24V1
DVCH1
5
6 4
/HPFC 7
DVCH2 8
+24V1 9
DVCH3 10
/PSBC 11
DVCH4 12
+5V2 13
+24V1 14
PPD
TCS
15
16
1
GND2
GND2
17
18 3
+5V-MPRD1 19
TSGOUT 20
7
GND2
GND2
21
22
6
MPRD1
+5V2
23
24
5 2
+5V-MPRD2 25
HUS-DV 26
GND2 27
GND2 28
MPRD2
TH-DV
29
30 3
4 1
2
3 +24V1 1
2 (NC) 2
1 /T2PFC 3
MX-M700N TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION F – 1

Signal
name
T1SPD T1SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining detection (Paper feed tray 1) Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 1) type remaining
quantity sensor
T2SPD T2SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining detection (Paper feed tray 2) Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 2) type remaining
quantity sensor
TANSET TANSET Paper feed tray1, 2 (1, 2 tray unit) Paper feed tray1, 2 (1, 2 tray unit ) insertion detection Transmission Paper feed tray
detection signal type system sensor
T1PFC T1PFC Paper feed clutch Paper freed tray 1 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
T2PFC T2PFC Paper feed clutch Paper feed tray 2 section roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
T1LUM T1LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. DC brush motor Selection of
Brake mode
T2LUM T2LUM Paper feed tray lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray. DC brush motor Selection of
Brake mode
MM MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the DC brushless Paper pass
manual paper feed section. motor
T1S PWB T1S PWB Detector PWB (Paper feed tray 1, 2 Paper tray upper limit detection and paper empty
paper feed unit ) detection
(Paper feed tray 1)
T2S PWB T2S PWB Detector PWB (Paper feed tray 1, 2 Paper tray upper limit detection and paper empty
paper feed unit ) detection
(Paper feed tray2)

1 Lift wire Transmits the paper tray lift moter to power the paper feed tray.
2 Paper feed table Paper is put on this table.
3 Paper feed tray unit 1, 2 regulation plates L/R Regulates the paper width to restrict skew to the minimum.
4 Pulley Transmits the paper tray lift-up motor power to the paper feed tray.
5 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
8 Torque limiter Provides a certain level of resistance power for the paper separation roller rotation to prevent against
double feed.

B. Paper feed tray 3, 4 section
11
10 9 7
11 8 9 8 MM
CN-17
B30B-PHDSS-B
1 M2LUM
2 +24V1
3 GND2
4 /T1PFC
5 +24V1
6 +24V1
10 7 PHR-2
M2LUM 1
7
8
9
/M2PFC
/DSKPFC2
GND2
GND2 2 10 GND2
1 M2LUM 1 11 TXD-FIN
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 2 GND2 2 12 +5V2
1 +24V1 2 3 +24V1 3 13 RXD-FIN
2 /M2PFC 1 4 /M2PFC 4 14 /MM
5 GND2 5 15 /DTR-FIN
6 TXD-FIN 6 16 MMCLK
7 RXD-FIN 7 17 /DSR-FIN
8 /DTR-FIN 8 18 MM-T
M1LUM 9
10
/DSR-FIN
RES-FIN
9
10
19
20
RES-FIN
TSW-LED
SMR-10V-N/SMP-10V-NC 21 (NC)
M1PFC S5B-PH-K-S 22
23
TSW
GND2
DSKPFC1 GND2
+5V2
1
2
24
25
GND2
TANSET
/MM 3 26 GND2
MMCLK 4 27 +5V2
MM-T 5 28 DSW-DSK
M1LUD 12 M2LUM
29
30
(NC)
+5V2
11 M1PFD CN-15
B34B-PHDSS-B
1 DSW-F
S6B-PH-K-S 2 (NC)
(NC) 1 3 GND2
GND2 2 4 GND2
M1SS1 3 5 /GBPWM
M1PUS M1SS2
M1SS3
4
5
6
7
/MHVREM
MHV-T
M2PFC M1SS4 6
8
9
/THV+PWM
THV+REM
10 /CHV-PWM
1 GND2 1 11 /CHV-REM
PHR-3 2 M1SS1 2 12 /CHVACPWM
GND2 1 3 M1SS2 3 13 /CHVACREM
9 M1SPD M1SS PWB
M1SPD
+5V2
2
3
4 M1SS3
5 M1SS4
6 GND2
4
5
6
14
15
16
/DVPWM
/DVREM
HVREM
8 2 S6B-PH-K-S
7 M1SPD
8 +5V2
7
8
17
18
+24V1
(NC)
7 M1PED 1 (NC)
GND2
M2SS1
1
2
3
9 (NC)
10 GND2
11 M2SS1
9
10
11
19
20
21
GND2
GND2
M1SS1
M2SS2 4 12 M2SS2 12 22 M2SS1
M2SS3 5 13 M2SS3 13 23 M1SS2
M2SS4 6 14 M2SS4 14 24 M2SS2
15 GND2 15 25 M1SS3
PHR-3 16 M2SPD 16 26 M2SS3
GND2 1 17 +5V2 17 27 M1SS4
1 M2SPD
+5V2
2
3
18 (NC) 18 28
29
30
M2SS4
GND2
GND2
31 M1SPD
M1PWS 32
33
M2SPD
+5V2
34 +5V2
3 SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N
1 +24V1 1
1 +24V1 1
2 /M1PUS 2 2 /M1PUS 2
3 GND2 3
4 M1PED 4
PHR-3 5 +5V2 5
GND2 1 6 GND2 6
M1PED 2 7 M1LUD 7
+5V2 3 8 +5V2 8
4 PHR-3(RED)
9 +5V-M1PFD 9
10 GND2
11 M1PFD 11
10 CN-16
B32B-PHDSS-B
5 GND2
M1LUD 2
+5V2
1
3
1
2
+24V1
+24V1
6 PHR-3
+5V-M1PFD 1
3
4
5
/M1PUS
/M2PUS
GND2
GND2 2 6 GND2
M1PFD 3 7 M1PED
M2LUD 12 8
9
10
M2PED
+5V2
+5V2
11 GND2
11 M2PFD 12
13
14
GND2
M1LUD
M2LUD
SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC 15 +5V2
1 +24V1 1 1 +24V1 1 16 +5V2
2 /M2PUS 2 2 /M2PUS 2 17 +5V-M1PFD
3 GND2 3 18 +5V-M2PFD
10 PHR-3
GND2 1
4
5
6
M2PED 4
+5V2
GND2
5
6
19
20
21
GND2
GND2
M1PFD
M2PUS M2PED 2
+5V2 3
7
8
M2LUD
+5V2
7
8
22
23
24
M2PFD
+24V1
+24V1
9 +5V-M2PFD 9
PHR-3(RED) 10 GND2 10 25 /M1PFC
GND2 1 11 M2PFD 11 26 /DSKPFC1
M2LUD 2 27 M1LUM
+5V2 3 28 Vref
9 M2SPD M2SS PWB PHR-3

29
30
GND2
GND2
+5V-M2PFD 1 31 (NC)
8 2 1
GND2
M2PFD
2
3
32 M1PWS
7 M2PED PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H PCU PWB

1 +24V1 2
2 /M1PFC 1
PHR-2
M1LUM 1
GND2 2
1 +24V1 2
2 /DSKPFC1 1
Soldering SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
Vref 3 1 Vref 1
GND2 1 2 GND2 2
M1PWS 2 3 M1PWS 3
5 6 4 3

Signal
name
M1LUD M1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit detector Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) type system sensor
M1PED M1PED Paper empty detector Paper empty detection Transmission Paper feed tray
M1PFD M1PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 3 paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
(Multi Paper feed tray 3) type system sensor
M1PWS M1PWS Paper feed tray paper width detector Paper width detection of multi Paper feed tray Slide resistor Analog
(Paper feed tray 3) (Paper feed tray 3) detector
M1SPD M1SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining detection Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 3) (Multi Paper feed tray 3) type remaining
quantity sensor
M2LUD M2LUD Paper Paper feed tray upper limit Paper tray upper limit detection Transmission Paper feed tray
detector (Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) type system sensor
M2PED M2PED Paper empty detector Paper empty detection Transmission Paper feed tray
M2PFD M2PFD Paper pass detector Paper feed tray 4 paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
(Multi Paper feed tray 4) type system sensor
M2SPD M2SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Paper remaining quantity detection Transmission Paper feed tray
(Paper feed tray 4) (Paper feed tray 4) type remaining
quantity sensor
DSKPFC1 DSKPFC1 Paper feed tray 3, 4 paper transport Paper feed tray 3, 4 section paper transport roller ON/ Electromagnetic
M1PUS M1PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
M2PUS M2PUS Paper pickup solenoid Presses the paper pickup roller onto paper. Electromagnetic
MM MM Main motor Drive the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3 and 4, and the DC brush-less Paper pass
M2SS PWB Paper size detection PWB Paper remaining detection

1 Paper size detection plate Changes its own position in conjunction with the paper size (length) adjustment lever. By this operation,
the paper size detector detects the paper size.
2 Paper width guide R Suppresses skew to the minimum by restricting the paper width.
3 Paper size detection rotation plate Changes its own position in conjunction with the paper size (length) adjustment lever. By this operation,
the paper size detection plate position is changed and the paper size detector detects the paper size.
4 Paper size (length) guide plate Regulates the paper size (length).
5 Paper width guide L By restricting the paper width, skew is restricted to the minimum.
6 Lift plate Lifts the paper to maintain the paper feed position at the fixed position.
8 Separation roller Separate paper to prevent against double feed
10 transport roller 8 (Paper feed tray 3) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport rollers 9 and 10.
transport roller 5 (Paper feed tray 4) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport rollers 6 and 7.
11 transport roller 10 (Paper feed tray 3) Transports paper from the transport rollers 7 and 8 to the transport roller 11.
transport roller 7 (Paper feed tray 4) Transports paper from the transport roller 5 to the transport roller 10.
12 Torque limiter Provides a certain level of resistance power for the paper separation roller rotation to prevent against
double feed.

A. Outline
Paper feed tray 1 holds 900 sheets, paper feed tray 2 holds 1,300 sheets.
The multi-purpose paper feed tray 3 holds 550 sheets, the paper feed tray 4 holds 550 sheets, and the manual paper feed tray holds 100
sheets. Those paper feed units are standard provisions.
B. Paper feed tray 1, 2 section

(1) Paper feed operation
a. Preliminary operation before paper feed
1) Set paper in the tray, and insert the tray into the machine. The tray sensor turns on.
2) The lift-up motor operates to lift the tray.
3) The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the tray at the specified position.
b. Paper feed operation

1) When copy/print operation is started, the motors (MM, FUM, VPM, and TRM) and the clutch (TRC) are turned on to turn on the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates and falls the take-up roller to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
500mS
MM
500mS
FUM 870mS
T1PFC
79mS
T1PUS
50mS 79mS
VPM
50mS 74mS
TRM
164mS
RRC
439mS 500mS
POM1
120mS 500mS
POM2
PFD2
PPD
POD1
POD2
C. Paper size of paper feed trays detection method

(1) Paper size of paper feed trays detection method
a. Paper feed tray1, 2 paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)
The paper feed tray 1 is used exclusively for A4 (11 x 8.5) paper size. The paper feed tray 2 is used for A4, 11 x 8.5, or B5 paper size. To
change the paper size, change the paper guide and change the set value of SIM 26-2.

(2) Paper size of paper feed trays detection method
a. Multi-purpose paper feed tray (Paper feed tray 3), 500 sheets paper feed tray (Paper feed tray 4)
1) Paper width detection
The paper width is calculated with the VR voltage value (A/D conversion value) linked with the side guide plate.
Paper width and paper size (set in the range of standard value r 6 [mm]).
Width size
Standard
Detection Paper size Range[mm]
[mm]
pattern
A A3/A4 297.0 303.0 to 291.0
B WLT/LT 279.4 285.4 to 273.4
C B4/B5 257.0 263.0 to 251.0
D LG/LTR/Foolscap 215.9 221.9 to 209.9
E A4R 210.0 216.0 to 204.0
F Exective-R 184.1 190.1 to 178.1
G B5R 182.0 188.0 to 176.0
2) Paper size detection

The paper size detection is made by the combination of the cassette paper size detector 1 to 4.
CSS1
CSS2
CSS4
CSS3
Relationship between each paper size detector detection and paper size
Vertical size Detection SW state

Width of detection
detection AB size Inch size
CSS1 CSS2 CSS3 CSS4 range
Pattern
1 ON ON OFF ON B5 Extra 147.0 to 198.0
2 OFF ON OFF ON A4 LT 198.0 to 237.0
3 OFF ON ON ON B5R EX-R 237.0 to 274.0
4 OFF OFF ON ON A4R LTR 274.0 to 314.0
5 ON OFF ON ON Foolscap Extra 314.0 to 347.0
6 ON OFF ON OFF B4 LGL 347.0 to 389.0
7 ON ON ON OFF A3 WLT 389.0 to 432.8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Paper feed tray not attached
3) Size detection combinations
Paper size Width detection pattern Vertical detection

pattern
B5 C 1
A4 A 2
B5R G 3
A4R E 4
Foolscap D 5
B4 B 6
A3 A 7
LT B 2
EX-R F 3
LTR D 4
LGL D 6
WLT B 7

D. Paper remaining detection
(1) Paper remaining detection
Remaining paper detection is performed according to four stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper, and the result is
displayed.
(2) Detection method

The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the time the paper
feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the upper detection sensor comes ON.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor MCPED

detects the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection
Detection Actuator
MCSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection sensor)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

3. Disassembly and assembly a. Pickup roller
1) Pull out the paper feed tray units 1, 2.
A. Paper feed tray 1, 2 section (See “(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)”)
Mainte 2) Unhook the claws to remove the paper guide.
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Paper feed unit a Pickup roller ✕{
(Paper feed tray b Paper feed roller ✕{
1, 2) c Separation roller ✕{
d Torque limiter ✕
e Lift wire (Rear)
f Lift wire (Front)
(2) Others a Paper remaining quantity
sensor PWB
b Paper remaining quantity
detector
c Paper feed tray 1, 2 detection
sensor
d Dry heater
(2)-a 3) Unhook the claw to lift up the first paper feed tray feed section,
(2)-c (1)-e and then remove the pickup roller.
(1)-d
(1)-b (1)-b (2)-a
(1)-d
(1)-e
(1)-f
(2)-b
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)
(1)-f (2)-d (2)-b b. Paper feed roller
(1)-c (1)-a 1) Pull out the paper feed tray units 1, 2.
(See “(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)”)
(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2) 2) Unhook the claws to remove the paper guide.
1) Pull up the paper feed tray 1, 2. (See “a-1. Pickup roller”)
3) Unhook the claw to lift up the first paper feed tray feed section,
and then remove the paper feed roller.
2) Remove the fixing screws from the left and right rails.
3) Hold the grips of the position indicated in the figure with both
hands, and remove it.

c. Separation roller e. Lift wire (Rear)
1) Pull out the paper feed tray units 1, 2. 1) Remove the paper feed tray units 1, 2.
(See “(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)”) (See “(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)”)
2) Unhook the claws to remove the paper guide. 2) Remove the E-ring, slide the winding pulley, and loosen the
(See “a-1. Pickup roller”) wire.
3) Remove the lower paper guide.
4) Unhook the claws to remove the reverse roller.

3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the wire.
d. Torque limiter
1) Pull out the paper feed tray units 1, 2. 4) Remove the resin E-ring.
(See “a. Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)”)
2) Unhook the claws to remove the paper guide.
(See “a-3. Separation roller”)
3) Remove the separation roller unit.
5) Remove the wire.
4) Remove the torque limiter.

* Pass the nylon clamp. 4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the wire.
* Attach so that the red wire is on the outside.
* Turn it clockwise to fit with the T-shape pin position and insert.
5) Remove the resin E-ring.
f. Lift wire (Front)

1) Remove the paper feed tray units 1, 2.
2) Push down the tray and remove the screw, and remove the
paper feed tray 1, 2 front cabinet.
6) Remove the wire.
3) Remove the E-ring, slide the winding pulley, and loosen the
wire.
* Pass the nylon clamp.

* Attach so that the red wire is on the outside.
* Turn it counterclockwise and fit with the T-shape pin position
and insert.

(2) Others 2) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the Paper feed trays 1,
2 detection sensor.
a. Paper remaining quantity sensor PWB
1) Remove the paper feed tray units 1, 2.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper remaining
quantity sensor PWB.
d. Dry heater
(See “c. Paper feed trays 1, 2 sensor”)
b. Paper remaining quantity detector 2) Disconnect the connector from dehumidifier heater relay PWB.
1) Remove the paper feed tray units 1, 2. (See “(1) Paper feed
unit (Paper feed tray 1, 2)”)
2) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the paper feed tray lock
arm unit.
3) Remove the band, and remove the dry heater unit.
3) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the paper remaining

quantity detector.
4) Remove the dry heater.
c. Paper feed tray 1, 2 detection sensor


B. Paper feed tray 3, 4 section 2) Lifting up the paper feed tray unit slightly, remove it at an angle
from the right side.
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Paper feed unit a Pickup roller ✕{
(Paper feed tray b Paper feed roller ✕{
3, 4) c Separation roller ✕{
d Torque limiter ✕
e Paper pickup solenoid
f Paper feed tray upper limit
detector
g Paper feed tray empty
detector
h transport roller 8, 10 ✕{
I Transport roller 5, 7 ✕{
j Paper pass detector
(2) Others a Paper size detection PWB 3) Open the bottom left cabinet.
b Paper remaining quantity
detector
c Paper feed tray paper width
detector
d Dry heater
(1)-i (1)-d
(1)-j (1)-e
(1)-h (2)-b
(1)
(2)-a
(1)-b (1)-c (2)-d (2)-c (1)-g (1)-f

(1)-a
4) Remove the connector cover.
(1) Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4)
1) Pull out gently the paper feed tray it stops.
5) Disconnect the connectors.

6) Remove the paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4) from the b. Paper feed roller
lower shelf. 1) Remove the paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4).
2) Remove the paper guide. (See “a. Pickup roller”)
3) Release the pawl, and remove the paper feed roller.
a. Pickup roller c. Separation roller

1) Remove the paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4). 1) Remove the paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4).
2) Remove the paper guide. 2) Remove the paper guide. (See “a. Pickup roller”)
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the separation roller.
d. Torque limiter
3) Unhook the claws to remove the pickup roller. 1) Remove the paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4).
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear and the pin.
3) Remove the E-ring and the bearing.

4) Remove the separation roller unit. 3) Remove the solenoid unit.
5) Remove the E-ring, and one-way clutch.
6) Remove the E-ring, and move the separation roller shaft.

7) Remove the shaft unit.
8) Remove the torque limiter.
f. Paper feed tray upper limit detector

g. Paper feed tray empty detector
1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4.
e. Paper pickup solenoid (See “(1)Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4)”)
1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4. 2) Remove the cover. (See “e. Paper pickup solenoid”)
(See “(1)Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4)”) 3) Remove the paper feed tray upper detector unit (a) and the
2) Remove the cover. paper feed tray empty detector unit (b).
b a
4) Remove the detector.

h. transport roller 8, 10 j. Paper pass detector
1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4. 1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4.
(See “(1)Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4)”) (See “(1)Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4)”)
2) Remove the cover. (See “e. Paper pickup solenoid”) 2) Remove the cover. (See “e. Paper pickup solenoid”)
3) Remove the E-ring and remove the pulley bearing. 3) Remove the paper pass detector unit.
4) Remove the transport roller 8, 10. 4) Remove the paper pass detector.
(2) Others
a. Paper size detection PWB
1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper size detec-
tion PWB unit.
i. Transport roller 5, 7
1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4.
(See “(1)Paper feed unit (Paper feed tray 3, 4)”)
2) Remove the cover. (See “e. Paper pickup solenoid”)
3) Remove the E-ring and remove the pulley bearing.
4) Remove the transport roller 5, 7.
3) Release the pawl, and remove the paper size detection PWB.

b. Paper remaining quantity detector d. Dry heater
1) Remove the paper feed tray. 1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4 unit lower.
2) Disconnect the connecter, and remove the paper remaining 2) Remove the paper feed lower cover.
quantity detector unit.
3) Remove the paper remaining quantity detector cover. Remove

the paper remaining quantity detector.
c. Paper feed tray paper width detector

1) Remove the paper feed tray 3, 4 unit lower.
2) Disconnect the connector, and release the pawl, and remove
the width detection unit.
4) Disconnect the connector from the dehumidifying heater relay
PWB.
5) Remove the snap band.

3) Remove the spring, and remove the paper width mounting
base. Remove the width detection arm and remove the paper
feed tray paper width detector.

6) Remove the dry heater unit. 7) Remove the dry heater.
4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Tray paper feed unit 1 Pickup roller ✕ { { { { { { { { (Note 1)
1
2
3
2
1
4 3
2
1

MX-M700N
[G] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. Vertical paper transport section 1
MM
DSKPFC2
VPM
CN-17
1
B30B-PHDSS-B
M2LUM PCU PWB
2 +24V1
3 GND2
CN-10 CN-4 CN-2
4 /T1PFC B12B-PH-K-S
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B
5 +24V1
/POM1A 1 1 /POM1A /TRM/A 1
1 +24V1 2 6 +24V1
/POM1XA 2 2 /POM1XA /TRMA 2
2 /DSKPFC2 1 7 /M2PFC
/POM1B 3 3 /POM1B /TRMB 3
8 /DSKPFC2
9 GND2 /POM1XB 4 4 /POM1XB /TRM/B 4
10 GND2 /POM2A 5 5 /POM2A +24V2 5
11 TXD-FIN /POM2XA 6 6 /POM2XA
12 +5V2 /POM2B 7 7 /POM2B /VPM/A 7 1 /VPM/A 1
S5B-PH-K-S 13 RXD-FIN /VPMA 8 2 /VPMA 2
/POM2XB 8 8 /POM2XB
GND2 1 14 /MM /ADM1A 9 9 /ADM1A /VPMB 9 3 /VPMB 3
+5V2 2 15 /DTR-FIN /VPM/B 10 4 /VPM/B 4
/ADM1XA 10 10 /ADM1XA
/MM 3 16 MMCLK +24V2 11 5 +24V2 5
/ADM1B 11 11 /ADM1B
MMCLK 4 17 /DSR-FIN +24V2 12 6 +24V2 6
MM-T 5 18 MM-T /ADM1XB 12 12 /ADM1XB
19 RES-FIN /ADM2A 13 13 /ADM2A
20 TSW-LED /ADM2XA 14 14 /ADM2XA
21 (NC) /ADM2B 15 15 /ADM2B
22 TSW /ADM2XB 16 16 /ADM2XB
23 GND2 /TRMA 17 17 /TRMA
24 GND2 /TRMXA 18 18 /TRMXA
25
26
TANSET
GND2
/TRMB 19 19 /TRMB DRIVER PWB
/TRMXB 20 20 /TRMXB
27 +5V2 /VPMA 21 21 /VPMA
28 DSW-DSK /VPMXA 22 22 /VPMXA
29 (NC) 23 /VPMB
/VPMB 23
30 +5V2
/VPMXB 24 24 /VPMXB
GND2 25 25 GND2
GND2 26 26 GND2
Signal
name
DSKPFC2 DSKPFC2 Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport Paper transport roller 11 ON/OFF control. Electromagnetic
clutch 2 clutch
VPM VPM Vertical paper transport motor Drives the paper transport rollers 4 and 13. Stepping motor Normal speed
mode
MM MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the DC brush-less Paper pass
MX-M700N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION G – 1

B. Vertical paper transport section 2
MM
RRC
1 2 TRM
PSBC
VPM
PPD
MPRD2
MPRD1
CN-17
1
B30B-PHDSS-B
M2LUM PCU PWB
2 +24V1
3 GND2 CN-12
4 /T1PFC B30B-PHDSS-B
5 +24V1 +24V1 1
6 +24V1 +24V1 2
7 /M2PFC /T2PFC 3
8 /DSKPFC2 /HPLS 4
+24V1 5 PHNR-06-H+BU06P-TR-P-H PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
9 GND2
DVCH1 6 1 +24V1 1 1 +24V1 6 2 +24V1 1
10 GND2 /HPFC 7 2 /PSBC 2 2 /PSBC 5 1 /PSBC 2
11 TXD-FIN DVCH2 8 3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2 4
12 +5V2 +24V1 9 4 PPD 4 4 PPD 3
S5B-PH-K-S 13 RXD-FIN DVCH3 10 5 GND2 5 5 GND2 2 179228-3
GND2 1 14 /MM /PSBC 11 6 +5V-MPRD1 6 6 (NC) 1 1 +5V2
+5V2 2 15 /DTR-FIN DVCH4 12 7 GND2 7 2 PPD
/MM 3 16 MMCLK +5V2 13 8 MPRD1 8 3 GND2
MMCLK 4 17 /DSR-FIN +24V1 14 9 +5V-MPRD2 9
PPD 15 10 GND2 10 SMR-08V-N/SMP-08V-NC PHR-3(RED)
MM-T 5 18 MM-T
TCS 16 11 MPRD2 11 1 +5V-MPRD11 1 +5V-MPRD1
19 RES-FIN
GND2 17 12 +24V1 12 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
20 TSW-LED GND2 18 13 /HPLS 13 3 MPRD1 3 3 MPRD1
21 (NC) +5V-MPRD1 19 14 (NC) 14 4 +5V-MPRD2 4
22 TSW TSGOUT 20 15 (NC) 15 5 GND2 5 PHR-3
23 GND2 GND2 21 16 (NC) 16 6 MPRD2 6 1 +5V-MPRD2
24 GND2 GND2 22 17 (NC) 17 7 +24V1 7 2 GND2
25 TANSET MPRD1 23 18 (NC) 18 8 /HPLS 8 3 MPRD2
26 GND2 +5V2 24 SMR-18V-N/SMP-18V-NC
27 +5V2 +5V-MPRD2 25
28 DSW-DSK HUS-DV 26
GND2 27
29 (NC)
GND2 28
30 +5V2 MPRD2 29
CN-7 TH-DV 30
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN-10 CN-4 CN-2
PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H 1 +24V1 B12B-PH-K-S SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B
1 +24V1 2 2 +24V1 /TRM/A 1 1 /TRM/A 1
2 /RRC 1 3 /CFM-DV /POM1A 1 1 /POM1A
/POM1XA 2 2 /POM1XA /TRMA 2 2 /TRMA 2
4 /RRC
5 GND2 /POM1B 3 3 /POM1B /TRMB 3 3 /TRMB 3
6 (NC) /POM1XB 4 4 /POM1XB /TRM/B 4 4 /TRM/B 4
7 +24V1 /POM2A 5 5 /POM2A +24V2 5 5 +24V2 5
8 +24V(DSW) +24V2 6 6 +24V2 6
/POM2XA 6 6 /POM2XA
9 +5V-APPD1 /VPM/A 7
10 PFD2 /POM2B 7 7 /POM2B
/POM2XB 8 8 /POM2XB /VPMA 8
11 +5V-APPD2
12 /CFM-ADU /ADM1A 9 9 /ADM1A /VPMB 9
13 +5V-PFD2 /VPM/B 10 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
/ADM1XA 10 10 /ADM1XA
14 THPS2 /ADM1B 11 11 /ADM1B +24V2 11 1 /VPM/A 1
15 +5V-DSWD +24V2 12 2 /VPMA 2
/ADM1XB 12 12 /ADM1XB
16 TURM 3 /VPMB 3
17 +5V-AINPD /ADM2A 13 13 /ADM2A
/ADM2XA 14 14 /ADM2XA 4 /VPM/B 4
18 /TCBPWH
19 +5V-THPS1 /ADM2B 15 15 /ADM2B 5 +24V2 5
20 (NC) /ADM2XB 16 16 /ADM2XB 6 +24V2 6
21 +5V-THPS2 /TRMA 17 17 /TRMA
22 /TCBIAS
/TRMXA 18 18 /TRMXA
23
24
/FBIAS
APPD1 /TRMB 19 19 /TRMB DRIVER PWB
25 DSWD /TRMXB 20 20 /TRMXB
26 APPD2 /VPMA 21 21 /VPMA
27 /DGS /VPMXA 22 22 /VPMXA
28 AINPD /VPMB 23 23 /VPMB
29 GND2 /VPMXB 24 24 /VPMXB
30 GND2
31 (NC) GND2 25 25 GND2
32 DSW-L GND2 26 26 GND2

Signal
name
MPRD1 MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2/LCC paper pass Transmission Paper transport
detector 1 detection type system sensor
PPD PPD Resist roller front paper pass Paper pass detection in front of resist roller Reflection type Paper transport
detector system sensor
RRC RRC Resist roller clutch Resist roller ON/OFF control Electromagnetic
clutch
PSBC PSBC Resist roller brake clutch Resist roller braking Electromagnetic
clutch
MM MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, DC brush-less Paper pass
and the manual paper feed section. motor
TRM TRM Resist roller front drive motor Drives the paper transport roller 15. Stepping motor Normal speed
mode/ Resist
roller front
paper transport
timing control
(Warp amount
control)
VPM VPM Vertical paper transport motor Drives the paper transport rollers 4 and 13. Stepping motor Normal speed
mode

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. /
Controls the transport timing of paper to adjust the relationship between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to provide transport power of the transport roller to
paper.
3 Transport roller 15 Transports paper to the transport resist roller.

C. Horizontal paper transport section
MM
2 3 4
HPFC
T1PPD
MPRD2
5 MPRD1
MPFD2
LPPD
CN-17 CN-12
B30B-PHDSS-B B30B-PHDSS-B
1 M2LUM +24V1 1
2 +24V1 +24V1 2
3 GND2 /T2PFC 3
4 /T1PFC /HPLS 4
+24V1 5
5 +24V1
DVCH1 6
6 +24V1 /HPFC 7
7 /M2PFC DVCH2 8
8 /DSKPFC2 +24V1 9
9 GND2 DVCH3 10
10 GND2 /PSBC 11
11 TXD-FIN DVCH4 12
12 +5V2 +5V2 13
S5B-PH-K-S 13 RXD-FIN +24V1 14
GND2 1 14 /MM PPD 15
TCS 16
+5V2 2 15 /DTR-FIN
GND2 17
/MM 3 16 MMCLK GND2 18
MMCLK 4 17 /DSR-FIN +5V-MPRD1 19
MM-T 5 18 MM-T TSGOUT 20
19 RES-FIN GND2 21
20 TSW-LED GND2 22
21 (NC) MPRD1 23
22 TSW +5V2 24
23 GND2 +5V-MPRD2 25
24 GND2 HUS-DV 26
GND2 27
25 TANSET
GND2 28
26 GND2 MPRD2 29 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
27 +5V2 TH-DV 30 2 +24V1 1
28 DSW-DSK 1 /HPFC 2
29 (NC) CN-18
30 +5V2 B14B-PHDSS-B
GND2 1
+5V-MPFD2 2
TXD-LCC 3
GND2 4
RXD-LCC 5
MPFD2 6 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC SMP-06V-NC/SMR-06V-N PHR-3
/DTR-LCC 7 1 +5V-MPFD2 1 1 +5V-MPFD2 1 1 +5V-MPFD2
+5V-LPPD 8 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
PCU PWB /DSR-LCC 9
GND2 10
3 MPFD2
4 +5V-LPPD 4
3 3 MPFD2
4 +5V-LPPD 4
3 3 MPFD2
RES-LCC 11 5 GND2 5 5 GND2 5 PHR-3

LPPD 12 6 LPPD 6 6 LPPD 6 1 +5V-LPPD
/TRC-LCC 13 2 GND2
(NC) 14 3 LPPD

Signal
name
MPFD2 MPFD2 Manual feed paper pass detector 2 Manual tray and LCC unit paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
MM MM Main motor Drives the paper feed trays 1, 2, 3, and 4, DC brushless Paper pass
and the manual paper feed section. motor
HPFC HPFC Horizontal paper transport clutch Manual paper feed, paper feed tray 2 section, Electromagnetic
LCC paper transport roller ON/OFF control clutch
MPRD1 MPRD1 Paper feed tray 2 paper pass Manual feed/paper feed tray 2, LCC paper Transmission Paper transport
detector 1 pass detection type system sensor
T1PPD T1PPD Paper pass detector Paper pass detection from paper feed tray 1 Transmission Paper transport
(Paper feed tray 1) type system sensor

1 Transport roller 15 Transports the paper to resist roller.
2 Transport roller 4 Transports paper from the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 15.
3 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 and the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 3.
4 Transport roller 2 Transports paper from the manual paper feed and transport roller 2 to the transport roller 3.
5 Transport roller 13 Transports to the transport roller 15.
6 Paper guide lock solenoid Lock the horizontal transport paper guide.
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Outline A. Vertical paper transport section 1
The paper transport section serves the function of transferring Mainte
paper from each paper feed port to the registration roller section. No. Unit No. Parts
nance
Paper from manual feed, paper feed tray units 1 and 2 (optional), (1) Paper feed tray 1 a Transport roller 11 (Drive) ✕{
and the right paper feed tray of the paper feed tray units 1 and 2 is and 2 left PG unit
transported horizontally, whereas paper from the left paper feed (2) Vertical transport a Transport roller 13 (Drive) ✕{
tray of the paper feed tray units 1 and 2, paper feed tray 3 and upper unit b Transport sensor
paper feed tray 4 is transported vertically to the registration roller
section.
(2)-b (2) (1)
After the leading edge of the paper is synchronized with the leading
(2)-a
edge of the drum image in the registration roller section, the paper
that is transfer printed with the image in the transfer section passes
through the fusing section and is discharged either face-down or
face-up.
(1)-a

(1) Paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit 7) Remove the paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit.
1) Open the left lower cabinet.
2) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the pressure fulcrum
shaft.
a. Transport roller 11 (Drive)

1) Remove the paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit.
(See “(1) Paper feed tray 1 and 2 left PG unit”)
2) Remove the E-ring, the drive collar, and the one-way gear.
3) Remove the left vertical transport PG stopper plate.

4) Open the left door, and remove the left lower cabinet unit.
* Be careful of the installing direction.

3) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the transport
roller 11 (Drive).
5) Remove the left vertical transport PG stopper plate.

6) Open the left vertical transport unit, and remove it.

(2) Vertical transport upper unit 4) Remove the upper PG holding plate.
1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “B-(1) Resist roller unit”)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the vertical transport
upper unit.
5) Remove the vertical transport upper PG.
a. Transport roller 13 (Drive)

1) Remove the vertical transport upper unit.
(See “(2) Vertical transport upper unit”)
2) Remove the upper transport fulcrum plate holder, and remove
the vertical transport upper open/close PG.
6) Remove the transport roller 13 (Drive).
3) Remove the open/close PG earth, and remove the drive con-

nection stopper screw and the bearing.
b. Transport sensor
1) Remove the vertical transport upper unit.
(See “(2) Vertical transport upper unit”)
2) Check each sensors.

B. Vertical paper transport section 2 (1) Resist roller unit
1) Open the front door, and open the process cover. Remove the
Mainte process unit.
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Resist roller unit a Resist roller (Idle) ✕{
b Resist roller brake clutch
c Transport roller 15 ✕{
d Resist roller (Drive) ✕{
e Resist roller front paper pass
detector
(2) Others a Paper dust cleaner ✕▲
(1)-a
(1)-d
2) Remove the paper dust removing unit.
(1)-b
(1)
(1)-e
(1)-c
(2)-a
3) Remove the rear frame side cover, and disconnect the con-
nector.

4) Remove the resist roller unit. 5) Remove the bearing, and remove the E-ring, the gear, and
the pin.
b. Resist roller brake clutch

1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “(1) Resist roller unit”)
2) Remove the cover. (See “a. Resist roller (Idle)”)
3) Remove the resist roller brake clutch fixture.
4) Remove the E-ring and the resist roller break clutch.
a. Resist roller (Idle)

c. Transport roller 15
2) Remove the front side cover.
3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing.
4) Remove the coupling bearing on the rear side.
3) Remove the follower roller tension spring. 5) Remove the transport roller 15.
4) Remove the resist roller (Idle) unit.

d. Resist roller (Drive) e. Resist roller front paper pass detector
1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “(1) Resist roller unit”) 1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “(1) Resist roller unit”)
2) Remove the follower roller and the tension spring. 2) Remove the cover. (See “a. Resist roller (Idle)”)
3) Remove the cover on the front side. 3) Remove the resist roller front paper pass detector.
4) Remove the transport roller 15.
5) Remove the paper guide.
(2) Others
a. Paper dust cleaner
1) Open the front cabinet. Open the process DV cover.
6) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing.

7) Remove the coupling on the rear side.
8) Remove the resist roller (Drive).
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner.

C. Horizontal paper transport section 4) Remove the paper feed reverse guide.
Disconnect the connector, and remove the relay pass unit.
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Relay pass unit a Paper guide lock solenoid
b Paper guides {
c Transport roller 3 (drive) ✕{
d Transport roller 4 (Drive) ✕{
e Transport roller 2 (Drive) ✕{
f Paper feed tray 2 paper pass
detector 1
g Paper feed tray 2 paper pass
detector 2
(2) No. 5 paper feed a Manual paper pass
paper pass unit detector 2
b No. 5 paper feed paper pass
detector
(1)-d (1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-g
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-c (2)
(2)-a (2)-b
(1) Relay pass unit a. Paper guide lock solenoid

1) Pull out the multi manual paper feed tray unit. 1) Remove the relay pass unit. (See “(1) Relay pass unit”)
2) Remove the connector, and remove the paper guide lock sole-
noid unit.
2) Remove the paper feed tray units 1 and 2.

(See “A-(1) Paper feed tray units 1 and 2” in the “PAPER
TRANSPORT SECTION”)
3) Remove the toner cartridge, the OPC drum, and the toner hop-
per, and remove the front door.
3) Remove the paper guide lock solenoid.

b. Paper guides 4) Remove the bearing, the belt, and the relay pass drive shaft
1) Remove the relay pass unit. (See “(1) Relay pass unit”) unit.
2) Remove the metal fixture.
5) Remove the transport roller 3 and 4 (Drive).
3) Remove the lower paper guide unit.
6) Remove the E-ring from transport roller 3 and 4 (Drive), and

remove the belt pulley.
4) Clean each paper guides.
e. Transport roller 2 (Drive)

1) Remove the relay pass unit. (See “(1) Relay pass unit”)
c. Transport roller 3 (drive) 2) Remove lower paper guide unit. (See “b. Paper guides”)
3) Remove the rear positioning plate, and remove the paper feed
d. Transport roller 4 (Drive)
PG of the paper feed tray 1/2.
(See “c. Transport roller 3 (Drive)”)
2) Remove lower paper guide unit. (See “b. Paper guides”)
4) Remove the paper entry side upper plate.
3) Remove the rear positioning plate, and remove the paper feed
port PG of the paper feed tray 1 and 2.

5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear and the belt pulley. (2) No. 5 paper feed relay unit
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed unit.
(See “A-(1) Multi manual paper feed tray unit” in the “MANUAL
PAPER FEED SECTION”)
2) Remove the manual interface paper guide upper.
3) Remove the manual feed relay paper guide upper.
6) Remove the transport roller 2 (Drive) unit.

7) Remove the E-ring from the transport roller 2 (Drive).
4) Lift the No. 5 paper feed relay unit, and remove the connector.
5) Remove the No. 5 paper feed relay unit.
f. Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 1

g. Paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 2
2) Check the paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 1 (A) and the
paper feed tray 2 paper pass detector 2 (B).
a. Manual paper pass detector 2
b. No. 5 paper feed relay detector
1) Remove the multi manual paper feed unit.
(See “A-(1) Multi manual paper feed tray unit” in the “MANUAL
PAPER FEED SECTION”)
B
2) Remove the No. 5 paper feed relay unit.
3) Check the manual paper pass detector 2 (A) and the No. 5
paper feed relay detector (B).
A

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Transport section 1 PS follower roller ✕ { { { { { { { {
2 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
3 Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { {
4 Paper dust clean unit ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
1
2
4
2 2
2 2 2 2
2
2

MX-M700N
[H] DUPLEX SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
ADM1
DSW-ADU
3 DGS
AINPD DSW-L
APPD1
ADM2
TURM
APPD2
THPS2
PFD2
2
1
PHR-3
1 +5V-APPD1
2 GND2
3 APPD1
PHR-3
1 +5V-APPD2
2 GND
3 APPD2
DRIVER SMR-12V-N/SMP-12V-NC
1 +5V-PFD2 1
PHR-3
1 +5V-PFD2
PWB CN-5 2 PFD2
3 +5V-THPS2 3
2 2 GND2
3 PFD2
B9B-PH-K-S 4 THPS2 4
/ADM1/A 1 5 /TCB-PWM 5 179228-3
/ADM1A 2 6 /TCBIAS 6 1 THPS2
/ADM1B 3 7 DSW-L 7 2 GND2
/ADM1/B 4 8 DSW-L 8 3 +5V-THPS2
/ADM2/A 5 9 GND2 9
/ADM2A 6 10 TURM 10 PHR-2
/ADM2B 7 11 +24V1 11 1 TURM
/ADM2/B 8 12 /CFM-ADU 12 2 GND2
+24V2 9 DRAWER
1 DSW-L 1
2 /ADUM2/A 2 B6B-PH-K-S
3
4
/ADUM2A 3
1 DSW-L
TB PWB
/ADUM2B 4
2 DSW-L
5 /ADUM2/B 5
PCU PWB 6 +5V-APPD1 6
3
4
/TCBIAS
/TCB-PWM
7 +5V-APPD2 7 FPS-187
5 GND2
8 +5V-PFD2 8 Bias
CN-7 6 F-GND
9 +5V-DSW 9
B32B-PHDSS-B 10 +5V-AINPD 10
+24V1 1 11 (NC) 11
+24V1 2 12 /ADUM1/A 12
/CFM-DV 3 13 /ADUM1A 13
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
/RRC 4 14 /ADUM1B 14
GND2 5 15 /ADUM1/B 15 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
(NC) 6 16 +24V1 16 1 /ADUM2/A 1
+24V1 7 17 +24V(DSW) 17 2 /ADUM2A 2
+24V(DSW) 8 18 PFD2 18 3 /ADUM2B 3
+5V-APPD1 9 19 /CFM-ADU 19 4 /ADUM2/B 4
PFD2 10 20 THPS2 20 5 +24V2 5
+5V-APPD2 11 21 TURM 21 6 +24V2 6
/CFM-ADU 12 22 /TCB-PWM 22
+5V-PFD2 13 23 /TCBIAS 23
THPS2 14 24 +5V-THPS2 24
+5V-DSW 15 25 GND2 25 SMR-06V-N/SMP-06V-NC
TURM 16 26 GND2 26 1 /ADUM1/A 1
+5V-AINPD 17 27 APPD1 27 2 /ADUM1A 2
/TCB-PWM 18 28 APPD2 28 3 /ADUM1B 3
(NC) 19 29 AINPD 29 4 /ADUM1/B 4
(NC) 20 30 DSW-ADU 30 5 +24V2 5
+5V-THPS2 21 31 /DGS 31 6 +24V2 6
TCBIAS 22 32 +24V2 32
(NC) 23 QR/P4-32S-C(01)/QR/P4-32P-C(01) PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H 179228-3
APPD1 24
3 AINPD 1 1 AINPD
DSW-ADU 25
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
APPD2 26
1 +5V-AINPD 3 3 +5V-AINPD
/DGS 27
AINPD 28 179228-3
GND2 29
1 DSW-ADU
GND2 30
2 GND2
(NC) 31
3 +5V-DSWD
DSW-L 32
2 +24V1 1
LEFT DOOR UNIT 1 DGS 2
MX-M700N DUPLEX SECTION H – 1

Signal
name
AINPD AINPD Duplex (ADU) paper entry detector Duplex (ADU) paper entry detection, Transmission Paper transport
detection of paper exit to finisher type system sensor
APPD1 APPD1 Duplex (ADU) paper pass detector 1 Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
APPD2 APPD2 Duplex (ADU) paper pass detector 2 Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass detection Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
DSW-ADU DSW-ADU Duplex (ADU) cover open/close Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection Transmission Door switch
detector type
PFD2 PFD2 Paper pass detector 2 Paper pass detection (Left door unit) from duplex Transmission Paper transport
(ADU)/Paper feed tray 1, 3, 4 type system sensor
THPS2 THPS2 Transfer belt contact/separation Transfer belt separation home position detection 2 Transmission Other sensor,
home position sensor 2 type switch
ADM1 ADM1 Duplex (ADU) motor 1 Drives the paper transport roller 2 and the paper Stepping motor High speed
transport roller 19 only
ADM2 ADM2 Duplex (ADU) motor 2 Drives the paper transport roller 20 and 21 Stepping motor Selection of
Normal speed/
High speed
TURM TURM Transfer separation motor Drives and separates the transfer belt DC brush motor The transfer
belt is pressed
on the OPC
drum only
during printing.
DGS DGS Paper exit gate solenoid Drives the paper exit gate Electromagnetic
solenoid
DSW-L DSW-L Left door open/close detector Left door open/close detection Micro switch Door switch

1 Transport roller 21 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 20 to the transport roller 15
4 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section
A. Outline
When duplex print is selected, paper one surface of which was
printed is switched back to feed to the duplex section to make
duplex print.
B. Paper transport operation in duplex print

(1) Switchback operation and transport to the reverse
section POM1
1) The paper transported from the fusing section is sent to the
paper exit roller 1 (which is driven by the paper exit motor 2
(POM2)) with the transport roller 16 (which is driven by the
paper exit motor 1 (POM1)).
At this time, paper is passed under the paper exit guide. After
paper passing, the paper exit gate guide falls down by its own
weight. POM2
POD1

2) When the specified time has passed from detection of the 5) POM2 stops after passing the specified time from detection the
paper lead edge by POD1 (paper exit detection from fusing), paper lead edge by AINPD (duplex paper entry detection). It
POM2 rotates in the normal direction, then rotates in the rotation is changed from reverse direction to normal direction
reverse direction in the specified time. (The rotation time dif- to transport the next paper.
fers depending on the paper size.)
3) When POM2 rotates reversely, paper is transported to the
reverse section. RRC 439mS
At that time, paper is passed over the paper exit gate guide POM1
which fell down by it own weight. 120mS 166mS
POM2 485mS
572mS 25mS
DGS 37mS
POM1 102mS
ADUM1
50mS 168mS
ADUM2
POD1
POD2
AINPD
APPD1
POM2
APPD2
(2) Paper transport speed in duplex print

The transport speed in duplex print is changed to the high speed
(800mm/sec) to increase the job speed in some positions of paper.
The transport speed is changed to the high speed in the Following
positions:
1) From when the paper rear edge passes the fusing section to
when switchback opration is started.
2) From when switchback operation is started to when a certain
amount of paper is transported after passing APPD1 (Paper
pass detection sensor in upstream of duplex).
3) After that, paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position
and fed to the machine again. (The paper feed speed to the
machine is 335mm/sec)
4) When the specified time has passed from reverse rotation of
POM2, DGS (paper exit guide) turns on for a certain time and
paper is sent to the reverse section.
ADM1
DGS
POM2

3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Left door unit
1) Pull out the left door.
A. Duplex section
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Left door unit a ADU opening/closing door
b Paper exit roller 2 ✕{
c Transport roller 19 ✕{
d Transport roller 20 ✕{
e Transport roller 21 ✕{
f Duplex motor 1
g Duplex motor 2
h Paper exit gate solenoid
i Duplex paper entry detector
2
1
j Duplex paper pass detector 1
k Left door transport paper
guide R unit
l Duplex paper pass detector 2
m Paper pass detector 2
n Transfer high voltage
transformer
o Transfer separation motor 2) Remove the front cabinet.
p Transfer belt separation
home position sensor
q Switchback gate
r Paper exit gate
s Left door open/close detector
t Duplex cover open/close
detector
u Fusing discharge brush ✕
v Reversing discharge brush ✕
(1)-f
(1)-t
(1)-v (1)-h
(1)-q (1)-s
(1)
(1)-i
(1)-j
(1)-b
(1)-r
(1)-u
(1)-v
(1)-c
3) Remove the fixing screw.
(1)-g
(1)-o
(1)-k
(1)-m
(1)-l
(1)-p
(1)-a (1)-d (1)-e
(1)-n

4) Remove the left door unit. b. Paper exit roller 2
2) Remove the ADU opening/closing door.
3) Remove the ADU paper exit upper paper guide.
4) Remove the ADU brake collar.
5) Remove the E-ring to remove the transport roller 2 assembly.
a. ADU opening/closing door

2) Remove the stopper section plastic E-ring.
6) Remove the E-ring to remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin
from the paper exit roller.
c. Transport roller 19
d. Transport roller 20
e. Transport roller 21
3) Remove the stopper from the fulcrum shaft to remove the
opening/closing door in the arrowed direction. 2) Remove the ADU opening/closing door.
3) Remove the left door cabinet F.
4) Remove the left door cabinet R.

5) Remove the front belt collar. 11) Remove the E-ring and lift up the switching lever to remove the
transport roller 20 assembly.
6) Remove the E-ring to remove the transport roller 19 assembly.
12) Remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin from the transport
roller 20.
7) Remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin from the transport
roller 19.
13) Remove the U-turn paper guide.
8) Remove the rear belt collar.

9) Remove the ground plate.
14) Apply the bearing attachment plate to remove transport roller
10) Remove the belt.
21.

15) Remove the bearing, pulley, gear and pin from the transport 3) Remove the duplex motor 2.
roller 21.
h. Paper exit gate solenoid

f. Duplex motor 1
3) Remove the duplex motor 1.

3) Remove the paper exit gate solenoid.
g. Duplex motor 2
1) Pull out the left door. i. Duplex paper entry detector
2) Remove the cover. 1) Pull out the left door.
2) Remove the paper guide unit.

3) Remove the follower roller unit. 3) Remove the duplex paper pass detector 1.
4) Remove the duplex paper entry detector.

k. Left door transport paper guide R unit.
2) Remove the transfer unit.
j. Duplex paper pass detector 1 3) Remove the cover, and remove the connector, the snap band,
1) Pull out the left door. and the earth terminal.

4) Remove the left door transport paper guide R unit. n. Transfer high voltage transformer
2) Remove the left door transport paper guide R unit.
3) Remove the transfer high voltage transformer.
l. Duplex paper pass detector 2

3) Remove the duplex paper pass detector 2.
o. Transfer separation motor

3) Remove the transfer high voltage transformer.
m. Paper pass detector 2

3) Remove the paper pass detector 2.
4) Remove the PWB holder.

5) Remove the transfer separation unit. q. Switchback gate
2) Remove the paper guide unit.
3) Remove the paper exit gate.
6) Remove the transfer separation motor.
p. Transfer belt separation home position sensor

3) Remove the transfer belt separation home position sensor. r. Paper exit gate
2) Remove the paper guide unit. Open the door, and remove the
cabinets.

3) Remove the switchback gate. t. Duplex cover open/close detector
2) Open the door, and remove the cover.
s. Left door open/close detector

3) Remove the duplex cover open/close detector.
u. Fusing discharge brush

2) Remove the fusing discharge brush.
4) Remove the left door open/close detector.
* Attach the fusing discharge brush so that it is fit with the rear
end.

v. Reversing discharge brush
2) Remove the switchback gate.
3) Remove the reversing discharge bursh.
* Attach the reverse discharge brush so that it is fit with the rib
inside and the parting line.
4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Duplex 1 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
2 Transport paper guides { { { { { { { { {
3
3
1
1
2

MX-M700N
[i] LSU SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
CN-8 CN-8 CN-6 CN-6
PCU PWB
CN-22 CN-2 CN-1
B30B-PHDSS-B SMP-18V-NC/SMR-18V-N B30B-PHDSS-B B6B-PH-K-S
GND2 1 1 GND2 1 1 GND2 /BRAKE 1
+5VLD 2 2 +5VLD 2 2 +5VLD /PMCLK 2
GND2 3 3 GND2 3 3 GND2 /READY 3
GND2 4 4 GND2 4 4 GND2 /START 4
/READY 5 5 /READY 5 5 /READY GND2 5
/PMCLK 6 6 /PMCLK 6 6 /PMCLK +24V1 6
MFP MOTHER
/START
+24V1
(NC)
7
8
9
7 /START
8 +24V1
9 (NC)
7
8
9
7
8
9
/START
+24V1
/BRAKE
CONTROL PWB +24V1

+5V2
GND2
10
11
12
10 +24V1
11 +5V2
12 GND2
10
11
12
10
11
12
+24V1
+5V2
GND2
PWB +5V2
GND2
13
14
13 +5V2
14 GND2
13
14
13
14
+5V2
GND2
TEST
TEST2
15
16
15 TEST
16 TEST2
15
16
15
16
TEST
TEST2
LD PWB
VRB 17 17 VRB 17 17 VRB
GND2 18 18 GND2 18 18 GND2
TEST3 19 19 TEST3 CN-3
GND2 20 1 TEST3 1 20 GND2 B4B-PH-K-S
VIDEO 21 2 GND2 2 21 /VIDEO GND2 1
GND2 22 3 /VIDEO 3 22 GND2 /SYNC 2
/VIDEO 23 4 VIDEO 4 23 VIDEO GND2 3
GND2 24 5 GND2 5 24 GND2 +5V2 4
LSU S/H 25 6 GND2 6 25 LSU S/H
GND2 26 7 LSU S/H 7 26 GND2
/LDON 27 8 GND2 8 27 /LDON
GND2 28 9 /LDON 9 28 GND2
/SYNC 29 10 GND2 10 29 /SYNC
GND2 30 11 /SYNC 11 30 GND2
12 GND2 12
BD LSU UNIT
3
10
4
2
6 1
8
PGM
5
Signal
name
PGM PGM Polygon mirror (motor) Reflects laser beams at the constant rotation speed
BD BD PWB Detects the laser scan start timing
This device is used to detect a laser trouble

1 Laser control PWB Controls laser beam flashing and the output value
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus
3 Incidence reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams
4 No. 1 mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams
5 f T lens 1 Deflects laser beams so that the laser scan speeds on the both ends of the drum and that at the center
6 f T lens 2 of the drum are the same
7 BD mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams to the BD PWB
8 No. 2 mirror Assures the optical path for laser beams
9 Plane lens Converges laser beams to focus
10 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams on to the BD PWB
No. Name Code Function/Operation

RW Control signal +5VLD 5V power for laser diode
RW Control signal /READY Polygon mirror motor READY signal ("L" in the constant speed rotation)
RW Control signal /PMCLK Clock signal for driving the polygon mirror motor
RW Control signal /START Polygon mirror motor drive start signal
RW Control signal /VIDEO VIDEO (Image signal)
RW Control signal /SYNC Sync signal (SYNC) from BD, sync signal for 1 line
MX-M700N LSU SECTION i – 1

A. Outline A. Laser scan unit (LSU)
This section performs the following operations.
No. Unit
Image data sent from the MFP (image process circuit) through the
1 LSU
mother board and PCU are converted into laser beams to radiate
onto the drum surface. (1) LSU
[Laser optical path]
(1)
1) Pull out the multi paper feed tray, and remove the manual
paper feed cover F.
* This unit must not be disassembled in the market. 2) Pushing the lower part, remove the right cabinet center.
B. Polygon mirror motor

Number of Rotating
Model Bearing Remarks
mirror surface speed
55/62ppm 14 surfaces 34000 rpm AIR Superior in
silence
70ppm 14 surfaces 40000 rpm AIR
The number of mirror surfaces and the motor RPM are reduced to
reduce noises and increase reliability.
C. Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width : 297 mm
Resolution : 600 dpi
Beam diameter : Main scan = 60 to 85 Pm
Sub scan = 75 to 110 Pm
Laser power : 55/62ppm: 0.385 r 0.04mW
70ppm: 0.480 r 0.04mW
Laser power : 770 to 795 nm

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process cooling fan
unit.
4) Disconnect the connectors to remove the LSU unit.

MX-M700N
[J] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN

A. OPC drum Section
CN-5
B16B-PADSS-1 B2PS-VH
+38V 10 1 +38V
+38V 11 2 GND1
AC PWB +38V 12
GND1 14
S5B-PH-K-S
1 GND2
GND1 15 2 +5V2
GND1 16 3 /DVM
4 DVMCLK
5 DVM-T
PROCESS UNIT
CN-6 SMR-03V-B/SMP-03V-BC
B18B-PHDSS-B 1 +12V2 1
GND2 1 2 PCS 2
GND2 2 3 PCS-LED 3
+5V2 3
+5V2 4 SMR-03V-B/SMP-03V-BC
/DM 5 1 +12V2 1
/DVM 6 2 DMS 2
DMCLK 7 3 DMS-LED 3
DVMCLK 8 DRAWER
DM-T 9 TSDR-20V-K/TSDP-20V-K PHR-3
DVM-T 10 1 PCS-LED 1 1 +24V-DL
GND2 11 2 PCS 2 2 (NC)
+5V2 12
/FUM 13
3 +12V2
4 DMS-LED 4
3 3 /DL DM
FUMCLK 14 5 DMS 5 SMP-02V-BC/SMR-02V-B
FUM-T 15 6 +12V2 6 1 +24V1 1
+24V1 16 7 +24V-DL 7 2 /PSPS 2
/VFM-BKR 17 8 /DL 8
GND2 18
PCU PWB CN-8
9 +24V1
10 /PTDL
9
10 S4B-PH-K-S
B20B-PHDSS-B 11 (NC) 11 1 (NC)
PCS-LED 1 12 +24V1 12 2 (NC)
DMS-LED 2 13 /PSPS 13 3 TH-CL
PCS 3
DMS 4
14 TH-CL
15 GND2
14
15
4 GND2
7
+12V2 5 16 (NC) 16
+12V2 6 17 (NC) 17
+24V-DL 7 18 (NC) 18
+24V1 8 19 (NC)
20 GND2
19
20 SRA-01T-3.2
PSPS
/DL 9
/PTDL 10 SRA-01T-3.2
+24V1 11
TH-CL 12
TH-CL
/PSPS 13
GND2 14
+5V2 15
TLS 16
HUS-TC 17
DL
GND2 18
GND2 19 PCS
/PWM-RSV1 20
DMS
6
4
3 5
2
9
1
Signal
name
DMS DMS OPC drum marking sensor signal OPC drum mark detection Reflection type Analog detector
PCS PCS Image density sensor Detection of density of toner patch on the OPC drum Reflection type Analog detector
TH-CL TH-CL OPC drum cleaner temperature OPC drum cleaner peripheral temperature detection Thermistor Analog detector
sensor
DM DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section DC brushless
motor
PSPS PSPS Drum separation pawl solenoid Drives the OPC drum separation pawl Solenoid
DL DL Discharge lamp Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum Lamp

1 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images by laser beams
2 Cleaning blade Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum
3 CL brush roller Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum
4 Sub blade (Cleaning seal) Prevent against toner leakage from the cleaner section
5 Side seal F/R Prevents against toner dispersion
6 Drum separation pawl Separates paper from the drum
7 Separation pawl oscillation shaft Moves in the front and rear frame direction to install the separation pawl
8 Waste toner transport screw Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner transport pipe
9 Waste toner transport pipe Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section
MX-M700N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION J – 1

B. Main charger section
CN-15
PCU PWB
CN-1
B16B-PH-K-S B34B-PHDSS-B
PS-187(RD) DSW-F 1 1 DSW-F
MHV GND2 2 2 (NC)
GND2 3 3 GND2
PS-187(YL) /GBPWM 4 4 GND2
GB /MHVREM 5 5 /GBPWM
MHV-T 6 6 /MHVREM
FPS-187(WH)
THV HV /THV+PWM 7
THV+REM 8
/CHV-PWM 9
7 MHV-T
8 /THV+PWM
9 THV+REM
PS-187(GR) /CHV-REM 10 10 /CHV-PWM
Bias /CHVACPWM 11 11 /CHV-REM
/CHVACREM 12 12 /CHVACPWM
/DVPWM 13 13 /CHVACREM
/DVREM 14 14 /DVPWM
HVREM 15 15 /DVREM
+24V1 16 16 HVREM
17 +24V1
18 (NC)
19 GND2
1
1

1 Screen grid Charges the OPC drum evenly / Charges the OPC drum
2 Sawtooth plate Charges the OPC drum

A. Outline 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
In this section, laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface cleaning blade.
which was negatively charged, making electrostatic latent images.
B. Description
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser unit to form latent electrostatic images. Drum
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Main corona unit
High voltage unit
Screen grid
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to

the waste toner section in the toner cartridge by the waste
CTL toner transport screw.
CGL
4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Aluminum
layer OPC drum Lamp
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- CLT CLT
age applied to the screen grid. CGL CGL
layer layer
2) LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser Auminum
Auminum
unit to form latent electrostatic images.
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
LED lights When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
OPC drum the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
OPC drum positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
CTL of the OPC drum.
CGL
layer
Aluminum
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated. Drum
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
OPC drum aluminum layer.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
C. Main charger
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged in this section.

A. OPC drum Section (1) Process unit
1) Open the front door.
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Process unit a OPC drum ✕▲
b Separation pawl ✕▲
c Cleaning blade ✕▲
d Toner reception seal ✕▲
e Side seal F/R ✕▲
f Side seal R base sheet
g Cleaning brush ▲
h Process adsorption plate
i Drum separation pawl
solenoid
j OPC drum cleaner
temperature sensor
k Discharge lamp
l Image density sensor
m OPC drum marking sensor
(1)-j
(1)-i
(1)-l
(1)-m
(1)-h
(1)-k
(1)-a 2) Open the process cover.
(1)-g 3) Open the left door.
4) Remove the MC charger unit.
(1) 5) Remove the blue screw.
6) Unfix the drum to remove the bearing.
(1)-b (1)-e
(1)-d
(1)-e (1)-c
(1)-f
7) Pull out the process unit by clasping the bolt head.

a. OPC drum b. Separation pawl
1) Disconnect the connecters. 1) Remove the OPC drum. (See “a. OPC drum”)
2) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Remove the separation pawl.
c. Cleaning blade
1) Remove the OPC drum. (See “a. OPC drum”)
3) Remove the cleaning blade.
2) Remove the blue screw to open the lower frame.

3) Gently remove the drum, guide and all.
4) Remove the guide.
* The OPC layer of a certain area of the OPC drum may break
off due to rotational friction. The OPC layer break-off gener-
ated in the area shown below will not affect print images.
Therefore, the drum can be used without replacement.
d. Toner reception seal

2) Remove the toner receiving seal.
12mm
14mm
* When replacing the OPC drum, apply friction-reducing pow-

der (UKOG-0309FCZZ) to all over the drum (F and R) in
order to reduce friction and membrane decrease of the OPC
layer on both sides of the OPC drum. (Use PARTEL
(UKOG-0311FCZZ).)

e. Side seal F/R h. Process adsorption plate
f. Side seal R base sheet 1) Remove the cover to remove the adsorption plate.
2) Remove the side seal R base sheet.
3) Attach the side seal R base sheet to the specified position.

Attach the side seals F/R to the specified positions.
i. Drum separation pawl solenoid

1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness guide unit.
* Clean and remove toner and dust from the attachment section
with alcohol.
* When replacing the side seals F/R, apply friction-reducing pow-
der (UKOG-0309FCZZ) to all over the side seals F/R in order to
reduce friction and membrane decrease of the OPC layer on
both sides of the OPC drum. (Use PARTEL (UKOG-0311FCZZ).)
2) Remove the drum separation pawl solenoid.
g. Brush roller
2) Remove the toner receiving seal.
3) Remove the blue screw to remove the lever.
4) Remove the brush roller.

j. OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor l. Image density sensor
1) Remove the upper cover. 1) Remove the upper cover.
(See “j. OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor”)
2) Remove the connecter.
2) Remove the OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor. 3) Remove the OPC drum. (See “a. OPC drum”)
4) Remove the image density sensor.
k. Discharge lamp
m. OPC drum marking sensor
1) Remove the upper cover.
(See “j. OPC drum cleaner temperature sensor”) 1) Remove the OPC drum. (See “a. OPC drum”)
2) Remove the discharge lamp. 2) Remove the OPC drum marking sensor.
* Be careful not to break the pawl when fixing. * Execute cleaning.

B. Main charger section 2) Remove the screen grid from the claw.
No. Unit No. Parts

(1) Main charger unit a Screen grid
b Sawtooth plate
c MC cleaner
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-c
b. Sawtooth plate
1) Remove the blue screw.
(1)-a
(1) Main charger unit

2) Loosen the blue screw.
2) Lifting one end up, slide off the saw blade holder.
3) Remove the main charger unit.
c. MC cleaner
1) Remove the screen grid. (See “a. Screen grid”)
2) Remove the saw teeth plate. (See “b. Saw teeth plate”)
3) Remove the MC cleaner.
a. Screen grid
1) Loosen the screw.

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

section 2 Cleaning blade ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ After installation, the used
product for one year is
recommendable to
exchange.
(P/G No.: [43]-5)
5 Side seal ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ (P/G No.: [43]-33, [43]-35)
6 Drum separation pawl ✕ { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [42]-33)
7 Sawtooth plate { ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [39]-7)
8 Screen grid ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [39]-1)
4
2
5
7 8

MX-M700N
[K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
TM1X
8
7
TM2X
1
TFSD
2
3
CRUM
6
5
TONER HOPPER
PHR-4 TSDP-12V-K/TSDR-12V-K
4 +24V1
TFSD
1
2
1 +24V1
2 TFSD
1
2
(NC) 3 3 GND2 3
GND2 4 4 (NC) 4 CN-11
5 TM1a 5 B12B-PHDSS-B
6 TM1b 6 1 TM1a
7 (NC) 7 2 GND2
8 GND2 8 3 TM1b
9 +5V2 9 4 +5V2
SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC 10 CRUCLK 10 5 TM2a
1 TM1a
2 TM1b
1
2
11 CRUSDA 11
12 GND2 12
6 CRUCLK
7 TM2b
PCU PWB
8 CRUSDA
9 +24V1
DRAWER TSR-04V-K 10 GND2
GND2 1 11 TFSD
+5V2 2 SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 12 TNCA
CRUCLK 3
CRUSDA 4
8 7 2 TFSD 1
1 TM2a 1
2 TM2b 2
Signal
name
TM1X TM1X Toner motor 1 Transports toner in the toner hopper to the developing Synchronous
unit/Transports waste toner to the waste toner section motor
TM2X TM2X Toner motor 2 Transports toner in the toner bottle to the toner Synchronous
hopper motor
TFSD TFSD Toner sensor Toner hopper remaining quantity detection Magnetic sensor
CRUM CRUM lap Stores the toner bottle information

1 TH shutter Serves as a shutter to supply toner from the toner bottle unit to the toner hopper. When a toner bottle
unit is installed, the shutter opens.
2 Toner mixing roller Mixes toner in the toner hopper.
3 Waste toner box drive gear Drives the waste toner transport parts.
4 Waste toner transport plate Remains toner evenly in the waste toner box.
5 Waste toner transport plate Remains toner evenly in the waste toner box.
6 Waste toner shutter Serves as a shutter to receive waste toner from the process unit.
7 TH shaft Toner supply roller to the toner unit section.
8 Toner supply roller Toner supply roller to the developing unit section.
MX-M700N TONER SUPPLY SECTION K – 1

2. Operational descriptions C. Operation
A. Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a
compact toner bottle size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit
detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner
hopper. Following supply, since the sensor detects full or empty
status inside the toner hopper based on a standard quantity of
approximately 150 g of toner, even if the toner cartridge becomes
empty, copying is not immediately suspended because toner inside
the toner hopper is used (approximately 5K/6% print duty docu- The toner remaining quantity sensor in the toner hopper detects the
ments). toner remaining quantity by the toner stirring roller rotation. When
there is little toner, the toner bottle rotating motor of the machine is
Toner filling amount Life with 6% print duty k]documents rotated.
1,430g / 1,650g 72,000 sheets / 83,000 sheets The toner bottle rotates at 4.2rpm. Toner of about 54g is supplied
to the toner hopper for every rotation. When toner full is not
detected after detecting the state with little toner for a certain period
(4min), the toner cartridge is judged as empty, and the display to
B. Composition urge toner cartridge replace is shown on the operation panel.
* When the power is turned on for toner hopper replacement or
cleaning, the toner cartridge replacement display is shown
though toner is not accumulated enough in the toner hopper. In
Shutter lock pawl such a case, turn off/on the power again.
TB holder upper
Toner bottle
TB shutter
TB holder lower
CRUM
TH shutter
TB holder upper
Heat seal
Toner bottle
TB holder lower
CRUM
The toner cartridge is composed of the toner bottle with toner filled
in it, the TB holder lower which holds the toner bottle and to which
the CRUM and the waste toner box assembly are attached, and the
TG holder upper.
The TB holder lower is attached to the TB shutter. When inserting it
to the machine, the toner hopper rib releases the shutter lock pawl,
and opens in linkage with the TH shutter. When removing the toner
cartridge from the machine, the TB shutter closes.
* The toner discharge port of the toner bottle is sealed by the heat
seal. Do not rotate the toner bottle manually, or the heat seal is
dismantled and toner is discharged from the TB shutter port.

3. Disassembly and assembly 4) Clean the shutter area.
A. Toner hopper and toner bottle section

No. Unit No. Parts
(1) Toner bottle unit
(2) Toner hopper unit a Toner sensor
b Toner motor 1
(3) Others a Toner motor 2
(2)-b
(2) (3)-a a. Toner sensor
(2)-a 1) Remove the toner hopper unit. (See “(2) Toner hopper unit”)
(1)
(1) Toner bottle unit

2) Remove the toner bottle.
3) Remove the toner sensor.
(2) Toner hopper unit

1) Remove the toner bottle unit. (See “(1) Toner bottle unit”)
2) Open the process cover. b. Toner motor 1
3) Remove the toner hopper unit. 1) Remove the toner hopper unit. (See “(2) Toner hopper unit”)
2) Remove the toner motor 1.

(3) Others 5) Remove the toner motor 2.
a. Toner motor 2
1) Remove the toner bottle. (See “(1) Toner bottle unit”)
2) Remove the toner hopper unit. (See “(2) Toner hopper unit”)
3) While pressing the bottle coupling, turn it 90 degrees to the left
and remove it. Remove the spring.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the toner motor unit.
4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Developing section 1 Toner bottle Assembly when installing/
empty

MX-M700N
[L] DEVELOPING SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1 2 3 5
CN-5
B16B-PADSS-1
10 +38V
11 +38V
DVM 12 +38V
14 GND1
AC PWB
15 GND1
16 GND1
B2PS-VH
+38V 1
GND1 2 CN-6
B18B-PHDSS-B
S5B-PH-K-S 1 GND2
GND2 1 2 GND2
+5V2 2 3 +5V2
/DVM 3 4 +5V2
DVMCLK 4 5 /DM
DVM-T 5 6 /DVM
7 DMCLK
8 DVMCLK
9 DM-T
10 DVM-T
11 GND2
12 +5V2
13 /FUM
14 FUMCLK
1 2 3 15 FUM-T
16 +24V1
17 /VFM-BKR
18 GND2
CN-12
B30B-PHDSS-B
1 +24V1
HUS-DV 2 +24V1
TH-DV
3 /T2PFC
4 /HPLS PCU PWB
5 +24V1
4 6 DVCH1
7 /HPFC
8 DVCH2
9 +24V1 CN-15
10 DVCH3 B34B-PHDSS-B
TCS 11 /PSBC
12 DVCH4 /DVPWM 14
/DVREM 15
DEVELOPER UNIT 13 +5V2
14 +24V1
HVREM 16
+24V1 17
DRAWER 15 PPD
1 DVCH1 1 16 TCS
2 DVCH2 2 17 GND2
51021-0400 3 DVCH3 3 18 GND2
TSGOUT 1 4 DVCH4 4 19 +5V-MPRD1
+24V1 2 5 +24V1 5 20 TSGOUT
TCS 3 6 TCS 6 21 GND2
GND2 4 7 GND2 7 22 GND2
8 TSGOUT 8 23 MPRD1
9 (NC) 9 24 +5V2
10 GND2 10 25 +5V-MPRD2
ZHR-4 11 (NC) 11 26 HUS-DV
+5V2 1 12 +5V2 12 27 GND2
5 HUS-DV
GND2
2
3
13 HUS-DV 13
14 GND2 14
28 GND2
29 MPRD2
TH-DV 4 15 TH-DV 15 30 TH-DV
16 (NC) 16
17 (NC) 17
18 (NC) 18
SRA-01T-3.2 19 (NC) 19 PS-187(GR) CN1
20 DV-Bias 20
QR/P8-20S-C(01)/QR/P8-20P-C(01)
Bias HV DVREM
Signal
name
HUS-DV HUS-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section peripheral humidity detection Humidity sensor Analog
detector
TCS TCS Toner density sensor Toner density detection Magnetic sensor Analog
detector
TH-DV TH-DV Developing humidity sensor Developing section humidity detection Thermistor Analog
detector
DVM DVM Developing motor Drives the developing section. DC brush-less
motor
Bias Bias Developing bias Developing bias

1 Developing roller Forms magnetic brush with developer and put toner on the OPC drum.
2 DV doctor Keeps the height of the magnetic brush on the developing roller at a fixed level.
3 Mixing roller Mixes developer (carrier and toner) and charges toner negatively.
4 DV earth plate Earth plate for DV unit
5 AG roller Mixes toner supplied from the toner hopper, and supplies toner to the DV box evenly.
MX-M700N DEVELOPING SECTION L – 1

A. Outline A. Developer tank section
In this section, toner is attached to electrostatic latent images
Mainte
formed by laser beams on the OPC drum, making visible images. No. Unit No. Parts
nance
B. Description (1) Developing unit a Developer ▲
b DV seal ▲
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum by the LED
c MG holder F and R {
(writing) unit (LED image light) are converted into visible images by
d Side seal F and R ▲
toner.
e Toner density sensor
layer
CGL (1)-d
Aluminum (1)-c (1)-b
CTL (1)-a
(1)
Drum (1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1) Developing unit

1) Take out the developing tank.
Cleaning Developing
2
mode mode
+150v -500v
Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller.

When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical fric-
tion.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on
the OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure.
On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where exposure
is not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and toner is
not attached.

a. Developer c. MG holder F and R
1) Take out the developing tank. (See “(1) Developing unit”) 1) Take out the developing tank. (See “(1) Developing unit”)
2) Remove the DV cover. 2) Remove the DV cover. (See “a. Developer”)
3) Remove the doctor cover.
3) Turning the MG roller, take out the old developer.
4) Remove the DV cover front.
4) Insert the new developer.
5) Remove the bias line and main pole position adjusting plate
and screws.
b. DV seal
1) Take out the developing tank. (See “(1) Developing unit”)
2) Take out the old DV seal.
3) Wipe the sealing face with alcohol.
4) Affix the new DV seal at the reference position.
6) Remove the MG gear and screws.

7) Remove the side seals F and R. d. Side seal F and R
2) Remove the doctor cover.
3) Peel off the right and left side seals.
4) Clean the peeled area.
5) Peel off the new right and left seals from the mounting paper
and affix in the designated positions.
8) Remove the MG roller unit.
e. Toner density sensor

2) Remove the DV cover. (See “a. Developer”)
3) Remove the toner concentration sensor.
9) Remove the doctor attaching plate.
10) Remove the MG holders F and R.

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

2 DV seal ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [37]-5)
3 MG holder F/R { { { { { { { { {
3
2
5

MX-M700N
[M] TRANSFER SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
DM
1
2
4
TURM
DRAWER
CN-15 CN-7 1 DSW-L 1
B32B-PHDSS-B
B34B-PHDSS-B
7 MHV-T +24V1 1
2
3
/ADUM2/A 2
/ADUM2A 3
LEFT DOOR UNIT
8 /THV+PWM +24V1 2 4 /ADUM2B 4
9 THV+REM /CFM-DV 3 5 /ADUM2/B 5
THPS2 10 /CHV-PWM /RRC 4 6 +5V-APPD1 6
7 GND2 5 7 +5V-APPD2 7
6 CN-8
B20B-PHDSS-B
(NC)
+24V1
6
7
8
9
+5V-PFD2 8
+5V-DSW 9
+24V(DSW) 8 10 +5V-AINPD 10
1 PCS-LED +5V-APPD1 9 11 (NC) 11 SMR-12V-N/SMP-12V-NC
2 DMS-LED PFD2 10
3 PCS 12 /ADUM1/A 12 1 +5V-PFD2 1
+5V-APPD2 11 13 /ADUM1A 13 2 PFD2 2
4 DMS 179228-3
HV CN-1
B16B-PH-K-S
5 +12V2
6 +12V2
7 +24V-DL
THPS1
+5V-PFD2 13
THPS2
12
14
14
15
16
/ADUM1B 14
/ADUM1/B 15
+24V1 16
3 +5V-THPS2 3
4 THPS2
5 /TCB-PWM 5
4 1 THPS2
2 GND2
8 +24V1 +5V-DSWD 15 17 +24V(DSW) 17 6 /TCBIAS 6 3 +5V-THPS2
MHV-T 6
FPS-187(WH) /THV+PWM 7 9 /DL TURM 16 18 PFD2 18 7 DSW-L 7
THV THV+REM 8 10 /PTDL +5V-AINPD 17 19 /CFM-ADU 19 8 DSW-L 8
/CHV-PWM 9 11 +24V1 /SFM 18 20 THPS2 20 9 GND2 9 PHR-2
1 3 5 12 TH-CL
13 /PSPS
+5V-THPS1 19
(NC) 20
21
22
TURM
/TCB-PWM 22
21 10 TURM
11 +24V1
10
11
1 TURM
2 GND2
14 GND2 +5V-THPS2 21 23 /TCBIAS 23 12 /CFM-ADU 12
15 +5V2 (NC) 22 24 +5V-THPS2 24
16 TLS /CFM-AM1 23 25 GND2 25
17 HUS-TC APPD1 24
2 18 GND2
19 GND2
DSWD 25
26
27
GND2
APPD1
26
27
APPD2 26 28 APPD2 28 B6B-PH-K-S FPS-187
20 (NC)
/DGS 27 29 AINPD 29 1 DSW-L Bias
4 AINPD
GND2
28
29
30
31
DSW-ADU 30
/DGS 31
2 DSW-L
3 /TCBIAS
4 /TCB-PWM TB PWB
GND2 30 32 +24V2 32 5 GND2
8 6
(NC)
DSW-L
31
32
QR/P4-32S-C(01)/QR/P4-32P-C(01) 6 F-GND
CN-6
B1v8B-PHDSS-B
GND2 1
GND2 2
+5V2 3
7 +5V2 4
/DM 5
S5B-PH-K-S
1 GND2
PCU /DVM 6
DMCLK 7
2 +5V2
3 /DM
DVMCLK 8 4 DMCLK
PWB DM-T 9
DVM-T 10
5 DM-T
B2PS-VH
GND2 11 CN-5 1 +38V
+5V2 12 B16B-PADSS-1 2 GND1
/FUM 13 +38V 10
FUMCLK 14 +38V 11
FUM-T 15
+24V1 16 AC PWB +38V 12
GND1 14
/VFM-BKR 17 GND1 15
GND2 18 GND1 16
Signal
name
DM DM OPC drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the transfer section. DC brushless
motor
TURM TURM Transfer separation motor Drives and separates the transfer belt. DC brush motor The transfer
belt is pressed
on the OPC
drum only
during printing.
THPS2 THPS2 Transfer belt contact/separation Transfer belt separation home position detection 2 Transmission Other sensor,
home position sensor 2 type switch
THV THV Transfer high voltage High voltage for transfer
HUS-TC HUS-TC Process humidity sensor Process section peripheral humidity detection Humidity sensor Analog
detector
(Not used)

1 Transfer drive roller (Drive) Drives the transfer belt.
2 Transfer cleaning roller Cleans the transfer belt.
3 Transfer belt Transfers toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
4 Transfer tension roller Applies a proper tension to the transfer belt.
5 Transfer belt discharge brush Connects the transfer belt to the chassis ground.
6 Transfer roller Applies a transfer voltage to the transfer belt.
7 Transfer auxiliary roller (Idle) Helps to stretch the transfer belt.
8 Transfer (TCCL) bias high voltage PWB Generates a bias voltage for the transfer cleaning roller in cleaning or in the print mode.
MX-M700N TRANSFER SECTION M – 1

A. Outline After completion of the job, the applied voltage to the transfer
In this section, toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to cleaning roller is switched to negative, and toner is returned
from the transfer cleaning roller to the transfer belt, and toner
paper.
on the transfer belt is attracted to the drum and cleaned by the
B. Description cleaning blade.
1) Toner image transfer
Toner images formed on the drum by the developing roller are
transferred to paper by the transfer belt.
-2.0kv 2.0kv
Toner on the drum is negatively charged by stirring in the
developing unit. By applying a positive voltage to the transfer
roller, the transfer belt and paper on the transfer belt are posi-
tively charged to transfer negatively charged toner images to
paper.
Cleaning roller Transfer belt

cleaning mode cleaning mode
-2.0kv 2.0kv
AC4.5kv
1.0~1.5kv 2.0~2.5kv
-100v (35μA) (40μA)
8
10 Ω
55ppm 70ppm
62ppm
Cleaning roller
cleaning mode Transfer mode Cleaning timing:
AC4.5kv After completion of the job, When warming-up, After canceling
1.0 - 1.5kv (35μA)
-100v (55ppm, 62ppm)
a jam, After execution of process control
8
2.0 - 2.5kv (40μA) 10 Ω
(70ppm) 3) Transfer belt separation/contact
Transfer belt is separated by the transfer separation motor.
The transfer belt is in contact with the drum except for the fol-
lowing cases.
2) Transfer belt cleaning
The case that the transfer belt is separated from the drum
During the job, a positive voltage is applied to the transfer
except:
cleaning roller so that negatively charged toner on the transfer
belt is attracted to the cleaning roller. * When executing process control (to prevent against break-
age of toner patch on the drum)
(The brush on the back of the transfer belt is provided for
increasing the cleaning effect.) * When a jam occurs (Protection of the drum, left door open/
close)
* When shipping (Protection of the drum. Separate with the
simulation 6-1 (7).)
-2.0kv 2.0kv

A. Transfer section 2) Loosen the blue screw and open the holder to remove the
transfer unit.
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Transfer unit a Transfer drive gear ✕▲
b Transfer belt {▲
c Transfer auxiliary roller
d Transfer roller ▲
e Transfer roller collar ✕▲
f Transfer cleaning roller
g Transfer cleaning brush
(1)
(1)-g a. Transfer drive gear

1) Remove the transfer unit. (See “(1) Transfer unit”)
2) Loosen the blue screw and unhook the hook lever in order to
open the transfer belt unit in the arrowed direction.
3) Remove the spring.
(1)-f (1)-e
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-c
(1)-d
(1)-e
(1) Transfer unit

1) Open the left door unit. 4) Remove the transfer belt unit in the arrowed direction.
2
1

5) Remove the ground members. b. Transfer belt
6) Remove the blue screw to remove the roller fixing members. 1) Remove the transfer unit. (See “(1) Transfer unit”)
2) Remove the transfer belt unit. (See “a. Transfer drive gear”)
3) Pull out the transfer belt.
c. Transfer auxiliary roller

d. Transfer roller
7) Pull out the upper transfer roller unit from the transfer belt. e. Transfer roller collar
1) Remove the transfer unit. (See “(1) Transfer unit”)
2) Remove the upper transfer roller unit.
(See “a. Transfer drive gear”)
3) Remove the transfer belt. (See “b. Transfer belt”)
4) Remove the transfer tension roller bearing to remove the
transfer roller.
8) Remove the E-ring and screw to remove the transfer drive

gear.
5) Remove the E-ring to remove the transfer roller transfer roller

collar.

f. Transfer cleaning roller g. Transfer cleaning brush
1) Remove the transfer unit. (See “(1) Transfer unit”) 1) Remove the transfer unit. (See “(1) Transfer unit”)
2) Remove the transfer belt unit. (See “a. Transfer drive gear”) 2) Remove the upper transfer roller unit.
3) Remove the E-ring to remove the transfer cleaning roller. (See “a. Transfer drive gear”)
3) Remove the transfer belt. (See “b. Transfer belt”)
4) Remove the cleaning brush.
4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

6 Paper guide { { { { { { { { {
* When cleaning the transfer belt, never use alcohol, solvent, and water.
1
5
4
5
2 5
3
5

MX-M700N
[N] FUSING SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
PCUPWB
CN-2
B28B-PHDSS-B
RTH1 6
HLPR3 7 PHNR-04-H+BU04P-TR-P-H
GND2 8 1 RTH1 4
HLCNT1 9 2 GND2 3
RTH2 10 RCZR-09V-PS 3 RTH2 2
HLCNT2 11 9 RTH1 1 4 GND2 1
GND2 12 8 GND2 2
+24V1 13 7 RTH2 3 PHNR-02-H+BU02P-TR-P-H
RTH3 14 6 GND2 4 1 RTH3 2
/MSWPR 15 5 RTH3 5 2 GND2 1
GND2 16 4 GND2 6
CN-24
B6B-PH-K-S RCZR-10V-PS PHNR-05-H+BU05P-TR-P-H 179228-32
+5V-WEBENDD 1 1 +5V-WEBENDD 10 1 +5V-WEBENDD 5 1 +5V-WEBENDD
WEBENDD 2 2 WEBENDD 9 2 WEBENDD 4 2 WEBENDD
GND2 3 3 GND2 8 3 GND2 3 3 GND2
WEBMA 4 4 WEBMA 7 4 WEBMA 2 SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
WEBMB 5 5 WEBMB 6 5 WEBMB 1 1 WEBMA 1
Reserve7 6 2 WEBMB 2
CN-1
B03P-VL 1 HL-2L 1
HL1-N 1 2 HL-1N 2
HL3-L 2 3 HL-2N 3
HL2-L 3 4 HL-3N 4
5 HL-3L 5
CN-2
B03P-VL-R 6 HL-1L 6
HL1-L 1
HL2-N 2 19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6/
HL3-N 3 19LR-RWZV-K2GG-R6
SUB P/S
PWB
FUM
WEBM
8
9
HL 2
1
WEBEND
HLTS2 HLTS1
3 HL1
RT H1
10
HL3 RTH2
4
2 5
HLTS3 7
RTH 3
6
2
Signal Active
name condition
RTH1 RTH1 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the heat roller. Analog input
sensor (1) (Center section)
RTH2 RTH2 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the heat roller. Analog input
sensor (2) (Edge section)
HLTS1 HLTS1 Thermostat (1) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the
temperature rises abnormally. [For the heat roller]
HLTS2 HLTS2 Thermostat (2) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the
temperature rises abnormally. [For the heat roller]
HL1 HL1 Heater lamp (1) Heats the heat roller.
HL2 HL2 Heater lamp (2) Heats the heat roller.
RTH3 RTH3 Fusing temperature Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the sub heat roller.
sensor (3)
HLTS3 HLTS3 Thermostat (3) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the Analog input
temperature rises abnormally. [For the sub heat roller]
HL3 HL3 Heater lamp (3) Heats the sub heat roller.
FUM FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit.
WEBEND WEBEND Web end sensor Transmission Detects the web paper end (Replacement). End detection
type
WEBM WEBM Web motor Drives the web roller.
MX-M700N FUSING SECTION N – 1

Active
condition
1 Heat roller Heats and presses toner on paper and fuses it on paper.
2 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not separated naturally
from the heat roller.
3 Pressure roller Heats and presses toner on paper and fuses it on paper.
4 Sub heat roller Heats the pressure roller.
5 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not separated naturally
from the pressure roller.
6 Cleaning sheet Clean the sub heat roller surface.
7 CL roller Clean the pressure roller.
8 Web roller Clean the heat roller.
9 Pressure roller Applies a pressure to web paper to connect the heat roller.
10 Lower CL roller DG2 Clean the pressure roller.
A. General D. Fusing operation
This section performs the following functions and operations. Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
1) Toner attached to paper in the transfer section are heated and roller.
pressed by the fusing roller onto paper to fuse.
2) The sub heat roller is used to improve fusing capacity and sep-
aration capacity after fusing.
Paper Fusing
Copy
exit
Heat roller Pressure

roller
Paper exit Fusing Heater lamps Sub heat

roller motor (2 pcs.) roller
Heat lamp
Sub power PWB (1 pc)
B. Fusing unit drive

To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control Heat roller
signal sent from the PCU. HL2 HL1
PCU FUM Paper exit
Pressure roller
C. Heater lamp drive HL3

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther- Sub heat roller
mistor is sent to the PCU.
When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater Two heater lamps are provided for the heat roller and one heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive lamp is provided for the sub heat roller for the pressure roller to sub
circuit in the sub power PWB. heat paper from above and below.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the This is because toner on paper must be heated from above and
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and below to be fused on paper.
heating the heat roller. Pressure roller are of silicon rubber because of the following rea-
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, sons and purpose. This is the following reason, objective.
the thermostat is provided for safety. 1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the heat roller is of higher
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the hardness, the pressure roller is deformed to separate paper
heater lamp is cut off. upward.)
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
deformation. (The flatness, however, is not so high.)

E. Fusing temperature control 3. Disassembly and assembly
The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the heat roller
and the sub heat roller. A. Fuser section
The roller temperature is detected by the installed temperature sen-
Mainte
sor, and the heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is No. Unit Parts
nance
maintained at the specified level. 㧔㧕 Fusing unit a Web end sensor ✕
In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the kind b Web motor
of paper. c Pressure bearing ▲
d Pressure roller ✕▲
Mode Paper Fusing roller Sub heat roller e Web roller ✕▲
Ready Standard paper 185°C 185°C f Web bearing ▲
condition Thick paper 220°C 180°C g Heat roller separation pawl ✕▲
Print mode Tab paper 220°C 180°C h Pressure roller separation pawl ✕▲
Postcard 200°C 200°C i Pressure roller ✕▲
Pre-heat –- 140°C 140°C j CL roller ✕▲
F. Cleaning operation k CL roller bearing ▲
l Lower CL roller DG2 ✕▲
The fusing roller removes toner and dusts from the heat roller and
m Heater lamp main
the pressure roller surfaces by the following three methods.
n Heater lamp sub
• Sub-heat roller: Clean the sub heat roller with the cleaning sheet. o Heat roller gear ✕
• Pressure roller: Mechanical cleaning by the CL roller. p Heat roller ✕▲
• Heat roller: Mechanical cleaning by the web roller. q Thermistor (upper) ✕
r Thermostat (upper main)
s Thermostat (upper sub)
t Thermostat (lower)
u Thermistor (lower) ✕
4 v Cleaning sheet table ✕▲
w Sub heater lamp
2 x Sub heat roller bearing ▲
y Sub heat roller ✕▲
(1)-k (1)-g
(1)-x
8 (1)-h
3 (1)-t
(1)
7 (1)-h
(1)-g
6 (1)-j (1)-o
1 (1)-k (1)-k
5 (1)-o
(1)-s
(1)-r
No. Name (1)-q
1 Cleaning sheet
(1)-u (1)-c (1)-f
2 Pressure roller (1)-q
3 Discharge brush
4 Heat roller (1)-x (1)-d
(1)-k (1)-l
5 Sub heat roller (1)-c
6 CL roller
7 Web roller (1)-c
8 Lower CL roller DG2
(1)-f (1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-a
(1)-g (1)-q
(1)-h (1)-r࡮s
(1)-n
(1)-i (1)-m
(1)-j (1)-p
(1)-y
(1)-v
(1)-l
(1)-w
(1)-t (1)-u

(1) Fusing unit a. Web end sensor
1) Open the left door unit. 1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “(1) Fusing unit”)
2) Check the web end sensor.
2
1
2) Remove the blue fixing screw on the front side.

b. Web motor
1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “(1) Fusing unit”)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove only the 4 pin connec-
tor harness.
3) Release the fixing members on the rear frame side.
3) Remove the 3 screws.

4) Release the right and left lock levers of the fusing unit to
remove the fusing unit.
* Caution for handling at a high temperature (Hold the both
sides of the unit.)
* When removing the unit, be careful not to tilt it, and remove
slowly. (This is because the unit includes paper dust scraped
by the scraper.)

4) Remove the web unit. 7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear from the web motor.
c. Pressure bearing
d. Pressure roller
e. Web roller
f. Web bearing
5) Remove the heat-resistant band banding web motor harness 1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “(1) Fusing unit”)
and cut it. 2) Remove the web unit. (See “b. Web motor”)
Cut the banding band and remove it from the web motor. 3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove
the web drive unit. Remove the bearings.
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove

6) Remove the 2 screws and remove the web motor. the cover.
Note: The shoulder screws go on the front side and the
standard screw go on the rear side.

5) Remove 3 screws, and remove the web end sensor unit. 8) Remove the spring, and remove the pressure bearing.
Remove the pressure roller.
* When installing, put the boss of actuator in the inside of a

websheet. 9) Remove the web tension bearing and the backup plate.
6) Remove 2 screws of backup plate.
7) Remove the web roller (wind-up side). 10) Remove the web roller.
* When installing, rotate the web roller until the blue line
(approx. 30cm) is hidden after installing the web roller. (rotate
the gear)

11) Remove the E-rings and the gears. g. Heat roller separation pawl
* When installing the one way gear, direct the metal surface 1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “(1) Fusing unit”)
side to outside. 2) Remove the heat roller separation pawl unit.
Marks
B
A
B
Marks A
* When installing the unit, install to the standard position (A).

12) Remove the pins and E-rings, and remove the winding shaft (If the picture quality may be degraded damaged by the
and the transport shaft. roller damage, change the installing position to (B).)
* When installing, install the winding shaft (two pin holes) in an 3) Remove the heat roller separation pawl unit.
attachment hole (A) of the “{{” mark side, and install trans-
port shaft (one pin hole) in an attachment hole (B) of the “{”
mark side.
B
h. Pressure roller separation pawl
2) Open the pressure roller separation pawl unit.
13) Remove the web bearings.
3) Remove the pressure roller separation pawl.

i. Pressure roller 6) Remove the CL roller unit.
j. CL roller
k. CL roller bearing
l. Lower CL roller DG2
2) Alternately tighten the screws to release pressure.
* When releasing the pressure, do not apply any force to the
shaded area. (Otherwise, the paper guide on the paper entry
side may be deformed.)
7) Remove the CL roller bearings to CL roller.
3) Remove the screws and open the fusing unit.
8) Remove the lower CL roller DG2 unit.
4) Remove the pressure roller unit.
5) Remove the bearings from the pressure roller.
9) Remove the CL roller bearings to lower CL roller DG2.

When installing the pressure roller to the fusing unit, be careful
not to damage the cleaning plate.
If the cleaning plate would be deformed, copy dirt would be
resulted.

m. Heater lamp main 7) Remove the ring, and remove the heat rollers, gear and
n. Heater lamp sub bearings.
o. Heat roller gear

p. Heat roller
2) Alternately tighten the screws to release pressure.
(See “i. Pressure roller”)
3) Remove the fusing unit. (See “i. Pressure roller”)
4) Remove the lamp fixing screws.
q. Thermistor (upper)
2) Remove the web unit. (See “b. Web motor”)
3) Remove the screws, and remove the mounting plate.
R side F side
* When assembling, tighten the screws in the front side

(drawer CN side) and then in the rear side (gear side) in this
sequence.
* Check that the screw is securely tightened again. (If the
screw is loose, the contact becomes defective to cause an
overheating.)
5) Remove the heater lamp main and sub.
4) Remove 1 screw per Thermistor.
6) Remove the heat roller unit.

r. Thermostat (upper main) 3) Remove the thermistor (lower).
s. Thermostat (upper sub)
2) Remove the web unit. (See “b. Web motor”)
3) Remove the lamp fixing screws on R side.
[Cleaning]
When there is paper dust or foreign material on the heat sensi-
tive surface of the thermostat, clean and remove dust or for-
4) Disconnect the connector on drawer side.
eign material.
5) Remove the screws and the washers, and remove the upper
main thermostat (A) and the upper sub thermostat (B).
Be careful not to mistake the install position of the washer.
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and the ther-
mistor (lower).
B
A
Marks
A B
t. Thermostat (lower)
u. Thermistor (lower) * If the picture quality may be degraded damaged by the roller
damage, change the installing position to (B).
2) Lay the unit on its side to prevent paper dust from dispersing, v. Cleaning sheet table
and remove the lower cover. 1) Remove the fusing unit. (See “(1) Fusing unit”)
2) Remove the lower cover. (See “t. Thermostat (lower)”)
3) Remove the holder plate.
(A)
* When there are paper dusts or foreign materials at the port

area (A), clean and remove.

4) Remove the cleaning sheet table. 6) Remove the sub heat roller unit.
* If the roller is cooled down, toner may be hardened to pre-
vent removing.
* Since cleaning is performed by applying a pressure by the
spring, be careful not to deform it.
* If copy dirt is heavy, replace the cleaning sheet table with a
new one.
7) Remove the lamp fixtures.

8) Remove the sub heater lamp.
w. Sub heater lamp
x. Sub heat roller bearing
y. Sub heat roller
2) Remove the lower cover. (See “t. Thermostat (lower)”)
3) Remove the springs.
4) Remove the thermostat terminals. 9) Remove the ring, and remove the thermostat (lower) and the
sub heat roller.
5) Remove the thermistor.
Marks
A B
* If the picture quality may be degraded damaged by the roller

damage, change the installing position to (B).

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

4 Web roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-42)
6 CL roller ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [47]-46)
8 Cleaning sheet table ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [46]-23)
pawl
required.
15 Web bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-4)
16 Pressure bearing ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ (P/G No.: [49]-8)
17 Paper guides { { { { { { { { {
18 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
* When maintenance, replace the fusing web roller.
When used without replacement, the picture quality may be damaged because web roller end. [every 300K every 250K]
9 21
14
10 3
10 11
9
1
2
19 21
14
17
11
13
19
11
19
16
12
20
13 15
5
15
6
16
19

MX-M700N
[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
POM1
POD2
POM2
INTPWB CFM-U3
POD3
CFM-U4 POD1
2 CFM-U1
2 3 1
3
1
DELIVERY UNIT
CN-1 1 /POM1/A 1
B12B-PH-K-S 2 /POM1A 2
/POM1/A 1 3 /POM1B 3
/POM1A 2 4 /POM1/B 4
/POM1B 3 5 +24V2 5
/POM1/B 4 6 +24V2 6
+24V2 5
/POM2/A 7 1 /POM2/A 1
/POM2A 8 2 /POM2A 2
/POM2B 9 3 /POM2B 3
/POM2/B 10 4 /POM2/B 4
+24V2 11 5 +24V2 5
+24V2 12 6 +24V2 6
CN-5
DRIVER PWB PCU PWB B32B-PHDSS-B
GND2 1
1 GND2 1 1
PHR-3
GND2
+24V1 2 2 POD1 2 2 POD1
POD1 3 3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2
/VFM-EX1 4 4 GND2 4
CN-4 CN-10 +5V2 5 5 POD2 5 PHR-3(RED)
B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B GND2 6 6 +5V2 6 1 GND2
/POM1A 1 1 /POM1A GND2 7 7 GND2 7 2 POD2
/POM1XA 2 2 /POM1XA +24V1 8 8 POD3 8 3 +5V2
/POM1B 3 3 /POM1B POD2 9 9 +5V2 9
/POM1XB 4 4 /POM1XB /VFM-EX2 10 10 +24V1 10 SMP-03V-BC/SMR-03V-B PHR-3
/POM2A 5 5 /POM2A +5V2 11 11 /CFM-U1 11 1 GND2 1 1 GND2
/POM2XA 6 6 /POM2XA GND2 12 12 GND2 12 2 POD3 2 2 POD3
/POM2B 7 7 /POM2B GND2 13 13 +24V1 13 3 +5V2 3 3 +5V2
/POM2XB 8 8 /POM2XB +24V1 14 14 /CFM-U3 14
/ADM1A 9 9 /ADM1A POD3 15 15 GND2 15
/ADM1XA 10 10 /ADM1XA /VFM-EX3 16 16 TH-EX 16 SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
/ADM1B 11 11 /ADM1B +5V2 17 17 GND2 17 1 +24V1 1
/ADM1XB 12 12 /ADM1XB GND2 18 18 /PWM-RSV1 18 2 /CFM-U1 2
/ADM2A 13 13 /ADM2A +24V1 19 3 GND2 3
/ADM2XA 14 14 /ADM2XA +24V1 20
/ADM2B 15 15 /ADM2B /CFM-U1 21 SMR-03V-N/SMP-03V-NC
/ADM2XB 16 16 /ADM2XB /VFM-BKL 22 1 +24V1 1
/TRMA 17 17 /TRMA GND2 23 2 /CFM-U3 2
/TRMXA 18 18 /TRMXA GND2 24 3 GND2 3
/TRMB 19 19 /TRMB +24V 25
/TRMXB 20 20 /TRMXB +24V1 26 PHNR-03-H+BU03P-TR-P-H
/VPMA 21 21 /VPMA /CFM-U3 27 3 +24V1 1
/VPMXA 22 22 /VPMXA /CFM-U2 28 2 /PWM-RSV1 2
/VPMB 23 23 /VPMB GND2 29 1 GND2 3
/VPMXB 24 24 /VPMXB GND2 30
GND2 25 25 GND2 TH-EX 31 S4B-PH-K-S
GND2 26 26 GND2 GND2 32 1 (NC)
2 (NC)
3 TH-EX
CN-8
B20B-PHDSS-B SMP-02V-NC/SMR-02V-N 4 GND2
/PWM-RSV1 20 1 /PWM-RSV1 1
2 (NS) 2
Signal
name
POD1 POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Paper exit detection from fusing Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
POD2 POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Paper pass detection from paper exit Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
POD3 POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Paper exit detection to upper section Transmission Paper transport
type system sensor
POM1 POM1 Paper exit motor 1 Drives the paper transport roller 16. Stepping motor Selection of
Normal speed/
High speed
MX-M700N PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 1

Signal
name
POM2 POM2 Paper exit motor 2 Drives the paper exit roller 1. Stepping motor Selection of
Normal speed/
High speed
CFM-U1 CFM-U1 Fusing cooling fan motor 1 Exhaust heat from the fusing section. DC brush-less PWM control
(Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section) motor
(Front surface)
CFM-U3 CFM-U3 Fusing cooling fan motor 3 Exhaust heat from the fusing section. DC brush-less PWM control
(Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section) motor
(Front surface)
CFM-U4 PWM- Fusing cooling fan motor 4 Cools paper which is discharged to the inner tray. DC brush-less PWM control
RSV1 (Paper exit, duplex (ADU) section) motor
(Paper exit section rear side)
INTPWB Paper exit temperature sensor Paper exit section temperature detection

1 Transport roller 16 Transports paper from the fusing roller to the paper exit roller 1.
2 Paper exit roller 1 Discharges paper to the paper exit tray. / Switches back paper.
3 Paper exit roller 3 Discharges paper.
2. Operational descriptions (1) Paper exit unit

1) Open the left door.
A. Outline 2) Remove the DSPF paper exit tray.
The paper exit and turning section discharges paper which is trans- 3) Remove the top left cabinet.
ported from the fusing section, and detects paper full. It also turns
4) Remove the front left cabinet.
paper to transport it to the duplex or the finisher.

A. Paper exit section
Mainte
No. Unit No. Parts
nance
(1) Paper exit unit a Transport roller 16 {✕
b Paper exit roller 1 {✕
c Fusing cooling fan motor 1
d Fusing cooling fan motor 3
e Fusing cooling fan motor 4
f Paper exit temperature
sensor
g Paper exit detector 1
h Paper exit detector 2
i Discharge brush ✕
j Paper exit detector 3
k Paper exit roller 3 {✕
5) Remove the paper exit port cabinet.
(1) (1)-h
(1)-e
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-c
(1)-j
(1)-g
(1)-i
(1)-k
(1)-i
(1)-a (1)-b

6) Disconnect the connectors. 4) Remove the E-ring to remove the gear.
7) Remove the front fixing bracket.
8) Remove the paper exit unit in the arrowed direction.
5) Remove the transport roller 16.
a. Transport roller 16
1) Remove the paper exit unit. (See “(1) Paper exit unit”)
2) Remove the ground plate. Remove the E-ring to remove the
pulley.
b. Paper exit roller 1

2) Remove the upper unit.
3) Remove the stopper. Remove the E-ring to remove the bear-

ing.

3) Remove the stopper. Remove the E-ring to remove the bear- 6) Remove the paper exit roller 1.
ing.
c. Fusing cooling fan motor 1

d. Fusing cooling fan motor 3
4) Remove the supporting plate. Remove the connection plate, e. Fusing cooling fan motor 4
and remove the gears. 1) Remove the paper exit unit. (See “(1) Paper exit unit”)
2) Remove the upper cover.
3) Remove the fusing cooling fan motor 1 (A), 3 (B), and 4 (C).
5) Remove the E-ring to remove the gear.
B
A
REVERSE
Fan blowing direction

• When assembling, be careful of the direction of the fan.
(Fit the fan with the mark rotating direction)

f. Paper exit temperature sensor h. Paper exit detector 2
1) Remove the upper cover. (See “c. Fusing cooling fan motor 1”) 1) Remove the paper exit unit. (See “(1) Paper exit unit”)
2) Remove the paper exit temperature sensor. 2) Remove the upper cover. (See “c. Fusing cooling fan motor 1”)
3) Remove the paper exit detection 2 detector.
i. Discharge brush
g. Paper exit detector 1 2) Remove the discharge brush.
1) Remove the paper exit unit. (See “(1) Paper exit unit”) * When attaching, attach it to the reference.
2) Remove the follower roller unit.
3) Remove the paper exit detection 1 detector.

j. Paper exit detector 3 k. Paper exit roller 2
1) Remove the paper exit unit. (See “(1) Paper exit unit”) 1) Remove the paper exit unit. (See “(1) Paper exit unit”)
2) Remove the upper cover. (See “c. Fusing cooling fan motor 1”) 2) Remove the upper cover. (See “c. Fusing cooling fan motor 1”)
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness protect 3) Remove the paper guide. (See “j. Paper exit detector 3”)
sheet. Remove the paper guide. 4) Remove the ground plate. Remove the E-ring to remove the
bearing.
5) Remove the E-ring, and the gear. Remove the spring pin and
the bearing.
4) Remove the cover, and the remove the paper exit detector 3.
6) Remove the paper exit roller 3.

4. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Paper exit reverse 1 Transport rollers ✕ { { { { { { { {
section 2 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3
3

MX-M700N
[P] DRIVE SECTION a. Paper exit motor 1

5GTXKEG/CPWCN
b. Paper exit motor 2
1. Disassembly and assembly 1) Remove the fusing unit.
(See “(1) Fusing unit” in the “FUSING SECTION”)
A. Fusing drive section 2) Remove the fusing drive unit. (See “b-1. Fusing motor”)
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing drive frame.
No. Unit No. Parts
(1) Fusing drive unit a Paper exit motor 1
b Paper exit motor 2
(2) Others a Fusing motor
(1)-a
(1)-b
(2)-a
(1)
4) Remove the paper exit motor 1 (A) and the paper exit motor 2
(B).
(1) Fusing drive unit

1) Remove the fusing unit. A
(See “(1) Fusing unit” in the “FUSING SECTION”)
2) Remove the fusing motor. (See “(2)-a. Fusing motor”)
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the harnesse clamp.
(2) Others
a. Fusing motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet upper.
4) Remove the fusing drive unit.

* Remove the screw which was indicated with the arrow mark.
MX-M700N DRIVE SECTION P – 1

2) Remove the tray. B. Drum drive section
No. Unit No. Parts
(1) Drum drive unit a Waste toner pipe lock detector
b Process humidity sensor
(2) Others a OPC drum motor
b Developing system
(1)
(1)-a
(2)-a
(1)-b
3) Remove the left cover cabinet.
(2)-b
(1) Drum drive unit

1) Remove the developing unit and the process unit.
(See “(1) Developing unit” in the “DEVELOPING SECTION”,
“A-(1) Process unit” in the “PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION”)
2) Remove the OPC drum motor and the developing motor.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp, and (See “(2)-a. OPC drum motor”, “(2)-b. Developing system”)
remove the paper exit tray duct R unit. 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
harness holder.
5) Disconnect the connector and remove the fusing motor.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp, and

remove the drum drive unit.

a. Waste toner pipe lock detector 7) Remove the parts.
1) Remove the developing unit and the process unit.
(See “(1) Developing unit” in the “DEVELOPING SECTION”,
“A-(1) Process unit” in the “PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION”)
(See “(2)-a. OPC drum motor”, “(a)-b. Developing motor”)
3) Remove the drum drive unit. (See “(1) Drum drive unit”)
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the waste toner pipe
lock detector.
8) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor plate.
b. Process humidity sensor

1) Remove the developing unit.
(See “(1) Developing unit” in the “DEVELOPING SECTION”)
2) Remove the process unit. (See “a. Process unit” in the “PHO-
TOCONDUCTOR SECTION”)
(See “(2)-a. OPC drum motor”, “(a)-b. Developing motor”)
4) Remove the drum drive unit. (See “(1) Drum drive unit”)
5) Remove the drum earth plate. Remove the set screw and the 9) Remove the process humidity sensor.
flywheel joint. Remove the E-ring.
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the drum drive frame.

(2) Others
a. OPC drum motor
b. Developing system

2) Remove the flywheel. (1) Main drive unit
1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “B-(1) Resist roller unit” in
the “PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION”)
2) Remove the flywheel. (See “B-(2)-a. OPC drum motor”)
3) Remove the main motor. (See “(2)-a. Main motor”)
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the eternal outfit
mounting plate.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the OPC drum motor

(A) and the developing motor (B).
5) Remove the plastic E-ring, the belt holding sheet, the belt, and
the pulley. Remove the joint plate.
A * When installing, be careful of the direction of the belt holding
sheet.
C. Paper feed/paper transport drive section

No. Unit No. Parts
(1) Main drive unit a Resist roller front drive motor
b Resist roller clutch
(2) Others a Main motor
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main drive unit.
(1)-b
(2)-a
(1)-a
(1)

a. Resist roller front drive motor 7) Remove the bearing, the E-ring, and the set screw, and
1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “B-(1) Resist roller unit” in remove the resist roller clutch.
4) Remove the main drive unit. (See “(1) Main drive unit”)
5) Remove the resist roller front drive motor.
(2) Others
a. Main motor
b. Resist roller clutch

1) Remove the resist roller unit. (See “B-(1) Resist roller unit” in
4) Remove the main drive unit. (See “(1) Main drive unit”)
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main drive frame.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main motor.
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the resist roller clutch

unit.
* When installing, be sure to ensure that the projection of the

plate is engaged in the clutch rotation stopper.

D. Manual paper feed drive section 3) Remove the plastic E-ring, the belt holding sheet, the belt, and
the pulley.
No. Unit
(1) Manual paper feed drive unit
* When installing, be careful of the direction of the belt holding

(1) sheet.
4) Remove the harness from the clamp, and remove the manual
paper feed unit.
(1) Manual paper feed drive unit

E. 1/2 paper feed drive section

No. Unit No. Parts
(1) 1/2 paper feed a Vertical paper transport motor
drive unit b Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport
clutch 2
c Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
d Horizontal paper transport clutch
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f Paper pickup solenoid
(Paper feed tray 1)
(2) Others a Remove the paper tray lift-up motor
2) Disconnect the connector, the harness clamp, and the earth
(paper feed tray 1)
wire. Remove the high voltage PWB unit.
b Paper tray lift-up motor
(Paper feed tray 2)
c Paper pickup solenoid
(Paper feed tray 2)
(1)-f
(1)-c
(1)-d
(1)-b
(1)-e
(2)-a
(2)-c (1)-a
(2)-b
(1)

(1) 1/2 paper feed drive unit 7) Remove the harness, and remove the drive joint plate.
1) Remove the main motor. (See “C-(2)-a. Main motor”)
2) Remove the high voltage PWB unit.
(See “D-(1) Manual paper feed drive unit”)
* When installing, temporarily fix the 1/2 paper feed drive unit
to the main unit, and install the drive joint plate. Then tighten
2 the screw of the drive unit securely.
1 8) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp.
Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp.

Remove the DV fan unit.
* If the left door is completely pulled out, the unit may drop off.
Be careful to avoid it.
a. Vertical paper transport motor
5) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness holder. 1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit.
(See “(1) 1/2 paper feed drive unit”)
2) Loosen the screw to release the tension, and remove the belt.
the pulley. Remove the joint plate.
3) Remove the parts.
Belt length 297
Belt length 399 Belt length 300
* When installing, be careful of the belt length and the belt

holding sheet direction. * Attach the spring to the longer shaft.

4) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive frame lower. Remove the 4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed tray 3/4 paper
harness clamp. transport clutch 2.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the vertical paper

transport motor. c. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit.
2) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive frame lower.
(See “a. Vertical paper transport motor”)
remove the paper feed clutch (paper feed tray 1) unit.
b. Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2

remove the paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 2.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch (paper
feed tray 1).

d. Horizontal paper transport clutch 4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch (paper
1) Remove the 1/2 paper feed drive unit. feed tray 2).
remove the horizontal paper transport clutch.
f. Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 2)

3) Remove the paper pickup solenoid unit.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the horizontal paper transport

clutch.
e. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)

remove the paper feed clutch (paper feed tray 2).
* When installing, check that the solenoid plunger is inserted

in the arm.

(2) Others b. Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
a. Remove the paper tray lift-up motor (paper feed tray 1) 1) Remove the high voltage PWB unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lift-up motor unit.
3) Release the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling. Remove the
liftup spring from the lift-up motor.
the pulley.
c. Paper pickup solenoid (Paper feed tray 2)

1) Remove the high voltage PWB unit.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper pickup sole-
noid unit.
sheet.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lift-up motor unit.
4) Release the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling. Remove the
liftup spring from the paper tray lift-up motor.
* When installing, check that the solenoid plunger is inserted

in the arm.

F. 3/4 paper feed drive section 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp.
Remove the 3/4 paper feed drive unit.
No. Unit No. Parts * Remove the screw which was indicated with the arrow mark.
(1) 3/4 paper feed a Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3)
drive unit b Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4)
c Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport
clutch 1
(2) Others a Paper tray lift-up motor
(Paper feed tray 3)
b Paper tray lift-up motor
(Paper feed tray 4)
(1)-a
(1)-c
(2)-a
(1)-b
(2)-b
a. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3)

(1) 1) Remove the 3/4 paper feed drive unit.
2) Remove the E-ring and remove the parts.
(1) 3/4 paper feed drive unit

1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor.
(See “(2)-a. Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 3)”)
2) Remove the parts and remove the drive joint plate.
3) Remove the 3/4 drive frame lower.

sheet.
* When installing, temporarily fix the 1/2 paper feed drive unit
to the main unit, and install the drive joint plate. Then tighten
the screw of the drive unit securely.
3) Remove the external outfit mounting plate.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch 4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
unit.
c. Paper feed tray 3/4 paper transport clutch 1

2) Remove the parts, and remove the belt.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.

(See “a. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3)”)
b. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) 4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed tray 3/4
1) Remove the 3/4 paper feed drive unit. paper transport clutch 1 unit.
(See “a. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3)”)
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch
unit.

5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed tray 3/4 and 3) Release the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling. Remove the
the paper transport clutch 1. lift-up spring from the lift-up motor.
(2) Others
a. Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 3)
b. Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 4)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper tray lift-up

motor (paper feed tray 3) (A) and the paper tray lift-up motor
(Paper feed tray 4) (B).

2. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

Drive section 1 Gears (grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0307FCZZ
2 Gears (grease) ✕ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ UKOG-0299FCZZ
6 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3
2
3
2
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 5
2
1 1
1
2
2

MX-M700N
[Q] PWB SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Disassembly and assembly 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PCU PWB.
A. Control PWB section

No. Parts
(1) PCU FLASH PWB
(2) PCU PWB
(3) Driver PWB
(4) Mother PWB
(5) Controller cooling fan motor
(6) HDD cooling fan motor
(7) HDD
(8) Soft NIC PWB
(9) MFP FLASH ROM PWB
(10) MFP controller PWB
(3) Driver PWB
(6)
(7)
(4)
(10) (1)
(8) (3)
(5)
(9)
(2)
(1) PCU FLASH PWB

1) Remove the ROM cover. Release the lock and remove the
PCU Flash PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness clamp and

the SCAN harness cover.
(2) PCU PWB

3) Remove the connector and the harness clamp. Remove the

driver PWB unit.
MX-M700N PWB SECTION Q – 1

4) Remove the driver PWB. (5) Controller cooling fan motor
1) Remove the driver PWB unit. (See “(3) Driver PWB”)
Remove the controller cooling fan motor unit.
(4) Mother PWB 3) Remove the controller cooling fan motor.

1) Remove the driver PWB unit. (See “(3) Driver PWB”)
2) Remove the harness, and remove the mother PWB stay.
Flow
direction
Mark
* When assembling, fit the mark with the fan flow direction.
(6) HDD cooling fan motor

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the mother PWB unit. 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet upper.
(See “(3) Driver PWB”)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness clamp.
4) Remove the mother PWB.

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the HDD cooling fan
motor.
Flow
direction
Mark
* When assembling, fit the mark with the fan rotating direction.

(7) HDD 3) Remove the soft NIC PWB unit.
1) Remove the cooling fan motor unit.
(See “(5) Controller cooling fan motor”)
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the HDD unit.
4) Remove the soft NIC PWB angle from the soft NIC PWB.
3) Remove the HDD slide plate, and remove the HDD mounting
plate from the HDD.
(9) MFP FLASH ROM PWB

1) Pull out the NIC control unit. (See “(8) Soft NIC PWB”)
(8) Soft NIC PWB 2) Release the lock, and remove the MFP Flash PWB.
1) Remove the right cabinet upper.
(10) MFP controller PWB

1) Remove the manual feed cover F, the right cabinet middle,
and the right cabinet upper. (See “(8) Soft NIC PWB”)
2) Pull out the NIC control unit.
2) Pull out the NIC control unit, and remove the flat cable.
Release the lock, and remove the NIC control unit.

3) Remove the soft NIC PWB unit. B. Power section
No. Parts
(1) AC power PWB
(2) DC main power PWB
(3) Power cooling fan motor 1
(4) Power cooling fan motor 2
(5) Dehumidifier heater relay PWB
(6) DC sub power PWB
(7) High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)
(6)
4) Remove the PWB protection plate. Remove the MFP controller

PWB.
(7) (2)
(1)
(3)
(5) (4)
(1) AC power PWB

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB.

(2) DC main power PWB 3) Remove the AC/DC power unit.
(Method 1)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See “(1) AC power PWB”)
Remove the AC power PWB unit.
4) Remove the AC power PWB unit.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the DC main power

PWB.
5) Remove the DC power PWB unit.
(Method 2)
2) Remove the connecter.

(3) Power cooling fan motor 1 (6) DC sub power PWB
(4) Power cooling fan motor 2 1) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB
unit. (See “(2) DC main power PWB”)
Remove the power cooling fan motors 1/2.
REVERSE
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the supporter. Remove

the DC sub power PWB.
Mark
Mark Fan blowing direction
(label on the back surface)
(7) High voltage PWB (MC/DV/TC)
(5) Dehumidifier heater relay PWB 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See “(1) AC power PWB”)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See “(1) AC power PWB”) 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the earth terminal.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the supporter. Remove Remove the high voltage PWB.
the dehumidifier heater relay PWB.

MX-M700N
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Disassembly and assembly 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the DV fan.
A. Fan motors
No. Parts
(1) Developing section cooling fan motor
(2) Paper cooling fan motor
(3) Fusing cooling fan motor 2
(4) Process exhaust fan motor 5
(9) Process cooling fan 1
(10) Process cooling fan 2 Fan blowing direction
(11) Process cooling fan 3
(2) Paper cooling fan motor

(3)
(6)
(7) (2)
(8) (4)
(9)
(10) (5)
(11)
(1)
(1) Developing section cooling fan motor

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper cooling fan

motor.

Remove the DV fan unit.
* When installing, arrange so that the arrow mark on the side

of the duct faces in the same direction with the arrow mark
on the side of the fan.
MX-M700N FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 1

(3) Fusing cooling fan motor 2 6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit rear duct
1) Remove the rear cabinet. unit.
(See “(1) Developing cooling fan motor”)
2) Remove the tray.
7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing cooling fan

3) Remove the left cover cabinet. motor.
REVERSE

4) Open the left door. * Be careful of the direction of the fan.
Remove the sub duct unit.
5) Remove the left cabinet upper.

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the process exhaust
fan motor 5.

* Be careful of the direction of the fan.

(5) Process exhaust fan motor 4 5) Remove the right cabinet upper.
2) Remove the sub duct unit.
(See “(4) Process exhaust fan motor 5”)
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the process exhaust fan
motor 4.
Marks
REVERSE
6) Remove the front cabinet band, and remove the front cabinet.
(6) Process exhaust fan motor 1 7) Remove the toner bottle. (See “(1) Toner bottle unit” in the
“Toner hopper and toner bottle section”)
8) Remove the toner hopper unit. (See “(2) Toner hopper unit” in
(8) Process exhaust fan motor 3 the “Toner hopper and toner bottle section”)
1) Remove the DSPF unit. 9) Remove the developing unit.
(See “A-(1) DSPF unit” in the “DSPF section”) (See “(1) Developing unit” in the “Developer tank section”)
2) Remove the scanner unit. 10) Remove the process unit.
(See “(1) Scanner unit” in the “Scanner section”) (See “A-(1) Process unit” in the “OPC drum section”)
3) Pull out the multi paper feed tray unit, and remove the manual 11) Raise the process DV cover diagonally, and remove the front
paper feed cover F. right cover.
12) Remove the front cabinet upper.

4) Remove the right cabinet middle.

13) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet unit. 17) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process cooling fan
motors 1 (A), 2 (B), and 3 (C).
Marks REVERSE
Mark
14) Remove the paper exit port cabinet, and remove the paper exit
tray cabinet C.
A
B
C
(9) Process cooling fan motor 1
(LSU, process section)
(LSU, process section)
15) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness clamp. (LSU, process section)
Remove the main duct unit. 1) Pull out the multi paper feed tray, and remove the manual
paper feed cover F.
2) Pushing the lower part, remove the right cabinet center.
16) Remove the fan unit.

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process cooling fan B. Filters
unit.
No. Parts
(1) Ozone filter
(2) DV ozone filter
(3) Toner filter
(1)
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the process cooling fan

motors 1 (A), 2 (B), and 3 (C).
(2)
(3)
RE
VE
RS
E
Marks
Mark
(1) Ozone filter

C
2) Release the pawl, and remove the ozone filter.

(2) DV ozone filter
(3) Toner filter
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (See “(1) Ozone filter”)
2) Remove the DV filter box.
3) Remove the DV ozone filer (A) and the toner filter (B).
2. Maintenance
55ppm (PM: 250K)
When
Block/Item No.
calling

1
2

MX-M700N
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION 5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Disassembly and assembly 7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the power switch.
A. Sensors and switches

No. Parts
(1) Power switch
(2) Main power switch
(3) Front door open/close detector
(4) Left door open/close detector
(5) Dry heater switch
(6) Machine temperature sensor
(2)
(6) * When installing, be careful of the connector connecting posi-
(3) tion and the installing direction. Also be careful not to break
(1) the SW pawl.
(4)
[Connector connecting position]
(5)
Connector color Line color
1 4 6 1 Yellow Black
2 White Black
(1) Power switch 3 Blue Black
4 White Red
(2) Main power switch 5
2 7 5 White Brown
(3) Front door open/close detector 6 Yellow White
1) Remove the front cabinet band, and remove the front cabinet. 7 White White
8 Blue White
3 8
Power switch
(Connector surface)
8) Disconnect the connector, and remove the main power switch

unit.
2) Remove the toner bottle. (See “(1) Toner bottle unit” in “[Toner
hopper and toner bottle section]”)
3) Remove the toner hopper unit. (See “(2) Toner hopper unit” in
“[Toner hopper and toner bottle section]
4) Remove the developing unit. (See “(1) Developing unit” in the
“[Developer tank section]”)
* When installing, be careful of the connector connecting posi-
5) Remove the process unit. (See “A-(1) Process unit” in the tion and the installing direction. Also be careful not to break
“[OPC drum section]”) the SW pawl.
6) Raise the process DV cover diagonally, and remove the front
right cover. [Connector connecting position]
Connector color Line color
1 White Black
2 Black Black
3 White White
4 Black White
1 3
2 4
Main power switch

(Connector surface)
MX-M700N SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S – 1

9) Remove the main power switch. 2) Remove the left front cabinet.
10) Remove the counter mounting plate.

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the left door open/close
detector unit. Remove the left door open/close detector.
11) Disconnect the connector and remove the front door open/
close switch unit.
(5) Dry heater switch
(4) Left door open/close detector

1) Open the left door.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the dry heater switch.

(6) Room temperature sensor
1) Pull out the multi paper feed tray, and remove the manual
paper feed cover F.
2) Pushing the lower part, remove the right cabinet center.
3) Disconnect the connector, release the pawl, and remove the

machine temperature sensor.

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about 40°C higherCORPORATION
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored in a retrieval
during soldering work,system,
clean andorfile
transmitted
the tip with in
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2007 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000,
Windows® XP, Windows® 2000 Server, Windows® Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer® are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2007 February Printed in Japan

MXM700 - 550n MS PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MXM700 - 550n MS PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 [H] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . H -1

[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 [ i] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i -1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 [K] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . K -1

[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 [L] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . L -1

[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1 [M] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . M-1

[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 [N] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . N -1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[N] FUSING SECTION

2. Warning for servicing

MX-M700N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

8) Unstable or uneven surfaces

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of too much dust

MX-M700N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

(2) Strengthened Frame Structure

G. Improved Performance Scan original from

I. Large Capacity Finisher

* Users can use the function simply by connecting the engines to

MX-M700N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

Way-in : Network Security

Copy data Print data

Scan data Fax data

Way-out : HDD Data Clear + Encryption

(1) Data Security coexisting with Document Filing

Document Filing/Quick File Document Filing/Quick File

Recall (Job settings) PIN printing

Security is assured by encrypting the data to be stored!

MX-M700N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

G3 Fax <Document Filing initial screen>

<List of data stored in Main folder>

MX-M550N/U Internet Fax

PC-Fax is like printing

MX-M700N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 3

Saddle stitch finisher

Network Network SHARPDESK

Data security kit

MX-M700N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 4

Option Machine model

Telephone Line DSPF Unit (CIS) Operating Section

Image Scanner (reading) Section (CCD)

MFP Control PWB Scanner Control PWB

Transfer Section Developer Section

Paper Exit and switch ADU Section Manual Paper

Paper Transport Section

AC Power Unit Paper Feed Tray 4

MX-M700N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 5

[2] SPECIFICATIONS 5GTXKEG/CPWCN

Type Console Void area/Image Lead edge: 40mm or less

(2) Engine speed (ppm) (9) Power source

Paper size 55ppm 62ppm 70ppm 100V series 200V series

A3 289 ✕ 412mm 11 ✕ 17 271 ✕ 424mm

Type 4-stage paper feed tray

(2) Paper feed tray of the main unit

Allowable Paper Tray lift time

Allowable Paper Tray lift time

Paper size Paper Paper size Paper capacity Paper

Paper size Paper Paper

(4) Duplex (5) Paper exit size / type

(1) Type (8) Density, copy image quality processing

Setting item Outline